700/70 Series PLC Interface Manual

MELDAS is registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered
trademarks of the respective company.
Introduction
This manual describes the various signal interfaces and functions required when creating
MITSUBISHI CNC 700/70 Series sequence programs (built-in PLC).
Read this manual thoroughly before programming.
Thoroughly study the "Safety Precautions" on the following page to ensure safe use of this
NC unit.
Details described in this manual
CAUTION
For items described in "Restrictions" or "Usable State", the instruction manual
issued by the machine maker takes precedence over this manual.
Items not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible".
This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added. Refer
to the specifications issued by the machine maker before starting use.
Some screens and functions may differ or may not be usable depending on the NC
version.
Precautions for Safety
Always read the specifications issued by the machine maker, this manual, related manuals
and attached documents before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or
inspection to ensure correct use. Understand this numerical controller, safety items and
cautions before using the unit.
This manual ranks the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
When there is a great risk that the user could be subject to

DANGER fatalities or serious injuries if handling is mistaken.
When the user could be subject to fatalities or serious injuries if

WARNING handling is mistaken.
When the user could be subject to injuries or when physical

CAUTION damage could occur if handling is mistaken.
Note that even items ranked as " CAUTION" may lead to major results depending on the
situation. In any case, important information that must always be observed is described.
DANGER
There are no "Danger" items in this manual.
WARNING
1. Items related to prevention of electric shocks
Do not operate the switches with wet hands, as this may lead to electric shocks.
Do not damage, apply excessive stress, place heavy things on or sandwich the
cables, as this may lead to electric shocks.
CAUTION
1. Items related to product and manual
For the items described in the "Restrictions" and "Usable State", the instruction
manual issued by the machine maker takes precedence over this instruction
manual.
Items not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible".
This manual has been written on the assumption that all options are provided.
Check the specifications issued by the machine maker before starting use.
Some screens and functions may differ or may not be usable depending on the
NC system version.
2. Items related to connection
When using an inductive load such as relays, always contact a diode in parallel
to the load as a noise measure.
When using a capacitive load such as a lamp, always connect a protective
resistor serially to the load to suppress rush currents.
3. Items related to design
Always turn the spindle phase synchronization completion signal ON before
chucking both ends of the workpiece to the basic spindle and synchronous
spindle. If the spindle phase synchronization signal is turned ON when both ends
of the workpiece are chucked to the basic spindle and synchronous spindle, the
chuck or workpiece could be damaged by the torsion that occurs during phase
alignment.
If the temperature rise detection function is invalidated with the parameters, the
control could be disabled when the temperature is excessive. This could result in
machine damage or personal injuries due to runaway axis, and could damage
the device. Enable the detection function for normal use.
CONTENTS
1. OUTLINE ..........................................................................................................................................1
2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................2
2.1 Relation of RIO Unit and Devices .............................................................................................3
2.1.1 DIO Specification Setting Switch........................................................................................4
2.1.2 Rotary Switch for Channel No. Setting...............................................................................4
2.1.3 Relation of Connector Pins and Device .............................................................................6
2.2 Outline of Digital Signal Input Circuit.........................................................................................8
2.3 Outline of Digital Signal Output Circuit....................................................................................10
2.4 Outline of Analog Signal Input Circuit .....................................................................................11
2.5 Outline of Analog Signal Output Circuit...................................................................................11
2.6 Outline of I/O Assignment with PROFIBUS-DP ......................................................................12
2.7 Fixed Signals...........................................................................................................................13
2.7.1 Ignoring Fixed Signals......................................................................................................13
2.7.2 Changing the Addresses of Fixed Signals .......................................................................14
2.8 Flow of Signals........................................................................................................................15
2.9 List of Devices Used ...............................................................................................................16
2.10 File Register General Map ....................................................................................................17
3. INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS WITH MACHINE.................................................................................19
3.1 Machine Input Signals.............................................................................................................21
3.1.1 Input Signals from Machine..............................................................................................21
3.1.2 Using HR378 for Base I/O Unit (For specific manufacturer) ............................................25
3.1.3 PLC Switch/Sensor ..........................................................................................................26
3.2 Machine Output Signals ..........................................................................................................28
3.2.1 Output Signals to Machine ...............................................................................................28
3.2.2 Using HR378 for Base I/O Unit (For specific manufacturer) ............................................32
3.2.3 PLC Switch.......................................................................................................................33
4. INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS TABLE WITH CONTROLLER............................................................35
4.1 PLC Input Signals (Bit type: X***) ...........................................................................................37
4.2 PLC Input Signals (Data type: R***)........................................................................................59
4.3 PLC Output Signals (Bit type: Y***).........................................................................................81
4.4 PLC Output Signals (Data type: R***) ...................................................................................105
4.5 Special Relay ........................................................................................................................122
4.6 Classified for Each Application..............................................................................................124
5. OTHER DEVICES.........................................................................................................................132
6. EXPLANATION OF INTERFACE SIGNALS................................................................................150
6.1 PLC Input Signals (Bit Type: X***) ........................................................................................151
6.2 PLC Input Signals (Data Type: R***).....................................................................................244
6.3 PLC Output Signals (Bit Type: Y***) .....................................................................................291
6.4 PLC Output Signals (Data Type: R***)..................................................................................442
6.5 Explanation of Special Relays (SM**) ...................................................................................506
6.6 Explanations for Each Application.........................................................................................508
6.6.1 IO Link............................................................................................................................508
6.6.2 MELSEC Bus Connection ..............................................................................................511
6.6.3 MR-J2-CT Link ...............................................................................................................512
6.6.4 Tool Life Management Interface (M system)..................................................................516
6.6.5 Tool Life Management Interface (L system)...................................................................525
6.6.6 PLC Constants ...............................................................................................................529
6.6.7 External Search..............................................................................................................530
6.6.8 PLC Window ..................................................................................................................535
6.6.9 Pallet Program Registration ...........................................................................................543
6.6.10 Chopping......................................................................................................................551
6.6.11 Circular Feed in Manual Mode .....................................................................................569
6.6.12 Manual Speed Command ............................................................................................578
6.6.13 Arbitrary Reverse Run..................................................................................................584
6.6.14 PLC Axis Indexing........................................................................................................600
6.6.14.1 Outline .................................................................................................................600
6.6.14.2 PLC Axis Indexing Interface................................................................................602
6.6.14.3 Changing to NC/Auxiliary axis.............................................................................626
7. SPINDLE CONTROL....................................................................................................................629
7.1 Related Parameters ..............................................................................................................629
7.2 Connection Method ...............................................................................................................630
7.3 Flow of Spindle (S) Data .......................................................................................................631
8. HANDLING OF M, S, T, B FUNCTIONS ......................................................................................632
8.1 Command Format .................................................................................................................632
8.2 Miscellaneous Function Finish ..............................................................................................633
8.2.1 Operation Sequence 1 (Using FIN1 with M Command) .................................................634
8.2.2 Operation Sequence 2 (Using FIN2 with M Command) .................................................635
8.2.3 When M Commands Continue (Using FIN2 with M Command).....................................636
8.3 M Code Independent Output.................................................................................................637
8.3.1 Operation Sequence ......................................................................................................637
8.4 Axis Movement and M Commands .......................................................................................639
8.5 Precautions ...........................................................................................................................640
Appendix 1. List of PLC Window Data ..........................................................................................641
1.1 Section No. List .....................................................................................................................641
1.2 Sub-section No. List ..............................................................................................................644
INDEX ............................................................................................................................................... X-1
1. OUTLINE
1. OUTLINE
This manual is prepared to assist you to understand the various control signals necessary for creating the
sequence program.
The manual is composed as shown below. Refer to related sections as necessary to gain the maximum
benefit from the manual.
Handling of M,
S, T and B
functions
Spindle
control
Explanation of
interface
signals
Explanation of
Device
devices
Input : X, R
Output : Y, R
Table for input/
Special relay
output signals
Others
with controller
Table for input/
output signals
with machine Blank tables
for user
System
configuration
PLC Interface
Manual
(cover)
<Caution>
Please note that the specifications referred to in the text represents the maximum
specifications which include also those under development.
1
2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Operation panel
I/O unit
with DIO Manual pulse
generator
Expansion DIO card

Input:32 points
(32 points selected from X200 to X2BF)
RIO3
Output:32 points Remote I/O unit
(32 points selected from Y200 to Y2BF)
The device No. is determined depending Up to 6 channels can be
on the rotary switch setting. used with a combination of (Max.5 units)
an operation panel I/O unit
Connectors on the operation panel I/O unit and a remote I/O 3ch.
Input:32 points
DX1**
(32 points selected from X200 to X2BF)
Max.input:160 points
Output:32 points
(5 channels selected from X200 to X2BF)
(32 points selected from Y200 to Y2BF)
Max.output:160 points
The device No. is determined depending on
(5 channels selected from Y200 to Y2BF)
the rotary switch setting. When an expansion DIO card is mounted,
128 points (4 channels) is the max.
NC control unit
Remote I/O unit
Manual pulse RIO1

(Max.8 units)
generator
DX1**
Max.input:256 points (X000 to X0FF)
Max.output:256 points (Y000 to Y0FF)
Sensor Remote I/O unit
RIO2
(Max.8 units)
Max.8 channels
(X178 to X17F) DX1**
Max.input:256 points (X100 to X1FF)
Max.output:256 points (Y100 to Y1FF)
2
2.1 Relation of RIO Unit and Devices
Eight types of remote I/O units (hereafter RIO unit) are available as shown below. The specifications of
DX10*, DX11*, DX12* and DX14* (* is "0" or "1") differ. Each unit has a rotary switch for setting the unit
No., and for establishing a relation with the device No. (X, Y).
Front Front Outline drawing
Left input Right input

(3) Left input (3)
connector connector
(6)
connector
DIO specifi-
(1) cation switch (1) DIO specifi-
cation switch
(2) Rotary switch (2) Rotary switch Rotary switch (5)
(4) Left output (4)

Left output
Right output
connector connector (7)
connector
DX10* DX11* /DX12*
Front Bottom
(8) Analog input/

output connector
(3)
(12) RIO1
(From controller)
(1)
(11) RIO2
(5) (Terminating resister or to next RIO unit)
(2)
(10) DCIN
(4) (DC24V input)
DX14*
No. of remote I/O unit input/output points
Unit model Compatible machine control signal Left Right Total
DX10* Digital input signal (DI) (Photocoupler insulation) 32 points — 32 points
(FCUA-DX10*) Digital output signal(DO) (Non-insulated) 32 points 32 points
DX11* Digital input signal (DI) (Photocoupler insulation) 32 points 32 points 64 points
(FCUA-DX11*) Digital output signal(DO) (Non-insulated) 32 points 16 points 48 points
DX12* Digital input signal (DI) (Photocoupler insulation) 32 points 32 points 64 points
(FCUA-DX12*) Digital output signal(DO) (Non-insulated) 32 points 16 points 48 points
Analog output (AO) — 1 point 1 point
DX14* Digital input signal (DI) (Photocoupler insulation) 32 points — 32 points
(FCUA-DX14*) Digital output signal(DO) (Non-insulated) 32 points — 32 points
Analog input (AI) — 4 points 4 points
Analog output (AO) — 1 point 1 point
(Note) The * mark in the table is 0 when the output is a sink type, and is 1 when the output is a source
type. The input is changeable.
Items (1) to (7) are described in the following pages.
3
2.1.1 DIO Specification Setting Switch
This switch is not used currently, and must always be set to OFF.
DIO specification setting switch
OFF
(1)
Front view View from A direction
A * Use at OFF.
2.1.2 Rotary Switch for Channel No. Setting
Rotary switch for channel No. setting (2) (5)
Set between 0 and 7.
The device used by the PLC is determined by the setting of the rotary switch for channel No. setting.
Rotary switch Device No. read in Output device No. Analog output (AO)
No. RIO channel 1 RIO channel 1 RIO channel 1
0 X00 to X1F Y00 to Y1F(Y0F) The rotary switches
1 X20 to X3F Y20 to Y3F(Y2F) correspond to the
2 X40 to X5F Y40 to Y5F(Y4F) file registers R200
to R207 in order of
3 X60 to X7F Y60 to Y7F(Y6F)
small numbers.
4 X80 to X9F Y80 to Y9F(Y8F)
5 XA0 to XBF YA0 to YBF(YAF)
6 XC0 to XDF YC0 to YDF(YCF)
7 XE0 to XFF YE0 to YFF(YEF)
0 X100 to X11F Y100 to Y11F(Y10F) Not possible
1 X120 to X13F Y120 to Y13F(Y12F) (Both input and
2 X140 to X15F Y140 to Y15F(Y14F) output are not
3 X160 to X17F Y160 to Y17F(Y16F) possible)
4 X180 to X19F Y180 to Y19F(Y18F)
5 X1A0 to X1BF Y1A0 to Y1BF(Y1AF)
6 X1C0 to X1DF Y1C0 to Y1DF(Y1CF)
7 X1E0 to X1FF Y1E0 to Y1FF(Y1EF)
4
0 X200 to X21F Y200 to Y21F(Y20F) Not possible
1 X220 to X23F Y220 to Y23F(Y22F) (Both input and
2 X240 to X25F Y240 to Y25F(Y24F) output are not
3 X260 to X27F Y260 to Y27F(Y26F) possible)
4 X280 to X29F Y270 to Y29F(Y28F)
5 X2A0 to X2BF Y2A0 to Y2BF(Y2AF)
6 — —
7 — —
The values shown in parentheses are the device range of the card mounted to the right side of the unit.
Only channels available for RIO channel 3 are 0 to 5.
No. of points occupied by each unit
No. of Unit name

occupied points
1 DX100/DX101, Operation panel I/O unit DX670/DX671
2 DX110/DX111, DX120/DX121, DX140/DX141, Operation panel I/O unit
DX770/DX771
A max. of 8 units can be connected. DX67* operation panel I/O unit is counted as 1 and DX77* operation
panel I/O unit is counted as 2 occupied points. DX11*/DX12*/DX14* remote I/O units are counted as 2,
and DX100/DX101 remote I/O units are counted as 1 occupied point.
(Example 1) An operation panel I/O unit (DX771 x1) and remote I/O units (DX120 x3).
(Example 2) An operation panel I/O unit (DX771 x1) and remote I/O units (DX110 x1, DX100 x4).
5
2.1.3 Relation of Connector Pins and Device
(1) Input (DI) signal
Set rotary switch to 0 Set rotary switch to 1

(3) (6) X00
B A B A
20 X00 X10 20 X20 X30
19 X01 X11 19 X21 X31
18 X02 X12 18 X22 X32
17 X03 X13 17 X23 X33
Connector for contact input (DI)
16 X04 X14 16 X24 X34
B20 pin A20 pin 15 X05 X15 15 X25 X35
14 X06 X16 14 X26 X36
13 X07 X17 13 X27 X37
(3) 12
12 X08 X18 X28 X38
(6) 11 X09 X19 11 X29 X39
10 X0A X1A 10 X2A X3A
9 X0B X1B 9 X2B X3B
8 X0C X1C 8 X2C X3C
7 X0D X1D 7 X2D X3D
6 X0E X1E 6 X2E X3E X3F
B01 pin A01 pin 5 X0F X1F 5 X2F X3F

4 4
3 COM COM 3 COM COM
2 +24V 0V 2 +24V 0V
1 +24V 0V 1 +24V 0V
Stabilized
power supply
Signal
(10) 1 1 DC+24V IN +24V
2 0V 0V
2
3 FG FG
3
Connection for contact common=GND (sink type)
Connection for contact common=DC+24V (source type)
(Note 1) The No. of points (devices) will differ according to the RIO unit type.
(Note 2) The devices shown here show an example for when the rotary switch for channel No. setting on
the RIO unit is set to "0" and set to "1".
Refer to section "2.1.2 Rotary Switch for Channel No. Setting" for details on the relation of the
rotary switch and device No.
6
(2) Output (DO) signal
Set rotary switch to 0 Set rotary switch to 1

(4) B A (7) B A Y00
20 Y00 Y10 20 Y20 L
19 Y01 Y11 19 Y21
18 Y02 Y12 18 Y22
17 Y03 Y13 17 Y23
16 Y04 Y14 16 Y24
15 Y05 Y15 15 Y25
Connector for contact output (DO)
14 Y06 Y16 14 Y26
13 Y07 Y17 13 Y27
B20 pin A20 pin 12 Y08 Y18 12 Y28
11 Y09 Y19 11 Y29
10 Y0A Y1A 10 Y2A
(4) 9 Y0B Y1B 9 Y2B
(7) 8 Y0C Y1C 8 Y2C
7 Y0D Y1D 7 Y2D Y2F
6 Y0E Y1E 6 Y2E L
5 Y0F Y1F 5 Y2F
4 4 AO AO*
3 3
2 +24V 0V 2 +24V 0V
B01 pin A01 pin 1 +24V 0V 1 +24V 0V Stabilized
Analog output
power supply
(For DX120/1 only)
Signal
(10) 1 1 DC+24V IN +24V
2 2 0V 0V
3 3 FG FG
Connection for contact common=GND (sink type)
Connection for contact common=DC+24V (source type)
(Note 1) The No. of points (devices) will differ according to the RIO unit type.
(Note 2) The devices shown here show an example for when the rotary switch for channel No. setting on
the RIO unit is set to "0" and set to "1".
Refer to section "2.1.2 Rotary switch for setting No. of channels" for details on the relation of
the rotary switch and device No.
(Note 3) The A4 and B4 pin analog output (AO, AO*) in the output connector (7) is found only on the
RIO unit DX120/DX121.
Refer to section "2.4 Outline of Analog Signal Input Circuit " for details on DX140/DX141
connector.
7
2.2 Outline of Digital Signal Input Circuit
There is a sink type digital signal input circuit and source type digital signal input circuit. Either method
can be selected with each unit's card unit.
Input circuit (Machine side) (3)/(6)
2.2k
0V
2.2k
0V
2.2k
0V
2.2k
0V
2.2k
0V Control
circuit
24VDC(+)
A3,B3 COM
Sink type
(Machine side) (3)/(6)
24VDC(+) 2.2k
24VDC(+) 2.2k
24VDC(+) 2.2k
24VDC(+) 2.2k
24VDC(+) 2.2k
Control
circuit
A3,B3 COM
0V
Source type
8
Input conditions
The input signal must be used within the conditions shown below.
Sink type <Contact common grounding (RG)>
Input voltage when external contact is ON 6V or less
Input current when external contact is ON 9mA or more
Input voltage when external contact is OFF 20V or more, 25.2V or less
Input current when external contact is OFF 2mA or less
Tolerable chattering time 3ms or less (Refer to T1 in drawing below)
Input signal hold time 40ms or more (Refer to T2 in drawing below)
.
Input circuit operation delay time 3ms ≤ T3 =. T4 ≤ 20ms
Machine side contact capacity +30V or more, 16mA or more
T2
T1 T1
T3 T4
Constantly closed contact
Source type <Contact common +24V>

Input voltage when external contact is ON 18V or more, 25.2V or less
Input current when external contact is ON 9mA or more
Input voltage when external contact is OFF 4V or less
Input current when external contact is OFF 2mA or less
Tolerable chattering time 3ms or less (Refer to T1 in drawing below)
Input signal hold time 40ms or more (Refer to T2 in drawing below)
.
Input circuit operation delay time 3ms ≤ T3 =. T4 ≤ 20ms
Machine side contact capacity +30V or more, 16mA or more
T2
T1 T1
T3 T4
Constantly open contact
(Note) Input signal hold time: "40ms or more" is a standard value. Input signals cannot be recognized
unless input signals are held for the ladder processing cycle period or more.
9
2.3 Outline of Digital Signal Output Circuit
2.3 Outline of Digital Signal Output Circuit
There is a sink type (DX1*0) digital signal output circuit and source type (DX1*1) digital signal output
circuit. Use this circuit within the range shown below.
Output circuit
(Machine side) (4)/(7)
24VDC(+)
RA
Control
R circuit
PL
Sink type (DX1*0)
(4)/(7)
(Machine side)
24VDC(+)
RA
Control
circuit
R
PL
Source type (DX1*0)

Output conditions
Insulation method Non-insulating

Rated load voltage +24VDC
Max. output current 60mA/1point
Output delay time 40µs
<Caution>
* When using a conductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode (withstand voltage 100V or
more, 100mA or more) parallel to that load.
* When using a capacity load such as a lamp, connect a protective resistance (R=150ohm) serially to
that load to limit the rush current. (Make sure that the current is lower than the tolerable current
including the momentary current.)
CAUTION
When using a conductive load such as relays, always contact a diode in parallel to the load as a noise
measure.
When using a capacity load such as a lamp, always connect a protective resistor serially to the load to
suppress rush currents.
10
2.4 Outline of Analog Signal Input Circuit
2.4 Outline of Analog Signal Input Circuit
The analog signal input circuit can be used only with the FCUA-DX140/DX141 unit.
Input circuit (8) FCUA-DX14*

Connector pin No.
150Ω
2
AI1
150Ω
AI2 12
Input 150Ω ADC
AI3 3
150Ω
AI4 13
R
R
220Ω DAC
Output A0 7
GND 1 0V(LG)
GND 11
GND 5
GND 15
0V(LG)
Input conditions
Input max. rate ± 15V
Resolution 10V/2000 (5mV)
Accuracy ± 25mV or less
AD input sampling time 7.1ms(AI1)/21.3ms(AI2 to 4)
2.5 Outline of Analog Signal Output Circuit
The analog signal output circuit can be used only with the FCUA-DX120/DX121/DX140/DX141 unit.
Output circuit
R
R 220Ω
DAC
A0
A0*
0V(LG)
Output conditions
Output voltage 0V to ±10V (±5%)

Resolution 12bit (±10V × n/4096) (Note)
Load conditions 10kohm load resistance (standard)
Output impedance 220ohm
0 11
(Note) n = (2 to 2 )
11
2.6 Outline of I/O Assignment with PROFIBUS-DP
2.6 Outline of I/O Assignment with PROFIBUS-DP
By installing PROFIBUS-DP unit (FCU7-HN571) on an arbitrary section of CNC expansion slot, salve
stations compatible with PROFIBUS-DP communication can be connected to input/output device. No
option parameter setting is needed.
Hilsher's Fieldbus communication control unit (COM module) is mounted on HN571, and NC operates as
the master station. Up to 128 units can be connected with master station and slave stations combined.
Inputs/outputs of the devices from NC's PLC are all handled as bit device data. Up to 512 points can be
input/output.
Maximum number of inputs/outputs for NC remote I/O unit is 768, whether or not HN571 is installed.
HN571 unit for

master station communication
(option)
CNC control unit Expantion Unit FCU7-EX89*
CNC UNIT
FCU7-MU001/MU011 Slot1 Slot2 Slot3 FieldBus OPT2 etc
RIO communication
RS-232C
Windows PC for parameter settings

+
Hilsher configurator
Terminator
Tap
Fieldbus
communication
Terminator
Master + slave: 128 units
Fieldbus connection outline
Machine input/output signal allocation

Input/output device allocation when HN571 is mounted is as shown below.
RIO communication only With PROFIBUS-DP communication
RIO1 RIO2 RIO3 RIO1 RIO2 RIO3 PROFIBUS-DP communication
X00 X100 X200 X00 X100 X200 X400
Input : : : : : : :
XFF X1FF X2FF XFF X1FF X2FF X5FF
Y00 Y100 Y200 Y00 Y100 Y200 Y400
Output : : : : : : :
YFF Y1FF Y2FF YFF Y1FF Y2FF Y5FF
(Note) OT/DOG arbitrary allocation cannot be made for the device compatible with PROFIBUS-DP
communication.
12
2.7 Fixed Signals
2.7 Fixed Signals
The connector pin Nos. in the input signals that are fixed are shown below.
Note that using the methods below can ignore fixed signals and change the allocations.
Signal name Device Signal name Device

Emergency stop EMG of main unit Stroke end -1 X20
Stroke end +1 X28 Stroke end -2 X21
Stroke end +2 X29 Stroke end -3 X22
Stroke end +3 X2A Stroke end -4 X23
Stroke end +4 X2B Stroke end -5 X64
Stroke end +5 X6C Stroke end -6 X65
Stroke end +6 X6D Stroke end -7 X66
Stroke end +7 X6E Stroke end -8 X67
Stroke end +8 X6F
Reference position return
X18
near-point detection 1
Reference position return X19
Reference position return X1A
Reference position return X1B
Reference position return X5C
Reference position return X5D
Reference position return X5E
Reference position return X5F
(Note) When using the multi-part system and the 1st part system has 2 axes and the 2nd part system
has 1 axis, the 1st axis in the 2nd part system will correspond to the 3rd axis above.
2.7.1 Ignoring Fixed Signals
The fixed signals can be used as other signals by ignoring them with file registers R248 and R272.
13
2.7 Fixed Signals
2.7.2 Changing the Addresses of Fixed Signals
The fixed devices can be allocated arbitrarily with the following parameters.
The parameters #2073 to #2075 are valid when 1 is set in #1226 aux10 bit 5.
When the parameters #2073 to #2075 are valid, do not set the same device number. If the same device
number exists, an emergency stop occurs. However, no device number check is performed for an axis to
which a signal (R248, R272) that ignores the fixed signal is input.
When the arbitrary allocation is valid, the fixed signals can be used as other signals.
# Items Details Setting range (unit)
1226 aux10 Arbitrary Specify whether to enable the arbitrary allocation 0/1
(bit5) allocation parameter for the origin dog and H/W OT.
of dog 0: Disable arbitrary allocation. (Fixed device)
signal 1: Enable arbitrary allocation. (Device specified by
the parameter)
2073 zrn_dog Origin Under the standard specifications, the origin dog signal 0000 to 02FF
dog is assigned to a fixed device. When it is desired to (HEX)
assign the origin dog signal to a position other than the
fixed device, specify the input device in this parameter.
• This parameter is valid when 1 is set in #1226 aux10
bit 5.
• When this parameter is valid, do not set the same
device number. If the same device number exists, an
emergency stop occurs. However, no device number
check is performed for an axis to which a signal that
ignores the near-point dog signal (R272) is input.
2074 H/W_OT+ H/W OT+ Under the standard specifications, the OT (+) signal is 0000 to 02FF
assigned to a fixed device. When it is desired to assign (HEX)
the OT (+) signal to a position other than the fixed
device, specify the input device in this parameter.
bit 5.
ignores the OT signal (R248) is input.
2075 H/W_OT- H/W OT- Under the standard specifications, the OT (-) signal is 0000 to 02FF
assigned to a fixed device. When it is desired to assign (HEX)
the OT (-) signal to a position other than the fixed
device, specify the input device in this parameter.
bit 5.
ignores the OT signal (R248) is input.
14
2.8 Flow of Signals
2.8 Flow of Signals
Controller PLC
Sequence program
Signal in
controller
PLC window
High-speed
program
(per 3.5ms)
Signal in
controller
Input/output signal with
Input Y**
controller and machine
(X, Y)
Main program
Output X**
(Scan time with
Transfer at head of program size)
main program
Machine/machine operation board
X**
Input/output signal
with machine
X** (X, Y)
Transfer at head of high-speed

processing program
(per 3.5ms)
Y** Internal relay,
latch relay, etc.
(M, F, L, · · ·)
Y**
15
2.9 List of Devices Used
2.9 List of Devices Used
The devices used by the PLC are shown below.

Device Device No. Unit Details Format
X* X0 to X1FFF (8192 points) 1 bit Input signal to PLC: Machine input, etc.
Y* Y0 to Y1FFF (8192 points) 1 bit Output signal from PLC: Machine output, etc.
M M0 to M10239 (10240 points) 1 bit Temporary memory 1
F F0 to F1023 (1024 points) 1 bit Temporary memory.
2
Alarm message interface
L L0 to L511 (512 points) 1 bit Latch relay (back up memory) 3
SM SM0 to SM127 (128 points) 1 bit Special relay
1 bit/16 bit Timer
T T0 to T703 (704 points) (The variable/fixed boundary is set with a 4,5
parameter.) (Note 3)
ST ST0 to ST63 (64 points) 1 bit/16 bit Integrated timer (100ms unit) 6,7
C C0 to C255 (256 points) 1 bit/16 bit Counter (The variable/fixed boundary is set
8,9
with a parameter.) (Note 3)
D D0 to D2047 (2048 points) 16 bit/32 bit Data register. Register for calculation 10
R* R0 to R13311 (13312 points) 16 bit/32 bit File register. CNC word interface 11
Z Z0 to Z1 (2 points) 16 bit Address index
N N0 to N7 (8 points) —— Master controller nesting level
P* P0 to P249 —— Label for conditional jump, subroutine call
P4000 to P4005 (256 points) command
K K-32768 to K32767 —— Decimal constant for 16-bit command
K-2147483648 to K2147483647 —— Decimal constant for 32-bit command
H H0 to HFFFF —— Hexadecimal constant for 16-bit command
H0 to HFFFFFFF —— Hexadecimal constant for 32-bit command
(Note 1) Devices marked with * in the device column have designated applications. Do not use devices
other than those corresponding to the input/output signals with the machine side (input/output
signals of the remote I/O unit), even if it is an undefined vacant device.
(Note 2) The format displayed in the table is attached. Copy and use as required.
(Note 3) Distinction of 10ms timer and 100ms timer is performed by command. (10ms timer is performed
by OUTH command, 100ms timer is performed by OUT command.)
16
2.10 File Register General Map
Device Details
R00000 to R00199 System common data (NC -> PLC)
R00200 to R00499 System common data (PLC -> NC)
R00500 to R00699 1st part system data (NC -> PLC)
R00700 to R00899 2nd part system data (NC -> PLC)
R00900 to R01099 3rd part system data (NC -> PLC)
R01100 to R01299 4th part system data (NC -> PLC)
R01300 to R02099 System reserve
R02100 to R02349 Pallet program data (Drive unit -> PLC)
R02500 to R02699 1st part system data (PLC -> NC)
R02700 to R02899 2nd part system data (PLC -> NC)
R02900 to R03099 3rd part system data (PLC -> NC)
R03100 to R03299 4th part system data (PLC -> NC)
R04100 to R04103 Pallet program data (PLC -> Drive unit)
R04500 to R05683 Axis data (NC -> PLC)
R05700 to R06371 Axis data (PLC -> NC)
R06372 to R06499 User macro (NC -> PLC: 64 point, PLC -> NC: 64 point)
R06500 to R06549 1st spindle data (NC -> PLC)
R06550 to R06599 2nd spindle data (NC -> PLC)
R06600 to R06649 3rd spindle data (NC -> PLC)
R06650 to R06699 4th spindle data (NC -> PLC)
R07000 to R07049 1st spindle data (PLC -> NC)
R07050 to R07099 2nd spindle data (PLC -> NC)
R07100 to R07149 3rd spindle data (PLC -> NC)
R07150 to R07199 4th spindle data (PLC -> NC)
R07500 to R07949 PLC constants
R08000 to R08099 PLC axis indexing
R08300 to R09799 User backed up area
R09800 to R09899 User work area
R09900 to R09999 J2CT
17
Device Details
R10000 to R10099 Remote I/O communication error information
R10100 to R10139 I/O link input
R10140 to R10179 I/O link output
R10180 to R10180 I/O link communication status
R10188 to R10189 Base PLC mounting check
R10190 to R10199 MELSEC link II diagnosis I/F
R10200 to R10399 Data buffer for MELSEC link II (machine input)
R10400 to R10599 Data buffer for MELSEC link II (machine output)
R10600 to R12759 ATC data, tool life management for M system / Tool life management I, II for L system
(Note) The system reserve is used for function expansion by Mitsubishi, and must not be used by the
user.
18
3. INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS WITH MACHINE
How to Read Input/Output Signal Table
The method of reading the input/output signal table is shown below.

Each card mounted on the RIO unit uses 32 points. Thus, even the 16 point output card has 32 points, and
the head of the next card number will be a serial No. on the assumption that there are 32 points.
Connector Pin. No. Card No. determined by operation panel I/O
unit or RIO unit rotary switch.
The 0 in No. 0 is the rotary switch No.
The card for which the rotary switch setting is
0 will be the 1st card.
NO.0: First card Table 3-1-1

Device Abbreviation Signal name Connector Device Abbreviation Signal name Connector
X0 B20 X8 B12
X1 B19 X9 B11
X2 B18 XA B10
X3 B17 XB B09
X4 B16 XC B08
X5 B15 XD B07
X6 B14 XE B06
X7 B13 XF B05
*Reference position return
X10 A20 X18 near point detection 1 A12
X12 A18 X1A near point detection 3 A10
X13 A17 X1B near point detection 4 A09
X14 A16 X1C A08
X15 A15 X1D A07
X16 A14 X1E A06
X17 A13 X1F A05
NO.1: Second card Table 3-1-2

X20 * Stroke end -1 B20 X28 * Stroke end +1 B12
X22 * Stroke end -3 B18 X2A * Stroke end +3 B10
X23 * Stroke end -4 B17 X2B * Stroke end +4 B09
X24 B16 X2C B08
X25 B15 X2D B07
X26 B14 X2E B06
X27 B13 X2F B05
X30 A20 X38 A12
X31 A19 X39 A11
X32 A18 X3A A10
X33 A17 X3B A09
X34 A16 X3C A08
X35 A15 X3D A07
X36 A14 X3E A06
X37 A13 X3F A05
(Note 1) For the allocations of the reference position return near-point detection and stroke end
signals, refer to the section "2.7 Fixed Signals".
(Note 1) are 1 word (16-bit) data.

(Note 2) Signals marked with * in the "Single name" column are handled as B contacts.
19
Classification of Machine Input/Output Signals
The signals handled by the PLC are classified as shown below.

When designing, refer to the section indicated below and make allocations according to the table in the
respective section.
Signal type Explanation Reference

Machine (1) Allocated to device X. 3.1.1
(2) Some connector pin allocations are determined. 3.1.2
(a) Stroke end signal (+, -)
(b) Reference point return near-point detection signal
DI (3) The high-speed processing input is set with the
parameters.
(Read in at the head of the high-speed processing
scan.)
PLC switch input (1) The switches can be substituted by the setting and 3.1.3
Input
(Note) display unit.

(2) Allocated to device X.
(3) The switch names displayed on the setting and
display unit are user release switches, and can be
created with the ladder message creation.
Sensor input (1) Differs from other DI signals, and is connected to the 3.1.3
controller. This is only used for monitoring on the
ladder side.
AI (Analog Input) (1) The connector pin allocation is determined. 4.2
(2) Allocated to the file register (R).
Machine (1) Allocated to device Y. 3.2.1
(2) The high-speed processing output is set with the 3.2.2
DO parameters.
(Output at end of the high-speed processing scan.)
Output
PLC switch output (1) Output used to show that setting and display unit 3.2.3
(Note) PLC switch input is valid.
(2) Allocated to device Y.
AO (Analog Output) (1) The connector pin allocation is determined. 4.4
(2) Data to be D/A converted and output can be output
by reading it into the file register (R).
(Note) The PLC switches are not signals for directly inputting/outputting with the machine, and are
hypothetical switches used by the user on the setting and display unit. When classified by property,
they are as shown above.
20
3.1 Machine Input Signals
3.1.1 Input Signals from Machine

No.0: First card
Table 3-1-1
X0 B20 X8 B12
X1 B19 X9 B11
X2 B18 XA B10
X3 B17 XB B09
X4 B16 XC B08
X5 B15 XD B07
X6 B14 XE B06
X7 B13 XF B05
* Reference position return
X12 A18 X1A near point detection 3 A10
X13 A17 X1B near point detection 4 A09
X14 A16 X1C A08
X15 A15 X1D A07
X16 A14 X1E A06
X17 A13 X1F A05
No.1: Second card
Table 3-1-2

X22 * Stroke end -3 B18 X2A * Stroke end +3 B10
X23 * Stroke end -4 B17 X2B * Stroke end +4 B09
X24 B16 X2C B08
X25 B15 X2D B07
X26 B14 X2E B06
X27 B13 X2F B05
X30 A20 X38 A12

X31 A19 X39 A11
X32 A18 X3A A10
X33 A17 X3B A09
X34 A16 X3C A08
X35 A15 X3D A07
X36 A14 X3E A06
X37 A13 X3F A05
(Note 1) For the allocations of the reference position return near-point detection and stroke end signals,
refer to the section "2.7 Fixed Signals".
21
No.2: Third card Table 3-1-3

X40 B20 X48 B12

X41 B19 X49 B11
X42 B18 X4A B10
X43 B17 X4B B09
X44 B16 X4C B08
X45 B15 X4D B07
X46 B14 X4E B06
X47 B13 X4F B05
X50 A20 X58 A12

X51 A19 X59 A11
X52 A18 X5A A10
X53 A17 X5B A09
X54 A16 X5C near point detection 5 A08
X55 A15 X5D near point detection 6 A07
X56 A14 X5E near point detection 7 A06
X57 A13 X5F near point detection 8 A05
No.3: Fourth card Table 3-1-4

X60 B20 X68 B12

X61 B19 X69 B11
X62 B18 X6A B10
X63 B17 X6B B09
X64 * Stroke end -5 B16 X6C * Stroke end +5 B08
X65 * Stroke end -6 B15 X6D * Stroke end +6 B07
X66 * Stroke end -7 B14 X6E * Stroke end +7 B06
X67 * Stroke end -8 B13 X6F * Stroke end +8 B05
X70 A20 X78 A12

X71 A19 X79 A11
X72 A18 X7A A10
X73 A17 X7B A09
X74 A16 X7C A08
X75 A15 X7D A07
X76 A14 X7E A06
X77 A13 X7F A05
22
No.4: Fifth card Table 3-1-5

X80 B20 X88 B12

X81 B19 X89 B11
X82 B18 X8A B10
X83 B17 X8B B09
X84 B16 X8C B08
X85 B15 X8D B07
X86 B14 X8E B06
X87 B13 X8F B05
X90 A20 X98 A12

X91 A19 X99 A11
X92 A18 X9A A10
X93 A17 X9B A09
X94 A16 X9C A08
X95 A15 X9D A07
X96 A14 X9E A06
X97 A13 X9F A05
No.5: Sixth card Table 3-1-6

XA0 B20 XA8 B12

XA1 B19 XA9 B11
XA2 B18 XAA B10
XA3 B17 XAB B09
XA4 B16 XAC B08
XA5 B15 XAD B07
XA6 B14 XAE B06
XA7 B13 XAF B05
XB0 A20 XB8 A12

XB1 A19 XB9 A11
XB2 A18 XBA A10
XB3 A17 XBB A09
XB4 A16 XBC A08
XB5 A15 XBD A07
XB6 A14 XBE A06
XB7 A13 XBF A05
23
No.6: Seventh card Table 3-1-7

XC0 B20 XC8 B12

XC1 B19 XC9 B11
XC2 B18 XCA B10
XC3 B17 XCB B09
XC4 B16 XCC B08
XC5 B15 XCD B07
XC6 B14 XCE B06
XC7 B13 XCF B05
XD0 A20 XD8 A12

XD1 A19 XD9 A11
XD2 A18 XDA A10
XD3 A17 XDB A09
XD4 A16 XDC A08
XD5 A15 XDD A07
XD6 A14 XDE A06
XD7 A13 XDF A05
No.7: Eighth card Table 3-1-8

XE0 B20 XE8 B12

XE1 B19 XE9 B11
XE2 B18 XEA B10
XE3 B17 XEB B09
XE4 B16 XEC B08
XE5 B15 XED B07
XE6 B14 XEE B06
XE7 B13 XEF B05
XF0 A20 XF8 A12

XF1 A19 XF9 A11
XF2 A18 XFA A10
XF3 A17 XFB A09
XF4 A16 XFC A08
XF5 A15 XFD A07
XF6 A14 XFE A06
XF7 A13 XFF A05
24
3.1.2 Using HR378 for Base I/O Unit (For specific manufacturer)
Input Signals from Machine (for HR378)

No.0: First card
Table 3-2-1
X00 MJ2-1 X08 MJ2-10

X01 MJ2-2 X09 MJ2-11
X02 MJ2-3 X0A MJ2-12
X03 MJ2-4 X0B MJ2-13
X04 MJ2-5 X0C MJ2-14
X05 MJ2-6 X0D MJ2-15
X06 MJ2-7 X0E MJ2-16
X07 MJ2-8 X0F MJ2-17
X10 MJ2-19 X18 near point detection 1 MJ2-28
X11 MJ2-20 X19 near point detection 2 MJ2-29
X12 MJ2-21 X1A near point detection 3 MJ2-30
X13 MJ2-22 X1B near point detection 4 MJ2-31
X14 MJ2-23 X1C MJ2-32
X15 MJ2-24 X1D MJ2-33
X16 MJ2-25 X1E MJ2-34
X17 MJ2-26 X1F MJ2-35
No.1: Second card Table 3-2-2

X20 * Stroke end -1 MJ2-51 X28 * Stroke end +1 MJ2-60

X21 * Stroke end -2 MJ2-52 X29 * Stroke end +2 MJ2-61
X22 * Stroke end -3 MJ2-53 X2A * Stroke end +3 MJ2-62
X23 * Stroke end -4 MJ2-54 X2B * Stroke end +4 MJ2-63
X24 MJ2-55 X2C MJ2-64
X25 MJ2-56 X2D MJ2-65
X26 MJ2-57 X2E MJ2-66
X27 MJ2-58 X2F MJ2-67
X30 MJ2-69 X38 MJ2-78

X31 MJ2-70 X39 MJ2-79
X32 MJ2-71 X3A MJ2-80
X33 MJ2-72 X3B MJ2-81
X34 MJ2-73 X3C MJ2-82
X35 MJ2-74 X3D MJ2-83
X36 MJ2-75 X3E MJ2-84
X37 MJ2-76 X3F MJ2-85
(Note 2) With the base I/O unit HR378, each card has 64 points for input and 64 points for output.
25
3.1.3 PLC Switch/Sensor
PLC Switch Input
Table 3-3-1
Common for part Common for part
systems
Abbrev. Signal name systems
Abbrev. Signal name
X680 PLC switch #1 X688 PLC switch #9
X682 PLC switch #3 X68A PLC switch #11
X683 PLC switch #4 X68B PLC switch #12
X684 PLC switch #5 X68C PLC switch #13
X685 PLC switch #6 X68D PLC switch #14
X686 PLC switch #7 X68E PLC switch #15
X687 PLC switch #8 X68F PLC switch #16

systems
Abbrev. Signal name
X692 PLC switch #19 X69A PLC switch #27
X693 PLC switch #20 X69B PLC switch #28
X694 PLC switch #21 X69C PLC switch #29
X695 PLC switch #22 X69D PLC switch #30
X696 PLC switch #23 X69E PLC switch #31
X697 PLC switch #24 X69F PLC switch #32
Table 3-3-2
systems
Abbrev. Signal name
X6A0 X6A8
X6A1 X6A9
X6A2 X6AA
X6A3 X6AB
spare spare
X6A4 X6AC
X6A5 X6AD
X6A6 X6AE
X6A7 X6AF

systems
Abbrev. Signal name
X6B0 X6B8
X6B1 X6B9
X6B2 X6BA
X6B3 X6BB
spare spare
X6B4 X6BC
X6B5 X6BD
X6B6 X6BE
X6B7 X6BF
26
Sensor Input Table 3-3-3

systems
Abbrev. Signal name
X6F0 X6F8 Skip input 1
X6F1 X6F9 Skip input 2
X6F2 X6FA Skip input 3
X6F3 X6FB Skip input 4
X6F4 X6FC Skip input 5
X6F5 X6FD Skip input 6
X6F6 X6FE Skip input 7
X6F7 X6FF Skip input 8
27
3.2 Machine Output Signals
3.2.1 Output Signals to Machine

No.0: First card
Table 3-4-1
Y0 B20 Y8 B12
Y1 B19 Y9 B11
Y2 B18 YA B10
Y3 B17 YB B09
Y4 B16 YC B08
Y5 B15 YD B07
Y6 B14 YE B06
Y7 B13 YF B05
Y10 A20 Y18 A12

Y11 A19 Y19 A11
Y12 A18 Y1A A10
Y13 A17 Y1B A09
Y14 A16 Y1C A08
Y15 A15 Y1D A07
Y16 A14 Y1E A06
Y17 A13 Y1F A05
No.1: Second card
Table 3-4-2
Y20 B20 Y28 B12

Y21 B19 Y29 B11
Y22 B18 Y2A B10
Y23 B17 Y2B B09
Y24 B16 Y2C B08
Y25 B15 Y2D B07
Y26 B14 Y2E B06
Y27 B13 Y2F B05
Y30 A20 Y38 A12

Y31 A19 Y39 A11
Y32 A18 Y3A A10
Y33 A17 Y3B A09
Y34 A16 Y3C A08
Y35 A15 Y3D A07
Y36 A14 Y3E A06
Y37 A13 Y3F A05
28
No.2: Third card

Table 3-4-3
Y40 B20 Y48 B12

Y41 B19 Y49 B11
Y42 B18 Y4A B10
Y43 B17 Y4B B09
Y44 B16 Y4C B08
Y45 B15 Y4D B07
Y46 B14 Y4E B06
Y47 B13 Y4F B05
Y50 A20 Y58 A12

Y51 A19 Y59 A11
Y52 A18 Y5A A10
Y53 A17 Y5B A09
Y54 A16 Y5C A08
Y55 A15 Y5D A07
Y56 A14 Y5E A06
Y57 A13 Y5F A05
No.3: Fourth card

Table 3-4-4
Y60 B20 Y68 B12

Y61 B19 Y69 B11
Y62 B18 Y6A B10
Y63 B17 Y6B B09
Y64 B16 Y6C B08
Y65 B15 Y6D B07
Y66 B14 Y6E B06
Y67 B13 Y6F B05
Y70 A20 Y78 A12

Y71 A19 Y79 A11
Y72 A18 Y7A A10
Y73 A17 Y7B A09
Y74 A16 Y7C A08
Y75 A15 Y7D A07
Y76 A14 Y7E A06
Y77 A13 Y7F A05
29

Y80 B20 Y88 B12

Y81 B19 Y89 B11
Y82 B18 Y8A B10
Y83 B17 Y8B B09
Y84 B16 Y8C B08
Y85 B15 Y8D B07
Y86 B14 Y8E B06
Y87 B13 Y8F B05
Y90 A20 Y98 A12

Y91 A19 Y99 A11
Y92 A18 Y9A A10
Y93 A17 Y9B A09
Y94 A16 Y9C A08
Y95 A15 Y9D A07
Y96 A14 Y9E A06
Y97 A13 Y9F A05
No.5: Sixth card Table 3-4-6

YA0 B20 YA8 B12

YA1 B19 YA9 B11
YA2 B18 YAA B10
YA3 B17 YAB B09
YA4 B16 YAC B08
YA5 B15 YAD B07
YA6 B14 YAE B06
YA7 B13 YAF B05
YB0 A20 YB8 A12

YB1 A19 YB9 A11
YB2 A18 YBA A10
YB3 A17 YBB A09
YB4 A16 YBC A08
YB5 A15 YBD A07
YB6 A14 YBE A06
YB7 A13 YBF A05
30

YC0 B20 YC8 B12

YC1 B19 YC9 B11
YC2 B18 YCA B10
YC3 B17 YCB B09
YC4 B16 YCC B08
YC5 B15 YCD B07
YC6 B14 YCE B06
YC7 B13 YCF B05
YD0 A20 YD8 A12

YD1 A19 YD9 A11
YD2 A18 YDA A10
YD3 A17 YDB A09
YD4 A16 YDC A08
YD5 A15 YDD A07
YD6 A14 YDE A06
YD7 A13 YDF A05
No.7: Eighth card Table 3-4-8

YE0 B20 YE8 B12

YE1 B19 YE9 B11
YE2 B18 YEA B10
YE3 B17 YEB B09
YE4 B16 YEC B08
YE5 B15 YED B07
YE6 B14 YEE B06
YE7 B13 YEF B05
YF0 A20 YF8 A12

YF1 A19 YF9 A11
YF2 A18 YFA A10
YF3 A17 YFB A09
YF4 A16 YFC A08
YF5 A15 YFD A07
YF6 A14 YFE A06
YF7 A13 YFF A05
31
3.2.2 Using HR378 for Base I/O Unit (For specific manufacturer)
Output Signals to Machine (for HR378)

No.0: First card
Table 3-5-1
Y00 MJ3-2 Y08 MJ3-12

Y01 MJ3-3 Y09 MJ3-13
Y02 MJ3-4 Y0A MJ3-14
Y03 MJ3-5 Y0B MJ3-15
Y04 MJ3-7 Y0C MJ3-17
Y05 MJ3-8 Y0D MJ3-18
Y06 MJ3-9 Y0E MJ3-19
Y07 MJ3-10 Y0F MJ3-20
Y10 MJ3-22 Y18 MJ3-32

Y11 MJ3-23 Y19 MJ3-33
Y12 MJ3-24 Y1A MJ3-34
Y13 MJ3-25 Y1B MJ3-35
Y14 MJ3-27 Y1C MJ3-37
Y15 MJ3-28 Y1D MJ3-38
Y16 MJ3-29 Y1E MJ3-39
Y17 MJ3-30 Y1F MJ3-40
No.1: Second card

Table 3-5-2
Y20 MJ3-52 Y28 MJ3-62

Y21 MJ3-53 Y29 MJ3-63
Y22 MJ3-54 Y2A MJ3-64
Y23 MJ3-55 Y2B MJ3-65
Y24 MJ3-57 Y2C MJ3-67
Y25 MJ3-58 Y2D MJ3-68
Y26 MJ3-59 Y2E MJ3-69
Y27 MJ3-60 Y2F MJ3-70
Y30 MJ3-72 Y38 MJ3-88

Y31 MJ3-74 Y39 MJ3-90
Y32 MJ3-76 Y3A MJ3-92
Y33 MJ3-78 Y3B MJ3-94
Y34 MJ3-80 Y3C MJ3-96
Y35 MJ3-82 Y3D MJ3-97
Y36 MJ3-84 Y3E MJ3-98
Y37 MJ3-86 Y3F MJ3-99
(Note 1) With the base I/O unit HR378, each card has 64 points for input and 64 points for output.
32
3.2.3 PLC Switch
PLC Switch Output

Table 3-6-1
systems
Abbrev. Signal name
Y680 PLC switch highlight #1 Y688 PLC switch highlight #9
Y682 PLC switch highlight #3 Y68A PLC switch highlight #11
Y683 PLC switch highlight #4 Y68B PLC switch highlight #12
Y684 PLC switch highlight #5 Y68C PLC switch highlight #13
Y685 PLC switch highlight #6 Y68D PLC switch highlight #14
Y686 PLC switch highlight #7 Y68E PLC switch highlight #15
Y687 PLC switch highlight #8 Y68F PLC switch highlight #16

systems
Abbrev. Signal name
Y692 PLC switch highlight #19 Y69A PLC switch highlight #27
Y693 PLC switch highlight #20 Y69B PLC switch highlight #28
Y694 PLC switch highlight #21 Y69C PLC switch highlight #29
Y695 PLC switch highlight #22 Y69D PLC switch highlight #30
Y696 PLC switch highlight #23 Y69E PLC switch highlight #31
Y697 PLC switch highlight #24 Y69F PLC switch highlight #32

systems
Abbrev. Signal name
Y6A0 Y6A8
Y6A1 Y6A9
Y6A2 Y6AA
Y6A3 Y6AB
spare spare
Y6A4 Y6AC
Y6A5 Y6AD
Y6A6 Y6AE
Y6A7 Y6AF

systems
Abbrev. Signal name
Y6B0 Y6B8
Y6B1 Y6B9
Y6B2 Y6BA
Y6B3 Y6BB
spare spare
Y6B4 Y6BC
Y6B5 Y6BD
Y6B6 Y6BE
Y6B7 Y6BF
33
Table 3-6-2
systems
Abbrev. Signal name
Y6C0 X680 Reverse signal Y6C8 X688 Reverse signal
Y6C1 X681 Reverse signal Y6C9 X689 Reverse signal
Y6C2 X682 Reverse signal Y6CA X68A Reverse signal
Y6C3 X683 Reverse signal Y6CB X68B Reverse signal
Y6C4 X684 Reverse signal Y6CC X68C Reverse signal
Y6C5 X685 Reverse signal Y6CD X68D Reverse signal
Y6C6 X686 Reverse signal Y6CE X68E Reverse signal
Y6C7 X687 Reverse signal Y6CF X68F Reverse signal

systems
Abbrev. Signal name
Y6D0 X690 Reverse signal Y6D8 X698 Reverse signal
Y6D1 X691 Reverse signal Y6D9 X699 Reverse signal
Y6D2 X692 Reverse signal Y6DA X69A Reverse signal
Y6D3 X693 Reverse signal Y6DB X69B Reverse signal
Y6D4 X694 Reverse signal Y6DC X69C Reverse signal
Y6D5 X695 Reverse signal Y6DD X69D Reverse signal
Y6D6 X696 Reverse signal Y6DE X69E Reverse signal
Y6D7 X697 Reverse signal Y6DF X69F Reverse signal
34
4. INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS TABLE WITH CONTROLLER
Types of Input/Output Signals Tables
The followings are the types of input/output signals tables to be used.
For common devices used in part systems (Sample)

Device Abbrev. Signal name Device Abbrev. Signal name
X720 X728
X721 X729
X722 Diagnosis data output completion X72A
X723 Collecting diagnosis data X72B
X724 In remote program input X72C
X725 Remote program input completion X72D
X726 Remote program input error X72E
X727 In tool ID communication ▲ X72F Power OFF required after
parameter change
For devices used in each part system (Sample)
Device No.
$1 $2 $3 $4 Abbrev. Signal name
Y7A0 Y7A8 Y7B0 Y7B8 *SVF1 Servo OFF 1st axis
Y7A1 Y7A9 Y7B1 Y7B9 *SVF2 Servo OFF 2nd axis
Y7A2 Y7AA Y7B2 Y7BA *SVF3 Servo OFF 3rd axis
Y7A3 Y7AB Y7B3 Y7BB *SVF4 Servo OFF 4th axis
Y7A4 Y7AC Y7B4 Y7BC *SVF5 Servo OFF 5th axis
Y7A5 Y7AD Y7B5 Y7BD *SVF6 Servo OFF 6th axis
Y7A6 Y7AE Y7B6 Y7BE *SVF7 Servo OFF 7th axis
Y7A7 Y7AF Y7B7 Y7BF *SVF8 Servo OFF 8th axis
For devices used in each spindle (Sample)
Device No.
1stSP 2ndSP 3rdSP 4thSP 5thSP 6thSP Abbrev. Signal name
R6500 R6550 R6600 R6650 R6700 R6750 Spindle command rotation speed
input (L)
R6501 R6551 R6601 R6651 R6701 R6751 Spindle command rotation speed input (H)
R6502 R6552 R6602 R6652 R6702 R6752 Spindle command final data
(rotation speed) (L)
R6503 R6553 R6603 R6653 R6703 R6753 Spindle command final data (rotation speed) (H)
(12-bit binary) (L)
R6505 R6555 R6605 R6655 R6705 R6755 Spindle command final data (12-bit binary) (H)
R6506 R6556 R6606 R6656 R6706 R6756 Spindle actual speed (L)
R6507 R6557 R6607 R6657 R6707 R6757 Spindle actual speed (H)
(Note 1) Signals marked with "*" in the “Abbrev.” column are handled as B contacts.
(Note 2) Signals marked with "▲" are prepared for a specific machine tool builder.
(Note 3) Unit is changed by "#1040 M_inch" for the signals marked with [M].
(Note 4) 32bit signals are shown with (L)/(H), which indicates Low/High order.
Data structure and the descriptions are as follows.
Rn Low-order (L)
Rn+1 High-order (H)
35
Classification of Input/Output Signals with Controller
There are 1-bit unit, and 16-bit or 32-bit unit controller input/output signals, which are classified as shown
below.
When designing, refer to the section indicated below and make allocations according to the table in the
respective section.
"$" and "SP" in "Device No." column stand for "part system" and "spindle" respectively.
Signal type Explanation Reference

DI (1) Allocated to device X. 4.1
(2) Data calculated in bit units are allocated as a
principle.
(3) Signals with only $1 or 1stSP section filled are
Input common for all part systems or all spindles.
Data (1) Allocated to device R. 4.2
(2) Data handled in 16-bit or 32-bit units is allocated as
a principle.
DO (1) Allocated to device Y. 4.3
(2) Data calculated in bit units are allocated as a
principle.
(3) Signals with only $1 or 1stSP section filled are
Output common for all part systems or all spindles.
Data (1) Allocated to device R. 4.4
(2) Data handled in 16-bit or 32-bit units is allocated as
a principle.
Special (1) Allocated to device SM. 4.5
relay (2) The sequence instruction calculation state, results
and the signals with special operations are allocated.
Others Classified Devices are classified under the usage purpose. 4.6
under
purpose
36
4.1 PLC Input Signals (Bit type: X***)

X2F0 Operation board reset key input

X700 X708
X701 X709
X702 X70A
X703 X70B
X704 X70C
X705 X70D
X706 X70E BATWR Battery warning
X707 Power OFF processing X70F BATAL Battery alarm

X710 X718
X711 X719
X712 X71A
X713 X71B
X714 X71C
X715 X71D
X716 X71E
X717 X71F

X720 X728
X721 X729
X722 Diagnosis data output completion X72A
X723 Collecting diagnosis data X72B
X724 In remote program input X72C
X725 Remote program input completion X72D
X726 Remote program input error X72E
X727 In tool ID communication ▲ X72F Power OFF required after
parameter change

X730 X738
X731 X739
X732 X73A
X733 X73B
X734 X73C
X735 X73D
X736 X73E
X737 X73F
37

X740 X748
X741 X749
X742 X74A
X743 X74B
X744 X74C
X745 X74D
X746 X74E
X747 X74F

X750 X758 Pallet program registration
Ext. workpiece coordinate transfer
completion
X751 X759
X752 CNOP 24 hours continuous operation X75A
X753 X75B
X754 X75C
X755 X75D
X756 X75E
X757 X75F

X770 X778
X771 X779
X772 X77A
X773 X77B
X774 X77C
X775 X77D
X776 X77E
X777 X77F
38
Device No.
X780 X788 X790 X798 RDY1 Servo ready 1st axis
X781 X789 X791 X799 RDY2 Servo ready 2nd axis
X782 X78A X792 X79A RDY3 Servo ready 3rd axis
X783 X78B X793 X79B RDY4 Servo ready 4th axis
X784 X78C X794 X79C RDY5 Servo ready 5th axis
X785 X78D X795 X79D RDY6 Servo ready 6th axis
X786 X78E X796 X79E RDY7 Servo ready 7th axis
X787 X78F X797 X79F RDY8 Servo ready 8th axis
Device No.
X7A0 X7A8 X7B0 X7B8 AX1 Axis selection 1st axis
X7A1 X7A9 X7B1 X7B9 AX2 Axis selection 2nd axis
X7A2 X7AA X7B2 X7BA AX3 Axis selection 3rd axis
X7A3 X7AB X7B3 X7BB AX4 Axis selection 4th axis
X7A4 X7AC X7B4 X7BC AX5 Axis selection 5th axis
X7A5 X7AD X7B5 X7BD AX6 Axis selection 6th axis
X7A6 X7AE X7B6 X7BE AX7 Axis selection 7th axis
X7A7 X7AF X7B7 X7BF AX8 Axis selection 8th axis
Device No.
X7C0 X7C8 X7D0 X7D8 MVP1 In axis plus motion 1st axis
X7C1 X7C9 X7D1 X7D9 MVP2 In axis plus motion 2nd axis
X7C2 X7CA X7D2 X7DA MVP3 In axis plus motion 3rd axis
X7C3 X7CB X7D3 X7DB MVP4 In axis plus motion 4th axis
X7C4 X7CC X7D4 X7DC MVP5 In axis plus motion 5th axis
X7C5 X7CD X7D5 X7DD MVP6 In axis plus motion 6th axis
X7C6 X7CE X7D6 X7DE MVP7 In axis plus motion 7th axis
X7C7 X7CF X7D7 X7DF MVP8 In axis plus motion 8th axis
Device No.
X7E0 X7E8 X7F0 X7F8 MVM1 In axis minus motion 1st axis
X7E1 X7E9 X7F1 X7F9 MVM2 In axis minus motion 2nd axis
X7E2 X7EA X7F2 X7FA MVM3 In axis minus motion 3rd axis
X7E3 X7EB X7F3 X7FB MVM4 In axis minus motion 4th axis
X7E4 X7EC X7F4 X7FC MVM5 In axis minus motion 5th axis
X7E5 X7ED X7F5 X7FD MVM6 In axis minus motion 6th axis
X7E6 X7EE X7F6 X7FE MVM7 In axis minus motion 7th axis
X7E7 X7EF X7F7 X7FF MVM8 In axis minus motion 8th axis
39
Device No.
X800 X808 X810 X818 ZP11 1st reference position reached 1st axis
X801 X809 X811 X819 ZP12 1st reference position reached 2nd axis
X802 X80A X812 X81A ZP13 1st reference position reached 3rd axis
X803 X80B X813 X81B ZP14 1st reference position reached 4th axis
X804 X80C X814 X81C ZP15 1st reference position reached 5th axis
X805 X80D X815 X81D ZP16 1st reference position reached 6th axis
X806 X80E X816 X81E ZP17 1st reference position reached 7th axis
X807 X80F X817 X81F ZP18 1st reference position reached 8th axis
Device No.
X820 X828 X830 X838 ZP21 2nd reference position reached 1st axis
X821 X829 X831 X839 ZP22 2nd reference position reached 2nd axis
X822 X82A X832 X83A ZP23 2nd reference position reached 3rd axis
X823 X82B X833 X83B ZP24 2nd reference position reached 4th axis
X824 X82C X834 X83C ZP25 2nd reference position reached 5th axis
X825 X82D X835 X83D ZP26 2nd reference position reached 6th axis
X826 X82E X836 X83E ZP27 2nd reference position reached 7th axis
X827 X82F X837 X83F ZP28 2nd reference position reached 8th axis
Device No.
X840 X848 X850 X858 ZP31 3rd reference position reached 1st axis
X841 X849 X851 X859 ZP32 3rd reference position reached 2nd axis
X842 X84A X852 X85A ZP33 3rd reference position reached 3rd axis
X843 X84B X853 X85B ZP34 3rd reference position reached 4th axis
X844 X84C X854 X85C ZP35 3rd reference position reached 5th axis
X845 X84D X855 X85D ZP36 3rd reference position reached 6th axis
X846 X84E X856 X85E ZP37 3rd reference position reached 7th axis
X847 X84F X857 X85F ZP38 3rd reference position reached 8th axis
Device No.
X860 X868 X870 X878 ZP41 4th reference position reached 1st axis
X861 X869 X871 X879 ZP42 4th reference position reached 2nd axis
X862 X86A X872 X87A ZP43 4th reference position reached 3rd axis
X863 X86B X873 X87B ZP44 4th reference position reached 4th axis
X864 X86C X874 X87C ZP45 4th reference position reached 5th axis
X865 X86D X875 X87D ZP46 4th reference position reached 6th axis
X866 X86E X876 X87E ZP47 4th reference position reached 7th axis
X867 X86F X877 X87F ZP48 4th reference position reached 8th axis
40
Device No.
X880 X888 X890 X898 NRF1 Near reference position 1st axis
X881 X889 X891 X899 NRF2 Near reference position 2nd axis
X882 X88A X892 X89A NRF3 Near reference position 3rd axis
X883 X88B X893 X89B NRF4 Near reference position 4th axis
X884 X88C X894 X89C NRF5 Near reference position 5th axis
X885 X88D X895 X89D NRF6 Near reference position 6th axis
X886 X88E X896 X89E NRF7 Near reference position 7th axis
X887 X88F X897 X89F NRF8 Near reference position 8th axis
Device No.
X8A0 X8A8 X8B0 X8B8
X8A1 X8A9 X8B1 X8B9
X8A2 X8AA X8B2 X8BA
X8A3 X8AB X8B3 X8BB
X8A4 X8AC X8B4 X8BC
X8A5 X8AD X8B5 X8BD
X8A6 X8AE X8B6 X8BE
X8A7 X8AF X8B7 X8BF
Device No.
X8C0 X8C8 X8D0 X8D8 ZSF1 Zero point initialization set completed
1st axis
X8C1 X8C9 X8D1 X8D9 ZSF2 Zero point initialization set completed 2nd axis
X8C2 X8CA X8D2 X8DA ZSF3 Zero point initialization set completed 3rd axis
X8C3 X8CB X8D3 X8DB ZSF4 Zero point initialization set completed 4th axis
X8C4 X8CC X8D4 X8DC ZSF5 Zero point initialization set completed 5th axis
X8C5 X8CD X8D5 X8DD ZSF6 Zero point initialization set completed 6th axis
X8C6 X8CE X8D6 X8DE ZSF7 Zero point initialization set completed 7th axis
X8C7 X8CF X8D7 X8DF ZSF8 Zero point initialization set completed 8th axis
Device No.
X8E0 X8E8 X8F0 X8F8 ZSE1 Zero point initialization set error
completed 1st axis
X8E1 X8E9 X8F1 X8F9 ZSE2 Zero point initialization set error completed 2nd axis
X8E2 X8EA X8F2 X8FA ZSE3 Zero point initialization set error completed 3rd axis
X8E3 X8EB X8F3 X8FB ZSE4 Zero point initialization set error completed 4th axis
X8E4 X8EC X8F4 X8FC ZSE5 Zero point initialization set error completed 5th axis
X8E5 X8ED X8F5 X8FD ZSE6 Zero point initialization set error completed 6th axis
X8E6 X8EE X8F6 X8FE ZSE7 Zero point initialization set error completed 7th axis
X8E7 X8EF X8F7 X8FF ZSE8 Zero point initialization set error completed 8th axis
41
Device No.
X900 X908 X910 X918 ILI1 In current limit 1st axis
X901 X909 X911 X919 ILI2 In current limit 2nd axis
X902 X90A X912 X91A ILI3 In current limit 3rd axis
X903 X90B X913 X91B ILI4 In current limit 4th axis
X904 X90C X914 X91C ILI5 In current limit 5th axis
X905 X90D X915 X91D ILI6 In current limit 6th axis
X906 X90E X916 X91E ILI7 In current limit 7th axis
X907 X90F X917 X91F ILI8 In current limit 8th axis
Device No.
X920 X928 X930 X938 ILA1 Current limit reached 1st axis
X921 X929 X931 X939 ILA2 Current limit reached 2nd axis
X922 X92A X932 X93A ILA3 Current limit reached 3rd axis
X923 X92B X933 X93B ILA4 Current limit reached 4th axis
X924 X92C X934 X93C ILA5 Current limit reached 5th axis
X925 X92D X935 X93D ILA6 Current limit reached 6th axis
X926 X92E X936 X93E ILA7 Current limit reached 7th axis
X927 X92F X937 X93F ILA8 Current limit reached 8th axis
Device No.
X940 X948 X950 X958 ARRF1 NC axis up-to-speed 1st axis
X941 X949 X951 X959 ARRF2 NC axis up-to-speed 2nd axis
X942 X94A X952 X95A ARRF3 NC axis up-to-speed 3rd axis
X943 X94B X953 X95B ARRF4 NC axis up-to-speed 4th axis
X944 X94C X954 X95C ARRF5 NC axis up-to-speed 5th axis
X945 X94D X955 X95D ARRF6 NC axis up-to-speed 6th axis
X946 X94E X956 X95E ARRF7 NC axis up-to-speed 7th axis
X947 X94F X957 X95F ARRF8 NC axis up-to-speed 8th axis
Device No.
X960 X968 X970 X978 Unclamp command 1st axis
X961 X969 X971 X979 Unclamp command 2nd axis
X962 X96A X972 X97A Unclamp command 3rd axis
X963 X96B X973 X97B Unclamp command 4th axis
X964 X96C X974 X97C Unclamp command 5th axis
X965 X96D X975 X97D Unclamp command 6th axis
X966 X96E X976 X97E Unclamp command 7th axis
X967 X96F X977 X97F Unclamp command 8th axis
42
Device No.
X980 X988 X990 X998 In mixed synchronization control 1st axis
X981 X989 X991 X999 In mixed synchronization control 2nd axis
X982 X98A X992 X99A In mixed synchronization control 3rd axis
X983 X98B X993 X99B In mixed synchronization control 4th axis
X984 X98C X994 X99C In mixed synchronization control 5th axis
X985 X98D X995 X99D In mixed synchronization control 6th axis
X986 X98E X996 X99E In mixed synchronization control 7th axis
X987 X98F X997 X99F In mixed synchronization control 8th axis
Device No.
X9A0 X9A8 X9B0 X9B8 In synchronous/superimposition control
1st axis
X9A1 X9A9 X9B1 X9B9 In synchronous/superimposition control 2nd axis
X9A2 X9AA X9B2 X9BA In synchronous/superimposition control 3rd axis
X9A3 X9AB X9B3 X9BB In synchronous/superimposition control 4th axis
X9A4 X9AC X9B4 X9BC In synchronous/superimposition control 5th axis
X9A5 X9AD X9B5 X9BD In synchronous/superimposition control 6th axis
X9A6 X9AE X9B6 X9BE In synchronous/superimposition control 7th axis
X9A7 X9AF X9B7 X9BF In synchronous/superimposition control 8th axis
Device No.
X9C0 X9C8 X9D0 X9D8 MIR1 In mirror image 1st axis
X9C1 X9C9 X9D1 X9D9 MIR2 In mirror image 2nd axis
X9C2 X9CA X9D2 X9DA MIR3 In mirror image 3rd axis
X9C3 X9CB X9D3 X9DB MIR4 In mirror image 4th axis
X9C4 X9CC X9D4 X9DC MIR5 In mirror image 5th axis
X9C5 X9CD X9D5 X9DD MIR6 In mirror image 6th axis
X9C6 X9CE X9D6 X9DE MIR7 In mirror image 7th axis
X9C7 X9CF X9D7 X9DF MIR8 In mirror image 8th axis
Device No.
X9E0 X9E8 X9F0 X9F8 Reference position establishment
1st axis
X9E1 X9E9 X9F1 X9F9 Reference position establishment 2nd axis
X9E2 X9EA X9F2 X9FA Reference position establishment 3rd axis
X9E3 X9EB X9F3 X9FB Reference position establishment 4th axis
X9E4 X9EC X9F4 X9FC Reference position establishment 5th axis
X9E5 X9ED X9F5 X9FD Reference position establishment 6th axis
X9E6 X9EE X9F6 X9FE Reference position establishment 7th axis
X9E7 X9EF X9F7 X9FF Reference position establishment 8th axis
43
Device No.
XA00 XA08 XA10 XA18 Reference position return direction
1st axis
XA01 XA09 XA11 XA19 Reference position return direction 2nd axis
XA02 XA0A XA12 XA1A Reference position return direction 3rd axis
XA03 XA0B XA13 XA1B Reference position return direction 4th axis
XA04 XA0C XA14 XA1C Reference position return direction 5th axis
XA05 XA0D XA15 XA1D Reference position return direction 6th axis
XA06 XA0E XA16 XA1E Reference position return direction 7th axis
XA07 XA0F XA17 XA1F Reference position return direction 8th axis
Device No.
XA20 XA28 XA30 XA38 In NC axis control 1st axis
XA21 XA29 XA31 XA39 In NC axis control 2nd axis
XA22 XA2A XA32 XA3A In NC axis control 3rd axis
XA23 XA2B XA33 XA3B In NC axis control 4th axis
XA24 XA2C XA34 XA3C In NC axis control 5th axis
XA25 XA2D XA35 XA3D In NC axis control 6th axis
XA26 XA2E XA36 XA3E In NC axis control 7th axis
XA27 XA2F XA37 XA3F In NC axis control 8th axis
Device No.
XA40 XA48 XA50 XA58 ECIL1 Ext. machine coordinate system
offset data illegaln 1st axis
XA41 XA49 XA51 XA59 ECIL2 Ext. machine coordinate system offset data illegaln 2nd axis
XA42 XA4A XA52 XA5A ECIL3 Ext. machine coordinate system offset data illegaln 3rd axis
XA43 XA4B XA53 XA5B ECIL4 Ext. machine coordinate system offset data illegaln 4th axis
XA44 XA4C XA54 XA5C ECIL5 Ext. machine coordinate system offset data illegaln 5th axis
XA45 XA4D XA55 XA5D ECIL6 Ext. machine coordinate system offset data illegaln 6th axis
XA46 XA4E XA56 XA5E ECIL7 Ext. machine coordinate system offset data illegaln 7th axis
XA47 XA4F XA57 XA5F ECIL8 Ext. machine coordinate system offset data illegaln 8th axis
44
Device No.
XC00 XD40 XE80 XFC0 JO In jog mode
XC01 XD41 XE81 XFC1 HO In handle mode
XC02 XD42 XE82 XFC2 SO In incremental mode
XC03 XD43 XE83 XFC3 PTPO In manual arbitrary feed mode
XC04 XD44 XE84 XFC4 ZRNO In reference position return mode
XC05 XD45 XE85 XFC5 ASTO In automatic initial set mode
XC06 XD46 XE86 XFC6 In JOG-handle simultaneous mode
XC07 XD47 XE87 XFC7
Device No.
XC08 XD48 XE88 XFC8 MEMO In memory mode
XC09 XD49 XE89 XFC9 TO In tape mode
XC0A XD4A XE8A In online operation mode
XC0B XD4B XE8B XFCB DO In MDI mode
XC0C XD4C XE8C XFCC
XC0D XD4D XE8D XFCD
XC0E XD4E XE8E XFCE
XC0F XD4F XE8F XFCF
Device No.
XC10 XD50 XE90 XFD0 MA Controller ready completion
XC11 XD51 XE91 XFD1 SA Servo ready completion
XC12 XD52 XE92 XFD2 OP In automatic operation "run"
XC13 XD53 XE93 XFD3 STL In automatic operation "start"
XC14 XD54 XE94 XFD4 SPL In automatic operation "pause"
XC15 XD55 XE95 XFD5 RST In "reset"
XC16 XD56 XE96 XFD6 CXN In manual arbitrary feed
XC17 XD57 XE97 XFD7 RWD In rewind
Device No.
XC18 XD58 XE98 XFD8 DEN Motion command completion
XC19 XD59 XE99 XFD9 TIMP All axes in-position
XC1A XD5A XE9A XFDA TSMZ All axes smoothing zero
XC1B XD5B XE9B XFDB
XC1C XD5C XE9C XFDC CXFIN Manual arbitrary feed completion
XC1D XD5D XE9D XFDD External search finished
XC1E XD5E XE9E XFDE
XC1F XD5F XE9F XFDF In high-speed machining mode (G05)
45
Device No.
XC20 XD60 XEA0 XFE0 RPN In rapid traverse
XC21 XD61 XEA1 XFE1 CUT In cutting feed
XC22 XD62 XEA2 XFE2 TAP In tapping
XC23 XD63 XEA3 XFE3 THRD In thread cutting
XC24 XD64 XEA4 XFE4 SYN In synchronous feed
XC25 XD65 XEA5 XFE5 CSS In constant surface speed
XC26 XD66 XEA6 XFE6 SKIP In skip
XC27 XD67 XEA7 XFE7 ZRNN In reference position return
Device No.
XC28 XD68 XEA8 XFE8 INCH In inch unit selection
XC29 XD69 XEA9 XFE9 DLKN In display lock
XC2A XD6A XEAA XFEA F1DN F 1-digit commanded
XC2B XD6B XEAB XFEB TLFO In tool life management
XC2C XD6C XEAC XFEC
XC2D XD6D XEAD XFED
XC2E XD6E XEAE XFEE TLOV Tool life over
XC2F XD6F XEAF XFEF Tool group life over
Device No.
XC30 XD70 XEB0 XFF0 F11 F1-digit No. code 1
XC34 XD74 XEB4 XFF4 Waiting between part systems
XC35 XD75 XEB5 XFF5 PCINO In PLC interrupt
XC36 XD76 XEB6 XFF6
XC37 XD77 XEB7 XFF7 ASLE Illegal axis selected
Device No.
XC38 XD78 XEB8 XFF8
XC39 XD79 XEB9 XFF9
XC3A XD7A XEBA XFFA
XC3B XD7B XEBB XFFB
XC3C XD7C XEBC XFFC
XC3D XD7D XEBD XFFD
XC3E XD7E XEBE XFFE
XC3F XD7F XEBF XFFF
46
Device No.
XC40 XD80 XEC0 X1000 DM00 M code independent output M00
XC44 XD84 XEC4 X1004
Device No.
XC49 XD89 XEC9 X1009 MMS Manual numerical command
XC4A XD8A XECA X100A In tool escape and return mode
XC4B XD8B XECB X100B
XC4C XD8C XECC X100C
XC4D XD8D XECD X100D
XC4E XD8E XECE X100E
XC4F XD8F XECF X100F In circular feed in manual mode
Device No.
XC50 XD90 XED0 X1010
Device No.
XC5A XD9A XEDA X101A
XC5B XD9B XEDB X101B
XC5C XD9C XEDC X101C
XC5D XD9D XEDD X101D
XC5E XD9E XEDE X101E
XC5F XD9F XEDF X101F
47
Device No.
XC60 XDA0 XEE0 X1020 MF1 M function strobe 1
XC64 XDA4 XEE4 X1024 SF1 S function strobe 1
Device No.
XC68 XDA8 XEE8 X1028 TF1 T function strobe 1
XC69 XDA9 XEE9 X1029 TF2 T function strobe 2
XC6A XDAA XEEA X102A TF3 T function strobe 3
XC6B XDAB XEEB X102B TF4 T function strobe 4
XC6C XDAC XEEC X102C BF1 2nd M function strobe 1
XC6D XDAD XEED X102D BF2 2nd M function strobe 2
XC6E XDAE XEEE X102E BF3 2nd M function strobe 3
XC6F XDAF XEEF X102F BF4 2nd M function strobe 4
Device No.
XC70 XDB0 XEF0 X1030
Device No.
XC7A XDBA XEFA X103A
XC7B XDBB XEFB X103B
XC7C XDBC XEFC X103C
XC7D XDBD XEFD X103D
XC7E XDBE XEFE X103E
XC7F XDBF XEFF X103F
48
Device No.
XC80 XDC0 XF00 X1040 CHOP In chopping start
XC81 XDC1 XF01 X1041 CHP1 Basic position -> upper dead point path flag
XC82 XDC2 XF02 X1042 CHP2 Upper dead point -> bottom dead point path
flag
XC83 XDC3 XF03 X1043 CHP3 Bottom dead point -> upper dead point path
flag
XC84 XDC4 XF04 X1044 CHP4 Upper dead point -> basic position path flag
XC85 XDC5 XF05 X1045 CHPMD In chopping mode
XC86 XDC6 XF06 X1046 Stroke compensation completion
Tool escape and return transit point
XC87 XDC7 XF07 X1047 recognition completed
Device No.
XC88 XDC8 XF08 X1048
XC89 XDC9 XF09 X1049
XC8A XDCA XF0A X104A SSE Search & start Error
XC8B XDCB XF0B X104B SSG Search & start Search
XC8C XDCC XF0C X104C
XC8D XDCD XF0D X104D
XC8E XDCE XF0E X104E
XC8F XDCF XF0F X104F
Device No.
XC90 XDD0 XF10 X1050
XC93 XDD3 XF13 X1053 TCP Tool change position return
completion
XC94 XDD4 XF14 X1054 TCRQ New tool change
XC95 XDD5 XF15 X1055 All spindles simultaneous control
(G47.1)
XC96 XDD6 XF16 X1056 Life prediction
49
Device No.
XC98 XDD8 XF18 X1058 AL1 NC alarm 1
XC99 XDD9 XF19 X1059 AL2 NC alarm 2 (Servo alarm)
XC9A XDDA XF1A X105A AL3 NC alarm 3 (Program error)
XC9B XDDB XF1B X105B AL4 NC alarm 4 (Operation error)
XC9C XDDC XF1C X105C
XC9D XDDD XF1D X105D
XC9E XDDE XF1E X105E
XC9F XDDF XF1F X105F
Device No.
XCA0 XDE0 XF20 X1060 Load monitor In execution ▲
XCA1 XDE1 XF21 X1061 Load monitor Teaching mode valid ▲
XCA2 XDE2 XF22 X1062 Load monitor Monitor mode valid ▲
XCA3 XDE3 XF23 X1063 Adaptive control in execution ▲
XCA4 XDE4 XF24 X1064
XCA5 XDE5 XF25 X1065 TRVE Tap retract possible
XCA6 XDE6 XF26 X1066 PCNT No. of work machining over
XCA7 XDE7 XF27 X1067 ABSW Absolute position warning
Device No.
XCAA XDEA XF2A X106A
XCAB XDEB XF2B X106B
XCAC XDEC XF2C X106C
XCAD XDED XF2D X106D
XCAE XDEE XF2E X106E
XCAF XDEF XF2F X106F
Device No.
XCB0 XDF0 XF30 X1070 In spindle-NC axis polygon mode
XCB1 XDF1 XF31 X1071 AL5 NC alarm 5
XCB2 XDF2 XF32 X1072 In spindle-spindle polygon mode
XCB3 XDF3 XF33 X1073 Spindle-spindle polygon
synchronization completion
XCB4 XDF4 XF34 X1074
50
Device No.
XCB9 XDF9 XF39 X1079 In 3-dimensional coordinate
conversion
XCBA XDFA XF3A X107A
XCBB XDFB XF3B X107B
XCBC XDFC XF3C X107C
XCBD XDFD XF3D X107D
XCBE XDFE XF3E X107E
XCBF XDFF XF3F X107F
Device No.
XCC0 XE00 XF40 X1080 RTAP In synchronized tapping selection
(M command)
XCC1 XE01 XF41 X1081 In small diameter deep hole cycle
XCC2 XE02 XF42 X1082 High-speed retract function valid
state ▲
XCC3 XE03 XF43 X1083 In high-speed retract function
operation ▲
XCC4 XE04 XF44 X1084
Device No.
XCC8 XE08 XF48 X1088 In barrier valid (left)
XCC9 XE09 XF49 X1089 In barrier valid (right)
XCCA XE0A XF4A X108A
XCCB XE0B XF4B X108B
XCCC XE0C XF4C X108C
XCCD XE0D XF4D X108D
XCCE XE0E XF4E X108E
XCCF XE0F XF4F X108F
Device No.
XCD0 XE10 XF50 X1090
51
Device No.
XCD8 XE18 XF58 X1098 Door open enable
XCDA XE1A XF5A X109A
XCDB XE1B XF5B X109B
XCDC XE1C XF5C X109C
XCDD XE1D XF5D X109D
XCDE XE1E XF5E X109E
XCDF XE1F XF5F X109F
Device No.
XCE0 XE20 XF60 X10A0
Device No.
XCE8 XE28 XF68 X10A8 Door open enable
(2 channels per 1 part system)
XCEA XE2A XF6A X10AA
XCEB XE2B XF6B X10AB
XCEC XE2C XF6C X10AC
XCED XE2D XF6D X10AD
XCEE XE2E XF6E X10AE
XCEF XE2F XF6F X10AF
Device No.
XCF0 XE30 XF70 X10B0
52
Device No.
XCFA XE3A XF7A X10BA
XCFB XE3B XF7B X10BB
XCFC XE3C XF7C X10BC
XCFD XE3D XF7D X10BD
XCFE XE3E XF7E X10BE
XCFF XE3F XF7F X10BF
Device No.
XD00 XE40 XF80 X10C0
Device No.
XD0A XE4A XF8A X10CA
XD0B XE4B XF8B X10CB
XD0C XE4C XF8C X10CC
XD0D XE4D XF8D X10CD
XD0E XE4E XF8E X10CE
XD0F XE4F XF8F X10CF
53
Device No.
X1880 X18E0 X1940 X19A0 X1A00 X1A60 SUPP Spindle speed upper limit over
X1881 X18E1 X1941 X19A1 X1A01 X1A61 SLOW Spindle speed lower limit over
X1882 X18E2 X1942 X19A2 X1A02 X1A62 SIGE S command gear No. illegal
X1883 X18E3 X1943 X19A3 X1A03 X1A63 SOVE S command max./min. command
value over
X1884 X18E4 X1944 X19A4 X1A04 X1A64 SNGE S command no gear selected
X1885 X18E5 X1945 X19A5 X1A05 X1A65 GR1 Spindle gear shift command 1
X1887 X18E7 X1947 X19A7 X1A07 X1A67 (Always "0")
Device No.
X1888 X18E8 X1948 X19A8 X1A08 X1A68 Spindle 2nd in-position
X1889 X18E9 X1949 X19A9 X1A09 X1A69 CDO Current detection
X188A X18EA X194A X19AA X1A0A X1A6A VRO Speed detection
X188B X18EB X194B X19AB X1A0B X1A6B FLO In spindle alarm
X188C X18EC X194C X19AC X1A0C X1A6C ZSO Zero speed
X188D X18ED X194D X19AD X1A0D X1A6D USO Spindle up-to-speed
X188E X18EE X194E X19AE X1A0E X1A6E ORAO Spindle in-position
X188F X18EF X194F X19AF X1A0F X1A6F LCSA In L coil selection
Device No.
X1890 X18F0 X1950 X19B0 X1A10 X1A70 SMA Spindle ready-ON
X1891 X18F1 X1951 X19B1 X1A11 X1A71 SSA Spindle servo-ON
X1892 X18F2 X1952 X19B2 X1A12 X1A72 SEMG In spindle emergency stop
X1893 X18F3 X1953 X19B3 X1A13 X1A73 SSRN In spindle forward run
X1894 X18F4 X1954 X19B4 X1A14 X1A74 SSRI In spindle reverse run
X1895 X18F5 X1955 X19B5 X1A15 X1A75 Z phase passed
X1896 X18F6 X1956 X19B6 X1A16 X1A76 SIMP Position loop in-position
X1897 X18F7 X1957 X19B7 X1A17 X1A77 STLQ In spindle torque limit
Device No.
X1898 X18F8 X1958 X19B8 X1A18 X1A78 In motor 1 selection
X189A X18FA X195A X19BA X1A1A X1A7A
X189B X18FB X195B X19BB X1A1B X1A7B
X189C X18FC X195C X19BC X1A1C X1A7C
X189D X18FD X195D X19BD X1A1D X1A7D SD2 Speed detection 2
X189E X18FE X195E X19BE X1A1E X1A7E MCSA In M coil selection
X189F X18FF X195F X19BF X1A1F X1A7F Index positioning completion
54
Device No.
X18A0 X1900 X1960 X19C0 X1A20 X1A80 ENB Spindle enable
X18A1 X1901 X1961 X19C1 X1A21 X1A81
X18A2 X1902 X1962 X19C2 X1A22 X1A82
X18A3 X1903 X1963 X19C3 X1A23 X1A83
X18A4 X1904 X1964 X19C4 X1A24 X1A84
X18A5 X1905 X1965 X19C5 X1A25 X1A85
X18A6 X1906 X1966 X19C6 X1A26 X1A86
X18A7 X1907 X1967 X19C7 X1A27 X1A87
Device No.
X18A8 X1908 X1968 X19C8 X1A28 X1A88 SPSYN1 In spindle synchronization
X18A9 X1909 X1969 X19C9 X1A29 X1A89 FSPRV Spindle rotation speed
X18AA X190A X196A X19CA X1A2A X1A8A FSPPH Spindle phase synchronization
completion
X18AB X190B X196B X19CB X1A2B X1A8B SPSYN2 In spindle synchronization 2
X18AC X190C X196C X19CC X1A2C X1A8C SPCMP Chuck close confirmation
X18AD X190D X196D X19CD X1A2D X1A8D
X18AE X190E X196E X19CE X1A2E X1A8E SPSYN3 In tool spindle synchronization II
X18AF X190F X196F X19CF X1A2F X1A8F
Device No.
X18B0 X1910 X1970 X19D0 X1A30 X1A90
X18B1 X1911 X1971 X19D1 X1A31 X1A91
X18B2 X1912 X1972 X19D2 X1A32 X1A92
X18B3 X1913 X1973 X19D3 X1A33 X1A93 PHOVR Hob axis delay excess
X18B4 X1914 X1974 X19D4 X1A34 X1A94
X18B5 X1915 X1975 X19D5 X1A35 X1A95 EXOFN In spindle holding force up
X18B6 X1916 X1976 X19D6 X1A36 X1A96
X18B7 X1917 X1977 X19D7 X1A37 X1A97
Device No.
X18B8 X1918 X1978 X19D8 X1A38 X1A98
X18B9 X1919 X1979 X19D9 X1A39 X1A99
X18BA X191A X197A X19DA X1A3A X1A9A
X18BB X191B X197B X19DB X1A3B X1A9B
X18BC X191C X197C X19EC X1A3C X1A9C
X18BD X191D X197D X19DD X1A3D X1A9D
X18BE X191E X197E X19DE X1A3E X1A9E
X18BF X191F X197F X19DF X1A3F X1A9F
55
Device No.
X18C0 X1920 X1980 X19E0 X1A40 X1AA0
X18C1 X1921 X1981 X19E1 X1A41 X1AA1
X18C2 X1922 X1982 X19E2 X1A42 X1AA2
X18C3 X1923 X1983 X19E3 X1A43 X1AA3
X18C4 X1924 X1984 X19E4 X1A44 X1AA4
X18C5 X1925 X1985 X19E5 X1A45 X1AA5
X18C6 X1926 X1986 X19E6 X1A46 X1AA6
X18C7 X1927 X1987 X19E7 X1A47 X1AA7
Device No.
X18C8 X1928 X1988 X19E8 X1A48 X1AA8
X18C9 X1929 X1989 X19E9 X1A49 X1AA9
X18CA X192A X198A X19EA X1A4A X1AAA
X18CB X192B X198B X19EB X1A4B X1AAB
X18CC X192C X198C X19EC X1A4C X1AAC
X18CD X192D X198D X19EE X1A4D X1AAD
X18CE X192E X198E X19E6 X1A4E X1AAE
X18CF X192F X198F X19E7 X1A4F X1AAF
56

X1CD0 Handy terminal key 1 X1CD8 Handy terminal key 9
X1CD1 Handy terminal key 2 X1CD9 Handy terminal key 10
X1CD2 Handy terminal key 3 X1CDA Handy terminal key 11
X1CD3 Handy terminal key 4 X1CDB Handy terminal key 12
X1CD4 Handy terminal key 5 X1CDC Handy terminal key 13
X1CD5 Handy terminal key 6 X1CDD Handy terminal key 14
X1CD6 Handy terminal key 7 X1CDE Handy terminal key 15
X1CD7 Handy terminal key 8 X1CDF Handy terminal key 16

X1CE0 Handy terminal key 17 X1CE8 Handy terminal key 25
X1CE1 Handy terminal key 18 X1CE9 Handy terminal key 26
X1CE2 Handy terminal key 19 X1CEA Handy terminal key 27
X1CE3 Handy terminal key 20 X1CEB Handy terminal key 28
X1CE4 Handy terminal key 21 X1CEC Handy terminal key 29
X1CE5 Handy terminal key 22 X1CED Handy terminal key 30
X1CE6 Handy terminal key 23 X1CEE Handy terminal key 31
X1CE7 Handy terminal key 24 X1CEF Handy terminal key 32

X1CF0 Handy terminal key 33 X1CF8 Handy terminal key 41
X1CF1 Handy terminal key 34 X1CF9 Handy terminal key 42
X1CF2 Handy terminal key 35 X1CFA Handy terminal key 43
X1CF3 Handy terminal key 36 X1CFB Handy terminal key 44
X1CF4 Handy terminal key 37 X1CFC Handy terminal key 45
X1CF5 Handy terminal key 38 X1CFD
X1CF6 Handy terminal key 39 X1CFE
X1CF7 Handy terminal key 40 X1CFF
57
Device No.
X1D00 X1D20 X1D40 X1D60 PSW1 Position switch 1
Device No.
X1D0A X1D2A X1D4A X1D6A PSW11 Position switch 11
X1D0B X1D2B X1D4B X1D6B PSW12 Position switch 12
X1D0C X1D2C X1D4C X1D6C PSW13 Position switch 13
X1D0D X1D2D X1D4D X1D6D PSW14 Position switch 14
X1D0E X1D2E X1D4E X1D6E PSW15 Position switch 15
X1D0F X1D2F X1D4F X1D6F PSW16 Position switch 16
Device No.
58
4.2 PLC Input Signals (Data type: R***)

R0 AI1 Analog input 1 R8 KEY IN 1
R1 AI2 Analog input 2 R9
R3 AI4 Analog input 4 R11 Clock data Year/Month
R4 AI5 Analog input 5 R12 Clock data Date/Hour
R5 AI6 Analog input 6 R13 Clock data Minute/Second

R16 CNC software version code A R24
R17 CNC software version code B R25 PC high-speed process time
R18 CNC software version code C1 R26 Turret interference check status
R19 CNC software version code C2 R27 Interference object alarm information
R20 R28
R21 R29
R22 R30 Remote program input error information
R23 R31 Diagnosis data output

R32 R40
R33 R41
R34 R42
R35 R43
R36 R44
R37 PLC window parameter status R45
R38 R46
R39 R47
59

R48 R56 Battery drop cause
R49 R57 Temperature warning cause
R50 R58 5V/24V error cause
R51 R59
R52 R60 Control unit temperature
R53 R61
R54 R62 Tool ID communication error
information ▲
R55 R63

R64 R72 Ball screw thermal displacement
compensation
Compensation amount 1st axis [M]
R65 R73 Ball screw thermal displacement compensation Compensation amount 2nd axis [M]
R66 R74 Ball screw thermal displacement compensation Compensation amount 3rd axis [M]
R67 R75 Ball screw thermal displacement compensation Compensation amount 4th axis [M]
R68 PLC main scan time R76
R69 Emergency stop cause R77
R70 DIO card information R78
R71 R79

R80 R88
R81 R89
R82 R90
R83 R91
R84 R92
R85 Modal task data update cycle R93
R86 R94
R87 R95

R96 SMDOEN Speed monitor door open possible R104
R97 SODIO Safety observation I/O signal status R105
R98 R106
R99 R107
R100 R108
R101 R109
R102 R110
R103 R111
60
Device No.
R500 R700 R900 R1100 External search status
R501 R701 R901 R1101
R502 R702 R902 R1102
R503 R703 R903 R1103
R504 R704 R904 R1104 M code data 1 (L)
R505 R705 R905 R1105 M code data 1 (H)
R506 R706 R906 R1106 M code data 2 (L)
R507 R707 R907 R1107 M code data 2 (H)
Device No.
R508 R708 R908 R1108 M code data 3 (L)
R509 R709 R909 R1109 M code data 3 (H)
R510 R710 R910 R1110 M code data 4 (L)
R511 R711 R911 R1111 M code data 4 (H)
R512 R712 R912 R1112 S code data 1 (L)
R513 R713 R913 R1113 S code data 1 (H)
R514 R714 R914 R1114 S code data 2 (L)
R515 R715 R915 R1115 S code data 2 (H)
Device No.
R516 R716 R916 R1116 S code data 3 (L)
R517 R717 R917 R1117 S code data 3 (H)
R518 R718 R918 R1118 S code data 4 (L)
R519 R719 R919 R1119 S code data 4 (H)
R520 R720 R920 R1120
R521 R721 R921 R1121
R522 R722 R922 R1122
R523 R723 R923 R1123
Device No.
R524 R724 R924 R1124
R525 R725 R925 R1125
R526 R726 R926 R1126
R527 R727 R927 R1127
R528 R728 R928 R1128
R529 R729 R929 R1129
R530 R730 R930 R1130
R531 R731 R931 R1131
61
Device No.
R532 R732 R932 R1132
R533 R733 R933 R1133
R534 R734 R934 R1134
R535 R735 R935 R1135
R536 R736 R936 R1136 T code data 1 (L)
R537 R737 R937 R1137 T code data 1 (H)
R538 R738 R938 R1138 T code data 2 (L)
R539 R739 R939 R1139 T code data 2 (H)
Device No.
R540 R740 R940 R1140 T code data 3 (L)
R541 R741 R941 R1141 T code data 3 (H)
R542 R742 R942 R1142 T code data 4 (L)
R543 R743 R943 R1143 T code data 4 (H)
R544 R744 R944 R1144 2nd M function data 1 (L)
R545 R745 R945 R1145 2nd M function data 1 (H)
Device No.
R552 R752 R952 R1152
R553 R753 R953 R1153
R554 R754 R954 R1154 Chopping error No.
R555 R755 R955 R1155 Manual measurement status
Device No.
R556 R756 R956 R1156
R557 R757 R957 R1157
R558 R758 R958 R1158
R559 R759 R959 R1159
R560 R760 R960 R1160
R561 R761 R961 R1161
R562 R762 R962 R1162
R563 R763 R963 R1163
62
Device No.
R564 R764 R964 R1164 Load monitor warning axis ▲
R565 R765 R965 R1165 Load monitor alarm axis ▲
R566 R766 R966 R1166 Load monitor data alarm information ▲
R567 R767 R967 R1167 Group in tool life management
R568 R768 R968 R1168
R569 R769 R969 R1169
R570 R770 R970 R1170
R571 R771 R971 R1171 Adaptive control override ▲
Device No.
R572 R772 R972 R1172 CNC completion standby status
R573 R773 R973 R1173
R574 R774 R974 R1174 In initialization
R575 R775 R975 R1175 Initialization incompletion
R576 R776 R976 R1176 Reference position adjustment value
parameter setting completed
R577 R777 R977 R1177
R578 R778 R978 R1178
R579 R779 R979 R1179
Device No.
R580 R780 R980 R1180 Near reference position (per
reference position) 1st to 4th axis
R581 R781 R981 R1181 Near reference position (per reference position) 5th to 8th axis
R582 R782 R982 R1182 Presetter contact
R583 R783 R983 R1183 Presetter interlock
R584 R784 R984 R1184 Area signal X axis ON/OFF ▲
R585 R785 R985 R1185 Area signal Z axis ON/OFF ▲
R586 R786 R986 R1186 Area signal X axis (-) ON/OFF ▲
R587 R787 R987 R1187 Area signal Z axis (-) ON/OFF ▲
Device No.
R588 R788 R988 R1188 Takt time (ms) (L)
R589 R789 R989 R1189 Takt time (ms) (H)
R590 R790 R990 R1190 Takt time (min) (L)
R591 R791 R991 R1191 Takt time (min) (H)
R592 R792 R992 R1192
R593 R793 R993 R1193
R594 R794 R994 R1194
R595 R795 R995 R1195
63
Device No.
R596 R796 R996 R1196 Load monitor status (1) ▲
Device No.
R606 R806 R1006 R1206 No. of work machining (current value) (L)
R607 R807 R1007 R1207 No. of work machining (current value) (H)
R608 R808 R1008 R1208 No. of work machining (maximum value)
(L)
R609 R809 R1009 R1209 No. of work machining (maximum value)
(H)
R610 R810 R1010 R1210
R611 R811 R1011 R1211
Device No.
R612 R812 R1012 R1212
R613 R813 R1013 R1213
R614 R814 R1014 R1214
R615 R815 R1015 R1215
R616 R816 R1016 R1216
R617 R817 R1017 R1217
R618 R818 R1018 R1218
R619 R819 R1019 R1219
64
Device No.
R620 R820 R1020 R1220
R621 R821 R1021 R1221
R622 R822 R1022 R1222
R623 R823 R1023 R1223
R624 R824 R1024 R1224
R625 R825 R1025 R1225
R626 R826 R1026 R1226
R627 R827 R1027 R1227
Device No.
R628 R828 R1028 R1228 Tool life usage data (L)
R629 R829 R1029 R1229 Tool life usage data (H)
R630 R830 R1030 R1230 Number of registered tool life control
tools
R631 R831 R1031 R1231
R632 R832 R1032 R1232
R633 R833 R1033 R1233
R634 R834 R1034 R1234
R635 R835 R1035 R1235
Device No.
R636 R836 R1036 R1236 Circular feed in manual mode
Current position X (L) [M]
R637 R837 R1037 R1237 Circular feed in manual mode Current position X (H) [M]
R638 R838 R1038 R1238
R639 R839 R1039 R1239
Current position Y (L) [M]
R641 R841 R1041 R1241 Circular feed in manual mode Current position Y (H) [M]
R642 R842 R1042 R1242
R643 R843 R1043 R1243
65
Device No.
R644 R844 R1044 R1244
R645 R845 R1045 R1245
R646 R846 R1046 R1246
R647 R847 R1047 R1247
R648 R848 R1048 R1248
R649 R849 R1049 R1249
R650 R850 R1050 R1250
R651 R851 R1051 R1251
Device No.
R652 R852 R1052 R1252
R653 R853 R1053 R1253
R654 R854 R1054 R1254
R655 R855 R1055 R1255
R656 R856 R1056 R1256
R657 R857 R1057 R1257
R658 R858 R1058 R1258
R659 R859 R1059 R1259
66
Device No.
R4500 R4532 R4564 R4596 Machine position 1st axis (L) [M]
R4501 R4533 R4565 R4597 Machine position 1st axis (H) [M]
R4502 R4534 R4566 R4598
R4503 R4535 R4567 R4599
R4504 R4536 R4568 R4600 Machine position 2nd axis (L) [M]
R4505 R4537 R4569 R4601 Machine position 2nd axis (H) [M]
R4506 R4538 R4570 R4602
R4507 R4539 R4571 R4603
Device No.
R4508 R4540 R4572 R4604 Machine position 3rd axis (L) [M]
R4509 R4541 R4573 R4605 Machine position 3rd axis (H) [M]
R4510 R4542 R4574 R4606
R4511 R4543 R4575 R4607
R4512 R4544 R4576 R4608 Machine position 4th axis (L) [M]
R4513 R4545 R4577 R4609 Machine position 4th axis (H) [M]
R4514 R4546 R4578 R4610
R4515 R4547 R4579 R4611
Device No.
R4518 R4550 R4582 R4614
R4519 R4551 R4583 R4615
R4522 R4554 R4586 R4618
R4523 R4555 R4587 R4619
Device No.
R4526 R4558 R4590 R4622
R4527 R4559 R4591 R4623
R4530 R4562 R4594 R4626
R4531 R4563 R4595 R4627
67
Device No.
R4628 R4660 R4692 R4724 Feedback machine position 1st axis (L) [M]
R4629 R4661 R4693 R4725 Feedback machine position 1st axis (H) [M]
R4630 R4662 R4694 R4726

R4631 R4663 R4695 R4727
R4632 R4664 R4696 R4728 Feedback machine position 2nd axis (L) [M]
R4633 R4665 R4697 R4729 Feedback machine position 2nd axis (H) [M]
R4634 R4666 R4698 R4730

R4635 R4667 R4699 R4731
Device No.
R4636 R4668 R4700 R4732 Feedback machine position 3rd axis (L) [M]
R4637 R4669 R4701 R4733 Feedback machine position 3rd axis (H) [M]
R4638 R4670 R4702 R4734

R4639 R4671 R4703 R4735
R4640 R4672 R4704 R4736 Feedback machine position 4th axis (L) [M]
R4641 R4673 R4705 R4737 Feedback machine position 4th axis (H) [M]
R4642 R4674 R4706 R4738

R4643 R4675 R4707 R4739
Device No.
R4646 R4678 R4710 R4742

R4647 R4679 R4711 R4743
R4650 R4682 R4714 R4746

R4651 R4683 R4715 R4747
Device No.
R4654 R4686 R4718 R4750

R4655 R4687 R4719 R4751
R4658 R4690 R4722 R4754

R4659 R4691 R4723 R4755
68
Device No.
R4756 R4772 R4788 R4804 Servo deflection amount 1st axis (L) [M]
R4757 R4773 R4789 R4805 Servo deflection amount 1st axis (H) [M]
R4758 R4774 R4790 R4806 Servo deflection amount 2nd axis (L) [M]
R4759 R4775 R4791 R4807 Servo deflection amount 2nd axis (H) [M]
R4760 R4776 R4792 R4808 Servo deflection amount 3rd axis (L) [M]
R4761 R4777 R4793 R4809 Servo deflection amount 3rd axis (H) [M]
R4762 R4778 R4794 R4810 Servo deflection amount 4th axis (L) [M]
R4763 R4779 R4795 R4811 Servo deflection amount 4th axis (H) [M]
Device No.
Device No.
R4820 R4836 R4852 R4868 Motor rotation speed 1st axis (L)
R4821 R4837 R4853 R4869 Motor rotation speed 1st axis (H)
R4822 R4838 R4854 R4870 Motor rotation speed 2nd axis (L)
R4823 R4839 R4855 R4871 Motor rotation speed 2nd axis (H)
R4824 R4840 R4856 R4872 Motor rotation speed 3rd axis (L)
R4825 R4841 R4857 R4873 Motor rotation speed 3rd axis (H)
R4826 R4842 R4858 R4874 Motor rotation speed 4th axis (L)
R4827 R4843 R4859 R4875 Motor rotation speed 4th axis (H)
69
Device No.
Device No.
R4884 R4900 R4916 R4932 Motor load current 1st axis (L)
R4885 R4901 R4917 R4933 Motor load current 1st axis (H)
R4886 R4902 R4918 R4934 Motor load current 2nd axis (L)
R4887 R4903 R4919 R4935 Motor load current 2nd axis (H)
R4888 R4904 R4920 R4936 Motor load current 3rd axis (L)
R4889 R4905 R4921 R4937 Motor load current 3rd axis (H)
R4890 R4906 R4922 R4938 Motor load current 4th axis (L)
R4891 R4907 R4923 R4939 Motor load current 4th axis (H)
Device No.
Device No.
R4948 R4980 R5012 R5044 Skip coordinate position 1st axis (L) [M]
R4949 R4981 R5013 R5045 Skip coordinate position 1st axis (H) [M]
R4950 R4982 R5014 R5046
R4951 R4983 R5015 R5047
R4952 R4984 R5016 R5048 Skip coordinate position 2nd axis (L) [M]
R4953 R4985 R5017 R5049 Skip coordinate position 2nd axis (H) [M]
R4954 R4986 R5018 R5050
R4955 R4987 R5019 R5051
70
Device No.
R4956 R4988 R5020 R5052 Skip coordinate position 3rd axis (L) [M]
R4957 R4989 R5021 R5053 Skip coordinate position 3rd axis (H) [M]
R4958 R4990 R5022 R5054
R4959 R4991 R5023 R5055
R4960 R4992 R5024 R5056 Skip coordinate position 4th axis (L) [M]
R4961 R4993 R5025 R5057 Skip coordinate position 4th axis (H) [M]
R4962 R4994 R5026 R5058
R4963 R4995 R5027 R5059
Device No.
R4966 R4998 R5030 R5062
R4967 R4999 R5031 R5063
R4970 R5002 R5034 R5066
R4971 R5003 R5035 R5067
Device No.
R4974 R5006 R5038 R5070
R4975 R5007 R5039 R5071
R4978 R5010 R5042 R5074
R4979 R5011 R5043 R5075
Device No.
R5076 R5092 R5108 R5124 Synchronous error amount
1st, 9th, 17th, 25th axis (L) [M]
R5077 R5093 R5109 R5125 Synchronous error amount 1st, 9th, 17th, 25th axis (H) [M]
2nd, 10th, 18th, 26th axis (L) [M]
R5079 R5095 R5111 R5127 Synchronous error amount 2nd, 10th, 18th, 26th axis (H) [M]
3rd, 11th, 19th, 27th axis (L) [M]
R5081 R5097 R5113 R5129 Synchronous error amount 3rd, 11th, 19th, 27th axis (H) [M]
4th, 12th, 20th, 28th axis (L) [M]
R5083 R5099 R5115 R5131 Synchronous error amount 4th, 12th, 20th, 28th axis (H) [M]
71
Device No.
[M]
5th, 13th, 21st, 29th axis (L)
R5085 R5101 R5117 R5133 Synchronous error amount 5th, 13th, 21st, 29th axis (H) [M]
[M]
6th, 14th, 22nd, 30th axis (L)
R5087 R5103 R5119 R5135 Synchronous error amount 6th, 14th, 22nd, 30th axis (H) [M]
[M]
7th, 15th, 23rd, 31st axis (L)
R5089 R5105 R5121 R5137 Synchronous error amount 7th, 15th, 23rd, 31st axis (H) [M]
[M]
8th, 16th, 24th, 32nd axis (L)
R5091 R5107 R5123 R5139 Synchronous error amount 8th, 16th, 24th, 32nd axis (H) [M]
Device No.
R5140 R5148 R5156 R5164
R5141 R5149 R5157 R5165
R5142 R5150 R5158 R5166
R5143 R5151 R5159 R5167
R5144 R5152 R5160 R5168
R5145 R5153 R5161 R5169
R5146 R5154 R5162 R5170
R5147 R5155 R5163 R5171
Device No.
R5172 R5204 R5236 R5268 Cutting feed movement amount
1st axis (L) [M]
R5173 R5205 R5237 R5269 Cutting feed movement amount 1st axis (H) [M]
R5174 R5206 R5238 R5270
R5175 R5207 R5239 R5271
2nd axis (L) [M]
R5177 R5209 R5241 R5273 Cutting feed movement amount 2nd axis (H) [M]
R5178 R5210 R5242 R5274
R5179 R5211 R5243 R5275
72
Device No.
3rd axis (L) [M]
R5181 R5213 R5245 R5277 Cutting feed movement amount 3rd axis (H) [M]
R5182 R5214 R5246 R5278
R5183 R5215 R5247 R5279
4th axis (L) [M]
R5185 R5217 R5249 R5281 Cutting feed movement amount 4th axis (H) [M]
R5186 R5218 R5250 R5282
R5187 R5219 R5251 R5283
Device No.
5th axis (L) [M]
R5190 R5222 R5254 R5286
R5191 R5223 R5255 R5287
6th axis (L) [M]
R5194 R5226 R5258 R5290
R5195 R5227 R5259 R5291
Device No.
7th axis (L) [M]
R5198 R5230 R5262 R5294
R5199 R5231 R5263 R5295
8th axis (L) [M]
R5202 R5234 R5266 R5298
R5203 R5235 R5267 R5299
73
Device No.
R5300 R5308 R5316 R5324
R5301 R5309 R5317 R5325
R5302 R5310 R5318 R5326
R5303 R5311 R5319 R5327
R5304 R5312 R5320 R5328
R5305 R5313 R5321 R5329
R5306 R5314 R5322 R5330
R5307 R5315 R5323 R5331
Device No.
R5332 R5340 R5348 R5356
R5333 R5341 R5349 R5357
R5334 R5342 R5350 R5358
R5335 R5343 R5351 R5359
R5336 R5344 R5352 R5360
R5337 R5345 R5353 R5361
R5338 R5346 R5354 R5362
R5339 R5347 R5355 R5363
Device No.
R5620 R5628 R5636 R5644
R5621 R5629 R5637 R5645
R5622 R5630 R5638 R5646
R5623 R5631 R5639 R5647
R5624 R5632 R5640 R5648
R5625 R5633 R5641 R5649
R5626 R5634 R5642 R5650
R5627 R5635 R5643 R5651
Device No.
R5652 R5660 R5668 R5676
R5653 R5661 R5669 R5677
R5654 R5662 R5670 R5678
R5655 R5663 R5671 R5679
R5656 R5664 R5672 R5680
R5657 R5665 R5673 R5681
R5658 R5666 R5674 R5682
R5659 R5667 R5675 R5683
74
Device No.
R6372 R6380 R6388 R6396 User macro output #1132
(Controller -> PLC) (L)
R6373 R6381 R6389 R6397 User macro output #1132 (Controller -> PLC) (H)
(Controller ->PLC) (L)
R6379 R6387 R6395 R6403 User macro output #1135 (Controller ->PLC) (H)
75
Device No.
input (L)
(12-bit binary) (L)
Device No.
R6508 R6558 R6608 R6658 R6708 R6758 Spindle load
R6509 R6559 R6609 R6659 R6709 R6759
R6510 R6560 R6610 R6660 R6710 R6760
R6511 R6561 R6611 R6661 R6711 R6761
R6512 R6562 R6612 R6662 R6712 R6762
R6513 R6563 R6613 R6663 R6713 R6763
R6514 R6564 R6614 R6664 R6714 R6764
R6515 R6565 R6615 R6665 R6715 R6765
Device No.
R6516 R6566 R6616 R6666 R6716 R6766 Spindle synchronization phase error
/Hob axis delay angle
R6517 R6567 R6617 R6667 R6717 R6767 Spindle synchronization Maximum
phase error/Maximum hob axis
delay angle
R6518 R6568 R6618 R6668 R6718 R6768 Spindle synchronization Phase
offset data
R6519 R6569 R6619 R6669 R6719 R6769 Spindle synchronization Phase error
monitor
monitor (lower limit)
monitor (upper limit)
R6522 R6572 R6622 R6672 R6722 R6772 Spindle synchronization Phase error 1
76
Device No.
R6524 R6574 R6624 R6674 R6724 R6774
R6525 R6575 R6625 R6675 R6725 R6775
R6526 R6576 R6626 R6676 R6726 R6776
R6527 R6577 R6627 R6677 R6727 R6777
R6528 R6578 R6628 R6678 R6728 R6778
R6529 R6579 R6629 R6679 R6729 R6779
R6530 R6580 R6630 R6680 R6730 R6780
R6531 R6581 R6631 R6681 R6731 R6781
Device No.
R6532 R6582 R6632 R6682 R6732 R6782 Synchronous tapping Current
error width (L)
R6533 R6583 R6633 R6683 R6733 R6783 Synchronous tapping Current error width (H)
R6534 R6584 R6634 R6684 R6734 R6784 Synchronous tapping Maximum
error width (L)
R6535 R6585 R6635 R6685 R6735 R6785 Synchronous tapping Maximum error width (H)
R6536 R6586 R6636 R6686 R6736 R6786 Synchronous tapping Current
error angle (L)
R6537 R6587 R6637 R6687 R6737 R6787 Synchronous tapping Current error angle (H)
R6538 R6588 R6638 R6688 R6738 R6788 Synchronous tapping Maximum
error angle (L)
R6539 R6589 R6639 R6689 R6739 R6789 Synchronous tapping Maximum error angle (H)
77

R10000 RIO1 No. of error occurrences 1st ch R10008 RIO2 No. of error occurrences 1st ch
R10001 RIO1 No. of error occurrences 2nd ch R10009 RIO2 No. of error occurrences 2nd ch
R10002 RIO1 No. of error occurrences 3rd ch R10010 RIO2 No. of error occurrences 3rd ch
R10003 RIO1 No. of error occurrences 4th ch R10011 RIO2 No. of error occurrences 4th ch

R10016 RIO3 No. of error occurrences 1st ch R10024
R10017 RIO3 No. of error occurrences 2nd ch R10025
R10018 RIO3 No. of error occurrences 3rd ch R10026
R10019 RIO3 No. of error occurrences 4th ch R10027

R10064 Connection status of each channel R10073
RIO1,2
R10065 Connection status of each channel R10074
RIO3
R10066 R10075
R10067 R10076
R10068 CRC warning channel RIO1,2 R10077
R10069 CRC warning channel RIO3 R10078
R10070 R10079
R10071 R10079
78
Device No.
T life mgmt (M system)
R11800 R11850 R11900 R11950 Standby tool: Group No. (L)
R11801 R11851 R11901 R11951 Standby tool: Group No. (H)
R11802 R11852 R11902 R11952 Standby tool: Tool No. (L)
R11803 R11853 R11903 R11953 Standby tool: Tool No. (H)
R11804 R11854 R11904 R11954 Standby tool: Tool data flag/Status
R11805 R11855 R11905 R11955 Standby tool: Auxiliary data
R11806 R11856 R11906 R11956 Standby tool: Cumulative usage time (L)
R11807 R11857 R11907 R11957 Standby tool: Cumulative usage time (H)
Device No.
R11808 R11858 R11908 R11958 Standby tool: Service lifetime (L)
R11809 R11859 R11909 R11959 Standby tool: Service lifetime (H)
R11810 R11860 R11910 R11960 Standby tool: Cumulative usage count
R11811 R11861 R11911 R11961 Standby tool: Service life count
R11812 R11862 R11912 R11962 Standby tool: Cumulative usage
wear amount (L)
R11813 R11863 R11913 R11963 Standby tool: Cumulative usage wear amount (H)
R11814 R11864 R11914 R11964 Standby tool: Service life wear
amount (L)
R11815 R11865 R11915 R11965 Standby tool: Service life wear amount (H)
Device No.
R11816 R11866 R11916 R11966 Standby tool: Length compensation
amount (L)
R11817 R11867 R11917 R11967 Standby tool: Length compensation amount (H)
R11818 R11868 R11918 R11968 Standby tool: Radius compensation
amount (L)
R11819 R11869 R11919 R11969 Standby tool: Radius compensation amount (H)
R11820 R11870 R11920 R11970 Standby tool: Length wear amount (L)
R11821 R11871 R11921 R11971 Standby tool: Length wear amount (H)
R11822 R11872 R11922 R11972 Standby tool: Radius wear amount (L)
R11823 R11873 R11923 R11973 Standby tool: Radius wear amount (H)
79
Device No.
T life mgmt (M system)
R11824 R11874 R11924 R11974 Active tool: Group No. (L)
R11825 R11875 R11925 R11975 Active tool: Group No. (H)
R11826 R11876 R11926 R11976 Active tool: Tool No. (L)
R11827 R11877 R11927 R11977 Active tool: Tool No. (H)
R11828 R11878 R11928 R11978 Active tool: Tool data flag/Status
R11829 R11879 R11929 R11979 Active tool: Auxiliary data
R11830 R11880 R11930 R11980 Active tool: Cumulative usage time (L)
R11831 R11881 R11931 R11981 Active tool: Cumulative usage time (H)
Device No.
R11832 R11882 R11932 R11982 Active tool: Service lifetime (L)
R11833 R11883 R11933 R11983 Active tool: Service lifetime (H)
R11834 R11884 R11934 R11984 Active tool: Cumulative usage count
R11835 R11885 R11935 R11985 Active tool: Service life count
R11836 R11886 R11936 R11986 Active tool: Cumulative usage wear
amount (L)
R11837 R11887 R11937 R11987 Active tool: Cumulative usage wear amount (H)
R11838 R11888 R11938 R11988 Active tool: Service life wear
amount (L)
R11839 R11889 R11939 R11989 Active tool: Service life wear amount (H)
Device No.
R11840 R11890 R11940 R11990 Active tool: Length compensation
amount (L)
R11841 R11891 R11941 R11991 Active tool: Length compensation amount (H)
R11842 R11892 R11942 R11992 Active tool: Radius compensation
amount (L)
R11843 R11893 R11943 R11993 Active tool: Radius compensation amount (H)
R11844 R11894 R11944 R11994 Active tool: Length wear amount (L)
R11845 R11895 R11945 R11995 Active tool: Length wear amount (H)
R11846 R11896 R11946 R11996 Active tool: Radius wear amount (L)
R11847 R11897 R11947 R11997 Active tool: Radius wear amount (H)
80
4.3 PLC Output Signals (Bit type: Y***)

Y700 Y708 *KEY1 Data protect key 1
Y701 Y709 *KEY2 Data protect key 2
Y702 Y70A *KEY3 Data protect key 3
Y703 Y70B
Y704 RHD1 Integration time input 1 Y70C PDISP Program display during operation
Y705 RHD2 Integration time input 2 Y70D Handle pulse encoder
communication connector priority
Y706 Y70E
Y707 Y70F

Y710 Y718 *PCD1 PLC axis near point detection 1st axis
Y711 Y719 *PCD2 PLC axis near point detection 2nd axis
Y712 Y71A *PCD3 PLC axis near point detection 3rd axis
Y713 Y71B *PCD4 PLC axis near point detection 4th axis
Y714 Y71C *PCD5 PLC axis near point detection 5th axis
Y715 Y71D *PCD6 PLC axis near point detection 6th axis
Y716 Y71E
Y717 Y71F

Y720 HS1P PLC axis 1st handle valid Y728 CRTFN CRT changeover completion
Y721 HS2P PLC axis 2nd handle valid Y729 SCRON Screen display request
Y722 HS3P PLC axis 3rd handle valid Y72A
Y723 PLC axis control buffering mode Y72B Collecting diagnosis data stop
valid
Y724 Y72C SMPTRG NC data sampling trigger
Y725 Y72D
Y726 Y72E Pallet program registration
In APC execution
Y727 Y72F Pallet program registration
ready

Y730 DISP1 Display changeover $1 Y738
Y731 DISP2 Display changeover $2 Y739
Y732 DISP3 Display changeover $3 Y73A
Y733 DISP4 Display changeover $4 Y73B
Y734 Y73C
Y735 Y73D
Y736 Y73E
Y737 Y73F CCHK Interference check valid
81

Y740 Tool IC new read ▲ Y748 PLC skip 1
Y741 Tool IC exchange read ▲ Y749 PLC skip 2
Y742 MCT Contactor shutoff test Y74A PLC skip 3
Y743 Y74B PLC skip 4
Y744 Y74C PLC skip 5
Y745 Y74D PLC skip 6
Y746 Y74E PLC skip 7
Y747 Turret interference check valid Y74F PLC skip 8

Y750 Y758
Y751 Y759
Y752 Y75A
Y753 Y75B
Y754 Y75C
Y755 Y75D Automatic power OFF request
Y756 Y75E
Y757 Y75F

Y760 Y768 Door open I
Y761 Y769
Y762 Y76A
Y763 Y76B
Y764 Encoder 1 arbitrary pulse selection Y76C Remote program input start
Y765 Encoder 2 arbitrary pulse selection Y76D Tool ID data read ▲
Y766 Encoder 1 arbitrary pulse valid Y76E Tool ID data write ▲
Y767 Encoder 2 arbitrary pulse valid Y76F Tool ID data erase ▲

Y770 PLC axis control valid 1st axis Y778
Y771 PLC axis control valid 2nd axis Y779
Y772 PLC axis control valid 3rd axis Y77A
Y773 PLC axis control valid 4th axis Y77B
Y774 PLC axis control valid 5th axis Y77C
Y775 PLC axis control valid 6th axis Y77D
Y776 Y77E
Y777 Y77F
82
Device No.
Y780 Y788 Y790 Y798 DTCH1 Control axis detach 1st axis
Y781 Y789 Y791 Y799 DTCH2 Control axis detach 2nd axis
Y782 Y78A Y792 Y79A DTCH3 Control axis detach 3rd axis
Y783 Y78B Y793 Y79B DTCH4 Control axis detach 4th axis
Y784 Y78C Y794 Y79C DTCH5 Control axis detach 5th axis
Y785 Y78D Y795 Y79D DTCH6 Control axis detach 6th axis
Y786 Y78E Y796 Y79E DTCH7 Control axis detach 7th axis
Y787 Y78F Y797 Y79F DTCH8 Control axis detach 8th axis
Device No.
Y7A0 Y7A8 Y7B0 Y7B8 *SVF1 Servo OFF 1st axis
Y7A1 Y7A9 Y7B1 Y7B9 *SVF2 Servo OFF 2nd axis
Y7A2 Y7AA Y7B2 Y7BA *SVF3 Servo OFF 3rd axis
Y7A3 Y7AB Y7B3 Y7BB *SVF4 Servo OFF 4th axis
Y7A4 Y7AC Y7B4 Y7BC *SVF5 Servo OFF 5th axis
Y7A5 Y7AD Y7B5 Y7BD *SVF6 Servo OFF 6th axis
Y7A6 Y7AE Y7B6 Y7BE *SVF7 Servo OFF 7th axis
Y7A7 Y7AF Y7B7 Y7BF *SVF8 Servo OFF 8th axis
Device No.
Y7C0 Y7C8 Y7D0 Y7D8 MI1 Mirror image 1st axis
Y7C1 Y7C9 Y7D1 Y7D9 MI2 Mirror image 2nd axis
Y7C2 Y7CA Y7D2 Y7DA MI3 Mirror image 3rd axis
Y7C3 Y7CB Y7D3 Y7DB MI4 Mirror image 4th axis
Y7C4 Y7CC Y7D4 Y7DC MI5 Mirror image 5th axis
Y7C5 Y7CD Y7D5 Y7DD MI6 Mirror image 6th axis
Y7C6 Y7CE Y7D6 Y7DE MI7 Mirror image 7th axis
Y7C7 Y7CF Y7D7 Y7DF MI8 Mirror image 8th axis
Device No.
Y7E0 Y7E8 Y7F0 Y7F8 *+EDT1 External deceleration+ 1st axis
Y7E1 Y7E9 Y7F1 Y7F9 *+EDT2 External deceleration+ 2nd axis
Y7E2 Y7EA Y7F2 Y7FA *+EDT3 External deceleration+ 3rd axis
Y7E3 Y7EB Y7F3 Y7FB *+EDT4 External deceleration+ 4th axis
Y7E4 Y7EC Y7F4 Y7FC *+EDT5 External deceleration+ 5th axis
Y7E5 Y7ED Y7F5 Y7FD *+EDT6 External deceleration+ 6th axis
Y7E6 Y7EE Y7F6 Y7FE *+EDT7 External deceleration+ 7th axis
Y7E7 Y7EF Y7F7 Y7FF *+EDT8 External deceleration+ 8th axis
83
Device No.
Y800 Y808 Y810 Y818 *-EDT1 External deceleration- 1st axis
Y801 Y809 Y811 Y819 *-EDT2 External deceleration- 2nd axis
Y802 Y80A Y812 Y81A *-EDT3 External deceleration- 3rd axis
Y803 Y80B Y813 Y81B *-EDT4 External deceleration- 4th axis
Y804 Y80C Y814 Y81C *-EDT5 External deceleration- 5th axis
Y805 Y80D Y815 Y81D *-EDT6 External deceleration- 6th axis
Y806 Y80E Y816 Y81E *-EDT7 External deceleration- 7th axis
Y807 Y80F Y817 Y81F *-EDT8 External deceleration- 8th axis
Device No.
Y820 Y828 Y830 Y838 *+AIT1 Automatic interlock+ 1st axis
Y821 Y829 Y831 Y839 *+AIT2 Automatic interlock+ 2nd axis
Y822 Y82A Y832 Y83A *+AIT3 Automatic interlock+ 3rd axis
Y823 Y82B Y833 Y83B *+AIT4 Automatic interlock+ 4th axis
Y824 Y82C Y834 Y83C *+AIT5 Automatic interlock+ 5th axis
Y825 Y82D Y835 Y83D *+AIT6 Automatic interlock+ 6th axis
Y826 Y82E Y836 Y83E *+AIT7 Automatic interlock+ 7th axis
Y827 Y82F Y837 Y83F *+AIT8 Automatic interlock+ 8th axis
Device No.
Y840 Y848 Y850 Y858 *-AIT1 Automatic interlock- 1st axis
Y841 Y849 Y851 Y859 *-AIT2 Automatic interlock- 2nd axis
Y842 Y84A Y852 Y85A *-AIT3 Automatic interlock- 3rd axis
Y843 Y84B Y853 Y85B *-AIT4 Automatic interlock- 4th axis
Y844 Y84C Y854 Y85C *-AIT5 Automatic interlock- 5th axis
Y845 Y84D Y855 Y85D *-AIT6 Automatic interlock- 6th axis
Y846 Y84E Y856 Y85E *-AIT7 Automatic interlock- 7th axis
Y847 Y84F Y857 Y85F *-AIT8 Automatic interlock- 8th axis
Device No.
Y860 Y868 Y870 Y878 *+MIT1 Manual interlock+ 1st axis
Y861 Y869 Y871 Y879 *+MIT2 Manual interlock+ 2nd axis
Y862 Y86A Y872 Y87A *+MIT3 Manual interlock+ 3rd axis
Y863 Y86B Y873 Y87B *+MIT4 Manual interlock+ 4th axis
Y864 Y86C Y874 Y87C *+MIT5 Manual interlock+ 5th axis
Y865 Y86D Y875 Y87D *+MIT6 Manual interlock+ 6th axis
Y866 Y86E Y876 Y87E *+MIT7 Manual interlock+ 7th axis
Y867 Y86F Y877 Y87F *+MIT8 Manual interlock+ 8th axis
84
Device No.
Y880 Y888 Y890 Y898 *-MIT1 Manual interlock- 1st axis
Y881 Y889 Y891 Y899 *-MIT2 Manual interlock- 2nd axis
Y882 Y88A Y892 Y89A *-MIT3 Manual interlock- 3rd axis
Y883 Y88B Y893 Y89B *-MIT4 Manual interlock- 4th axis
Y884 Y88C Y894 Y89C *-MIT5 Manual interlock- 5th axis
Y885 Y88D Y895 Y89D *-MIT6 Manual interlock- 6th axis
Y886 Y88E Y896 Y89E *-MIT7 Manual interlock- 7th axis
Y887 Y88F Y897 Y89F *-MIT8 Manual interlock- 8th axis
Device No.
Y8A0 Y8A8 Y8B0 Y8B8 AMLK1 Automatic machine lock 1st axis
Y8A1 Y8A9 Y8B1 Y8B9 AMLK2 Automatic machine lock 2nd axis
Y8A2 Y8AA Y8B2 Y8BA AMLK3 Automatic machine lock 3rd axis
Y8A3 Y8AB Y8B3 Y8BB AMLK4 Automatic machine lock 4th axis
Y8A4 Y8AC Y8B4 Y8BC AMLK5 Automatic machine lock 5th axis
Y8A5 Y8AD Y8B5 Y8BD AMLK6 Automatic machine lock 6th axis
Y8A6 Y8AE Y8B6 Y8BE AMLK7 Automatic machine lock 7th axis
Y8A7 Y8AF Y8B7 Y8BF AMLK8 Automatic machine lock 8th axis
Device No.
Y8C0 Y8C8 Y8D0 Y8D8 MMLK1 Manual machine lock 1st axis
Y8C1 Y8C9 Y8D1 Y8D9 MMLK2 Manual machine lock 2nd axis
Y8C2 Y8CA Y8D2 Y8DA MMLK3 Manual machine lock 3rd axis
Y8C3 Y8CB Y8D3 Y8DB MMLK4 Manual machine lock 4th axis
Y8C4 Y8CC Y8D4 Y8DC MMLK5 Manual machine lock 5th axis
Y8C5 Y8CD Y8D5 Y8DD MMLK6 Manual machine lock 6th axis
Y8C6 Y8CE Y8D6 Y8DE MMLK7 Manual machine lock 7th axis
Y8C7 Y8CF Y8D7 Y8DF MMLK8 Manual machine lock 8th axis
Device No.
Y8E0 Y8E8 Y8F0 Y8F8 +J1 Feed axis selection+ 1st axis
Y8E1 Y8E9 Y8F1 Y8F9 +J2 Feed axis selection+ 2nd axis
Y8E2 Y8EA Y8F2 Y8FA +J3 Feed axis selection+ 3rd axis
Y8E3 Y8EB Y8F3 Y8FB +J4 Feed axis selection+ 4th axis
Y8E4 Y8EC Y8F4 Y8FC +J5 Feed axis selection+ 5th axis
Y8E5 Y8ED Y8F5 Y8FD +J6 Feed axis selection+ 6th axis
Y8E6 Y8EE Y8F6 Y8FE +J7 Feed axis selection+ 7th axis
Y8E7 Y8EF Y8F7 Y8FF +J8 Feed axis selection+ 8th axis
85
Device No.
Y900 Y908 Y910 Y918 -J1 Feed axis selection- 1st axis
Y901 Y909 Y911 Y919 -J2 Feed axis selection- 2nd axis
Y902 Y90A Y912 Y91A -J3 Feed axis selection- 3rd axis
Y903 Y90B Y913 Y91B -J4 Feed axis selection- 4th axis
Y904 Y90C Y914 Y91C -J5 Feed axis selection- 5th axis
Y905 Y90D Y915 Y91D -J6 Feed axis selection- 6th axis
Y906 Y90E Y916 Y91E -J7 Feed axis selection- 7th axis
Y907 Y90F Y917 Y91F -J8 Feed axis selection- 8th axis
Device No.
Y920 Y928 Y930 Y938 MAE1 Manual/Automatic simultaneous valid 1st axis
Y921 Y929 Y931 Y939 MAE2 Manual/Automatic simultaneous valid 2nd axis
Y922 Y92A Y932 Y93A MAE3 Manual/Automatic simultaneous valid 3rd axis
Y923 Y92B Y933 Y93B MAE4 Manual/Automatic simultaneous valid 4th axis
Y924 Y92C Y934 Y93C MAE5 Manual/Automatic simultaneous valid 5th axis
Y925 Y92D Y935 Y93D MAE6 Manual/Automatic simultaneous valid 6th axis
Y926 Y92E Y936 Y93E MAE7 Manual/Automatic simultaneous valid 7th axis
Y927 Y92F Y937 Y93F MAE8 Manual/Automatic simultaneous valid 8th axis
Device No.
Y940 Y948 Y950 Y958 FBE1 Manual feedrate B valid 1st axis
Y941 Y949 Y951 Y959 FBE2 Manual feedrate B valid 2nd axis
Y942 Y94A Y952 Y95A FBE3 Manual feedrate B valid 3rd axis
Y943 Y94B Y953 Y95B FBE4 Manual feedrate B valid 4th axis
Y944 Y94C Y954 Y95C FBE5 Manual feedrate B valid 5th axis
Y945 Y94D Y955 Y95D FBE6 Manual feedrate B valid 6th axis
Y946 Y94E Y956 Y95E FBE7 Manual feedrate B valid 7th axis
Y947 Y94F Y957 Y95F FBE8 Manual feedrate B valid 8th axis
Device No.
Y960 Y968 Y970 Y978 AZS1 Zero point initialization set mode 1st axis
Y961 Y969 Y971 Y979 AZS2 Zero point initialization set mode 2nd axis
Y962 Y96A Y972 Y97A AZS3 Zero point initialization set mode 3rd axis
Y963 Y96B Y973 Y97B AZS4 Zero point initialization set mode 4th axis
Y964 Y96C Y974 Y97C AZS5 Zero point initialization set mode 5th axis
Y965 Y96D Y975 Y97D AZS6 Zero point initialization set mode 6th axis
Y966 Y96E Y976 Y97E AZS7 Zero point initialization set mode 7th axis
Y967 Y96F Y977 Y97F AZS8 Zero point initialization set mode 8th axis
86
Device No.
Y980 Y988 Y990 Y998 ZST1 Zero point initialization set start 1st axis
Y981 Y989 Y991 Y999 ZST2 Zero point initialization set start 2nd axis
Y982 Y98A Y992 Y99A ZST3 Zero point initialization set start 3rd axis
Y983 Y98B Y993 Y99B ZST4 Zero point initialization set start 4th axis
Y984 Y98C Y994 Y99C ZST5 Zero point initialization set start 5th axis
Y985 Y98D Y995 Y99D ZST6 Zero point initialization set start 6th axis
Y986 Y98E Y996 Y99E ZST7 Zero point initialization set start 7th axis
Y987 Y98F Y997 Y99F ZST8 Zero point initialization set start 8th axis
Device No.
Y9A0 Y9A8 Y9B0 Y9B8 ILC1 Current limit changeover 1st axis
Y9A1 Y9A9 Y9B1 Y9B9 ILC2 Current limit changeover 2nd axis
Y9A2 Y9AA Y9B2 Y9BA ILC3 Current limit changeover 3rd axis
Y9A3 Y9AB Y9B3 Y9BB ILC4 Current limit changeover 4th axis
Y9A4 Y9AC Y9B4 Y9BC ILC5 Current limit changeover 5th axis
Y9A5 Y9AD Y9B5 Y9BD ILC6 Current limit changeover 6th axis
Y9A6 Y9AE Y9B6 Y9BE ILC7 Current limit changeover 7th axis
Y9A7 Y9AF Y9B7 Y9BF ILC8 Current limit changeover 8th axis
Device No.
Y9C0 Y9C8 Y9D0 Y9D8 DOR1 Droop release request 1st axis
Y9C1 Y9C9 Y9D1 Y9D9 DOR2 Droop release request 2nd axis
Y9C2 Y9CA Y9D2 Y9DA DOR3 Droop release request 3rd axis
Y9C3 Y9CB Y9D3 Y9DB DOR4 Droop release request 4th axis
Y9C4 Y9CC Y9D4 Y9DC DOR5 Droop release request 5th axis
Y9C5 Y9CD Y9D5 Y9DD DOR6 Droop release request 6th axis
Y9C6 Y9CE Y9D6 Y9DE DOR7 Droop release request 7th axis
Y9C7 Y9CF Y9D7 Y9DF DOR8 Droop release request 8th axis
Device No.
Y9E0 Y9E8 Y9F0 Y9F8 Workpiece coordinate Measurement
1st axis (Spare)
Y9E1 Y9E9 Y9F1 Y9F9 Workpiece coordinate Measurement 2nd axis
Y9E2 Y9EA Y9F2 Y9FA Workpiece coordinate Measurement 3rd axis (Spare)
Y9E3 Y9EB Y9F3 Y9FB Workpiece coordinate Measurement 4th axis (Spare)
Y9E4 Y9EC Y9F4 Y9FC Workpiece coordinate Measurement 5th axis (Spare)
Y9E5 Y9ED Y9F5 Y9FD Workpiece coordinate Measurement 6th axis (Spare)
Y9E6 Y9EE Y9F6 Y9FE Workpiece coordinate Measurement 7th axis (Spare)
Y9E7 Y9EF Y9F7 Y9FF Workpiece coordinate Measurement 8th axis (Spare)
87
Device No.
YA00 YA08 YA10 YA18 DTCH21 Control axis detach 2 1st axis
YA01 YA09 YA11 YA19 DTCH22 Control axis detach 2 2nd axis
YA02 YA0A YA12 YA1A DTCH23 Control axis detach 2 3rd axis
YA03 YA0B YA13 YA1B DTCH24 Control axis detach 2 4th axis
YA04 YA0C YA14 YA1C DTCH25 Control axis detach 2 5th axis
YA05 YA0D YA15 YA1D DTCH26 Control axis detach 2 6th axis
YA06 YA0E YA16 YA1E DTCH27 Control axis detach 2 7th axis
YA07 YA0F YA17 YA1F DTCH28 Control axis detach 2 8th axis
Device No.
YA20 YA28 YA30 YA38 Unclamp completion 1st axis
YA21 YA29 YA31 YA39 Unclamp completion 2nd axis
YA22 YA2A YA32 YA3A Unclamp completion 3rd axis
YA23 YA2B YA33 YA3B Unclamp completion 4th axis
YA24 YA2C YA34 YA3C Unclamp completion 5th axis
YA25 YA2D YA35 YA3D Unclamp completion 6th axis
YA26 YA2E YA36 YA3E Unclamp completion 7th axis
YA27 YA2F YA37 YA3F Unclamp completion 8th axis
Device No.
YA40 YA48 YA50 YA58 Each axis reference position return
1st axis
YA41 YA49 YA51 YA59 Each axis reference position return 2nd axis
YA42 YA4A YA52 YA5A Each axis reference position return 3rd axis
YA43 YA4B YA53 YA5B Each axis reference position return 4th axis
YA44 YA4C YA54 YA5C Each axis reference position return 5th axis
YA45 YA4D YA55 YA5D Each axis reference position return 6th axis
YA46 YA4E YA56 YA5E Each axis reference position return 7th axis
YA47 YA4F YA57 YA5F Each axis reference position return 8th axis
Device No.
YA60 YA68 YA70 YA78 Mixed synchronization control
request 1st axis
YA61 YA69 YA71 YA79 Mixed synchronization control request 2nd axis
YA62 YA6A YA72 YA7A Mixed synchronization control request 3rd axis
YA63 YA6B YA73 YA7B Mixed synchronization control request 4th axis
YA64 YA6C YA74 YA7C Mixed synchronization control request 5th axis
YA65 YA6D YA75 YA7D Mixed synchronization control request 6th axis
YA66 YA6E YA76 YA7E Mixed synchronization control request 7th axis
YA67 YA6F YA77 YA7F Mixed synchronization control request 8th axis
88
Device No.
YA80 YA88 YA90 YA98 SYNC1 Synchronous control request 1st axis
YA81 YA89 YA91 YA99 SYNC2 Synchronous control request 2nd axis
YA82 YA8A YA92 YA9A SYNC3 Synchronous control request 3rd axis
YA83 YA8B YA93 YA9B SYNC4 Synchronous control request 4th axis
YA84 YA8C YA94 YA9C SYNC5 Synchronous control request 5th axis
YA85 YA8D YA95 YA9D SYNC6 Synchronous control request 6th axis
YA86 YA8E YA96 YA9E SYNC7 Synchronous control request 7th axis
YA87 YA8F YA97 YA9F SYNC8 Synchronous control request 8th axis
Device No.
YAA0 YAA8 YAB0 YAB8 PILE1 Superimposition control request 1st axis
YAA1 YAA9 YAB1 YAB9 PILE2 Superimposition control request 2nd axis
YAA2 YAAA YAB2 YABA PILE3 Superimposition control request 3rd axis
YAA3 YAAB YAB3 YABB PILE4 Superimposition control request 4th axis
YAA4 YAAC YAB4 YABC PILE5 Superimposition control request 5th axis
YAA5 YAAD YAB5 YABD PILE6 Superimposition control request 6th axis
YAA6 YAAE YAB6 YABE PILE7 Superimposition control request 7th axis
YAA7 YAAF YAB7 YABF PILE8 Superimposition control request 8th axis
Device No.
YAC0 YAC8 YAD0 YAD8 NC axis control selection 1st axis
YAC1 YAC9 YAD1 YAD9 NC axis control selection 2nd axis
YAC2 YACA YAD2 YADA NC axis control selection 3rd axis
YAC3 YACB YAD3 YADB NC axis control selection 4th axis
YAC4 YACC YAD4 YADC NC axis control selection 5th axis
YAC5 YACD YAD5 YADD NC axis control selection 6th axis
YAC6 YACE YAD6 YADE NC axis control selection 7th axis
YAC7 YACF YAD7 YADF NC axis control selection 8th axis
Device No.
YAE0 YAE8 YAF0 YAF8
YAE1 YAE9 YAF1 YAF9
YAE2 YAEA YAF2 YAFA
YAE3 YAEB YAF3 YAFB
YAE4 YAEC YAF4 YAFC
YAE5 YAED YAF5 YAFD
YAE6 YAEE YAF6 YAFE
YAE7 YAEF YAF7 YAFF
89
Device No.
YC00 YD40 YE80 YFC0 J Jog mode
YC01 YD41 YE81 YFC1 H Handle mode
YC02 YD42 YE82 YFC2 S Incremental mode
YC03 YD43 YE83 YFC3 PTP Manual arbitrary feed mode
YC04 YD44 YE84 YFC4 ZRN Reference position return mode
YC05 YD45 YE85 YFC5 AST Automatic initialization mode
YC06 YD46 YE86 YFC6
YC07 YD47 YE87 YFC7
Device No.
YC08 YD48 YE88 YFC8 MEM Memory mode
YC09 YD49 YE89 YFC9 T Tape mode
YC0A YD4A YE8A YFCA Online operation mode (Computer link B)
YC0B YD4B YE8B YFCB D MDI mode
YC0C YD4C YE8C YFCC
YC0D YD4D YE8D YFCD
YC0E YD4E YE8E YFCE
YC0F YD4F YE8F YFCF
Device No.
YC10 YD50 YE90 YFD0 ST Automatic operation "start"
command (Cycle start)
YC11 YD51 YE91 YFD1 *SP Automatic operation "pause"
command (Feed hold)
YC12 YD52 YE92 YFD2 SBK Single block
YC13 YD53 YE93 YFD3 *BSL Block start interlock
YC14 YD54 YE94 YFD4 *CSL Cutting block start interlock
YC15 YD55 YE95 YFD5 DRN Dry run
YC16 YD56 YE96 YFD6
YC17 YD57 YE97 YFD7 ERD Error detection
Device No.
YC18 YD58 YE98 YFD8 NRST1 NC reset 1
YC19 YD59 YE99 YFD9 NRST2 NC reset 2
YC1A YD5A YE9A YFDA RRW Reset & rewind
YC1B YD5B YE9B YFDB *CDZ Chamfering
YC1C YD5C YE9C YFDC ARST Automatic restart
YC1D YD5D YE9D YFDD External search strobe
YC1E YD5E YE9E YFDE FIN1 M function finish 1
YC1F YD5F YE9F YFDF FIN2 M function finish 2
90
Device No.
YC20 YD60 YEA0 YFE0 TLM Tool length measurement 1
YC21 YD61 YEA1 YFE1 TLMS Tool length measurement 2
YC22 YD62 YEA2 YFE2 Synchronization correction mode
YC23 YD63 YEA3 YFE3 PRST Program restart
YC24 YD64 YEA4 YFE4 PB Playback
YC25 YD65 YEA5 YFE5 UIT Macro interrupt
YC26 YD66 YEA6 YFE6 RT Rapid traverse
YC27 YD67 YEA7 YFE7 VRV Reverse run
Device No.
YC28 YD68 YEA8 YFE8 ABS Manual absolute
YC29 YD69 YEA9 YFE9 DLK Display lock
YC2A YD6A YEAA YFEA F1D F1-digit speed change valid
YC2B YD6B YEAB YFEB CRQ Recalculation request
YC2C YD6C YEAC YFEC QEMG PLC emergency stop
YC2D YD6D YEAD YFED RTN Reference position retract
YC2E YD6E YEAE YFEE PIT PLC interrupt
YC2F YD6F YEAF YFEF
Device No.
YC30 YD70 YEB0 YFF0 CHPS Chopping
YC31 YD71 YEB1 YFF1 RSST Search & start
YC32 YD72 YEB2 YFF2
YC33 YD73 YEB3 YFF3
YC34 YD74 YEB4 YFF4 Chopping parameter valid
YC35 YD75 YEB5 YFF5 Inclined axis control valid
YC36 YD76 YEB6 YFF6 Inclined axis control: No Z axis
compensation
YC37 YD77 YEB7 YFF7 BDT1 Optional block skip 1
Device No.
YC3A YD7A YEBA YFFA BDT4 Optional block skip 4
YC3B YD7B YEBB YFFB BDT5 Optional block skip 5
YC3C YD7C YEBC YFFC BDT6 Optional block skip 6
YC3D YD7D YEBD YFFD BDT7 Optional block skip 7
YC3E YD7E YEBE YFFE BDT8 Optional block skip 8
YC3F YD7F YEBF YFFF BDT9 Optional block skip 9
91
Device No.
YC40 YD80 YEC0 Y1000 HS11 1st handle axis selection code 1
YC45 YD85 YEC5 Y1005
YC46 YD86 YEC6 Y1006
YC47 YD87 YEC7 Y1007 HS1S 1st handle valid
Device No.
YC48 YD88 YEC8 Y1008 HS21 2nd handle axis selection code 1
YC49 YD89 YEC9 Y1009 HS22 2nd handle axis selection code 2
YC4A YD8A YECA Y100A HS24 2nd handle axis selection code 4
YC4B YD8B YECB Y100B HS28 2nd handle axis selection code 8
YC4C YD8C YECC Y100C HS216 2nd handle axis selection code 16
YC4D YD8D YECD Y100D
YC4E YD8E YECE Y100E
YC4F YD8F YECF Y100F HS2S 2nd handle valid
Device No.
YC50 YD90 YED0 Y1010 HS31 3rd handle axis selection code 1
YC55 YD95 YED5 Y1015
YC56 YD96 YED6 Y1016
YC57 YD97 YED7 Y1017 HS3S 3rd handle valid
Device No.
YC58 YD98 YED8 Y1018 OVC Override cancel
YC59 YD99 YED9 Y1019 OVSL Manual override method selection
YC5A YD9A YEDA Y101A AFL Miscellaneous function lock
YC5B YD9B YEDB Y101B
YC5C YD9C YEDC Y101C TRV Tap retract
YC5D YD9D YEDD Y101D
YC5E YD9E YEDE Y101E Tool handle feed mode
YC5F YD9F YEDF Y101F
92
Device No.
YC60 YDA0 YEE0 Y1020 *FV1 Cutting feedrate override code 1
YC65 YDA5 YEE5 Y1025
YC66 YDA6 YEE6 Y1026 FV2E 2nd cutting feedrate override valid
YC67 YDA7 YEE7 Y1027 FVS Cutting feedrate override method
selection
Device No.
YC68 YDA8 YEE8 Y1028 ROV1 Rapid traverse override code 1
YC69 YDA9 YEE9 Y1029 ROV2 Rapid traverse override code 2
YC6A YDAA YEEA Y102A
YC6B YDAB YEEB Y102B
YC6C YDAC YEEC Y102C
YC6D YDAD YEED Y102D
YC6E YDAE YEEE Y102E
YC6F YDAF YEEF Y102F ROVS Rapid traverse override method
selection
Device No.
YC70 YDB0 YEF0 Y1030 *JV1 Manual feedrate code 1
YC75 YDB5 YEF5 Y1035
YC76 YDB6 YEF6 Y1036
YC77 YDB7 YEF7 Y1037 JVS Manual feedrate method selection
Device No.
YC78 YDB8 YEF8 Y1038 PCF1 Feedrate least increment code 1
YC79 YDB9 YEF9 Y1039 PCF2 Feedrate least increment code 2
YC7A YDBA YEFA Y103A
YC7B YDBB YEFB Y103B JHAN Jog handle synchronous
YC7C YDBC YEFC Y103C Each axis manual feedrate B valid
YC7D YDBD YEFD Y103D Manual feedrate B surface speed
control valid
YC7E YDBE YEFE Y103E Circular feed in manual mode valid
YC7F YDBF YEFF Y103F
93
Device No.
YC80 YDC0 YF00 Y1040 MP1 Handle/incremental feed
magnification code 1
YC83 YDC3 YF03 Y1043
YC86 YDC6 YF06 Y1046 Magnification valid for each handle
YC87 YDC7 YF07 Y1047 MPS Handle/incremental feed
magnification method selection
Device No.
YC88 YDC8 YF08 Y1048 TAL1 Tool alarm 1/Tool-skip
YC89 YDC9 YF09 Y1049 TAL2 Tool alarm 2
YC8A YDCA YF0A Y104A TCEF Usage data count valid
YC8B YDCB YF0B Y104B TLF1 Tool life management input
YC8C YDCC YF0C Y104C TRST Tool change reset
YC8D YDCD YF0D Y104D Tool escape and return Transit point
designation
YC8E YDCE YF0E Y104E
YC8F YDCF YF0F Y104F
Device No.
YC90 YDD0 YF10 Y1050 ZSL1 Reference position selection code 1
YC91 YDD1 YF11 Y1051 ZSL2 Reference position selection code 2
YC92 YDD2 YF12 Y1052 Tool length compensation along the tool axis
Compensation amount change mode
YC93 YDD3 YF13 Y1053
YC97 YDD7 YF17 Y1057 Reference position selection method
94
Device No.
YC9A YDDA YF1A Y105A
YC9B YDDB YF1B Y105B
YC9C YDDC YF1C Y105C
YC9D YDDD YF1D Y105D Manual speed command valid
YC9E YDDE YF1E Y105E Manual speed command sign reversed
YC9F YDDF YF1F Y105F Manual speed command reverse run
valid
Device No.
YCA0 YDE0 YF20 Y1060 CX11 Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis
selection code 1
YCA1 YDE1 YF21 Y1061 CX12 Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code 2
YCA5 YDE5 YF25 Y1065
YCA7 YDE7 YF27 Y1067 CX1S Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis valid
Device No.
YCA8 YDE8 YF28 Y1068 CX21 Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis
selection code 1
YCA9 YDE9 YF29 Y1069 CX22 Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 2
YCAA YDEA YF2A Y106A CX24 Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 4
YCAB YDEB YF2B Y106B CX28 Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 8
YCAC YDEC YF2C Y106C CX216 Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 16
YCAD YDED YF2D Y106D
YCAE YDEE YF2E Y106E
YCAF YDEF YF2F Y106F CX2S Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis valid
95
Device No.
YCB0 YDF0 YF30 Y1070 CX31 Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis
selection code 1
YCB1 YDF1 YF31 Y1071 CX32 Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code 2
YCB5 YDF5 YF35 Y1075
YCB7 YDF7 YF37 Y1077 CX3S Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis valid
Device No.
YCB8 YDF8 YF38 Y1078 CXS1 Manual arbitrary feed Smoothing off
YCB9 YDF9 YF39 Y1079 CXS2 Manual arbitrary feed Axis independent
YCBA YDFA YF3A Y107A CXS3 Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F
YCBB YDFB YF3B Y107B CXS4 Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1
YCBC YDFC YF3C Y107C CXS5 Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK
YCBD YDFD YF3D Y107D CXS6 Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC
YCBE YDFE YF3E Y107E *CXS7 Manual arbitrary feed Stop
YCBF YDFF YF3F Y107F CXS8 Manual arbitrary feed Strobe
Device No.
YCC0 YE00 YF40 Y1080 ILM1 Current limit mode 1
YCC1 YE01 YF41 Y1081 ILM2 Current limit mode 2
YCC2 YE02 YF42 Y1082
YCC3 YE03 YF43 Y1083 LDWT Load monitor Execution ▲
YCC4 YE04 YF44 Y1084 Load monitor Teaching mode ▲
YCC5 YE05 YF45 Y1085 Load monitor Monitor mode ▲
YCC6 YE06 YF46 Y1086 Load monitor Alarm reset ▲
YCC7 YE07 YF47 Y1087 Load monitor Warning reset ▲
96
Device No.
YCC8 YE08 YF48 Y1088 *ZRIT 2nd reference position return
interlock
YCC9 YE09 YF49 Y1089 Adaptive control execution ▲
YCCA YE0A YF4A Y108A Small diameter deep hole drilling
cycle
YCCB YE0B YF4B Y108B Chuck barrier ON
YCCC YE0C YF4C Y108C High-speed retract function valid ▲
YCCD YE0D YF4D Y108D
YCCE YE0E YF4E Y108E
YCCF YE0F YF4F Y108F
Device No.
YCD0 YE10 YF50 Y1090 Waiting ignore
YCD1 YE11 YF51 Y1091 Spindle-spindle polygon cancel
YCD2 YE12 YF52 Y1092 Synchronous tapping command
polarity reversal
YCD3 YE13 YF53 Y1093 Spindle OFF mode
YCD4 YE14 YF54 Y1094 Longitudinal hole drilling axis selection
YCD5 YE15 YF55 Y1095
Device No.
YCD8 YE18 YF58 Y1098 Barrier valid (left)
YCD9 YE19 YF59 Y1099 Barrier valid (right)
YCDA YE1A YF5A Y109A Tool presetter sub-side valid ▲
YCDB YE1B YF5B Y109B Movable area clamping
YCDC YE1C YF5C Y109C
YCDD YE1D YF5D Y109D
YCDE YE1E YF5E Y109E
YCDF YE1F YF5F Y109F
97
Device No.
YCE0 YE20 YF60 Y10A0
YCE1 YE21 YF61 Y10A1 Door open II
YCE2 YE22 YF62 Y10A2 Door open signal input (spindle
speed monitor)
YCE3 YE23 YF63 Y10A3 Door interlock spindle speed clamp
Device No.
(2 channels per 1 part system)
YCEA YE2A YF6A Y10AA
YCEB YE2B YF6B Y10AB
YCEC YE2C YF6C Y10AC
YCED YE2D YF6D Y10AD
YCEE YE2E YF6E Y10AE
YCEF YE2F YF6F Y10AF
Device No.
YCF0 YE30 YF70 Y10B0
YCF4 YE34 YF74 Y10B4 BCHK Barrier check invalid
98
Device No.
YCFA YE3A YF7A Y10BA DRNC Dry run invalid
YCFB YE3B YF7B Y10BB AUTED Automatic error detection
YCFC YE3C YF7C Y10BC
YCFD YE3D YF7D Y10BD
YCFE YE3E YF7E Y10BE
YCFF YE3F YF7F Y10BF
Device No.
YD00 YE40 YF80 Y10C0
Device No.
YD08 YE48 YF88 Y10C8 RVSP Reverse run from block start
YD09 YE49 YF89 Y10C9 RVIT Macro interrupt priority
YD0A YE4A YF8A Y10CA RVMD Reverse run control mode
YD0B YE4B YF8B Y10CB
YD0C YE4C YF8C Y10CC
YD0D YE4D YF8D Y10CD
YD0E YE4E YF8E Y10CE
YD0F YE4F YF8F Y10CF
99
Device No.
Y1880 Y18E0 Y1940 Y19A0 Y1A00 Y1A60
Y1881 Y18E1 Y1941 Y19A1 Y1A01 Y1A61
Y1882 Y18E2 Y1942 Y19A2 Y1A02 Y1A62
Y1883 Y18E3 Y1943 Y19A3 Y1A03 Y1A63
Y1884 Y18E4 Y1944 Y19A4 Y1A04 Y1A64
Y1885 Y18E5 Y1945 Y19A5 Y1A05 Y1A65 GFIN Gear shift completion
Y1886 Y18E6 Y1946 Y19A6 Y1A06 Y1A66
Y1887 Y18E7 Y1947 Y19A7 Y1A07 Y1A67
Device No.
Y1888 Y18E8 Y1948 Y19A8 Y1A08 Y1A68 SP1 Spindle speed override code 1
Y188A Y18EA Y194A Y19AA Y1A0A Y1A6A SP4 Spindle speed override code 4
Y188B Y18EB Y194B Y19AB Y1A0B Y1A6B
Y188C Y18EC Y194C Y19AC Y1A0C Y1A6C
Y188D Y18ED Y194D Y19AD Y1A0D Y1A6D
Y188E Y18EE Y194E Y19AE Y1A0E Y1A6E
Y188F Y18EF Y194F Y19AF Y1A0F Y1A6F SPS Spindle override method selection
Device No.
Y1890 Y18F0 Y1950 Y19B0 Y1A10 Y1A70 GI1 Spindle gear selection code 1
Y1892 Y18F2 Y1952 Y19B2 Y1A12 Y1A72
Y1893 Y18F3 Y1953 Y19B3 Y1A13 Y1A73 EXOBS Spindle holding force up
Y1894 Y18F4 Y1954 Y19B4 Y1A14 Y1A74 SSTP Spindle stop
Y1895 Y18F5 Y1955 Y19B5 Y1A15 Y1A75 SSFT Spindle gear shift
Y1896 Y18F6 Y1956 Y19B6 Y1A16 Y1A76 SORC Spindle orientation
Y1897 Y18F7 Y1957 Y19B7 Y1A17 Y1A77 Spindle command invalid
Device No.
Y1898 Y18F8 Y1958 Y19B8 Y1A18 Y1A78 SRN Spindle forward run start
Y1899 Y18F9 Y1959 Y19B9 Y1A19 Y1A79 SRI Spindle reverse run start
Y189A Y18FA Y195A Y19BA Y1A1A Y1A7A TL1 Spindle torque limit 1
Y189B Y18FB Y195B Y19BB Y1A1B Y1A7B TL2 Spindle torque limit 2
Y189C Y18FC Y195C Y19BC Y1A1C Y1A7C WRN Spindle forward run index
Y189D Y18FD Y195D Y19BD Y1A1D Y1A7D WRI Spindle reverse run index
Y189E Y18FE Y195E Y19BE Y1A1E Y1A7E ORC Spindle orientation command
Y189F Y18FF Y195F Y19BF Y1A1F Y1A7F LRSL L coil selection
100
Device No.
Y18A0 Y1900 Y1960 Y19C0 Y1A20 Y1A80
Y18A1 Y1901 Y1961 Y19C1 Y1A21 Y1A81
Y18A2 Y1902 Y1962 Y19C2 Y1A22 Y1A82 Spindle position control (C axis)
Cutting gain L
Cutting gain H
Y18A4 Y1904 Y1964 Y19C4 Y1A24 Y1A84
Y18A5 Y1905 Y1965 Y19C5 Y1A25 Y1A85
Y18A6 Y1906 Y1966 Y19C6 Y1A26 Y1A86 LRSM M coil selection
Y18A7 Y1907 Y1967 Y19C7 Y1A27 Y1A87
Device No.
Y18A8 Y1908 Y1968 Y19C8 Y1A28 Y1A88 SWS Spindle selection
Y18A9 Y1909 Y1969 Y19C9 Y1A29 Y1A89
Y18AA Y190A Y196A Y19CA Y1A2A Y1A8A
Y18AB Y190B Y196B Y19CB Y1A2B Y1A8B
Y18AC Y190C Y196C Y19CC Y1A2C Y1A8C
Y18AD Y190D Y196D Y19CD Y1A2D Y1A8D
Y18AE Y190E Y196E Y19CE Y1A2E Y1A8E
Y18AF Y190F Y196F Y19CF Y1A2F Y1A8F MPCSL PLC coil changeover
Device No.
Y18B0 Y1910 Y1970 Y19D0 Y1A30 Y1A90 SPSY Spindle synchronization
Y18B1 Y1911 Y1971 Y19D1 Y1A31 Y1A91 SPPHS Spindle phase synchronization
Y18B2 Y1912 Y1972 Y19D2 Y1A32 Y1A92 SPSDR Spindle synchronous rotation
direction
Y18B3 Y1913 Y1973 Y19D3 Y1A33 Y1A93 SSPHM Phase shift calculation request
Y18B4 Y1914 Y1974 Y19D4 Y1A34 Y1A94 SSPHF Phase offset request
Y18B5 Y1915 Y1975 Y19D5 Y1A35 Y1A95 SPDRPO Error temporary cancel
Y18B6 Y1916 Y1976 Y19D6 Y1A36 Y1A96
Y18B7 Y1917 Y1977 Y19D7 Y1A37 Y1A97
101
Device No.
Y18B8 Y1918 Y1978 Y19D8 Y1A38 Y1A98 SPSYC Spindle synchronization/
superimposition cancel
Y18B9 Y1919 Y1979 Y19D9 Y1A39 Y1A99 SPCMPC Chuck close
Y18BA Y191A Y197A Y19DA Y1A3A Y1A9A
Y18BB Y191B Y197B Y19DB Y1A3B Y1A9B
Y18BC Y19!C Y197C Y19DC Y1A3C Y1A9C
Y18BD Y191D Y197D Y19DD Y1A3D Y1A9D
Y18BE Y191E Y197E Y19DE Y1A3E Y1A9E
Y18BF Y191F Y197F Y19DF Y1A3F Y1A9F
Device No.
Y18C0 Y1920 Y1980 Y19E0 Y1A40 Y1AA0
Y18C1 Y1921 Y1981 Y19E1 Y1A41 Y1AA1
Y18C2 Y1922 Y1982 Y19E2 Y1A42 Y1AA2
Y18C3 Y1923 Y1983 Y19E3 Y1A43 Y1AA3
Y18C4 Y1924 Y1984 Y19E4 Y1A44 Y1AA4
Y18C5 Y1925 Y1985 Y19E5 Y1A45 Y1AA5
Y18C6 Y1926 Y1986 Y19E6 Y1A46 Y1AA6
Y18C7 Y1927 Y1987 Y19E7 Y1A47 Y1AA7
Device No.
Y18C8 Y1928 Y1988 Y19E8 Y1A48 Y1AA8
Y18C9 Y1929 Y1989 Y19E9 Y1A49 Y1AA9
Y18CA Y192A Y198A Y19EA Y1A4A Y1AAA
Y18CB Y192B Y198B Y19EB Y1A4B Y1AAB
Y18CC Y192C Y198C Y19EC Y1A4C Y1AAC
Y18CD Y192D Y198D Y19ED Y1A4D Y1AAD
Y18CE Y192E Y198E Y19EE Y1A4E Y1AAE
Y18CF Y192F Y198F Y19EF Y1A4F Y1AAF
Device No.
Y18D0 Y1930 Y1990 Y19F0 Y1A50 Y1AB0
Y18D1 Y1931 Y1991 Y19F1 Y1A51 Y1AB1
Y18D2 Y1932 Y1992 Y19F2 Y1A52 Y1AB2
Y18D3 Y1933 Y1993 Y19F3 Y1A53 Y1AB3
Y18D4 Y1934 Y1994 Y19F4 Y1A54 Y1AB4
Y18D5 Y1935 Y1995 Y19F5 Y1A55 Y1AB5
Y18D6 Y1936 Y1996 Y19F6 Y1A56 Y1AB6
Y18D7 Y1937 Y1997 Y19F7 Y1A57 Y1AB7
102
Device No.
Y18D8 Y1938 Y1998 Y19F8 Y1A58 Y1AB8
Y18D9 Y1939 Y1999 Y19F9 Y1A59 Y1AB9
Y18DA Y193A Y199A Y19FA Y1A5A Y1ABA
Y18DB Y193B Y199B Y19FB Y1A5B Y1ABB
Y18DC Y193C Y199C Y19FC Y1A5C Y1ABC
Y18DD Y193D Y199D Y19FD Y1A5D Y1ABD
Y18DE Y193E Y199E Y19FE Y1A5E Y1ABE
Y18DF Y193F Y199F Y19FF Y1A5F Y1ABF
103
Device No.
Y1D00 Y1D20 Y1D40 Y1D60 Position switch 1 interlock
Device No.
Y1D0A Y1D2A Y1D4A Y1D6A Position switch 11 interlock
Y1D0B Y1D2B Y1D4B Y1D6B Position switch 12 interlock
Y1D0C Y1D2C Y1D4C Y1D6C Position switch 13 interlock
Y1D0D Y1D2D Y1D4D Y1D6D Position switch 14 interlock
Y1D0E Y1D2E Y1D4E Y1D6E Position switch 15 interlock
Y1D0F Y1D2F Y1D4F Y1D6F Position switch 16 interlock
Device No.
Device No.
Y1D18 Y1D38 Y1D58 Y1D78
Y1D19 Y1D39 Y1D59 Y1D79
Y1D1A Y1D3A Y1D5A Y1D7A
Y1D1B Y1D3B Y1D5B Y1D7B
Y1D1C Y1D3C Y1D5C Y1D7C
Y1D1D Y1D3D Y1D5D Y1D7D
Y1D1E Y1D3E Y1D5E Y1D7E
Y1D1F Y1D3F Y1D5F Y1D7F
104
4.4 PLC Output Signals (Data type: R***)

R200 AO1 Analog output 1 R208
R202 AO3 Analog output 3 R210 Displayed screen No.
R204 AO5 Analog output 5 R212 KEY OUT 1
R207 AO8 Analog output 8 R215 Power OFF indication Y device No.

R216 R224 User sequence program version code A
R217 R225 User sequence program version code B
R218 R226 User sequence program version code C
R219 R227 User sequence program version code D
R220 R228
R221 R229
R222 R230
R223 R231

R232 User sequence program version code 2 A R240 APLC version A
R233 User sequence program version code 2 B R241 APLC version B
R234 User sequence program version code 2 C R242 APLC version C
R235 User sequence program version code 2 D R243 APLC version D
R236 User sequence program version code 2 E R244
R237 User sequence program version code 2 F R245
R238 User sequence program version code 2 G R246
R239 User sequence program version code 2 H R247

R248 OT ignored (Axis 1 to 16 or axis 1 R256
to 8 for part system 1,2)
R249 OT ignored (Axis 17 to 32 or axis 1 R257
to 8 for part system 3,4)
R250 R258
R251 R259
R252 R260
R253 R261
R254 R262
R255 R263
105

R264 R272 Near-point dog ignored (Axis 1 to 16 or
axis 1 to 8 for part system 1,2)
R265 R273 Near-point dog ignored (Axis 17 to 32
or axis 1 to 8 for part system 3,4)
R266 R274
R267 R275
R268 R276
R269 R277
R270 R278
R271 R279

R280 R288
R281 R289
R282 R290
R283 R291
R284 R292
R285 R293
R286 R294
R287 R295

R296 SOMD Speed monitor mode R304
R297 Handy terminal Data area top address R305
R298 Handy terminal Data valid number of R306
registers
R299 Handy terminal Cause of R307
communication error
R300 R308
R301 R309
R302 R310
R303 R311

R312 R320
R313 R321
R314 R322
R315 R323
R316 R324
R317 R325
R318 R326
R319 R327
106

R328 R336 Tool I/D R/W pot No. designation ▲
R329 R337 Large diameter tool information ▲
R330 R338 Tool weight (spindle tool) ▲
R331 R339 Tool weight (standby tool) ▲
R332 R340 Unset tool information ▲
R333 R341
R334 R342 Specified shape interference
Shape No. designation
R335 R343

R344 R352 Remote program input No. (L)
R345 R353 Remote program input No. (H)
R346 R354 Machine manufacturer macro
password No. (L)
R347 Skip retract valid R355 Machine manufacturer macro password No. (H)
R348 Skip retract amount (L) [M] R356 Direct screen selection A
R349 Skip retract amount (H) [M] R357 Direct screen selection B
R350 Skip retract speed (L) [M] R358 Direct screen selection C
R351 Skip retract speed (H) [M] R359 Direct screen selection D

R360 R368
R361 R369
R362 R370
R363 R371
R364 Machine parameter lock I/F R372
R365 Measures against tool setter R373
chattering Movement amount
R366 R374
R367 R375

R376 R384
R377 R385
R378 R386
R379 R387
R380 R388
R381 R389
R382 R390
R383 R391
107

R392 R400 Ball screw thermal
displacement compensation
Offset amount 1st axis [M]
R393 R401 Ball screw thermal displacement compensation Max. compensation amount
1st axis [M]
R394 R402 Ball screw thermal displacement compensation Part-system, axis No. 1st axis
R395 R403 Ball screw thermal displacement compensation Offset amount 2nd axis [M]
R396 User PLC info program format info R404 Ball screw thermal displacement compensation Max. compensation amount
2nd axis [M]
R397 R405 Ball screw thermal displacement compensation Part-system, axis No. 2nd axis
R398 R406 Ball screw thermal displacement compensation Offset amount 3rd axis [M]
R399 R407 Ball screw thermal displacement compensation Max. compensation amount
3rd axis

R408 Ball screw thermal R416
displacement compensation [M]
Part-system, axis No. 3rd axis
R409 Ball screw thermal displacement compensation Offset amount 4th axis [M] R417
R410 Ball screw thermal displacement compensation Max. compensation amount R418
[M]
3rd axis
R411 Ball screw thermal displacement compensation Part-system, axis No. 4th axis R419
R412 R420
R413 R421
R414 R422
R415 R423

R424 PLC window Reading start R register 1 R432 PLC window Reading start R register 3
R425 PLC window Number of read windows 1 R433 PLC window Number of read windows 3
R426 PLC window Writing start R register 1 R434 PLC window Writing start R register 3
R427 PLC window Number of write windows 1 R435 PLC window Number of write windows 3
R428 PLC window Reading start R register 2 R436
R429 PLC window Number of read windows 2 R437
R430 PLC window Writing start R register 2 R438
R431 PLC window Number of write windows 2 R439
108

R440 PLC axis control information R448 PLC axis control buffering mode
address 1st axis information address
R441 PLC axis control information address 2nd axis R449
R442 PLC axis control information address 3rd axis R450
R443 PLC axis control information address 4th axis R451

R456 Encoder 1 arbitrary pulse 1 R464
R460 R468
R461 R469
R462 R470
R463 R471

R472 R480
R473 R481
R474 R482
R475 R483
R476 R484
R477 R485
R478 R486
R479 R487

R488 R496
R489 R497
R490 R498
R491 R499
R492
R493
R494
R495
109
Device No.
R2500 R2700 R2900 R3100 1st cutting feedrate override
R2501 R2701 R2901 R3101 2nd cutting feedrate override
R2502 R2702 R2902 R3102 Rapid traverse override
R2503 R2703 R2903 R3103 CHPOV Chopping override
R2504 R2704 R2904 R3104 Manual feedrate (L) [M]
R2505 R2705 R2905 R3105 Manual feedrate (H) [M]
R2506 R2706 R2906 R3106 Manual feedrate B (L) [M]
R2507 R2707 R2907 R3107 Manual feedrate B (H) [M]
Device No.
R2508 R2708 R2908 R3108 1st handle/incremental feed
magnification (L)
R2509 R2709 R2909 R3109 1st handle/incremental feed magnification (H)
R2510 R2710 R2910 R3110 2nd handle feed magnification (L)
R2511 R2711 R2911 R3111 2nd handle feed magnification (H)
R2512 R2712 R2912 R3112 3rd handle feed magnification (L)
R2513 R2713 R2913 R3113 3rd handle feed magnification (H)
R2514 R2714 R2914 R3114
R2515 R2715 R2915 R3115
Device No.
R2516 R2716 R2916 R3116
R2517 R2717 R2917 R3117 Machine status animated warning
display type
R2518 R2718 R2918 R3118 PLC interrupt program number (L)
R2519 R2719 R2919 R3119 PLC interrupt program number (H)
R2520 R2720 R2920 R3120 Load meter display interface 1 (L)
R2521 R2721 R2921 R3121 Load meter display interface 1 (H)
R2522 R2722 R2922 R3122 Load meter display interface 2 (L)
R2523 R2723 R2923 R3123 Load meter display interface 2 (H)
Device No.
R2524 R2724 R2924 R3124 Manual feedrate B override
R2525 R2725 R2925 R3125 External search device No.
R2526 R2726 R2926 R3126 External search program No. (L)
R2527 R2727 R2927 R3127 External search program No. (H)
R2528 R2728 R2928 R3128 External search sequence No. (L)
R2529 R2729 R2929 R3129 External search sequence No. (H)
R2530 R2730 R2930 R3130 External search block No. (L)
R2531 R2731 R2931 R3131 External search block No. (H)
110
Device No.
R2532 R2732 R2932 R3132
R2533 R2733 R2933 R3133
R2534 R2734 R2934 R3134
R2535 R2735 R2935 R3135
R2536 R2736 R2936 R3136
R2537 R2737 R2937 R3137
R2538 R2738 R2938 R3138
R2539 R2739 R2939 R3139
Device No.
R2540 R2740 R2940 R3140
R2541 R2741 R2941 R3141
R2542 R2742 R2942 R3142
R2543 R2743 R2943 R3143
R2544 R2744 R2944 R3144 Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis
travel amount (L) [M]
R2545 R2745 R2945 R3145 Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount (H) [M]
R2546 R2746 R2946 R3146
R2547 R2747 R2947 R3147
Device No.
R2548 R2748 R2948 R3148 Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis
R2549 R2749 R2949 R3149 Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis travel amount (H) [M]
R2550 R2750 R2950 R3150
R2551 R2751 R2951 R3151
R2552 R2752 R2952 R3152 Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis
R2553 R2753 R2953 R3153 Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis travel amount (H) [M]
R2554 R2754 R2954 R3154
R2555 R2755 R2955 R3155
Device No.
R2556 R2756 R2956 R3156 Alarm message I/F 1
R2560 R2760 R2960 R3160 Operator message I/F
R2561 R2761 R2961 R3161
R2562 R2762 R2962 R3162 Search & start program No. (L)
R2563 R2763 R2963 R3163 Search & start program No. (H)
111
Device No.
R2564 R2764 R2964 R3164 Manual skip I/F 1 (Manual skip control)
R2565 R2765 R2965 R3165 Manual skip I/F 2 (Manual skip axis
stop/read request)
R2566 R2766 R2966 R3166 Manual skip I/F 3 (Manual skip axis stop
mode)
R2567 R2767 R2967 R3167 Encoder selection
R2568 R2768 R2968 R3168 C axis selection
R2569 R2769 R2969 R3169
R2570 R2770 R2970 R3170
R2571 R2771 R2971 R3171
Device No.
R2572 R2772 R2972 R3172
R2573 R2773 R2973 R3173
R2574 R2774 R2974 R3174
R2575 R2775 R2975 R3175
R2576 R2776 R2976 R3176
R2577 R2777 R2977 R3177
R2578 R2778 R2978 R3178
R2579 R2779 R2979 R3179
Device No.
R2580 R2780 R2980 R3180 Load monitor Teaching axis
selection ▲
R2581 R2781 R2981 R3181 Load monitor Load change rate
detection axis ▲
R2582 R2782 R2982 R3182 Load monitor Teaching data sub-No. ▲
R2583 R2783 R2983 R3183 Adaptive control Basic axis selection ▲
R2584 R2784 R2984 R3184 Each axis reference position selection
R2585 R2785 R2985 R3185
R2586 R2786 R2986 R3186
R2587 R2787 R2987 R3187 Chopping control data address
Device No.
R2588 R2788 R2988 R3188 Tool life management data sort
R2589 R2789 R2989 R3189 Synchronous control operation method
R2590 R2790 R2990 R3190 Tool group No. designation (L)
R2591 R2791 R2991 R3191 Tool group No. designation (H)
R2592 R2792 R2992 R3192 Reference position adjustment completion
R2593 R2793 R2993 R3193 Current limit changeover
R2594 R2794 R2994 R3194 Wear compensation No. (tool presetter)
R2595 R2795 R2995 R3195
112
Device No.
R2596 R2796 R2996 R3196 Turret interference object tool No.
designation
R2597 R2797 R2997 R3197
R2598 R2798 R2998 R3198
R2599 R2799 R2999 R3199
R2600 R2800 R3000 R3200 Workpiece coordinate offset
Measurement tool compensation
No./Selected compensation tool
No.(main) (L) (Note 1)
R2601 R2801 R3001 R3201 WWorkpiece coordinate offset Measurement tool compen. No./Selected compen. tool No.(main) (H)
R2602 R2802 R3002 R3202 Workpiece coordinate offset
Measurement tool No./Selected tool
No.(main) (L) (Note 1)
R2603 R2803 R3003 R3203 Workpiece coordinate offset Measurement tool No./Selected tool No.(main) (H)
Device No.
R2604 R2804 R3004 R3204 Selected tool compensation No.(sub) (L)
R2605 R2805 R3005 R3205 Selected tool compensation No.(sub) (H)
R2606 R2806 R3006 R3206 Selected tool wear No. (sub) (L)
R2607 R2807 R3007 R3207 Selected tool wear No. (sub) (H)
R2608 R2808 R3008 R3208 Tool mounting information 1-16
Device No.
R2612 R2812 R3012 R3212 Tool mounting information (65 - 80)
R2613 R2813 R3013 R3213
R2614 R2814 R3014 R3214
R2615 R2815 R3015 R3215
R2616 R2816 R3016 R3216
R2617 R2817 R3017 R3217
R2618 R2818 R3018 R3218 Tool length measurement 2 Tool No. (L)
R2619 R2819 R3019 R3219 Tool length measurement 2 Tool No. (H)
(Note 1) When the chuck barrier is checked, "Selected tool compensation No.(main):R2600, R2601" and
"Selected tool No.(main):R2602, R2603" are applied.
113
Device No.
R2620 R2820 R3020 R3220
R2621 R2821 R3021 R3221
R2622 R2822 R3022 R3222
R2623 R2823 R3023 R3223
R2624 R2824 R3024 R3224
R2625 R2825 R3025 R3225 Servo ready completion output
designation
R2626 R2826 R3026 R3226
R2627 R2827 R3027 R3227
Device No.
R2628 R2828 R3028 R3228 Mechanical axis specifications
1st rotary axis angle (L)
R2629 R2829 R3029 R3229 Mechanical axis specifications 1st rotary axis angle (H)
R2630 R2830 R3030 R3230 Mechanical axis specifications
2nd rotary axis angle (L)
R2631 R2831 R3031 R3231 Mechanical axis specifications 2nd rotary axis angle (H)
R2632 R2832 R3032 R3232
R2633 R2833 R3033 R3233
R2634 R2834 R3034 R3234
R2635 R2835 R3035 R3235
Device No.
Operation mode data (L)
R2637 R2837 R3037 R3237 Circular feed in manual mode Operation mode data (H)
R2638 R2838 R3038 R3238 Circular feed in manual mode Part
system designation
R2639 R2839 R3039 R3239
Horizontal axis designation
Vertical axis designation
R2642 R2842 R3042 R3242
R2643 R2843 R3043 R3243
114
Device No.
R2644 R2844 R3044 R3244 Circular feed in manual mode Basic
point X data (L)
R2645 R2845 R3045 R3245 Circular feed in manual mode Basic point X data (H)
R2646 R2846 R3046 R3246
R2647 R2847 R3047 R3247
R2648 R2848 R3048 R3248 Circular feed in manual mode Basic
point Y data (L)
R2649 R2849 R3049 R3249 Circular feed in manual mode Basic point Y data (H)
R2650 R2850 R3050 R3250
R2651 R2851 R3051 R3251
Device No.
R2652 R2852 R3052 R3252 Circular feed in manual mode Travel
range X+ data (L)
R2653 R2853 R3053 R3253 Circular feed in manual mode Travel range X+ data (H)
R2654 R2854 R3054 R3254
R2655 R2855 R3055 R3255
range X- data (L)
R2657 R2857 R3057 R3257 Circular feed in manual mode Travel range X- data (H)
R2658 R2858 R3058 R3258
R2659 R2859 R3059 R3259
115
Device No.
range Y+ data (L)
R2661 R2861 R3061 R3261 Circular feed in manual mode Travel range Y+ data (H)
R2662 R2862 R3062 R3262
R2663 R2863 R3063 R3263
range Y- data (L)
R2665 R2865 R3065 R3265 Circular feed in manual mode Travel range Y- data (H)
R2666 R2866 R3066 R3266
R2667 R2867 R3067 R3267
Device No.
Gradient/arc center X data (L)
R2669 R2869 R3069 R3269 Circular feed in manual mode Gradient/arc center X data (H)
R2670 R2870 R3070 R3270
R2671 R2871 R3071 R3271
Gradient/arc center Y data (L)
R2673 R2873 R3073 R3273 Circular feed in manual mode Gradient/arc center Y data (H)
R2674 R2874 R3074 R3274
R2675 R2875 R3075 R3275
116
Device No.
R5700 R5716 R5732 R5748 Ext. machine coordinate system
offset data 1st axis (L) [M]
R5701 R5717 R5733 R5749 Ext. machine coordinate system offset data 1st axis (H) [M]
offset data 2nd axis (L) [M]
R5703 R5719 R5735 R5751 Ext. machine coordinate system offset data 2nd axis (H) [M]
offset data 3rd axis (L) [M]
R5705 R5721 R5737 R5753 Ext. machine coordinate system offset data 3rd axis (H) [M]
offset data 4th axis (L) [M]
R5707 R5723 R5739 R5755 Ext. machine coordinate system offset data 4th axis (H) [M]
Device No.
Device No.
R5764 R5780 R5796 R5812 Each axis manual feedrate B
1st axis (L) [M]
R5765 R5781 R5797 R5813 Each axis manual feedrate B 1st axis (H) [M]
2nd axis (L) [M]
R5767 R5783 R5799 R5815 Each axis manual feedrate B 2nd axis (H) [M]
3rd axis (L) [M]
R5769 R5785 R5801 R5817 Each axis manual feedrate B 3rd axis (H) [M]
4th axis (L) [M]
R5771 R5787 R5803 R5819 Each axis manual feedrate B 4th axis (H) [M]
117
Device No.
5th axis (L) [M]
6th axis (L) [M]
7th axis (L) [M]
8th axis (L) [M]
Device No.
R5828 R5836 R5844 R5852
R5829 R5837 R5845 R5853
R5830 R5838 R5846 R5854
R5831 R5839 R5847 R5855
R5832 R5840 R5848 R5856
R5833 R5841 R5849 R5857
R5834 R5842 R5850 R5858
R5835 R5843 R5851 R5859
Device No.
R5860 R5868 R5876 R5884
R5861 R5869 R5877 R5885
R5862 R5870 R5878 R5886
R5863 R5871 R5879 R5887
R5864 R5872 R5880 R5888
R5865 R5873 R5881 R5889
R5866 R5874 R5882 R5890
R5867 R5875 R5883 R5891
Device No.
R5892 R5900 R5908 R5916
R5893 R5901 R5909 R5917
R5894 R5902 R5910 R5918
R5895 R5903 R5911 R5919
R5896 R5904 R5912 R5920
R5897 R5905 R5913 R5921
R5898 R5906 R5914 R5922
R5899 R5907 R5915 R5923
118
Device No.
R6436 R6444 R6452 R6460 User macro input #1032
(PLC -> Controller) (L)
R6437 R6445 R6453 R6461 User macro input #1032 (PLC -> Controller) (H)
119
Device No.
output (L)
R7001 R7051 R7101 R7151 R7201 R7251 Spindle command rotation speed output (H)
R7002 R7052 R7102 R7152 R7202 R7252 SLSP Spindle command selection
R7003 R7053 R7103 R7153 R7203 R7253
R7004 R7054 R7104 R7154 R7204 R7254
R7005 R7055 R7105 R7155 R7205 R7255
R7006 R7056 R7106 R7156 R7206 R7256
R7007 R7057 R7107 R7157 R7207 R7257
Device No.
R7008 R7058 R7108 R7158 R7208 R7258 S command override
R7009 R7059 R7109 R7159 R7209 R7259 Multi-point orientation position data
R7010 R7060 R7110 R7160 R7210 R7260
R7011 R7061 R7111 R7161 R7211 R7261
R7012 R7062 R7112 R7162 R7212 R7262
R7013 R7063 R7113 R7163 R7213 R7263
R7014 R7064 R7114 R7164 R7214 R7264
R7015 R7065 R7115 R7165 R7215 R7265
Device No.
R7016 R7066 R7116 R7166 R7216 R7266 Spindle synchronization Basic
spindle selection
R7017 R7067 R7117 R7167 R7217 R7267 Spindle synchronization
Synchronous spindle selection
R7018 R7068 R7118 R7168 R7218 R7268 Spindle synchronization Phase shift
amount
R7019 R7069 R7119 R7169 R7219 R7269
R7020 R7070 R7120 R7170 R7220 R7270
R7021 R7071 R7121 R7171 R7221 R7271
R7022 R7072 R7122 R7172 R7222 R7272
R7023 R7073 R7123 R7173 R7223 R7273
Device No.
R7024 R7074 R7124 R7174 R7224 R7274
R7025 R7075 R7125 R7175 R7225 R7275
R7026 R7076 R7126 R7176 R7226 R7276
R7027 R7077 R7127 R7177 R7227 R7277
R7028 R7078 R7128 R7178 R7228 R7278
R7029 R7079 R7129 R7179 R7229 R7279
R7030 R7080 R7130 R7180 R7230 R7280
R7031 R7081 R7131 R7181 R7231 R7281
120
Device No.
R12200 R12210 R12220 R12230 Spindle tool No. (L)
R12201 R12211 R12221 R12231 Spindle tool No. (H)
R12202 R12212 R12222 R12232 Standby tool No. (L)
R12203 R12213 R12223 R12233 Standby tool No. (H)

R10600 ATC control parameter R10608
R10601 R10609
R10602 R10610
R10603 Display tool selection parameter R10611
R10604 R10612
R10605 R10613
R10606 R10614
R10607 R10615
121
4.5 Special Relay
4.5 Special Relay

SM00 SM08
SM01 SM09
SM02 SM10
SM03 SM11
SM04 SM12
SM05 SM13
SM06 SM14
SM07 SM15

SM16 Temperature rise SM24
SM17 SM25
SM18 SM26
SM19 SM27
SM20 SM28
SM21 SM29
SM22 SM30
SM23 SM31

SM32 SM40
SM33 SM41
SM34 SM42
SM35 SM43
SM36 SM44
SM37 SM45
SM38 SM46
SM39 SM47

SM48 SM56
SM49 SM57
SM50 SM58
SM51 SM59
SM52 SM60
SM53 SM61
SM54 SM62
SM55 SM63
122
4.5 Special Relay

SM64 SM72
SM65 SM73
SM66 SM74
SM67 SM75
SM68 SM76
SM69 SM77
SM70 SM78
SM71 SM79

SM80 SM88
SM81 SM89
SM82 SM90
SM83 SM91
SM84 SM92
SM85 SM93
SM86 SM94
SM87 SM95

SM96 SM104
SM97 SM105
SM98 SM106
SM99 SM107
SM100 SM108
SM101 SM109
SM102 SM110
SM103 SM111

SM112 SM120
SM113 SM121
SM114 SM122
SM115 SM123
SM116 SM124
SM117 SM125
SM118 SM126
SM119 SM127
123
4.6 Classified for Each Application
(1) MR-J2-CT link
Device No.
Abbrev. Signal name
bit
R9998 bit0 J2CT operation adjustment mode valid (common for all axes)
J2CT
Abbrev. Signal name
1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis
R9950 R9956 R9962 R9968 R9974 R9980 CTCM4 J2CT control command 4
R9954 R9960 R9966 R9972 R9978 R9984 CTCML J2CT control
command position (L)
R9955 R9961 R9967 R9973 R9979 R9985 CTCMH J2CT control
command position (H)
Device No.
Abbrev. Signal name
bit
R9948 bit0 J2CT in operation adjustment mode 1st axis
bit1 J2CT in operation adjustment mode 2nd axis
bit2 J2CT in operation adjustment mode 3rd axis
bit3 J2CT in operation adjustment mode 4th axis
J2CT
Abbrev. Signal name
R9900 R9906 R9912 R9918 R9924 R9930 CTST4 J2CT control status 4
R9904 R9910 R9916 R9922 R9928 R9934 J2CT control
machine position (L)
R9905 R9911 R9917 R9923 R9929 R9935 J2CT control
machine position (H)
124
(2) PLC axis indexing interfaces
Device No.
Abbrev. Signal name
bit
R8098 bit0 PLC indexing axis operation adjustment mode valid (common for all axes)
PLC indexing axis

Abbrev. Signal name
R8050 R8056 R8062 R8068 R8074 R8080 AUXCM4 PLC axis indexing control command 4
R8054 R8060 R8066 R8072 R8078 R8084 PLC axis indexing control
Device No.
Abbrev. Signal name
bit
R8048 bit0 PLC indexing axis in operation adjustment mode 1st axis
bit1 PLC indexing axis in operation adjustment mode 2nd axis
bit2 PLC indexing axis in operation adjustment mode 3rd axis
bit3 PLC indexing axis in operation adjustment mode 4th axis
PLC indexing axis

Abbrev. Signal name
R8000 R8006 R8012 R8018 R8024 R8030 AUXST4 PLC axis indexing control status 4
125
(3) Other file registers (R)
Device No. Signal name

R2100 to R2349 Pallet program data (Drive unit → PLC)
R4100 to R4103 Pallet program data (PLC → Drive unit)
R7500 to R7799 PLC constant parameters
(corresponds to parameters #18001 to #18150)
R7800 to R7897 PLC bit selection parameters
(corresponds to parameters #6401 to #6596)
R12800 to R13099 Computer link interfaces
R13200 to R13299 Special table interfaces
M system L system
R10600 to R11779 ATC command control R10600 and Tool life management
information later interfaces I, II
R11800 and later Tool life management interfaces
(4) Other inputs/outputs (X, Y)

X680 to X69F PLC switch #1 to 32
X6F8 to X6FF Skip input 1 to 8 for monitor
Y680 to Y69F PLC switch for reversed display #1 to 32
(5) Fixed (semi-fixed) devices

X18 to X1B Reference position return near-point detection 1 to 4
X20 to X23 Stroke end (–) 1 to 4
X28 to X2B Stroke end (+) 1 to 4
X5C to X5F Reference position return near-point detection 5 to 8
X64 to X67 Stroke end (–) 5 to 8
X6C to X6F Stroke end (+) 5 to 8
(6) Maintenance

R13170 CRC count (servo #1)
R13172 Address illegal (servo #1)
R13174 CRC count (display unit)
R13175 Address illegal (display unit)
126
(7) Spindle related devices
CNC -> PLC

Device No.
X1880 X18E0 X1940 X19A0 X1A00 X1A60 SUPP Spindle speed upper limit over
X1881 X18E1 X1941 X19A1 X1A01 X1A61 SLOW Spindle speed lower limit over
X1882 X18E2 X1942 X19A2 X1A02 X1A62 SIGE S command gear No. illegal
X1883 X18E3 X1943 X19A3 X1A03 X1A63 SOVE S command max./min. command
value over
X1884 X18E4 X1944 X19A4 X1A04 X1A64 SNGE S command no gear selected
X1887 X18E7 X1947 X19A7 X1A07 X1A67 (Always "0")
X1888 X18E8 X1948 X19A8 X1A08 X1A68 Spindle 2nd in-position
X1889 X18E9 X1949 X19A9 X1A09 X1A69 CDO Current detection
X188A X18EA X194A X19AA X1A0A X1A6A VRO Speed detection
X188B X18EB X194B X19AB X1A0B X1A6B FLO In spindle alarm
X188C X18EC X194C X19AC X1A0C X1A6C ZSO Zero speed
X188D X18ED X194D X19AD X1A0D X1A6D USO Spindle up-to-speed
X188E X18EE X194E X19AE X1A0E X1A6E ORAO Spindle in-position
X188F X18EF X194F X19AF X1A0F X1A6F LCSA In L coil selection
X1890 X18F0 X1950 X19B0 X1A10 X1A70 SMA Spindle ready-ON
X1891 X18F1 X1951 X19B1 X1A11 X1A71 SSA Spindle servo-ON
X1892 X18F2 X1952 X19B2 X1A12 X1A72 SEMG In spindle emergency stop
X1893 X18F3 X1953 X19B3 X1A13 X1A73 SSRN In spindle forward run
X1894 X18F4 X1954 X19B4 X1A14 X1A74 SSRI In spindle reverse run
X1895 X18F5 X1955 X19B5 X1A15 X1A75 Z phase passed
X1896 X18F6 X1956 X19B6 X1A16 X1A76 SIMP Position loop in-position
X1897 X18F7 X1957 X19B7 X1A17 X1A77 STLQ In spindle torque limit
X189D X18FD X195D X19BD X1A1D X1A7D SD2 Speed detection 2
X189E X18FE X195E X19BE X1A1E X1A7E MCSA In M coil selection
X189F X18FF X195F X19BF X1A1F X1A7F Index positioning completion
127
Device No.
X18A0 X1900 X1960 X19C0 X1A20 X1A80 ENB Spindle enable
X18A8 X1908 X1968 X19C8 X1A28 X1A88 SPSYN1 In spindle synchronization
X18A9 X1909 X1969 X19C9 X1A29 X1A89 FSPRV Spindle rotation speed
X18AA X190A X196A X19CA X1A2A X1A8A FSPPH Spindle phase synchronization
completion
X18AB X190B X196B X19CB X1A2B X1A8B SPSYN2 In spindle synchronization 2
X18AC X190C X196C X19CC X1A2C X1A8C SPCMP Chuck close confirmation
X18B5 X1915 X1975 X19D5 X1A35 X1A95 EXOFN In spindle holding force up
Device No.
XCB0 XDF0 XF30 X1070 In spindle-NC axis polygon mode
XCB2 XDF2 XF32 X1072 In spindle-spindle polygon mode
XCB3 XDF3 XF33 X1073 Spindle-spindle polygon
128
CNC -> PLC

Device No.
R6500 R6550 R6600 R6650 R6700 R6750 Spindle command rotation
speed input (L)
(12-bit binary) (L)
R6508 R6558 R6608 R6658 R6708 R6758 Spindle load
Device No.
R6516 R6566 R6616 R6666 R6716 R6766 Spindle synchronization phase error
/Hob axis delay angle
R6517 R6567 R6617 R6667 R6717 R6767 Spindle synchronization Maximum
phase error/Maximum hob axis
delay angle
offset data
error monitor
error monitor (lower limit)
error monitor (upper limit)
Device No.
R512 R712 R912 R1112 S code data 1 (L)
R513 R713 R913 R1113 S code data 1 (H)
R514 R714 R914 R1114 S code data 2 (L)
R515 R715 R915 R1115 S code data 2 (H)
R516 R716 R916 R1116 S code data 3 (L)
R517 R717 R917 R1117 S code data 3 (H)
R518 R718 R918 R1118 S code data 4 (L)
R519 R719 R919 R1119 S code data 4 (H)
129
PLC -> CNC

Device No.
Y1885 Y18E5 Y1945 Y19A5 Y1A05 Y1A65 GFIN Gear shift completion
Y188A Y18EA Y194A Y19AA Y1A0A Y1A6A SP4 Spindle speed override code 4
Y188F Y18EF Y194F Y19AF Y1A0F Y1A6F SPS Spindle override method selection
Y1893 Y18F3 Y1953 Y19B3 Y1A13 Y1A73 EXOBS Spindle holding force up
Y1894 Y18F4 Y1954 Y19B4 Y1A14 Y1A74 SSTP Spindle stop
Y1895 Y18F5 Y1955 Y19B5 Y1A15 Y1A75 SSFT Spindle gear shift
Y1896 Y18F6 Y1956 Y19B6 Y1A16 Y1A76 SORC Spindle orientation
Y1897 Y18F7 Y1957 Y19B7 Y1A17 Y1A77 Spindle command invalid
Y1898 Y18F8 Y1958 Y19B8 Y1A18 Y1A78 SRN Spindle forward run start
Y1899 Y18F9 Y1959 Y19B9 Y1A19 Y1A79 SRI Spindle reverse run start
Y189A Y18FA Y195A Y19BA Y1A1A Y1A7A TL1 Spindle torque limit 1
Y189B Y18FB Y195B Y19BB Y1A1B Y1A7B TL2 Spindle torque limit 2
Y189C Y18FC Y195C Y19BC Y1A1C Y1A7C WRN Spindle forward run index
Y189D Y18FD Y195D Y19BD Y1A1D Y1A7D WRI Spindle reverse run index
Y189E Y18FE Y195E Y19BE Y1A1E Y1A7E ORC Spindle orientation command
Y189F Y18FF Y195F Y19BF Y1A1F Y1A7F LRSL L coil selection
Cutting gain L
Cutting gain H
Y18A6 Y1906 Y1966 Y19C6 Y1A26 Y1A86 LRSM M coil selection
Y18A8 Y1908 Y1968 Y19C8 Y1A28 Y1A88 SWS Spindle selection
Y18AF Y190F Y196F Y19CF Y1A2F Y1A8F MPCSL PLC coil changeover
Y18B0 Y1910 Y1970 Y19D0 Y1A30 Y1A90 SPSY Spindle synchronization
Y18B1 Y1911 Y1971 Y19D1 Y1A31 Y1A91 SPPHS Spindle phase synchronization
Y18B2 Y1912 Y1972 Y19D2 Y1A32 Y1A92 SPSDR Spindle synchronization rotation
direction
Y18B3 Y1913 Y1973 Y19D3 Y1A33 Y1A93 SSPHM Phase shift calculation request
Y18B4 Y1914 Y1974 Y19D4 Y1A34 Y1A94 SSPHF Phase offset request
Y18B5 Y1915 Y1975 Y19D5 Y1A35 Y1A95 SPDRPO Error temporary cancel
Y18B8 Y1918 Y1978 Y19D8 Y1A38 Y1A98 SPSYC Spindle synchronization/
superimposition cancel
Y18B9 Y1919 Y1979 Y19D9 Y1A39 Y1A99 SPCMPC Chuck close
130
PLC -> CNC

Device No.
YCD1 YE11 YF51 Y1091 Spindle-spindle polygon cancel
YCD2 YE12 YF52 Y1092 Synchronized tapping command
polarity reversal
YCD3 YE13 YF53 Y1093 Spindle OFF mode
YCE2 YE22 YF62 Y10A2 Door open signal input (spindle
speed monitor)
YCE3 YE23 YF63 Y10A3 Door interlock spindle speed clamp
PLC→CNC
Device No.
Spindle command rotation speed
R7000 R7050 R7100 R7150 R7200 R7250
output (L)
R7001 R7051 R7101 R7151 R7201 R7251 Spindle command rotation speed output (H)
R7002 R7052 R7102 R7152 R7202 R7252 SLSP Spindle command selection
R7008 R7058 R7108 R7158 R7208 R7258 S command override
R7009 R7059 R7109 R7159 R7209 R7259 Multi-point orientation position data
R7016 R7066 R7116 R7166 R7216 R7266 Spindle synchronization Basic
spindle selection
R7017 R7067 R7117 R7167 R7217 R7267 Spindle synchronization
Synchronous spindle selection
R7018 R7068 R7118 R7168 R7218 R7268 Spindle synchronization Phase shift
amount
Device No.
R2567 R2767 R2967 R3167 Encoder selection
131
5. OTHER DEVICES
5. OTHER DEVICES
In addition to X, Y and R devices described above, the following devices exist:
Name Symbol Description

Internal relay M (1) Internal and latch relays are auxiliary relays in the sequence
Latch relay F that cannot directly be output to the external.
L (2) The latch relay L will be backed up even if the power is
turned OFF.
(3) The internal relay F may be used as the interface for the
alarm message display.
Timer T (1) Timers T are count-up timers.
ST (2) Timer T and ST can set the timer value from either the
sequence program or setting and display unit.
(3) The 100ms, 10ms and 100ms integral timer are available.
Counter C (1) Counters C are count-up counters.
(2) Counter C can set the counter value from either the
sequence program or setting and display unit.
Data register D (1) The data register stores sequence data.
(2) One data register consists of 16 bits and can be read or
written in 16-bit units. To handle 32-bit data, two data
registers are used. The data register addressed by a 32-bit
command is used as the low-order 16 bits; the data register
addressed by the specified data register number +1 is used
as the high-order 16 bits.
File register R (1) The file register release area can be used in the same
manner as the data register.
(2) To handle 32-bit data, two file registers are used. The file
register addressed by a 32-bit command is used as the
low-order 16 bits; the file register addressed by the specified
file register number +1 is used as the high-order 16 bits.
The assignment tables for the above tables are on the following pages. Copy and use them as
necessary.
132
5. OTHER DEVICES
<Format 1>
<Internal relay>
Device Abbreviation Signal name Device Abbreviation Signal name

M M
M M
M M
M M
M M
M M
M M
M M

M M
M M
M M
M M
M M
M M
M M
M M

M M
M M
M M
M M
M M
M M
M M
M M

M M
M M
M M
M M
M M
M M
M M
M M
133
5. OTHER DEVICES
<Format 2>
<Internal relay>

F F
F F
F F
F F
F F
F F
F F
F F

F F
F F
F F
F F
F F
F F
F F
F F

F F
F F
F F
F F
F F
F F
F F
F F

F F
F F
F F
F F
F F
F F
F F
F F
134
5. OTHER DEVICES
<Format 3>
<Latch relay>

L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L

L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L

L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L

L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
135
5. OTHER DEVICES
<Format 4>
<Timer>

T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T

T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T

T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T

T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
136
5. OTHER DEVICES
<Format 5>
<Timer numerical value setting data output> 16-bit unit

T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T

T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T

T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T

T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
T T
137
5. OTHER DEVICES
<Format 6>
<Timer>

ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST

ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST

ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST

ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
138
5. OTHER DEVICES
<Format 7>
<Timer numerical value setting data output> 16-bit unit

ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST

ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST

ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST

ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
ST ST
139
5. OTHER DEVICES
<Format 8>
<Counter>

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
140
5. OTHER DEVICES

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
141
5. OTHER DEVICES

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
142
5. OTHER DEVICES

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
143
5. OTHER DEVICES
<Format 9>
<Counter numerical value setting data> 16-bit unit

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
144
5. OTHER DEVICES

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
145
5. OTHER DEVICES

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
146
5. OTHER DEVICES

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C

C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
C C
147
5. OTHER DEVICES
<Format 10>
<Data register> 16-bit unit

D D
D D
D D
D D
D D
D D
D D
D D

D D
D D
D D
D D
D D
D D
D D
D D

D D
D D
D D
D D
D D
D D
D D
D D

D D
D D
D D
D D
D D
D D
D D
D D
148
5. OTHER DEVICES
<Format 11>
<File register> 16-bit unit

R R
R R
R R
R R
R R
R R
R R
R R

R R
R R
R R
R R
R R
R R
R R
R R

R R
R R
R R
R R
R R
R R
R R
R R

R R
R R
R R
R R
R R
R R
R R
R R
149
6. EXPLANATION OF INTERFACE SIGNALS
The signals are explained in order of the tables of input/output signals with the controller as shown below.
6.1 PLC Input Signals (Bit Type: X***)

6.2 PLC Input Signals (Data Type: R***)
6.3 PLC Output Signals (Bit Type: Y***)
6.4 PLC Output Signals (Data Type: R***)
6.5 Special relays (SM***)
6.6 Explanations for each application
How to read the signals
B Signal
contact Signal name abbreviation $1 $2 $3 $4
AUTOMATIC INTERLOCK+
* *+AIT1 to 8 Y820 to 7 Y828 to F Y830 to 7 Y838 to F
n-TH AXIS
Indicates a device No. for each part system

or spindle.
"—" indicates that there is no corresponding
PLC -> controller signal. device, or that the device for the 1st part
Indicates B contact signal which system (1st spindle) is used commonly.
becomes valid when turned OFF.
150
B Signal
contact Signal name abbreviation Common for part systems
OPERATION BOARD
- X2F0
RESET KEY INPUT
[Function]
This signal indicates that the soft keyboard reset button is pressed.
[Operation]
When the soft keyboard reset button is pressed, this signal turns ON; and then it turns OFF after 10ms.
NC will not be reset even if this signal is turned ON. In order to reset the NC, check the status of this signal
with ladder, and turn NC reset (NRST1), etc. ON/OFF.
[Related signal]
(1) Display changeover $1 to $4 (DISP1 to 4: X730 to 733)
B Signal
- POWER OFF PROCESSING X707
[Function] [Operation]
This signal notifies that the power OFF processing is in execution.
This signal is remained ON until the control unit's power is turned OFF.
Refer to the "Automatic power OFF request" signal (Y75D) for details.
0: Not executed
1: During execution
[Related signals]
(1) Automatic power OFF request (Y75D)
(2) Power OFF indication Y device No. (R215)
151
B Signal
- BATTERY WARNING BATWR X70E
[Function]
This signal notifies that the voltage of the data storage battery in the controller has dropped below the
battery alarm detection level.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when:
(1) The voltage of the data storage battery, which is checked constantly, has dropped below the battery
alarm detection level.
The alarm display indicates the system alarm (Z52 0001) at this time.
The alarm display can be turned OFF by reset, but the signal will not be turned OFF.
Even if this signal is ON, starting the automatic operation is possible.
The signal turns OFF when:

(1) The voltage of the data storage battery drops below the battery alarm detection level, and the battery
alarm (BATAL) signal turns ON.
(The system alarm (Z52 0003) is displayed.)
[Caution]
(1) When this signal (X70E) turns ON, replacement of the battery with new one is recommended.
(2) If invalidating the battery alarm/warning detection (#6449 bit4=1), this signal will not turn ON and the
alarm messages will not be displayed either.
[Related signals]
(1) Battery alarm (BATAL: X70F)
(2) Battery drop cause (R56)
152
B Signal
- BATTERY ALARM BATAL X70F
[Function]
This signal notifies that the voltage of the data storage battery in the controller or the battery supplying to
the absolute position detector has dropped below the specified value.
[Operation]
(1) The voltage of the data storage battery is checked when the power is turned ON and is below the
specified voltage (approx. 2.6V). At this time, the system alarm (Z52) will display.
(2) A fault is detected in the power voltage supplied to the absolute position detector.
At this time, the absolute position detection system alarm (Z73 0001) and servo alarm (S52 9F) will
display.
(3) A fault is detected in the power voltage for the speed detector in the absolute position detector.
At this time, the absolute position detection system alarm (Z71 0001) will display.
When this signal is ON, automatic starting is not possible.

(1) For alarms caused by ON condition (1), the signal can be turned OFF by resetting after the battery is
replaced with new one.
(2) For alarms caused by ON conditions (2) and (3), the signal can be turned OFF by removing the power
voltage fault and then turning the power ON again.
[Related signal]
(1) Battery warning (BATWR: X70E)
(2) Battery drop cause (R56)
[Caution]
(1) If simply turning the control unit power OFF upon occurrence of this battery alarm (especially in the
"ON" conditions (1)), data storing machining programs, etc. will be destroyed. Replace the battery
with new one before turning the power OFF and confirm that this signal is turned OFF. If this battery
alarm has occurred when the control unit power is ON (especially in the "ON" conditions (1)), take
measures, assuming that the data storing machining programs may have been destroyed.
(2) If invalidating the battery alarm/warning detection (#6449 bit4=1), this signal will not turn ON or the
alarm messages will not be displayed.
(3) Make sure to backup the control unit data and keep it in case that this alarm occurs.
B Signal
COLLECTING
- X723
DIAGNOSIS DATA
[Function]
This signal informs that collecting history data is being executed by the operation history function.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON while collecting history data is executed.
[Related signals]
(1) Collecting diagnosis data stop (Y72B)
153
B Signal
IN REMOTE PROGRAM
- X724
INPUT
REMOTE PROGRAM INPUT
- X725
COMPLETION
- X726
ERROR
Refer to the section on "Remote program input start" signal for the function and operation.
[Related signals]
(1) Remote program input error information (R30)
(2) Remote program input start (Y76C)
(3) Remote program input No. (R352,R353)
B Signal
IN TOOL ID
- X727
COMMUNICATION
[Function]
This signal indicates that data transmission and reception with the tool ID controller are executed.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON during commanding to write and read the tool ID data, and turns OFF after the
transmission and reception with the tool ID controller is completed.
For whether transmission and reception have normally completed or not, refer to the "Tool ID
communication error information".
[Caution]
Even if the "Reset" signal is turned ON during the tool ID communication, the communication is not
stopped.
[Related signals]
(1) Tool ID communication error information (R62)
154
B Signal
POWER OFF REQUIRED
- AFTER PARAMETER X72F
CHANGE
[Function]
This signal informs that the set parameter is not valid without rebooting the power.
[Operation]
When the following operation is executed, the "Power OFF required after parameter change" signal is
output, and the display symbol "PR" is displayed in the operation status section.
(1) The parameters to be valid after rebooting the power are set. / Such parameter data is input.
(2) The auxiliary axis parameters to be valid after rebooting the power are set. / Such data is input. / Such
data backed up before is input.
(3) The maintenance data for the ALL1 is input.
(4) The backup data is input with the SRAM backup function.
If the power is rebooted, the "Power OFF required after parameter change" signal will turn OFF, and the
"PR" display will disappear.
(Note 1) Even if the same value is set to the parameter which needs to reboot the power, the "Power
OFF required parameter change" signal is output, and the "PR" is displayed.
(Note 2) Even if the value is returned to the original value after setting the parameter which needs to
reboot the power, the "Power OFF required after parameter change" signal remains ON, and the
"PR" also remains displayed.
(Note 3) The parameters which do not need to reboot the power are targeted for rewriting the parameters
with DDB or G10, so the "Power OFF required after parameter change" signal is not output, and
the "PR" is not displayed.
155
B Signal
24 HOURS CONTINUOUS
- CNOP X752
OPERATION
[Function]
This signal notifies that the connector status of the drive power has been ON for over 24 hours.
[Operation]
This signal turns OFF when the contactor shutoff is confirmed by the contactor shutoff test.
Turn the "contactor shutoff test" signal ON to carry out this test.
[Caution]
There is a possibility that the contactor is welded and so your safety may not be secured when "24 hours
continuous operation" signal is output. Thus, under this condition, do not input "speed monitor mode"
signal and open the door.
[Related signals]
(1) Contactor shutoff test (Y742)
(2) Speed monitor mode (R296)
B Signal
- SERVO READY n-TH AXIS RDY1 to 8 X780 to 7 X788 to F X790 to 7 X798 to F
[Function]
This signal indicates that the drive section of the n-th axis is ready for operation.
[Operation]
(1) The power supply of the controller is turned ON and the diagnosis on the servo system has been
completed successfully.
(2) Servo alarm has been reset.
(3) Emergency stop has been reset.
(4) "Servo off" signal is reset.

(1) Servo alarm occurs.
(2) Emergency stop is issued.
(3) "Servo off" signal is input.
156
[Operation sequence]
Controller power
supply
Controller ready
completion
Servo ready
n-th axis
In reset
Emergency stop
Servo alarm
Reset & rewind
3s
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
0.7s 0.7s 0.7s
[Related signal]
(1) Servo ready completion (SA: XC11)
157
B Signal
- AXIS SELECTED n-TH AXIS AX1 to 8 X7A0 to 7 X7A8 to F X7B0 to 7 X7B8 to F
[Function]
This signal indicates that motion command is issued to the control axis.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON and OFF as follows:
(1) Automatic operation
The signal is ON while the motion command is issued to the end of movement, or to when automatic
operation pause turns ON.
(2) Manual operation
(a) For JOG mode
The signal is ON while "Feed axis selection" signal (+Jn and -Jn) is ON.
(b) For HANDLE mode
When "Handle axis selection code" signal (HS11 to 116, HS21 to 216, HS31 to 316) and "Handle
valid" signal (HS1S, HS2S, HS3S) have been selected, the "Axis selected" signal for the axis
specified by the "Handle axis selection code" signal is ON.
(c) For INCREMENTAL mode
The signal turns ON when "Feed axis selection" signal turns ON, and turns OFF when the
specified motion is completed.
(d) For MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED mode
The signal turns ON when "Manual arbitrary feed strobe" signal (CXS8) turns ON, and turns OFF
when the specified motion is completed.
(e) For REFERENCE POSITION RETURN mode
The signal is ON while "Feed axis selection" signal (+Jn and -Jn) is ON. After "Reference position
return near point detection" signal is detected, and the motion speed changes to approach
(creeping) speed, the "Axis selected" signal remains ON until the motion stops at the reference
position, even when "Feed axis selection" signal turns OFF.
(3) Other conditions
(a) The signal can turn ON even during machine lock (Z-axis is in cancellation). However, it does
not turn ON during machine lock in manual operation mode.
(b) The signal remains on even when motion stops due to feedrate override set at 0%, manual control
feedrate set at 0 mm/min, or 0 inch/min.
(c) Interlock does not affect status of this signal (the signal remains ON, or turns ON).
(d) "Servo off" signal does not affect status of this signal.
(e) The signal cannot be turned ON by G04 and G92.
(f ) The signal turns OFF with "controller Reset & Rewind", or "Emergency stop".
(Example)
Axial motion
Feed axis selection
Axis selected
158
B Signal
IN AXIS PLUS MOTION
- MVP1 to 8 X7C0 to 7 X7C8 to F X7D0 to 7 X7D8 to F
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal indicates that the specified axial motion is in plus (+) direction.
This signal is available per control axis, and the last number of the signal name indicates the control axis
No.
MVPn
1: 1st axis in motion
:
:
8: 8th axis in motion
P: In motion to plus direction
M: In motion to minus direction
[Operation]
(1) The specified axial component starts moving in the plus direction or when moving.
(1) The specified control axis stops moving or moves in the minus direction.
An example of the timing chart for the jog mode is shown below.
Feed axis selection+ (+J1)
1st axis motion [+]
Feed axis selection- (-J1)
1st axis motion [-]
In axis plus motion (MVP1)
In axis minus motion (MVM1)
(Note 1) This signal operates regardless of the operation mode.

(Note 2) The real movement direction is indicated.
(Note 3) The signal does not turn ON during machine lock.
[Related signals]
In axis minus motion n-th axis (MVM1 to 8: X7E0 to 7)
B Signal
IN AXIS MINUS MOTION
- MVM 1 to 8 X7E0 to 7 X7E8 to F X7F0 to 7 X7F8 to F
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal indicates that the control axis is moving in the minus direction.
[Operation]
This motion direction is the reverse of the plus motion, and the operation is the same as "In axis plus
motion" (MVPn).
[Related signals]
(1) In axis plus motion n-th axis (MVP1 to 8: X7C0 to 7)
159
B Signal
1ST REFERENCE
- POSITION REACHED ZP11 to 18 X800 to 7 X808 to F X810 to 7 X818 to F
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal indicates that the axial component of the n-th axis is ON the 1st reference position.
No.
ZP1n
1: 1st reference position reached, 1st axis
:
:
8: 1st reference position reached, 8th axis
[Operation]
(1) The signal turns ON when:
• "1st reference position reached" is attained with reference position return mode in manual
operation.
Refer to the REFERENCE POSITION RETURN (ZRN) section for details on returning.
• "1st reference position reached" is attained with G28 command in automatic operation.
(Note) If "1st reference position reached" is achieved in other operation mode, or by other command, the
signal does not turn ON.
(2) The signal turns OFF when:

• The axial component in position is relocated from the 1st reference position by motion command.
• "Emergency stop" signal is input or servo alarm occurs, causing stop to the machine.
(3) Reference position return operation pattern

• When basic machine coordinate system is not
Dog-type reference position return
established.
• When dog-type return is selected with setup
parameters, basic specification parameter "#1063
mandog" in the manual mode.
Near-point dog
Reference position
• When basic machine coordinate system is not
High-speed reference position return established.
• When high-speed return is selected with setup
parameters, basic specification parameter "#1063
mandog" in the manual mode.
(Note)
Reference position return will be the
Near-point dog
high-speed return when the basic machine
Reference position coordinate system is established
(2nd time and following).
[Related signals]
(1) 2nd reference position reached n-th axis (ZP21 to 28: X820 to 7)
(2) 3rd reference position reached n-th axis (ZP31 to 38: X840 to 7)
(3) 4th reference position reached n-th axis (ZP41 to 48: X860 to 7)
160
B Signal
2ND REFERENCE
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal indicates that the axial component of the n-th axis is on the 2nd reference position.
No.
ZP2n
1: 2nd reference position reached, 1st axis
:
:
8: 2nd reference position reached, 8th axis
[Operation]
• "2nd reference position reached" is attained with G30 command in automatic operation.
(Note) If "2nd reference position reached" is achieved in other operation mode, or by other command, the
signal does not turn ON.

• The axial component in position is relocated from the 1st reference position by motion command.
• "Emergency stop" signal is input or servo alarm occurs, causing stop to the machine.
[Related signals]
(1) 1st reference position reached n-th axis (ZP11 to 18: X800 to 7)
(2) 3rd reference position reached n-th axis (ZP31 to 38: X840 to 7)
(3) 4th reference position reached n-th axis (ZP41 to 48: X860 to 7)
B Signal
3RD REFERENCE
n-TH AXIS
The function and operation of this signal are the same as those of "2nd reference position reached" signal,
except for 2nd and 3rd reference positions and G command (G30P3 is used instead of G30P2 Xx Yy ...).
Refer to the section of "2nd reference position reached".
B Signal
4TH REFERENCE
n-TH AXIS
The function and operation of this signal are the same as those of "2nd reference position reached" signal,
except for 2nd and 4th reference positions and G command (G30P4 is used instead of G30P2 Xx Yy ...).
Refer to the section of "2nd reference position reached".
161
B Signal
NEAR REFERENCE
- NRF1 to 8 X880 to 7 X888 to F X890 to 7 X898 to F
POSITION n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal indicates that the control axis is near the 1st reference position in the absolute position
detection system.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the control axis is in the range of the parameter set using the 1st reference
position as a base point, and turns OFF when the range is exceeded. The parameter is set with #2057
(nrefp) and #2058 (nrefn) in the [ABS. POSI PARAM] screen.
1st reference position

+ direction - direction
#2057 setting value #2058 setting value
Near reference position

(NRFn)
(Note 1) The "Near reference position" signal is output even while the axis is moving, but there may be a
slight deviation with the actual machine position.
Rapid traverse : Approx. 19mm at 20m/min.
Cutting feed : Approx. 9.5mm at 10m/min.
(Note 2) This signal is valid only with the absolute position detection system.
(Note 3) When 0 is set for #2057 (nrefp) and #2058 (nrefn) in the [ABS. POSI PARAM] screen, it will be
same as when the grid width is set.
162
B Signal
ZERO POINT
- INITIALIZATION SET ZSF1 to 8 X8C0 to 7 X8C8 to F X8D0 to 7 X8D8 to F
COMPLETED n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal notifies that the basic machine coordinate system has been set (established) during zero point
initialization set using the marked point alignment method in the absolute position detection system.
[Operation]
This signal is valid when "#2049 TYPE" on the [ABS. POSI PARAM] screen is set to "2", and turns ON
when the basic machine coordinate system is set (established).
This signal will turn OFF if initializing is carried out again or if the power is turned ON again.
<Zero point initialization set method using marked point alignment method, and timing chart>
[Outline of zero point initialization set method] Machine basic position
Start point
(Note) The axis movement for
(c) (b) and (d) is carried out
(a) (b)
with jogging or handle
Basic machine coordinate system operation.
zero point Completion
(e) (d)
Reference position
Zero point return parameter

([#2037 G53ofs]) Grid point Screen
(absolute position [TO END]
basic point) display value
Either one is [ZERO] value

set on the screen.
[Time chart] ( (a) to (e) in the figure correspond to (a) to (e) above)
Zero point initialization set mode (a)

(AZSn)
In initialization
(R62) (b)
Zero point initialization set start (c) (d)

(ZSTn)
Zero point initialization set completed (e)

(ZSFn)
Initialization incompletion (e)
[Related signals]
(1) Zero point initialization set error completed (ZSE1 to 8: X8E0 to 7)
(2) In initialization (R574)
(3) Initialization incompletion (R575)
(4) Zero point initialization set mode (AZS1 to 8: Y960 to 7)
(5) Zero point initialization set start (ZST1 to 8: Y980 to 7)
163
B Signal
ZERO POINT
INITIALIZATION SET
- ZSE1 to 8 X8E0 to 7 X8E8 to F X8F0 to 7 X8F8 to F
ERROR COMPLETED
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal is output when initializing is not possible during the marked point alignment method of the
absolute position detection system.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the initializing is not possible at the rising edge of the "Zero point initialization
set start" (ZSTn) signal.
This signal is invalidated in the following cases:
During emergency stop
During reset
When "Zero point initialization set start" (ZSTn) signal is turned ON before the "Zero point initialization
set mode" (AZSn) signal
When grid has not been passed even once after the power has been turned ON. (Depends on the
detector type)
[Related signals]
(1) Zero point initialization set completed (ZSF1 to 8: X8C0 to 7)
(4) Zero point initialization set mode (AZS1 to 8: Y960 to 7)
(5) Zero point initialization set start (ZST1 to 8: Y980 to 7)
164
B Signal
IN CURRENT LIMIT
- ILI1 to 8 X900 to 7 X908 to F X910 to 7 X918 to F
n-TH AXIS
This signal turns ON during the current limit.
[Related signals]
(1) Current limit reached n-th axis (ILA1 to 8: X920 to 7)
(2) Current limit changeover n-th axis (ILC1 to 8: Y9A0 to 7)
(3) Droop release request n-th axis (DOR1 to 8: Y9C0 to 7)
(4) Current limit mode 1,2 (ILM1,2: YCC0,1)
(5) Current limit changeover (R2593)
B Signal
CURRENT LIMIT REACHED
- ILA1 to 8 X920 to 7 X928 to F X930 to 7 X938 to F
n-TH AXIS
This signal turns ON when the current reaches its limit during the current limit control.
[Related signals]
(1) In current limit n-th axis (ILI1 to 8:X900 to 7)
(4) Current limit mode 1,2 (ILM1,2: YCC0,1)
165
B Signal
NC AXIS UP-TO-SPEED
- ARRFn X940 to 7 X948 to F X950 to 7 X958 to F
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal indicates that the actual axis feedrate has reached the feedrate commanded for each axis.
ARRFn
0: 1st axis speed reached
1: 2nd axis speed reached
2: 3rd axis speed reached
:
7: 8th axis speed reached
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the difference of the speed commanded for each axis and the motor feedback
feedrate is within a set range (approx. ±15%).
This signal turns OFF when the speed difference exceeds the set range.
Axis start
±15%
Axis feedrate
NC axis up-to-speed
In axis plus motion/

In axis minus motion
[Related signals]
(1) In axis plus motion n-th axis (MVP1 to 8: X7C0 to 7)
(2) In axis minus motion n-th axis (MVM1 to 8: X7E0 to 7)
166
B Signal
UNCLAMP COMMAND
- X960 to 7 X968 to F X970 to 7 X978 to F
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal is output when movement of the axis selected as the index table indexing axis is commanded.
[Operation]
When this signal turns ON, the index table indexing axis clamp is released by the ladder, and the unclamp
completion signal is set.
This signal turns OFF when movement of the index table indexing axis is completed.
• Movement of the indexing axis is commanded during automatic operation.
This signal turns OFF when:
• Movement of the indexing axis is completed during automatic operation.
• The axis movement is forcibly ended with reset or emergency stop, etc.
(Note 1) The index command will not turn OFF if the axis movement is interrupted with an interlock or
automatic operation pause, etc.
(Note 2) This signal is turned ON and OFF when the index table indexing axis acceleration/deceleration
has completed.
Thus, if the in-position has to be confirmed during the clamp/unclamp operation, confirm with
the PLC.
[Related signals]
(1) Unclamp completion (YA20 to 7)
167
B Signal
IN MIXED
- SYNCHRONIZATION X980 to 7 X988 to F X990 to 7 X998 to F
CONTROL n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal is a status signal that indicates a state commanded by the "mixed synchronization control
request" signal.
[Operation]
The axis in the in mixed synchronization control is "1".
(Example)
1st part system 2nd part system
X1 X2 (1) Cross machining between X1 and X2:
Z1 Z2 X980 and X988 are "1".
C1 (2) When C1 is controlled in 2nd part system:
Y1 X982 and X98A are "1".
[Related signals]
(1) In mixed synchronization control request n-th axis (YA60 to 7)
B Signal
IN SYNCHRONOUS/
- SUPERIMPOSITION X9A0 to 7 X9A8 to F X9B0 to 7 X9B8 to F
CONTROL n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal informs the axis in the synchronous control/superimposition control.
0: Axis not in synchronous control/superimposition control
1: Axis in synchronous control/superimposition control
[Operation]
The synchronous axis/superimposing axis and synchronization basic axis/superimposition basic axis are
indicated during the synchronous control/superimposition control.
[Related signals]
(1) Synchronous control request n-th axis (YA80 to F)
(2) Superimposition control request n-th axis (YAA0 to 7)
168
B Signal
IN MIRROR IMAGE
- X9C0 to 7 X9C8 to F X9D0 to 7 X9D8 to F
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal indicates that a control axis is in mirror image.
There is a signal for each control axis. The last digit in the signal name indicates the control axis No.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON during:
(1) Programmable mirror image
(2) Parameter setting mirror image
(3) External input mirror image
(4) Facing turret mirror image

(1) The mirror image above is canceled.
B Signal
REFERENCE POSITION
- ESTABLISHMENT X9E0 to 7 X9E8 to F X9F0 to 7 X9F8 to F
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal indicates that a reference position is established.
There is a signal for each control axis. The last digit in the signal name indicates the control axis No.
[Operation]
(1) Manual reference position return is completed and a reference position is established.
(2) A reference position is confirmed by the absolute position detector when the power is turned ON.

(1) The reference position is lost
169
B Signal
REFERENCE POSITION
- RETURN DIRECTION XA00 to 7 XA08 to F XA10 to 7 XA18 to F
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal indicates that whether the reference position selected by "Reference position selection code
1,2" or "Each axis reference position selection" is in the plus direction or minus direction with respect to
the current position.
[Operation]
(1) The reference position selected by "Reference position selection code 1,2" (ZSL1, ZSL2: YC90,
YC91) or "Each axis reference position selection" (R2584) is in the minus direction while reference
position is established.

(1) The reference position is in the plus direction.
(2) The current position is on the reference position
(3) The reference position is lost
(Note 1) If the rotation axis type is other than all coordinate linear type, this signal turns ON when
0° < θ 180°, and turns OFF when 180° < θ 360° (0°).
(Note 2) "Reference position return direction" signal is not output for the reference position commanded
by the machining program in an automatic operation.
(Note 3) "Reference position selection code 1,2" and "Each axis reference position selection" hold the
state of the reference position return start in the reference position return mode.
(Note 4) When the zero point is changed during reference position return while "Reference position
selection code 1,2" is valid, the "Reference position return direction" is output to the zero point
prior to the change.
(Note 5) When the zero point is changed during reference position return while "Each axis reference
position selection" is valid, the "Reference position return direction" is output to the zero point
after the change.
[Related signals]
(1) Reference position establishment (X9E0 to X9E7)
(2) Reference position selection method (YC97)
(3) Reference position selection code 1,2 (ZSL1, 2: YC90, YC91)
(4) Each axis reference position selection (R2584)
170
B Signal
EXT. MACHINE
COORDINATE SYSTEM
- ECIL1 to 8 XA40 to 7 XA48 to F XA50 to 7 XA58 to F
OFFSET DATA ILLEGAL
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal indicates that the external machine coordinate system offset data is illegal, as the changed
amount by the data will exceed the rapid traverse feedrate.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the external machine coordinate system offset data is illegal. Then the change
of the external machine coordinate system offset data is ignored.
The compensation is executed with the set value unchanged.
[Related signals]
(1) Ext. machine coordinate system offset data n-th axis (R5700 to R5715)
171
B Signal
- IN JOG MODE JO XC00 XD40 XE80 XFC0
[Function]
This signal indicates that JOG mode is selected.
[Operation]
Mode is changed to JOG mode from other mode after "All axes smoothing zero" (command
acceleration/deceleration delay is zero) is verified.
Mode input Other mode JOG mode Other mode
All axes smoothing zero

(TSMZ)
In jog mode
(JO)
[Related signals]
(1) All axes smoothing zero (TSMZ: XC1A)
B Signal
- IN HANDLE MODE HO XC01 XD41 XE81 XFC1
[Function]
This signal indicates that HANDLE mode is selected.
[Operation]
Mode is changed to HANDLE mode from other mode after "All axes smoothing zero" (command
Mode input Other mode Handle mode Other mode

(TSMZ)
In handle mode
(H0)
[Related signals]
172
B Signal
- IN INCREMENTAL MODE SO XC02 XD42 XE82 XFC2
[Function]
This signal indicates that INCREMENTAL mode is selected.
[Operation]
Mode is changed to INCREMENTAL mode from other mode after "All axes smoothing zero" (command
Mode input Other mode Incremental mode Other mode

(TSMZ)
In incremental mode
(SO)
[Related signals]
B Signal
IN MANUAL ARBITRARY
- PTPO XC03 XD43 XE83 XFC3
FEED MODE
[Function]
This signal indicates that MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED mode is selected.
[Operation]
Mode is changed to MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED mode from other mode after "All axes smoothing zero"
(command acceleration/deceleration delay is zero) is verified.
Mode input Other mode Manual arbitrary feed mode Other mode

(TSMZ)
In manual arbitrary feed mode

(PTP0)
[Related signals]
173
B Signal
IN REFERENCE POSITION
- ZRNO XC04 XD44 XE84 XFC4
RETURN MODE
[Function]
This signal indicates that REFERENCE POSITION RETURN mode is selected.
[Operation]
Mode is changed from other mode to REFERENCE POSITION RETURN mode after "All axes smoothing
zero" (command acceleration/deceleration delay is zero) has been verified.
Mode input Other mode Reference positon return mode Other mode

(TSMZ)
In reference position return mode

(ZRN0)
[Related signals]
B Signal
IN AUTOMATIC
- ASTO XC05 XD45 XE85 XFC5
INITIAL SET MODE
[Function]
This signal indicates that AUTOMATIC INITIAL SET MODE is selected.
[Operation]
Mode is changed over from other mode to IN AUTOMATIC INITIAL SET mode after "All axes smoothing
zero" (command acceleration/deceleration delay is zero) has been verified.
Mode input Other mode Automatic initial set mode Other mode

(TSMZ)
In automatic initial set mode

(ASTO)
[Related signals]
174
B Signal
- IN MEMORY MODE MEMO XC08 XD48 XE88 XFC8
[Function]
This signal indicates that MEMORY mode is selected.
[Operation]
Mode is changed from other mode to MEMORY mode after "All axes smoothing zero" (command
Mode input Other mode Memory mode Other mode

(TSMZ)
In memory mode
(MEMO)
[Related signals]
B Signal
- IN TAPE MODE TO XC09 XD49 XE89 XFC9
[Function]
This signal indicates TAPE mode is selected.
[Operation]
Mode is changed from other mode to TAPE mode when "All axes smoothing zero" (command
Mode input Other mode Tape mode Other mode

(TSMZ)
In tape mode
(TO)
[Related signals]
175
B Signal
- IN MDI MODE DO XC0B XD4B XE8B XFCB
[Function]
This signal indicates that MDI mode is selected.
[Operation]
Mode is changed from other mode to MDI mode when "All axes smoothing zero" (command
Mode input Other mode MDI mode Other mode

(TSMZ)
In MDI mode
(DO)
[Related signals]
176
B Signal
CONTROLLER READY
- MA XC10 XD50 XE90 XFD0
COMPLETION
[Function]
This signal indicates that the controller is ready for normal operation.
[Operation]
(1) The controller starts working successfully after it is turned ON or when no off-condition exists.

(1) The controller is turned OFF.
(2) Trouble occurs with the controller (such as failure in the CPU, memory, etc.).
(3) "Servo alarm" which cannot be reset without turning OFF the power supply of the controller occurs.
B Signal
SERVO READY
- SA XC11 XD51 XE91 XFD1
COMPLETION
[Function]
This signal indicates that the servo system is ready for normal operation. In other words, the servo system
(position control) is not working when the signal is OFF.
[Operation]
(1) The diagnosis on the servo system is completed successfully after the control unit is turned ON.
(2) "Servo alarm", if occurs, is reset. (Resetting may not be possible depending on the servo alarm
contents.)
(3) "Emergency stop" input is removed.
(4) The power is turned OFF and ON again by entering the decryption code upon expiration set in the
credit system.

(1) "Servo alarm" occurs.
(2) "Emergency stop" is input.
(3) The power supply of controller is turned OFF.
(4) Trouble occurs with the controller (such as failure in the CPU or memory).
(5) The decryption code has not been entered to the controller by the specified expiration date in the
credit system.
(Note 1) This signal (SA) cannot be turned OFF only with the "Servo OFF" (*SVFn) signal.
[Related signals]
(1) Servo ready completion output designation (R2625)
177
B Signal
IN AUTOMATIC
- OP XC12 XD52 XE92 XFD2
OPERATION "RUN"
[Function]
This signal indicates that the controller is in automatic operation caused by "Automatic operation "start"
command" signal.
[Operation]
This signal stays ON from when automatic operation starts with the "Automatic operation "start" command
(ST)" signal in the memory, MDI or tape mode, until the operation is reset.
Automatic operation
“start” command (ST)
In automatic operation
“run” (OP)
Reset conditions
(1) Reset conditions include the followings:

• "Reset & rewind (RRW)" is input.
• "Emergency stop" signal or "Servo alarm" signal is input.
(2) Signals that indicates status of automatic operation are "In automatic operation "start"(STL)" and "In
automatic operation pause (SPL)" besides "In automatic operation "run"(OP)".
The ON/OFF state of these signals in each state are shown below.
In automatic In automatic In automatic

operation operation operation
"RUN" (OP) "START" (STL) "PAUSE" (SPL)
Reset condition 0 0 0
Automatic operation 1 0 0
stop condition
pause condition
start condition
The outline of each condition is as follows:

• Reset condition ·················· Automatic operation is stopped by one of reset conditions
described above. (All states not in automatic operation
are this state.)
• Automatic operation stop condition ············ Automatic operation is stopped after completion of one
block. (This state is entered during single block stop.)
• Automatic operation pause condition ········· Automatic operation suspended in the course of
execution of one block. (This state is entered when the
"Automatic operation "pause" command" signal (*SP) is
OFF.)
• Automatic operation start condition ········· Automatic operation is being executed.
[Related signals]
(1) In automatic operation "start" (STL: XC13)
(2) In automatic operation "pause" (SPL: XC14)
178
B Signal
IN AUTOMATIC
- STL XC13 XD53 XE93 XFD3
OPERATION "START"
[Function]
This signal informs the PLC that the controller is started by automatic operation and motion command or
M,S, T, B processing is in execution.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON by the "Automatic operation "start" command" signal (ST) in memory, MDI or tape
mode, and OFF when automatic operation pause, block stop or reset condition occurs.
The "In automatic operation "start"" signal (STL) timing chart, including automatic operation "pause" and
block stop, is shown below.
Automatic operation "start"

command (ST)
In automatic operation "run"
(OP)
In automatic operation "start"
(STL)
In automatic operation "pause"
(SPL)
Automatic operation "pause" STL is OFF after the

command (*SP) block was completed.
Single block (SBK)
Reset conditions
(Reset & rewind (RRW))
(Note 1) For reset conditions, refer to the section on "In automatic operation "run"" (OP).
[Related signals]
(1) In automatic operation "run" (OP: XC12)
(3) Automatic operation "start" command (ST: YC10)
179
B Signal
IN AUTOMATIC
- SPL XC14 XD54 XE94 XFD4
OPERATION "PAUSE"
[Function]
This signal informs that the controller operation has been stopped due to the "Automatic operation
"pause" command" signal, etc., during motion command or miscellaneous function command.
[Operation]
The "In automatic operation "pause"" signal (SPL) turns ON with the following factors during automatic
operation using the memory, MDI or tape mode.
(1) When "Automatic operation "pause" command" signal (*SP) turns OFF.
(2) When mode changes to manual operation mode (jog, handle, incremental, reference position return
mode, etc.).
This signal turns ON even during machine lock or a miscellaneous function (M, S, T, B) command.
This signal turns OFF in the following cases.
(1) When "Automatic operation "start" command" signal (ST) turns OFF from ON. However, this will be
invalid if the "Automatic operation "pause" command" signal (*SP) is not turned back ON or if the
mode is not automatic operation (memory, MDI, tape).
(2) When reset conditions are input.
The timing chart for the "In automatic operation "pause"" signal (SPL) is shown below.
Invalid
Automatic operation
"start" command (ST)
"start" (STL)
"pause" (SPL)
Automatic operation
"pause" command (*SP)
Axis motion
G00X100 ··· G00X100 ···
Reset condition
(Reset & rewind (RRW))
(Note 1) Refer to the section on "In automatic operation "run"" (OP) for the rest conditions.
[Related signals]
(1) In automatic operation (OP: XC12)
(2) In automatic operation "start" (STL: XC13)
(4) Automatic operation "pause" command (*SP: YC11)
180
B Signal
- IN "RESET" RST XC15 XD55 XE95 XFD5
[Function]
This signal informs that the controller is in reset condition.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON:
(1) For about 4 to 5 seconds after the power is turned ON.
(2) While "Reset and rewind" signal (RRW) is ON, and for about 0.5 to 1 seconds after "Reset and
rewind" signal (RRW) turns OFF.
(3) While "Emergency stop" signal is being input, and for 1 to 1.5 seconds after "Emergency stop" signal
turns OFF.
(4) During "Servo alarm", and for 1 to 1.5 seconds after "Servo alarm" is removed.
B Signal
IN MANUAL ARBITRARY
- CXN XC16 XD56 XE96 XFD6
FEED
[Function]
This signal is output during execution of manual arbitrary feed command.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when "Manual arbitrary feed strobe" signal (CXS8) turns ON during MANUAL
ARBITRARY FEED mode.
The signal turns OFF when commanded feed has been completed, and when "Reset & Rewind" signal is
input during execution of manual arbitrary feed command.
[Timing chart]
Manual arbitrary feed strobe

(CXS8)
In manual arbitrary feed

(CXN)
Manual arbitrary feed

completion (CXFIN)
Rise of strobe signal is detected and When the specified feed is completed
"In manual arbitrary feed" signal successfully, the "In manual arbitrary
(CXN) turns ON. feed" signal turns OFF and the "Manual
arbitrary feed completion" signal turns
ON.
[Related signals]
(1) Manual arbitrary feed strobe (CXS8: YCBF)
(2) In manual arbitrary feed (CXFIN: XC1C)
181
B Signal
- IN REWIND RWD XC17 XD57 XE97 XFD7
[Function]
This signal informs that the controller is indexing the memory mode.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when "Reset & rewind" signal (RRW) is turned ON by the PLC in memory mode (with
M02 or M30 command), and turns OFF when the controller completes indexing the program in execution.
(Note 1) Since indexing of program in memory mode ends immediately, it may not be verified by user
PLC.
[Related signals]
(1) Reset & rewind (RRW: YC1A)
182
B Signal
MOTION COMMAND
- DEN XC18 XD58 XE98 XFD8
COMPLETION
[Function]
This signal notifies that the commanded motion has been completed by the controller.
In the machining program when the motion command and miscellaneous function (M, S, T, B) command
are specified in the same block, this signal can be used as a synchronization signal to determine whether
miscellaneous function command is executed simultaneously with or after the motion command.
[Operation]
(1) The system is initialized after the power is turned ON.
(2) Execution of motion command is completed in automatic operation.
(3) Reset condition occurs.
(For reset conditions, refer to the section on "In automatic operation "run"" signal (OP).)
The timing chart for the "Motion command completion" signal (DEN) is shown below.
Command program G00X100.; G00X200.M08;
Axis motion state

Detection not
Motion command possible
completion (DEN)
M function strobe (MF)
M code data
DEN process
M code decode (user process)
Machine side control

M function finish 1 (FIN1)
(Note 1) The "Motion command completion" signal is output even during machine lock.
(Note 2) Unless commanded motion is completed, this signal does not turn ON even when motion is
suspended by interlock function or "Automatic operation "pause" command" signal.
183
B Signal
- ALL AXES IN-POSITION TIMP XC19 XD59 XE99 XFD9
[Function]
This signal informs the PLC that the all axis components of the controller are in commanded positions.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when there is no acceleration/deceleration delay in all control axes and servo errors
(remaining pulses) in positioning are within the specified range.

(1) Acceleration/deceleration motion is delayed in a control axis.
(2) Servo positioning error (remaining pulses) for a control axis exceeds the specified range.
(Note 1) The signal may turn ON even during motion if the motion is an extremely low speed.
(Note 2) The condition where the servo errors must be in a specific range to turn ON the signal can be
invalidated with parameters. In this case, the signal will turn ON/OFF depending on whether
there is any delay in the acceleration/deceleration.
Smoothing circuit Servo amplifer

Accel./Decel. Positioning loop
Time constant Time constant
Motor
Accel./Decel. delay Motor servo control error
[Related signal]
184
B Signal
ALL AXES SMOOTHING
- TSMZ XC1A XD5A XE9A XFDA
ZERO
[Function]
This signal informs the PLC that there is no delay (caused by the acceleration/deceleration time
constants) in any of the controller control axis command system.
The PLC axis is not included in the control axis.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when the movement amount commanded in automatic or manual operation,
including delay amount of acceleration/deceleration time constant, is successfully output.
The signal turns OFF during execution of movement command, or if delay exists in
acceleration/deceleration time constant.
Feed axis selection (+J1)
Axis motion
(Position loop delay
Acceleration/deceleration
is not included.)
time constant
(Note 1) The signal can turn ON even during machine lock.

(Note 2) The signal may turn ON during motion if the motion is an extremely low speed.
[Related signals]
(1) All axes in-position (TIMP: XC19)
(2) In axis plus motion n-th axis (MVP1 to MVP8: X7C0 to 7) "All axes smoothing zero"
(3) In axis minus motion n-th axis (MVM1 to MVM8: X7E0 to 7) signal turns ON when these
signals are OFF.
185
B Signal
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED
- CXFIN XC1C XD5C XE9C XFDC
COMPLETION
[Function]
This signal is output when motion commanded in manual arbitrary feed mode is completed.
[Operation]

(1) The motion commanded in manual arbitrary feed mode is completed.

(1) During motion in manual arbitrary feed mode.
(The signal stays OFF when motion is interrupted by a reset & rewind signal.)
(2) The power is turned ON.
[Timing chart]
Manual arbitrary feed strobe

(CXS8)
In manual arbitrary feed
(CXN)
Manual arbitrary feed completion

(CXFIN)
Start of strobe signal is detected

When manual arbitrary feed is completed
and "In manual arbitrary feed"
successfully, "Manual arbitrary feed
signal is output. "Manual arbitrary
completion" signal turns ON.
feed completion" signal turns OFF.
[Related signals]
(1) Manual arbitrary feed strobe (CXS8: YCBF)
(2) In manual arbitrary feed (CXN: XC16)
186
B Signal
- IN RAPID TRAVERSE RPN XC20 XD60 XEA0 XFE0
[Function]
This signal is output during rapid traverse motion in automatic operation (memory, MDI, tape).
[Operation]
(1) The signal is ON when:
• Rapid traverse motion in automatic operation.
Fixed cycle positioning and reference position return (G28), etc., are included in the automatic
operation rapid traverse besides the motion command by the G00 command.

• The block in rapid traverse motion is completed during automatic operation.
• Rapid traverse motion is stopped by "Automatic operation "pause" command" signal (*SP) during
automatic operation.
• Rapid traverse motion axis is stopped by interlock during automatic operation.
• The ratio of the "Cutting feedrate override code" (*FV1 to 16) becomes 0% during automatic rapid
traverse operation.
• A stroke end (hardware or software) occurs during automatic rapid traverse operation.
• Reset condition occurs.
(Note 1) "In rapid traverse" signal (RPN) can turn ON and OFF even during machine lock.
(Note 2) The signal is not output in manual operation.
(Note 3) For reset condition, refer to the section on "In automatic operation "run"" signal (OP).
The timing chart for "In rapid traverse" signal (RPN) is shown below.
Command program G00X100.; M08 ;
Axis motion state
In rapid traverse
(RPN)
187
B Signal
- IN CUTTING FEED CUT XC21 XD61 XEA1 XFE1
[Function]
This signal informs that given motion command is executed for cutting feed in automatic operation
(memory, MDI, tape).
[Operation]
(1) Motion command is given for cutting feed in automatic operation.

(1) The block in cutting feed in automatic operation is completed.
(2) Execution of cutting feed is suspended by "Automatic operation "pause" command" signal (*SP).
(3) Execution of cutting feed is stopped by interlock during automatic operation.
(4) The ratio of the cutting feedrate override becomes 0% during automatic cutting feed operation.
(5) A stroke end (hardware or software) occurs during automatic cutting feed operation.
(Note 1) The signal (CUT) can be turned ON and OFF during cutting feed even if machine interlock is
applied.
(Note 2) Cutting feed commands in automatic operation include G01, G02, G03 and G31.
(Note 3) The signal is not output in manual operation.
(Note 4) For reset condition, refer to the section on "In automatic operation "run"" signal (OP).
Cutting feed (G01)
Axis motion
In cutting feed (CUT)
188
B Signal
- IN TAPPING TAP XC22 XD62 XEA2 XFE2
[Function]
This signal informs that commanded motion in automatic operation (memory, MDI, tape) is executed in
canned tapping cycle, or tapping mode is selected for execution of commanded motion.
[Operation]
• Commanded motion in automatic operation is being executed in canned tapping cycle.
• Commanded motion in automatic operation is being executed in tapping mode (G63).

• Commanded motion is not being executed in fixed tapping cycle, nor in tapping mode.
The signal is reset by G80 or "01" group G command (G00, G01, G02, G03, G33) during canned
tapping cycle, and by G61, G62 and G64 during tapping mode.
Motion
G00 G84····; G80; G63; G01····; G61;
command
In tapping
(TAP)
(Note 1) This signal is output even during machine lock.
B Signal
- IN THREAD CUTTING THRD XC23 XD63 XEA3 XFE3
[Function]
This signal is output during execution of thread cutting command.
[Operation]
(1) Thread cutting command is given.

(1) Motion command other than thread cutting command is given.
(2) Reset condition occurs during thread cutting.
(Note) Spindle override is invalid (100%) during thread cutting.
189
B Signal
- IN SYNCHRONOUS FEED SYN XC24 XD64 XEA4 XFE4
[Function]
This signal is output during execution of synchronous feed command.
[Operation]
(1) Synchronous feed command (G94) is given.

(1) Asynchronous feed command (G95) is given.
B Signal
IN CONSTANT SURFACE
- CSS XC25 XD65 XEA5 XFE5
SPEED
[Function]
This signal informs that automatic operation is under constant circumferential (surface) speed control.
[Operation]
(1) Constant surface speed control mode (G96) is selected during automatic operation.

(1) Constant surface speed control off command (G97) is given.
Motion
G00 G96 G1 X30. S30; G0 X- ; G0Z-10.; G97 G01····
command
In constant surface
speed (CSS)
(Note 1) This signal (CSS) is output even during machine lock.
190
B Signal
- IN SKIP SKIP XC26 XD66 XEA6 XFE6
[Function]
This signal is output while skip command (G31) is being executed.
[Operation]
(1) Skip command (G31) is being executed with automatic operation.

(1) Block having a skip command is completed.
B Signal
IN REFERENCE POSITION
- ZRNN XC27 XD67 XEA7 XFE7
RETURN
[Function]
This signal is output while reference position return command is being executed.
[Operation]
(1) G28 command is executed.
(2) G30 command is executed.
(3) Manual reference position return mode is selected.

(1) All cases other than above.
B Signal
- IN INCH UNIT SELECTION INCH XC28 XD68 XEA8 XFE8
[Function]
This signal informs that the controller uses inch unit for data input.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when inch unit is selected.
During G20 (Inch unit command) modal, "In inch unit selection" signal turns ON. This signal will not
change with machine parameter "#1041 l_inch".
191
B Signal
- IN DISPLAY LOCK DLNK XC29 XD69 XEA9 XFE9
[Function]
This signal informs that the results of the movement command executed by the control unit are not
reflected onto POSITION screen (display locked).
[Operation]
This signal turns ON while the display lock signal (DLK) is input.
The display lock operation is validated immediately after the display lock signal (DLK) turns ON.
[Related signals]
(1) Display lock (DLK: YC29)
B Signal
- F1-DIGIT COMMANDED F1DN XC2A XD6A XEAA XFEA
[Function]
This signal informs that the controller uses F1-digit commands (F1 to 5) to control operation.
[Operation]
(1) F1-digit command (F1 to 5) is selected for feedrate command currently being executed.

(1) Block having a motion command specified with F1-digit code is completed.
(2) Operation is stopped by "Automatic operation "pause" command" signal (*SP) during execution of
motion command by F1-digit command.
(3) Operation is stopped by "Interlock" signal during execution of motion command by F1-digit command.
(For details of reset conditions, refer to the description about "In automatic operation "run"" signal
(OP).)
(Note 1) The machine parameter, base specification parameter "#1079 F1digt" must be validated and
"#1185 to 89 F1-digit feedrate" must be set to use the F1-digit command.
[Related signal]
(1) F1-digit No. code (F11 to 18: XC30 to XC33)
192
B Signal
F1-DIGIT NO. CODE
- F11 to 18 XC30 to 3 XD70 to 3 XEB0 to 3 XFF0 to 3
(1, 2, 4, 8)
[Function]
F1-digit feed function No. is output.
[Operation]
When F1-digit feed command specified in memory, MDI or tape operation is executed, No. of that F1-digit
feed function is set with a code.
B Signal
WAITING BETWEEN PART
- XC34 XD74 XEB4 XFF4
SYSTEMS
[Function]
This signal informs that the waiting between part systems is being executed.
[Operation]
1: This signal is output while the waiting between part systems is commanded in one part system to when
the corresponding waiting between system command is commanded in the other part system (during
the waiting function between part systems).
0: When the waiting between part systems is not executed, this signal is not output.
B Signal
- IN PLC INTERRUPT PCINO XC35 XD75 XEB5 XFF5
[Function][Operation]
This signal turns ON at the beginning of a PLC interruption. Turns OFF when the PLC interruption is
completed by M99 or a reset.
[Related signals]
(1) PLC interrupt (PIT: YC2E)
(2) PLC interrupt program number (R2518, R2519)
B Signal
- ILLEGAL AXIS SELECTED ASLE XC37 XD77 XEB7 XFF7
[Function]
This signal is output if axis (No.) selected in handle mode or manual arbitrary feed mode is illegal.
[Operation]
(1) For handle mode
If specified handle axis No. is beyond the maximum number of control axes.
(2) For manual arbitrary feed mode
If specified manual arbitrary feed axis No. is beyond the maximum number of control axes.
193
B Signal
M CODE INDEPENDENT
- DM00 XC40 XD80 XEC0 X1000
OUTPUT M00
[Function]
This signal informs that a special miscellaneous function (M00) is selected and commanded. When a
special M function is specified, "Normal miscellaneous function strobe" signal and "M code data" are
output.
M code independent outputs include M01, M02 and M30.
[Operation]
When M00, M01, M02 or M30 is specified during auto operation (memory, MDI or tape), or by manually
set numerical command, this signal turns ON. The signal turns OFF when M function finish signal, reset
signal or reset & rewind signal is given.
M code
Machining
independent Abbr. Answer back to controller
program
output
M00 M00 DM00 Fin 1 or Fin 2
M01 M01 DM01 Fin 1 or Fin 2
M02 M02 DM02 Reset & rewind signal ("Fin" is not sent back)
M30 M30 DM30 Reset & rewind signal ("Fin" is not sent back)
If motion command and/or dwell is present in the same block, the signal turns ON after completion of
dwell.
However, the signal is not output if M function finish signal turns ON before completion of motion
command or dwell.
Generally, each M code is used for the following purpose:
M00 Program stop
M01 Optional stop
M02, M30 Program end
• Operation on user PLC side

(1) For M00
When M00 is input, single block signal (SBK) is turned ON and M function finish signal (Fin 1 or Fin 2)
is sent back.
(2) For M01
When M01 is input, optional stop switch setting (ON or OFF) is checked. If the setting is "ON", single
block signal is turned ON and M function finish signal is sent back, like the case with M00. If the
setting is "OFF", M function finish signal is sent back immediately.
(3) For M02, M30
When motion where M02 or M30 was input (spindle stop, coolant stop, etc.) is completed, reset &
rewind signal (RRW) is sent back instead of M function finish signal. If M function finish (Fin 1, Fin 2)
signal is sent back, "program error" may occur.
[Related signals]
(1) M code independent output M01 (DM01: XC41)
194
B Signal
M CODE INDEPENDENT
- DM01 XC41 XD81 XEC1 X1001
OUTPUT M01
Refer to "M CODE INDEPENDENT OUTPUT M00".
B Signal
M CODE INDEPENDENT
- DM02 XC42 XD82 XEC2 X1002
OUTPUT M02
B Signal
M CODE INDEPENDENT
- DM30 XC43 XD83 XEC3 X1003
OUTPUT M30
195
B Signal
MANUAL NUMERICAL
- MMS XC49 XD89 XEC9 X1009
COMMAND
[Function]
This signal informs that M, S, T or B (2nd miscellaneous function) command is given with a specific
display format selected on the setting and display unit.
With the signal, user PLC discriminates the command from that given in normal automatic operation.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when M, S, T or B signal is specified with a specific display format in manual or
automatic operation (other than auto start). Like M function strobe signal, the signal turns OFF when M
function finish 1 or 2 signal turns ON, or in case of reset.
(Example)
M03 manual numerical command
Manual numerical command (MMS)
M function strobe 1 (MF1)
[Related signals]
(1) M function strobe (MFn: XC60)
(2) S function strobe (SFn: XC64)
(3) T function strobe 1 (TF1: XC68)
(4) 2nd M function strobe 1 (BF1: XC6C)
(5) M function finish 1 (FIN 1: YC1E)
(6) M function finish 2 (FIN 2: YC1F)
196
B Signal
IN TOOL ESCAPE AND
- XC4A XD8A XECA X100A
RETURN MODE
[Function]
This signal indicates in tool escape and return mode.
[Operation]
In order to designate a halted point, turn ON a transit point switch when operation is stopped by feed hold
or single block. When recognition of the halted point is completed, this signal turns ON and the tool
escape and return mode will be established.
Statuses of each signal after the machining program is halted are explained below.
The following (a) to (e) correspond to (a) to (e) in the figure below.
(a) The recognition of the transit point is performed in automatic operation but not in automatic operation
start.
(b) When a user turns ON the "tool escape and return transit point designation" signal (YC8D), NC turns
on the "tool escape and return transit point recognition finish" signal (XC87) and recognition will be
completed.
(c) When the "tool escape and return transit point recognition finish" signal (XC87) turns ON, the user
turns OFF the "tool escape and return transit point designation" signal (YC8D).
(d) When the "tool escape and return transit point designation" signal (YC8D) is OFF, NC also turns OFF
the "tool escape and return transit point recognition finish" signal (XC87).
(e) The "in tool escape and return mode" signal turns OFF when a tool reaches the halted point, or when
reset1/reset2 or reset & rewind or emergency stop is performed.
Halted point designation Transit point #1 designation
Transit point designation YC8D

(c) (d)
(b)
Transit point recognition finish XC87
In retract return mode XC4A

(e)
(Halted point reached)
Automatic operation "start" YC10
In automatic operation "start" XC13
(a)
(Note) When reset1, reset2, reset & rewind or emergency stop is attempted during the escape and
return mode, the memorized transit point and halted point will be canceled. The in escape and
return mode will be reset and finished.
[Related signals]
(1) Tool escape and return transit point recognition finish (XC87)
(2) Tool escape and return transit point designation (YC8D)
197
B Signal
- M FUNCTION STROBE 1 MF1 XC60 XDA0 XEE0 X1020
[Function]
This signal informs that the 1st set of miscellaneous functions (M code) is commanded with the automatic
operation (memory, MDI, tape) machining program or manual numerical command input.
The miscellaneous function is also called the M function, and is used to issue miscellaneous functions such
as ON/OFF of the cutting oil, and normal/reverse/stop of the spindle, etc., for the target machine.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when:
(1) The 1st set of M function (M code) is specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI or tape mode).
(2) M function (M code) is specified by manual numerical command input.

(1) M function finish 1 signal (FIN1) or M function finish 2 signal (FIN2) turns ON.
(Refer to the "In automatic operation "run"" signal (OP) section for details on the reset conditions.)
(Note 1) When built-in PLC is used, four sets of M functions can be specified at the same time. The
relation of the machining program and M function strobe is shown below.
Machining program ..... M03 M08 M10 M18

(1st set) (2nd set) (3rd set) (4th set)
Corresponds to M function strobe 1 (MF1),
1st set of M code
2nd set of M code
3rd set of M code
4th set of M code
(Note 2) During operation with miscellaneous function lock (AFL signal ON), the "M function strobe"
(MF1, MF2, MF3, MF4) will not be output. However, this signal will be output when the M code is
commanded independently (M00, M01, M02, M30).
(Note 3) Since M98 (read of subprogram call), M99 (return from subprogram), etc. are handled within the
controller, "M function strobe" is not output.
(Note 4) The "M function strobe" will not be output when the M function is output if the "M function finish
1" signal (FIN1) or "M function finish 2" signal (FIN 2) is ON.
198
An example of the timing chart for the M function strobe signal (MF1, MF2 and MF3) is shown below.
Command program M22; M03M08; M10M25M05; G00··· ;
M code data 1 22 3 10
M code data 2 8 25
M code data 3 5
Point The following points must be observed in the sequence process.

(a) When the M function is commanded, the MFn and M code data n is output.
(b) MFn is always the trigger in the sequence process to start the M function process.
(c) When the designated M function process is completed, the "M function finish" signal is
returned to the controller.
(d) The controller waits for the rising of the M function finish signal and then turns MFn OFF.
(e) MFn OFF is confirmed in the sequence process and then the "M function finish" signal is
turned OFF.
This completes the series of M function processes.
Handshaking with the controller and an accurate sequence process possible if

the Mfn conditions are inserted at the M function start and completed signals.
MFn
Relay meaning a designated
M decode circuit M1
M function
M1
Designated M function process
Relay meaning completion of a

M function finish confirmation M2
Designated M function
MFn M2
FIN1 M function finish 1
[Related signals]
(1) M function strobe 2 (MF2: XC61)
(4) M function finish 1 (FIN1: YC1E)
(5) M function finish 2 (FIN2: YC1F)
199
B Signal
[Function]
This signal informs that the 2nd set of M function (M code) is specified in automatic operation.
[Operation]
(1) Two or more M function commands (M code) are specified for one block in automatic operation
(memory, MDI or tape mode).

(1) "M function finish 1" signal (FIN1) or "M function finish 2" signal (FIN2) turns ON.
Other details are the same as those of "M function strobe 1" signal (MF1).
Refer to "M function strobe 1".
B Signal
[Function]
This signal informs that the 3rd set of M function (M code) is specified in automatic operation.
[Operation]
(1) Three or more M function commands (M code) are specified for one block in automatic operation

200
B Signal
[Function]
This signal informs that the 4th set of M function (M code) is specified in automatic operation.
[Operation]
(1) Four or more M function commands (M code) are specified for one block in automatic operation

201
B Signal
S FUNCTION STROBE XC64 XDA4 XEE4 X1024
- SF1 to 4
1 to 4 to 7 to 7 to 7 to 7
[Function]
This signal informs that S (spindle) function (S code) is specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI or
tape mode) machining program or by manual numerical command input.
The spindle function is also called the S function, and is used to command the spindle speed.
With the signal (SF1 to 4), user PLC receives S code data (1 to 4) respectively.
[Operation]
(1) S function (S code) is specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI or tape mode).
(2) S function is specified by manual numerical command input.
(Note 1) The S function strobe is not output during operation with M function lock (AFL signal ON).
(Note 2) When the S function is commanded, the "Spindle gear shift" signal (GR1, GR2) and "S
command no gear selected" signal (SNGE) are output in addition to this signal (SFn). Refer to
the sections of each signal for details.
(Note 3) By combining this signal (SFn), "Spindle gear selection code 1,2" signal (GI1, GI2) and "Gear
shift completion" signal (GFIN), the data can be converted into S command data.
(Data is transferred when the spindle controller is the high-speed serial connection specification
type.)
An example of the timing chart for the "S function strobe" signal (SF1) is shown below.
Command program S1000; G00X100.;
S code data 1000
S function strobe 1 (SF1)
[Related signals]
(1) S code data (R512)
(2) Spindle gear shift (GR1, GR2: X1885, 6)
(3) S command no gear selected (SNGE: X1884)
(4) Spindle gear selection code 1,2 (GI1, GI2: Y1890, Y1891)
(5) Gear shift completion (GFIN: Y1885)
202
B Signal
T FUNCTION XC68 XDA8 XEE8 X1028
- TF1 to 4
STROBE 1 to 4 to B to B to B to B
[Function]
This signal informs that the tool function (T code) is specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI or
tape mode) machining program or by manual numerical command input.
The tool function is also called the T function, and is used to command the tool No. In the lathe
specification controller, the tool compensation (tool length compensation, tool nose wear compensation)
Nos. are also indicated.
The user PLC receives the T code data 1 to 4 with this signal.
[Operation]
(1) The T function (T code) is specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI or tape mode).
(2) T function (T) is specified by manual numerical command input.
(Note 1) Up to four T commands can be issued in one block.
The relationship between machining program and T function strobe is shown below.
T03 T08 T10 T18;
Machining program
T function strobe 1 (TF1)

Corresponding to T command in 1st set
Corresponding to T command in 2nd set
Corresponding to T command in 3rd set
Corresponding to T command in 4th set
(Note 2) The "T function strobe 1 to 4" (TF1 to 4) is not output during operation with the M function lock
(AFL signal ON).
An example of the timing chart for the "T function strobe 1" signal (TF1) is shown below.
Command program T01; G00X100.;
T code data 1
[Related signals]
(1) T code data (R536)
203
B Signal
2ND M FUNCTION XC6C XDAC XEEC X102C
- BF1 to 4
STROBE 1 to 4 to F to F to F to F
[Function]
This signal informs that the 1st set of 2nd M function is selected in automatic operation (memory, MDI or
tape) machining program or by manual numerical command input.
The 2nd M function is also called the B function.
With the signal (BF1), user PLC receives 2nd M function data 1 to 4.
[Operation]
(1) The 2nd M function (B code) is specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI or tape).
(2) 2nd M function (B code) is issued by manual numerical command input.

(1) "M function finish 1" signal (FIN1) or "M function finish 2" signal (FIN2) is turned ON.
(Note 1) Four 2nd M functions can be issued in one block at a time.

The relationship between machining program and 2nd M function strobe is shown below.
B03 B08 B10 B18;
Machining program
2nd M function strobe1 (BF1)

Corresponding to B command in1st set

Corresponding to B command in 2nd set

Corresponding to B command in 3rd set

Corresponding to B command in 4th set
(Note 2) The "2nd M function strobe 1 to 4" (BF1 to 4) is not output during operation with M function lock
(AFL signal ON).
(Note 3) In the case of manual numerical command input, outputs are in accordance with "2nd M function
strobe 1" (BF1).
(Note 4) Address for 2nd M function can be selected from addresses A, B and C by using machine
parameter. Set so that the address is different from the axis address.
[Related signals]
204
B Signal
- IN CHOPPING START CHOP XC80 XDC0 XF00 X1040
BASIC POSITION ->

- UPPER DEAD POINT CHP1 XC81 XDC1 XF01 X1041
PATH FLAG
UPPER DEAD POINT ->
- BOTTOM DEAD POINT CHP2 XC82 XDC2 XF02 X1042
PATH FLAG
BOTTOM DEAD POINT ->
- UPPER DEAD POINT CHP3 XC83 XDC3 XF03 X1043
PATH FLAG
UPPER DEAD POINT ->
- BASIC POSITION PATH CHP4 XC84 XDC4 XF04 X1044
FLAG
- IN CHOPPING MODE CHPMD XC85 XDC5 XF05 X1045
STROKE
- COMPENSATION XC86 XDC6 XF06 X1046
COMPLETION
For both the function and operation, refer to the section "6.6.10 Chopping".
B Signal
TOOL ESCAPE AND
RETURN TRANSIT POINT
- XC87 XDC7 XF07 X1047
RECOGNITION
COMPLETED
[Function]
With the tool escape and return function, a transit point can be designated by pressing the transit point
switch while tool escapes. The tool returns to the machining halted point, passing through the transit point
designated. This signal notifies that NC memorized the transit point.
[Operation]
Refer to the section on "In tool escape and return mode signal" (XC4A).
[Related signals]
(1) In tool escape and return mode (XC4A)
(2) Tool escape and return transit point designation (YC8D)
205
B Signal
SEARCH & START
- SSE XC8A XDCA XF0A X104A
ERROR
[Function]
This signal is output when the program No. to be searched with search & start is illegally designated.
[Operation]
This signal is output when the No. of the program to be searched with search & start is illegal. Automatic
operation start will not be carried out if this signal is output. This signal will turn OFF if the program No. is
correctly input to execute search & start again, or when the reset signal is issued.
Refer to the "Search & start" signal (RSST) for details.
When the multi-part system program management is valid, the signal for $1 is output as common signal
for all part systems.
[Related signals]
(1) Search & start (RSST: YC31)
B Signal
- SEARCH & START SEARCH SSG XC8B XDCB XF0B X104B
[Function]
This signal is output when searching for a program is started with search & start.
[Operation]
Informs the PLC that the NC is searching for the program with search & start.
Hold the "search & start" signal until the "search & start (search)" signal turns ON.
If the No. of the program to be searched is illegal, the "search & start (error)" signal (SSE) will be output.
When the multi-part system program management is valid, the signal for $1 is output as common signal
for all part systems.
[Related signals]
(1) Search & start program No. (R2562, 2563)
(2) Search & start Error (SSE: XC8A)
206
B Signal
TOOL CHANGE POSITION
- TCP XC93 XDD3 XF13 X1053
RETURN COMPLETION
[Function]
This signal notifies that the axis commanded with the tool change position return command has
completed return to the tool change position.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when all axes commanded with the tool change position return command (G30.*) have
moved to the tool change position. This signal turns OFF when even one of the axes moved to the tool
change position with the command has moved from the tool change position.
Refer to the Programming Manual for details on the tool change return command.
[Timing chart]
Example: When G30.3 command, additional axis tool change position return is valid
Machining program G30.3; T02; G00 X-100. ···
Z axis tool change

position reached
X, Y axis tool change

position reached
Additional axis tool change
position reached
Tool change position return
completed (TCP)
207
B Signal
- NC ALARM 1 AL1 XC98 XDD8 XF18 X1058
[Function]
This signal informs that system error occurred in the controller.
[Operation]
If "watch dog error", "memory parity check error", etc. occurs on the controller side, the signal turns ON.
The system error can be reset by turning OFF.
(Note 1) "NC alarm 1" (AL1) may not be detected as signal.

(Note 2) For details of system alarms, refer to the relevant Operation Manual or Setup Manual.
B Signal
- NC ALARM 2 (Servo alarm) AL2 XC99 XDD9 XF19 X1059
[Function]
This signal informs that the controller is in servo alarm condition. If servo alarm occurs, "Servo ready
completion" signal (SA) turns OFF.
[Operation]
(1) Servo alarm occurs. Servo alarms include the following:

• Servo failure 1 (no signal, overcurrent, overvoltage, etc.)
• Servo failure 2 (motor overheat, excessive error, drive unit external emergency stop, etc.)
• Initial parameter error (parameter transferred to drive unit when the power is turned ON is illegal)
• Drive unit not mounted (cable is not connected between controller and servo controller).
• Parameter error (a parameter that will disrupt movement of the control axis was found).
Alarm can be reset by turning OFF the power, or using controller reset, or by setting parameter again, etc.,
depending on type of alarm. For details of alarm resetting, and servo alarm, refer to the relevant
Operation Manual or Setup Manual.
208
B Signal
NC ALARM 3
- AL3 XC9A XDDA XF1A X105A
(Program error)
[Function]
This signal informs that the controller is in program error condition.
[Operation]
This type of alarm occurs during automatic operation in memory, MDI or tape mode, mainly due to use of
faulty machining program, or program incompatible with the controller specifications.
Some typical examples of program error are shown below. For details, refer to the relevant Operation
Manual or Alarm/Parameter Manual.
(1) Illegal address (address not covered by the specifications is used)

(2) Absence of F command
(3) Arc end point excessive deviation
(4) Return incomplete axis found (a motion command was issued to an axis that has not completed
reference position return)
(5) Program end error (M02 or M30 command is not inserted or reset & rewind process has not been
performed)
B Signal
NC ALARM 4
- AL4 XC9B XDDB XF1B X105B
(Operation error)
[Function]
This signal informs that the controller is in operation error condition.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON in case of operation alarm, and OFF when the alarm condition is removed.
Some typical examples of operation errors are shown below:
For details, refer to the relevant Operation Manual or Alarm/Parameter Manual.
(1) Hardware axis motion stroke end

(2) Software axis motion stroke end
(3) No operation mode set
(4) Cutting feedrate override set to "zero"
(5) Manual feedrate zero
(6) External interlock axis found
(7) Warning regarding absolute position detection
(Note) When the "NC alarm 5" (XCB1) is valid, the following alarms are not output to the "NC alarm 4".
Error No. Details
0004 External interlock
0102 Cutting override zero
0103 External feed speed zero
0109 Block start interlock
0110 Cutting block start interlock
0125 Rapid traverse override zero
1033 Spindle-Spindle polygon (G51.2) cutting interlock
209
B Signal
LOAD MONITOR
- XCA0 XDE0 XF20 X1060
IN EXECUTION
[Function]
This signal indicates that teaching or monitor is being executed.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the teaching/monitor execution signal is input.
[Related signals]
(1) Load monitor Teaching mode valid, Monitor mode valid (XCA1, XCA2)
(2) Load monitor Warning axis, Alarm axis, Data alarm information (R564 to R566)
(3) Load monitor Execution, Teaching mode, Monitor mode, Alarm reset, Warning reset (YCC3 to YCC7)
(4) Load monitor Teaching axis selection, Load change rate detection axis, Teaching data sub-No.
(R2580 to R2582)
(5) Load monitor status (R596 to R605)
B Signal
LOAD MONITOR
TEACHING MODE VALID
[Function]
This signal indicates that the teaching mode is selected.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the teaching mode signal is input.
[Related signals]
(1) Load monitor In execution, Monitor mode valid (XCA0, XCA2)
(R2580 to R2582)
210
B Signal
LOAD MONITOR
MONITOR MODE VALID
[Function]
This signal indicates that the monitor mode is selected.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the monitor mode signal is input.
[Related signals]
(1) Load monitor In execution, Teaching mode valid (XCA0, XCA1)
(R2580 to R2582)
B Signal
ADAPTIVE CONTROL IN
EXECUTION
[Function]
This signal indicates that adaptive control is selected.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the adaptive control execution signal is turned ON during monitor execution.
[Related signals]
(1) Adaptive control execution (YCC9)
(2) Adaptive control override (R571)
(3) Adaptive control basic axis selection (R2983)
211
B Signal
- TAP RETRACT POSSIBLE TRVE XCA5 XDE5 XF25 X1065
[Function]
This signal informs that tap retract is possible, and is output if operation is stopped during tap cycle
execution.
The "Tap retract" signal (TRV) will be valid when this signal (TRVE) is ON.
[Operation]
(1) This signal turns ON when tap cycle is stopped in the cutting feed area (between c-d-e in the drawing)
due to the following causes:
• Emergency stop.
• Reset stop.
• Power OFF (only in absolute position detection system).
(2) This signal turns OFF in the following cases:

• Tap retract is executed and completed.
• Tap axis is moved manually or with manual mode.
Tap cycle command
a b f Initial point
c e R point
Tap feed (spindle (Spindle

forward run) reverse run)
d
Tap base
[Related signal]
(1) Tap retract (TRV: YC5C)
212
B Signal
NO. OF WORK MACHINING
- PCNT XCA6 XDE6 XF26 X1066
OVER
[Function]
This signal is output when the No. of work machining matches or exceeds the maximum No. of work
machining.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the No. of work machining matches or exceeds the maximum work value
(WRK LIMIT) set in the [Process parameter] screen.
(Note 1) This signal turns ON when the No. of work machining matches or exceeds the maximum work
value regardless of the count up by the controller or user PLC.
(Note 2) This signal is not output when "0" is set for the maximum work value.
[Related signals]
(1) No. of work machining (current value) (R606, 7)
(2) No. of work machining (maximum value) (R608, 9)
B Signal
ABSOLUTE POSITION
- ABSW XCA7 XDE7 XF27 X1067
WARNING
[Function]
This signal notifies that the amount moved while the power is OFF has exceeded to the tolerable amount
when using the absolute position detection system.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the difference of the machine position at power OFF and at power ON
exceeds the tolerable value ([ABS. POSI PARAM] "#2051 check" setting value) when using the absolute
position detection system.
(Note) The movement amount during power OFF depends on the "PON POS (power ON position)" and
"POF POS (power OFF position)" on the [ABS SERVO MONITOR (absolute position monitor)]
screen.
213
B Signal
IN SPINDLE-NC AXIS
- XCB0 XDF0 XF30 X1070
POLYGON MODE
[Function]
This signal informs the PLC that polygon machining (spindle-NC axis) mode is entered.
(Note) Refer to the "In spindle-spindle polygon mode" signal for details on the spindle-spindle polygon.
#1501 polyax ≠ 0: Polygon machining (spindle-NC axis)
= 0: Spindle-spindle polygon (spindle-spindle)
[Operation]
This signal turns ON by the polygon machining start command (G51.2), and is held during the polygon
machining mode.
This signal turns OFF when the polygon machining mode is canceled (G50.2, reset, etc.), and remains
OFF in modes other than the polygon machining mode.
[Related signals]
(1) In spindle-spindle polygon mode (XCB2)
B Signal
- NC ALARM 5 AL5 XCB1 XDF1 XF31 X1071
[Function]
This signal informs that the controller is in operation alarm (error) condition.
[Operation]
• The parameter "#1238 set10/bit7" is ON and the operation alarms below occur.

• The parameter "#1238 set10/bit7" is OFF.
• The parameter "#1238 set10/bit7" is ON and the operation alarm conditions below do not exist.
For details on the operation alarms, refer to “Alarm/Parameter Manual”.
<Operation alarms output to NC alarm 5 >

• External interlock (M01 0004)
• Override zero (M01 0102)
• External feed speed zero (M01 0103)
• Block start interlock (M01 0109)
• Cutting block start interlock (M01 0110)
• Rapid traverse override zero (M01 0125)
• Spindle-spindle polygon (G51.2) cutting interlock (M01 1033)
214
B Signal
IN SPINDLE-SPINDLE
POLYGON MODE
[Function]
This signal informs that the spindle-spindle polygon machining mode is being executed.
(Note) Refer to the explanation of "In Spindle-NC axis polygon mode" signal for details on the
spindle-NC axis polygon.
#1501 polyax ≠ 0: Polygon machining (spindle-NC axis)
= 0: Spindle-spindle polygon (spindle-spindle)
[Operation]
• The G51.2 is commanded, and the spindle-spindle polygon machining is executed.
• The G50.2 is commanded, and the spindle-spindle polygon machining is canceled.
• The "Spindle synchronization cancel" signal is input, and the spindle-spindle polygon machining is
canceled.
• "Emergency stop" occurs.
• "Reset" is input.
When this signal turns ON and the spindle-spindle polygon synchronization is completed, "spindle-spindle
polygon synchronization completion" signal turns ON.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle-spindle polygon cancel (YCD1)
(2) Spindle-spindle polygon synchronization completion (XCB3)
(3) In Spindle-NC axis polygon mode (XCB0)
215
B Signal
SPINDLE-SPINDLE
POLYGON
SYNCHRONIZATION
COMPLETION
[Function]
This signal informs that the workpiece spindle and rotary tool spindle are in the synchronized rotation
state.
[Operation]
• The rotary tool spindle rotation speed, in respect to the rotation speed following the rotary tool spindle
and workpiece spindle rotation ratio command, reaches the value set for the spindle-spindle polygon
synchronization rotation speed attainment level during the spindle-spindle polygon machining mode.

• The rotary tool spindle rotation speed, in respect to the rotation speed following the rotary tool spindle
and workpiece spindle rotation ratio command, deviates from the value set for the spindle-spindle
polygon synchronization rotation speed attainment level during the spindle-spindle polygon machining
mode.
• The spindle-spindle polygon synchronization mode is canceled.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle-spindle polygon cancel (YCD1)
B Signal
IN 3-DIMENSIONAL
- COORDINATE XCB9 XDF9 XF39 X1079
CONVERSION
[Function]
This signal notifies that the controller is in 3-dimensional coordinate conversion.
[Operation]
• G68 (3-dimensional coordinate conversion) is commanded

• G69 (3-dimensional coordinate conversion cancel) is commanded
• G68 (3-dimensional coordinate conversion) modal is cleared by reset
216
B Signal
IN SYNCHRONIZED
- TAPPING SELECTION RTAP XCC0 XE00 XF40 X1080
(M COMMAND)
[Function]
This signal informs that the synchronized tapping mode is active.
(This signal is output only when the M function synchronized tapping cycle valid parameter (#1272 ext08
bit1) is ON.)
[Operation]
(1) ON timing
Program command S1000 ; G84 ~ ;
G84 operation Positioning Drilling
Spindle position loop
S function strobe (SF)

Spindle gear shift Gears are selected at maximum speed
(GR1/2)
The spindle can be rotated at the spindle rotation speed
In synchronized tapping
selection (RTAP)
Gear changeover
operation
Gear shift completion

(GFIN)
Spindle actual speed S1000
(R18)
M function finish (FIN1)
Internal process
Sequence process
(Note 1) Spindle position loop and in synchronized tapping selection turn ON only during
synchronized tapping.
(Note 2) If synchronized tapping is applied even during tap retract, "in synchronized tapping
selection" signal will turn ON.
(2) OFF timing
This signal turns OFF when reset, G80 (hole drilling fixed cycle cancel), 01 group G codes or other
fixed cycle G codes are commanded.
Program command G84 ~ ; G80 ;
Spindle position loop
Spindle gear shift (GR1/2)

In synchronized tapping
selection (RTAP)
Internal process
(Note 1) The gears are not selected until the S command is issued again.
(Note 2) This signal turns OFF when tap retract is canceled or completed.
[Related signals]
(1) Gear shift completion (GFIN: Y1885)
(2) Spindle actual speed (R6506)
217
B Signal
HIGH-SPEED
- RETRACT FUNCTION XCC2 XE02 XF42 X1082
VALID STATE
[Function]
This signal informs that the high-speed retract function is valid.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the high-speed retract function valid signal is ON.
This signal turns OFF when the high-speed retract function valid signal turns OFF, or when the
high-speed retract function option is not provided.
[Related signals]
(1) In High-speed retract function operation (XCC3)
(2) High-speed retract function valid (YCCC)
B Signal
IN HIGH-SPEED RETRACT
- XCC3 XE03 XF43 X1083
FUNCTION OPERATION
[Function]
This signal informs that the high-speed retract function is in operation.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the high-speed retract function is valid, and a fixed cycle program (G81, G82,
G83, G73), which carries out high-speed retract, is being executed. If this signal is ON while executing a
fixed cycle program, high-speed retract operation will be executed.
[Related signals]
(1) High-speed retract function valid state (XCC2)
(2) High-speed retract function valid (YCCC)
218
B Signal
- IN BARRIER VALID (LEFT) XCC8 XE08 XF48 X1088
B Signal
- IN BARRIER VALID (RIGHT) XCC9 XE09 XF49 X1089
[Function]
This signal informs that the barrier area of left side (right side) is valid in the chuck/tailstock barrier
function.
[Operation]
When all conditions below are satisfied and the barrier area is valid, this signal is turned ON. (When this
signal is OFF, the barrier check is not executed.)
• The option of chuck barrier check function is valid.
• The setting of parameter "#8310 Barrier ON" on the barrier data screen is "1". (Excluding when using
the special display unit)
• The setting of parameter "#8315 BARRIER TYPE (L)" ("#8316 BARRIER TYPE (R)") on the barrier data
screen is other than "0".
• The "Barrier valid" signal input above is ON, or the G22 modal is valid.
#8310 Barrier ON: 1
#8315 BARRIER TYPE(L): 1
Barrier valid (L)
In barrier valid (L)
[Related signals]
(1) Barrier valid (left) (YCD8)
(2) Barrier valid (right) (YCD9)
219
B Signal
- DOOR OPEN ENABLE XCD8 XE18 XF58 X1098
[Function]
This signal informs the PLC that the drive power to all axes is turned OFF due to the "Door open" signal,
or that the same status is canceled.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the drive power to all axes is turned OFF due to the "Door open" signal turning
ON.
This signal turns OFF at all axes ready ON and at all servo axes servo ON, due to the "Door open" signal
turning OFF.
Release of the door lock is enabled at the rising edge of the "Door open enable" signal.
The operation is in a READY status at the falling edge of the "Door open enable" signal.
[Caution]
(1) Handling of the PLC axis
Set so a "Door open" signal is output to the NC after the PLC axis is stopped by the PLC.
If a "Door open" signal is input without stopping the PLC axis, the axis will stop with a dynamic brake
method due to the ready OFF state.
The remaining distance will be held in the R register being used in the DDB.
(2) Handling of the analog spindle

When an analog spindle is connected, it is not possible to confirm that the spindle has completely
stopped with the NC. Thus, confirm that the spindle has completely stopped using the PLC, before
opening the door.
Because the spindle may start rotating again immediately after the door is closed, for safety turn the
forward run and reverse run signals OFF when the door is open.
(3) Opening the door during ATC operation

When opening the door during ATC operation, apply an interlock with the user PLC.
[Related signals]
(1) Door open I (Y768)
(2) Door open II (YCE1)
220
B Signal
contact Signal name abbreviation 1stSP 2ndSP 3rdSP 4thSP 5thSP 6thSP
SPINDLE SPEED UPPER
- SUPP X1880 X18E0 X1940 X19A0 X1A00 X1A60
LIMIT OVER
[Function]
This signal notifies that the feedback of the spindle motor has exceeded the maximum speed.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the spindle motor's feedback exceeds the maximum speed regardless of the
commanded speed.
Maximum speed
(parameter setting value)
Spindle speed
(Feedback)
Spindle speed upper limit over

(SUPP)
B Signal
SPINDLE SPEED LOWER
- SLOW X1881 X18E1 X1941 X19A1 X1A01 X1A61
LIMIT OVER
[Function]
This signal notifies that the feedback of the spindle motor is less than the minimum speed.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the spindle motor's feedback is less than the minimum speed regardless of the
commanded speed.
Spindle speed
(Feedback)
Minimum speed
Spindle speed lower limit over (parameter setting value)
(SLOW)
221
B Signal
S COMMAND GEAR NO.
- SIGE X1882 X18E2 X1942 X19A2 X1A02 X1A62
ILLEGAL
[Function]
This signal is output if specified gear No. is illegal.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON if gear No. specified by user is beyond the maximum system gear No.
B Signal
S COMMAND MAX./MIN.
- SOVE X1883 X18E3 X1943 X19A3 X1A03 X1A63
COMMAND VALUE OVER
[Function]
This signal is output when S command value is clamped to the maximum or minimum value.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON if S command value is larger than spindle maximum speed parameter (Smaxn) value,
or smaller than spindle minimum speed parameter (Smin) value.
B Signal
S COMMAND NO GEAR
- SNGE X1884 X18E4 X1944 X19A4 X1A04 X1A64
SELECTED
[Function]
This signal is output if gear is not present for S function (S code) issued by automatic operation.
[Operation]
This signal will turn ON when the S function (S code) is issued during automatic operation, and the S
code does not match any gear set in the spindle maximum speed parameters.
This signal (SNGE) is output simultaneously with spindle function strobe signal (SF).
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle function strobe (SFn: XC64)
(2) Spindle gear shift (GR1, GR2: X1885, 6)
222
B Signal
- SPINDLE GEAR SHIFT 1,2 GR1, 2 X1885, 6 X18E5, 6 X1945, 6 X19A5, 6 X1A05, 6 X1A65, 6
[Function]
This signal informs which gear stage in the spindle applies to the S command (S code) issued in the
automatic operation (memory, MDI or tape) machining program.
For machines that have gear stage shift, the gear will be shifted on the machine side when this signal is
received.
[Operation]
When the S command (S code) is issued in automatic operation, the gear stage for the commanded S
code is output with a 2-bit (GR1, GR2) code from the preset parameters (spindle max. speed).
The relation of the spindle max. speed parameter (Smax1 to Smax4) and the "Spindle gear shift" (GR1,
GR2) signal output is shown below.
Spindle
Gear Max. spindle gear shift
stage speed
GR2 GR1
1 Smax 1 0 0 Range "S0 to S (Smax1)"
2 Smax 2 0 1 Range "S (Smax1)+1 to S (Smax2)"
3 Smax 3 1 0 Range "S (Smax2)+1 to S (Smax3)"
4 Smax 4 1 1 When range over "S (Smax3)+1" is specified.
This signal (GR1, GR2) is output simultaneously with the "Spindle function strobe" (SFn).
(Note 1) If the commanded S code does not match any of the gear stages, the "S command no gear
selected" (SNGE) signal will be output separately from this signal.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle function strobe (SFn: XC64)
(2) S command no gear selected (SNGE: X1884)
223
B Signal
- SPINDLE 2ND IN-POSITION X1888 X18E8 X1948 X19A8 X1A08 X1A68
[Function]
This signal is output from the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive)
and informs that the spindle is positioned in the set range in accordance with spindle orientation
command.
The information is sent faster than by the "Spindle in-position" signal. This signal allows predicting the
orientation completion and preventing the sequence delay time caused by the tool exchange and so on,
which helps the takt time reduction.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the spindle positioning in the set range completes, and the difference between
the orientation position and the feedback position reaches the 2nd in-position range.
(1) The in-position range is set with the spindle parameter "#3132 ori_inp2".
(2) The signal is turned OFF when the "Spindle orientation command" (ORC) is turned OFF.
Spindle orientation
command (ORC)
Orientation position
2nd in-position width
Spindle position
Spindle 2nd in-position
Spindle in-position
Orientation position
In-position width (SP024)
Orientation 2nd in-position width (ori_inp2)
In the orientation, "Spindle 2nd in-position" turns ON

when the spindle is positioned in the 2nd in-position
width.
"Spindle in-position" turns ON when in the in-position
width.
(Note 1) When spindle orientation command is given, orientation starts regardless of the "Spindle forward
run start (SRN)" or "Spindle reverse run start (SRI)".
(Note 2) This signal is not available when an analog connection is used.
(Note 3) While the spindle is in position, it is under servo lock condition. However, if the spindle is rotated
by external force, the signal may be turned OFF.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle in-position (ORAO: X188E)
(2) Spindle orientation command (ORC: Y189E)
224
B Signal
- CURRENT DETECTION CDO X1889 X18E9 X1949 X19A9 X1A09 X1A69
[Function]
and informs that drive motor current is about to reach the permissible maximum current. The signal can
be used to prevent stabbing of cutter into workpiece, for example.
[Operation]
The signal (CDO) turns ON if motor current goes up to a level (110% output) close to the permissible
maximum current (120%).
(Note 1) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serial connection with the controller.
B Signal
- SPEED DETECTION VRO X188A X18EA X194A X19AA X1A0A X1A6A
[Function]
and informs that motor speed is dropped below the speed specified by parameter.
[Operation]
The signal (VRO) turns ON when motor speed (motor rotation speed) drops below the speed specified by
the spindle parameter "#13028 SP028 (Speed detection set value)".
Speed command level

(SP020)
Spindle motor speed
Speed detection (VR0)
(Note 1) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serial connection with the controller.
[Related signals]
(1) Speed detection 2 (SD2: X189D)
225
B Signal
- IN SPINDLE ALARM FLO X188B X18EB X194B X19AB X1A0B X1A6B
[Function]
and informs that failure occurs in spindle controller.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON if alarm which occurs in the spindle controller is detected.
To cancel alarm, reset the controller (by reset & rewind), turn the controller power OFF or turn the spindle
controller power supply OFF. Note that reset method depends on type of alarm.
Typical examples of alarm are listed below. For details of alarm contents and cancel procedure, refer to
the Spindle Controller specifications and maintenance manual.
(1) Overcurrent
(2) Breaker trip
(3) Motor overheat
(Note 1) This signal is valid only for the system that is high-speed serial connected with the controller.
B Signal
- ZERO SPEED ZSO X188C X18EC X194C X19AC X1A0C X1A6C
[Function]
and informs that motor speed has dropped below the set speed level.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the actual spindle motor speed drops below the speed specified by the spindle
parameter "#13027 SP027 (motor zero speed)".
Motor Zero speed
Spindle motor speed
Zero speed (ZS0)
(Note 1) The signal is output, no matter whether direction of rotation is "Spindle forward run start" (SRN)
or "Spindle reverse run start" (SRI).
(Note 2) Minimum output pulse width of the signal is about 200ms.
(Note 3) Speed at which the signal is output can be set within range from 1r/min to 1000r/min with the
spindle parameters.
226
B Signal
- SPINDLE UP-TO-SPEED USO X188D X18ED X194D X19AD X1A0D X1A6D
[Function]
and informs that actual spindle motor speed reaches the range set with the parameter SP048(SUT)
(standard setting ±15%).
This signal is used for the S command completion conditions or control axis interlock during automatic
operation.
[Operation]
The spindle up-to-speed signal (USO) turns ON when an alarm is detected on the spindle controller side.
Up-to-speed range
Spindle motor speed
Spindle up-to-speed (USO)
When a command is given to change motor rotation from "forward" to "reverse", spindle motor speed
starts going down and the signal (USO) is turned OFF. When motor speed enters the specified detection
range, the signal turns ON.
Spindle forward run start

(SRN)
Spindle reverse run start

(SRI) Up-to-speed range
Spindle motor
speed
Up-to-speed range
Spindle up-to-speed
(USO)
(Note 1) The signal cannot be output if neither "Spindle forward run start" (SRN) signal nor "Spindle
reverse run start" (SRI) signal is ON.
(Note 2) This signal is not output when operating with a command that is not a speed command such as
synchronous tap.
227
B Signal
- SPINDLE IN-POSITION ORAO X188E X18EE X194E X19AE X1A0E X1A6E
[Function]
and informs that the spindle is positioned in the set range in accordance with spindle orientation
command.
[Operation]
When the spindle positioning in the set range completes, this signal will turn ON. The spindle orientation
is started by "Spindle orientation command" signal (ORC).
(1) The in-position range is set with the spindle parameter "#13024 SP024 (INP) ".
(2) The signal is turned OFF when the "Spindle orientation command" (ORC) is turned OFF.
Spindle orientation command (ORC)
Spindle motor speed
Spindle in-position (ORAO)
(Note 1) When spindle orientation command is given, orientation starts regardless of the "Spindle forward
run start (SRN)" or "Spindle reverse run start (SRI)".
(Note 2) This signal is not available when an analog connection is used.
(Note 3) While the spindle is in position, it is under servo lock condition. However, if the spindle is rotated
by external force, the signal (ORAO) may be turned OFF.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle 2nd in-position (X1888)
228
B Signal
- IN L COIL SELECTION LCSA X188F X18EF X194F X19AF X1A0F X1A6F
[Function]
This signal indicates that the low-speed coil is being selected in the spindle coil changeover function.
[Operation]
The high-speed coil and low-speed coil are changed over only with the "L coil selection" (LRSL) in the
2-step coil changeover specification. The high-speed coil, middle-speed coil and low-speed coil are
changed over with the combination of the "L coil selection" (LRSL) and "M coil selection" (LRSM) in the
3-step coil changeover specification.
(1) 2-step coil changeover

Selected coil L coil selection In L coil selection
(LRSL) (LCSA)
High-speed (H) OFF OFF
Low-speed (L) ON ON

Selected coil L coil M coil In L coil In M coil
selection selection selection selection
(LRSL) (LRSM) (LCSA) (MCSA)
High-speed (H) OFF OFF OFF OFF
Middle-speed(M) OFF ON OFF ON
ON OFF ON OFF
Low-speed(L)
ON ON ON ON
[Related signals]
(1) L coil selection (LRSL: Y189F)
(2) M coil selection (LRSM: Y18A6)
(3) In M coil selection (MCSA: X189E)
229
B Signal
- SPINDLE READY-ON SMA X1890 X18F0 X1950 X19B0 X1A10 X1A70
[Function]
and informs that the spindle can operate.
[Operation]
This signal (SMA) turns ON when the spindle controller is ready for operation. The signal turns OFF
(ready off) in the following conditions.
(1) A spindle alarm is generated.

(2)"Ready-on" signal (internal signal) from controller is OFF.
Controller ready-on
(Note1)
Spindle ready-on (SMA)
Spindle alarm
Machine ready-on
(External interface signal) Max. 1 s Max. 1 s Max. 1 s
(Note 1) The ready on signal is output from the controller to the spindle controller.
230
B Signal
- SPINDLE SERVO-ON SSA X1891 X18F1 X1951 X19B1 X1A11 X1A71
[Function]
and informs that the spindle is under the position control state (synchronous tap control, C-axis control).
[Operation]
The "Spindle servo-on" signal (SSA) turns ON when the spindle is ready (SMA signal is ON), the servo-on
command has been transferred from the controller to the spindle controller, and the spindle controller is in
the servo-on state.
Note that this signal turns OFF during rotation with "spindle forward run start"(SRN)/"spindle reverse run
start"(SRI) (except during spindle synchronization) or spindle orientation.
This signal (SSA) turns OFF when the servo-on command is canceled.
Spindle servo-on command

Note 1)
Spindle servo-on (SSA)
(Note 1) The spindle servo-on command is output from the controller to the spindle controller, and is
mainly output during synchronous tap control.
(Note 2) While the "Spindle servo-on" signal is ON, all input signals for "Spindle forward run start" (SRN),
"Spindle reverse run start" (SRI), and "Spindle orientation command" (ORC) are ignored.
231
B Signal
IN SPINDLE FORWARD
- SSRN X1893 X18F3 X1953 X19B3 X1A13 X1A73
RUN
[Function]
and informs that the spindle is rotating in the forward direction.
[Operation]
The "In spindle forward run" signal (SSRN) turns ON when the spindle motor is rotating in the forward
direction. This will also turn ON if the spindle motor is rotating in the forward direction during orientation or
synchronous tap.
Spindle motor speed
In spindle forward run

(SSRN)
(Note 1) The "In spindle forward run" signal (SSRN) turns ON and OFF while the spindle motor is in the
stop state with servo rigidity during oriented motion or synchronous tap.
B Signal
IN SPINDLE REVERSE
- SSRI X1894 X18F4 X1954 X19B4 X1A14 X1A74
RUN
[Function]
and informs that the spindle motor is rotating in the reverse direction.
[Operation]
The "In spindle reverse run" (SSRI) signal turns ON when the spindle motor rotates in the reverse
direction. It also turns ON even during oriented motion or synchronous tap if the spindle motor rotates in
the reverse.
Spindle motor speed
In spindle reverse run

(SSRI)
(Note 1) The "In spindle reverse run" (SSRI) signal turns ON and OFF while the spindle motor is in the
stop state with servo rigidity during oriented motion or synchronous tap.
232
B Signal
POSITION LOOP
- SIMP X1896 X18F6 X1956 X19B6 X1A16 X1A76
IN-POSITION
[Function]
If the spindle controller is connected with high-speed serial connection, this signal will inform that the
spindle is in the in-position state during synchronous tap.
[Operation]
The signal will turn ON when:
(1) The droop amount (servo tracking delay error) is within the in-position range during synchronous tap
control (servo on).
(2) Synchronous tap control is not commanded. ( A in following drawing)
The signal will turn OFF when:

(1) The droop amount (servo tracking delay error) has exceeded the in-position range during synchronous
tap control (servo on).
Forward run
Motor speed
Reverse run
Servo-on command
Position loop
In-position
A A
B Signal
- IN SPINDLE TORQUE LIMIT STLQ X1897 X18F7 X1957 X19B7 X1A17 X1A77
[Function]
and informs that the spindle is in position under C-axis control or synchronous tap control.
[Operation]
The "STLQ" signal turns ON when:
(1) "Spindle torque limit 1" (TL1) or "Spindle torque limit 2" (TL2) signal is ON.
The "STLQ" signal turns OFF when:

(1) "Spindle torque limit 1" (TL1) or "Spindle torque limit 2" (TL2) signal is OFF.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle torque limit 1 (TL1: Y189A)
(2) Spindle torque limit 2 (TL2: Y189B)
233
B Signal
- SPEED DETECTION 2 SD2 X189D X18FD X195D X19BD X1A1D X1A7D
[Function]
and informs that motor speed is dropped below the speed specified by the parameter.
[Operation]
This signal (SD2) turns ON if the motor speed (motor rotation speed) drops the detection level specified
by the parameter "#3258 SP058 (2nd speed detection speed)".
Speed command
level (SP058)
Spindle motor speed
Speed detection 2 (SD2)
(Note 1) This signal is valid only with the system that is high-speed serial connection with the spindle
controller.
[Related signals]
(1) Speed detection (VRO: X188A)
B Signal
- IN M COIL SELECTION MCSA X189E X18FE X195E X19BE X1A1E X1A7E
[Function]
This signal indicates that the middle-speed coil is being selected in the 3-step coil changeover
specification of the spindle coil changeover function.
[Operation]
The state of the selected coil is combined with the "In L coil selection" (LCSA), and that is output.
Selected coil L coil M coil In L coil In M coil

selection selection selection selection
(LRSL) (LRSM) (LCSA) (MCSA)
Middle-speed (M) OFF ON OFF ON
Low-speed (L) ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON ON ON
[Related signals]
(3) In L coil selection (LCSA: X188F)
234
B Signal
INDEX POSITIONING
- X189F X18FF X195F X19BF X1A1F X1A7F
COMPLETION
[Function]
This signal informs that positioning for the spindle forward run and reverse run indexing functions has
been completed.
[Operation]
(1) Orient the spindle.
If values are set in the parameters and multi-point orientation position data at this time, the spindle will
be positioned to an angle shifted by the amount obtained by adding the two values.
If there is multi-point orientation position data during orientation, the spindle will be positioned to the
angle shifted by that amount during forward run/reverse run indexing.
The basic orientation shift is carried out with parameters.
(2) Next, carry out positioning to an arbitrary angle using the forward run/reverse run indexing function.
At this time, set the angle data before turning the "Spindle forward run/reverse run index" signal ON.
(Note 1)
The "Index positioning completion" signal will turn OFF when forward run/reverse run is started
(turned ON), but it will take some time for the signal to turn OFF once, wait at least 100ms before
confirming that the index positioning is completed after forward run/reverse run is completed. (Note 2)
(3) If the spindle orientation holding torque forces are overlapped, the torque limit function will be used.
An example of the turret control timing is shown below.
Spindle orientation command
Spindle forward run index
Spindle reverse run index (Note 1)
Multi-point orientation Forward run position data Reverse run position data
position data
Orientation completion
Index positioning completion

(Note 2)
Wait at least 100ms before
* Retain OFF for the time designated with confirming completion
spindle parameter SP103 or longer
[Related signals]
(2) Spindle forward run index (WRN: Y189C)
(3) Spindle reverse run index (WRI: Y189D)
(4) Multi-point orientation position data (R7009)
235
B Signal
- SPINDLE ENABLE ENB X18A0 X1900 X1960 X19C0 X1A20 X1A80
[Function]
This signal informs whether there are command outputs to the spindle or not.
0: No command output to spindle
1: With command output to spindle
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle selection (SWS: Y18A8)
(2) Spindle command selection (SLSP: R7002)
(3) Spindle stop (SSTP: Y1894)
(4) Encoder selection (R2567)
(5) Spindle forward run start (SRN: Y1898)
(6) Spindle reverse run start (SRI: Y1899)
B Signal
contact Signal name abbreviation 1stSP
IN SPINDLE
- SPSYN1 X18A8
SYNCHRONIZATION
[Function]
This signal informs that the spindle synchronous control mode has been entered.
[Operation]
• The G114.1 is commanded, and spindle synchronous control is entered. (Spindle synchronization
control I)
• The spindle synchronous control signal (SPSY) turns ON. (Spindle synchronization control II)

• Spindle synchronous control is canceled with the G113 command. Or, when the spindle synchronization
cancel signal (SPSYC) turns ON. (Spindle synchronization control I)
• When the spindle synchronous control signal (SPSY) turns OFF. (Spindle synchronization control II)
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion (FSPRV: X18A9)
(2) Spindle phase synchronization completion (FSPPH: X18AA)
(3) Spindle synchronization (SPSY: Y18B0)
(4) Spindle phase synchronization (SPPHS: Y18B1)
(5) Spindle synchronization cancel (SPSYC: Y18B8)
236
B Signal
SPINDLE ROTATION
SPEED
- FSPRV X18A9
SYNCHRONIZATION
COMPLETION
[Function]
This signal informs that the spindle synchronization state mode is entered.
[Operation]
• The rotation speed difference of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle reaches the value set for
the spindle rotation speed attainment level in spindle synchronization mode. (Spindle synchronization I)
• The workpiece axis rotation speed reaches the value set for the spindle synchronization rotation speed
attainment level corresponding to the workpiece axis and rotary tool axis rotation ratio command in
spindle synchronization (no R command) mode. (Polygon)
• The workpiece axis rotation speed completes phase alignment at the rotation speed corresponding to
the rotation ratio command for the workpiece axis and rotary tool axis in spindle synchronization (with R
command) mode. (Polygon)
• Parameter #1239 bit 3 is reset (reset1, reset2, reset & rewind) at 1. (Polygon)

• The actual rotation speed of the basic spindle or synchronous spindle, in respect to the spindle
synchronous rotation speed command value, widely exceeds or deviates value set for the spindle
synchronization rotation speed attainment level during the rotation synchronization mode.
• The spindle synchronous control mode is canceled.
[Related signals]
(1) In spindle synchronization (SPSYN1: X18A8)
237
B Signal
SPINDLE PHASE
- SYNCHRONIZATION FSPPH X18AA
COMPLETION
[Function]
This signal informs that the spindle synchronization state is entered.
[Operation]
• The phase alignment of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle is completed during the phase
synchronization mode.

• The phase difference of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle exceeds the value set for the
spindle synchronization phase attainment level during the phase synchronization mode.
• The spindle synchronous control mode is canceled.
CAUTION
Always turn the spindle phase synchronization completion signal ON before chucking both ends of the
workpiece to the basic spindle and synchronous spindle. If the spindle phase synchronization signal is
turned ON when both ends of the workpiece are chucked to the basic spindle and synchronous spindle,
the chuck or workpiece could be damaged by the torsion that occurs during phase alignment.
Spindle synchronous control

(SPSY)
In spindle synchronous control

(SPSYN1) (Note1)
Spindle rotation speed
(FSPRV)
Spindle phase synchronous
control (SPPHS)
Spindle phase synchronization

completion (FSPPH)

completion ON
Spindle phase synchronous Spindle phase synchronous
control ON control OFF
Spindle rotation speed synchronization
completion ON
Spindle synchronous control OFF
Spindle synchronous control ON
(Note1) Temporary turn OFF to change the rotation speed during the phase synchronization.
[Related signals]
238
B Signal
IN SPINDLE
- SPSYN2 X18AB
SYNCHRONIZATION 2
[Function]
This signal informs that the spindle-spindle polygon machining is started.
[Operation]
• G114.2 is commanded, and the spindle-spindle polygon machining is started.
• G113 is commanded, and the spindle-spindle polygon machining is canceled.
• When the spindle synchronization cancel signal (SPSYC) is input, and spindle-spindle polygon
machining is canceled.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle synchronization cancel (SPSYC: Y18B8)
239
B Signal
CHUCK CLOSE
- SPCMP X18AC
CONFIRMATION
[Function]
This signal informs that chuck close (SPCMPC) is input during spindle synchronous control.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the "Chuck close" (SPCMPC) is ON.
This signal turns OFF when the "Chuck close" (SPCMPC) is OFF.
This signal turns OFF when the spindle synchronous control is canceled.
Chuck open
Basic spindle chuck Chuck close Chuck close confirmation Chuck open
Chuck close
Synchronous spindle chuck Chuck open confirmation Chuck close Chuck close
Spindle synchronous
control (SPSY)
In spindle synchronous
control (SPSYN1)
(FSPRV)
Chuck close (SPCMPC)
Error temporary cancel

(SPDRPO)
In error cancel
(Note) Use "error temporary cancel" signal only when the position error between two spindles still occurs
even after the "Chuck close" signal is turned ON.
[Related signals]
(1) Chuck close (SPCMPC: Y18B9)
(5) Error temporary cancel (SPDRPO: Y18B5)
240
B Signal
IN TOOL SPINDLE
- SPSYN3 X18AE
SYNCHRONIZATION II
[Function]
This signal informs that the tool spindle synchronization II (hob machining) is being executed.
[Operation]
Tool spindle synchronization II (hob machining) is started with a G114.3 command.
Spindle synchronous control is canceled with a G113 command or when the "Spindle synchronization
cancel" (SPSYC) signal turns ON.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle synchronization/superimposition cancel (SPSYC: Y18B8)
B Signal
- HOB AXIS DELAY EXCESS PHOVR X18B3
[Function]
This signal informs that, after the spindle rotation speed synchronization completion in the tool spindle
synchronization II (Hobbing), the hob axis tracking delay between the actual position and the commanded
position exceeds the delay allowable angle.
[Operation]
The spindle rotation speed synchronization has been completed and the maximum delay angle of the
hob axis (spindle) exceeds the delay allowable angle designated with "#3133 spherr".
The tool spindle synchronization II is canceled.
[Timing chart]
In tool spindle synchronization II ON(G114.3) OFF(G113)
NC→PLC SPSYN3

NC→PLC FSPRV
Hob axis delay excess
NC→PLC PHOVR
+spherr
Maximum hob axis delay angle
NC→PLC Delay allowable angle
-spherr
#3133 spherr
Monitoring area
[Related signals]
(1) In tool spindle synchronization II (SPSYN3: X18AE)
(2) Spindle phase synchronization completion (FSPRV: X18A9)
(3) Spindle synchronization Maximum phase error/Maximum hob axis delay angle (R6517)
241
B Signal
- IN SPINDLE HOLDING
X18B5 X1915 X1975 X19D5 X1A35 X1A95
FORCE UP
[Function]
The spindle holding force up (disturbance observer) state is output to this signal.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the "Spindle holding force up" (EXOBS) signal turns ON and the spindle drive
unit validates the disturbance observer.
Turning OFF the "Spindle holding force up" (EXOBS) signal turns this signal OFF.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle holding force up (EXOBS: Y1893)
B Signal
HANDY TERMINAL KEY
- X1CD0 to FC
1 TO 45
This signal indicates the status of handy terminal key 1 to 45.
[Related signal]
(1) Handle pulse encoder communication connector priority (Y70D)
(2) Handle/Incremental feed magnification code m (MP1, MP2, MP4: YC80, YC81, YC82)
(3) Handle/incremental feed magnification method selection (MPS: YC87)
(4) Handy terminal Data area top address (R297)
(5) Handy terminal Data valid number of registers (R298)
(6) Handy terminal Cause of communication error (R299)
(7) 1st handle/incremental feed magnification (R2508, R2509)
242
B Signal
X1D00 X1D20 X1D40 X1D60
- POSITION SWITCH 1 to 24 PSW1 to 24
to 17 to 37 to 57 to 77
[Function]
This signal notifies that the machine position is within the area set by the parameters.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the control axis machine position reaches the range set by the parameters,
and turns OFF when the range is left. The axis name and range are set in parameters #7501 to #7573.
The validity of this signal differs in the following manner depending on the absolute position detection or
incremental detection.
<For absolute position detection system>
This signal is valid when the power is turned ON after zero point initialization is completed.
<For incremental position detection system>
This signal is not validated until the first reference position return is completed after the power is turned
ON. (PSW1 to PSW24 will all remain OFF until this signal is validated.)
Example of signal output
Machine position
PSW1: ON
dog1 dog2
PSW2: OFF
dog1 dog2
PSW3: OFF
dog1 dog2
PSW4: OFF
dog2 dog1
PSW5: OFF
dog2 dog1
The setting range of the position switch uses the basic machine coordinate system as a reference.
The dog1 and dog2 setting values can be set to any size, and the area between the smaller setting and
the larger setting will be used as the signal output range.
A slight delay will occur in the output signal fluctuation due to the actual machine position. The maximum
delay time is as follows.
tmax = 0.06 -TP [s]

1
TP: Position loop time constant ( [s])
PGN
PNG: Position loop gain
243
B Signal
- KEY IN 1 R8
[Function]
Operator's key operation can be monitored on the user PLC side.
This signal is available with 70 Series only.
[Operation]
While operator is using the keyboard, the corresponding data is set to KEY-IN 1.
[Related signals]
(1) KEY OUT 1 (R212)
B Signal
CLOCK DATA
- R11
YEAR/MONTH
CLOCK DATA
- R12
DATE/HOUR
CLOCK DATA
- R13
MINUTE/SECOND
[Function]
The year, month, date, hour, minute, second and millisecond data is informed by the controller to the PLC
as the current clock information.
[Operation]
The date and time data is output as shown below. The data is output as binary data.
F 87 0
R11 Month Year
R12 Hour Date
R13 Second Minute
(Example) For September 26, 2004, 14:56:36.

R11 ... 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 = 0A02H
October 2002
R12 ... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 = 0E1AH

14 hundred hours 26th day
R13 ... 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 = 2438H

36 seconds 56 minutes
(Note 1) The time is displayed with the 24-hour system.

(Note 2) The data and time are set with the [TIME] screen on the setting and display unit.
244
B Signal
CNC SOFTWARE VERSION
- R16 to 9
CODE
[Function]
This indicates the CNC software version.
[Operation]
The version displayed at "MP" on the [Software Directory] screen is indicated.
[S/W MODULE TREE] ALARM/DIAGN 8.1/2

MP BND - 1003W002 – A0A SV1 BND-
OFFM
The file registers R16 to 19 are set to the following data.
(Example) BND-1003W002-A0A
(1) (2) (3)
Item File register Type Example

(1) Model function No. R19 Binary 1003=03EBH
(2) Serial No. R18 Binary 002=0002H
Bits F to 8 of R17 ASCII code A=41H
(3) Version Bits 7 to 0 of R17 ASCII code 0=30H
Bits F to 8 of R16 ASCII code A=41H
(Note1)
— ——— Bits 7 to 0 of R16 Always 20H
(Note2)
(Note 1) If the version is a 2-digit No., bits F to 8 of R16 are set to "20H".
(Note 2) Bits 7 to 0 on the R16 are always "20H".
245
B Signal
- R30
ERROR INFORMATION
Refer to the section on "Remote program input start" signal for the function and operation.
[Related signals]
(1) In remote program input (X724)
(2) Remote program input completion (X725)
(3) Remote program input error (X726)
B Signal
- BATTERY DROP CAUSE R56
[Function]
This notifies a drop in the battery voltage.
[Operation]
A drop in voltage of the data storage battery located on the front door of the controller is checked when
the power is turned ON. If the voltage is below the specified voltage (approx. 2.6V), the battery alarm
(BATAL) signal turns ON, and bit 0 of this data is set to "1".
(Note) This data will not change until the battery voltage is recovered to a normal value.
[Related signal]
(1) Battery alarm (BATAL: X70F)
246
B Signal
TEMPERATURE WARNING
- R57
CAUSE
[Function]
If the internal temperature of the control unit rises above 80°C or the ambient temperature of the
communication terminal (setting and display unit) rises above 70°C, the overheat will be detected, and the
following states will occur.
(1) The "Temperature rise" (SM16) is turned ON.
(2) The "Temperature warning cause" (R57) is turned ON.
(3) The alarm message (Z53) is displayed on the screen.
If the machine is in automatic operation‚ the operation will be continued‚ but restarting will not be possible
after resetting or stopping with M02/M30. (Starting will be possible after block stop or feed hold.)
[Operation]
The "Temperature warning cause" is turned ON when:
• The internal temperature of the control unit rises above 80°C or the ambient temperature of the
communication terminal rises above 70°C.
The "Temperature warning cause" is turned OFF when:

• The internal temperature of control unit drops below 80°C and the ambient temperature of the
communication terminal drops below 70°C.
The "Temperature warning cause" is a bit unit signal. Independent bits are assigned to the control unit
and communication terminal respectively.
File register
(R57) F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
Control unit
Communication terminal
80°C Alarm occurrence

temperature
Control unit
internal temperature
70°C Alarm occurrence
temperature
Communication
terminal ambient
temperature
SM16
R57 Bit0
R57 Bit1
[Related signals]
(1) Temperature rise (SM16)
(2) Control unit temperature (R60)
247
B Signal
CONTROL UNIT
- R60
TEMPERATURE
[Function]
This signal indicates the temperature in the control unit.
[Operation]
This signal indicates the temperature in the control unit. The unit is "C°".
[Related signals]
(1) Temperature rise (SM16)
(2) Temperature warning cause (R57)
B Signal
TOOL ID COMMUNICATION
- R62
ERROR INFORMATION
[Function]
The error information at the transmission and reception with the tool ID controller is set.
[Operation]
Whether an error has occurred in finishing the transmission and reception with the tool ID controller
(falling edge of X727) or not is set. "0" is set in normally ending, a code other than "0" is set when an error
occurs.
The error information is cleared (set to "0") in starting the transmission and reception with the tool ID
controller.
[Cautions]
For details on error, refer to the table below.
Error
Error details Remedies
code
0 Normal —
1 Host -> controller Confirm whether the connection and setting are correct.
Flaming
Parity error in one character
Communication format error
Check sum error
5 Host designated writing to the Confirm whether the connection and setting are correct.
protect area.
6 ID label incompatible error The tool No. of data to be written is different from the tool No.
in the ID label. Confirm the data to be written and the tool.
When the tool data is written newly, designate an unset tool.
7 Controller’s hardware error The body of the tool ID may be damaged.
248
Error
Error details Remedies
code
8 Reading error between controller Confirm the distance between the ID antenna and the ID chip.
and ID label
9 Writing error between controller Confirm the distance between the ID antenna and the ID chip.
and ID label If the distance has no problem, the verify error is occurring.
Execute writing repeatedly until writing is executed normally.
10 Unformatted error Execute the "#1060" (SETUP).
11 Tool position acquirement error Confirm that the value designated in R336 is correct.
Confirm that the designated tool No. exists.
12 No reply error Confirm whether the connection and setting are correct. *1
13 No. of received characters over Confirm whether the connection and setting are correct. *1
error
14 Received character check sum Confirm whether the connection and setting are correct. *1
error
15 Sort executing error Execute the writing operation at some intervals.
16 No. of tools over error The No. of registered tools reaches the maximum value.
17 T4-digit designation error Change the program T command to the T8-digit.
18 Tool No. duplication error The same tool No. as the tool No. of the data to be read
already exists in the NC. Confirm the data to be read and the
tool.
19 Tool ID option invalid error Validate the tool ID option.
20 Tool ID incompatible format error After validating the tool ID option, execute the #1060
(SETUP).
-2 Channel duplication open error Confirm whether the connection and setting are correct. *1
-4 Time out error Confirm whether the connection and setting are correct. *1
-5 Physical error Confirm whether the connection and setting are correct. *1
-7 Reset end error Confirm whether the connection and setting are correct. *1
-10 Input/output device connection Confirm whether the connection is correct. *1
error
-15 Parity H error Confirm whether the connection and setting are correct. *1
-16 Parity V error Confirm whether the connection and setting are correct. *1
-17 Over run error Confirm whether the connection and setting are correct. *1
-18 Code translation error 1 Confirm whether the connection and setting are correct. *1
-20 Code translation error 2 Confirm whether the connection and setting are correct. *1
*1: Retry first. If the same error occurs after retrying, confirm that the connection and setting are correct.
249
B Signal
- PLC MAIN SCAN TIME R68
[Function]
Time taken for scanning in user PLC can be monitored.
[Operation]
Scanning time for user PLC main processing is continuously updated and set.
<File register contents and time calculation>
File register F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
High-order data Low-order data
Time calculation Low-order

High-order data
data x 7.1 + x 3.5 (ms)
256
(Example)
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
Low-order
High-order data=208
data=6 x 7.1 + x 3.5 (ms)
256
(Note 1) For this data, mean scanning time is about 0.9sec.

(Note 2) I/O processing time for PLC control software (PLC BASIC) is included in this data processing
time.
250
B Signal
EMERGENCY STOP
- R69
CAUSE
[Function]
The causes of emergency stop are shown with bit correspondence.
[Operation]
The cause of the emergency stop state is shown as follows with bit correspondence.
If there are multiple causes, the multiple bits corresponding to each cause are output.
The bit of this signal that is set to "0" is the emergency stop cause.
File register Bit

(R) F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
LINE
Servo drive unit emergency stop output
Software emergency stop output device YC2C is "1".

Spindle drive unit emergency stop output
Emergency stop state

Door interlock, dog/OT arbitrary allocation device illegal
Contactor shutoff test
Power supply external emergency stop state
Not ready
FROM, TO command not executed
Stop state
PLC high-speed processing error
Illegal codes exist.
External PLC Communication error
External PLC
Built-in PLC
User PLC
Control unit EMG connector
External PLC
Built-in PLC
251
B Signal
- DIO CARD INFORMATION R70
[Function]
The remote I/O unit connected to the controller can be found with the user PLC.
The user PLC finds the connection state of the remote I/O unit with this data.
[Operation]
(1) When a remote I/O card is connected "1" is set, and when not connected "0" is set. Note that for
remote I/O unit, DX120/121 and DX140/141, two cards are used per unit, so the two bits
corresponding to the connected unit will be set to "1".
File register Bit

(R) F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1st card
2nd card
:
:
:
8th card
(2) No. of cards mounted in remote I/O unit (DX***)
Unit No. of cards

DX100/101 1 card
DX110/111, DX120/121, DX140/141 2 cards
(3) The position of the bit that turns ON depends on the rotary switch on the remote I/O unit.
252
B Signal
BALL SCREW THERMAL
DISPLACEMENT
- COMPENSATION R72 to 5
COMPENSATION AMOUNT
n-TH AXIS
Thermal expansion compensation amount for the current machine position is set by NC.
Refer to the section on “Ball screw thermal displacement compensation offset amount” (R400) for details.
Ball screw thermal displacement compensation
R72
compensation amount 1st axis
R73
compensation amount 2nd axis
R74
compensation amount 3rd axis
R75
compensation amount 4th axis
[Related signals]
(1) Ball screw thermal displacement compensation offset amount n-th axis (R400)
(2) Ball screw thermal displacement compensation max. compensation amount n-th axis (R401)
(3) Ball screw thermal displacement compensation part system, axis No. n-th axis (R402)
253
B Signal
SPEED MONITOR DOOR

- SMDOEN R96
OPEN POSSIBLE
[Function]
This signal executes speed monitor function for the control axis for which a valid door No. is selected
with parameter "#2118 SscDrSel" and the spindle for which a valid door No. is selected with parameter
"#3071 SscDrSelSP". Then the signal notifies that the selected door can be opened.
The door No. corresponds to the following bits.
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
Door 1
Door 2
[Operation]
When both NC and drive unit start the speed monitor function with the speed monitor mode turned ON
and speed monitor parameter check completed, the speed monitor door open signal will turn ON. When
the speed monitor mode is OFF, the speed monitor door open possible signal is OFF as well.
Speed monitor mode (SOMD)
Parameter check In check
Speed monitor door open possible (SMDOEN)
Mechanical door lock Door lock Door lock canceled Door lock
Door status Door close Door open Door close
[Caution]
When using the speed monitor function, create user PLC that enables door open when the speed
monitor door open possible signal is ON.
[Related signal]
(1) Speed monitor mode (SOMD:R296)
254
B Signal
SAFETY OBSERVATION I/O
- SODIO R97
SIGNAL STATUS
[Function]
This signal notifies I/O signal status of the SDIO connecter.
[Operation]
Each bit of the file register corresponds to the following signals. A signal bit where 24V is input in a signal
pin turns ON.
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
SDI1 (Door 1 switch input)

SDI2 (Door 2 switch input)
SDO1 (Contactor control output)
DOFAIL (SDIO connector input voltage error)
[Caution]
(1) The safety observation input/output status changes only when the safety observation option is valid.
(2) This device is for monitoring. Inputting or outputting signals by setting register value is not possible.
(3) When DOFAIL (SDIO connector input voltage error) is ON, 24VDC power is not supplied to SDIO
connector. If this signal is ON while using the safety observation function, "SDIO connector input
voltage error" alarm occurs. In this case, "contactor control output" signal cannot be controlled,
resulting in the "power supply instant stop" alarm. Check the wiring.
255
B Signal
- M CODE DATA 1 R504, 5 R704, 5 R904, 5 R1104, 5
[Function]
When M function is specified, value following address "M" can be identified. The M code data output from
the controller is a max. 8-digit BCD code.
[Operation]
M code data are updated when:
(1) "M**" is issued in automatic operation (tape, memory or MDI).
(2) "M**" in fixed cycle causes motion during execution of the fixed cycle.
(3) "M**" is executed by manual numerical command input.
M code data is also updated when an "M code independent output" command is issued even during M
function lock. The data is kept unchanged after "M function finish" signal (FIN1, FIN2) is sent back.
"Reset" or "Emergency stop" does not clear the data.
[Cautions]
(1) Commands can be defined up to four in a block with parameters. When plural M functions are placed
in one block, the signals are output in the order at programming.
M03 M08 M80 M82;

Output to M code data 1
(2) M98 (read of subprogram), M99 (return to main program), etc. are processed within the CNC, and not
output as M code data.
[Related signals]
(2) M code data 2, 3, 4 (R506 to 11)
B Signal
- M CODE DATA 2 R506, 7 R706, 7 R906, 7 R1106, 7
[Function]
[Operation]
M code data 2 are updated when:
(1) Two or more M functions are placed in one block in automatic operation (tape, memory or MDI).
For other details, refer to the section on "M CODE DATA 1".
256
B Signal
- M CODE DATA 3 R508, 9 R708, 9 R908, 9 R1108, 9
[Function]
the controller is BCD code.
[Operation]
(1) Three or more M functions are placed in one block in automatic operation (tape, memory or MDI).
B Signal
- M CODE DATA 4 R510, 1 R710, 1 R910, 1 R1110, 1
[Function]
[Operation]
(1) Four or more M functions are placed in one block in automatic operation (tape, memory or MDI).
257
B Signal
R512 R712 R912 R1112
- S CODE DATA 1 to 4
to 9 to 9 to 9 to 9
[Function]
When S function is specified, value following address "S" can be identified. Whether the S code (32-bit
binary data) output from the controller is unsigned or not can be selected with parameter.
[Operation]
S code data (1 to 4) are updated when:
(1) "S**" is specified in automatic operation (tape, memory or MDI).
(2) "S**" is executed by manual numerical command input.
Data remain unchanged even when "M function finish" signal (FIN1 or FIN2) is sent back. "Reset" and
"Emergency stop" does not clear this data.
The S code data is issued in the following manner.
Register
Signal name
$1 $2 $3 $4
S code data 1 R512, 3 R712, 3 R912, 3 R1112, 3
S code data 2 R514, 5 R714, 5 R914, 5 R1114, 5
S code data 3 R516, 7 R716, 7 R916, 7 R1116, 7
S code data 4 R518, 9 R718, 9 R918, 9 R1118, 9
[Caution]
(1) If two or more S codes for one spindle are issued in a block, the S code defined last will be valid.
[Related signal]
258
B Signal
R536 R736 R936 R1136
- T CODE DATA 1 to 4
to 43 to 43 to 43 to 43
[Function]
When T function is specified, value following address "T" can be identified. The T code data output from
[Operation]
T code data (1 to 4) are updated when:
(1) "T**" is specified in automatic operation (tape, memory or MDI).
(2) "T**" is executed by manual numerical command input.
T code data is issued in the following manner.
Register
Signal name
$1 $2 $3 $4
T code data 1 R536,7 R736,7 R936,7 R1136,7
T code data 2 R538,9 R738,9 R938,9 R1138,9
T code data 3 R540,1 R740,1 R940,1 R1140,1
T code data 4 R542,3 R742,3 R942,3 R1142,3
[Caution]
(1) Up to four T codes can be commanded in one block. The latter code will be valid if more than one
code is commanded in one block.
[M system]
T05 T15;
Output to T code data 1
This T code data is invalid.
[L system]
T0505 T1515;
Output to T code data 1
This T code data is invalid.
[Related signal]
(1) Tool function strobe 1 (TF1: XC68)
259
B Signal
2ND M FUNCTION R544 R744 R944 R1144
-
DATA 1 to 4 to 51 to 51 to 51 to 51
[Function]
When 2nd M function is specified, value following address "B" can be identified. The 2nd M function data
output from the controller is a max. 8-digit BCD code.
Signed binary data can also be output by setting "#1045 nskno".
(Note 1) Select an address for the 2nd M function address from the machine parameters basic
specification parameter "#1170 M2name" A, B or C address that is not being used for "#1013
axname" or "#1014 incax".
[Operation]
2ND M FUNCTION DATA (1 to 4) are updated when:
(1) "B (A, C)**" is specified in automatic operation (tape, memory or MDI).
(2) "B (A, C)**" is executed by manual numerical command input.
2nd M function data is allocated as shown below.

Signal name Register
$1 $2 $3 $4
2nd M function data 1 R544,5 R744,5 R944,5 R1144,5
[Caution]
(1) Up to four 2nd M functions can be commanded in one block. The latter code will be valid if more than
five codes are commanded in one block.
B05 B15 ;
Output to 2nd M function data 2
2nd M function data is output to 1
[Related signal]
260
B Signal
- CHOPPING ERROR NO. R554 R754 R954 R1154
B Signal
MANUAL MEASUREMENT
- R555 R755 R955 R1155
STATUS
[Function]
This signal indicates measurement status during measurement corresponding to bit.
[Operation]
Measurement status during manual measurement is indicated corresponding to bit.
This register value is displayed on the screen during manual measurement shown as below.
R555 Display Meaning
bit0 On mea0 Status other than "On mea1 to 6".
bit1 On mea1 Status when a skip signal is input during manual measurement.
It will shift to "On mea2" state after deceleration stop is confirmed.
bit2 On mea2 Status during the first retract operation.
It will shift to "On mea3" state after completing retraction by the retract amount.
bit3 On mea3 Status in which retract has completed by the retract amount. If the skip signal is ON
after confirming deceleration stop, a warning will appear, and status display will
remain the same.
It will shift to "On mea0" state by resetting.
bit4 On mea4 Status during the second measurement.
If the skip signal is not input, even if moving to the designated position, a warning will
appear, and status display will remain the same.
It will shift to "On mea0" state by resetting.
bit5 On mea5 Status when a skip signal is input during the second measurement.
It will shift to "On mea6" state after deceleration stop is confirmed.
bit6 On mea6 Status during the second retract operation.
It will shift to "On mea0" state after completing retraction by the retract amount.
[Related signal]
(1) Tool length measurement 1 (TLM: YC20)
261
B Signal
LOAD MONITOR
- R564 R764 R964 R1164
WARNING AXIS
[Function]
This signal indicates the axis for which a warning occurred during monitor operation.
[Operation]
The bit corresponding to the axis for which the effective load exceeded the warning value during monitor
operation is set to "1".
This signal is reset when the alarm reset or warning reset signal is input.
This signal is also reset when the teaching/monitor execution signal is turned OFF.
2nd spindle Servo 1st axis

1st spindle Servo 2nd axis
:
Servo 6th axis
[Related signals]
(1) Load monitor In execution, Teaching mode valid, Monitor mode valid (XCA0 to XCA2)
(2) Load monitor Alarm axis, Data alarm information (R565, R566)
(3) Load monitor Execution, Teaching mode, Monitor mode, Alarm reset, warning reset (YCC3 to YCC7)
(R2580 to R2582)
262
B Signal
LOAD MONITOR
- R565 R765 R965 R1165
ALARM AXIS
[Function]
This signal indicates the axis for which an alarm occurred during monitor operation.
[Operation]
The bit corresponding to the axis for which the effective load exceeded the alarm value during monitor
operation is set to "1".
This signal is reset when the alarm reset signal is input.

:
Servo 6th axis
[Related signals]
(2) Load monitor Warning axis, Data alarm information (R564, R566)
(R2580 to R2582)
263
B Signal
LOAD MONITOR DATA
- R566 R766 R966 R1166
ALARM INFORMATION
[Function]
This signal indicates the error that occurred during teaching and monitor operation.
[Operation]
The corresponding bit shown below is set when an error occurs during teaching and monitor operation.
This signal is reset when the alarm reset signal is input.
Bit0: The teaching data designated during monitoring is not registered.
Bit1: The teaching data alarm value designated during monitoring is smaller than the warning value.
Bit2: The number of teaching data items has exceeded the registration capacity.
Bit3: The teaching data cannot be registered during teaching because there is no teaching time.
Bit8: The upper tolerable value is smaller than the lower tolerable value when executing adaptive
control.
Bit9: The override maximum value is smaller than the override minimum value when executing
adaptive control.
BitA: The adaptive control basic axis selection command is illegal.
[Related signals]
(2) Load monitor Warning axis, Alarm axis (R564, R565)
(R2580 to R2582)
264
B Signal
ADAPTIVE CONTROL
- R571 R771 R971 R1171
OVERRIDE
[Function]
The override controlled with adaptive control is output.
[Operation]
The override based on the results controlled with adaptive control is output.
100% is always output except during adaptive control.
Output unit: 1/100
(Example) "10000" is output for a 100% override.
[Related signals]
(1) Adaptive control in execution (XCA3)
B Signal
CNC COMPLETION
- R572 R772 R972 R1172
STANDBY STATUS
[Function]
The NC’s operation state when the machine seems to be not operated in automatic operation without
alarms occurring is output by the bit unit. The alarm messages can be displayed using this signal in the
user PLC.
[Operation]
The corresponding bit below turns ON.

Bit0 : Complete standby status of M,S,T,B
Bit1 : In rapid traverse deceleration check
Bit2 : In cutting feed deceleration check
Bit3 : Waiting for spindle orientation complete FEDC BA98 7654 3210
Bit4 : Waiting for spindle position loop R572
Bit7 : Door opened
(B) (8) (7) (4) (3) (2)(1)(0)
Bit8 : In executing dwell
BitB : Waiting for unclamp signal
The right figure shows the bit correspondence.
265
B Signal
- IN INITIALIZATION R574 R774 R974 R1174
[Function]
This signal is output when zero point initialization is being carried out in the absolute position detection
system.
[Operation]
The axis for which "1" is set in #0 INIT. SET on the [ABS. POSITION SET] screen is set to "1", and is held
until the power is turned OFF.
The stored stroke limit and stroke end signals are invalid while this signal is set to "1", and the current
limit during initialization is valid.
This signal is also set to "1" when the "Zero point initialization mode" (AZS1 to 8) signal is ON.
File register Bit

(R) F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
In zero point initialization: 1st axis

:
:
In initialization: 8th axis
B Signal
INITIALIZATION
- R575 R775 R975 R1175
INCOMPLETION
[Function]
This signal is output when the absolute position is not established in the absolute position detection
system.
[Operation]
This signal indicates that the zero point initialization has not been established once or that the absolute
position has been lost.
The stored stroke limit of the axis for which this signal is set to "1" in the absolute position detection
system is invalid.
File register
(R) F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
IInitialization incompletion: 1st axis

:
:
IInitialization incompletion: 8th axis
266
B Signal
REFERENCE POSITION
ADJUSTMENT VALUE
- R576 R776 R976 R1176
PARAMETER SETTING
COMPLETED
NC receives the “Reference position adjustment completion” signal’s ON from PLC. If the axis is
controlled for the dog-type reference position return in the synchronization at zero point initialization
(“#1493 ref_syn=1”), NC sets the reference position adjustment value to “#2036 slv_adjust” and then
turns ON the bit corresponding to the master axis in the part system.
Turn OFF the “Reference position adjustment value completion” signal after this signal is ON.
NC turns this signal OFF when the “Reference position adjustment completion” signal is changed from
ON to OFF.
Reference position adjustment

completion
Reference position adjustment value

parameter setting completed
[Caution]
Parameter screen is also available to change the reference position adjustment value (#2036 slv_adjust),
which does not turn this signal ON.
[Related signal]
(1) Reference position adjustment completion (R2592)
267
B Signal
NEAR REFERENCE
- POSITION (PER R580, 1 R780, 1 R980, 1 R1180, 1
REFERENCE POSITION)
[Function]
This signal indicates that the control axis is near the reference position when using the absolute position
detection system.
This signal is output for the 1st reference position to the 4th reference position.
Near the 1st reference position, the time for outputting the signal is shorter than the "near reference
position n-th axis (NRFn)" signal (the ON/OFF timing accuracy during axis movement is improved).
[Operation]
(1) Using the n-th reference position as a reference, when the control axis is in the range set with the
parameters, this signal turns ON, and turns OFF when the axis is not within the range.
(2) The near reference position signal is output with four bits for each axis.
(a) R register and corresponding axes
R580
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1st axis output value

2nd axis output value
3rd axis output value
4th axis output value
R581
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

(b) Output value and near n-th reference position

High-order bit Low-order bit Near n-th reference position
0 0 0 1 Near 1st reference position
0 0 1 0 Near 2nd reference position
0 1 0 0 Near 3rd reference position
1 0 0 0 Near 4th reference position
(Note 1) The near reference position signal devices include X devices (NRF1 and following) which output
signal only for the 1st reference position, and the R registers (R580/R581) which outputs a
signal for each reference position (1st reference position to 4th reference position).
(Note 2) The near reference position signal output width is set with the absolute position parameters
"#2057 nrefp" and "#2058 nrefn". The near reference position signal output width is the same
width for the 1st reference position to the 4th reference position.
(Note 3) Near the 1st reference position, the signals are output to the conventional X device (NRF1 and
following) and the R registers (R580/R581) which output signals to each reference position.
[Related signal]
(1) Near reference position n-th axis (NRF1 to 8: X880 to 7)
268
B Signal
- PRESETTER CONTACT R582 R782 R982 R1182
[Function]
The axis movement direction at the moment when the "Skip" signal is entered is output in the tool
presetter.
[Operation]
The axis movement direction at the moment when the tool contacts the sensor ("Skip" signal ON) during
the tool measurement mode (TLMS ON) is set to the corresponding bit.
This signal is turned OFF by the sensor OFF.
This signal turns OFF when the "Tool measurement mode" signal is turned OFF.
This signal is not output when the tool measurement mode is not entered.
This signal is "0xFFFF" when an axis with no movement contacts the sensor.
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Presetter contact +1 axis

Presetter contact -1 axis
1: Sensor ON
0: Sensor OFF or tool measurement mode OFF
[Related signal]
Tool length measurement 2 (TLMS: YC21)
269
B Signal
- PRESETTER INTERLOCK R583 R783 R983 R1183
[Function]
The interlock direction in the CNC is output after the sensor is entered in the tool presetter.
[Operation]
The interlock direction to the entrance direction in the CNC is output after the sensor is entered during the
tool measurement mode (TLMS ON).
This signal is turned OFF when the escape operation completion conditions are satisfied.
This signal turns OFF when the "Tool measurement mode" signal is turned OFF.
This signal is not output when the tool measurement mode is not entered.
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
In presetter interlock +1 axis

In presetter interlock -1 axis
1: In interlock
0: Interlock cancel or tool measurement mode OFF
[Related signal]
Tool length measurement 2 (TLMS: YC21)
270
B Signal
LOAD MONITOR STATUS R596 R796 R996 R1196
-
(1) to (10) to 605 to 805 to 1005 to 1205
[Function]
The status of teaching and monitor execution for the load monitor, and the previous status is output.
(In the case of 1st part system)
R596 R597 R598 R599 R600
Low-order High-order Low-order High-order Low-order High-order Low-order High-order Low-order High-order
Two times Three times Four times Five times Six times Seven Eight times Nine times
Current Previous
prior prior prior prior prior times prior prior prior
R601 R602 R603 R604 R605

Low-order High-order Low-order High-order Low-order High-order Low-order High-order Low-order High-order
Ten times Eleven Twelve Thirteen Fourteen Fifteen Sixteen Seventeen Eighteen Nineteen
prior times prior times prior times prior times prior times prior times prior times prior times prior times prior
[Operation]
The following values are output according to each status.
Output value Status Details
0 (00) Teaching/monitor not
executed
13 (0D) Teaching In sampling prohibit time
14 (0E) In no-load monitor time
15 (0F) Waiting for cutting start point detection
16 (10) Waiting for cutting start point detection after interruption
17 (11) In monitoring prohibit time
18 (12) Monitoring prohibit time end
19 (13) Monitoring prohibit time end after interruption
23 (17) Monitoring In sampling prohibit time
24 (18) (adaptive control Waiting for cutting start point detection
25 (19) invalid) In monitoring prohibit time
26 (1A) In monitoring prohibit time after interruption
27 (1B) Monitoring prohibit time end
28 (1C) Monitoring prohibit time end after interruption
33 (21) Monitoring In sampling prohibit time
34 (22) (adaptive control Waiting for cutting start point detection
35 (23) valid) In monitoring prohibit time
36 (24) In monitoring prohibit time after interruption
37 (25) Monitoring prohibit time end
38 (26) Monitoring prohibit time end after interruption
(Note 1) The values shown in parentheses in the Output value field are hexadecimal notations.
(Note 2) "Interruption" refers to when teaching/monitoring is interrupted for rapid traverse during
teaching/monitoring.
[Related signals]
(R2580 to R2582)
271
B Signal
NO. OF WORK MACHINING
- R606,7 R806,7 R1006,7 R1206,7
(current value)
NO. OF WORKS
- MACHINING R608,9 R808,9 R1008,9 R1208,9
(maximum value)
[Function]
The No. of work machining current value and maximum value are notified by the controller to the PLC.
[Operation]
If data is set in the No. of work machining (WRK COUNT M) and work machining maximum value (WRK
LIMIT) of the [Process parameters], the current value or maximum value of the No. of work machining is
output.
R606 No. of work machining Low-order side

R607 Current value High-order side
R608 No. of work machining Low-order side

R609 Maximum value High-order side
(Note 1) If data is not set in "WRK COUNT M" and "WRK LIMIT" on the [Process Parameter] screen, data
will not be output to the file register.
(Note 2) If the No. of work machining matches or exceeds maximum value, the No. of work machining
over signal (XCA6) turns ON.
<Counting of No. of work machining using user PLC>

(1) Set "0" in "WRK COUNT M" on the [Process Parameter] screen. With this setting, the controller side
will not count up.
(2) Add "1" to R606, 7 with the user PLC.
(3) The controller will display R606, 7 as the No. of work machining on the [COORDINATE] screen. Even
in this case, if the No. of work machining matches or exceeds the work maximum value, the No. of
work machining over signal (XCA6) will turn ON.
B Signal
MACHINE POSITION R4500,1 R4532,3 R4564,5 R4596,7
- to R4528,9 to R4560,1 to R4592,3 to R4624,5
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal outputs the position (n-th axis) on the machine coordinate system by the PLC setting unit.
272
B Signal
FEEDBACK MACHINE R4628,9 R4660,1 R4692,3 R4724,5
- to R4656,7 to R4688,9 to R4720,1 to R4752,3
POSITION n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal outputs motor feedback position (n-th axis) on the machine coordinate system by the PLC
setting unit.
B Signal
SERVO DEFLECTION R4756 R4772 R4788 R4804
-
AMOUNT n-TH AXIS to 71 to 87 to 803 to 19
[Function]
The deflection amount of the servo n-th axis is output always in the command unit.
[Operation]
Servo 1st part system 1st axis : R4756 (LOW) R4757 (HIGH)
:
Servo 1st part system 8th axis : R4770 (LOW) R4771 (HIGH)
Servo 2nd part system 1st axis : R4772 (LOW) R4773 (HIGH)
:
Servo 2nd part system 8th axis : R4786 (LOW) R4787 (HIGH)
273
B Signal
R4820,1 R4836,7 R4852,3 R4868,9
MOTOR ROTATION SPEED
- to to to to
n-TH AXIS R4834,5 R4850,1 R4866,7 R4882,3
[Function]
This signal outputs motor rotation speed (n-th axis) with r/min.
[Operation]
The motor rotation speed is assigned as below.
Signal name File register
$1 $2 $3 $4
Motor rotation speed
R4820,1 R4836,7 R4852,3 R4868,9
1st axis
R4822,3 R4838,9 R4854,5 R4870,1
2nd axis
R4824,5 R4840,1 R4856,7 R4872,3
3rd axis
R4826,7 R4842,3 R4858,9 R4874,5
4th axis
R4828,9 R4844,5 R4860,1 R4876,7
5th axis
R4830,1 R4846,7 R4862,3 R4878,9
6th axis
R4832,3 R4848,9 R4864,5 R4880,1
7th axis
R4834,5 R4850,1 R4866,7 R4882,3
8th axis
274
B Signal
R4884,5 R4900,1 R4916,7 R4932,3
MOTOR LOAD CURRENT
- to to to to
n-TH AXIS R4898,9 R4914,5 R4930,1 R4946,7
[Function]
This signal outputs motor load current (n-th axis) with continuous current (%) during stalling.
[Operation]
The motor load current is assigned as below.
Signal name File register
$1 $2 $3 $4
Motor load current
R4884,5 R4900,1 R4916,7 R4932,3
1st axis
Motor load current
R4886,7 R4902,3 R4918,9 R4934,5
2nd axis
Motor load current
R4888,9 R4904,5 R4920,1 R4936,7
3rd axis
Motor load current
R4890,1 R4906,7 R4922,3 R4938,9
4th axis
Motor load current
R4892,3 R4908,9 R4924,5 R4940,1
5th axis
Motor load current
R4894,5 R4910,1 R4926,7 R4942,3
6th axis
Motor load current
R4896,7 R4912,3 R4928,9 R4944,5
7th axis
Motor load current
R4898,9 R4914,5 R4930,1 R4946,7
8th axis
B Signal
SKIP COORDINATE R4948,9 R4980,1 R5012,3 R5044,1

- to R4976,7 to R5008,9 to R5040,1 to R5072,3
POSITION n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal outputs skip coordinate position Y (n-th axis) with PLC setting unit.
275
B Signal
SYNCHRONOUS ERROR R5076, 7 R5092, 3 R5108, 9 R5124, 5
- to R5090, 1 to R5106, 7 to R5122, 3 to R5138, 9
AMOUNT n-TH AXIS
[Function]
The synchronization error amount during the synchronous control is output. (Unit: command unit)
[Operation]
The synchronization error amount between the basic axis and synchronous axis during the synchronous
control is output to the synchronous axis.
(The axis Nos. are not for each part system, but for the entire system.)
Synchronization Synchronization
R register R register
error amount error amount
1st axis R5076 (L)/R5077 (H) 8th axis R5090 (L)/R5091 (H)
2nd axis R5078 (L)/R5079 (H) 9th axis R5092 (L)/R5093 (H)
3rd axis R5080 (L)/R5081 (H) 10th axis R5094 (L)/R5095 (H)
4th axis R5082 (L)/R5083 (H) 11th axis R5096 (L)/R5097 (H)
[Related signals]
(1) Synchronous control request (SYNC1 to 8: YA80 to 7)
(2) Superimposition control request (PILE1 to 8: YAA0 to 7)
276
B Signal
USER MACRO OUTPUT
- R6372, 3 R6380, 1 R6388, 9 R6396, 7
#1132 (Controller -> PLC)
[Function]
This is interface function used to coordinate user PLC to user macro.
[Operation]
When a value is set in the system variables #1100 to #1131 or #1132 with the user macro system, the
user PLC output to the file register Rn and Rn+1 corresponding to the user PLC can be referred to with
that value.
The relationship between system variable and file register is as follows:
System Points Interface output signal System Points Interface output signal
variable variable
#1100 1 Register R6372 bit 0 #1116 1 Register R6373 bit 0
System Points Interface output signal

variable
#1132 32 Register R6372, R6373 This correspondence table shows the example
#1133 32 Register R6374, R6375 for file registers R6372 and R6373.
#1134 32 Register R6376, R6377
#1135 32 Register R6378, R6379
File registers R6372 and R6373 correspond to system variables #1100 to #1131, and #1132 (32-bit data).
[Related signals]
(1) User macro output #1133, #1134, #1135 (R6374/6375, R6376/6377, R6378/6379)
(2) User macro input #1032, #1033, #1034, #1035
(R6436/6437, R6438/6439, R6440/6441, R6442/66443)
277
B Signal
USER MACRO OUTPUT
- R6374, 5 R6382, 3 R6390, 1 R6398, 9
[Function]
This provides interface function used to coordinate user PLC to user macro.
[Operation]
When a value is set in the system variable #1133 with the user macro system, the user PLC output to the
file register Rn and Rn+1 corresponding to the user PLC can be referred to with that value.
(Example)
User macro program Sequence program
ACT
#1133 = 1000
DMOV R6374 D100
1000 is input in D100 and 101 when the ACT signal turns ON.
[Related signals]
(1) User macro output #1132, #1134, #1135, #1100 to #1131 (R6372/6373, R6376/6377, R6378/6379)
(2) User macro input #1032, #1033, #1034, #1035, #1000 to #1031
(R6436/6437, R6438/6439, R6440/6441, R6442/66443)
B Signal
USER MACRO OUTPUT
- R6376, 7 R6384, 5 R6392, 3 R6400, 1
The function operation, etc. are the same as those of "USER MACRO OUTPUT #1133".
B Signal
USER MACRO OUTPUT
- R6378, 9 R6386, 7 R6394, 5 R6402, 3
The function operation, etc. are the same as those of "USER MACRO OUTPUT #1133".
278
B Signal
SPINDLE COMMAND
- R6500, 1 R6550, 1 R6600, 1 R6650, 1 R6700, 1 R6750, 1
ROTATION SPEED INPUT
[Function]
This signal informs that spindle speed reference signal (S) specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI or
tape) or by manual numerical data input. "Spindle command rotation input" speed output from the controller
is binary data. Under the S command mode, the data can be monitored in the "S display" on the command
value screen.
[Operation]
Set "Spindle command rotation speed input" is renewed when:
(1) "S**" is specified in automatic operation (memory, MDI or tape) and "M function finish 1 or 2" signal
(FIN1 or FIN2) or "Gear shift completion" signal (GFIN) is sent back to the controller.
(2) "S**" is specified by manual numerical command input and "M function finish 1 or 2" signal (FIN1 or
FIN2) or "Gear shift completion" signal (GFIN) is sent back to the controller.
(Note 1) Data cannot be cleared by "Reset" or "Emergency stop".
<Data flow>
S function strobe 1
Spindle command
S function S code data 1 + rotation speed input
command
Always
S function strobe 1 (SF1) turns ON
and the following signals rise:
Transfer timing
Spindle command
M function finish 1, 2 (FIN1, FIN2) rotation speed output + Spindle controller
Gear shift completion (GFIN)
Reset & rewind (RRW) Spindle gear selection code
or during synchronous tapping 1,2 (GI1, GI2)
Spindle stop (SSTP) Spindle command
Spindle gear shift (SSFT) final data
Spindle orientation (SORC)
Spindle speed override
When the system is under constant surface speed control, constant

surface speed data is set for "Spindle command rotation speed input".
(Note 2) "Spindle command rotation speed input" directly denotes spindle speed (r/min) specified as S
function command.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle speed command rotation output (R7000, 1)
(2) Spindle command final data (R6502, 3)
279
B Signal
SPINDLE COMMAND FINAL
- R6502, 3 R6552, 3 R6602, 3 R6652, 3 R6702, 3 R6752, 3
DATA (rotation speed)
[Function]
The command value is indicated to the spindle controller.
[Operation]
The "Spindle command rotation speed input" indicates the value for the spindle function (S) data
commanded with the automatic operation or manual numeric value command, whereas this data
indicates a value to which the "Spindle override", "Spindle gear selection code 1,2" (GI1, GI2), "Spindle
stop" (SSTP), "Spindle gear shift" (SSFT) and "Spindle orientation" (SORC) conditions have been
considered.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle command rotation speed input (R6500, 1)
(2) Spindle command rotation speed output (R7000, 1)
B Signal
- SPINDLE ACTUAL SPEED R6506, 7 R6556, 7 R6606, 7 R6656, 7 R6706, 7 R6756, 7
[Function]
When the system has spindle equipped with encoder, actual spindle speed can be monitored.
[Operation]
True spindle speed is always set by feedback signal from spindle encoder.
Data are multiplied by 1000, and stored.
280
B Signal
SPINDLE
SYNCHRONIZATION
- R6516 R6566 R6616 R6666 R6716 R6766
PHASE ERROR
/HOB AXIS DELAY ANGLE
[Function]
The synchronous spindle delay to the basic spindle is output in the spindle synchronous function.
The delay of the workpiece axis to the hob axis is output in the tool spindle synchronization II (Hobbing).
The 1st spindle signal is normally used.
[Operation]
The synchronous spindle delay to the basic spindle is output.
Unit: 360°/4096
The delay of the workpiece axis to the hob axis is output in the tool spindle synchronization II (Hobbing).
(Note 1) If the phase can not be calculated because, for instance, the basic spindle or synchronous
spindle (hob axis or workpiece axis) has not passed the Z-phase, "-1" will be output.
(Note 2) This data is output only during the phase shift calculation or the spindle phase synchronization.
[Related signals]
(1) Phase shift calculation request (SSPHM: Y18B3)
(2) Phase offset request (SSPHF: Y18B4)
(3) Spindle synchronization phase offset data (R6518)
(4) Spindle synchronization Maximum phase error/Maximum hob axis delay angle (R6517)
B Signal
SPINDLE
SYNCHRONIZATION
- MAXIMUM PHASE ERROR R6517
/MAXIMUM HOB AXIS
DELAY ANGLE
[Function]
In spindle synchronization, the maximum value of the phase error between the basic spindle and the
synchronous spindle is output.
In tool spindle synchronization II (Hobbing), when the hob axis and work axis rotate in synchronization, the
maximum delay (advance) of the hob axis from the commanded position is output by angle.
[Operation]
In spindle synchronization, the maximum value of the "Spindle synchronization phase error" (R6516) is
output.
In the tool spindle synchronization II (Hobbing), when the hob axis and work axis rotate in synchronization,
the maximum delay (advance) of the hob axis from the commanded position is output by angle.
The maximum value output is retained until the next spindle synchronization / tool spindle synchronization II
turns ON or until the power turns OFF.
[Related signals]
(1) Hob axis delay excess (PHOVR: X18B3)
(2) Spindle synchronization phase error/Hob axis delay angle (R6516)
281
B Signal
SPINDLE
- SYNCHRONIZATION R6518 R6568 R6618 R6668 R6718 R6768
PHASE OFFSET DATA
[Function]
With the spindle phase shift amount calculation function, the phase error of the basic spindle and
synchronous spindle is obtained and memorized by turning the PLC signal ON at executing the spindle
synchronization. The synchronous spindle can be rotated with the handle during the spindle phase shift
calculation, so the phase relation between two spindles can be adjusted by seeing.
If the "Spindle phase synchronous control" (SPPHS) signal is input while the "Phase offset request" signal
(SSPHF) is ON, the phase error will be aligned based on the position shifted by the memorized phase
shift amount.
Such operation makes the phase alignment easy when clamping an irregular material over.
[Operation]
The phase error memorized by the phase shift calculation is output.
Unit: 360°/4096
(Note 1) This data is output only during the spindle synchronous control.
[Related signals]
B Signal
SPINDLE
PHASE ERROR MONITOR
[Function]
The phase error during the spindle phase synchronous state can be monitored.
[Operation]
The phase error during the spindle phase synchronous control is output by the pulse unit.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle synchronization phase error monitor (lower limit) (R6520)
(2) Spindle synchronization phase error monitor (upper limit) (R6521)
282
B Signal
SPINDLE
SYNCHRONIZATION
- R6520 R6570 R6620 R6670 R6720 R6770
PHASE ERROR MONITOR
(lower limit)
[Function]
[Operation]
The lower limit value of the phase error during the spindle phase synchronous control is output by the
pulse unit.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle synchronization phase error monitor (R6519)
(2) Spindle synchronization phase error monitor (upper limit) (R6521)
B Signal
SPINDLE
SYNCHRONIZATION
- R6521 R6571 R6621 R6671 R6721 R6771
PHASE ERROR MONITOR
(upper limit)
[Function]
[Operation]
The upper limit value of the phase error during the spindle phase synchronous control is output by the
pulse unit.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle synchronization phase error monitor (R6519)
(2) Spindle synchronization phase error monitor (lower limit) (R6520)
283
B Signal
SPINDLE
PHASE ERROR 1
[Function]
(1) During spindle synchronous function (G114.1)
This signal informs the phase error (value including the phase error memorized with the spindle
synchronization phase shift calculation function) when the phase synchronization (with R command)
or the "Phase shift calculation request" signal (SSPHM) is ON. The phase error is output by 1°
increment.
(2) During phase synchronization of polygon machining between spindles (G114.2)

This signal informs the phase error corresponding to the commanded phase shift amounts by 1°
increment.
The data has no meaning in cases other than above.
[Operation]
When the phase synchronization (with R command) or the "Phase shift calculation request" signal
(SSPHM) is ON, and when the speeds of the basic spindle and the synchronous spindle are constant,
the phase error between the basic spindle and the synchronous spindle is output.

increment.
[Related signal]
284
B Signal
SPINDLE
PHASE ERROR 2
[Function]
This signal informs the phase error (value excluding the phase error memorized with the spindle
synchronization phase shift calculation function) when the phase synchronization (with R command)
or the "Phase shift calculation request" signal (SSPHM) is ON. The phase error is output by 1°
increment.

increment. (Same as R6522.)
The data has no meaning in cases other than above.
[Operation]
When the phase synchronization (with R command) or the "Phase shift calculation request" signal
(SSPHM) is ON, and when the speeds of the basic spindle and the synchronous spindle are constant,
the phase error between the basic spindle and the synchronous spindle is output.

increment. (Same as R6522.)
[Related signal]
285
B Signal
SYNCHRONOUS TAPPING
- R6532, 3 R6582, 3 R6632, 3 R6682, 3 R6732, 3 R6782, 3
CURRENT ERROR WIDTH
The current value of the synchronous tapping error width (motor tracking delay from each position
commands on the spindle and the tapping axis) is output during the synchronous tapping.
Positive output value means that the tapping axis is delayed, while negative output value means that the
spindle is delayed. The output range is -99999.999 to 99999.999mm.
[Caution]
(1) The synchronous tapping error is not output during the spindle orientation or the R point positioning.
(2) The current value is kept retrieved during the synchronous tapping.
(3) If the synchronous tapping error is over the output range, the maximum value of the range is output.
(4) Execute the synchronous tap R-point in-position check before using this signal. Unless the
synchronous tap R-point in-position check is executed, an illegal value of the synchronous tapping
error may be detected.
[Related signals]
(1) Synchronous tapping Maximum error width (R6534, 6535)
(2) Synchronous tapping Current error angle (R6536, 6537)
(3) Synchronous tapping Maximum error angle (R6538, 6539)
B Signal
SYNCHRONOUS TAPPING
- R6534, 5 R6584, 5 R6634, 5 R6684, 5 R6734, 5 R6784, 5
MAXIMUM ERROR WIDTH
The largest absolute value of the synchronous tapping error width (-99999.999 to 99999.999mm) is output
during the synchronous tapping.
The value is initialized to "0" when the synchronous tapping starts or the power turns ON again.
[Caution]
(2) This output value is the largest one throughout the synchronous tapping mode.
[Related signals]
(1) Synchronous tapping Current error width (R6532, 6533)
286
B Signal
SYNCHRONOUS TAPPING
- R6536, 7 R6586, 7 R6636, 7 R6686, 7 R6736, 7 R6786, 7
CURRENT ERROR ANGLE
The synchronous tapping error (motor tracking delay from each position commands on the spindle and the
tapping axis) is output with angle during the synchronous tapping.
Positive output value means that the tapping axis is delayed, while negative output value means that the
spindle is delayed. The output range is -99999.999 to 99,999.999°.
[Caution]
(2) The current value is kept retrieved during the synchronous tapping.
[Related signals]
B Signal
SYNCHRONOUS TAPPING
- R6538, 9 R6588, 9 R6638, 9 R6688, 9 R6738, 9 R6788, 9
MAXIMUM ERROR ANGLE
The largest absolute value of the synchronous tapping error angle (-99999.999 to 99,999.999°) is output
during the synchronous tapping.
The value is initialized to "0" when the synchronous tapping starts or the power turns ON again. The value is
kept retrieved and displayed during the synchronous tapping.
[Caution]
(2) This output value is the largest one throughout the synchronous tapping mode.
[Related signals]
287
B Signal
RIOn NO. OF ERROR
- R10000 to 23
OCCURRENCES n-TH CH
[Function]
Counts communication errors occurred between control unit and remote I/O unit (channel) and outputs.
[Operation]
R register’s high-order 8 bits output the number of CRC error occurrences (highest value), and the
low-order 8 bits output the number of connection error occurrences (highest value).
R register allocations are as shown below.
Remote I/O unit

1st ch 2nd ch 3rd ch 4th ch 5th ch 6th ch 7th ch 8th ch
connection system
RIO1 R10000 R10001 R10002 R10003 R10004 R10005 R10006 R10007
RIO2 R10008 R10009 R10010 R10011 R10012 R10013 R10014 R10015
RIO3 R10016 R10017 R10018 R10019 R10020 R10021 R10022 R10023
[Caution]
(1) Control unit cannot identify the remote I/O unit with no power cable or communication cable
connected, or with no power supplied. Therefore, issuance of remote I/O error will not be carried out
even if a malfunction exists in those remote I/O units.
(2) Performance check for the physically existed remote I/O unit can be done, using either "Connection
status output" or "No. of error occurrences output".
(3) Once the number of error occurrences exceeds 255, a remote I/O error occurs and "Error
occurrences output" is clamped to 255.
(4) "No. of error occurrences output" is saved in full when rebooting.
However, when the value exceeds the specified value to lead a remote I/O error, the data of the
channel is cleared.
[Related signals]
(1) Connection status of each channel RIO1,2 (R10064)
(2) Connection status of each channel RIO3 (R10065)
288
B Signal
CONNECTION STATUS OF
- R10064
EACH CHANNEL RIO1,2
[Function]
Connection status of remote I/O unit channel 1 & 2 is constantly output to R register.
[Operation]
When remote I/O unit is connected, "1" is set; when not connected, "0" is set.
R register’s high-order 8 bits output the connection status of each channel within RI01, and the lower 8
bits output the connection status of each channel within RI02.
High-order 8 bits
File register Bit
(R) F E D C B A 9 8
1st channel of RI01

2nd channel of RI01
…
8th channel of RI01
Low-order 8 bits
File register Bit
(R) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1st channel of RI02

2nd channel of RI02
…
8th channel of RI02
[Cautions]
(1) Control unit cannot identify the remote I/O unit with no power cable or communication cable connected,
or with no power supplied. Therefore, the "Connection status output" for those remote I/O units is "0".
[Related signals]
(1) Connection status of each channel RIO3 (R10065)
(2) No. of error occurrences (R10000 to 23)
289
B Signal
CONNECTION STATUS OF
- R10065
EACH CHANNEL RIO3
[Function]
Connection status of remote I/O unit channel 3 is constantly output to R register.
[Operation]
When remote I/O unit is connected, "1" is set; when not connected, "0" is set.
R register’s high-order 8 bits output the connection status of each channel within RI03.
High-order 8 bits
File register
(R) F E D C B A 9 8 Bit
1st channel of RI03

2nd channel of RI03
…
8th channel of RI03
[Cautions]
(1) Control unit cannot identify the remote I/O unit with no power cable or communication cable connected,
or with no power supplied. Therefore, the "Connection status output" for those remote I/O units is "0".
[Related signals]
(1) Connection status of each channel RIO1,2 (R10064)
(2) No. of error occurrences (R10000 to 23)
290
B Signal
INTEGRATION TIME
- RHD1 Y704
INPUT 1
[Function]
The total duration of a signal specified by a user PLC can be counted and displayed. For this, integration
time input 1 and 2 are available.
[Operation]
The INTEGRAL TIME during this signal (RHD1) has been ON is displayed in hours, minutes, and
seconds.
The counted (integrated) time is held even when the power is turned OFF. The integration time can be
preset or reset.
B Signal
INTEGRATION TIME
- RHD2 Y705
INPUT 2
Both functions and operations are the same as those of "Integration time input 1 (RHD1)". See the
descriptions on "Integration time input 1 (RHD1)".
B Signal
* DATA PROTECT KEY 1 *KEY1 Y708
[Function]
Data pertinent to tool functions, and coordinate data (origin reset) can be protected with this signal.
[Operation]
When this signal is turned OFF (set to "0"), the tool data setting operation is prohibited.
[Caution]
(1) If a setting is changed while the signal (KEY1) is OFF, DATA PROTECT appears in the message
section of screen.
Manual numerical command input is not applicable in "TOOL/OFFSET" display mode.
(2) The signal (KEY1) is ON (set to "1") when the power is turned ON (data are not protected). Therefore,
if the signal is not turned OFF in sequential control program, it remains turned ON ("1").
[Related signals]
(1) Data protect key 2 (*KEY2: Y709)
(2) Data protect key 3 (*KEY3: Y70A)
291
B Signal
* DATA PROTECT KEY 2 *KEY2 Y709
[Function]
Data pertinent to user parameters and common variables can be protected.
[Operation]
When this signal (KEY2) is turned OFF (0), the parameter and common variable setting operation is
prohibited.
[Cautions]
(1) If a setting is changed while the signal (KEY2) is OFF (0), DATA PROTECT appears in the message
section of CRT screen.
(2) The signal (KEY2) is ON (set to "1") when the power is turned ON (data are not protected).
Therefore, if the signal is not turned OFF in sequential control program, it remains turned ON ("1").
[Related signals]
(2) Data protect key 3 (*KEY3: Y70A)
B Signal
* DATA PROTECT KEY 3 *KEY3 Y70A
[Function]
Data pertinent to machining program can be protected.
[Operation]
When this signal (KEY3) is turned OFF (0), the editing of the machining program is prohibited.
[Cautions]
(1) If data is edited when the data protect key 3 is OFF (0), DATA PROTECT will appear in the message
section.
(2) The signal (KEY3) is ON (set to "1") when the power is turned ON (data are not protected). Therefore,
if the signal is not turned ON in sequential control program, it remains turned ON ("1").
[Related signals]
292
B Signal
PROGRAM DISPLAY
- PDISP Y70C
DURING OPERATION
[Function]
This signal is used to display a program ON the Word Edit screen during operation.
[Operation]
When the program display during operation signal (PDISP) turns ON, the program being operated will
appear in the program display of the EDIT screen.
B Signal
HANDLE PULSE ENCODER
- COMMUNICATION Y70D
CONNECTOR PRIORITY
Priority of handle input pulse is determined when the parameter "#1239 set11 bit1(handle I/F selection)" is
OFF.
0: Remote I/O connecting handle priority
1: Handle pulse encoder communication connector connecting handle priority
[Related signal]
(1) Handy terminal key 1 to 45 (X1CD0 to X1CFC)
B Signal
PLC AXIS NEAR POINT *PCD1
* Y718 to D
DETECTION n-TH AXIS to 6
[Function]
The PLC axis reference position near-point dog signal is input.
[Operation]
The PLC axis reference position near-point dog signal is set in the following devices by the PLC.

Y718 PCD1 PLC axis near point detection 1st axis
Y719 PCD2 PLC axis near point detection 2nd axis
Y71A PCD3 PLC axis near point detection 3rd axis
Y71B PCD4 PLC axis near point detection 4th axis
Y71C PCD5 PLC axis near point detection 5th axis
Y71D PCD6 PLC axis near point detection 6th axis
(Note) If the dog signal is set during the PLC middle-speed process, the response will be poorer than
when the dog signal is set with the PLC high-speed process.
293
B Signal
PLC AXIS
- HS1P to 3P Y720 to 2
n-TH HANDLE VALID
[Function]
This is designated when handle feed is to be carried out with the PLC axis.
[Operation]
Designate with the following devices when carrying out handle feed with the PLC axis.

Y720 HS1P PLC axis 1st handle valid
Y721 HS2P PLC axis 2nd handle valid
Y722 HS3P PLC axis 3rd handle valid
(Note 1) When this signal is ON, each handle will be exclusive for the PLC axis. The handle will not be
valid for the NC control axis.
The "1st handle axis selection code" (HS11 to 116, HS11S), the "2nd handle axis selection
code" (HS21 to 216, HS21S) and "3rd handle axis selection code" (HS31 to 316, HS31S) are
used to select each handle axis.
(Note 2) The handle feed magnification is common with that for the NC control axis.
294
B Signal
PLC AXIS CONTROL
- Y723
BUFFERING MODE VALID
In buffering mode, the PLC axis command (control information data) can be commanded to multiple
blocks. This enables a smooth changeover of commands.
Control information data

R1n+0
Control
information The control data for the buffering mode is set in three blocks. The contents of
data A
each control information data have the same configuration as the normal
control information data.
When executing, the axis moves in the order that each control information data
R1n+14
has been started. When the movement is completed, it will move to the next
block.
Control
information (If the start signals are turned ON simultaneously, it will be performed in the
data B order of A, B, and C.)
R1n+28
Control
information
data C
295
[Timing chart]
G1→G1→G0→G1 (Same axis)
PLC axis
control valid
Start
busy
A den
move
wait
Start
busy
B den
move
wait
Start
busy
C den
move
wait
Speed
(Note) Change and start the data after the busy signal turns OFF.
Starting while the busy signal is ON will be ignored.
296
G0→G1→G1→G0 (Two axes)

PLC axis
control valid
Axis No. 0 1
Start
busy
A
den
move
wait
Axis No. 0
Start
busy
B
den
move
wait
Axis No. 1
Start
busy
C
den
move
wait
1st axis
speed
2nd axis
speed
[Caution]
Only one set of buffering mode can be commanded. When two or more sets are commanded
simultaneously, the sets commanded later will cause an alarm.
297
B Signal
CRT CHANGEOVER
- CRTFN Y728
COMPLETION
[Function]
When using one setting and display unit for multiple controller display units, this signal is used to inform
the controller that it has been changed as a display unit.
[Operation]
When this signal turns ON, the currently selected screen will display at the rising edge. For the setting
and display unit screen, the screen on the controller before the changeover will remain, so when this
signal is input, the local screen display will be changed to.
[Timing chart]
CRT changeover Other controller Local

At least 100 ms
Or more required
CRT changeover completion
(CRTFN)
Screen display Screen display on other controller Local screen display
B Signal
SCREEN DISPLAY
- SCRON Y729
REQUEST
[Function]
The screen backlight, which was turned OFF with the screen saver function, can be turned ON again.
[Operation]
(1) The backlight is turned ON again when this signal turns ON. Counting of the time to turn the
backlight OFF will start when this signal turns OFF.
(2) If this signal is output to the CNC while the screen is ON, counting of the time to turn the screen OFF
will restart.
Screen ON Counting of time to

"Screen display request" turn the backlight
signal (SCRON) OFF starts.
1 scan or more
(Note 1) The backlight is not turned OFF with "#8078 Screen saver time" while the "Screen display
C.B
request" signal is ON, but the backlight can be turned OFF using the SHIFT and CAN keys.
(Note 2) If the "Screen display request" signal (Y729) is changed again after that has changed once,
intervals of 1scan or more must be taken.
298
B Signal
COLLECTING DIAGNOSIS
- Y72B
DATA STOP
[Function]
Data collection will be stopped by turning this signal ON while collecting history data using operation
history function. Data collection will be started (resumed) by turning the signal OFF in data stop mode.
[Operation]
(1) "Collecting diagnosis data stop" signal stops data collection during rising edge movement following
the signal turned ON from OFF.
This signal starts data collection during falling edge movement following the signal turned OFF
from ON.
(2) Data collection will be stopped when this signal is turned ON while executing diagnosis data
collection (when "collecting diagnosis data" signal is turned ON). Data collection will be stopped in
approx. 500ms after the signal is turned ON. "Collecting diagnosis data" signal is turned OFF when
data collection is stopped.
(3) Data collection will be started when this signal is turned OFF while diagnosis data collection is
stopped (when "collecting diagnosis data" signal is turned OFF). Data collection will be started in
approx. 500ms after the signal is turned OFF. "Collecting diagnosis data" signal is turned ON when
data collection is started.
Collecting diagnosis data stopped

Stop
Start
Collecting history data Collecting In stop Collecting
Approx. 500ms
Collecting diagnosis data
(Note 1) This signal will be ignored even if issued at the first one scan after turning the power ON.
[Related signals]
(1) Collecting diagnosis data (X723)
299
B Signal
NC DATA SAMPLING
- SMPTRG Y72C
TRIGGER
[Function]
The start and end of data sampling are controlled.
[Operation]
If PLC device is selected as the conditions for starting and ending data sampling, the start and end of
data sampling will be controlled with this signal (Y72C). Note that if an arbitrary device is designated (#24)
as the condition, the data sampling will start and end by turning the designated device ON and OFF.
The following parameters are set on the screen.
Name Detail
Start condition When this parameter is set to "2", the condition for starting data
sampling is the PLC device ON (OFF when using B contact).
End condition When this parameter is set to "2", the condition for ending data
sampling is the PLC device OFF (ON when using B contact).
PLC-DEVICE When start condition or end condition is set to "2", the device for
controlling the start and end of data sampling is set.
When this parameter is set to "0", the device for controlling the start
and end of data sampling is the data sampling trigger (Y72C).
B Signal
DISPLAY CHANGEOVER
- DISP1 to 4 Y730 to 3
$1 to 4
[Function]
The displayed part system of the multiple part systems can be changed.
[Operation]
The displayed part system is changed at the rising edge of each display changeover signal.
The screen display for the multiple part systems is a screen for displaying one of the part systems. Thus,
which part system to be displayed is determined by these signals.
If both of these signals are started up simultaneously, they will be invalid.
[Timing chart]
Display part system $1 display $2 display $1 display
Display changeover
$1 (DISP1)
Display changeover
$2 (DISP2)
300
B Signal
INTERFERENCE CHECK
- CCHK Y73F
VALID
[Function]
This signal constantly checks relative position of interference. When interfering, the signal validates a
function that stops axis movement.
[Operation]
When the "interference check valid" signal (CCHK) is ON, command of the interference check is validated.
1st turret machine zero point
Offset
1st
interference 1st
machine interference
coordinate
Offset
Offset
2nd
2nd interference
interference machine
coordinate
Offset
2nd turret machine zero point
301
B Signal
- TOOL IC NEW READ Y740
[Function]
The tool information is read from the IC code chip, and registration of the tool starts.
[Operation]
When the rising edge (OFF to ON) of this signal is detected, a data send request is sent to the IC code
reader. The received data is stored in the area corresponding to the tool No. in the received data.
The "in tool ID communication" signal is output while communicating with the IC code reader.
After the data is received, the received tool No. is stored in the pot No. designated in "Tool ID R/W pot
No.".
(Note) This signal will be ignored even if it is turned ON during communication with the IC code reader.
[Related signals]
(1) Tool IC exchange read (Y741)
(2) Tool ID data erase (Y76F)
(3) Tool ID R/W pot No. (R336)
(4) In tool ID communication (X727)
B Signal
- TOOL IC EXCHANGE READ Y741
[Function]
The tool information is read from the IC code chip, and updating of the tool information starts.
[Operation]
When the rising edge (OFF to ON) of this signal is detected, the tool information is read, and is compared
with the tool No. stored in the pot No. If the numbers match, the tool information is updated.
If the numbers do not match, an error is output to "Tool ID communication error information".
The in "Tool ID communication" signal is output while communicating with the IC code reader.
(Note) This signal will be ignored even if it is turned ON during communication with the IC code reader.
[Related signals]
(1) Tool IC new read (Y740)
(2) Tool ID data erase (Y76F)
(3) Tool ID R/W pot No. (R336)
(4) In tool ID communication (X727)
302
B Signal
CONTACTOR SHUTOFF
- MCT Y742
TEST
[Function]
This signal carries out a contactor shutoff test.
[Operation]
Send a "ready OFF" command to the drive unit at the contactor shutoff test signal's rising edge and shut
the drive unit side contactor OFF. Then, turn the SDIO connector's SDO1 (contactor control output 1)
output OFF and shut the NC side contactor OFF.
Confirm that the contactor's status is OFF by monitoring contactor's auxiliary b contact signal, then send a
"ready ON" command to the drive unit to turn the drive unit side contactor ON. Turn ON the safety monitor
connector output, then the NC side contactor. After that, turn the 24 hours continuous operation signal
OFF.
If the contactor shutoff could not be confirmed within 5 seconds, "contactor welding detected" alarm is
output and the status turns to the emergency stop.
24 hours continuous operation (CNOP)
Contactor shutoff test (MCT)

Servo ready state
Contactor's auxiliary b contact signal
[Caution]
Contactor shutoff test must be carried out when the drive power can be shut off without causing any
problem. Vertical axis requires brake circuit, etc. for a drop prevention.
[Related signals]
(1) 24 hours continuous operation (X752)
(2) Emergency stop cause (R69)
B Signal
- PLC SKIP 1 to 8 Y748 to F
[Function]
This is the skip input signal from the PLC.
[Operation]
This can be used for the skip related functions. (G31 skip, tool length measurement, etc.)
[Cautions]
(1) The "PLC skip" signal is output to the skip input.
(2) When PLC skip is used, the coasting amount from the skip signal input will be slightly longer than the
high speed skip.
303
B Signal
AUTOMATIC POWER OFF
- Y75D
REQUEST
[Function]
Automatic power OFF function notifies that the control unit's power can be turned OFF after shutting the
display unit down by entering "automatic power OFF" signal from user PLC to NC.
[Operation]
(1) User PLC turns the "automatic power OFF request" signal ON.
(2) NC turns the "power OFF processing" signal ON.
(3) NC requests the display unit to be shut down.
(4) Timeout time is passed.
(5) The device has been specified by the "power OFF indication Y device No." signal.
(6) The specified device is turned ON.
When control unit and display unit use a different power supply, turn the control unit's power OFF after
confirming the "power OFF indication Y device No." signal is turned ON.
(1) Automatic power OFF request
User PLC Y75D

(3) Shut down request
NC Display unit
R215 Power OFF
(5) Power OFF indication Y device

Display unit
power
(2) Power OFF processing
X707
(4) Timeout time passed
Control unit
power Yxx (6) Power OFF indication
Power OFF (Y device designated with R215)
304
[Timing chart]
Automatic power OFF request

(Y75D)
Power OFF processing (X707)
Power OFF indication

Y device(R215)
(Timeout time)
Power OFF processing ON
[Cautions]
(1) Time including the time required for HMI application termination and Windows shutdown has to be set
in the machine parameter "#11007 PC Timeout".
(2) Normal power OFF processing is executed when the control unit's power is turned OFF during
automatic power OFF processing.
(3) When an illegal IP address is set to the machine parameter "#11005 PC IP address", the PC on the
network may be turned OFF.
(4) Do not execute the automatic power OFF function during editing or file I/O operation, etc.
(5) The automatic power OFF function is carried out to the display unit set to the machine parameter
"#11005 PC IP address".
(6) During spindle rotation/traveling, execute automatic power OFF after stopping those spindle
movements.
[Related signals]
(1) Power OFF processing (X707)
(2) Power OFF indication Y device No. (R215)
305
B Signal
ENCODER 1 ARBITRARY
- Y764
PULSE SELECTION
ENCODER 2 ARBITRARY
- Y765
PULSE SELECTION
[Function]
These signals select encoder arbitrary pulse.
[Operation]
Device No. Signal name Details

Y764 ENCODER 1 ARBITRARY Select arbitrary pulse input 1 and 2 set in R register when
PULSE SELECTION entering arbitrary pulse with encoder input 1.
0: Encoder 1 arbitrary pulse 1
Y765 ENCODER 2 ARBITRARY Select arbitrary pulse input 1 and 2 set in R register when
PULSE SELECTION entering arbitrary pulse with encoder input 2.
[Timing chart]
Spindle rotation
Select encoder 1 arbitrary pulse 1

Encoder 1 arbitrary pulse selection Select encoder 1 arbitrary pulse 2
(Y764)
Encoder 1 arbitrary pulse valid Encoder 1 arbitrary Encoder 1 arbitrary

pulse 2 is valid pulse 1 is valid
(Y766)
[Caution]
Switching each encoder’s arbitrary pulse selection (Y764 and 765) must be carried out during the spindle
stop.
[Related signals]
(1) Encoder 1 arbitrary pulse valid (Y766)
(3) Encoder 1 arbitrary pulse 1 (R456)
306
B Signal
ENCODER 1 ARBITRARY
- Y766
PULSE VALID
ENCODER 2 ARBITRARY
- Y767
PULSE VALID
[Function]
These signals select valid/invalid for encoder arbitrary pulse.
[Operation]

Y766 ENCODER 1 ARBITRARY Select valid/invalid for arbitrary pulse with the encoder input 1.
PULSE VALID 0: Invalid (conventional 1024 pulse fixed input)
1: Valid (arbitrary pulse input)
Y767 ENCODER 2 ARBITRARY Select valid/invalid for arbitrary pulse with the encoder input 2.
PULSE VALID 0: Invalid (conventional 1024 pulse fixed input)
1: Valid (arbitrary pulse input)
Turn OFF the arbitrary pulse valid signal when using the conventional 1024 pulse encoder.
[Caution]
Turning ON/OFF the encoder arbitrary pulse valid (Y766 and Y767) of the each encoder must be carried
out during the spindle stop.
[Related signals]
(1) Encoder 1 arbitrary pulse selection (Y764)
307
B Signal
- DOOR OPEN I Y768
[Function]
This signal stops all axes, and cuts OFF contactor power.
[Operation]
The NC carries out the following operations when the "Door open I" signal turns ON.
(1) A deceleration stop is carried out for all axes (servo axes and spindles).
(2) A ready OFF state occurs after all axes stop, and the contactor power of each drive unit is cut OFF.
(3) The "Door open enable" signal turns ON.
The NC carries out the following operations when the "Door open I" signal turns OFF.
(1) A ready ON and servo ON state occurs for all axes.
(2) The "Door open enable" signal turns OFF.
[Cautions]
Set so a "Door open I" signal is output to the NC after the PLC axis is stopped by the PLC.
If a "Door open I" signal is input without stopping the PLC axis, the axis will stop with a dynamic brake

opening the door.

[Related signal]
(1) Door open enable (XCD8)
308
B Signal
REMOTE PROGRAM
- Y76C
INPUT START
[Function]
With this "remote program input start" signal, machining program can be input from a personal computer,
etc.
[Operation]
The remote program input communicates in Xon/Xoff control (DC code method) between a personal
computer, etc. (hereinafter called HOST) and NC.
HOST NC
DC1
% File data
DC3
:
Temporary stop
:
DC1
File data
:
:
File data %
DC3
List of transmission control code

Control code Code Meaning
DC1 11H Commands transfer start and temporary stop
release to the HOST
DC3 13H(93H) Commands transfer temporary stop to the HOST
(Note) The code of DC3 switches, depending on the setting of the DC code parity.
(Parity valid:93H, Parity invalid:13H)
309
File data
EOR EOB EOB
O00001234 ( MAIN-PROGRAM ) G28 and up
(%) (LF) (LF)
Program No. shall be 8 digits Comments shall be 18 Machining program

or less. letters or less
EOB EOB EOR

to M02
(LF) (LF) (%)
The format is same as conventional input/output data (machining program).

The program No. and comments are not always necessary. When the program No. omitted, remote
program input No. described later will be input.
This signal is for starting remote program input. When the signal is turned ON, NC sends DC1.
(2) Status (X724, X725, X726)
Status of remote program input is indicated. The status is set by NC and checked by PLC.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
In remote program input (X724)

Remote program input completion (X725)
Remote program input error (X726)
(3) Remote program input No. (R352[L]/R353[H])

If no program No. is found in the machining program, value in R352/R353 will be input as program No.
However, if the value is "0", an error will occur.
If program No. is found in the machining program, the value in R352/R353 will be changed to that
program No.
When an error occurs, an error value will be set in the remote program input error information (R30)
and saved till the next start.
The error information will be cleared on NC side at the rising edge of a trigger signal.
Error No.
Error name Details
(HEX)
04,22 Memory capacity over Cannot input because the memory capacity will be exceeded
06 Number of programs Attempted to input machining program exceeding number specified in the
registered over specification
08,26 No applicable program Program designated does not exist in the memory
09 Edit lock B Attempted to input in respect to the inhibited machining program B
0A Edit lock C Attempted to input in respect to the inhibited machining program C
20 Delete error Attempted to delete opened file
25 Write protect error File is write-protected
33 Over run error Over run error occurred
35 Parity H error Character code is not ISO code
3D Reset and finished Input was forcibly terminated by reset signal
(DC3 will not be sent after reset and finished)
310
Error No.
Error name Details
(HEX)
40 Timeout finish After the input start, input data was not received after set “time out time”
of I/O parameters passed
48 No program No. Machining program cannot be registered because program No. is not set
in R352/R353 and not found in the machining program input by NC
49 In program operation Attempted to overwrite on the machining program in operation
4C No option Remote program input function is not added as an option
(When no-option error occurred, no communication is performed at all)
52 Input/Output not available Attempted to input new remote program while another input/output
function is running
54 Input data illegal Machining program cannot be registered because there is no EOB in the
machining program input by NC.
57 Label No. error Program No. in the input program is not correct
(Note) Program No. duplication error will not occur. When same number is found, it will be overwritten.
311
[Timing chart]
Case of normal completion
% Received
Starting condition
DC1 DC3 DC1 DC3
Send (NC→HOST)
Receive (HOST→NC)
In remote program input
Remote program input completion
Remote program input error
Remote program input error information
Case of input error completion
Error occurred
Starting condition
DC1 DC3 DC1 DC3
Send (NC→HOST)
Receive (HOST→NC)
In remote program input
Remote program input completion
Remote program input error
Remote program input error information
When an error occurred, turn OFF the "in input" signal and turn ON the "input completion" signal and "input
error" signal.
DC3 will be sent when % is received after error occurred or when reception buffer of NC is full.
312
[Cautions]
(1) The remote program input can be canceled by the reset signal.
(It will be an error completion "reset and finished".)
(2) Remote program input and normal input/output (I/O on NC side input screen) cannot be performed
simultaneously. The one started first will be prioritized.
If normal input/output is started in remote program input mode, an error message "E84 CAN'T
IN/OUT" will be displayed and the normal input/output would not be performed. If remote program
input is started in normal input/output mode, it will be an error completion "input/output not available".
[Related signals]
313
B Signal
- TOOL ID DATA READ Y76D
[Function]
This signal starts reading of the tool information from the tool ID label.
[Operation]
When the rising edge (OFF to ON) of this signal is detected, transmission of data is requested to the tool
ID controller. The received data is stored in the area corresponding to the tool No. in the reception data.
The "In tool ID communication" signal (X727) is output when communicating with the tool ID controller.
After the data is received, the received tool No. is stored in the pot No. designated by R336.
[Caution]
This signal will be ignored even if it is turned ON during tool ID communication.
B Signal
- TOOL ID DATA WRITE Y76E
[Function]
This signal starts writing of the tool information to the tool ID label.
[Operation]
When the rising edge (OFF to ON) of this signal is detected, the tool information corresponding to the tool
No. stored in the pot No. designated by R336 is sent to the tool ID controller.
The "In tool ID communication" signal (X727) is output when communicating with the tool ID controller.
[Caution]
B Signal
- TOOL ID DATA ERASE Y76F
[Function]
This signal erases the tool information stored in the CNC.
[Operation]
When the rising edge (OFF to ON) of this signal is detected, the tool information corresponding to the tool
No. stored in the pot No. designated by R336 is erased, and the pot No. tool No. is set to "0".
[Caution]
314
B Signal
PLC AXIS CONTROL VALID
- Y770 to 5
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
PLC axis control process is executed with the control information data while the PLC axis control valid
signal is ON.
[Operation]
When turning ON the PLC axis control valid signal, designate with the following device.
Y770 PLC axis control valid 1st axis
Y771 PLC axis control valid 2nd axis
Y772 PLC axis control valid 3rd axis
Y773 PLC axis control valid 4th axis
(Note) Reset state is activated when the PLC axis control valid signal is turned OFF.
[Related signals]
(1) PLC axis control buffering mode valid (Y723)
(2) PLC axis control information address (R440 to R443)
315
B Signal
CONTROL AXIS DETACH
- DTCH1 to 8 Y780 to 7 Y788 to F Y790 to 7 Y798 to F
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
Desired control axis can be specified to be exempted from control function.
Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last numeric of signal name indicates axis No. to be
detached.
DTCHn
1 ..... 1st axis is detached
:
:
8 ..... 8th axis is detached
[Operation]
When "Control axis detach" signal (DTCHn) turns ON, the corresponding axis is exempted from control.
(1) Specified axis is not under any positioning control (oriented spindle stop, index, etc.)
(2) "Servo alarm", "Stroke end alarm" and other alarms are not applied to specified axis.
(3) Interlock signal applied to specified axis is deemed to be ON.
(4) Specified axis is displayed by the setting and display unit.
(Note 1) The same function can be used by setting parameter on the setting and display unit. (See
below)
The control axis detach is valid when the following are valid:
Basic specification parameter "#1070 axoff" (axis
Control axis detach n-th axis or detach), and axis parameter of machining parameter
(DTCHn)
"#8201 AX. RELEASE"
316
B Signal
* SERVO OFF n-TH AXIS *SVF1 to 8 Y7A0 to 7 Y7A8 to F Y7B0 to 7 Y7B8 to F
[Function]
Control axis (axis motion under control) can be set to "Servo OFF" (i.e., servo motor remains still).
In servo OFF condition, positioning control is impossible but the position detection function is alive.
Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last numeric of signal name indicates No. of control
axis.
*SVFn
1 ..... 1st axis in "Servo OFF"
:
:
8 ..... 8th axis in "Servo OFF"
[Operation]
When "Servo OFF" signal (*SVFn) turns OFF, the corresponding control axis is set to servo OFF
condition.
Whether displacement which was caused during servo OFF by external force is corrected when "Servo
ON" signal is given, or not, can be determined by setting parameter.
(1) When displacement is corrected (follow-up):
• An amount of motion equal to the displacement is commanded so that positioning error becomes
zero.
• In this case, machine position remains deviated from in-position when "Servo OFF" signal is
restored.
The current position read by position counter is corrected and the machine position is corrected
when the next absolute motion command is given ("Manual absolute" signal (ABS) is turned ON
when manual operation is selected).
(2) When displacement is not corrected:
• In this case, machine position should be corrected when "Servo OFF" signal is restored.
(Example) Servo-OFF during motion
Servo OFF (*SVFn)
Axis motion *1
Servo ready
n-th axis Approx.
0.7 s
*2 *3
*1: Servo turns OFF after deceleration and stopping during axis motion.
*2, 3: Controller internal interlock by servo OFF (axis motion not possible)
[Caution]
These signals are all handled as B contacts.
317
B Signal
- MIRROR IMAGE n-TH AXIS MI1 to 8 Y7C0 to 7 Y7C8 to F Y7D0 to 7 Y7D8 to F
[Function]
This signal is used to machine a symmetrical shape by reversing the sign for the movement amount per
block.
Each control axis is provided with this signal. The last number of signal name indicates No. of control
axis.
MIn
1: Mirror image is applied ON 1st axis.
:
:
8: Mirror image is applied ON 8th axis.
[Operation]
Symmetrical cutting is enabled by reversing the sign of the value commanded for memory or MDI
operation.
(1) Regardless of whether the coordinate is commanded with an incremental mode or absolute mode, the
mirror image is applied ON the incremental amount to be executed for all axes that can be controlled.
(Note) The mirror image is changed after block stop.
[Related signals]
(1) In mirror image n-th axis (MIR1 to 8: X9C7 to F)
318
B Signal
EXTERNAL
* DECELERATION+ *+EDT1 to 8 Y7E0 to 7 Y7E8 to F Y7F0 to 7 Y7F8 to F
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
The feedrate when the control axis is moving in the + direction can be controlled while this signal
(*+EDTn) is OFF, at a constant speed set with the parameters.
This signal is present for each control axis. The end numbers in the signal name indicate the control axis
No.
*+EDTn
1 ... The 1st axis is decelerated.
:
:
8 ... The 8th axis is decelerated.
[Operation]
During manual mode when the "External deceleration" signal (*+EDTn) turns OFF, each axis decelerates
independently. However, during automatic mode, all axes will decelerate at the same deceleration speed
when even one axis matches the external deceleration conditions. The deceleration occurs when the
movement axis direction matches the "External deceleration" signal direction of the corresponding axis.
(1) The external deceleration speed can be randomly set with the parameters. (#1216 extdcc)
(2) When the speed is less than the external deceleration speed, it will not be affected even if this signal
is OFF.
(3) The deceleration speed during automatic operation will be the combined deceleration speed, if the
deceleration conditions match and the external deceleration speed is exceeded.
(4) When returning in the reverse direction, the speed will immediately return to the correct command
speed.
(5) For G28, G29 and G30 commands, the speed will become the external deceleration speed for that
axis only, even in automatic operation.
(6) The speed will become the external deceleration speed even in rapid traverse during synchronous
tapping.
External deceleration speed
Axis movement + direction movement
External deceleration+ (*+EDTn)
External deceleration- (*-EDTn) *-EDTn is invalid during + direction movement
[Caution]
(1) The external deceleration signal is handled as a B contact (*) signal, but changes to 1 (ON) when the
power is turned ON. When not being used, it is not necessary be concerned with external
deceleration when programming.
B Signal
EXTERNAL
* DECELERATION- *-EDT1 to 8 Y800 to 7 Y808 to F Y810 to 7 Y818 to F
n-TH AXIS
The functions and operations of this signal are the same as those of "External deceleration+ n-th axis"
signal (*+EDTn). The deceleration occurs when the movement is in the minus direction and the "External
deceleration- n-th axis" signal (*-EDTn) is OFF.
319
B Signal
AUTOMATIC INTERLOCK+
* *+AIT1 to 8 Y820 to 7 Y828 to F Y830 to 7 Y838 to F
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
All axis motions of machine can be decelerated and stopped immediately during automatic operation
when motion of a specific axis (n-th axis) in plus direction activates the interlock function.
These signals are for each control axis, and the number at the end of the signal name indicates the
control axis No.
*+AITn
1 ..... Automatic interlock+ 1st axis
:
:
8 ..... Automatic interlock+ 8th axis
[Operation]
When this signal turns OFF for a specific axis in motion in the plus direction under automatic operation
mode (memory, MDI, tape), motion of all axis decelerates and stops with "M01 operation error code 004"
displayed. With this signal set OFF from the beginning, the system completes calculation for axis motion
but makes it remain stopped with the same operation error code displayed. In either case, setting the
signal ON resumes or starts axis motion.
[Related signals]
(1) Automatic interlock- n-th axis (*-AITn: Y840)
(2) Manual interlock+/- n-th axis (*+/-MITn: Y860/Y880)
[Cautions]
(1) All automatic interlock signals are for B contact.
(2) The "Automatic interlock" signal is set to 1 when the power is turned ON, so an interlock cancel state
in the sequence program does not need to be created for the axis not being used.
B Signal
AUTOMATIC INTERLOCK-
* *-AIT1 to 8 Y840 to 7 Y848 to F Y850 to 7 Y858 to F
n-TH AXIS
The details are the same as the "Automatic interlock+ n-th axis" signal, except that the direction is
opposite.
The "Automatic interlock+ n-th axis" signal is valid for the axis moving in the plus direction, and this signal
is valid for the axis moving in the minus direction.
control axis No.
*-AITn
1 ..... Automatic interlock- 1st axis
:
:
8 ..... Automatic interlock- 8th axis
[Related signals]
(1) Automatic interlock+ n-th axis (*+AITn: Y820)
(2) Manual interlock+/- n-th axis (*+/-MITn: Y860/Y880)
320
B Signal
MANUAL INTERLOCK+
* *+MIT1 to 8 Y860 to 7 Y868 to F Y870 to 7 Y878 to F
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
When the corresponding axis is moving in the plus direction with manual operation (jog, manual,
incremental, reference position return), only the corresponding axis can be decelerated and stopped by
turning OFF this signal that corresponds to that axis.
control axis No.
*+MITn
1 ..... Manual interlock+ 1st axis
:
:
8 ..... Manual interlock+ 8th axis
[Operation]
When this signal turns OFF (0) for a specific axis in motion in the plus direction under manual operation
mode (jog, handle, incremental, reference position return), motion of the axis decelerates and stops with
NC alarm "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0004" displayed. With this signal set OFF from the beginning, the
system completes calculation for axis motion but makes it remain stopped with the same operation error
code displayed. In either case, setting the signal ON (1) resumes or starts axis motion.
[Related signals]
(1) Manual interlock- n-th axis (*-MITn: Y880)
(2) Automatic interlock+/- n-th axis (*+/-AITn: Y820/Y840)
[Cautions]
(1) All interlock signals are for B contact.
(2) The "Manual interlock" signal is set to 1 when the power is turned ON, so an interlock cancel state in
the sequence program does not need to be created for the axis not being used.
B Signal
MANUAL INTERLOCK-
* *-MIT1 to 8 Y880 to 7 Y888 to F Y890 to 7 Y898 to F
n-TH AXIS
The details are the same as the "Manual interlock+ n-th axis" signal, except that the direction is opposite.
The "Manual interlock+ n-th axis" signal is valid for the axis moving in the plus direction, and this signal is
valid for the axis moving in the minus direction.
control axis No.
*-MITn
1 ..... Manual interlock- 1st axis
:
:
8 ..... Manual interlock- 8th axis
[Related signals]
(1) Manual interlock+ n-th axis (*+MITn: Y860)
(2) Automatic interlock+/- n-th axis (*+/-AITn: Y820/Y840)
321
B Signal
AUTOMATIC MACHINE
- AMLK1 to 8 Y8A0 to 7 Y8A8 to F Y8B0 to 7 Y8B8 to F
LOCK n-TH AXIS
[Function]
During automatic operation, current position (counter) can be changed without actual machine motion to
check program.
control axis No.
AMLKn
1 ..... Automatic machine lock 1st axis
:
:
8 ..... Automatic machine lock 8th axis
[Operation]
In the automatic operation (memory, MDI or tape), when this signal is ON, the current position (counter)
can be changed on a specific axis (for which the signal is ON) without actual machine motion. If the signal
turns ON in the middle of a block (during motion), block termination occurs after the completion of that
block, and then the machine lock will be valid for the following blocks.
[Related signal]
(1) Manual machine lock, n-th axis (MMLKn: Y8C0)
[Cautions]
(1) If "Automatic machine lock" signal changes during automatic operation, block stop occurs after
completion of the block in execution.
(2) To move only the table without drilling to confirm the drilling position, turn ON the signal for the 3rd
axis (AMLK3) if the drilling axis is the 3rd axis. (Equivalent to Z axis cancel)
B Signal
MANUAL MACHINE LOCK
- MMLK1 to 8 Y8C0 to 7 Y8C8 to F Y8D0 to 7 Y8D8 to F
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
During manual operation, current position (counter) can be changed without actual machine motion to
check program.
[Operation]
When this signal is ON, current position can be changed on a specific axis (n-th axis) without actual
machine motion. If the signal turns ON or OFF during execution of a block, the operation continues until it
is completed. It is required to stop motion of all axes to validate the machine lock.
control axis No.
MMLKn
1 ..... Manual machine lock 1st axis
:
:
8 ..... Manual machine lock 8th axis
[Related signal]
(1) Automatic machine lock n-th axis (AMLKn: Y8A0)
322
B Signal
FEED AXIS SELECTION+
- +J1 to 8 Y8E0 to 7 Y8E8 to F Y8F0 to 7 Y8F8 to F
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal is used to start motion (jog feed, incremental feed or reference position return mode) in plus
direction during manual operation.
control axis No.
+Jn
1 ... 1st axis is selected for feed motion
:
:
8 ... 8th axis is selected for feed motion
+ ... Feed motion in + direction

- ... Feed motion in - direction
[Operation]
When "Feed axis selection" signal (+Jn) turns ON, the following motion occurs.
(1) When jog feed, incremental feed or reference position return is possible, motion in plus direction
occurs on the selected axis.
(2) In jog feed, motion continues while the signal is ON.
Jog mode(J)
1st axis motion [+]
(3) In incremental feed, amount (length) of motion depends on setting of "Handle/Incremental feed
magnification code m". The motion is in plus direction. Even when signal (+Jn) turns OFF during
motion, the motion (feed) does not stop. To start the motion again, turn ON the signal after the
preceding motion has been completed.
Incremental feed mode (S)
1st axis motion [+]
(4) After reference position return mode is decelerated to approach speed by the near point detection dog,
the motion continues, even after the feed axis selection signal is turned OFF, until motion reaches the
reference position.
323
(Note 1) If feed axis selection plus [+] and minus [-] signals turn ON at the same time, neither plus signal
nor minus signal is selected (same as the case where feed axis selection signal is OFF.)
(Note 2) If "Feed axis selection" signal turns ON before jog, incremental or reference position return
mode is selected, the "Feed axis selection" signal is ignored. In this case, the signal should be
turned OFF and then ON.
(Note 3) If reset is exerted while "Feed axis selection" signal is ON, or "Feed axis selection" signal turns
ON during reset, the "Feed axis selection" signal is ignored even when the reset condition is
canceled. In this case, the signal should be turned OFF and then ON.
(Note 4) The "Feed axis selection" signal will be invalid even if turned ON while the corresponding axis is
decelerating (when command output is not completed). The signal must be turned OFF and ON
again after the deceleration has completed completely (command output is completed). Special
care is required when the feed axis direction changes.
(Note 5) In the 2nd part system specifications, even if the 1st part system and 2nd part system feed axis
selection turn ON in the same cycle (scan) of the sequence, the start up may not be completely
simultaneous.
[Related signal]
(1) Feed axis selection- n-th axis (-Jn: Y900)
B Signal
FEED AXIS SELECTION-
- -J1 to 8 Y900 to 7 Y908 to F Y910 to 7 Y918 to F
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal is used to feed the axis in the minus (-) direction during jog feed, incremental feed or
reference position return mode in manual operation.
control axis No.
(Refer to the "Feed axis selection+ n-th axis" for details.)
[Operation]
The operation is the same as the feed axis selection+.
Use this signal to move in the minus (-) direction.
[Related signal]
(1) Feed axis selection+ n-th axis (+Jn: Y8E0)
324
B Signal
MANUAL/AUTOMATIC
- SIMULTANEOUS VALID MAE1 to 8 Y920 to 7 Y928 to F Y930 to 7 Y938 to F
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
The automatic mode (tape, MDI, memory) and manual mode (handle, step, jog, manual reference
position return) can be simultaneously selected allowing manual operation during automatic operation.
(Arbitrary feed with the PLC is also possible.)
[Operation]
The manual/automatic simultaneous mode is entered when the automatic mode and manual mode are
selected simultaneously. The manual operation axis is selected with this signal during the manual/auto
mode. The manual operation axes (MAEn) are selected individually for the 1st to 8th axes.
The axis selected with this signal can be operated in the manual mode during automatic operation.
(Note 1) If an axis command is issued to a manual operation axis from the automatic mode, the "M01
OPERATION ERROR 0005" will occur. The automatic operation will be interlocked until the
operation error is canceled.
(Note 2) During the automatic mode (when manual is not selected and manual/automatic simultaneous
mode is not entered), this signal will be invalid and the interlock will not be applied.
(Note 3) If this signal turns ON in respect to an axis commanded with automatic during the
manual/automatic simultaneous mode, an interlock will be applied on the axis, and the axis will
immediately decelerate and stop. (The "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0005" will occur.)
After decelerating and stopping, operation with the manual mode will be possible. Note that the
interlock will also be applied during the tap modal.
(Note 4) During the manual/automatic simultaneous mode and the automatic mode, the manual axis
command for which this signal is OFF will be invalid. Note that interruption with the manual
handle will be possible.
(Note 5) The feedrates for the automatic command axis and the manual command axis are different.
The acceleration/deceleration mode (rapid traverse, cutting feed) are also independent.
(Note 6) The rapid traverse override, cutting feed override and 2nd cutting feedrate override are valid for
both the automatic command axis and manual command axis. (Note that the cutting and 2nd
cutting overrides to the manual command axis are valid when the manual cutting override is
valid.) Override cancel is valid for the automatic command axis.
(Note 7) The manual interlock is valid for the manual command axis, and the automatic interlock is valid
for the automatic command axis.
(Note 8) The in-cutting feed and in-rapid traverse signals will follow the automatic command axis
movement mode.
(Note 9) The axis moving with manual movement will not stop with single block stop or feed hold.
(Note 10) If the G92 and G53 commands are issued in the manual mode to an axis for which this signal
is ON, the G92 and G53 commands will be executed after the manual axis movement stops.
(An axis command with G53 will cause an operation error after the manual axis movement
stops.)
(Note 11) If a soft limit or OT is applied on the manual command axis during the manual/automatic
simultaneous mode, the automatic command axis will also decelerate to a stop, and will enter
the feed hold state.
325
<Relation with manual handle interrupt>

The operation of the automatic handle interruption during the manual/auto mode is as follows.
Axis for which manual/ Axis for which manual/

automatic valid signal is ON automatic valid signal is OFF
The specifications of the The specifications of the
manual/automatic simultaneous automatic handle interruption will
Handle Automatic mode will be followed. be followed.
mode handle The automatic axis command Interruption with the handle can
selection interrupt will cause an operation error, be applied in respect to the
and only the manual axis automatic axis movement.
command will be valid.
Manual mode other Same as above Same as above
than handle
326
B Signal
MANUAL FEEDRATE B
- Y940 to 7 Y948 to F Y950 to 7 Y958 to F
VALID n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal validates manual feed using the manual feedrate B.
[Operation]
If this signal is validated when carrying out manual feed in the jog mode, the axis will move at the speed
commanded by manual feedrate B which is commanded separately from the manual feedrate.
This signal is independent for the axes.
<Using the manual feedrate B> (Example for 1st part system)
(1) To set the feedrate common for all axes as the manual feedrate B
(a) Select the JOG mode signal (J).
(b) Turn ON the "Manual feedrate B valid n-th axis" signal (this signal) for the axis to be moved at
the manual feedrate B.
(c) Set the feedrate set as manual feedrate B in the "Manual feedrate B" register.
(d) Turn ON the "Feed axis selection+" signal or "Feed axis selection-" signal for the axis to be
moved at the manual feedrate B.
(2) To set the feedrate independent for each axis as the manual feedrate B
(a) Select the JOG mode signal (J).
(b) Turn ON the "Manual feedrate B valid n-th axis" signal (this signal) for the axis to be moved at
the manual feedrate B. Also turn ON the "Each axis manual feedrate B valid" signal.
(c) Set the feedrate set as each axis manual feedrate B in the "Each axis manual feedrate B n-th
axis" register.
(d) Turn ON the "Feed axis selection+" signal or "Feed axis selection-" signal for the axis to be
moved at the each axis manual feedrate B.
(Note 1) Manual feedrate B is valid only for JOG feed, and is invalid in all other manual modes.
(Note 2) The rapid traverse mode is invalid for the manual feedrate B valid axis.
(Note 3) Manual override is invalid for the manual feedrate B valid axis.
(Note 4) The axis moving at the manual feedrate B will decelerate and stop when NC reset is input. To
move the axis at the manual feedrate B again, cancel the NC reset, and then turn the axis
selection signal OFF and ON.
(Note 5) Even if the feed axis selection signal is turned ON when the command speed is "0", an error will
occur and the manual feedrate B valid axis will not move.
(Note 6) The manual/automatic simultaneous signal must be valid to move a random axis at the manual
feedrate B during automatic operation.
(Note 7) The JOG mode signal must be validated simultaneously to move a random axis at the manual
feedrate B during a manual operation mode other than the JOG mode.
(Note 8) During synchronous control, the "Manual feedrate B valid n-th axis" signal is invalid for the
synchronous axis. The manual feedrate B signal issued for the basic axis is also valid for the
synchronous axis.
[Related signals]
(1) JOG MODE (J: YC00)
(2) MANUAL FEEDRATE B (R2506 to 7)
(3) Each axis manual feedrate B valid (YC7C)
(4) Each axis manual federate B n-th axis (R5764 to 79)
327
B Signal
ZERO POINT
- INITIALIZATION SET MODE AZS1 to 8 Y960 to 7 Y968 to F Y970 to 7 Y978 to F
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This selects the zero point initialization set with the marked point alignment method in the absolute
position detection system.
[Operation]
The zero point initialization set is selected with this signal.
Refer to the section on "Zero point initialization set completed" (ZSFn) signal for details on the operations.
(Note 1) This signal is a function signal for zero point initialization set, and is not a signal that selects the
operation mode. Select the jog mode or handle mode to move the axis to a required position.
(Note 2) This signal is valid for the following specifications.
When servo detection specification (motor detector, servo system) is the absolute position
detection system.
When "TYPE" on the [ABS. POSI PARAM] screen is set to "2".
[Related signals]
(1) Zero point initialization set completed (ZSFn: X8C0 to 7)
(2) Zero point initialization set error completed (ZSEn: X8E0 to 7)
(5) Zero point initialization set start (ZSTn: Y980 to 7)
328
B Signal
ZERO POINT
- INITIALIZATION SET START ZST1 to 8 Y980 to 7 Y988 to F Y990 to 7 Y998 to F
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This is used to set a random position as the origin during zero point initialization set using the marked
point alignment method in the absolute position detection system.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when a corresponding axis is moved in the zero point initialization set mode, and the
position to be set as the zero point is reached.
Refer to the section on "Zero point initialization set completed" (ZSFn) signal for details on the operations.
(Note 1) This signal is a function signal for zero point initialization set, and is not a signal that selects the
operation mode. Select the jog mode or handle mode to move the axis to a required position.
(Note 2) This signal is valid for the following specifications.
When servo detection specification (motor detector, servo system) is the absolute position
detection system.
When "TYPE" on the [ABS. POSI PARAM] screen is set to "2".
(Note 3) This signal will be invalid in the following states.
During emergency stop
During reset
When the "Zero point initialization set start" (ZSTn) signal is turned ON before the "Zero point
initialization set mode" (AZSn) signal. In this case, turn this signal OFF once, and then turn it
ON again.
When the grid (Z-phase signal provided per motor rotation) has not been passed once after the
power is turned ON.
[Related signals]
(1) Zero point initialization set completed (ZSFn: X8C0 to 7)
(2) Zero point initialization set error completed (ZSEn: X8E0 to 7)
(5) Zero point initialization set mode (AZSn: Y960 to 7)
329
B Signal
CURRENT LIMIT
- ILC1 to 8 Y9A0 to 7 Y9A8 to F Y9B0 to 7 Y9B8 to F
CHANGEOVER n-TH AXIS
[Operation] [Function]
This signal turns on when validating the current limit.
The current limit parameter switches from SV013 to SV014.
[Related signals]
(1) In current limit n-th axis (ILI1 to 8: X900 to 7)
(4) Current limit mode 1 and 2 (ILM1,2: YCC0,1)
B Signal
DROOP RELEASE
- DOR1 to 8 Y9C0 to 7 Y9C8 to F Y9D0 to 7 Y9D8 to F
REQUEST n-TH AXIS
[Operation] [Function]
During the current limit control, the droop generated by the current limit can be released.
[Related signals]
330
B Signal
WORKPIECE COORDINATE
- Y9E1 Y9E9 Y9F1 Y9F9
MEASUREMENT 2ND AXIS
[Function] (L system)
The Z axis external workpiece coordinate offset data can be set by cutting the workpiece face with
manual operations and inputting workpiece coordinate measurement 2nd axis.
[Operation]
(1) Mode selection
Set the mode selection switch to the manual mode ([Handle], [Jog] or [Rapid Traverse]).
(2) Tool measurement mode signal input
Set the tool measurement mode signal to "1".
(3) Main/sub selection
Using the tool presetter sub-side valid signal, select whether to measure the workpiece coordinates
on the main spindle side or sub-spindle side.
<Tool presetter sub-side valid signal>
OFF : The compensation No. is retrieved from the main spindle side R registers.
ON : The compensation No. is retrieved from the sub-spindle side R registers.
(Note 1) Hold the state of this signal until the measurement with the selected tool is completed.
(4) Tool selection
Issue the T command with MDI operation, etc., and select the tool.
(Note 1) Set the selected tool compensation No. in the R register.
The set R register differs according to the parameter setting and the state of the tool
presetter sub-side valid signal.
(Note 2) Set the "tool length/wear data" for the tool being used beforehand.
Compensation No. R registers

Tool length Tool nose wear
#1218 aux02
#1098 TIno. #1130 set_t compensation No. compensation No.
bit4
Main side Sub-side Main side Sub-side
0 0/1
0 R2600, R2601 R2604, R2605 R2600, R2601 R2604, R2605
1 0/1
0 R536, R537 R2600, R2601 R2604, R2605
0
1 1 R2602, R2603 R2606, R2607 R2600, R2601 R2604, R2605
1 0/1 R2602, R2603 R2606, R2607 R2600, R2601 R2604, R2605
• When the compensation No. is 0, the compensation amount will be calculated as "0".
• If the compensation No. exceeds the number of specified offset sets, the "Compensation No.
illegal" error will occur.
• Whether to use the main side or sub-side is selected with the tool presetter sub-side valid signal.
(OFF: Main side, ON: Sub-side)
(5) Cutting the workpiece face
If the workpiece face has not been cut, cut the workpiece face slightly to even it.
(Note 1) Do not move the tool in the detection of Z axis after cutting the workpiece face.
(Note 2) If the workpiece does not need to be cut, carry out positioning to the measurement position.
331
(6) Setting the Z axis external workpiece coordinate offset data with the workpiece coordinate
measurement 2nd axis signal input
Input the workpiece coordinate measurement 2nd axis signal (this signal). The Z axis external
workpiece coordinate offset data is automatically calculated from the tool compensation data of the
used tool and the machine value at the point this signal is input. The results are set as the data.
(a) Details of automatic calculation expression
The external workpiece coordinate offset data is automatically calculated with the following
expression.
External workpiece coordinate offset = Machine coordinate value - tool compensation data
The tool compensation data used for the measurement is selected with the base specification
parameter "#1226 aux10 bit0".
aux10 bit0 Tool compensation data
0 Tool length data + nose wear data
1 Tool length data
External workpiece coordinate offset
Machine value
Basic machine
Tool compensation coordinate zero point
amount Tool rest
Workpiece coordinate
zero point
(7) Turning the tool measurement mode signal OFF

Measurement of the external workpiece coordinate offset is completed.
[Related signals]
(1) Tool presetter sub-side valid (YCDA)
(2) Tool compensation No. (Main side: R2600 to R2603, Sub side: R2604 to R2607)
(3) Tool length measurement 2 (TLMS: YC21)
332
B Signal
CONTROL AXIS DETACH 2 DTCH21
- YA00 to 7 YA08 to F YA10 to 7 YA18 to F
n-TH AXIS to 28
[Function]
A control axis can be excluded from the control targets with this function.
This signal is present for each control axis. The end numbers in the signal name indicate the control axis
No.
DTCH2n
1: The 1st axis is set as axis detach 2.
:
:
8: The 8th axis is set as axis detach 2.
[Operation]
When the "Control axis detach 2" signal (DTCH2n) turns ON, the corresponding axis is excluded from the
control targets.
(1) Position control cannot be carried out, but the position is not lost because the position detection is
valid.
(2) The "Interlock" signal of the corresponding axis is considered turned ON.
(3) The corresponding axis also appears in the CRT position display.
[Related signal]
(1) Control axis detach n-th axis (DTCHn: Y780)
B Signal
UNCLAMP COMPLETION
- YA20 to 7 YA28 to F YA30 to 7 YA38 to F
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal indicates that unclamping has been completed in respect to the unclamp command from the
CNC.
[Operation]
When the unclamp command signal turns ON, the clamp on the corresponding axis is released by the
PLC, and then this signal turns ON.
When the unclamp command turns OFF, the corresponding axis is clamped by the PLC, and then this
signal turns OFF.
[Related signal]
(1) Unclamp command (X960 to X967)
333
B Signal
MIXED
CRS
- SYNCHRONIZATION YA60 to 7 YA68 to F YA70 to 7 YA78 to F
1 to 8
CONTROL REQUEST
[Function]
The mixed synchronization control (cross machining) is turned ON and OFF with the PLC signal. By using
parameter, designate which axis enters cross machining state by this signal.
[Operation]
(1) Cross machining control command using PLC signals
There are "mixed synchronization control request" signals (CRS1 to CRS8) for eight axes in each part
system. (There are signals for eight axes regardless of the actual number of axes.)
Cross machining is carried out by exchanging the axis for which the PLC signal is input and the axis
designated with parameter at the rising edge (0 to 1) of this signal. If an axis is not mounted at the
section where the PLC signal is input, the axis designated with the parameter will be moved from
another part system.
The axis cross machining state is canceled at the falling edge (1 to 0) of this signal, and normal
control is applied.
(2) Commanding in the machining program

Turn the "mixed synchronization control request" signal ON/OFF using M or T command, etc. to carry
out the cross machining control.
Carry out waiting-and-simultaneous operation before the M command and T command, etc., for cross
machining control so that the timing for cross machining control matches.
[Related signal]
(1) In mixed synchronization control (X980 to X987)
334
B Signal
SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL
- SYNC1 to 8 YA80 to 7 YA88 to F YA90 to 7 YA98 to F
REQUEST n-TH AXIS
[Function]
Whether to start or cancel synchronous control is selected with a signal corresponding to the
synchronous axis.
1 → 0 (falling edge) Synchronous control cancel
0 → 1 (rising edge) Synchronous control start
[Operation]
Synchronous control is started and canceled with the rising edge (OFF to ON) or falling edge (ON to
OFF) of the PLC signal (SYNC1 to 8) corresponding to the synchronous axis.
Thus, if synchronous control is canceled by a cause other than the PLC signal turning OFF, such as by
emergency stop, and synchronous control is to be started again, turn the PLC signal OFF and then ON
again.
The synchronization basic axis corresponding to each synchronous axis is set with the parameter "#2088
bsax_sy".
The movement direction of the synchronous axis in respect to the movement of the synchronous basic
axis is determined by the value set for parameter "#2087 syncnt".
When syncnt is 0, moves in the same direction as the basic axis
When syncnt is 1, moves in the opposite direction of the basic axis
[Related signals]
(1) In synchronous/superimposition control (X9A0 to X9A7)
(2) Synchronous error amount (R5076 to R5091)
[Cautions]
(1) The two axes related to control (synchronous/superimposition control) are both controlled in the
smoothing 0 state. Control is started after the axis movement has ended and smoothing zero is
established.
(2) Control (synchronous/superimposition control) are affected by the state of the two target part systems.
Thus, attention must be paid to the timing between the part systems. Always command
synchronization before commanding the control PLC signal.
(3) Control (synchronous/superimposition control) cannot be commanded to an axis in inclined axis
control. An operation error will occur if this type of command is issued.
(4) Before control (synchronous/superimposition control) is started, the target axis must have completed
reference position return after the power was turned ON, or the absolute position must be established.
An operation error will occur if the above state is not established.
(5) A movement command cannot be issued to a synchronous axis during synchronous control. An
operation error will occur if movement is commanded.
(6) An axis in synchronous control cannot be commanded as the superimposition control axis. An
operation error will occur if this type of command is issued.
(7) A synchronous axis in synchronous control cannot be commanded as the synchronous axis for other
synchronous control. An operation error will occur if this type of command is issued. Note that a single
axis can be designated as the synchronous basic axis for several synchronous controls.
335
B Signal
SUPERIMPOSITION
- CONTROL REQUEST PILE1 to 8 YAA0 to 7 YAA8 to F YAB0 to 7 YAB8 to F
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
Whether to start or cancel superimposition control is selected with a signal corresponding to the
superimposing axis.
1 → 0 (falling edge) Superimposition control cancel
0 → 1 (rising edge) Superimposition control start
[Operation]
Superimposition control is started and canceled with the rising edge (OFF to ON) or falling edge (ON to
OFF) of the PLC signal (PILE1 to 8) corresponding to the superimposing axis.
Thus, if superimposition control is canceled by a cause other than the PLC signal turning OFF, such as by
emergency stop, and superimposition control is to be started again, turn the PLC signal OFF and then ON
again.
The superimposing basic axis corresponding to each superimposing axis set with the parameter "#2089
bsax_sy".
The movement direction of the superimposing axis in respect to the movement of the superimposing
basic axis is determined by the value set for parameter "#2087 syncnt".
When syncnt is 0, moves in the same direction as the basic axis
When syncnt is 1, moves in the opposite direction of the basic axis
[Related signals]
(1) In synchronous/superimposition control signal (X9A0 to 7)
(2) Synchronous error amount (R5076 to R5091)
[Cautions]
(1) The two axes related to control (synchronous/superimposition control) are both controlled in the
smoothing 0 state. Control is started after the axis movement has ended and smoothing zero is
established.
(2) Control (synchronous/superimposition control) are affected by the state of the two target part systems.
Thus, attention must be paid to the timing between the part systems. Always command
synchronization before commanding the control PLC signal.
(3) Control (synchronous/superimposition control) cannot be commanded to an axis in inclined axis
control. An operation error will occur if this type of command is issued.
(4) Before control (synchronous/superimposition control) is started, the target axis must have completed
reference position return after the power was turned ON, or the absolute position must be established.
An operation error will occur if the above state is not established.
(5) An axis in superimposition control cannot be commanded as the synchronous control axis. An
operation error will occur if this type of command is issued.
(6) A superimposing axis in superimposition control cannot be commanded as the superimposing axis for
other superimposition control. An operation error will occur if this type of command is issued. Note
that a single axis can be designated as the superimposing basic axis for several superimposition
controls.
336
B Signal
- JOG MODE J YC00 YD40 YE80 YFC0
[Function]
JOG operation mode (manual operation) is selected.
[Operation]
When JOG mode signal (J) turns ON, JOG operation mode is selected.
Axis motion is started by turning ON the "Feed axis selection+ (+J1 to 8) or Feed axis selection- (-J1 to
8)" signal after turning ON the jog mode and setting the manual federate code (*JV1 to 16).
For rapid traverse, "Rapid traverse" signal (RT) is turned ON together with this signal (J).
If the operation mode duplicates the other mode or if it is removed, the NC alarm "M01 OPERATION
ERROR 0101" will occur.
[Related signals]
(1) Feed axis selection (+J1 to 8: Y8E0, -J1to 8: Y900)
(2) Manual feedrate code m (*JV1 to 16: YC70 to 4)
(3) Rapid traverse (RT: YC26)
B Signal
- HANDLE MODE H YC01 YD41 YE81 YFC1
[Function]
"Handle feed operation" mode (manual operation) is selected.
[Operation]
When HANDLE mode signal (H) is turned ON, HANDLE FEED mode is selected.
Axis motion starts when the manual pulse generator handwheel is rotated after axis is selected by handle
axis selection code (HS11 to 116, HS1S, HS21 to 216, HS2S, HS31 to 316, HS3S) and this signal is
turned ON. Speed of the axis motion depends on setting of feedrate magnification (MP1 to 4).
If the operation mode duplicates the other mode or if it is removed, the NC alarm "M01 OPERATION
[Related signals]
(1) 1st handle axis selection code (HS11 to 116: YC40), 1st handle valid (HS1S: YC47)
(2) 2nd handle axis selection code (HS21 to 216: YC48), 2nd handle valid (HS2S: YC4F)
..... Valid only for handle 2-axis spec.
(3) 3rd handle axis selection code (HS31 to 316: YC50), 3rd handle valid (HS3S: YC57)
..... Valid only for handle 3-axis spec.
(4) Handle/Incremental feed magnification code m (MP1 to 4: YC80 to YC82)
337
B Signal
- INCREMENTAL MODE S YC02 YD42 YE82 YFC2
[Function]
INCREMENTAL FEED mode (manual operation) is selected.
[Operation]
When incremental mode command signal (S) is turned ON, INCREMENTAL FEED mode is selected.
Each time "Feed axis selection" signal (+J1 to 8, -J1 to 8) for desired axis is turned ON, axis motion starts.
Speed of the axis motion (incremental feed) depends on setting of "Handle/Incremental feed
magnification code m" (MP1 to 4).
When "Rapid traverse" signal (RT) is ON, speed is the rapid traverse speed. When signal (RT) is OFF,
speed is equal to "Manual federate" (*JV1 to 16).
If the signal is the same as another operation mode or if it is removed, the NC alarm "M01 OPERATION
(Note 1) The incremental mode is also called the step mode.
[Related signals]
(1) Handle/Incremental feed magnification code m (MP1 to 4: YC80 to YC82)
(2) Feed axis selection (+J1 to 8: Y8E0, -J1 to 8: Y900)
(3) Manual feedrate code m (*JV1 to 16: YC70)
338
B Signal
- PTP YC03 YD43 YE83 YFC3
MODE
[Function]
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED mode in manual operation is selected.
[Operation]
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED mode is selected when this signal is turned ON ("1").
[Caution]
To turn the MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED mode ON, the rest of the manual modes and the automatic
mode must be OFF (0). Otherwise, this mode cannot be selected. (Note that this mode can be selected
simultaneously when manual/automatic simultaneous is valid.)
[Related signals]
(1) Signals from PLC to controller
Device No.
$1 $2 $3 $4 Abbreviation Signal name
YCA7 YDE7 YF27 Y1067 CX1S Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis valid
Device No.
YCAA YDEA YF2A Y106A CX24 Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 4
YCAB YDEB YF2B Y106B CX28 Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 8
YCAC YDEC YF2C Y106C CX216 Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code 16
YCAD YDED YF2D Y106D
YCAE YDEE YF2E Y106E
YCAF YDEF YF2F Y106F CX2S Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis valid
Device No.
YCB7 YDF7 YF37 Y1077 CX3S Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis valid
339
Device No.
YCB8 YDF8 YF38 Y1078 CXS1 Manual arbitrary feed smoothing off
YCB9 YDF9 YF39 Y1079 CXS2 Manual arbitrary feed axis independent
YCBA YDFA YF3A Y107A CXS3 Manual arbitrary feed EX. F/MODAL.F
YCBB YDFB YF3B Y107B CXS4 Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1
YCBC YDFC YF3C Y107C CXS5 Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK
YCBD YDFD YF3D Y107D CXS6 Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC
YCBE YDFE YF3E Y107E *CXS7 Manual arbitrary feed stop
YCBF YDFF YF3F Y107F CXS8 Manual arbitrary feed strobe
Device No.
R2508 R2708 R2908 R3108 1st handle/incremental feed magnification
R2509 R2709 R2909 R3109
R2510 R2710 R2910 R3110 2nd handle feed magnification
R2511 R2711 R2911 R3111
R2512 R2712 R2912 R3112 3rd handle feed magnification
R2513 R2713 R2913 R3113
R2544 R2744 R2944 R3144 Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount
R2545 R2745 R2945 R3145
R2546 R2746 R2946 R3146
R2547 R2747 R2947 R3147
R2548 R2748 R2948 R3148 Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis travel amount
R2549 R2749 R2949 R3149
R2550 R2750 R2950 R3150
R2551 R2751 R2951 R3151
R2552 R2752 R2952 R3152 Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis travel amount
R2553 R2753 R2953 R3153
R2554 R2754 R2954 R3154
R2555 R2755 R2955 R3155
(2) Signals from controller to PLC

(a) In manual arbitrary feed mode (PTPO: XC03)
(b) In manual arbitrary feed (CXN: XC16)
(c) Manual arbitrary feed completion (CXFIN: XC1C)
(3) Other
(a) Feedrate least increment code 1,2 (PCF1: YC78, PCF2: YC79)
(b) Manual/Automatic simultaneous valid n-th axis (MAE1 to 8)
340
B Signal
REFERENCE POSITION
- ZRN YC04 YD44 YE84 YFC4
RETURN MODE
[Function]
REFERENCE POSITION RETURN mode is selected.
"Reference position return" is that axis motion component (tool, table, etc.) is returned to the position
previously determined for individual machine.
[Operation]
The reference position return mode is selected when the "Reference position return mode" signal (ZRN)
is turned ON.
Select the reference position return mode, and turn ON the "Feed axis selection" signal (+J1 to 8, -J1 to
8) of designated axis to return to the reference position.
If the signal is the same as another operation mode or if it is removed, the NC alarm "M01 OPERATION
The first reference position return after the controller power is turned ON is the dog-type return (excluding
when the basic machine coordinate system is established for the absolute position detection
specifications). After the second manual reference position return (when basic machine coordinate
system is established), the dog-type or high-speed return is selected with the machine parameters, basic
specification parameter "#1063 mandog".
(1) Dog-type reference position return pattern

The return pattern is determined by the final entry method of the machine parameter reference
position return.
(a) Operation when axis is moved in same (b) When axis is moved in opposite
direction as the final entry method, and direction from final entry method,
dog is tripped. and dog is tripped.
Parameter’s final Parameter’s final

entry method entry method
Near-point dog Near-point dog
Reference position Reference position
• After the near-point dog is detected and the approach speed is applied, the axis will move to the
reference position even if the "Feed axis selection" signal is turned OFF. Thus, after the approach
speed is applied, another axis can be switched to and reference position return executed.
• The entry direction (final entry direction) after the near-point dog is tripped is set with parameters.
• The feedrate before the approach speed is the reference position return feedrate if the "Rapid
traverse" signal (RT) is ON, and the "Manual feedrate" (*JV1 to 16) is OFF.
• The approach speed is set with the parameters.
• When the reference position is reached, the movement will stop even if the feed axis selection signal
is ON, and the "1st reference position reached" signal (ZP1n) will turn ON.
341
(2) High-speed reference position return

• The axis will move toward the reference position. The motion speed will be rapid traverse if the rapid
traverse signal is ON, and manual feedrate if OFF.
• When the reference position is reached, the movement will stop even if the feed axis selection signal
is ON, and the "1st reference position reached" signal (ZP1n) will turn ON.
• The feed axis selection signal for high-speed return is valid only in the reference position direction. If
the opposite direction signal is designated, the NC alarm "M01 Operation error 0003" will occur.
[Related signals]
(1) Feed axis selection (+J1 to 8: Y8E0, -J1 to 8: Y900)
(4) 1st reference position reached (ZP11 to 18: X800 to 7)
B Signal
AUTOMATIC
- AST YC05 YD45 YE85 YFC5
INITIALIZATION MODE
[Function]
The automatic initialization mode is selected.
[Operation]
This mode is selected when automatic initialization is to be carried out with the machine end stopper
method of absolute position detection.
The initialization is started when the automatic initialization mode is selected, and the "Feed axis
selection" (+Jn, -Jn) signal in the direction of the machine end of the axis to be initialized is turned ON.
(Note 1) The automatic initialization mode is invalid when the absolute position detector is not provided
and when the machine end stopper method is not selected for the absolute position detection.
(During feed axis selection, "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0024" will occur.)
(Note 2) This mode will not start in the following cases of the machine end stopper method absolute
position detection.
(The message "Start not possible" will display.
• When "#0 Absolute posn set" on the [ABS. POSITION SET] screen is not set to "1".
• When "#2 Zero-P" on the [ABS. POSITION SET] screen has not been set.
• When "#2055 pushf" on the [ABS. POSITION PARAMETER] screen has not been set.
• When "Z71 0005" has occurred.
342
B Signal
- MEMORY MODE MEM YC08 YD48 YE88 YFC8
[Function]
MEMORY mode of automatic operation is selected.
In this mode of operation, automatic operation is based on programs stored in the memory.
[Operation]
• MEMORY mode is selected when "Memory mode" signal (MEM) turns ON.
• The program is started with the "Automatic operation "start" command" signal (ST).
• If the automatic operation mode is duplicated or canceled during automatic operation, the NC alarm
"M01 OPERATION ERROR 0101" will occur, and the block will stop.
• If the manual operation mode is entered or the program is duplicated with the manual operation mode
during automatic operation, the NC alarm will occur, and automatic operation will stop. However, the
manual and automatic programs can be duplicated if manual/automatic simultaneous operation is
valid.
(Note 1) Even when operation mode is other than automatic operation, illegal mode, if selected, causes
operation error.
[Related signals]
B Signal
- TAPE MODE T YC09 YD49 YE89 YFC9
[Function]
TAPE mode of automatic operation is selected.
In this mode of operation, automatic operation is based on tape command (RS232-C input) programs
stored in NC tape.
[Operation]
• Tape mode is selected when "Tape mode" (T) signal turns ON.
valid.
operation error.
[Related signals]
343
B Signal
- MDI MODE D YC0B YD4B YE8B YFCB
[Function]
MDI (Manual Data Input) mode of automatic operation is selected.
Automatic operation is performed with the program set in the MDI screen.
[Operation]
• MDI mode is selected when "MDI mode" (D) signal turns ON.
valid.
operation error.
[Related signals]
344
B Signal
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
- "START" COMMAND ST YC10 YD50 YE90 YFD0
(Cycle start)
[Function]
This signal is used to start automatic operation in MEMORY mode, MDI mode or TAPE mode, or to
restart after automatic operation pause (halt) or block stop.
[Operation]
(1) "Automatic operation "start" command" (ST) signal arises when the pressed "auto operation start"
pushbutton is released (i.e. at the time the signal turns OFF). The signal must be ON for a min. of
100msec.
(2) "In automatic operation "start"" signal (status signal "STL") turns ON when the pressed "auto
operation start" pushbutton is released, and turns OFF when "auto operation pause (or halt)"
pushbutton is pressed or block stop occurs in single-block operation.
(3) Signal (ST) is invalid when:
• Automatic operation starts.
• "Automatic operation "pause" command" (*SP) signal is OFF.
• During reset ("Reset & rewind" signal is ON).
• During alarm.
• Sequence No. is being searched for.
(4) Automatic operation stops or is suspended or block stops when:
• "Automatic operation "pause" command" (*SP) signal turns OFF.
• Reset occurs ("Reset & rewind" signal turns ON).
• Alarm which causes stop to automatic operation occurs.
• Automatic operation mode is changed to manual operation mode.
• Mode is changed to other automatic operation mode and then the block in execution is
completed.
• Block in execution is completed after "Single-block" (SBK) signal turns ON.
• Block in execution is completed after "Automatic machine lock" signal (AMKL) turns ON.
• Program specified in MDI mode has been executed completely.
[Related signals]
(1) Memory mode (MEM: YC08)
(2) Tape mode (T: YC09)
(3) MDI mode (D: YC0B)
345
B Signal
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
* "PAUSE" COMMAND *SP YC11 YD51 YE91 YFD1
(Feed hold)
[Function]
During automatic operation, axis motion can be decelerated and stopped with this command signal. To
restart, press "Automatic operation "start" command" (ST) signal pushbutton.
[Operation]
(1) When "Automatic operation "pause" command" (*SP) signal turns OFF, automatic operation stops.
• During automatic operation, the operation stops. "In automatic operation "pause"" (SPL) occurs.
• Restart with the automatic start (ST) button. (Press after turning *SP signal.)
(2) In the following cases, automatic operation does not immediately stop.
• During tapping in fixed cycle.
Automatic operation stops when tapping is completed and the tool returns to "R" point.
• During thread cutting.
Automatic operation stops when a block for axis motion (other than thread cutting), which comes
first after the "Automatic operation "pause" command" (*SP) signal turns OFF, is completed. If the
"Automatic operation "pause" command" (*SP) signal remains OFF, however, automatic operation
stops immediately after a block (other than thread cutting) is given.
• When control variable "feed hold invalid" has been set by user macro.
Automatic operation stops immediately after a block where the control variable "feed hold invalid" is
cleared starts.
(3) "Automatic operation "pause" command" (*SP) signal is valid even during machine lock.
[Related signals]
(1) Memory mode (MEM: YC08)
(2) Tape mode (T: YC09)
(3) MDI mode (D: YC0B)
346
B Signal
- SINGLE BLOCK SBK YC12 YD52 YE92 YFD2
[Function]
Machining program can be executed block by block in automatic operation.
[Operation]
(1) When "Single block" signal (SBK) turns ON, operation of controller is as follows:
• During automatic operation
After the block in execution has been completed, automatic operation stops. To start execution of
the next block, "Automatic operation "start" command" (ST) must be turned ON to OFF.
• There will be no operation when automatic operation is not being executed but if automatic
operation is started with the "Single block" signal (SBK) ON, one block will be executed and then
will stop. This allows the commanded program to be executed one block at a time.
(2) If the "Single block" signal (SBK) is ON at the end of a block, operation will normally stop immediately.
However, in the following case, operation will continue to where stopping is possible, and then will
stop.
• During cycle operation such as a fixed cycle. The block where single block is being received will
differ according to each cycle. Refer to the cycle sections in the Programming Manual.
<Example of operation pattern>
Single block signal (SBK)

command (ST)
G00 X100 … G01 Y100 … G01 X10 Y20 …
Axis motion block
SBK turns ON at start SBK switches during axis motion SBK turns ON after completion
(INVALID) (VALID) of block
(VALID)
B Signal
* BLOCK START INTERLOCK *BSL YC13 YD53 YE93 YFD3
[Function]
This signal prohibits start of the next block in automatic operation (memory, MDI or tape).
[Operation]
While the "Block start interlock" (*BSL) signal is OFF, execution of the next block may not be started in
automatic operation. When the signal is given during execution of a block, the execution of the block
continues until it is completed. Since the signal does not cause stop or suspension of automatic operation,
execution of program starts when the "Block start interlock" (*BSL) signal turns ON.
(Note 1) This signal is valid to all blocks including blocks internally generated in controller by fixed cycle,
etc.
(Note 2) The signal (*BSL) is ON when the power is turned ON. When the signal is not used,
programming on the PLC is not required for this signal.
[Related signal]
(1) Cutting block start interlock (*CSL: YC14)
347
B Signal
CUTTING BLOCK START
* *CSL YC14 YD54 YE94 YFD4
INTERLOCK
[Function]
This signal prohibits start of an axis motion command block other than that for positioning in automatic
operation (memory, MDI, tape).
[Operation]
While the "Cutting block start interlock" (*CSL) signal is OFF, execution of an axis motion command block
other than that for positioning may not be started in automatic operation. When the signal is given during
execution of a block, the execution of the block continues until it is completed. Since the signal does not
cause stop or suspension of automatic operation, execution of program starts when the "Cutting block
start interlock" (*CSL) signal is turned ON.
(Note 1) This signal is valid to all blocks including blocks internally generated by fixed cycle, etc.
(Note 2) The signal (*CSL) is ON when the power is turned ON. When the signal is not used,
programming on the PLC is not required for this signal.
[Related signal]
(1) Block start interlock (*BSL: YC13)
B Signal
- DRY RUN DRN YC15 YD55 YE95 YFD5
[Function]
Feedrate in automatic operation is specified by manually set value instead of program command value (F
value).
[Operation]
(1) DRY RUN signal given during cutting feed
• When "Rapid traverse" (RT) signal is ON, the cutting feedrate is equal to the maximum cutting
feedrate.
In this case, "cutting feedrate override" and "rapid traverse override" are ignored.
• When "Rapid traverse" (RT) signal is OFF, the set manual feedrate (*JV1 to 16) will apply. Cutting
feed override will also be valid if the "Manual override valid" (OVSL) signal is ON.
(2) Dry run signal given during rapid traverse
The parameter must be turned ON to validate dry run for rapid traverse (G0, G27, G28, G29, G30).
• When "Rapid traverse" (RT) signal is ON, the "Dry run" signal is ignored.
• When "Rapid traverse" (RT) signal is OFF, the speed is equal to manually set speed.
(Note 1) Dry run is not applicable to manual operation.
(Note 2) Dry run is valid even during G84 or G74 operation.
[Related signals]
(3) Manual feedrate override valid (OVSL: YC59)
348
B Signal
- ERROR DETECTION ERD YC17 YD57 YE97 YFD7
[Function]
Machine motion is stopped momentarily in transition from a cutting feed block to other block during
automatic operation to provide time for determination whether in-position check is made or not before
start of the next block.
Block-to-block transition may cause rounding in cutting because of delay caused by acceleration or
deceleration, and servo response delay. Rounding can be eliminated by stopping the machine motion
between the blocks by turning the "Error detection" signal (ERD) ON.
[Operation]
When this "Error detection" signal (ERD) is ON in block-to-block transition during cutting in automatic
operation, in-position check is accomplished. If the signal is OFF, the next block starts after completion of
the preceding block without stop.
Error detection (ERD)
Axis motion
X axis cutting feed Y axis cutting X axis cutting feed
feed
OFF ON
X axis X axis
The next motion starts The next motion starts

without machine stop. Y axis Y axis after machine stop.
(Note 1) In general practice, the signal (ERD) is turned ON and OFF using an appropriate miscellaneous
function (M code, etc.) so that command program can determine whether machine motion
should be stopped or not. When the signal is ON, the status is same as the case where G09 is
specified by the command program. Consequently, it is recommended to use G function unless
otherwise required especially.
349
B Signal
- NC RESET 1 NRST1 YC18 YD58 YE98 YFD8
[Function]
This signal is used to reset the control unit.
[Operation]
When this signal (NRST1) is turned ON, the control unit can be reset.
Generally, the signal for the reset button of the NC operation board is set to "NC reset 1" (NRST1). At this
time, the control unit will take the following actions.
(1) The G command modal will be held.
(2) The tool compensation data will be held.
(3) The memory will be indexed.
(4) The error/alarm will be reset.
(5) The MST code output will be held.
(6) The M code independent output (M00, M01, M02, M30) will turn OFF.
(7) The axis movement will stop.
(8) The "In reset" signal (RST) will be output.
NC reset 1 (NRST1)
In reset (RST)
[Related signals]
(1) NC reset 2 (NRST2: YC19)
(3) In "reset" (RST: XC15)
350
B Signal
- NC RESET 2 NRST2 YC19 YD59 YE99 YFD9
[Function]
This signal is used to reset the control unit.
[Operation]
When this signal (NRST2) is turned ON, the control unit can be reset.
Generally, this is turned ON when the miscellaneous function M02 or M30 is executed. In some cases,
the "Reset & Rewind" (RRW) explained later is used.
At this time, the control unit will take the following actions.
(1) The G command modal will be initialized.
(2) The tool compensation data will be canceled. (Will not be applied.)
(3) The memory will not be indexed.
(4) The error/alarm will be reset.
(5) The MST code output will be held.
(6) The M code independent output (M00, M01, M02, M30) will turn OFF.
(7) The axis movement will stop.
(8) The "In reset" signal (RST) will be output.
NC reset 2 (NRST2)
In reset (RST)
[Related signals]
(1) NC reset 1 (NRST1: YC18)
(3) In "reset" (RST: XC15)
351
B Signal
- RESET & REWIND RRW YC1A YD5A YE9A YFDA
[Function]
This signal resets the controller.
During memory operation, the head of the machining program currently being run can be called out.
The reset key in the communication terminal is also set to YC1A by the sequence program.
[Operation]
When this signal (RRW) turns ON:
(1) Ongoing axis motion is decelerated and stopped.
(2) CNC is reset after axis motion stops. In about 0.5 second after CNC is reset, "In reset" signal (status
signal RST) turns ON.
(3) At the same time as CNC is reset, "In rewind" (RWD) signal turns ON.
• In memory operation mode, the head of program in execution is read (memory index).
(4) While the signal (RRW) is ON, automatic operation and manual operation are impossible.
(5) G command modal is initialized.
(6) Tool compensation (offset) data are canceled (no motion).
(7) Error/alarm is reset.
(8) M, S, T code outputs are held. (Strobe signal turns OFF.)
(9) M code independent output (M00, M01, M02 and M30) is turned OFF.
<Operation example>
The process when M02 or M30 are commanded in the program is shown below.
Generally, when M02 (or M30) is executed by the program, this signal (RRW) will be returned when the
designated operation is completed. M function finish 1 (FIN1) and M function finish 2 (FIN2) will not be
returned.
(Refer to *1 in the following drawing.)
M02 (M02), M30 (M30)

*1
Reset & rewind (RRW)
In reset (RST)
About 0.5 s
In rewind (RWD) This interval is unknown.
M function finish 1,2 (FIN1, FIN2)
[Related signals]
(1) In reset (RST: XC15)
(2) In rewind (RWD: XC17)
352
B Signal
* CHAMFERING *CDZ YC1B YD5B YE9B YFDB
[Function]
In thread cutting cycle, chamfering can be ignored.
[Operation]
Status of this signal is determined at start of thread cutting cycle.
• CHAMFERING (*CDZ) is OFF.
Chamfering (at end of thread cutting) is accomplished.
Tool nose path

Chamfer section
Thread section
• CHAMFERING (*CDZ) is ON.

Chamfering is not accomplished (signal is ignored).
Tool nose path
Thread section
353
B Signal
- AUTOMATIC RESTART ARST YC1C YD5C YE9C YFDC
[Function]
If this signal is turned ON after the end of the machining program execution, the same machining program
will be restarted.
[Operation]
The same machining program will restart if this signal is turned ON during automatic start.
[Timing chart]
N01 …… ;
Program example Program head

N04 …… ; Head block
N05 M02 ;
Machining program N03 … ; N04 … ; N05 M02 ; N01 … ; N02 … ;
M code M02
In automatic operation "start"

(STL)
Automatic restart
Miscellaneous function strobe
M single output
In rewind
(RWD) *1
Automatic restart
(ARST)
*2
*1:Rewind time During memory operation …approx. 0.1 [s] + α (α is the PC cycle time)
During tape operation …according to length of tape
*2:Refer to Note 8.
(Note 1) The modal is initialized with this signal.

(Note 2) This signal is valid only during automatic start.
(Note 3) This signal is valid during the memory and MDI automatic operation modes.
(Note 4) Normally, "M code independent output" signal for M02 or M30 is input into this signal, but in this
case, do not input the M02 or M30 completion signal (FIN1, FIN2).
(Note 5) If the "Automatic operation "pause" command" (*SP) signal is valid, the "Automatic restart"
signal will be invalid.
(Note 6) This signal is invalid during single block stop.
(Note 7) Note that if an M command other than M02 or M30 is input into this signal, the program will
return to the start point without completing the program, and the program will be restarted.
(Note 8) If "Reset & rewind" (RRW) are applied during the automatic restart process (*2 section in time
chart above), the modal will be initialized and the tape will be rewound, but the "Automatic
restart" signal will be invalid.
354
B Signal
- M FUNCTION FINISH 1 FIN1 YC1E YD5E YE9E YFDE
[Function]
This status signal informs the controller that specified miscellaneous (M) function, spindle (S) function,
tool (T) function or 2nd miscellaneous function (A, B or C) is accomplished on the PLC side.
[Operation]
If the M, S, T or 2nd M function command is executed during automatic operation, the code and each
function strobe (MF1 to 4, SF1 to 4, TF1 to 4, BF1 to 4) will turn ON.
When the PLC verifies that one or more M, S, T and/or B function has been specified, it performs that
function(s) and, after completion of the function(s), "M function finish 1" (FIN1) signal turns ON.
When the controller verifies that signal FIN1 turns ON, it turns OFF strobe signal of corresponding
function.
The PLC checks that each strobe signal turns OFF, then turns OFF FIN1. With the signal FIN1 turned
OFF, the controller proceeds to the next block.
An example of timing chart, where M function is specified, is as follows:
Command program M08 Next block
There are two "M function finish" signals, namely, "M function finish 1" and "M function finish 2" (refer to
the next page). The only difference is if the next block is proceeded to at the falling edge or at the rising
edge. These can be used separately per operation in one PLC.
(Note 1) "M function finish 1" (FIN1) signal is common to M, S, T and B functions.
(Note 2) The "M function finish 1" signal is also the signal for upgrading the spindle speed output (S
command data, etc.) during S function execution.
(Note 3) If signal FIN1 has been ON before M, S, T or B function is specified, data pertinent to M, S, T or
B function are not output. To output, the signal FIN1 should be turned OFF once.
(Note 4) When "Reset & rewind" (RRW) signal is sent to the controller by M02 or M30, "M function finish
1 or 2" signal should not be sent back. If the "M function finish 1 (2)" signal is return with the M02
command at the end of the machining program, the NC alarm program error (P36) will occur.
[Related signals]
(2) M function strobe 1 to 4 (MF1 to 4: XC60)
(3) S function strobe 1 to 4 (SF1 to 4: XC64)
(4) T function strobe 1 to 4 (TF1 to 4: XC68)
(5) 2nd M function strobe 1 to 4 (BF1 to 4: XC6C)
(6) M, S, T, B function data (output to file register R: R504 and later)
355
B Signal
- M FUNCTION FINISH 2 FIN2 YC1F YD5F YE9F YF5F
[Function]
This status signal informs the controller that specified miscellaneous (M) function, spindle (S) function,
tool (T) function or 2nd miscellaneous function (A, B or C) is accomplished on the PLC side. When too
much signals FIN1 must be used, this signal can be used instead of signal FIN1 to save time.
[Operation]
If the M, S, T or 2nd M function command is executed during automatic operation, the code and each
function strobe (MF1 to MF4, SF1 to 4, TF1 to 4, BF1 to BF4) will turn ON.
When the PLC verifies that one or more M, S, T and/or 2nd M function has been specified, it performs
that function(s) and, after completion of the function(s), "M function finish 2 (FIN2)" signal turns ON.
When the controller verifies that signal FIN2 turns ON, it turns OFF strobe signal of corresponding
function.
When each strobe signal turns OFF, the PLC turns OFF signal FIN2. With the signal FIN2 turned OFF,
the controller proceeds to the next block.
An example of timing chart, where M function is specified, is as follows:
Command program M08 Next block
M function strobe (MF1)
There are two types of M function finish signals, namely, "M function finish 1" (refer to the previous page)
and "M function finish 2". The only difference is if the next block is proceeded to at the falling edge or at
the rising edge. These can be used separately per operation in one PLC.
(Note 1) "M function finish 2 (FIN2)" signal is common to M, S, T and B functions.

(Note 2) The M function finish 2 signal is also the signal for upgrading the spindle speed output (S analog
data, etc.) during S function execution.
(Note 3) If signal FIN2 has been ON before M, S, T or B function is specified, data pertinent to M, S, T or
B function are not output.
(Note 4) When "Reset & rewind" signal (RRW) is sent to the controller by M02 or M30, "M function finish"
2 or 1 signal should not be sent back. If the "M function finish 2 (1)" signal is return with the M02
command at the end of the machining program, the NC alarm program error (P36) will occur.
[Related signals]
(2) M function strobe 1 to 4 (MF1 to 4: XC60)
(3) S function strobe 1 to 4 (SF1 to 4: XC64)
(4) T function strobe 1 to 4 (TF1 to 4: XC68)
(5) 2nd M function strobe 1 to 4 (BF1 to 4: XC6C)
(6) M, S, T, B function data (output to file register R: R504 and later)
356
B Signal
TOOL LENGTH
- TLM YC20 YD60 YEA0 YFE0
MEASUREMENT 1
[Function]
"Tool length manual measurement 1" is selected by this signal.
For M system, "Tool length manual measurement 1 and 2" functions are used by this signal.
[Operation]
When the signal (TLM) is turned ON (1), amount of tool length to be corrected is calculated automatically
in the controller.
[Cautions]
(1) This signal is invalid if the tool length screen is not selected.
(2) The calculation result is read when INPUT key is pressed.
B Signal
TOOL LENGTH
- TLMS YC21 YD61 YEA1 YFE1
MEASUREMENT 2
[Function]
"Tool length measurement 2" is selected by this signal.
[Operation]
When the signal (TLMS) is turned ON, calculation of tool length compensation amount is automatically
started in the controller. When skip signal is input during tool length measurement, amount of tool length
to be corrected is calculated.
[Timing chart]
Manual mode
Measurement mode
Tool length measurement 2
(TLMS)
Controller internal interlock

Manual feed
Tool measurement sensor
[Cautions]
(1) To use the tool length measurement 2 function, select manual operation mode.
Otherwise, tool length measurement mode cannot be established.
(2) "Tool length measurement 2" can be used with a machine equipped with tool measurement sensor.
The sensor for tool length measurement is connected to the connector "SENSOR" No. 2 pin ON the
controller unit.
(3) The calculation result is read automatically inside the controller.
(4) With tool length measurement 2, multiple part systems cannot be measured simultaneously.
[Related signal]
(1) Tool length measurement 2 Tool No. (R2618)
357
B Signal
SYNCHRONIZATION
- YC22 YD62 YEA2 YFE2
CORRECTION MODE
[Function]
When the "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0051" (Synchronization error too large) occurs, the occurring error
is corrected without changing the operation method with this mode.
[Operation]
In the correction mode, the operation is as follows.
(1) The synchronous control is not carried out even in the synchronous axis, and the basic axis and
synchronous axis are handled as independent two axes in the each control part. Thus, the basic axis
and synchronous axis can be moved individually.
(2) If the zero point has established, the synchronization error check is carried out.
(3) If the correction mode switch is turned ON during selecting the mode except the handle or manual
arbitrary feed mode, the "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0120" (Synchronization correction mode ON) will
occur.
In the handle or manual arbitrary feed mode, if the correction mode switch is turned ON, the correction
mode can be set and "CORRECTION MODE" will be displayed in the operation mode display position.
The operation procedure is shown below.
Start
Correction mode ON
Handle or manual Yes

arbitrary feed mode?
No Display the message

"M01 OPERATION ERROR 0120"
Select the handle or manual (in the synchronization correction).
arbitrary feed mode.
"CORRECTION MODE" is
displayed in the operation mode
Select the axis to be moved display position.
between the basic axis and
synchronous axis.
Only the axis selected between the
Move the axis basic axis and synchronous axis is
moved.
Correction mode OFF The mode returns to the

Synchronization mode, and the
mode display becomes "HANDLE"
End or "MANUAL ARBITRARY".
[Related signal]
(1) Synchronous control operation method (R2589)
358
B Signal
- PROGRAM RESTART PRST YC23 YD63 YEA3 YFE3
[Function]
With the program restart function, when the axis is returned to the restart position with the manual mode
after the restart search is performed, the direction can be checked, or the axis can be stopped at the
restart position.
[Operation]
If the "Program restart" signal (PRST) is turned ON after the restart search is performed and the axis is
moved to the restart position direction with the manual mode, the axis is stopped at the restart position
automatically. The [RESTART-R] values on the program restart screen are set to zero and "RP" appears
by the side of the [RESTART-P] values. If the axis is moved in the opposite direction to the restart position,
an OPERATION ERROR will occur.
[RESTART – (G54)] [RESTART – R]

X - 130.000RP X 0.000
Y -10.000RP Y 0.000
Z 0.000RP Z 0.000
B Signal
- PLAYBACK PB YC24 YD64 YEA4 YFE4
[Function]
This signal is used to convert amount of axis motion into controller command data for generation of
operation program.
[Operation]
When the "Playback" (PB) signal turns ON, the playback display mode appears on the communication
terminal. By moving and stopping axis motion components (tool or table) with JOG feed, rapid traverse or
handle feed, the displayed coordinate value is read and converted into NC data in accordance with the
operation program format. By repeating data read, an operation program can be created.
359
B Signal
- MACRO INTERRUPT UIT YC25 YD65 YEA5 YFE5
[Function]
When the controller is ready for user macro interrupt, the program being in execution can be interrupted,
or other program can be executed after the former program has been executed, by turning ON "Macro
interrupt" (UIT) signal.
[Operation]
(Note 1)
When "Macro interrupt" (UIT) signal turns ON within time interval starting with M96 command and
ending with M97 command or reset, the program being in execution can be interrupted for execution of
other program.
"Macro interrupt" (UIT) signal becomes valid when:
(1) Memory, tape or MDI is selected.
(2) Automatic operation is selected (signal STL is ON).
(3) Other user macro is not being executed.
"Macro interrupt" (UIT) signal is accepted in "status trigger" method or "edge trigger" method, either one
of which can be selected by parameter #1112.
(1) Status trigger method
While "Macro interrupt" (UIT) signal is ON, the signal can be accepted.
When M96 is used to make acceptable user macro interrupt, the inserted program is executed when
the signal (UIT) turns ON.
With the signal (UIT) kept turned ON, inserted program can be executed repeatedly.
(2) Edge trigger method

The signal (UIT) is accepted when its status changes from "OFF" to "ON" (i.e., with rise edge of
signal).
This method is advantageous when inserted program is executed only once.
<Command format>
M96 P_ H_ ;•••••••••••User macro interrupt valid
Interrupt sequence No.
Interrupt program No.
M97 : •••••••••••••••••• User macro interrupt invalid
Refer to the relevant "Programming Manual" for details on the user macro interrupt function such as
interrupt method and call method for when the "Macro interrupt" (UIT) signal is ON.
(Note 1) M96 and M97 can be changed to other M code by using a parameter.
(Note 2) User macro interrupt control M code is processed internally and not output to an external source
(PLC).
360
B Signal
- RAPID TRAVERSE RT YC26 YD66 YEA6 YFE6
[Function]
Speed or feedrate of axis motion in "JOG" mode, "incremental feed" mode or "reference position return"
mode can be changed to rapid traverse speed.
[Operation]
When the signal (RT) is turned ON:
(1) The jog and incremental feedrate will be the rapid traverse feedrate set with parameters.
(2) The speed until the near-point detection dog signal is detected during dog-type reference position
return will be the reference position return rapid traverse feedrate set with parameters.
(3) Speed or feedrate is changed at the same time as the signal is turned ON.
When the signal (RT) is turned OFF, rapid traverse speed changes to the previous speed or feedrate.
"Feed axis selection" signal (±J1 to 8) may be kept turned ON.
(4) The speed will be the rapid traverse feedrate until the near point dog signal is detected during jog,
incremental feed or reference position return. The rapid traverse override will also be valid.
(5) The "Rapid traverse override code 1,2" (ROV1, ROV2) will be validated when the "Rapid traverse"
signal is ON.
JOG mode (J)
Rapid traverse (RT)
1st axis motion [+]

Rapid traverse Rapid traverse
speed speed
Manual feedrate speed Manual feedrate speed
(Note 1) "Rapid traverse" (RT) signal does not act as mode signal, but serves as interrupt signal for
"JOG" mode, "INCREMENTAL FEED" mode, etc.
(Note 2) This signal can be used likewise during machine lock.
(Note 3) For handling of "Rapid traverse" (RT) signal during dry run, refer to the description about dry run
signal (DRN).
[Related signal]
(1) Rapid traverse override code 1,2 (ROV1, ROV2: YC68, YC69)
361
B Signal
- MANUAL ABSOLUTE ABS YC28 YD68 YEA8 YFE8
[Function]
This signal selects whether to update the program coordinate system the amount moved with manual
operation (jog, handle, etc.).
[Operation]
(1) When "Manual absolute" signal (ABS) is OFF:
The amount moved with manual operation is not added to the absolute position register in the
controller. Thus, if manual is used during automatic operation, the axis will move in parallel the
amount moved manually at the end point of the block and the end point of the following blocks. (The
axis will move in parallel regardless of the absolute/incremental command in the machining program.)
X axis
Stop caused by feed hold
Programmed path
(absolute command)
Interrupt by manual
operation
Start after manual interrupt
Z axis Locus shifts the amount moved

with manual interrupt.
(2) When "Manual absolute" signal (ABS) is ON:

The amount moved by manual operation is added to the absolute position register in the controller,
and the coordinate system is not changed. Thus, if manual operation is used during automatic
operation by absolute command, the axis will return to the position commanded at the end of the
inserted block and following blocks. However, if the manual interrupt is an incremental command, the
axis will move in parallel the amount moved manually. (The axis will move in parallel regardless of the
absolute/incremental command at the end of the inserted block.)
X axis
Stop caused by feed hold
Programmed path
(absolute command)
Interrupt by manual
operation
Start after manual interrupt
Z axis
Pass the same path as commanded in
the machining program
362
B Signal
- DISPLAY LOCK DLK YC29 YD69 YEA9 YFE9
[Function]
By using this signal, the current position displayed on the display unit is not updated even if the machine
is moved with automatic operation or manual operation.
[Operation]
When the display lock signal (DLK) is ON, the machine movement and program coordinate system are
updated in the normal state, but the current position displayed on the display unit is locked.
(Note 1) This signal (DLK) is valid at all times, and can be turned ON and OFF immediately.
(Note 2) This signal is valid during machine lock operation.
[Related signal]
(1) In display lock (DLKN: XC29)
B Signal
F1-DIGIT SPEED CHANGE
- F1D YC2A YD6A YEAA YFEA
VALID
[Function]
When this signal is ON and F1-digit feed is commanded, the feedrate registered in the parameters can be
increased or decreased by turning the manual handle.
[Operation]
When the program feedrate is commanded with an F1-digit, the feedrate can be increased or decreased
by turning the manual handle.
(1) Speed fluctuation amount using manual handle
The speed fluctuation amount ΔF is expressed with the following expression.
FM ΔP : Handle pulse (±)

ΔF = ΔP × K FM : Upper limit value for F1-F5 (parameter setting value #1506)
K : Speed fluctuation constant (parameter setting value #1507)
(Example) To increase/decrease by 10mm/min per handle feed scale
When FM 3600mm/min is set,
3600 K =360 based on the following expression
ΔF = 10 = 1 × K
(2) Validity conditions
(a) Automatic operation must be active.
(b) Automatic operation must be started.
(c) The operation must be in cutting feed, and the F1-digit feedrate must be designated.
(d) The F1-digit valid parameter must be ON.
(e) The F1-digit speed change valid signal must be ON.
(f) Machine lock must not be active.
(g) Dry run must not be active.
[Related signals]
(1) F1-digit commanded (F1DN: XC2A)
(2) F1-digit No. code (F11 to F18: XC30 to XC33)
363
B Signal
RECALCULATION
- CRQ YC2B YD6B YEAB YFEB
REQUEST
[Function]
This signal is turned ON if a calculated block (next block) is recalculated during operation of the
machining program.
[Operation]
For example, to operate mirror image, etc., with the miscellaneous (M) command in the program.
~
N1 M45; To apply mirror image with this M command

N2 G0X100;
~
When the N1 block is reached in the above program example, the "Recalculate request" signal will turn
ON before FIN is output or simultaneously with FIN.
This will validate the mirror image from the N2 block.
Execution block N1 M45;
M function strobe (MF)
Recalculate request (CRQ)
Auxiliary function finish (FIN)
Control unit latches rising edge
Calculate next block N1 M45; N2 G0X100;
N2 G0X100 calculation start Recalculate N2 G0X100

Mirror image ON
[Caution]
The "Recalculation request" (CRQ) signal latches the rising edge in the controller. Thus, even if the
"Recalculation request" (CRQ) signal is ON (1), the "recalculation" will not take place unless at the rising
edge.
364
B Signal
- PLC EMERGENCY STOP QEMG YC2C YD6C YEAC YFEC
[Function]
The controller can be set to emergency stop condition, like the case where emergency stop signal is
given by user PLC.
[Operation]
Emergency stop occurs in the controller when the signal (QEMG) is turned ON. In this case, "Servo ready
completion (SA)" is turned OFF.
(Note) Since this signal is processed in software, response is somewhat slower, as compared with
external emergency stop signal. Approximate response is equal to 1 scan by user PLC plus
100ms.
365
B Signal
REFERENCE POSITION
- RTN YC2D YD6D YEAD YFED
RETRACT
[Function]
This function returns immediately to a set reference position when the return signal is input. This function
is used to return to a set position for changing the tool.
[Operation]
Reference position return is executed when this signal is turned ON. At the rising edge of the signal, the
program is automatically reset (reset & rewind) and then reference position return is executed.
During the automatic or MDI operation, the operation is interrupted and stopped by the reset, and
reference position return is executed.
If this signal is input during execution of a tap cycle in the automatic or MDI operation modes, the "Tap
retract possible" signal will be output by the reset interruption, and the return operation will be the tap
retract operation. The tap retract is completed at the initial point, and after that the reference position
return will be carried out.
(1) If there are two or more axes, set the return order with parameter "#2019 revnum".
(2) When the reference position is reached, the corresponding "Reference position reached" signal will
be output.
(3) This signal must be held until the "Reference position reached" signal is output. If it is turned OFF
midway, the return operation will be interrupted and stop. If the signal is input again, the operation will
restart from execution of resetting.
(4) The reference position return speed is handled in the same manner as the normal reference position
return speed.
(5) The reference position returned to during reference position retract depends on the YC90 and YC91
reference position selection code 1,2.
(6) Even if the return signal is input during the thread cutting cycle, it will be invalid. However, if the return
signal is executed in a block other than the thread cutting block, the return operation will be executed.
(7) The return signal is invalid if the coordinate system is not established. An operation error will occur
when the return signal is input. "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0020"
[Timing chart]
Reference position retract

(RTN)
In reset
(RST)
Approx.
100ms
Automatic operation
Reset stop Reference position return
Reference position reached

(ZP1n)
[Related signals]
(1) Tap retract possible (TRVE: XCA5)
(2) Tap retract (TRV: YC5C)
366
B Signal
- PLC INTERRUPT PIT YC2E YD6E YEAE YFEE
[Function]
Interruption is executed with the interrupt program set with the R register when a signal is issued from the
PLC during single block stop in program operation, or during the manual mode.
[Operation]
At the rising edge of this signal, the interrupt program (determined by the interrupt program No. input
simultaneously with this signal) is executed during single block stop in program operation, or during the
manual mode.
The interrupt program is ended with M99.
When the interrupt program ends, the operation mode returns to the same mode as before interruption
was executed. For the memory or MDI mode, when the operation automatically starts, the block following
the one ended just before interruption is executed. Note that if MDI operation is interrupted, the MDI
program following the interrupted block will be canceled.
[Operation example]
(Example 1) When program is interrupted during memory operation single block stop
Interrupt program
O100 O9900
:
PLC interrupt N10 G01 X10.; :
signal ON N20 Z10.;
M99;
After the O100 N10 block ends, the designated interrupt program (O9900) is called when this signal turns
ON. The PLC interrupt ends at the M99 block, and the block will stop. O100 N20 is executed from the
next automatic start.
(Example 2) When program is interrupted during MDI operation single block stop
Interrupt program
MDI O9900
:
PLC interrupt N10 G01 X10.; :
signal ON N20 Z10.;
Canceled M99;
After the MDI N10 block ends, the designated interrupt program (O9900) is called when this signal is
turned ON. The PLC interrupt ends at the M99 block, and the block will stop. The next and subsequent
blocks of the MDI program are canceled so operation cannot be continued.
367
(Example 3) When program is interrupted during manual mode
Interrupt program
Manual feed O9900
:
PLC interrupt :
signal ON :
M99;/M30;
During manual feed, the designated interrupt program (O9900) is called when this signal turns ON. The
PLC interrupt ends at the M99 block, and the block will stop. The operation mode is returned to the
manual mode by commanding reset.
If the PLC interrupt program is used in only in modes other than automatic operation, M30 can be
commanded at the end of the program instead of M99 to command reset.
[Cautions]
(1) Single block operation and automatic operation pause are valid even when the interrupt program is
executed. To invalidate single block during the interrupt program execution, set system variable #3003.
To invalidate automatic operation pause, set system variable #3004.
(2) Other PLC interrupt and MDI interrupt cannot be commanded during execution of the interrupt
program.
(3) To disable the display of the interrupt program being executed on the Monitor screen, set the basic
specification parameter "#1122 pglk_c" to 1 or 2.
(4) The PLC interrupt signal is ignored even if it is turned ON during automatic operation start or
automatic operation pause.
(5) "In automatic start" signal (OP) is output while the interrupt program is executed regardless of the
operation mode which is active before the interruption.
(6) PLC interrupt is valid for each part system.
(7) If PLC interrupt is executed when there is no interrupt program or when program search has not been
executed, a program error (P232) will occur when M99 is commanded.
(8) If the interrupt program No. set in the R register is not within the setting range, a program error (P232)
will occur.
(9) This function is an option. If the option is not provided, the PLC interrupt signal will be ignored even if
it is commanded.
[Related signals]
(1) PLC interrupt program No. (R2518)
(2) In PLC interrupt (PCINO: XC35)
B Signal
- CHOPPING CHPS YC30 YD70 YEB0 YFF0
- CHOPPING PARAMETER YC34 YD74 YEB4 YFF4

VALID
Refer to "6.6.10 Chopping" for function and operation.
368
B Signal
- SEARCH & START RSST YC31 YD71 YEB1 YFF1
[Function]
This signal is input into the controller when executing operation search in the memory mode and carrying
out automatic start up.
[Operation]
If this signal is input when the memory operation mode is selected, an operation search of the machining
program with the designated No. (R2562, R2563) will be carried out. After the search, the program will be
automatically started.
If this signal is input during automatic operation, the program will be reset before the search. After the
resetting is completed, the search and automatic start operations will be executed.
Hold the "search & start" signal until the "search & start search" signal turns ON.
(Example1) Search & start is executed by designating O900 machining program from the reset state.
Program No. O1 O900
In reset
Search & start
(Example2) When O900 machining program is designated during operation of the O1 machining
program, and search & start is executed.
Program No. O1 O900
In reset
Search & start
[Cautions]
(1) This signal is valid only when the memory mode is selected.
(2) An error signal will be output if the machining program No. is not designated or if the designated
program No. is illegal (0 or exceeding 99999999).
(3) This signal is valid at the rising edge.
(4) If this signal is input during resetting, the search & start will not be executed.
(5) When the multi-part system program management is valid, the search is executed for all part systems
in batch with the signal for $1. Only the programs with "0" No. are searched.
[Related signals]
(1) Search & start program No. (R2562, R2563)
(2) Search & start error (SSE: XC8A)
369
B Signal
INCLINED AXIS CONTROL
- YC35 YD75 YEB5 YFF5
VALID
[Function]
This signal validates the inclined axis control.
[Operation]
When this signal is turned ON, the inclined axis control is executed following the set parameter.
If this signal is turned OFF from ON, the inclined axis control will be invalid.
[Caution]
Even if this signal is changed over during the axis movement or the automatic operation, this signal will
not be valid.
If this signal is changed over during the axis movement, this signal will be valid after the axis movement is
stopped.
If this signal is changed over during the automatic operation, the block stop will occur.
B Signal
INCLINED AXIS CONTROL
- NO Z AXIS YC36 YD76 YEB6 YFF6
COMPENSATION
[Function]
Select whether the movement for the inclined axis in the manual operation is affected to the
corresponding basic axis or not.
[Operation]
When this signal is turned ON and the manual operation for the inclined axis is executed, the
corresponding basic axis is not moved.
When this signal is turned OFF and the manual operation for the inclined axis is executed, the
compensation operation attending the movement of the inclined axis is executed to the corresponding
basic axis.
[Caution]
Even if this signal is changed over during the axis movement, this signal will not be valid.
If this signal is changed over during the axis movement, this signal will be valid after the axis movement is
stopped.
370
B Signal
BDT1
- OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP m YC37 to F YD77 to F YEB7 to F YFF7 to F
to 9
[Function]
Block accompanying "/n (n: 1 to 9)" (slash) can be skipped.
By creating a machining program with a "/" code inserted, a different part can be machined with one
program.
[Operation]
(1) When a program having a block with "/n" (slash code) placed at the head of block is executed with
"Optional block skip" signal turned ON, the block is skipped. The block with the "/n" code in the middle
instead of at the head will be executed.
When the signal is OFF, block with "/n" is executed.
(Example) If machining the two parts as illustrated below, create the following program. When
machining with the "Optional block skip" signal ON, part 1 will be provided. With the signal
OFF, part 2 will be provided.
<Program>
N1 G54;
N2 G90G81X50. Z-20. R3. F100;
/1N3 X30.;
N4 X10.;
N5 G80;
M02;
Part 1 Part 2
Optional block skip ON Optional block skip OFF
N4 N2 N4 N3 N2
371
B Signal
1ST HANDLE AXIS YC40 YD80 YEC0 Y1000
- HS11 to 116
SELECTION CODE m to 4 to 4 to 4 to 4
[Function]
In HANDLE mode (handwheel is operated), axis component to be moved is selected.
In the case of 2-axis or 3-axis handle specification (two or three handles are required), axis is selected for
the 1st handle.
[Operation]
For axis motion in HANDLE mode:
(1) Select HANDLE mode.
(2) Specify axis No. for 1st handle axis selection code
(3) Turn ON "1st handle valid" (HS1S) signal (later described).
(4) Turn the handle (handwheel) ... motion will start.
The relationship between "handle axis No." and "motion axis" is as follows:
Handle axis No.

HS — — HS HS HS HS HS
Motion axis 1S 116 18 14 12 11
X axis (1st axis) selected 1 — — 0 0 0 0 1
Y axis (2nd axis) selected 1 — — 0 0 0 1 0
Z axis (3rd axis) selected 1 — — 0 0 0 1 1
#4 axis (4th axis) selected 1 — — 0 0 1 0 0
"1st handle valid" signal
1st handle 2nd handle 3rd handle
1st handle axis selection code 2nd handle axis selection code 3rd handle axis selection code
Set the No. of the axis to be

moved with the n-th handle.
[Related signals]
(1) 2nd handle axis selection code m (HS21 to 216: YC48 to YC4C)
(2) 2nd handle valid (HS2S: YC4F)
(3) 3rd handle axis selection code m (HS31 to 316: YC50 to YC54)
(4) 3rd handle valid (HS3S: YC57)
372
B Signal
- 1ST HANDLE VALID HS1S YC47 YD87 YEC7 Y1007
[Function]
In HANDLE mode, axis No. of axis motion component to be moved is set for 1st handle axis selection
code (HS11 to HS116). To make valid the specified handle axis No., this signal is used.
[Operation]
Axis motion does not start when the 1st handle (handwheel) is rotated after HANDLE mode is selected
and the desired axis No. is set for the 1st handle axis selection code if this signal (HS1S) is not given.
Although either the "1st handle axis selection code" signal or the "1st handle valid" signal can be given
first, these two signals are to be given when manual axis motion is started.
[Related signals]
(1) 1st handle axis selection code m (HS11 to 116: YC40 to 4)
373
B Signal
2ND HANDLE AXIS YC48 YD88 YEC8 Y1008
- HS21 to 216
SELECTION CODE m to C to C to C to C
[Function]
This signal selects which handle to move with the 2nd handle when using the 2-axis or 3-axis handle
specifications (two or three handles are required).
[Operation]
For axis motion controlled by the 2nd handle:
(2) Specify axis No. for 2nd handle axis selection code
(3) Turn ON "2nd handle valid" signal (HS2S).
Handle axis No.

Motion axis 2S 216 28 24 22 21
"2nd handle valid" signal

[Related signals]
(2) 1st handle valid (HS1S: YC47)
(3) 3rd handle axis selection code m (HS31 to 316: YC50 to 4)
(4) 3rd handle valid (HS3S: YC57)
374
B Signal
- 2ND HANDLE VALID HS2S YC4F YD8F YECF Y100F
This signal is the same as "1st handle valid" signal in function and operation, except that it is applicable
only to 2-axis handle specification (two handles are required).
Refer to the above table for the relation with the "2nd handle axis selection code" (HS21 to 216).
[Related signals]
(1) 2nd handle axis selection code m (HS21 to 216: YC48 to C)
375
B Signal
3RD HANDLE AXIS YC50 YD90 YED0 Y1010
- HS31 to 316
SELECTION CODE m to 4 to 4 to 4 to 4
[Function]
This signal selects which handle to move with the 3rd handle when using the 3-axis handle specifications
(three handle is required).
[Operation]
For axis motion in HANDLE mode:
(2) Specify axis No. for 3rd handle axis selection code
(3) Turn ON "3rd handle valid" (HS3S) signal (later described).
Handle axis No.

Motion axis 3S 316 38 34 32 31
"3rd handle valid" signal


[Related signals]
(2) 1st handle valid (HS1S: YC47)
(3) 2nd handle axis selection code m (HS21 to 216: YC48 to C)
(4) 2nd handle valid (HS2S: YC4F)
376
B Signal
- 3RD HANDLE VALID HS3S YC57 YD97 YED7 Y1017
This signal is the same as "1st handle valid" signal in function and operation, except that it is applicable
only to 3-axis handle specification (three handles are required).
Refer to the above table for the relation with the "3rd handle axis selection code" (HS31 to HS316).
[Related signals]
(1) 3rd handle axis selection code m (HS31 to HS316: YC50 to YC4)
377
B Signal
- OVERRIDE CANCEL OVC YC58 YD98 YED8 Y1018
[Function]
With this signal, override to cutting feedrate input to the controller during automatic operation is ignored.
[Operation]
When the signal (OVC) turns ON ...
(1) Cutting feedrate override code (*FV1 to 16) is ignored and feedrate specified by F command is
selected.
(2) When cutting feedrate override is set at "0%", the signal (OVC) is not valid (feedrate is zero and no
motion occurs).
(3) The signal does not affect to "Manual feedrate override" and "Rapid traverse override".
[Related signal]
(1) Cutting feedrate override code m (*FV1 to 16: YC60)
B Signal
MANUAL OVERRIDE
- OVSL YC59 YD99 YED9 Y1019
METHOD SELECTION
[Function]
Override can be exerted on "manual feedrate" (feedrate in JOG feed, incremental feed, etc. during
manual operation).
[Operation]
When this signal (OVSL) is turned ON when manual feedrate has been set, the previously set cutting
feedrate override (%) is applied to that feedrate.
OVSL
ON
Manual feedrate Cutting federate override
(1) Code method (*JV1 to 16) (1) Code method (*FV1 to 16) 2nd curring
(2) File register method × OFF (2) File register method
× feedrate override
(Setting value) (Setting value)
= Actual manual feedrate
(Note) For details of "manual feedrate", "cutting feedrate override" and "2nd cutting feedrate override",
refer to the relevant descriptions.
378
B Signal
MISCELLANEOUS
- AFL YC5A YD9A YEDA Y101A
FUNCTION LOCK
[Function]
Strobe signal for miscellaneous function (M, S, T and B) specified during automatic operation cannot be
output when this signal is used. The signal (AFL) can be used to check machining program, for example.
[Operation]
When the signal (AFL) turns ON:
(1) Miscellaneous function (M, S, T and B) specified in automatic operation cannot be executed, i.e.
output of code data and function strobe signal (MF1 to 4, SF1 to 4, TF1 to 4, BF1 to 4) are withheld.
(2) If the signal turns ON after code data is output, that output is accepted and the corresponding function
can be completed (FIN1 or FIN2 is received and strobe signal is set to "0").
(3) Miscellaneous function M00, M01, M02 or M30 is, however, accepted and realized even when the
signal (AFL) is ON and the decode signals, code data and "M function strobe" signal are output.
(4) Miscellaneous function which is executed within the controller and does not output its code data and
"M function strobe" signal, such as M98 and M99, is executed even when the signal is ON.
(Note) As for S command data (output), the value before "Miscellaneous function lock" signal (AFL) is
turned ON will be retained even when this signal is ON. When the signal is ON at NC power ON, S
command data will be 0V.
[Related signals]
(2) M code data (R504)
(4) S code data (R512)
(5) T function strobe 1 (TF1: XC68)
(6) T code data (R536)
(8) 2nd M function data (R544)
379
B Signal
- TAP RETRACT TRV YC5C YD9C YEDC Y101C
[Function]
This function is used to remove the tap from the workpiece when tap cycle has been stopped due to
emergency stop, etc.
[Operation]
If the "Tap retract" signal (TRV) is turned ON while the "Tap retract possible" signal (TRVE) is ON due to
an interruption in the tap cycle, the tap retract operation can be started.
(1) The following items are conditions for tap retract. (The "Tap retract possible" signal will turn ON at this
time.)
Emergency stop during tap cycle
Reset during tap cycle
Power OFF during tap cycle (Only for absolute position detection system)
(2) Tap retract is executed as follows:
Execute the synchronous tap cycle command. (a)
Stop the tap cycle with emergency stop. (b)
The "Tap retract possible" signal (TRVE) turns ON. (c)
Release the emergency stop. (The "Servo ready completion" signal (SA) turns ON.) (d)
Turn ON the "Tap retract" signal (TRV). (e)
The spindle will rotate in reverse, and the tap axis will move toward the tap cycle's initial point.
The feedrate is the tap cycle feedrate. (f)
When the tap axis reaches the tap cycle initial point, the spindle and tap axis will stop, and
tap retract will be completed. (g)
The "Tap retract possible" signal (TRVE) will turn OFF.
Normal tap cycle Tap retract operation

Tap cycle command
(a) Tap cycle command
(g)
Stop
a b f Initial point a b f Initial point
c e R point R point C
(f)
Tap feed Tap retract operation
(spindle (spindle reverse
Tap feed (spindle (Spindle (b) forward run) run)
forward run) reverse run)
Emergency stop
(c) Stop
(e)
(d) Emergency stop
d release Tap retract
Tap base d
Tap base
(Note 1) The area between "c" and "e" above is the tap cycle. The "Tap retract possible" signal will not be
output if the operation is not stopped in this area.
(Note 2) This signal is valid only during rising in the tap cycle.
(Note 3) When this signal turns ON, emergency stop and reset will not function.
[Related signal]
(1) Tap retract possible (TRVE: XCA5)
380
B Signal
TOOL HANDLE FEED
- YC5E YD9E YEDE Y101E
MODE
[Function]
When this signal is turned ON, tool handle feed mode will be activated.
In the tool handle feed mode, axis can be moved with the manual pulse generator in tool axis direction,
tool radius direction X and Y within the hypothetical coordinate system over the tool axis.
[Operation]
When the tool handle feed mode is selected, axis moves with the manual pulse generator in tool axis
direction, tool radius direction X and Y.
Operate in the following procedure.
(1) Select handle mode at the mode selection
(2) Turn ON the signal (YC5E)
(3) Move in tool axis direction, tool radius direction X and Y.
Handle feed magnification is shown as below.

Handle feed magnification YC82 YC81 YC80
1-fold 0/1 0 0
10-fold 0/1 0 1
100-fold 0/1 1 0
1000-fold 0/1 1 1
(Note1) When the signal (YC5E) is "0", it is considered as normal handle mode.
381
B Signal
CUTTING FEEDRATE YC60 YDA0 YEE0 Y1020
* *FV1 to 16
OVERRIDE CODE m to 4 to 4 to 4 to 4
[Function]
Override (multiplication) can be exerted to cutting feedrate (F feedrate) during automatic operation with
this signal.
[Operation]
When the signal is valid, true feedrate is the product obtained by multiplying referenced speed by override
ratio (%) specified by the signal.
Override is 100%, even when the signal is given, in the following cases:
(1) When "Override cancel" (OVC) signal is ON.
(2) During tapping mode.
(3) During thread cutting.
These signals (*FV1 to 16) are set with the code method. The relation is shown below.
Cutting feedrate
*FV16 *FV8 *FV4 *FV2 *FV1
override
1 1 1 1 1 0%
1 1 1 1 0 10%
1 1 1 0 1 20%
1 1 1 0 0 30%
1 1 0 1 1 40%
1 1 0 1 0 50%
1 1 0 0 1 60%
1 1 0 0 0 70%
1 0 1 1 1 80%
1 0 1 1 0 90%
1 0 1 0 1 100%
1 0 1 0 0 110%
1 0 0 1 1 120%
1 0 0 1 0 130%
1 0 0 0 1 140%
1 0 0 0 0 150% Generally, the rotary switch
0 1 1 1 1 160% (5-step, 21-notch, compliment
0 1 1 1 0 170% binary code output) is connected
0 1 1 0 1 180% to the operation board, and used
0 1 1 0 0 190% between 0 and 200%.
0 1 0 1 1 200%
0 1 0 1 0 210%
0 1 0 0 1 220%
0 1 0 0 0 230%
0 0 1 1 1 240% If *FV1 to *FV16 are all OFF, the
0 0 1 1 0 250% previous value will be maintained.
0 0 1 0 1 260% The value will change to 0% when
0 0 1 0 0 270% the power is turned OFF.
0 0 0 1 1 280%
0 0 0 1 0 290%
0 0 0 0 1 300%
[Related signals]
(1) Override cancel (OVC: YC58)
(2) 2nd cutting feedrate override valid (FV2E: YC66)
(3) Cutting feedrate override method selection (FVS: YC67)
382
B Signal
2ND CUTTING FEEDRATE
- FV2E YC66 YDA6 YEE6 Y1026
OVERRIDE VALID
[Function]
Override normally exerted on cutting feedrate in automatic operation is within a range from 0% to 300%.
When this signal is used, another override (ranging from 0% to 327.67%) can be exerted on overridden
feedrate.
[Operation]
When the signal (FV2E) is ON, override can be exerted on feedrate previously overridden in code method
(*FV1 to 16), or file register method (by setting numerals manually). Applicable range of the 2nd override
is 0% to 327.6% (0.01% increment). Value (override ratio) is set to file register in binary code.
FV2E ON
Code method override (*FV1 to *FV16) 2nd override
×
File register method override
or
(File register)
OFF = True override
B Signal
CUTTING FEEDRATE
- OVERRIDE METHOD FVS YC67 YDA7 YEE7 Y1027
SELECTION
[Function]
When override is exerted on cutting feedrate in automatic operation, override method can be selected
between "code method" and "file register method".
[Operation]
When the signal (FVS) is OFF, code method (*FV1 to 16) is selected.
When the signal (FVS) is ON, file register method (value is specified by manual setting) is selected.
FVS
OFF: Code method
*FV1 to *FV16 (0 to 300%, 10% increment)
Cutting feedrate
(Fmm/min) × = True feedrate
File register (0 to 300%, 1% increment)
ON: File register method
(Note) For details of code method and file register method, refer to the relevant descriptions.
383
B Signal
RAPID TRAVERSE
- ROV1, 2 YC68, 9 YDA8, 9 YEE8, 9 Y1028, 9
OVERRIDE CODE 1,2
[Function]
This signal is used to exert override on rapid traverse speed set by parameter (for rapid traverse) in
automatic operation (memory, MDI or tape) or manual operation.
[Operation]
The true rapid traverse speed is that obtained by multiplying rapid traverse speed (set by parameter) by
override ratio specified by this signal.
This signal is invalid if the "Rapid traverse" signal (RT) is OFF during cutting feed during automatic
operation or during manual operation.
These signals (ROV1, 2) are set with the code method. The relation is shown below.
Rapid traverse
ROV2 ROV1
override
0 0 100%
0 1 50%
1 0 25%
1 1 1%
[Related signal]
(1) Rapid traverse override method selection (ROVS: YC6F)
B Signal
RAPID TRAVERSE
- OVERRIDE METHOD ROVS YC6F YDAF YEEF Y102F
SELECTION
[Function]
When speed override is exerted on rapid traverse speed specified in automatic operation or manual
operation, override method is selected between code method and file register method (manually set).
[Operation]
When the signal (ROVS) is OFF, code method (ROV1, 2) is used.
When the signal (ROVS) is ON, file register method is used.
ROVS
OFF: Code method
ROV1, 2 (1, 25, 50, 100%)
Rapid traverse speed True rapid
(parameter setting) × = Traverse speed
(Note) For details of "code method override" and "file register method", refer to the respective description.
384
B Signal
MANUAL FEEDRATE YC70 YDB0 YEF0 Y1030
* *JV1 to 16
CODE m to 4 to 4 to 4 to 4
[Function]
Feedrate in manual operation (JOG mode, incremental feed mode, etc.) or in dry run of automatic
operation (memory, MDI, tape) is selected.
[Operation]
This signal is valid in the following cases, but will be invalid when the "Rapid traverse" signal (RT) is ON.
(1) Jog mode, incremental mode or reference position return mode is ON.
(2) During cutting feed in automatic operation and "Dry run" signal (DRN) is ON.
(3) Dry run signal is ON during rapid traverse in the automatic operation. Note that parameter "#1085
G00 dry run" must be ON.
These signals (*JV1 to 16) are set with the code method. The relation is shown below.
Manual feedrate
Machine parameter set Machine parameter set
*JV16 *JV8 *JV4 *JV2 *JV1 in meters in inches
Metric mode Inch mode Metric mode Inch mode
(mm/min) (inch/min) (mm/min) (inch/min)
1 1 1 1 1 0.00 0.000 0.00 0.000
1 1 1 1 0 1.00 0.040 0.51 0.020
1 1 1 0 1 1.40 0.054 0.71 0.028
1 1 1 0 0 2.00 0.079 1.02 0.040
1 1 0 1 1 2.70 0.106 1.37 0.054
1 1 0 1 0 3.70 0.146 1.88 0.074
1 1 0 0 1 5.20 0.205 2.64 0.104
1 1 0 0 0 7.20 0.283 3.66 0.144
1 0 1 1 1 10.00 0.394 5.08 0.200
1 0 1 1 0 14.00 0.551 7.11 0.280
1 0 1 0 1 20.00 0.787 10.16 0.400
1 0 1 0 0 27.00 1.060 13.72 0.540
1 0 0 1 1 37.00 1.460 18.80 0.740
1 0 0 1 0 52.00 2.050 26.42 1.040
1 0 0 0 1 72.00 2.830 36.58 1.440
1 0 0 0 0 100.00 3.940 50.80 2.000
0 1 1 1 1 140.00 5.510 71.12 2.800
0 1 1 1 0 200.00 7.870 101.60 4.000
0 1 1 0 1 270.00 10.600 137.16 5.400
0 1 1 0 0 370.00 14.600 187.96 7.400
0 1 0 1 1 520.00 20.500 264.16 10.400
0 1 0 1 0 720.00 28.300 365.76 14.400
0 1 0 0 1 1000.00 39.400 508.00 20.000
0 1 0 0 0 1400.00 55.100 711.20 28.000
0 0 1 1 1 2000.00 78.700 990.60 39.000
0 0 1 1 0 2700.00 106.000 1371.60 54.000
0 0 1 0 1 3700.00 146.000 1879.60 74.000
0 0 1 0 0 5200.00 205.000 2641.60 104.000
0 0 0 1 1 7200.00 283.000 3657.60 144.000
0 0 0 1 0 10000.00 394.000 5080.00 200.000
0 0 0 0 1 14000.00 551.000 7112.00 280.000
If *JV 1 to *JV16 are all OFF, the previous value will be maintained. The value will be set to 0 when
the power is turned OFF.
(Note 1) In JOG mode, true feedrate changes if this signal changes during feed motion.
(Note 2) In incremental feed mode, true feedrate does not change if this signal changes during feed
motion.
[Related signals]
(1) Manual feedrate method selection (JVS:YC77)
(2) Manual override valid (OVSL:YC59)
385
B Signal
MANUAL FEEDRATE
- JVS YC77 YDB7 YEF7 Y1037
METHOD SELECTION
[Function]
When feedrate is specified in manual operation (JOG mode, incremental feed mode, etc.) or dry run
(automatic operation), feedrate command method is selected between code method and file register
method.
[Operation]
When the signal (JVS) is OFF, code method (*JV1 to *JV16) is selected.
When the signal (JVS) is ON, file register method is selected.
JVS
OFF: Code method
*JV1 to 16 (0 to 14000mm/min)
Feedrate in automatic operation or
dry run (automatic operation) =
File register (0 to 100000mm/min)
(Note) For details of "code method feedrate" and "file register method feedrate", refer to the relevant
description.
B Signal
FEEDRATE LEAST
- PCF1, 2 YC78, 9 YDB8, 9 YEF8, 9 Y1038, 9
INCREMENT CODE 1,2
[Function]
When manual feedrate is specified in file register method (JVS: "ON") or in arbitrary manual feed mode,
file registers R (R2504 and R2505) are used. In this case, least increment of feedrate entered into file
registers R2504 and R2505 is specified by this signal.
[Operation]
The relationship between PCF1/PCF2 and least feed increment is as follows:
Least increment
PCF2 PCF1 (mm/min or inch/min) Operation
0 0 10 10mm/min (inch/min) when "1" is set in file registers.
1 0 0.1 0.1mm/min (inch/min) when "1" is set in file registers.
386
B Signal
JOG HANDLE
- JHAN YC7B YDBB YEFB Y103B
SYNCHRONOUS
[Function]
Jog feed and handle feed can be carried out without changing the operation mode.
[Operation]
If the "Jog mode" (J) signal and this signal are input simultaneously, the "jog/handle synchronous mode"
will be entered.
If the "Rapid traverse" (RT) signal is turned ON during the "jog/handle synchronous mode", the jog feed
will be carried out at the rapid traverse feedrate. When the "Rapid traverse" turns OFF, the jog feed will
be carried out at the manual feedrate.
Operation Jog handle synchronous Rapid traverse Operation Handle

mode signal (YC7B) signal during jog feed feed
(YC26)
Jog feed On Rapid traverse feedrate Possible
On
Off Manual feedrate Possible
On Rapid traverse feedrate Impossible
Off
Off Manual feedrate Impossible
(1) During "jog/handle synchronous mode", jog feed and handle feed can be carried out randomly.
However, jog feed and handle feed cannot be carried out simultaneously on the same axis. If carried
out simultaneously, the jog feed will have a priority. The changeover between jog feed and handle
feed on the same axis is carried out when the relevant axis has stopped.
• If handle feed is carried out on an axis that is Handle pulses as this
being jog fed, the jog feed will have a priority, Jog feed section are ignored.
so after movement with jog feed has completed command
(the axis has stopped), handle feed movement
will start. Handle pulse
Axis
movement
Jog movement Handle movement
• If jog feed is carried out on an axis that is being
Handle pulses as this
handle fed, the handle feed movement will
section are ignored.
stop at the rising edge of the jog feed Jog feed
command. After the axis stops, the jog feed command
movement will start.
Handle pulse
Axis
movement
Jog movement Handle movement
(Note) If only the "Jog handle synchronous" signal is output, "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0101" will occur.
If the "Jog handle synchronous" signal is input simultaneously with an operation mode signal other
than the jog mode, the "Jog handle synchronous" signal will be ignored.
387
B Signal
EACH AXIS MANUAL
- YC7C YDBC YEFC Y103C
FEEDRATE B VALID
[Function]
This signal validates manual feed using each axis manual feedrate B.
[Operation]
(1) If this signal and the manual feedrate B valid signal for the corresponding axis are validated when
carrying out manual feed in the jog mode, the axis will move at the speed commanded by each axis
manual feedrate B which is commanded separately from the manual feedrate or manual feedrate B.
(2) This signal is common for all axes.
[Related signals]
(1) Manual feedrate B valid (Y940 to Y947)
(2) Each axis manual feedrate B (R5764 to R5779)
388
B Signal
MANUAL FEEDRATE B
- SURFACE SPEED YC7D YDBD YEFD Y103D
CONTROL VALID
[Function]
This signal validates manual federate B surface speed control.
[Operation]
It validates the manual feedrate B surface speed control for a rotary axis selected by the manual feedrate
B valid signal.
If "0" is set, it will be invalid.
This signal is common for all axes.
When machining by moving the orthogonal axis while rotating the rotary table with the manual feedrate B
surface speed control function, the tool nose and workpiece’s relative speed will drop as the tool nears
the rotation center if the table rotation speed remains under the set conditions.
The table rotation speed can be controlled according to the distance from the rotation center by validating
the manual feedrate B surface speed control.
As shown below, the distances (radiuses) from the rotation center to two points (R1 and R2) and the
rotary axis speed at the two points (R1 and R2) are set as parameters. When the "manual feedrate B
surface speed control valid" signal (YC7D) is turned ON, the rotary axis speed is calculated automatically
in accordance with a current radius.
Rotary axis speed (1) If R≤R1, then V1will be applied.
V1 (2) If R<R2, the speed V is calculated with
the following expression.
(V2 - V1)
V= *(R - R1)+V1
V2 (R2 - R1)
(1) (2) (3) (3) If R2≤R, then V2 will be applied.
R1 R2 Radius
Override can be applied in the range of 0 to 200% in respect to the rotary axis speed.
[Cautions]
(1) For a linear axis, the manual feedrate B surface speed control is not valid; however, the manual
feedrate B override is valid.
(2) When the power is turned ON, validate the manual feedrate B surface speed control after returning the
orthogonal axis to the reference position, establishing the coordinate system.
If the surface speed control is applied to the rotary axis without establishing the coordinate system, the
rotary axis moves at unexpected speed.
[Related signals]
(2) Manual feedrate B override (R2524)
389
B Signal
HANDLE/INCREMENTAL
- FEED MAGNIFICATION MP1 to 4
to 2 to 2 to 2 to 2
CODE m
[Function]
This signal is used to specify the magnification factor per pulse at the handle in HANDLE feed mode, or
the amount of feed motion per shot in incremental feed mode (±J1 to 8: "ON").
When the "handle/incremental feed magnification method selection" signal (MPS) is OFF, this
magnification is applied for the hand pulse from handy terminal.
[Operation]
This signal (MP1 to 4) is set with the code method.
The amount of feed motion (per pulse feed in handle feed mode, and per ON/OFF of ±Jn value in
incremental feed mode) is obtained by multiplying the original feed amount by MP1, MP2, MP4.
The relationship between multiplier code (MP1 to 4) and multiplication in each feed mode is as follows.
MP4 MP2 MP1 #1003 iunit: Other #1003 iunit: B,C

than B or C
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 10 10
0 1 0 100 100
0 1 1 1000 1000
1 0 0 1 5000
1 0 1 10 10000
1 1 0 100 50000
1 1 1 1000 100000
(Note) When parameter "#1003 iunit" is either "B" or "C", only a value 1000 or smaller can be set regardless of
MP4's ON/OFF status.
[Related signals]
(1) Handle mode (H: YC01)
(2) Incremental mode (S: YC02)
390
B Signal
MAGNIFICATION VALID
- YC86 YDC6 YF06 Y1046
FOR EACH HANDLE
This signal sets magnification per each handle when setting magnification of feed arbitrarily.
(1) When the signal is ON

When setting magnification of feed with an arbitrary value, magnification can be set per each handle.
When selecting magnification with code method, a common magnification of feed will be applied for
all handles.
Magnification of feed
Handle
File register method Code method
1st handle R2508,2509
2nd handle R2510,2511 YC80 to YC82
3rd handle R2512,2513
(1) When the signal is OFF

When setting magnification of feed with an arbitrary value, magnification of 1st handle/incremental
feed (R2508,9) will be applied for all handles.
When selecting magnification with code method, a common magnification of feed will be applied for
all handles.
[Related signals]
(2) Handle/incremental feed magnification code m (MP1, MP2, MP4: YC80, YC81, YC82)
391
B Signal
HANDLE/INCREMENTAL
- FEED MAGNIFICATION MPS YC87 YDC7 YF07 Y1047
METHOD SELECTION
[Function]
Feed magnification method in handle feed or incremental feed is selected between "code method" and
"file register method" by this signal.
[Operation]
When the signal (MPS) is OFF, "code feed magnification method" is selected.
When the signal (MPS) is ON, "file register magnification method" is selected.
MPS
OFF: Code method
Multiplier by MP1, MP2, MP4
Basic amount of feed (1μ) × = True amount
Multiplier by value set in file register of motion
(Note) For details of the motion corresponding to the code method or file register method, refer to the
relevant descriptions.
(2) 1st Handle/Incremental feed magnification (R2508, R2509)
B Signal
TOOL ESCAPE AND
- RETURN TRANSIT POINT YC8D YDCD YF0D Y104D
DESIGNATION
[Function]
With the tool escape and return function, a transit point can be designated by pressing the transit point
switch when tool escapes. The tool returns to the machining halted point, passing through the transit point
designated.
This signal turns ON when the transit point switch is pressed and turns OFF when recognition of the
transit point is completed.
[Operation]
Refer to the section on "In tool escape and return mode signal" (XC4A).
[Related signals]
(1) In tool escape and return mode (XC4A)
(2) Tool escape and return transit point recognition finish (XC87)
392
B Signal
REFERENCE POSITION
- ZSL1, 2 YC90, 1 YDD0, 1 YF10, 1 Y1050, 1
SELECTION CODE 1,2
[Function]
It is also possible to return to the n-th reference position in the manual reference position return mode.
This signal is used to select the number of the reference position (n) to return to. Normally both the
"reference position selection code" signals 1 and 2 are turned OFF, and 1st point reference position
return is performed.
[Operation]
"Reference position selection code" signal 1,2 is valid when:
(1) Reference position return mode is ON ("1").
(2) Manual start condition is held.
Reference position Reference position

Return position
selection code 2 selection code 1
0 0 1st reference position
0 1 2nd reference position
1 0 3rd reference position
1 1 4th reference position
(Note 1) Returning to the first reference position must be performed before returning to the second, third
or forth reference position.
Even when "Reference position selection code"

signal changes during axis movement, point
selected at start of motion is held.
Reference position return mode
Reference position selection code N-th reference position return request
No change
Manual start (Feed axis selection (+)/(-)) Goes to n-th reference position
In axis motion
N-th reference position reached
[Related signals]
(1) Reference position return mode (ZRN: YC04)
(2) Feed axis selection (+Jn: Y1D8, -Jn: Y900)
(3) N-th reference position reached (ZP11 to 48: X800 to X867)
393
B Signal
TOOL LENGTH
COMPENSATION ALONG
- THE TOOL AXIS YC92 YDD2 YF12 Y1052
COMPENSATION AMOUNT
CHANGE MODE
[Function]
This signal controls the tool length compensation along the tool axis compensation amount change mode.
[Operation]
(1) When the signal is ON:
When the handle is operated, only compensation amount of tool length compensation along the tool
axis will be changed. Handle interrupt function will be invalid.
(2) When the signal is OFF:
Compensation amount of tool length compensation along the tool axis cannot be changed by the
manual handle even during the tool length compensation along the tool axis mode.
[Related signals]
(1) Mechanical axis specifications 1st rotary axis angle (R2628, R2629)
B Signal
REFERENCE POSITION
- YC97 YDD7 YF17 Y1057
SELECTION METHOD
[Function]
This signal selects whether the reference position selection is common for all axes or independent for
each axis.
[Operation]
When this signal is OFF, the reference position selection is common for all axes, and ZSL1 and ZSL2 are
valid.
When this signal is ON, the reference position selection is independent for each axis, and "Each axis
reference position selection" is valid.
[Related signals]
(1) Reference position selection code 1,2 (ZSL1, 2: YC90, YC91)
(2) Each axis reference position selection (R2584)
394
B Signal
- 1ST AXIS SELECTION CX11 to 116
to 4 to 4 to 4 to 4
CODE m
[Function]
This signal specifies a number of the axis component to move in manual arbitrary feed mode.
Components of up to three axes can be moved simultaneously in manual arbitrary feed mode.
This signal is used to specify one of them.
[Operation]
(1) The "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m" (CX11 to CX116) must be set before strobe
signal CXS8 is turned ON. An attempt to set it during motion shall fail.
(2) Besides this signal (CX11 to CX116), there are two signals to specify a "Manual arbitrary feed 2nd
axis selection code m" (CX21 to CX216) and a "Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code m"
(CX31 to CX316). The axis numbers need not be specified in ascending order.
(3) The "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m" is validated by turning ON the "Manual arbitrary
feed 1st axis valid" (CX1S) signal explained later. Similarly, the "specific validity" signals (CX2S and
CX3S) are also provided for the 2nd and 3rd axis number signals.
(4) Axis numbers can be specified as follows:
n: 1 to 3
Signal
Axis CXnS — — CXn16 CXn8 CXn4 CXn2 CXn1
specification
1st axis 1 — — 0 0 0 0 1
2nd axis 1 — — 0 0 0 1 0
3rd axis 1 — — 0 0 0 1 1
4th axis 1 — — 0 0 1 0 0
Validity signal Axis number

(5) Motion of the specified axis component is as follows:
(a) The motion of the axis component specified by the "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code
m" signal corresponds to the contents of "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" (R2544 and
R2545).
(b) The motion of the axis component specified by the "Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code
m" signal corresponds to the contents of "Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis travel amount" (R2548
and R2549).
(c) The motion of the axis component specified by the "Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code
m" signal corresponds to the contents of "Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis travel amount" (R2552 and
R2553).
[Related signal]
For related signals, see the section "Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTP: YC03)."
395
B Signal
- CX1S YCA7 YDE7 YF27 Y1067
1ST AXIS VALID
[Function]
This signal is used to validate the axis specified by the "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m"
signal so that the axis component can move in manual arbitrary feed mode.
[Operation]
(1) The specification of the axis by the "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m" signal explained
earlier is validated only when the "CX1S" signal is turned ON.
[Related signal]
For related signal, see the section "Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTP: YC03)."
B Signal
- 2ND AXIS SELECTION CX21 to 216
to C to C to C to C
CODE m
See the descriptions on the "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m" signal (CX11 to CX116:
YCA0 to 4) explained above.
B Signal
- CX2S YCAF YDEF YF2F Y106F
2ND AXIS VALID
See the descriptions on the "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis valid" signal (CX1S: YCA7).
B Signal
- 3RD AXIS SELECTION CX31 to 316
to 4 to 4 to 4 to 4
CODE m
See the descriptions on the "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m" signal (CX11 to CX116:
YCA0 to 4) explained above.
B Signal
- CX3S YCB7 YDF7 YF37 Y1077
3RD AXIS VALID
See the descriptions on the "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis valid" signal (CX1S: YCA7).
396
B Signal
- CXS1 YCB8 YDF8 YF38 Y1078
SMOOTHING OFF
[Function]
This signal is used to move an axis component under the condition where the acceleration/ deceleration
time constant is 0 is manual arbitrary feed mode.
[Operation]
With the "Manual arbitrary feed smoothing off" (CXS1) signal set ON, axis motion in manual arbitrary feed
mode is performed under the same conditions as when the acceleration/deceleration time constant is set
to 0.
(Note 1) When using this signal to move an axis component under the condition where the
acceleration/deceleration time constant is 0, move it at a slow speed. Otherwise, a servo alarm
(excess error) may occur.
[Related signal]
For related signal, see the section "Manual arbitrary feed mode" (PTP: YC03) mode.
B Signal
- CXS2 YCB9 YDF9 YF39 Y1079
AXIS INDEPENDENT
[Function]
When moving two or more axis components simultaneously in "manual arbitrary feed" mode, this signal
can be used to position each axis independently without performing interpolation.
[Operation]
When a manual arbitrary feed is executed for two or more axes at the same time with CXS2 ON, each
axis is positioned independently without being subjected to interpolation.
The "CXS2" signal is generally used when the "Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1" signal (CXS4) explained
later is OFF (G0 selected).
The following is an example where the rapid traverse speeds of X-axis and Z-axis are both set to 9,600
mm/min, and the amounts of movement of X-axis and Z-axis are set to 300mm and 200mm respectively.
(Example 1)
Z-axis
Z-axis effective speed:
9600 mm/min
End point
fz
200 (Example 2) Z-axis effective speed:

Z-axis 6400 mm/min
End point fz
X-axis
300 Start point 200
fx
X-axis
X-axis effective speed: 9600 mm/min
Start point
300
fx
X-axis effective speed: 9600 mm/min
[Related signal]
397
B Signal
- CXS3 YCBA YDFA YF3A Y107A
EX. F/MODAL. F
[Function]
This signal selects whether a manual arbitrary feed in G1 mode is done at manual feed rate or at modal
speed in automatic operation.
[Operation]
When the "Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1" (CXS4) signal explained later is ON n, the "CXS3" signal works
as follows:
(1) When Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F (CXS3) is OFF:
When the "Manual feedrate method selection (JVS)" signal is OFF, the speed selected by the
manual feedrate code (*JV1 to 16) applies.
When the "Manual feedrate method selection (JVS)" signal is ON, the applicable speed is
determined by the relation between the contents of the corresponding file register (R) and the
"Feedrate least increment code 1,2" signal (PCF1 or PCF2).
(2) When Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F (CXS3) is ON:
Manual arbitrary feed is done at a modal speed (F***) set in automatic operation. However, manual
arbitrary feed will not be done, if no F command has been executed before.
Manual feedrate code *JV1~*JV16 Off EX. F/MODAL. F

JVS
Off
File register (R) × PCF1, PCF2 On
Moving speed
On
F command modal (F***)
[Related signal]
B Signal
- CXS4 YCBB YDFB YF3B Y107B
G0/G1
[Function]
This signal selects a manual feed speed or rapid traverse speed in manual arbitrary feed mode.
[Operation]
This signal operates as shown below depending on the status of the "Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1"
(CXS4) signal.
(1) When the "Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1" signal is OFF:
The rapid traverse speed originally set to the corresponding axis applies. Rapid traverse override is
also valid. The rapid traverse speed applicable when moving two or more axis components at the
same time varies with the status of the "Manual arbitrary feed axis independent (CXS2)" signal. See
the descriptions on the "Manual arbitrary feed axis independent (CXS2)" signal.
(2) When the "Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1" signal is ON:
The manual feed speed or the speed specified by the F command in automatic operation apply. For
details, see the description on the Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F (CXS3).
[Related signal]
398
B Signal
- CXS5 YCBC YDFC YF3C Y107C
MC/WK
[Function]
This signal selects a machine coordinate system or a modal workpiece coordinate system on which
positioning is done in manual arbitrary feed mode.
[Operation]
The "Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK (CXS5)" signal becomes valid when the "Manual arbitrary feed
ABS/INC (CXS6)" signal explained later is OFF in manual arbitrary feed mode.
(1) When the "Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK" signal is OFF:
"Manual arbitrary feed n-th axis travel amount" set in a file register (R) is used for positioning on the
machine coordinate system.
Amount of motion =
Manual arbitrary feed n-th travel amount - Coordinate value on machine coordinate system
(2) When the "Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK" signal is ON:
"Manual arbitrary feed n-th axis travel amount" set in a file register (R) is used for positioning on the
modal workpiece coordinate system.
Amount of motion =
Manual arbitrary feed n-th travel amount - Coordinate value on modal workpiece coordinate system
[Related signal]
B Signal
- CXS6 YCBD YDFD YF3D Y107D
ABS/INC
[Function]
This signal selects whether travel amount is given in an absolute value or incremental value for manual
arbitrary feed.
[Operation]
(1) When the "Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC" (CXS6) signal is OFF:
"Manual arbitrary feed n-th axis travel amount" set in a file register (R) is handled as an absolute
value. For details, see the descriptions on the "Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK (CXS5)" signal
explained before.
(2) When the "Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC" signal is ON:
"Manual arbitrary feed n-th axis travel amount" set in a file register (R) is handled as a real movement
value.
[Related signal]
399
B Signal
* *CXS7 YCBE YDFE YF3E Y107E
STOP
[Function]
This signal stops an ongoing axis component halfway in manual arbitrary feed mode.
The function of this signal is equivalent to those of the "Manual interlock+ n-th axis" (*+MITn) and "Manual
interlock- n-th axis" (*-MITn) signals.
[Operation]
Turning the "Manual arbitrary feed stop" signal (*CXS7) OFF (0) causes the following:
(1) Motion of axis in manual arbitrary feed mode is decelerated and stopped.
(2) The axis component which is going to move in manual arbitrary feed mode remains stopped.
When the "Manual arbitrary feed stop" (*CXS7) signal is turned ON (1) while an axis component is in
the stop state, it immediately restarts the operation.
(Note 1) When the power is turned ON, the "Manual arbitrary feed stop" (*CXS7) signal is automatically
set to "1". If the "Manual arbitrary feed stop" signal is not to be used, there is no need to make a
sequence program for it.
[Related signal]
For related signal, see the "Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTP: YC03)."
400
B Signal
- CXS8 YCBF YDFF YF3F Y107F
STROBE
[Function]
This signal is a trigger signal for moving an axis component in manual arbitrary feed mode. The axis
component starts moving at the rising edge of this signal.
[Operation]
The "Manual arbitrary feed strobe" signal (CXS8) should be turned ON after all signal values necessary
for manual arbitrary feed are set appropriately.
(1) The following signals must be appropriately set before turning ON the "Manual arbitrary feed strobe"
signal:
(a) Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTP)
(b) Manual arbitrary feed n-th axis selection code (CXn1 to CXn16) and manual arbitrary feed n-th
axis valid (CXnS)
(c) Manual arbitrary feed n-th axis travel amount (file registers R2544 to R2553)
(d) Manual arbitrary feed smoothing OFF (CXS1)
(e) Manual arbitrary feed axis independent (CXS2)
(f) Manual arbitrary feed EX.F/MODAL.F (CXS3)
(g) Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1 (CXS4)
(h) Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK (CXS5)
(i) Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC (CXS6)
(2) The following signals can be changed even after the "Manual arbitrary feed strobe" signal is turned
ON:
(j) Manual feed speed code m
(k) Rapid traverse override for a rapid traverse speed when the "Manual arbitrary feed G0/G1" signal
(CXS4) is OFF.
(l) Manual arbitrary feed stop (*CXS7)
(Note 1) The "Manual arbitrary feed strobe" signal can be accepted even when the "Manual arbitrary
feed stop" signal (*CXS7) is OFF (0).
The following shows a timing chart of an example of operation.

Manual arbitrary feed mode, etc.
((a) to (i)) above )
Manual arbitrary feed strobe (CXS8: YCBF)
Axis motion
Axis selected (Axn: X7A0)

Manual arbitrary feed stop (*CXS7: YCBE)
In manual arbitrary feed (CXN: XC16)
Manual arbitrary feed completion (CXFIN: XC1C)
(Note 2) The "Manual arbitrary feed strobe" signal (CXS8) must be ON for at least 100ms.
[Related signals]
Signals listed in (a) to (l) above
401
B Signal
- CURRENT LIMIT MODE 1 ILM1 YCC0 YE00 YF40 Y1080
- CURRENT LIMIT MODE 2 ILM2 YCC1 YE01 YF41 Y1081
[Function]
This signal selects process of current limit reached.
[Operation]
When the current reaches its limit during current control, the "current limit reached" signal will be output,
and the following mode will be selected and performed.
Current limit mode 2 Current limit mode 1 Mode
0 0 Normal
0 1 Interlock
1 0 Normal
1 1 Normal
(1) Normal mode

Movement command is executed in the current state.
In automatic operation, the movement command is executed to the end and moves to the next block
with droops accumulated.
(2) Interlock mode
Movement command is blocked (internal interlock).
In automatic operation, the operation stops at the corresponding block and does not move to the next
block.
In manual operation, the subsequent commands to the same direction will be ignored.
[Related signals]
(1) In current limit n-th axis (ILI1 to 8: X900 to X907)
(2) Current limit reached n-th axis (ILA1 to 8: X920 to X927)
(3) Current limit changeover n-th axis (ILC1 to 8: Y9A0 to Y9A7)
(4) Droop release request n-th axis (DOR1 to 8: Y9C0 to Y9C7)
402
B Signal
LOAD MONITOR
- LDWT YCC3 YE03 YF43 Y1083
EXECUTION
[Function]
Teaching and monitoring is executed.
[Operation]
The teaching or monitor mode is valid from the point that this signal turns ON during automatic operation.
Whether to carry out teaching or monitoring follows the teaching mode and monitor mode input signal.
The teaching and monitor mode is invalidated at the point this signal turns OFF.
[Caution]
Select the teaching mode or monitor mode before turning this signal ON.
This signal will not be validated if the teaching mode or monitor mode is not selected.
[Related signals]
(3) Load monitor Teaching mode, Monitor mode, Alarm reset, Warning reset (YCC4 to YCC7)
(R2580 to R2582)
B Signal
LOAD MONITOR
- YCC4 YE04 YF44 Y1084
TEACHING MODE
[Function]
The teaching mode is selected.
[Operation]
Turn this signal ON to select the teaching mode.
The teaching mode is actually validated when this signal turns ON and then the teaching/monitor valid
signal turns ON.
[Caution]
Do not turn the monitor mode input signal ON when turning this signal ON.
[Related signals]
(3) Load monitor Execution, Monitor mode, Alarm reset, Warning reset (YCC3, YCC5 to YCC7)
(R2580 to R2582)
403
B Signal
LOAD MONITOR
- YCC5 YE05 YF45 Y1085
MONITOR MODE
[Function]
The monitor mode is selected.
[Operation]
Turn this signal ON to select the monitor mode.
The monitor mode is actually validated when this signal turns ON and then the teaching/monitor valid
signal turns ON.
[Caution]
Do not turn the teaching mode input signal ON when turning this signal ON.
[Related signals]
(3) Load monitor Execution, Teaching mode, Alarm reset, Warning reset (YCC3, YCC4, YCC6, YCC7)
(R2580 to R2582)
B Signal
LOAD MONITOR
- YCC6 YE06 YF46 Y1086
ALARM RESET
[Function]
This signal resets the alarm signal.
[Operation]
If this signal is turned ON when the alarm axis and data alarm information bit are ON, each alarm bit will
turn OFF.
The warning information is reset simultaneously.
[Caution]
This signal is used to clear the alarm information and does not affect the other operations.
[Related signals]
(3) Load monitor Execution, Teaching mode, Monitor mode, Warning reset (YCC3 to YCC5, YCC7)
(R2580 to R2582)
404
B Signal
LOAD MONITOR
- YCC7 YE07 YF47 Y1087
WARNING RESET
[Function]
The warning signal is reset.
[Operation]
If this signal is turned ON when the warning axis information bit is ON, each warning bit will turn OFF.
[Caution]
This signal does not clear the alarm information.
[Related signals]
(3) Load monitor Execution, Teaching mode, Monitor mode, Alarm reset (YCC3 to YCC6)
(R2580 to R2582)
B Signal
2ND REFERENCE
* POSITION RETURN *ZRIT YCC8 YE08 YF48 Y1088
INTERLOCK
[Function]
The axis is interlocked at a designated position during manual 2nd reference position return.
[Operation]
During 2nd reference point return while this signal is valid (base specification parameter "#1505 ckref2" is
"1"), if this signal turns OFF, movement of axes that have reached the designated position will stop, and
an interlock will be applied. Axes that have not reached the designated position will be interlocked after
reaching the designated position.
When this signal is ON, the axis movement will not stop, and the 2nd reference position return will
continue.
B Signal
ADAPTIVE CONTROL
- YCC9 YE09 YF49 Y1089
EXECUTION
[Function]
This signal is input to execute adaptive control.
[Operation]
Adaptive control will start if this signal is turned ON during load monitor execution.
[Related signals]
405
B Signal
HIGH-SPEED RETRACT
- YCCC YE0C YF4C Y108C
FUNCTION VALID
[Function]
When executing a fixed cycle, the axis will be retracted at a high-speed from the bottom of the hole.
[Operation]
If the fixed cycle program (G81/G82/G83/G73) is executed while this signal is ON, the axis will be
retracted at a high-speed from the bottom of the hole.
[Caution]
High-speed retract will not be executed even if this signal is turned ON during the fixed cycle. Always turn
the signal ON before the fixed cycle command, and hold the state until the fixed cycle command is
completed.
[Related signals]
(1) High-speed retract function valid state (XCC2)
(2) In high-speed retract function operation (XCC3)
B Signal
- WAITING IGNORE YCD0 YE10 YF50 Y1090
[Function]
This signal is used to designate whether to execute the waiting between part systems by M code or not.
[Operation]
1: The waiting by M code is not executed. The M code to execute waiting commanded during the
machining program is ignored.
0: The waiting by M code is executed. If the M code to execute waiting is commanded in one part
system, the execution of the next block starts after the same M code is commanded in the other part
system.
(Note 1) With the M code for waiting, the code signal and strobe signal are not output differently from the
other M code.
(Note 2) The M code during the machining program can be ignored with the "Waiting ignore" signal. The
operation is possible only in the single part system without deleting the M code during the
machining program.
406
B Signal
SPINDLE-SPINDLE
- YCD1 YE11 YF51 Y1091
POLYGON CANCEL
[Function]
Spindle-spindle polygon machining is canceled.
[Operation]
If this signal is input during spindle-spindle polygon, the spindle-spindle polygon machining mode will be
canceled.
[Related signals]
(2) Spindle-spindle polygon synchronization completion (XCB3)
407
B Signal
SYNCHRONOUS TAPPING
- COMMAND POLARITY YCD2 YE12 YF52 Y1092
REVERSAL
[Function]
Designate whether to rotate the spindle in reverse during synchronous tapping.
[Operation]
When the "Synchronous tapping command polarity reversal" signal is ON, the spindle will rotate in
reverse during synchronous tapping.
T command
Command
polarity reversal
Synchronous
tapping
Command to
spindle
Basically, the reverse run The spindle will not rotate The spindle will not return to
command signal is input in reverse even if turned forward run even if turned
simultaneously with the T ON during synchronous OFF during synchronous
command tapping tapping
B Signal
- SPINDLE OFF MODE YCD3 YE13 YF53 Y1093
[Function]
This function is used to check the program by moving the machine without rotating the spindle.
[Operation]
(1) Synchronized tapping mode
When the spindle OFF mode is turned ON, the spindle will not rotate even if the servo is turned ON.
During the synchronized tapping mode, the operation up to when the synchronized tapping mode
turns OFF will not change even if the spindle OFF mode is changed.
This signal should be ON from the start of operation.
(2) Asynchronous tapping mode
(a) During synchronous (per revolution) feed
In addition to M03, M04 processing and dry run signal, turn the spindle OFF mode ON.
The program will advance when the signal is turned ON.
(b) During asynchronous feed (per minute) feed
The program will advance even if the spindle OFF mode is not turned ON.
408
B Signal
- BARRIER VALID (LEFT) YCD8 YE18 YF58 Y1098
B Signal
- BARRIER VALID (RIGHT) YCD9 YE19 YF59 Y1099
[Function]
This signal is used to validate the left (right) barrier range for the chuck/tailstock barrier function.
[Operation]
The chuck/tailstock barrier function's barrier range is validated when this signal turns ON. If the tool nose
attempts to enter the range, an error will occur.
Note that to validate the barrier function, this signal must be ON, and the parameter "#8310 Barrier ON"
must be set to "1", and "#8315 BARRIER TYPE (L)" ("#8316 BARRIER TYPE (R)") must not be set to "0"
on the BARRIER screen. (Excluding when using a special display unit.)
The barrier range validity can also be changed with the G22/G23 command instead of this signal input. In
this case, the left and right settings will change simultaneously. (There are some systems with which
G22/G23 cannot be commanded because of the selected G code system.)
B Signal
TOOL PRESETTER
- YCDA YE1A YF5A Y109A
SUB-SIDE VALID
[Function]
Select whether to measure the tool compensation amount on the main spindle side or sub-spindle side.
[Operation]
OFF: The tool compensation No. is acquired from the main spindle side R registers used for the setting
of compensation No.
ON: The tool compensation No. is acquired from the sub spindle side R registers used for the setting of
compensation No.
409
B Signal
- DOOR OPEN II YCE1 YE21 YF61 Y10A1
[Function]
This signal stops all axes, and cuts OFF contactor power.
[Operation]
The NC carries out the following operations when the "Door open II" signal turns ON.
(1) A deceleration stop is carried out for all axes (servo axes and spindles). (Axis interlock)
(2) After all axes stop, the contactor power of each drive unit is cut OFF. The "Servo ready completion"
signal (SA) does not turn OFF.
(3) The "Door open enable" signal turns ON.
The NC carries out the following operations when the "Door open II" signal turns OFF.
(1) A ready ON and servo ON state occurs for all axes.
(2) The "Door open enable" signal turns OFF.
[Cautions]
Set so a "Door open" signal is output to the NC after the PLC axis is stopped by the PLC.
If a "Door open" signal is input without stopping the PLC axis, the axis will stop with a dynamic brake
The remaining distance will be held in the R register being used in the PLC axis control.

opening the door.

[Related signal]
B Signal
DOOR OPEN SIGNAL
- INPUT YCE2 YE22 YF62 Y10A2
(spindle speed monitor)
[Function]
This signal informs the door open or close state to the spindle drive unit with the spindle speed monitor
function.
[Operation]
"1" is entered in the door open state.
The compatibility check of this signal and the door close signal connected with the spindle drive unit is
performed in the spindle drive unit.
If those signals are not compatible for continuous 3 seconds, the servo alarm (5D) will occur.
[Related signal]
410
B Signal
DOOR INTERLOCK
- YCE3 YE23 YF63 Y10A3
SPINDLE SPEED CLAMP
[Function]
This signal is used to change the spindle's clamp speed.
[Operation]
When the "Door interlock spindle speed clamp" signal is turned ON, the spindle rotation speed will be
limited by the set clamp speed value.
The relation of the "Door interlock spindle speed clamp" signal and the clamp speed parameter in each
operation is shown below.
Clamp speed parameter (spindle parameter)
Spindle operation Door interlock spindle Door interlock spindle
speed clamp OFF speed clamp ON
Orientation (multi-point orientation) #3205 SP005 #3315 SP115
Turret indexing #3312 SP112 #3211 SP011
Synchronized tapping
#3414 SP214 #3315 SP115
(zero point return)
Spindle C axis
#3349 SP149 #3315 SP115
(C axis zero point return)
[Cautions]
(1) This signal is valid only when the door interlock spindle clamp speed valid parameter "#1239 set11
BIT5" is set to "1".
(2) The clamp speed parameter setting value validated when the "Door interlock spindle speed clamp"
signal is ON must always be set smaller than the original clamp speed setting value (clamp speed
valid when signal is OFF). The clamp speed will change when the signal turns ON regardless of the
size of the parameter setting values.
(3) Do not change the state of the "Door interlock spindle speed clamp" signal during multi-point indexing.
The clamp speed will change if the signal state is changed during operation.
(4) Even if the "Door interlock spindle speed clamp" signal is changed during orientation, during zero
point return at synchronized tapping, or during reference position return after changing from the
spindle mode to the C axis mode under the spindle/C-axis control function, the clamp speed will not
change. The rotation speed is clamped by the clamp speed set with the signal state before each
operation is executed.
(5) The target for changing the clamp speed with the "Door interlock spindle speed clamp" signal differs
according to the "#1154 pdoor" setting and system configuration. The combinations are shown below.
#1154 pdoor No. of part

Door interlock spindle speed clamp
setting value systems
0 1 YCE3
0 2 YCE3
1 1 YCE3
1 2 YCE3
411
B Signal
- BARRIER CHECK INVALID BCHK YCF4 YE34 YF74 Y10B4
[Function]
This signal invalidates barriers of chuck barrier and tail stock barrier (G22).
[Operation]
When the signal is ON, it invalidates chuck barrier and tail stock barrier regardless of chuck barrier and
tail stock barrier command (G22/G23) ON/OFF in machining program.
B Signal
- DRY RUN INVALID DRNC YCFA YE3A YF7A Y10BA
[Function]
This signal invalidates dry run in dry run operation.
[Operation]
When the "dry run invalid (DRNC)" signal is ON, NC operates at designated speed, ignoring the dry run
function (DRN).
[Related signal]
Dry run (DRN: YC15)
412
B Signal
AUTOMATIC ERROR
- AUTED YCFB YE3B YF7B Y10BB
DETECTION
[Function]
By using the "Automatic error detection (AUTED)" signal, start timing of the next block is controlled until a
position error amount at corner becomes smaller than parameter value (corner deceleration check width).
With this function, a high-edge accurate machining will be achieved.
Control of start timing for the next block is performed when the result of corner angle calculation is smaller
than the parameter value (corner deceleration check angle).
[Operation]
When the "Automatic error detection (AUTED)" signal is ON, the following operation is performed.
<Corner angle calculation control>

Corner angle θ (inner angle) of consecutive cutting block is calculated. Only when the calculated angle is
smaller than the parameter value (corner deceleration check angle), the start timing of the next cutting
block is controlled. When the calculated angle is larger than the parameter value, the start timing is not
controlled.
N002
N002 N002
θ = 180° θ = 0°
N001 θ θ = 90°
N001 N001 N001
N002
<Start timing control>

It starts checking after deceleration for block in execution has started. When an error amount (combined
remaining distance) between the machine position of the target axis and the feedback machine position is
smaller than the parameter value (corner deceleration check width), the next cutting block will be started.
Servo
Command Position error amount < Parameter value
(Corner deceleration check width)
X axis Execution
block Position error amount = Machine position –
Feedback machine position
Next block
Z axis
Servo
Command
G01X_ G01Z_
(Note) When using the "Automatic error detection (AUTED)" signal, turn OFF the normal "Error detection
(ERD)". When the normal "Error detection (ERD)" signal is ON, the normal error detection will be
prioritized over the automatic error detection.
[Related signal]
Error detection (ERD: YC17)
413
B Signal
- GEAR SHIFT COMPLETION GFIN Y1885 Y18E5 Y1945 Y19A5 Y1A05 Y1A65
[Function]
This signal changes the spindle speed to the speed (S command) specified in the machining program.
This signal is used to smoothly perform the spindle speed (S command, etc.) control.
[Operation]
To change the spindle speed to the speed specified by the S command during automatic operation
(memory, MDI, or tape), it is needed to turn ON the "Gear shift completion" (GFIN), or "M function finish 1
(FIN1, FIN2)" signal.
S command + Spindle command speed Spindle
Rising edge of GFIN, FIN1, or FIN2
When using the "Gear shift completion" signal, the following two conditions should be considered:
• Whether gear shift (gear change) is applicable (whether there are two or more states of gear shift).
• Whether "Spindle up-to-speed" signal output from the spindle controller is used for verification of
spindle speed.
(Operation example 1) There is no gear shift and the "Spindle up-to-speed" signal is not used.
Command program S100 Next block
Spindle speed
(Operation example 2) There is no gear shift, but the "Spindle up-to-speed" signal is used.

(GFIN)
Spindle speed
414
(Operation example 3) There is gear shift, but the "Spindle up-to-speed" signal is not used.
Spindle gear shift

(GR1, GR2)
Spindle stop (SSTP)
Spindle gear shift (SSFT)
Spindle gear selection

code 1,2 (GI1, GI2)
Gear shift completion The same operation will be
(GFIN) executed even if gear shift
completion signal is not used.
Spindle speed
(Operation example 4) There is gear shift and "Spindle up-to-speed" signal are used.

Spindle gear shift
(GR1, GR2)
Spindle stop (SSTP)
Spindle gear shift (SSFT)

code 1,2 (GI1, GI2)

(GFIN)
Spindle speed
[Related signals]
(2) Spindle gear shift (GR1, GR2: X1885, X1886)
(3) M function finish (FIN1, FIN2: YC1E, YC1F)
(5) Spindle stop (SSTP: Y1894), Spindle gear shift (SSFT: Y1895)
415
B Signal
SPINDLE SPEED Y1888 Y18E8 Y1948 Y19A8 Y1A08 Y1A68
- SP1 to 4
OVERRIDE CODE m to A to A to A to A to A to A
[Function]
This signal applies override (multiplication) on the S command issued in the automatic operation (memory,
MDI, tape).
[Operation]
When "Spindle override method selection" (SPS) signal is OFF, this signal is valid.
By selecting "Spindle speed override code m" (SP1 to 4) signal, override ratio can be selected within
range from 50% to 120% (increment: 10%).
Override cannot be set when:
(1) "Spindle stop" signal is ON.
(2) TAP mode is selected.
(3) Thread cutting mode is selected.
This signal (SP1 to 4) is set with the code method. The relation is shown below.
SP4 SP2 SP1 Spindle override
1 1 1 50%
0 1 1 60%
0 1 0 70%
1 1 0 80%
1 0 0 90%
0 0 0 100%
0 0 1 110%
1 0 1 120%
[Related signal]
(1) Spindle override method selection (SPS: Y188F)
B Signal
SPINDLE OVERRIDE
- SPS Y188F Y18EF Y194F Y19AF Y1A0F Y1A6F
METHOD SELECTION
[Function]
When override is applied on the S command issued in automatic operation (memory, MDI or tape), "code
method" or "file register method" is selected for override method.
[Operation]
When the "Spindle override method selection" (SPS) is OFF, code method override (signal SP1 to 4 is
applicable) is selected.
When the "Spindle override method selection" (SPS) is ON, register method override (value set in file
register is applicable) is selected.
OFF: Code method
SP1 to SP4 (50 to 120%, 10% increment)
S command × SPS = Spindle speed
(Note 1) For details of "code method override" and "file register method override", refer to the respective
description.
416
B Signal
SPINDLE GEAR
- GI1, 2 Y1890, 1 Y18F0, 1 Y1950, 1 Y19B0, 1 Y1A10, 1 Y1A70, 1
SELECTION CODE 1,2
[Function]
This signal informs the controller which spindle gear has been selected on the machine side.
[Operation]
This signal is set according to the machine's spindle gear stage. The controller calculates the S command
data (data is transferred when the spindle controller is the high-speed serial connection specification)
based on this signal.
The flow after the S command is executed and output to the spindle is shown below.
S command Spindle speed output Calculation S command data Spindle
Spindle speed output

Spindle gear selection code 1,2 (GI1, GI2)
Spindle parameter (Slimt1 to 4, Smax1 to 4)
Spindle speed override code m (SP1 to SP4)
The relation of the gear stage, spindle gear selection code signal and spindle limit speed is as shown
below.
Spindle gear
Gear selection code signal Spindle speed
stage limit
GI2 GI1
1 0 0 Slimt1
2 0 1 Slimt2
3 1 0 Slimt3
4 1 1 Slimt4
(1) Slimt1 to 4 are set with parameters. The spindle speed for when the S command data is the max. (the
motor is run at the max. speed) is set.
This setting is used for each gear unit, and is determined by the deceleration ratio (gear ratio) of the
motor and spindle.
For example, if the max. motor speed is 6000 r/min, and the 1st gear stage is decelerated to half,
"3000" will be set in parameter Slimt1.
(2) The controller calculates the spindle speed output data as shown below.
For example, if S command is issued, gear selection input is the 2nd stage (GI1=ON, GI2=OFF),
spindle override value (%) is SOVR, and S command data's max. value is "10":
S command data = S command × SOVR × 10

Slimt2 100
(3) If S1300 is executed when using S command output (max. 10V), Slimt2 = "2000", and spindle
override "100%":
S command output = 1300 × 100 × 10 (V) = 6.5 (V)

2000 100
(4) The S command is clamped with the Smaxn (n=1 to 4).

If Smax2="1000" in the above state, the S command output will be:
S command output = 1000 × 100 × 10 (V) = 5.0 (V)

2000 100
417
B Signal
SPINDLE HOLDING FORCE
- EXOBS Y1893 Y18F3 Y1953 Y19B3 Y1A13 Y1A73
UP
[Function]
This signal is used to validate the disturbance observer of the spindle drive unit to increase the spindle
torque up.
[Operation]
(1) Confirm the spindle is stopped and turn this signal ON.
(2) Turning ON this signal validates the disturbance observer.
(3) When the spindle holding force gets high enough to execute the cutting, NC outputs the "In spindle
holding force up" (EXOFN) signal.
(4) To cancel the spindle holding force up, confirm the spindle is stopped and then turn this signal OFF.
[Related signals]
(1) In spindle holding force up (EXOFN: X18B5)
B Signal
- SPINDLE STOP SSTP Y1894 Y18F4 Y1954 Y19B4 Y1A14 Y1A74
[Function]
In spindle control, S command data (spindle speed) can be set to "0" by using this signal (SSTP).
Usually, the signal is not used alone, but combined with "Spindle gear shift" signal (SSFT) explained later.
[Operation]
When the signal (SSTP) is turned ON, S command data is set to "0". Analog data is restored when the
signal is turned OFF.
When "Spindle gear shift" (SSFT) signal turns ON while the signal is ON, S command data which
corresponds to speed set by the spindle speed parameter is output.
"Spindle speed override code m" (SP1 to 4) is ignored while the signal is ON.
418
B Signal
- SPINDLE GEAR SHIFT SSFT Y1895 Y18F5 Y1955 Y19B5 Y1A15 Y1A75
[Function]
This signal is used to run the spindle motor at low speed, when spindle gear is shifted, so that spindle
gear can be engaged smoothly.
[Operation]
When the signal (SSFT) turns ON, the S command data equivalent to the low speed previously set by
parameter is output.
If gears are not engaged properly, the signal is turned ON. It should be noted that "Spindle stop" (SSTP)
signal should be ON beforehand to use the signal (SSFT).
Spindle gear shift speed is selected by "Spindle gear selection code 1,2" input (GI1, GI2).
The relation is as follows:
Spindle gear
Gear selection code signal Spindle speed at Spindle speed
stage gear shift limit
GI2 GI1
1 0 0 Ssift1 Slimt1
2 0 1 Ssift2 Slimt2
3 1 0 Ssift3 Slimt3
4 1 1 Ssift4 Slimt4
S command data (spindle speed data) while "Spindle gear shift" (SSFT) signal is ON can be determined
from the formula shown below.
For example, if the gear selection is the 1st stage (GI1= OFF, GI2= OFF), and the S command data max.
value is "10":
S command data for gear shift = Ssift1 × 10

Slimt1
The spindle rotates as commanded by the "Spindle forward run start" or "Spindle reverse run start".
When the "Spindle gear shift" signal is turned ON without Z-phase detected, the spindle rotates with the
lower speed between the shift speed and the Z-phase detection speed.
419
B Signal
- SPINDLE ORIENTATION SORC Y1896 Y18F6 Y1956 Y19B6 Y1A16 Y1A76
[Function]
This signal is used to run the spindle motor at low speed when executing mechanical orientation during
spindle control.
<Supplement>
Since most spindle drive/control units recently marketed are equipped with oriented spindle stop function,
and therefore this signal is rarely used for mechanical orientation. The signal (SORC) can be used for
other application such as constant rotation.
[Operation]
When the signal (SORC) turns ON, spindle speed is changed to the low speed previously set by
parameter.
It should be noted that "Spindle stop" signal (SSTP) must be ON to use the signal (SORC).
Spindle gear shift data is selected by spindle gear selection code signal.
Gear selection
Gear code signal Spindle speed Oriented spindle
stage limit stop speed
GI2 GI1
1 0 0 Slimt1
2 0 1 Slimt2 SORI
3 1 0 Slimt3
4 1 1 Slimt4
Spindle speed data while "Spindle orientation" (SORC) signal is ON can be determined from the formula
shown below.
When "Spindle gear selection code" signal combination is GI2=0 and GI1=1 and maximum spindle speed
is 10, for example.
Oriented spindle stop speed data = SORI x 10

Slimt
420
B Signal
SPINDLE FORWARD RUN
- SRN Y1898 Y18F8 Y1958 Y19B8 Y1A18 Y1A78
START
[Function]
This signal is issued to the high speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive).
When the signal turns ON, the spindle motor starts rotating in normal direction (CCW as viewed from the
shaft side).
[Operation]
Spindle starts running at speed specified by S command (S command data) when the signal (SRN) is
turned ON.
When the signal is turned OFF, spindle motion decelerates and stops.
When the "Spindle forward run start" signal (SRN) is turned OFF during acceleration of spindle forward
rotation, the acceleration will be interrupted and the spindle will decelerate to stop immediately.
When the "Spindle forward run start" signal (SRN) is turned OFF during deceleration to stop of spindle
forward rotation, the spindle deceleration will be interrupted and the acceleration will start immediately.
Spindle forward run (SRN)

start
Spindle reverse run (SRI)

start
Variation at (Forward rot.)

spindle position
(Reverse rot.)
(1) Spindle decelerates to stop if "Spindle forward run start" signal (SRN) and "Spindle reverse run start"
signal (SRI) are turned ON at the same time. To resume forward run, both signals OFF once and then
turn the "Spindle forward run start" signal ON.
(2) The operation may stop during forward run due to emergency stop, spindle alarm or resetting. Turn
the forward run signal OFF and ON once after the "Servo ready completion" signal (SA) turns ON.
(3) The motor will not run if the S command data is 0. The motor will run at the corresponding rotation
speed when the S command data changes.
(4) When "Spindle orientation command" signal (ORC) is turned ON at the same as "Spindle forward run
start" signal (SRN) is turned ON, priority is given to the former signal.
(5) Servo ON command (SRV) of the spindle control input signal has to controlled at the NC side so that
it will turn ON when starting the spindle rotation and OFF when decelerating to stop.
[Related signals]
421
B Signal
SPINDLE REVERSE RUN
- SRI Y1899 Y18F9 Y1959 Y19B9 Y1A19 Y1A79
START
[Function]
This signal is issued to the high speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive).
When the signal turns ON, the spindle motor starts rotating in inverse direction (CW as viewed from the
shaft side).
[Operation]
Spindle starts running at speed specified by S command (S command data) when the signal (SRI) is
turned ON. (The operation with "Spindle reverse run start" (SRI) signal is the same as one with "Spindle
forward run start" (SRN) except for its rotation direction.)
When the signal is turned OFF, spindle motion decelerates and stops.
When the "Spindle reverse run" signal (SRI) is turned OFF during acceleration of spindle reverse rotation,
the acceleration will be interrupted and the spindle will decelerate to stop immediately.
When the "Spindle reverse run" signal (SRI) is turned OFF during deceleration to stop of spindle reverse
rotation, the spindle deceleration will be interrupted and the acceleration will start immediately.

start

start

spindle position
(Reverse rot.)
(1) Spindle decelerates to stop if "Spindle reverse run start" signal (SRI) and "Spindle forward run start"
signal (SRN) turn ON at the same time. To resume reverse run, both signals OFF once and then turn
the "Spindle reverse run start" signal ON.
(2) The operation may stop during reverse run due to emergency stop, spindle alarm or resetting. Turn
the reverse run signal OFF and ON once after the "Servo ready completion" signal (SA) turns ON.

start

start

spindle position
(Reverse rot.)
(3) The motor will not run if the S command data is 0. The motor will run at the corresponding rotation
speed when the S command data changes.
(4) When "Spindle orientation command" signal (ORC) is turned ON at the same time "Spindle reverse
run start" signal (SRI) is turned ON, priority is given to the former signal.
(5) Servo ON command (SRV) of the spindle control input signal has to controlled at the NC side so that it
will turn ON when starting the spindle rotation and OFF when decelerating to stop.
[Related signals]
422
B Signal
- SPINDLE TORQUE LIMIT 1 TL1 Y189A Y18FA Y195A Y19BA Y1A1A Y1A7A
SPINDLE TORQUE LIMIT 2 TL2 Y189B Y18FB Y195B Y19BB Y1A1B Y1A7B
[Function]
This signal is issued to the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive).
When the signal turns ON, spindle motor torque is reduced temporarily.
The signal is used in mechanical oriented spindle stop, or gear shift.
[Operation]
There are spindle torque limit 1 (TL1) and spindle torque limit 2 (TL2) signals.
Torque limit ratio is determined depending on the combination of spindle torque limit 1 (TL1) and 2 (TL2),
and the output torque will drop accordingly.
Signal Spindle torque Spindle torque

Note
Selection limit (TL1) limit (TL2)
Torque limit invalid 0 0
Torque limit 001 1 0 Limits with value of the spindle parameter SP065
002 0 1 Limits with value of the spindle parameter SP066
003 1 1 Limits with value of the spindle parameter SP067
(Example) When TL1=1,TL2=1 and SP067=50
Torque
Rated motor torque
100% Torque limit ratio when TL1=1 and

TL2=1 is 50%.
50%
Rotation speed
(Note 1) This signal is valid only for systems that are connected with the spindle controller via high-speed
serial interface.
423
B Signal
SPINDLE FORWARD RUN
- WRN Y189C Y18FC Y195C Y19BC Y1A1C Y1A7C
INDEX
[Function]
This signal is used for the spindle forward run index in multi-point indexing.
[Operation]
(1) Multi-point indexing
(a) This signal turns ON after the "Spindle in-position (ORAO)" signal is output.
(b) Continuous indexing can be carried out by turning this signal ON and OFF while the "Spindle
orientation command" (ORC) signal is ON.
(c) If this signal is turned ON before the "Spindle orientation command" (ORC) signal is turned ON and
the "Spindle in-position" (ORAO) signal is output, first the "Spindle orientation command" (ORC)
signal will turn ON, and the orientation will be completed at the multi-point orientation position data
(R7009) read in. Then, the spindle will be indexed to the position command value read in when this
signal is turned ON. If the position command value is the same when the "Spindle orientation
command" (ORC) turns ON and this signal turns ON, the indexing operation will not be carried out.
(d) The index position command value is read in at the rising edge of this signal. Thus, even if the
index position command value is changed after this signal is input, the stop position will not
change.
(e) Even if this signal is turned OFF while the "Spindle orientation command" (ORC) is ON, the spindle
will continue to stop at the position before this signal was turned OFF. Even if this signal is turned
OFF during the indexing operation, the spindle will stop at the position command value read at the
rising edge of this signal.
(f) If the stop point and index position command value are close (within the in-position range), the
"Spindle in-position" (ORAO) signal may not turn OFF and the indexing may be carried out.
(g) If the "Spindle orientation command" (ORC) signal is turned OFF during indexing or when stopped,
the servo lock will turn OFF and the motor will coast. Orientation must be carried out again when
executing indexing again.
Multi-point orientation
position data (index) (R7009)

(ORC)
Spindle in-position (ORAO)

t
Spindle forward run index
(WRN) t
Spindle speed waveform

Index stop Index stop
Orienting operation Indexing operation Indexing operation
T : 100ms or more
Orientation stop
424
[Indexing operation according to encoder installation direction]
Case 1 Case 2
Encoder Encoder
Installation
Belt Belt
method
Motor View A Motor View A
Forward run 0 Reverse run Forward run 0 Reverse run
2328H 6978H 6978H 2328H

Indexing (90°) (270°) (270°) (90°)
4650H 4650H
(180°) (180°)
Forward run 0 Reverse run Forward run 0 Reverse run
2328H 6978H 6978H 2328H

Orienting (90°) (270°) (270°) (90°)
4650H 4650H
(180°) (180°)
(Note) Case 1 above applies when using the motor built-in encoder with Z-phase.
[Related signals]
425
B Signal
SPINDLE REVERSE RUN
- WRI Y189D Y18FD Y195D Y19BD Y1A1D Y1A7D
INDEX
[Function]
This signal is used for the spindle reverse run index in multi-point indexing.
[Operation]
The operation is the same as forward run indexing, except that the direction is different. Refer to the
section on "Spindle forward run index".
[Related signal]
426
B Signal
SPINDLE ORIENTATION
- ORC Y189E Y18FE Y195E Y19BE Y1A1E Y1A7E
COMMAND
[Function]
This signal is issued to the high-speed serial connection specification spindle controller (spindle drive).
When the signal is turned ON, the spindle is indexed in position.
[Operation]
If the "Spindle orientation command" signal (ORC) turns ON during spindle rotation or when stopped, the
spindle will start orientation (stopping at set position). When positioning at the set position is completed,
the "Spindle in-position" signal (ORAO) will be output, and orientation will stop.
During oriented spindle stop, the control system is under "servo lock" condition. Servo lock is released
when the signal (ORC) is turned OFF. When servo lock must be maintained, the signal, therefore, should
be kept turned ON.
The encoder or magnetic sensor method can be used for orientation.
The orientation rotation direction is determined with the parameters.

The orientation stop position is determined by the Z-phase for the encoder method, and by the sensor
installation position for the magnetic sensor method. The stopping position can be changed with the
following items when using the encoder method.
(1) By parameters (position shift amount)
(2) By multi-point orientation position data (data specification by R7009) value
The multi-point orientation position data by the parameter and R7009 is added.
The timing chart for basic orientation is shown below.

(ORC)
Motor speed
Spindle in-position
(ORAO)
(Note 1) The "Spindle orientation command" (ORC) takes precedence over the forward run (SRN) and
reverse run (SRI) commands.
(Note 2) This signal is valid only for systems that are high-speed serial connected with the spindle
controller.
[Related signals]
(3) Spindle 2nd in-position (X1888)
427
B Signal
- L COIL SELECTION LRSL Y189F Y18FF Y195F Y19BF Y1A1F Y1A7F
[Function]
This signal is used to select the low-speed coil in the spindle coil changeover function.
[Operation]
The high-speed coil and low-speed coil are changed over only with the "L coil selection" (LRSL) in the
2-step coil changeover specification. The high-speed coil, middle- speed coil and low-speed coil are
changed over with the combination of the "L coil selection" (LRSL) and "M coil selection" (LRSM) in the
3-step coil changeover specification.
(Note) The coil is not changed over during the position loop control mode even if this signal is changed.
The coil selected immediately before the position loop control mode is entered is retained.

Selected coil L coil selection In L coil selection
(LRSL) (LCSA)
High-speed (H) OFF OFF
Low-speed (L) ON ON

Selected coil L coil selection M coil In L coil In M coil
(LRSL) selection selection selection
(LRSM) (LCSA) (MCSA)
ON ON ON ON
[Related signals]
428
B Signal
SPINDLE POSITION
- CONTROL (C AXIS) Y18A2, 3 Y1902, 3 Y1962, 3 Y19C2, 3 Y1A22, 3 Y1A82, 3
CUTTING GAIN L,H
[Function]
This signal selects whether to change the C axis gain (select optimum gain) according the C axis cutting
state.
During C axis cutting feed, cutting gain is applied. During other axis’ cutting feed (C axis face turning),
non-cutting stop gain is applied. Non-cutting gain is applied in all other cases.
[Operation]
Non-cutting gain
Non-cutting gain Cutting gain Cutting stop gain Non-cutting gain

Selected gain
G0 G1 G0
C axis command
X axis command G0 G1
(C axis part system)
Z axis command G1 G0 G1
(other part system)
(Note 1) The cutting feed of other part systems dose not affect the C axis gain selection.
(Note 2) There are 1st to 3rd cutting gains, which are selected with the ladder.
Signal
C axis C axis
Selected Remarks
gain L gain H
details
Selected during
Non-cutting gain – – Spindle parameter SP003 selection
rapid traverse
0 0
1st cutting gain Spindle parameter SP130 selection
1 1
Selected during
2nd cutting gain 1 0 Spindle parameter SP131 selection cutting feed
3rd cutting gain 0 1 Spindle parameter SP132 selection
Cutting stop gain – – Spindle parameter SP133 selection
429
B Signal
- M COIL SELECTION LRSM Y18A6 Y1906 Y1966 Y19C6 Y1A26 Y1A86
[Function]
This signal is used to select the middle-speed coil in the 3-step coil changeover specification of the
spindle coil changeover function.
[Operation]
The coil is selected depending on the combination of this signal and the "L coil selection" (LRSL).
(Note) The coil is not changed over during the position loop control mode even if this signal is changed.
The coil selected immediately before the position loop control mode is entered is retained.
Selected coil L coil selection M coil In L coil In M coil

(LRSL) selection selection selection
(LRSM) (LCSA) (MCSA)
ON ON ON ON
[Related signals]
430
B Signal
- SPINDLE SELECTION SWS Y18A8 Y1908 Y1968 Y19C8 Y1A28 Y1A88
[Function]
The spindle to which the S command for the spindle is output is selected when the multi-spindle control II
is valid.
0: Not select
1: Select
[Operation]
PLC side Spindle enable
Spindle command Spindle
selection selection Spindle rotation Spindle X18A0
Spindle rotation stop
speed input speed output 1st spindle
R7002 Y18A8
Y1894
R6500/6501 R7000/7001
PLC side X1900

2nd spindle
R7052 Y1908
Y18F4
S command $1
R6550/6551 R7050/7051
S command $2
S command $3 PLC side X1960
S command $4 3rd spindle
R7102 Y1968
Y1954
R6600/6601 R7100/7101
PLC side X19C0

4th spindle
R7152 Y19C8
Y19B4
R6650/6651 R7150/7151
PLC side X1A20

5th spindle
R7202 Y1A28
Y1A14
R6700/6701 R7200/7201
PLC side X1A80

6th spindle
R7252 Y1A88
Y1A74
R6750/6751 R7250/7251
Encoder selection
Encoder input $1
R2567
R2767
Encoder input $2
R2967
Encoder input $3
R3167
Encoder input $4
431
The S command for a spindle is output as the rotation speed command to the spindle which has been
selected by the "Spindle selection" signal (SWS) ON from the PLC. The selected spindle rotates at the
rotation speed which was output. The spindles which were deselected by the "Spindle selection" signal
(SWS) OFF continue to rotate at the same rotation speed as the speed immediately before their
de-selection. This allows each spindle to be rotated simultaneously at a different rotation speed. The
"Spindle command selection" signal is used to select which of the spindles is to receive the S command
from which part system.
[Related signals]
(3) Spindle enable (ENB: X18A0)
432
B Signal
- PLC COIL CHANGEOVER MPCSL Y18AF Y190F Y196F Y19CF Y1A2F Y1A8F
[Function]
When the coil changeover is the NC internal process, the coil changeover with the PLC signal can be
performed with this signal.
[Operation]
If the coil changeover is the NC internal process, the NC internal process selection is interrupted and
changed to the selection with the PLC signal when this signal is turned ON.
The coil changeover in the NC internal process and the coil changeover via the PLC are changed over
with the parameter #1239 set11/bit0.
0: Via PLC
1: NC internal process
(1) H/L coil changeover

• The L -> H coil changeover is changed over at the same time when the H coil selection is entered.
• The H -> L coil changeover is not changed over during the "Speed detection" signal (VRO) OFF even
if the L coil selection is entered.
The coil changeover is changed over after the "Speed detection" signal (SD) is turned ON.
(2) H/M/L coil changeover

• The L -> M coil changeover is changed over at the same time when the M coil selection is entered.
• The L -> H coil changeover is changed over at the same time when the H coil selection is entered.
• The M -> H coil changeover is changed over at the same time when the M coil selection is entered.
• The H -> M coil changeover is not changed over during the "Speed detection 2" signal (SD2) OFF
even if the M coil selection is entered.
The coil changeover is changed over after the "Speed detection 2" signal (SD2) is turned ON.
• The H -> L coil changeover is not changed over during the "Speed detection" signal (VRO) OFF even
The coil changeover is changed over after the "Speed detection" signal (VRO) is turned ON.
• The M -> L coil changeover is not changed over during the "Speed detection" signal (VRO) OFF even
The coil changeover is changed over after the "Speed detection" signal (VRO) is turned ON.
(Note) This signal must be turned ON after the "L coil selection" (LRSL)/ "M coil selection" (LRSM) signal
has been decided. The NC internal changeover process is entered when this signal is turned OFF,
so note the spindle rotation speed.
[Related signals]
433
B Signal
SPINDLE
- SPSY Y18B0
SYNCHRONIZATION
[Function]
The spindle synchronous control mode is entered by turning this signal ON.
[Operation]
The spindle synchronous control mode is entered by inputting the "Spindle synchronous control" signal
(SPSY). During the spindle synchronous control mode, the synchronous spindle is controlled in
synchronization with the rotation speed commanded for the basic spindle.
Set the basic spindle, synchronous spindle and rotation direction beforehand.
Device
Signal name Abbrev. Explanation
No.
R7016 Spindle synchronous – Select a serially connected spindle to be controlled as the
control basic spindle.
Basic spindle (0: 1st spindle), 1: 1st spindle, 2: 2nd spindle, 3: 3rd
selection spindle, 4: 4th spindle, 5: 5th spindle, 6: 6th spindle
(Note 1) Spindle synchronization control will not take place
if a spindle not connected in serial is selected.
(Note 2) If "0" is designated, the 1st spindle will be
controlled as the basic spindle.
R7017 Spindle synchronous – Select a serially connected spindle to be controlled as the
control synchronous spindle.
Synchronous spindle (0: 2nd spindle), 1: 1st spindle, 2: 2nd spindle, 3: 3rd
selection spindle, 4: 4th spindle, 5: 5th spindle, 6: 6th spindle
(Note 3) Spindle synchronization control will not take place
if a spindle not connected in serial is selected or if
the same spindle as the basic spindle is selected.
(Note 4) If "0" is designated, the 2nd spindle will be
controlled as the synchronous spindle.
Y18B2 Spindle synchronous – Designate the basic spindle and synchronous spindle
rotation direction rotation directions for spindle synchronization control.
0: The synchronous spindle rotates in the same direction
as the basic spindle.
1: The synchronous spindle rotates in the reverse direction
of the basic spindle.
[Related signals]
(3) Spindle synchronous rotation direction (SPSDR: Y18B2)
(6) Spindle synchronous control Basic spindle selection (R7016)
(7) Spindle synchronous control Synchronous spindle selection (R7017)
434
B Signal
SPINDLE PHASE
- SPPHS Y18B1
SYNCHRONIZATION
[Function]
Spindle phase synchronization starts this signal is turned ON during the spindle synchronous control
mode.
[Operation]
Spindle phase synchronization starts when the "Spindle phase synchronous control" signal (SPPHS) is
input during the spindle synchronous control mode. The "Spindle phase synchronization completion"
signal is output when the spindle phase synchronization attainment level setting value (#3051 spplv) is
reached.
(Note 1) This signal will be ignored even if it is turned ON during a mode other than the spindle
synchronous control mode.
Spindle synchronization (SPSY)
In spindle synchronization
(Note1)
(SPSYN1)
(FSPRV)
(SPPHS)

completion (FSPPH)

completion ON
Spindle phase synchronous Spindle phase
control ON synchronous
control OFF
synchronization completion ON Spindle synchronous control OFF
In spindle synchronous control OFF
In spindle synchronous control ON
(Note 1) This is turned OFF once to change the rotation speed during phase synchronization.
[Related signals]
(4) Spindle synchronous rotation direction (SPSDR: Y18B2)
(6) Spindle synchronization phase shift amount (R7018)
435
B Signal
SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS
- SPSDR Y18B2
ROTATION DIRECTION
[Function]
The synchronous spindle's rotation direction is designated with this signal. Select whether the direction is
the same as or the reverse of the basic spindle.
[Operation]
Designate the rotation direction for the basic spindle and synchronous spindle during spindle
synchronous control.
0: Synchronous spindle rotates in same direction as basic spindle.
1: Synchronous spindle rotates in reverse direction of basic spindle.
[Related signals]
(6) Spindle synchronization phase shift amount (R7018)
436
B Signal
PHASE SHIFT
- SSPHM Y18B3
CALCULATION REQUEST
[Function]
This signal calculates the phase error of the basic spindle during rotation synchronization, and requests
that it be saved in the NC memory.
[Operation]
The phase error of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle is saved in the NC memory when this
signal is ON and the rotation synchronization command's (with no R address command) spindle
synchronization is completed (when "Spindle rotation speed synchronization completion" signal is ON).
This signal turns ON when the spindle rotation is stopped before the rotation synchronization command.
Phase shift calculation

request (Y18B3)
Spindle synchronization
(Y18B0)
(X18A8)

(X18A9)
The phase error occurred in this interval is

saved.(Synchronous spindle can be controlled
with handle.)
Spindle synchronous Spindle synchronous
control ON control OFF
Phase shift calculation request ON Phase shift calculation request OFF
(Note 1) The phase cannot be aligned when calculating the phase shift.
(Note 2) If the handle mode is selected as the manual operation mode, the synchronous spindle cannot
be rotated with the handle.
[Related signals]
(3) Spindle synchronization Phase offset data (R6518)
437
B Signal
- PHASE OFFSET REQUEST SSPHF Y18B4
[Function]
This signal requests that the phase be aligned to the value obtained by adding the value commanded with
the phase synchronization command's R address to the phase error of the basic spindle and synchronous
spindle saved with the "Phase shift calculation request" signal (Y18B3).
[Operation]
If phase synchronization is commanded (with R address command) while this signal is ON, the basic
spindle and synchronous spindle phases will be aligned to attain the phase error obtained by adding the
value commanded with the R address command to the phase error of the basic spindle and synchronous
spindle saved in the NC memory.
[Related signals]
(3) Spindle synchronization Phase offset data (R6518)
438
B Signal
ERROR TEMPORARY
- SPDRPO Y18B5
CANCEL
[Function]
This signal cancels the error caused by the speed fluctuation when the chuck is closed.
When the chuck is closed, the speed will fluctuate due to external causes. An error will occur between the
basic spindle's position and the synchronous spindle's position due to this speed fluctuation. This signal is
used to cancel this error. (If spindle synchronization is attempted when closing the chuck without
canceling this error, torsion could occur.)
[Operation]
The error between the basic spindle's position and synchronous spindle's position is saved when this
signal changes from OFF to ON. The saved error is canceled and the spindle is synchronized while this
signal is ON. (Even if the chuck close signal is OFF, the error will be canceled while the "Error temporary
cancel" signal is ON.)
(Note 1) Turn this signal ON after the chucks on both the basic spindle side and synchronous spindle
side have closed and grasped the chuck.
(Note 2) Turn this signal OFF when the either the basic spindle side or synchronous spindle side chuck is
open.
(Example)
(1) Close the basic spindle side chuck.
(2) Start spindle synchronization (G114.1).
(3) Close the synchronous spindle side chuck.
(The speed will fluctuate due to external causes at this time, and an error will occur.)
(4) Using the "Chuck close confirmation" signal (SPCMP), check that the chucks are closed.
(5) Turn the "Error temporary cancel" signal (SPDRPO) ON, and cancel the error.
(6) Execute machining with spindle synchronous control.
(7) Open the chuck on the synchronous spindle side.
(8) Using the "Chuck close confirmation" signal (SPCMP), check that the chuck is opened.
(9) Turn the "Error temporary cancel" signal (SPDRPO) OFF, and stop the error cancellation.
[Related signals]
(4) Chuck close confirmation (SPCMP: X18AC)
(5) Chuck close (SPCMPC: Y18B9)
439
B Signal
SPINDLE
SYNCHRONIZATION/
- SPSYC Y18B8
SUPERIMPOSITION
CANCEL
[Function]
This signal is used to cancel the spindle synchronous control and spindle superimposition with the
G114.n command.
The spindle synchronous control with the "Spindle synchronization" (Y18B0) is not canceled.
[Operation]
The spindle synchronous control mode and spindle superimposition can be canceled by turning this
signal ON.
[Related signals]
(5) Spindle synchronization phase error 1 (R6522)
(6) Spindle synchronization phase error 2 (R6523)
440
B Signal
- CHUCK CLOSE SPCMPC Y18B9
[Function]
This signal is turned ON while the basic spindle and synchronous spindle clamp the same work.
[Operation]
The "Spindle chuck close confirmation" signal is turned ON when the "Chuck close" signal is ON.
The "Spindle chuck close confirmation" signal is turned OFF when the "Chuck close" signal is OFF.
Chuck open
Basic spindle chuck Chuck close Chuck close Chuck open
confirmation
Synchronous spindle chuck Chuck open Chuck close Chuck close Chuck close
confirmation
Spindle synchronization
(Y18B0)
(X18A8)
(X18A9)
Chuck close
(Y18B9)
Error temporary cancel
(Y18B5)
In error cancel
(Note) Use the "Error temporary cancel" only when the rotation error between the basic spindle and
synchronous spindle occurs because of the "Chuck close" signal.
[Related signals]
(1) "Chuck close confirmation" signal (SPCMP: X18AC)
441
B Signal
POSITION SWITCH n Y1D00 Y1D20 Y1D40 Y1D60
-
INTERLOCK to 17 to 37 to 57 to 77
[Function]
An interlock is applied on the axis when outside the position switch range, and movement of the axis
targeted by the position switch is prohibited.
[Operation]
When this signal turns ON and the axis targeted for the corresponding position switch is outside the range,
an interlock will be applied on the axis, and movement will be prohibited. Movement is possible within the
set range.
• Movement in interlock range

[For linear axis]
The axis can move only in the direction toward the position switch range.
If a command is issued in the direction that moves away from the position switch range, "M01
OPERATION ERROR 0004 *" (* is axis name) will occur.
[For rotary axis]
If axis movement is commanded in the interlock state, "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0004 *" (* is axis
name) will occur. To move the axis, turn the "Position switch interlock" signal input OFF and cancel the
interlock state. Note that even if the axis is moved away from the position switch range in this state, the
interlock will not be applied.
• Coasting distance
The coasting distance when outside the position switch range by axis movement depends on the
commanded speed and parameter setting.
[Coasting distance for position switch interlock]
Pcheck <check> Coasting distance
The acceleration/deceleration delay is added to the movement distance

0 0
within the commanded speed × 0.060 [s] or less.
Same as the above distance. (When Pcheck is 0, the <check> setting is
0 1
invalid.)
Within commanded speed × 0.015 [s] or less (During manual mode,
1 0
commanded speed × 0.030 [s] or less)
Acceleration/deceleration delay or position loop gain delay is added to
1 1
above distance.
[Cautions]
(1) When moving from the set range to outside the range, the coasting distance up to when the axis
stops will differ according to the position switch method.
(2) The position switch interlock is invalid for a reference position return incomplete axis (incremental
specifications) absolute position initialization incomplete axis and an axis for which absolute position
initialization is being carried out.
(3) The position switch range is judged with the machine coordinate system. Thus, the inclined axis is
judged with the oblique (actual axis).
If the basic axis moves with a command issued for the inclined axis, the axis interlock will not be
applied even if the basic axis moves out of the position switch range. (The interlock is valid only for
the commanded axis.)
[Related signal]
(1) Position switch (PSW1 to 24: X1D00 to X1D17)
442
B Signal
- ANALOG OUTPUT m AOn R200 to 7
[Function]
An analog voltage can be output from the designated connector pins (see below) on the remote I/O unit
DX120/DX121 by setting designated data in the file registers.
[Operation]
"Analog voltage" signal (for speed control) can be output by setting signed binary data to the
corresponding file register.
The analog output interface is explained below.
Channel File Remote I/O unit DX120/DX121 output destination

register (R)
A01 R200 Channel setting switch is set to 1st card B04, A04 (Common)
A02 R201 Channel setting switch is set to 3rd card B04, A04 (Common)
A03 R202 Channel setting switch is set to 5th card B04, A04 (Common)
A04 R203 Channel setting switch is set to 7th card B04, A04 (Common)
<Relation of file register details and analog output voltage>

Analog output (V) Output voltage : -10V to +10V (±5%)
Resolution : 212 (1/4095) x Fullscal
Load conditions : 10kohm resistance load
10 (standard)
Output impedance : 220ohm
-4095 -1000 0
File register details
4095
-2.44
10
-1000
Output voltage = x 10V = -2.44V
4095
<Relation of file register details and output voltage>

The output voltage is
Rn n = 100 to 103
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 27 26 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 0 When -1000
(FC18 with hexadecimal)
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
The data is input as binary coded data.
443
B Signal
- DISPLAYED SCREEN NO. R210
The No. of the screen displayed by the screen change key is registered.
The following table shows the screen change keys and the corresponding Nos. to be registered.
Displayed screen No.

Screen change key
to be set in the R register
MONITOR
(MONITOR) Monitor 1
SET UP
(SETUP) Setup 2
EDIT
(EDIT) Edit 3
DIAGN
(DIAGN) Diagnosis 4
MAINTE
(MAINTE) Maintenance 5
SFP 9
F0 10
Window display 13
?
Window selection 14
[Caution]
(1) This register is not retained after the power OFF. The data is initialized to "0" at the power ON.
(2) The displayed screen No. is not set in this register when the PLC onboard or the custom application
(EXE) is closed without the screen change keys (with [×], [Close] buttons and so on). When the
standard screen is displayed in the forefront after the application has been closed, the displayed
screen No. on the standard screen is set in this register.
444
B Signal
- KEY OUT 1 R212
[Function]
When this signal is used, key data can be entered on the user PLC side instead of the CNC keyboard.
[Operation]
(1) KEY IN 1
R8
(2)
For monitor
User
(3) PLC
(4) R212
Key data processing
(CNC) KEY OUT 1
(1) Key data is set to file registers R8 and R212 at the head of user PLC main program.
(2) The user PLC refers to the key data, and performs required processing.
(3) The user PLC sets the key data which meets the keyboard currently in use to register R212.
(4) The controller processes the effective key data after the main program of user PLC has been
processed, referring to the settings of R8 and R212.
[Related signal]
(1) KEY IN 1 (R8)
445
B Signal
POWER OFF INDICATION
- R215
Y DEVICE NO.
This signal sets the Y device to notify the control unit's power OFF.
The setting range is 0 to 5FF(HEX).
Set the Y device No. taking the hardware configuration into consideration.
Designate binary data for Y device No.
When a Y device No. outside the setting range is set, this signal will not be output to the Y device.
Refer to the "Automatic power OFF request" signal (Y75D) for details.
[Related signals]
(1) Power OFF processing (X707)
(2) Automatic power OFF request (Y75D)
446
B Signal
USER SEQUENCE
- PROGRAM VERSION R224 to 7
CODE
[Function]
The user sequence program version can be displayed with the software version that controls the other
controller on the setting and display unit (communication terminal) DIAGNOSIS screen.
[Operation]
Characters to be displayed are placed in ASCII code.
<Display format>
PLCu BND − W −
, : Alphabet is used.
: Numeric is used.
Version code ("A0" for 1st version)

: Renewed at major revision A to Z
(I and O should not be used.)
: Renewed at minor revision 0 to 9
: Renewed at supplemental revision A to Z
(I and O should not be used.)
3 digits can be used (no restriction).
4 digits can be used (no restriction).
BND − 1 2 3 4 W 5 6 7 − A 0 B
R224 ……... [Set to "B" in ASCII code (42) for the

high-order side
Set to "FF" code for the low-order side]
R225 ……... [Set to "A0" in ASCII code]
R226 ……... [Set to 567 in binary notation]
R227 ……... [Set to 1234 in binary notation]
(Program example)
ACT
MOV H42FF R224
"FF" (Fixed)
Always set to "FF" when displaying 2 digits
MOV H4130 R225
"0"
"A"
MOV K567 R226
MOV H1234 R227
Always turn ON at the first scan of the user PLC (constant also possible)
447
B Signal
USER SEQUENCE
- PROGRAM VERSION R232 to 9
CODE 2
[Function]
This signal enables the user sequence program version to be displayed, together with the software
version controlling another control unit, in the DIAGNOSIS screen of the setting display unit
(communication terminal).
[Operation]
The ASCII code that corresponds to the character to be displayed in the version display interface is set.
<Display format and usage example>
PLCu : Random alphanumeric

Total of 14 characters characters are used.
PLCu 6 L 8 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 "HIGH" side of R*

"LOW" side of R*
R232 ········· (38 39)

R233 ········· (36 37)
R234 ········· (34 35)
R235 ········· (32 33)
R236 ········· (30 31)
R237 ········· (38 34)
R238 ········· (36 4C)
Interface
ASCII code
(Program example)
ACT
DMOV H36 37 38 39 R232
DMOV H32 33 34 35 R234
DMOV H38 34 30 31 R236
MOV H36 4C R238
Always turn ON at the 1st scan of the user PLC.

(Can be left ON constantly.)
448
B Signal
- APLC VERSION R240 to 3
[Function]
This signal indicates APLC software version.
[Operation]
File register R240 to R243 is as the following data.
R240 to R243 is as the following data.

(Example) BND-1003W400-A0B
(1) (2) (3)
Item File register Type Example

(1) Model function No. R240 Binary 1003=03EBH
(2) Serial No. R241 Binary 400=0190H
(3) Version Bits 7 to 0 of R242 ASCII code A=41H
Bits F to 8 of R242 ASCII code (Note1) 0=30H
Bits 7 to 0 of R243 ASCII code (Note1) B=42H
- - Bits F to 8 of R243 Always FFH (Note2) FFH
(Note1) If the version is 1-digit No., set the version in bits 7 to 0 of R242, and set "00H" in bits F to 8 of
R242 and bits 7 to 0 of R243.
(Note2) Always set "FFH" in bits F to 8 of R243. If not, it will not be displayed correctly.
B Signal
- OT IGNORED R248, 9
[Function]
When this signal is used, "stroke end error" can be avoided without eternal wiring for stroke end signal
(remote I/O connector pin No. fixed signal) provided for each axis. "Stroke end" signal on axis for which
the "OT ignored" signal is set can be used for other purpose.
[Operation]
"Stroke end error" signal associated with a specific axis motion can be ignored.
The interface for this signal is as follows:
File register (R) F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
1st axis OT ignored

:
:
8th axis OT ignored
(Note 1) The signal is applicable to (+) and (-) motion at the same time (ignored when "ON").
(Note 2) "OT" is abbreviation of "Over Travel".
449
B Signal
NEAR-POINT DOG
- R272, 3
IGNORED
[Function]
When this signal is used, "Near point detection" signal (remote I/O connector pin No. fixed signal) which is
used for dog type reference position return can be ignored (dog not-passed state).
Furthermore, the "Near point detection" signal for an axis to which the "Near-point ignored" signal is set
can be used for other applications.
[Operation]
When the signal is turned ON, "Near point detection" signal for the corresponding control axis can be
ignored.
The interface is shown below:
File register (R) F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
1st near-point ignored

:
:
8th near-point ignored
450
B Signal
- SPEED MONITOR MODE SOMD R296
[Function]
This signal executes speed monitor function for the control axis for which a valid door No. is selected with
parameter "#2118 SscDrSel" and the spindle for which a valid door No. is selected with parameter "#3071
SscDrSelSp".
The door No. corresponds to the following bits.
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit
Door 1
Door 2
[Operation]
NC performs as follows by turning the speed monitor signal ON.
(1) Checks compatibility of speed monitor parameter
(2) Checks if NC's speed monitor parameter matches with the speed monitor parameter sent to servo
drive unit and spindle drive unit.
(3) Notifies speed monitor command to the drive unit
(4) Executes the speed monitor function on NC
(5) Turns ON speed monitor door open possible signal when NC receives the in speed monitor mode
signal from the drive unit
The followings are performed while the speed monitor function is executed.
Item Details
Monitoring command When a command speed NC outputs to the drive unit exceeds a safety speed set with
speed parameter, an emergency stop occurs.
Monitoring feed back When a motor rotation speed sent to NC from the drive unit exceeds a safety rotation
speed speed set with parameter, an emergency stop occurs.
Monitoring feed back When a difference between feedback position sent to NC from the drive unit and a
position position commanded by NC is large, an emergency stop occurs.
[Cautions]
(1) Be sure to turn ON the speed monitor mode signal (SOMD) after confirming deceleration of all axes.
If the speed monitor mode signal (SOMD) is turned ON without deceleration, and the motor rotation
speed exceeds the set speed, a speed monitor alarm will occur, resulting in an emergency stop state.
Then, power of the drive section will be shut off.
(2) Turn OFF the speed monitor mode signal after confirming the door lock is OFF.
(3) Even if the speed monitor mode signal (SOMD) is turned ON while parameter error is output, speed
monitoring is not initiated. Set the parameter with appropriate value, and then turn ON the speed
monitor mode signal (SOMD).
[Related signal]
(1) Speed monitor door open possible (SMDOEN: R96)
451
B Signal
HANDY TERMINAL
- R297
DATA AREA TOP ADDRESS
[Function]
Set the top address of the area in which data to be transmitted/received to/from the handy terminal is
stored.
[Operation]
Set the CNC side R register top address corresponding to the handy terminal side D0 to "Handy terminal
Data area top address (R297)", and set the number of registers to communicate into "Handy terminal
Data valid number of registers (R298)".
<Setting example>
The following is the setting value used for allocating the data from R9800 to R9849, the CNC side
user area, by using 50 registers from D0 to D49 in the handy terminal side.
"9800 (0x2648) for "Handy terminal Data area top address (R297)"
"50 (0x32) for "Handy terminal Data valid number of registers (R298)"
Image drawing of internal register
CNC control unit Handy terminal
RS232C
R297 Top addr ess = 9800 D0

R298 No. of valid registers=50 Data area for
transmission/
reception
with CNC
R9800 (D0-49)
Communication
Data area for
valid
transmission/ Valid size set in R298
reception with = 50 registers
handy terminal
D49
D50
(D50-1023)
Communication
invalid
R9849
R9850
D1023
452
[Related signal]
B Signal
HANDY TERMINAL DATA
- VALID NUMBER OF R298
REGISTERS
Set the number of valid registers from D0 within the handy terminal transmission/reception area (D0 to
1023).
With CNC, the range of handy terminal transmission/reception area is the number of registers set starting
from "Handy terminal Data area top address (R297)".
Refer to the section on "Handy terminal Data top address" for details.
[Related signal]
(7) 1st handle/incremental feed magnification (R2508,R2509)
453
B Signal
HANDY TERMINAL
- CAUSE OF R299
COMMUNICATION ERROR
For details on communication error, refer to the table below.
Hexadecimal (HEX) Decimal (DEC) Details

0000 0 No error
FFFE -2 Serial port in use
FFFC -4 Timeout terminated
FFF9 -7 Serial driver forcibly terminated
FFF6 -10 Serial driver not ready
(SIO cable is disconnected)
FFF1 -15 Parity error
FFEF -17 Number of received characters over
FFEC -20 Flaming error, H/W error
FC18 -1000 Handy terminal data area illegal
(Out of user area)
[Related signal]
454
B Signal
TOOL I/D R/W POT NO.
- R336
DESIGNATION
[Function]
Designate the number of the pot containing the tool No. of the information communicated with the tool ID
controller.
[Operation]
(1) Designate the pot No. to store the tool information tool No. read in from the tool ID controller.
(2) Designate the pot No. containing the tool No. to write the tool information to the tool ID controller.
(3) Designate the pot No. containing the tool No. of which tool information is to be erased.
[Caution]
Do not change the pot No. while communicating with the tool ID.
B Signal
LARGE DIAMETER TOOL
- R337
INFORMATION
[Function]
Information indicating whether the tool mounted on the spindle and standby tool are large diameter tools
or not is set. (H: Spindle, L: Standby tool)
[Operation]
When the tool mounted on the spindle or standby tool is changed, "1" is set if the tool is a large diameter
tool, and "0" is set if it is a normal tool, respectively.
If there is no tool mounted on the spindle or standby tool, H: spindle and L: standby tool will be cleared to
"0".
B Signal
TOOL WEIGHT (Spindle
- R338
tool)
[Function]
Weight of the tool mounted on the spindle is set.
[Operation]
When the tool mounted on the spindle is changed, the weight of the newly-mounted tool will be set.
If no tool is mounted on the spindle, this setting will be cleared to "0".
[Caution]
Unit: 0.1kg
455
B Signal
TOOL WEIGHT
- R339
(Standby tool)
[Function]
Weight of the standby tool is set.
[Operation]
When the standby tool is changed, the weight of newly-set standby tool will be set.
If there is no standby tool, this setting will be cleared to "0".
[Caution]
Unit: 0.1kg
B Signal
UNSET TOOL
- R340
INFORMATION
[Function]
(Note 1)
Information indicating whether the tool mounted on the spindle and standby tool are unset tools or
not is set. (H: Spindle, L: Standby tool)
[Operation]
When the tool mounted on the spindle or standby tool is changed, "1" is set if the tool is an unset tool, and
"0" is set if the tool is set, respectively.
If there is no tool or standby tool mounted on the spindle, H: spindle and L: standby tool will be cleared to
"0".
(Note 1) When changing the tool numbers in the ID label (when writing new tool information in the ID
label), the tool must be set as an unset tool.
B Signal
REMOTE PROGRAM
- R352,3
INPUT NO.
Refer to the section on "Remote program input start signal" (RPN) for the function and operation.
[Related signals]
(5) Remote program input start (RPN: Y76C)
456
B Signal
MACHINE
- MANUFACTURER R354, 5
MACRO PASSWORD NO.
[Function]
This function uses a password No. to prohibit editing and input/output of the user PLCs to prevent these
user PLCs prepared by the machine manufacturer from being incorrect overwritten by the end user.
This function is an option.
[Operation]
The machine manufacturer's original password No. is registered in R354[L]/R355[H] with the user PLCs.
Set the password No. in the range of "2" to "99999999". "0" and "1" cannot be set. Note that if the
R354/R355 value is "0" or "1", "5963" (default value) will be used as the password No.
457
B Signal
DIRECT SCREEN
- R356 to 9
SELECTION
[Function]
This signal allows an automatic transition to the alarm display screen when an alarm occurs.
[Operation]
The following shows the descriptions of the registers R356 to R359.
Register
Description Setting value
No.
R356 Selection 0: Initial state
requirement/completion data 1: Screen selection requirement
4: Screen selection completion
8: There is no application for the screen selection requirement
R357 Selection Function No. Set "4" to transit to the alarm message display screen.
R358 requirement Main menu No. Set "6" to transit to the alarm message display screen.
R359 Sub menu No. Set "1" to transit to the NC alarm display screen,
"2" to the PLC alarm display screen.
(1) Confirm the initial state ("0") is set to R356, the selection requirement/completion data.
(2) Set the function No. (to R357), main menu No. (to R358) and sub menu No. (to R359). Then enter "1"
to R356, the selection requirement/completion data.
(3) NC confirms the screen selection requirement and then sets the screen selection completion ("4") to
the selection requirement/completion data (R356) to execute the screen transition.
(4) After the screen transition, user PLC confirms the screen selection completion ("4") in R356 and then
initializes the data (to "0").
(Note 1) Setting the function No. is necessary. Without this No., the screen transition is not executed.
(Note 2) If the main menu No. has not been set (stays "0"), the function No. designates the screen
transition. The screen transition is as same as when each function key has been pressed.
(Note 3) When the sub menu No. has been set, the main menu No. has also to be set. Unless the main
menu is set, the transition is as same as when only the function No. is set.
(Note 4) When either the function No., main menu No. or sub menu No. is out of range, the screen
transition is not executed. Then the selection requirement/completion data (R356) remains "1".
458
The timing chart of the selection requirement/completion data is shown below.
0→1 4→0
PLC
1→4
NC
Screen Before transition After transition
[Caution]
(1) This signal is used only for the transition to the alarm message display screen (NC/PLC message
display screen) on the diagnosis screen. No other screen transition is executed by setting the screen
selection data.
(2) The direct screen selection is not available with the display unit FCU7-DA201-xx or FCU7-DA211-xx.
(3) A failure of the screen transition does not display or set any error data, except for "8" in R356, which
informs that no application software is found to make the direct screen selection requirement.
459
B Signal
BALL SCREW THERMAL
DISPLACEMENT
- R400 R403 R406 R409
COMPENSATION OFFSET
AMOUNT n-TH AXIS
BALL SCREW THERMAL
DISPLACEMENT
- COMPENSATION MAX. R401 R404 R407 R410
COMPENSATION AMOUNT
n-TH AXIS
BALL SCREW THERMAL
DISPLACEMENT
- COMPENSATION R402 R405 R408 R411
PART-SYSTEM, AXIS NO.
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
These signals use R register as interface for PLC and NC. Up to 4 sets of axis can be set in R register,
including axis No., offset amount, and max. compensation amount in one set.
[Operation]
(1) Part-system, axis No.(raxno): R402
F 8
7 0
bit0 Compensation ON/OFF 0 – OFF
1 - ON
bit1 to bit7 Axis No. 0 – 1 axis
1 – 2 axis
2 – 3 axis
:
:
(2) Offset amount (offset): R400

Set compensation amount for the farthest negative side (mdvno position) in the compensation range
by using ladder, etc.
(3) Max. compensation amount (maxcmp): R401
Set compensation amount for the farthest positive side (pdvno position) in the compensation range by
using ladder, etc. This compensation amount is a value using offset position as a criterion.
(4) Compensation amount (legcmp): R72
This is compensation amount for the current machine position set by NC.
Refer to the section on "Ball screw thermal displacement compensation Compensation amount"
(R72) for details.
(Note 1) Raxno, offset, and maxcmp cannot be set from the program or NC screen. Set them in R
register by using ladder, etc.
(Note 2) Unit for (2) to (4) above follows the setting of "#1006 Machine error compensation unit".
Parameters (backlash and pitch error compensation, etc.) regarding machine error
compensation and external machine coordinate system compensation also follow this unit.
460
[Setting example]
When only the ball screw thermal displacement compensation is valid:
(Example 1) Compensation
amount (mm)
Compensation range
cmpax X
drcax X 0.3
rdvno 4105
mdvno 4101
pdvno 4110
spcdv 1000 Reference
0.1
-5. position 5.
Compensation amount
offset -600 Machine position (mm)
maxcmp 1000 offset maxcmp
raxno 1 -0.1
-0.3
When the ball screw thermal displacement compensation is used with the machine error compensation:
(Example 2) Compensation
amount (mm)
Compensation range
cmpax X
drcax X 0.3
rdvno 4105
mdvno 4101
pdvno 4110
spcdv 1000 Reference
0.1
-5. position 5.
(Absolute value method)
Division Compensation Machine position (mm)
No. amount maxcm
offset -0.1
1 200
2 200
3 100
4 100
5 -100 -0.3
6 -200
7 -200
8 -300
9 -200
Thermal expansion compensation
10 -100
Machine position compensation
Compensation amount Total compensation amount
offset -600
maxcmp 1000
raxno 1
[Related signals]
(1) Ball screw thermal displacement compensation offset amount n-th axis (R400)
(2) Ball screw thermal displacement compensation Max. compensation amount n-th axis (R401)
(3) Ball screw thermal displacement compensation part-system, axis No. n-th axis (R402)
(4) Thermal expansion compensation amount (R72)
461
B Signal
PLC AXIS CONTROL
- INFORMATION ADDRESS R440 to 7
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
The PLC axis control information address stores control information head R register for each PLC axis.
[Operation]
PLC axis control information address is designated by the following devices.
R440 PLC axis control information address 1st axis
R441 PLC axis control information address 2nd axis
R442 PLC axis control information address 3rd axis
R443 PLC axis control information address 4th axis
(Note) The following R registers can be used.
R8300 to R9799 (Battery back up area)
R9800 to R9899 (Non battery back up area)
[Related signals]
(2) PLC axis control valid (Y770 to Y777)
B Signal
PLC AXIS CONTROL
- BUFFERING MODE R448
INFORMATION ADDRESS
The PLC axis control buffering mode information address stores PLC axis control buffering mode
information.
[Related signal]
462
B Signal
ENCODER 1 ARBITRARY
- R456
PULSE 1
ENCODER 1 ARBITRARY
- R457
PULSE 2
ENCODER 2 ARBITRARY
- R458
PULSE 1
ENCODER 2 ARBITRARY
- R459
PULSE 2
[Function]
Encoder pulse input used to be fixed to 1024 pulse input on the conventional analogue I/F. With this
function, arbitrary pulse can be input by parameters set in R register. The maximum number of input
pulse is 76800.
[Operation]
In order to input encoder arbitrary pulse, set the number of pulses necessary in R register. Switch
encoder to be used by ON/OFF on the PLC device, and turn ON the arbitrary pulse input valid signal.
Turn OFF the arbitrary pulse input valid signal when using the conventional 1024 pulse encoder.
R456 Encoder 1 arbitrary pulse 1 Input 1/2 of the number of pulses necessary for arbitrary pulse input
with the encoder input 1. This number of pulses must be in
hexadecimal but not in quad edge evaluation.
The setting range is 0x200(512) to 0x9600(38400).
This signal is selected when the encoder 1 arbitrary pulse
selection (Y764) is OFF.
R457 Encoder 1 arbitrary pulse 2 This signal is selected when the encoder 1 arbitrary pulse
selection (Y764) is ON.
R458 Encoder 2 arbitrary pulse 1 Input 1/2 of the number of pulses necessary for arbitrary pulse input
with the encoder input 2. This number of pulses must be in
hexadecimal but not in quad edge evaluation.
The setting range is 0x200(512) to 0x9600(38400).
This signal is selected when the encoder 2 arbitrary pulse
selection (Y765) is OFF.
R459 Encoder 2 arbitrary pulse 2 This signal is selected when the encoder 2 arbitrary pulse
selection (Y765) is ON.
[Cautions]
(1) Arbitrary pulse cannot be input from a bus-connected encoder.
(2) Input 1/2 of the number of pulses actually used with the encoder 1 arbitrary pulse 1 and 2 (R456 to
457), and the encoder 2 arbitrary pulse 1 and 2 (R458 to 459) in hexadecimal. If a different number of
pulses is input, the speed at feed per rotation changes.
(3) When 0 to 0x1FF are set in R456 to R459, the encoder input pulse will be 1024 pulse input. When a
value exceeding 0x9600 is set, it will be 76800 pulse input.
[Related signals]
463
B Signal
1ST CUTTING FEEDRATE
- R2500 R2700 R2900 R3100
OVERRIDE
[Function]
When "Cutting feedrate override method selection" (FVS) is set to "file register method", override (0 to
300%, 1% increment) can be exerted on the cutting feedrate. Desired value is set to file register (R) in
binary code.
[Operation]
When override is exerted to the preset feedrate, the true feedrate is the product obtained by multiplying
the preset feedrate by the specified override ratio (provided that "2nd cutting feedrate override" is not
valid).
The override ratio is fixed to 100%, irrespective of "1st feedrate override" setting, under the following
condition:
(1) "Override cancel" (OVC) signal is ON.
(2) During tapping in fixed cycle.
(3) During TAPPING mode.
(Note) Only when override setting is 0%, override is exerted even on rapid traverse speed in automatic
operation. That is, cutting feed as well as rapid traverse stop if the 1st feedrate override is set to
0% during automatic operation. When override setting is 0%, "M01 OPERATION ERROR"
appears in the alarm display section of setting and display unit, and "M01 OPERATION ERROR
0102" in the ALARM DIAGNOSIS display.
[Related signals]
For relationship among these signals, refer
(2) Cutting feedrate override method selection (FVS: YC67)
to the description the cutting feedrate
override.
(4) 2nd cutting feedrate override (R2501)
464
B Signal
2ND CUTTING FEEDRATE
- R2501 R2701 R2901 R3101
OVERRIDE
[Function]
When the "2nd cutting feedrate override valid" function (FV2E) is used, another override can be exerted
on "Cutting feedrate override code" (*FV1 to 16), or "1st cutting feedrate override" when the "Cutting
feedrate override method selection" (FVS) is set to file register method. The 2nd feedrate override can be
set within range from 0% to 327.67% with 0.01% increment. The value is set in the file register (R) in
binary.
[Operation]
When this override function is used, the true feedrate is the product obtained by multiplying commanded
feedrate (F) by "1st cutting feedrate override" ratio and "2nd cutting feedrate override" ratio.
Since the least increment of 2nd feedrate override is 0.01%, override setting "10000" corresponds to
100%.
The override ratio is fixed to 100%, irrespective of "1st cutting feedrate override" or "2nd cutting feedrate
override" setting, under the following condition:
(1) "Override cancel" (OVC) signal is ON.
(2) During tapping in fixed cycle.
(3) During TAPPING mode.
(Note) Only when the 1st cutting feedrate override or 2nd cutting feedrate override is 0% or both of
them are 0%, override is exerted even on rapid traverse speed in automatic operation. That is,
cutting feed as well as rapid traverse stop if the 1st override feedrate is set to 0% during
automatic operation. When override setting is 0%, "M01 OPERATION ERROR" appears in the
alarm display section of setting and display unit, and "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0102" in the
ALARM DIAGNOSIS display.
[Related signals]
(2) Cutting feedrate override method selection (FVS: YC67) For relationship among these signals, refer
to the description about the cutting
feedrate override.
(4) 1st cutting feedrate override (R2500)
465
B Signal
RAPID TRAVERSE
- R2502 R2702 R2902 R3102
OVERRIDE
[Function]
When "Rapid traverse override method selection" signal (ROVS) is set to "file register method", override
can be exerted, besides the code method override (ROV1, ROV2), by setting within the range of 0% to
100% by 1% increments. The value is set in the file register (R) in binary.
[Operation]
During rapid traverse in the automatic or manual operation, the actual feedrate will be the result of
multiplying the rapid traverse speed set in a parameter by this override ratio.
(Note 1) The override will be clamped at 100%.
(Note 2) The "M01 Rapid traverse override zero 0125" will occur if the override value is 0%.
[Related signals]
(1) Rapid traverse override code 1,2 (ROV1, ROV2: YC68, YC69)
(2) Rapid traverse override method selection (ROVS: YC6F)
B Signal
- CHOPPING OVERRIDE CHPOV R2503 R2703 R2903 R3103
466
B Signal
- MANUAL FEEDRATE R2504, 5 R2704, 5 R2904, 5 R3104, 5
[Function]
When "Manual feedrate method selection" signal (JVS) is set to "file register method", feedrate can be
specified, besides code method (*JV1 to 16) setting, by setting desired feedrate ratio manually. The value
is set in the file register (R) in binary.
[Operation]
This mode of feedrate setting can be used in JOG feed, incremental feed, reference position return feed
and manual arbitrary feed mode. For JOG, incremental and reference position return mode, "Rapid
traverse speed" (RT) signal should be OFF. For manual arbitrary feed mode, "Manual arbitrary feed
EX.F/MODAL.F" signal (CXS3) should be OFF. Feedrate specified in this mode can be applied to feed
motion in dry run (automatic operation).
The use of this signal is conditioned as follows:
(1) When "Manual feedrate override valid" signal (OVSL) is OFF, the originally set feedrate is applied.
(2) When "Manual feedrate override valid" signal (OVSL) is ON, the actual feedrate can be obtained by
multiplying the feedrate specified by the 1st/2nd cutting feed override value.
(3) Manual feedrate is set to file registers Rn and Rn+1. The feedrate depends on "Feedrate least
increment code 1,2" (PCF1, PCF2) as listed below.
PCF2 PCF1 Least increment Operation

(mm/min or inch/min)
(4) Feedrate clamp (max. feedrate) depends on setting of axis parameter (cutting feedrate clamp) when
"Rapid traverse" signal (RT) is OFF.
(Note 1) During incremental feed mode, the true feedrate does not change even when the manual
feedrate setting is changed while feed motion is going on.
(Note 2) As for file registers (Rn and Rn+1), Rn is of low order.
Of the file registers Rn and Rn+1 to designate the feedrate, if the value is 2-bytes (one word),
the high-order side does not need to do anything.
[Related signals]
(1) Manual feedrate code m (*JV1 to *JV16: YC70 to YC74)
(2) Manual feedrate method selection (JVS: YC77)
467
B Signal
- MANUAL FEEDRATE B R2506, 7 R2706, 7 R2906, 7 R3106, 7
Designate the manual feedrate for the axis selected with the manual feedrate B valid signal.
[Cautions]
(1) The speed designated with this register is valid for the manual feedrate of an axis for which the
manual feedrate B valid signal is valid.
(2) Cutting override and manual override are invalid for this register's speed.
(3) This register is not related to the dry run speed.
(4) A binary value is directly set for this register. The setting unit is 0.01mm/min (°/min).
(5) This signal is a register common for all axes.
[Related signal]
(1) Manual feedrate B valid (Y940 to 947)
B Signal
1ST
- HANDLE/INCREMENTAL R2508, 9 R2708, 9 R2908, 9 R3108, 9
FEED MAGNIFICATION
[Function]
By selecting the handle/incremental feed magnification method (MPS), an arbitrary magnification can be
designated separately from magnification set by regular code method. Magnification value (multiplier) is
set in file register (R) in binary.
When the "handle/incremental feed magnification method selection" signal (MPS) is ON, this
magnification factor is applied for the hand pulse from handy terminal.
[Operation]
Magnification is applied to amount of feed per pulse in handle feed mode (output from manual pulse
generator), or to amount of feed per signal in incremental feed mode (+J1, -J1, etc.).
When multiplier is "500" and one pulse is given in handle feed mode, for example, 500µm of feed motion
occurs. When multiplier is "30000" and one feed command signal is given in incremental feed mode,
30mm of feed motion occurs (time constant for feed motion is equal to time constant for rapid traverse or
step).
(Note 1) Change of magnification setting during feed motion is ignored.
(Note 2) Since considerably large magnification can be used, the signal should be used carefully.
[Related signals]
(2) Handle/Incremental feed magnification method selection (MPS: YC87)
468
B Signal
2ND HANDLE FEED

- R2510,1 R2710,1 R2910,1 R3110,1
MAGNIFICATION
3RD HANDLE FEED

- R2512,3 R2712,3 R2912,3 R3112,3
MAGNIFICATION
[Function]
By selecting the handle/incremental feed magnification method (MPS), an arbitrary magnification can be
designated separately from magnification set by regular code method. Magnification value (multiplier) is
set in file register (R) in binary.
Arbitrary magnification, when using 2nd and 3rd handles, is designated here.
[Operation]
When 1 pulse is sent by 2nd or 3rd handle, its feed amount conforms to this feed magnification.
For example, when 1 pulse is sent in handle mode with magnification set at "500", its feed amount will be
500μm.
(Note 1) Changing magnification during feed motion is invalid.
(Note 2) Considerably large magnification can be set in the handle/incremental feed magnification
method. Pay extra attention when setting magnification.
[Related signals]
(1) Handle/incremental feed magnification code m (MP1,MP2,MP4:YC80,C81,C82)
(2) 1st handle/incremental feed magnification (R2508)
(3) Handle/incremental feed magnification method selection (MPS:YC87)
469
B Signal
PLC INTERRUPT
- R2518, 9 R2718, 9 R2918, 9 R3118, 9
PROGRAM NO.
[Function]
The interrupt program set with R register is executed upon signal from PLC during single block stop in
program operation or during manual operation mode.
[Operation]
(1) Interrupt program is executed. This program is designated by the interrupt program No. input
simultaneously with "PLC interrupt" signal upon "PLC interrupt" signal startup during single block stop
in program operation or during manual operation mode.
(2) Single block operation and "Auto operation pause" are valid even during the interrupt program
mentioned above. In order to cancel "Single block" during interrupt program, use system variables
#3003; to cancel "Automatic operation pause", use #3004.
(3) "PLC interrupt" or "MDI interrupt" cannot be executed during interrupt program.
(4) Interrupt program is completed with M99.
(5) Set the parameter #1122 pglk program display lock to 1 or 2 when not wishing to display the active
interrupt program on the monitor screen.
(6) The mode is returned to the operation mode prior to the interruption upon completion of interrupt
program. In the case of "Memory mode" or "MDI mode", the block following the last used before the
interruption is executed with automatic start.
(7) "PLC interrupt" signal will be ignored even if it is turned ON during "In automatic operation "start"" or
"In automatic operation "pause"".
(8) "In automatic operation "start"" is output during interrupt program regardless of the operation mode
prior to the interruption.
(9) "PLC interrupt" is valid for each part system.
(10)If there is no interrupt program, the program error (P232) occurs.
(11)If the interrupt program number set in the R register exceeds the designated setting range, the
program error (P232) occurs.
(12)Input numbers from 9000 to 9999 in the interrupt program number.
470
(Example 1) Interrupted when the single block is stopped
O1000 Interrupt program
O9900
"PLC interrupt" N10 G01 X10.;
signal ON N20 Z10.;
M99;
After completion of 0100 N10 block, call the interrupt program designated when "PLC interrupt" signal
is turned ON (09900).
PLC interrupt is terminated at M99 block and the block is stopped.
With the next automatic startup, 0100 N20 will be executed.
Automatic start
N10 N20
"PLC interrupt"
signal PLC interrupt program
(Block stop is realized at
M99 block)
(Example 2) Interrupted during the manual operation mode
Manual feed Interrupt program
O9900
"PLC interrupt"
signal ON
M99;
When manual feeding, call the interrupt program designated when "PLC interrupt" signal is turned ON
(09900).
PLC interrupt is terminated at M99 block and the block is stopped.
By resetting, operation mode is returned to manual operation mode.
Manual feed Manual feed
"PLC interrupt"
signal Interrupt program
Reset
(Block stop is realized
at M99 block)
471
B Signal
LOAD METER DISPLAY R2520 R2720 R2920 R3120
-
INTERFACE 1,2 to 3 to 3 to 3 to 3
The load meter can be displayed on the coordinate value screen by just setting a value in the
corresponding file register.
Refer to the section on "Load meter display" in the "PLC Programming Manual" for details.
B Signal
MANUAL FEEDRATE B
- R2524 R2724 R2924 R3124
OVERRIDE
[Function]
Override for manual feedrate B valid axis is set.
[Operation]
The override set with this register will be valid for the axis selected with the manual feedrate B valid
signal.
This register can be set within the range of 0 to 200% in 0.01% increment.
If a value larger than 200%(setting value=20000) is set, the value is regarded as 200% when operating.
This register is common for axes.
[Caution]
(1) When the manual feedrate B override commanded by the user PLC is "0"%, even if the feed axis
selection signal for the axis selected by the manual feedrate B valid signal is turned ON, an error
occurs and the axis will not move.
(2) For a linear axis, the manual feedrate B surface speed control is not valid. However, the manual
feedrate B override is valid.
(3) In order to use manual feedrate B override, the manual feedrate B surface speed control option is
required.
[Related signals]
(2) Manual feedrate B surface speed control valid (YC7D)
472
B Signal
- R2544, 5 R2744, 5 R2944, 5 R3144, 5
1ST AXIS TRAVEL AMOUNT
[Function]
This data specifies the travel amount or positioning point in manual arbitrary feed mode.
[Operation]
"Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" is for the axis whose number is specified by "Manual
arbitrary feed 1st axis selection code m" (CX11 to 116: YCA0 to YCA4).
"Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" means differently depending on the statuses of the "Manual
arbitrary feed MC/WK (CXS5)" and "Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC (CXS6)" signals.
(1) When the Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC (CXS6) signal is ON:
"Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" specifies travel amount (increment).
(2) When the "Manual arbitrary feed ABS/INC (CXS6)" signal is OFF, it depends on the status of the
"Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK (CXS5)" signal as follows:
(a) When the "Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK (CXS5)" signal is OFF:
"Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" specifies a coordinate position (positioning point) of
the machine coordinate system.
(b) When the "Manual arbitrary feed MC/WK (CXS5)" signal is ON:
"Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" specifies a coordinate position (positioning point) of
the modal workpiece coordinate system.
"Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" is written in binary notation with a sign. The unit of the
specified value matches that of data entered.
(Ex.) When (R2545, R2544)=1 is specified in micrometer system, axis motion is 1µm (at incremental
specification).
[Caution]
"Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" forms a data item by R2544 and R2545 or R2744 and
R2745. Handle negative data carefully.
[Related signals]
For related signals, see the descriptions on "Manual arbitrary feed mode (PTP: YC03)".
473
B Signal
- 2ND AXIS TRAVEL R2548, 9 R2748, 9 R2948, 9 R3148, 9
AMOUNT
"Manual arbitrary feed 2nd axis travel amount" is for the axis whose number is specified by "Manual
arbitrary feed 2nd axis selection code m (CX21 to CX216)".
The other conditions are the same as for "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" explained in the
previous section.
B Signal
- 3RD AXIS TRAVEL R2552, 3 R2752, 3 R2952, 3 R3152, 3
AMOUNT
"Manual arbitrary feed 3rd axis travel amount" is for the axis whose number is specified by "Manual
arbitrary feed 3rd axis selection code m (CX31 to CX316)."
The other conditions are the same as for "Manual arbitrary feed 1st axis travel amount" explained in the
previous section.
B Signal
R2556 R2756 R2956 R3156
- ALARM MESSAGE I/F 1 to 4
to 9 to 9 to 9 to 9
[Function]
Desired alarm messages prepared using PLC development tool (personal computer) can be displayed in
ALARM DIAGNOSIS screen of the setting and display unit by setting values (binary code) to alarm
interface file registers (Rn, Rn+1, Rn+2, Rn+3).
[Operation]
If table No. of previously prepared alarm message table has been set to alarm interface file registers,
alarm message, if alarm occurs, can be displayed in ALARM DIAGNOSIS screen.
Maximum 4 alarm messages can be displayed at the same time.
Alarm message can be cleared by setting "0" to alarm interface file registers.
For details of alarm message display, refer to the "PLC Programming Manual".
[Cautions]
(1) Set machine parameter PLC "#6450 bit 0" to 1 to display the alarm messages.
(2) For alarm message interface, file register (R method) or temporary storage (F method) can be used.
The selection is made with machine parameter PLC "#6450 bit 1".
(3) In both R method (file register) and F method (temporary storage), alarm does extend to the
controller.
When it is desirous to stop controller operation according to alarm type, signals such as "Automatic
operation "pause" command" (*SP) signal, "Single block" (SBK) signal and "Interlock" signal should
be processed on the PLC side.
474
B Signal
- OPERATOR MESSAGE I/F R2560 R2760 R2960 R3160
[Function]
Desired operator message prepared using PLC development tool (personal computer) can be displayed
by setting value (binary code) to operator message interface file register (Rn). Operator message appears
in ALARM DIAGNOSIS screen of the setting and display unit.
[Operation]
If table No. of previously prepared operator message table has been set to operator message interface
file register, operator message can be displayed in ALARM DIAGNOSIS screen.
Operator message can be cleared by setting "0" to operator message interface file register.
For details of operator messages, refer to the "PLC Programming Manual".
[Cautions]
(1) Set machine parameter PLC "#6450 bit 2" to 1 to display the operator messages.
(2) Display of operator message does not cause alarm on the controller side. When it is desirous to stop
controller operation according to operator message, signals such as "Automatic operation "pause"
command" (*SP) signal, "Single block" (SBK) signal and "Interlock" signal should be processed on the
PLC side.
B Signal
SEARCH & START
- R2562, 3 R2762, 3 R2962, 3 R3162, 3
PROGRAM NO.
[Function]
The No. of the program to be searched with search & start is designated.
[Operation]
Set the No. of the program to be searched with search & start with a binary value.
(Note 1) The program No. must be set before the "Search & start" signal is input.
(Note 2) If a machining program No. is not designated or if an illegal No. is designated, and error signal
will be output when the search operation is executed.
[Related signals]
(2) Search & start Error (SEE: XC8A)
475
B Signal
- ENCODER SELECTION R2567 R2767 R2967 R3167
[Function]
Using a binary setting, select which spindle's encoder feedback to use.
0: 1st spindle
1: 2nd spindle
2: 3rd spindle
3: 4th spindle
4: 5th spindle
5: 6th spindle
(Note) If a setting exceeds the number of connected spindles, it will be interpreted that a selection has
not been made.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle selection (SWS: X18A8)
B Signal
- C AXIS SELECTION R2568 R2768 R2968 R3168
[Function]
The "C axis selection" signal is used to issue the commands with the axis name command address to the
axis selected from the Spindle/C-axis having the same axis name in the part system.
[Operation]
Using the axis number, set which spindle or C axis to output the commands to.
0: First C axis, 1: 1st axis, 2: 2nd axis, 3: 3rd axis, 4: 4th axis, ... 8: 8th axis
The setting is made with the axis number used in the part system.
(Note 1) This signal must always be input simultaneously with the "Recalculation request" signal (CRQ).
(Note 2) This signal is valid even when the multi-spindle function is invalid.
(Note 3) If an axis name (#1013 axname) is different from the initial C axis name, "M01 OPERATION
476
B Signal
LOAD MONITOR
- TEACHING AXIS R2580 R2780 R2980 R3180
SELECTION
[Function]
The axis for teaching and monitor operations is designated.
[Operation]
The axis for teaching and monitor operations is designated with bit correspondence.
Teaching and monitor operations are carried out to all axes designated with this signal.

:
Servo 6th axis
[Related signals]
(4) Load monitor Load change rate detection axis, Teaching data sub-No. (R2581, R2582)
477
B Signal
LOAD MONITOR
- LOAD CHANGE RATE R2581 R2781 R2981 R3181
DETECTION AXIS
[Function]
The axis targeted for the change rate detection is designated.
[Operation]
With bit correspondence, designate the axis for detecting the change rate when judging the start of actual
cutting during teaching and monitor operation.
If a change rate is detected for even one of the axes designated with this signal, it will be judged that
actual cutting has started.

:
Servo 6th axis
[Related signals]
(4) Load monitor Teaching axis selection, Teaching data sub-No. (R2580, R2582)
B Signal
LOAD MONITOR
- R2582 R2782 R2982 R3182
TEACHING DATA SUB-NO.
[Function]
The sub-No. for teaching and monitor operation is designated.
[Operation]
Designate the sub-No. of the data registered with teaching operation, and the sub-No. of data used for the
monitor operation.
[Related signals]
(4) Load monitor Teaching axis selection, Load change rate detection axis (R2580, R2581)
478
B Signal
ADAPTIVE CONTROL
- R2583 R2783 R2983 R3183
BASIC AXIS SELECTION
[Function]
The basic axis for adaptive control is designated.
[Operation]
Designate which of the actual load's detection axes is targeted for adaptive control.
Only one of the monitor target axes is designated.

:
Servo 6th axis
[Related signals]
479
B Signal
EACH AXIS REFERENCE
- R2584 R2784 R2984 R3184
POSITION SELECTION
[Function]
Select the each axis reference position return position for manual reference position return.
[Operation]
(1) This signal is valid when the reference position select method is ON.
(2) Two bits are used for each axis to select the reference position.
(a) R register and corresponding axis
Each axis reference position selection
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1st axis setting value

2nd axis setting value
3rd axis setting value
4th axis setting value
(b) Setting value and reference position No.

High-order bit Low-order bit Return position
0 0 1st reference position
0 1 2nd reference position
1 0 3rd reference position
1 1 4th reference position
[Related signal]
(1) Reference position selection method (YC97)
B Signal
- CHOPPING CONTROL R2587 R2787 R2987 R3187

DATA ADDRESS
480
B Signal
SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL
- R2589 R2789 R2989 R3189
OPERATION METHOD
(1) Synchronous control
Synchronous control for the 1st part system is designated with the R2589 register, and for the 2nd
part system with the R2789 register.
Synchronous control can be turned ON and OFF by setting the bits corresponding to each axis in the
R2589/2789/2989/3189 registers. The CNC changes the operation when all axes reach the
in-position state.
R2589/2789/2989/3189 • • • 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1st axis
:
:
8th axis
(a) Designating the synchronous operation method
Turn ON both bits corresponding to the axis related to the basic axis and synchronous axis with
the base specification parameter "#1068 slavno".
(Example) To operate the 2nd axis (basic axis) and 3rd axis (synchronous axis) in synchronization
76543210 HEX
R2589 o o o o o o o o 00
ooooo11o 06
(b) Designating the independent operation method

Turn ON only the bit corresponding to only one of the axes to be moved with the basic axis
command.
(Example) To move only the 3rd axis (synchronous axis)
76543210 HEX
R2589 o o o o o o o o 00
ooooo1oo 04
If, due to the machine structure, the synchronous state must always be entered immediately after the
power is turned ON, set the R2589 register with the first ladder after the power is turned ON.
Example of ladder creation
MOV H0C R2589
Only first ladder after power ON
(Note) The registers R2789 and later are used for the 2nd to 4th part system.
When changing the operation with the R2589/2789/2989/3189 register during automatic operation,
calculate the coordinates again.
After synchronous axis independent operation is carried out, the end point coordinates of the
synchronous axis are substituted in the program end point coordinates for the basic axis. Thus, if the
coordinates are not recalculated, the basic axis' movement command will not be created properly.
Request recalculation immediately after the R2589/2789/2989/3189 register is changed.
481
<Example of ladder creation>

Basic axis: 2nd axis Synchronous axis: 3rd axis
When M code is assigned to each:
M10: Asynchronous operation
M20: Independent operation
M40: Synchronous operation
XC60
= H10 R504 M2000 Miscellaneous function strobe (MF1) ON
and M10 commanded → M2000 ON
XC60
XC60
M2000 XC18
MOV H00 R2589 M2000 ON and motion command completion (DEN)
→ Asynchronous operation signal set
M2001 XC18
→ Independent operation signal set
M2002 XC18
→ Synchronous operation signal set
M2000
YC2B M2000 or M2001 or M2002 ON
→ Recalculation request (CRQ) set
M2001
M2002
Execution block Movement (1) M2002;(synchronization Movement (2)
MF
DEN
Synchronous control
operation method Asynchronous Synchronous
(R2589)
All axes in-position
Operation method Asynchronous Synchronous
Recalculation
request (CRQ)
NC latches at
rising edge
FIN
Calculation of next
block
Recalculation
482
[Cautions]
(1) During synchronous operation or independent operation, the basic axis signals are valid for the
"Interlock" and "Machine lock" signals, etc.
(2) The synchronous axis will return to the reference position in synchronization with the basic axis if
G27, G28 or G30 is commanded during synchronous operation. If the synchronous axis is at the
reference position when the basic axis completes reference position return, the reference position
return will be completed. If the synchronous axis is not at the reference position when the basic
axis completes reference position return, the "Reference position reached" signal for the basic axis
will not be output.
(3) The position switches are processed independently for the basic axis and synchronous axis.
(4) Input the same OT signal for the basic axis and synchronous axis.
Set the same soft limit value for the basic axis and synchronous axis.
If the above settings cannot be made because of the machine specifications, observe the following
points.
• If OT or soft limit occurs during the manual operation mode, an alarm will occur only for the
synchronous axis, and the basic axis will not stop.
Thus, make sure that the basic axis alarm turns ON before the synchronous axis.
• OT during the manual operation mode will cause the synchronous axis to stop when the OT signal
for only the basic axis turns ON. The basic axis is stopped by the position controller, and the
synchronous axis is stopped by the NC control unit.
Thus, there may be a difference in the stop positions. If an excessive error alarm occurs because of
OT, enter the correction mode, and cancel the alarm.
(5) The basic axis independent operation is handled as asynchronous, so the PLC input/output signal
is not reflected on the synchronous axis.
(6) When the parameter "#1281 ext17/bit6" is ON, changing the "Synchronization control operation
method" immediately changes the compensation amount of the synchronous axis in the external
machine coordinate system compensation or the ball screw thermal expansion compensation:
• When the synchronous operation is changed to the independent operation; the basic axis
compensation amount changes to the synchronous axis compensation amount.
• When the independent operation is changed to the synchronous operation; the synchronous axis
compensation amount changes to the basic axis compensation amount.
(7) When the synchronous operation is set by the "Synchronization control operation method" while
the parameter "#1281 ext17/bit6" is ON, the ball screw thermal expansion compensation is
executed for the synchronous axis with the base axis compensation amount. R72 to R75, however,
indicate each axis compensation amount.
483
B Signal
REFERENCE POSITION
- ADJUSTMENT R2592 R2792 R2992 R3192
COMPLETION
Upon the completion of the reference position adjustment to determine the reference position in the
dog-type reference position return, input the bit, which corresponds to the master axis in the part system,
from PLC.
Then, turn OFF this signal after the corresponding bit of “Reference position adjustment value parameter
setting completed” signal is turned ON.
When the axis is outside the position switch range, execute an interlock on the axis and prohibit the
movement of the axis targeted at by the position switch.
R2592 . . . 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1st axis
:
:
8th axis
(Example) If the 2nd axis is the master axis, set the bits as follows after the completion of the reference
position adjustment for the slave axis.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HEX
R2592 oooooooo 00
oooooo1o 02
[Caution]
A change of the reference position adjustment value requires another reference position return. If the
automatic operation stars without the reference position return, an alarm occurs to inform the
uncompleted return.
[Related signal]
(1) Reference position adjustment value parameter setting completed (R576)
484
B Signal
CURRENT LIMIT
- R2593 R2793 R2993 R3193
CHANGEOVER
Droop will be released when the corresponding bit for the droop release request signal is OFF.
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R2593
1st axis
2nd axis
:
:
8th axis
[Related signals]
485
B Signal
WEAR COMPENSATION
- R2594 R2794 R2994 R3194
NO. (Tool presetter)
[Function]
To clear the wear compensation amount after measuring the tool compensation amount with manual tool
length measurement, set the wear compensation No. in a BCD code.
[Operation]
When the sensor is touched by the tool, wear data of the compensation No. automatically specified will be
cleared to 0.
If 0 or a non-existing compensation No. is set, the wear data will not be cleared.
B Signal
OFFSET MEASUREMENT
TOOL COMPENSATION
- R2600, 1 R2800, 1 R3000, 1 R3200, 1
NO.
/SELECTED
COMPENSATION TOOL
[Function]
(1) External workpiece coordinate offset measurement function
Set the tool No. (R2602, 2603) and the tool compensation No. (R2600, 2601) used for workpiece
coordinate offset measurement in a BCD code.
(2) Chuck barrier check
Set the tool No. (R2602, 2603) and the compensation No. (R2600, 2601) selected for the chuck
barrier check.
[Operation]
(1) External workpiece coordinate offset measurement function
Set the tool No. and the tool compensation No. used for workpiece coordinate offset measurement
in a BCD code.
This is set with the user PLC.
This tool No. (R2602, 2603) is interpreted as the tool offset No. by the CNC.
The file register used differs according to the parameter (#1097 Tlno.)
#1097 Tlno. R2600,2601/R2800,2801 R2602,2603/R2802,2803
0 Tool length, tool nose wear offset No. Tool No.
1 Tool nose wear offset No. Tool No., tool length compensation No.
If the tool length compensation No. is not designated (if the contents are 0), the tool length and tool
nose wear offset will both follow the T command modal.
The T command modal will also be followed if the designated offset No. is not within the specified
range.
If the T command modal value is 0, the compensation amount will be interpreted as 0.
486
B Signal
OFFSET MEASUREMENT
- TOOL NO. R2602, 3 R2802, 3 R3002, 3 R3202, 3
/SELECTED TOOL
NO.(Main)
Refer to the explanation for R2600 and R2601 for details.
B Signal
SELECTION TOOL
- R2604, 5 R2804, 5 R3004, 5 R3204, 5
COMPENSATION NO. (Sub)
[Function]
(1) Workpiece coordinate offset measurement function
Set the tool compensation No. used in the sub spindle side for external workpiece coordinate offset
measurement in a BCD code.
Designate the tool No. and compensation No. selected on the sub-spindle side for chuck barrier check.
[Operation]
(1) Workpiece coordinate offset measurement function
Set the tool compensation No. used in the sub spindle side for external workpiece coordinate offset
measurement in a BCD code.
The file register used differs according to the parameter (#1097 Tlno.)
#1097 Tlno. R2604,2605/R2804,2805 R2606,2607/R2806,R2807
0 Tool length, tool nose wear offset No. Tool No.
1 Tool nose wear offset No. Tool No., tool length compensation No.
If the tool length compensation No. is not designated (if the contents are 0), both the tool length and tool
nose wear offset follow the details designated for the main spindle. The details for the main spindle will
also be set if the designated offset No. is not within the specified range.
B Signal
SELECTION TOOL
- R2606, 7 R2806, 7 R3006, 7 R3206, 7
WEAR NO. (Sub)
Refer to the section for the "Selection tool compensation No. (sub) (R2604, 5)".
487
B Signal
TOOL MOUNTING
- R2608, 9 R2808, 9 R3008, 9 R3208, 9
INFORMATION m
[Function]
Designate the presence of a tool mounted on the tool post (tool compensation amount validity).
[Operation]
When the tool designated for tool mounting is selected, the tool compensation amount will be added to
the chuck barrier check.
<Bit allocation>
Tool mounting bitF bitE bitD bitC bitB bitA bit9 bit8
information Tool 32 Tool 31 Tool 30 Tool 29 Tool 28 Tool 27 Tool 26 Tool 25
(high order)
bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
R2609/
R2809 Tool 24 Tool 23 Tool 22 Tool 21 Tool 20 Tool 19 Tool 18 Tool 17
Tool mounting bitF bitE bitD bitC bitB bitA bit9 bit8
information Tool 16 Tool 15 Tool 14 Tool 13 Tool 12 Tool 11 Tool 10 Tool 9
(low order) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
R2608/
R2808 Tool 8 Tool 7 Tool 6 Tool 5 Tool 4 Tool 3 Tool 2 Tool 1
Bit OFF: Tool not mounted (tool compensation amount not added)
Bit ON: Tool mounted (tool compensation amount added)
In a machine that uses tools 1 to 12 on the main spindle's tool post and tools 17 to 28 on the
sub-spindle's tool post, if the tools are mounted in either tool post, H0FFF is set for both R2608 and
R2609.
When tool 28 is detached from the sub-spindle side next, R2609 will be set to H07FF.
[Remark]
This signal is initialized to HFFFF when the power is turned ON.
Thus, if this signal is not used, the tool compensation amount will always be added to the chuck barrier
check.
B Signal
TOOL LENGTH
- MEASUREMENT 2 R2618 R2818 R3018 R3218
TOOL NO.
[Function]
Set the compensation No. of the tool data for setting the measurement result during manual tool length
measurement II. This is set in BCD code.
[Operation]
When the sensor is touched by the tool, compensation amount will be written into the tool data of the
compensation No. automatically specified. This tool No. is interpreted as the tool compensation No. by
the CNC.
[Related signals]
(1) Wear compensation No. (R2594)
(2) Tool length measurement 2 (TLMS: YC21)
488
B Signal
SERVO READY
- COMPLETION OUTPUT R2625 R2825 R3025 R3225
DESIGNATION
[Function]
"Servo ready completion" (SA) signal indicates that the servo system is ready for normal operation. The
signal can be output to a Y device of remote I/O, which is designated by this register.
The direct transfer of the signal from CNC to remote I/O allows the output of the signal during PLC is
stopped.
[Operation]
The first setting data since the power ON is valid.
Only the first setting is valid. The value changed later is invalid.
The setting range is 1 to 5FF (HEX), except for 2C0 to 2FF.
If the first setting of Y device No. is out of range, the signal is not output to the Y device. To output the
signal, turn the power ON again and then set the Y device No. again within the range.
[Caution]
(1) Setting "0" does not mean the output to Y0. This setting is invalid.
(2) If the "Servo ready completion" signal is OFF on either of the R registers (among
R2625/R2825/R3025/R3225) with the overlapped setting value, the signals to be output to Y device
turn OFF.
(3) Y2C0 to 2FF, which are used by the system, cannot be set as servo ready completion output
designation.
(4) This register, if designated after the "Servo ready completion" signal is ON without initial ladders,
turns valid from the time of the setting and the signal is output to Y device.
(5) The devices Y300 to Y5FF are available when the external PLC link such as PROFIBUS-DP and
CC-Link is connected.
(6) Do not control the designated Y devices with user PLC. When the device is controlled with user PLC,
the "Servo ready completion" signal is overwritten and turns invalid.
(7) If the servo ready completion output designation, which has not been set with this register, is written
twice in 1 scan of user PLC, the latter setting is valid.
[Related signals]
(1) Servo ready completion (SA: XC11)
489
B Signal
MECHANICAL AXIS
- SPECIFICATIONS 1ST R2628,9 R2828,9 R3028,9 R3228,9
ROTARY AXIS ANGLE
MECHANICAL AXIS
- SPECIFICATIONS 2ND R2630,1 R2830,1 R3030,1 R3230,1
ROTARY AXIS ANGLE
[Function]
This signal sets rotary axis angle of the mechanical axis specifications.
The setting range is 0 to ±720000(1degree/1000).
[Operation]
When handle-feeding to tool axis direction/tool radius direction in the mechanical axis specifications, the
rotary axis angle can be input by writing the angle in R register with the user PLC.
CNC
X axis
CNC servo axis
Tool handle feed distributing process

[Mechanical position]
CNC
CNC
Rotary axis Counter

motor A,B,C axes Y axis
Z axis
A axis
Mechanical specifications Switching B axis
[Rotary angle] C axis
Mechanical axis
R register
specifications
Manual
User PLC
User PLC
Mechanical R2628:Rotary axis Rotary axis pulse

axis 1st axis generator
configuration
R2630: Rotary axis ROTAXT1or2
2nd axis Display CRT
processing
R register Details Input range

R2628 Mechanical specifications rotary axis 1st angle 0 to ±720000
R2629 R2628(low order)/R2629(high order) (1degree/1000)
R2630 Mechanical specifications rotary axis 2nd angle 0 to ±720000
R2631 R2630(low order)/R2631(high order) (1degree/1000)
(Example) Writing 90 degree on A axis and 180 degree on C axis with A-C axes configuration is shown
as below.
A axis: 90 × 1000 = 90000
┤├─[ DMOV K90000 R2628]─
angle 1/1000degree System unit
C axis: 180 × 1000 = 180000

┤├─[ DMOV K180000 R2630]─
angle 1/1000degree System unit
[Cautions]
(1) Tool center point rotary mode cannot be used during the mechanical axis in use.
(2) Do not change the rotary axis angle of the mechanical axis during tool handle feed & interruption.
(3) When angle of the mechanical axis is written in R register, only for the tool center point value counter
on the position display screen will be updated. Other counters will not be updated.
490
B Signal
EXT. MACHINE
R5700 R5716 R5732 R5748
- COORDINATE SYSTEM
to 15 to 31 to 47 to 63
OFFSET DATA n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This data compensates the basic machine coordinate system. The axis moves the amount equivalent to
the set data (machine error compensation unit). The entire coordinate system value, including the basic
machine coordinate system, will not change.
[Operation]
When the "Ext. machine coordinate system offset data" (R5700 to 15) is set, the axis will move the
amount equivalent to that set value.
The entire coordinate system value, including the basic machine coordinate system, will not change.
If the changed amount of the set value exceeds the rapid traverse feedrate, the set value turns invalid: the
compensation is executed with the set value unchanged.
<Data range>
80000000 (HEX) to 7FFFFFFF (HEX) (Absolute compensation amount -2147483648 to 2147483647)
Unit: Machine error compensation unit
[Related signals]
(1) Ext. machine coordinate system offset data illegal n-th axis (XA40 to XA47)
B Signal
EACH AXIS MANUAL
R5764 R5780 R5796 R5812
- FEEDRATE B
to 5779 to 5795 to 5811 to 5827
n-TH AXIS
When the each axis manual feedrate B valid signal is valid, designate the manual feedrate for the axis
selected with the manual feedrate B valid signal.
[Cautions]
(1) When the each axis manual feedrate B valid signal is valid, the each axis speed designated with this
register is valid for the manual feedrate of an axis for which the manual feedrate B valid signal is valid.
(2) Cutting override and manual override are invalid for this register's speed.
(3) This register is not related to the dry run speed.
(4) A binary value is directly set for this register. The setting unit is 0.01mm/min (°/min).
(5) This signal is a register independent for each axis.
[Related signals]
(2) Each axis manual feedrate B valid (YC7C)
491
B Signal
USER MACRO INPUT

- R6436, 7 R6444, 5 R6452, 3 R6460, 1
#1032 (PLC -> Controller)
[Function]
This is interface function used to coordinate user PLC to user macro.
(Note) The other signals from R0 to R99 are PLC inputs, but this signal is output to the controller from
PLC.
[Operation]
The data set in file registers Rn and Rn+1 with the user PLCs, can be referred to on the user macro side
with the user macro system variables #1000 to #1031 or #1032.
The relationship between system variable and file register is as follows:
System Points Interface input signal System Points Interface input signal
variable variable
System This correspondence table shows the example

Points Interface input signal
variable for file registers R6436 and R6437.
#1032 32 Register R6436, R6437
#1033 32 Register R6438, R6439
#1034 32 Register R6440, R6441
#1035 32 Register R6442, R6443
File registers R6436 and R6437 correspond to system variables #1000 to #1031, and #1032 (32-bit data).
[Related signals]
(1) User macro input #1033, #1034, #1035 (R6436/6437,R6438/6439,R6440/6441,R6442/6443)
(2) User macro output #1132, #1133, #1134, #1135 (R6372/6373,R6374/6375,R6376/6377,R6378/6379)
492
B Signal
USER MACRO INPUT

- R6438, 9 R6446, 7 R6454, 5 R6462, 3
[Function]
This provides interface function used to coordinate user PLC to user macro.
[Operation]
The data set in file registers Rn and Rn+1 with the user PLCs, can be referred to on the user macro side
with the user macro system variables #1033.
(Example)
Sequence program User macro program
IF [#1000 EQ 0] GOTO 100
ACT
DMOV K1000 R6438 #100 = #1033
ACT
WOR R6436 K1 R6436 N100
Set 1 in #1000.
The #1033(R6438, R6439) data is read into #100
Other than when #1000 is set to 0.
[Related signals]
(1) User macro input #1032, #1034, #1035 (R6436/6437,R6440/6441,R6442/6443)
(2) User macro output #1132, #1133, #1134, #1135 (R6372/6373,R6374/6375,R6376/6377,R6378/6379)
B Signal
USER MACRO INPUT

- R6440, 1 R6448, 9 R6456, 7 R6464, 5
The function, operation, etc. are the same as those of "USER MACRO INPUT #1033".
B Signal
USER MACRO INPUT

- R6442, 3 R6450, 1 R6458, 9 R6466, 7
The function, operation, etc. are the same as those of "USER MACRO INPUT #1033".
493
B Signal
SPINDLE COMMAND
- ROTATION SPEED R7000, 1 R7050, 1 R7100, 1 R7150, 1 R7200, 1 R7250, 1
OUTPUT
[Function]
By setting data of desired spindle speed to this signal, the spindle can be run at that speed.
[Operation]
When this signal is used, operation is same as the case where usual spindle command rotation speed
input signal (R6500, 1) is given. Difference is that when data is set by user PLC, priority is given to that
data over spindle (S) command data specified in automatic operation, or by manual command setting.
User PLC main (medium-speed) operation pattern
• • • • (1) "Spindle command rotation speed input data" is set

to the "output data" at the head of user PLC main
program (controller process).
(2) "Spindle command rotation speed output data" can
be rewritten by user PLC within this interval if
necessary (PLC process).
(3) "Spindle command rotation speed output data" is
processed at the end of user PLC and signal is
given to spindle controller (controller process).
(Note 1) "Spindle command rotation speed output data" is rewritten by user PLC for each scan
(constant).
(Note 2) "Spindle speed override", "Spindle gear selection code 1,2 (GI1, GI2)", "Spindle stop (SSTP)",
"Spindle gear shift (SSFT)" and "Spindle orientation (SORC)" conditions are added to "Spindle
command rotation speed output data" and sent to the spindle controller.
(Note 3) For flow of spindle (S) function command data, data update timing, etc., refer to the section for
normal "Spindle command rotation speed input" signal (R6500, 1).
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle command rotation speed input (R6500, R6501)
(2) Spindle command final data (R6502, R6503)
494
B Signal
SPINDLE COMMAND
- SLSP R7002 R7052 R7102 R7152 R7202 R7252
SELECTION
[Function]
Set which the part system the S command is output from when the multiple-spindle control II is valid.
0: 1st part system
1: 2nd part system
2: 3rd part system
3: 4th part system
(Note) If a setting value exceeds the maximum number of part systems determined by specifications, it
will be interpreted that a selection has not been made.
[Operation]
The S command for a spindle is output as the rotation speed command to the spindle which has been
selected by the "Spindle selection" signal (SWS) ON from the PLC. The selected spindle rotates at the
rotation speed which was output. The spindles which were de-selected by the "Spindle selection" signal
(SWS) OFF continue to rotate at the same rotation speed as the speed immediately before their
de-selection. This allows each spindle to be rotated simultaneously at a different rotation speed. The
"Spindle command selection" signal is used to select which of the spindles is to receive the S command
from which part system.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle selection (SWS: Y18A8)
495
B Signal
- S COMMAND OVERRIDE R7008 R7058 R7108 R7158 R7208 R7258
[Function]
When "Spindle override method selection" signal (SPS) is set to "file register method", override can be
exerted on the spindle rotation speed besides the code method override (SP1 to SP4). Override can be
exerted within range of 0% to 200% (1% increment). The value is set in the file register (R) in binary.
[Operation]
When this function is used, the true spindle speed is obtained by multiplying the originally set spindle
speed by override ratio set with this signal.
Clamp spindle speed is the maximum or minimum speed set with parameters, which depends on "Spindle
gear selection code 1,2" signal (GI1, GI2).
Even when spindle speed exceeds the maximum or minimum speed at the currently selected gear stage,
due to change of override setting, "Spindle gear shift" signal (GR1, GR2) does not automatically change.
GR10 : Applicable override range at gear stage

0 Smini Smax1 Smax2 Smax3 GR20 : Applicable override range at gear stage
G10 GR30 : Applicable override range at gear stage
Smini : Minimum spindle speed (parameter)
G20
Smax1: Maximum spindle speed at gear stage 1
(parameter)
G30
(parameter)
Applicable override range at gear stage 3 (parameter)
(Note) Override is not valid (100%) under the following condition:
(1) "Spindle stop" signal (SSTP) is ON.
(2) During tapping mode.
[Related signals]
(1) Spindle speed override code m (SPn: Y1888)
(2) Spindle override method selection (SPS: Y188F)
(5) Spindle gear shift (SSFT: Y1895)
(6) Spindle orientation (SORC: Y1896)
496
B Signal
MULTI-POINT
- ORIENTATION POSITION R7009 R7059 R7109 R7159 R7209 R7259
DATA
[Function]
This signal, having the following two functions, is issued in respect to the high-speed serial connection
specification spindle controller (spindle drive).
(1) Notification of orientation position to control unit (spindle controller) at orientation command.
Position data where the "Spindle orientation command" (ORC: Y189E) is turned ON.
(2) During multi-point indexing, notification of indexing position during forward run indexing or reverse run
indexing to control unit (spindle controller).
Position data where the "Spindle forward run index" (WRN: Y189C), the "Spindle reverse run index"
(WR1: Y189D) is turned ON.
[Operation]
(1) Orientation command
The orientation position, at which the "Spindle orientation command" (ORC) turns ON, is input.
The values designated with the spindle parameter (SP007 OPST: in-position shift amount for
orientation) and with "Multi-point orientation position data" signal are totaled to determine the
orientation position.
(2) Multi-point indexing
Each time the "Spindle forward run index" (WRN) and "Spindle reverse run index" (WRI) turn ON, the
axis rotates by the amount designated with the multi-point orientation position data.
When using MDS-D series drive unit, command value is handled as 16-bit binary data and its
increment is as follows.
Command increment = 360/36000 [0.01°]
This signal must be validated before the "Spindle orientation command" signal turns ON (at least 100
ms before).
Multi-point orientation
position data (R7009)
Spindle orientation command (ORC)

Spindle forward run index (WRN)
At least 100 ms required.
/Spindle reverse run index (WRI)
[Related signals]
(3) Spindle reverse run index (WRI: Y189D)
497
B Signal
SPINDLE
SYNCHRONIZATION
- R7016 R7066 R7116 R7166 R7216 R7266
BASIC SPINDLE
SELECTION
[Function]
Select the basic spindle to be used for synchronous control from the PLC.
[Operation]
Select the spindle to be controlled as the basic spindle from the serially connected spindles.
(0: 1st spindle), 1: 1st spindle, 2: 2nd spindle, 3: 3rd spindle, 4: 4th spindle, 5: 5th spindle, 6: 6th spindle
(Note 1) If a spindle that is not serially connected is selected, spindle synchronous control will not be
executed.
(Note 2) If "0" is designated, the 1st spindle will be controlled as the basic spindle.
B Signal
SPINDLE
SYNCHRONIZATION
- R7017 R7067 R7117 R7167 R7217 R7267
SYNCHRONOUS SPINDLE
SELECTION
[Function]
Select the synchronous spindle to be used for synchronous control from the PLC.
[Operation]
Select the spindle to be controlled as the synchronous spindle from the serially connected spindles.
(0: 2nd spindle), 1: 1st spindle, 2: 2nd spindle, 3: 3rd spindle, 4: 4th spindle, 5: 5th spindle, 6: 6th spindle
(Note 1) If a spindle that is not serially connected is selected or if the same spindle as the basic spindle is
selected, spindle synchronous control will not be executed.
(Note 2) If "0" is designated, the 2nd spindle will be controlled as the synchronous spindle.
B Signal
SPINDLE
PHASE SHIFT AMOUNT
[Function]
The synchronous spindle's phase shift amount can be designated from the PLC.
[Operation]
Designate the phase shift amount for the synchronous spindle.
Unit: 360°/4096
[Related signals]
(6) Spindle synchronous rotation direction (Y18B2)
498
B Signal
ATC CONTROL
- R10600
PARAMETER
[Function]
Combination of the number of digits for tool No. to be displayed, magazine No. start value, and spindle
and standby tool to be displayed are designated.
[Operation]
(1) Control parameter details
R10600
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Designation of number of digits for tool No. to be displayed

0: T4-digit Display only the last 4 digits of the tool No.
1: T8-digit Arrange the first and last 4 digits of the tool
No. to display in 8 digits.
Designation of the number of spindles and
standby tools to be displayed Magazine No. start value
0: 1 start magazine
00000000: Spindle
(Pot No. starts from 1.)
00000001: Spindle, standby 1 1: 0 start magazine
00000010:Spindle, standby 1 to standby 2
(Pot No. starts from 0.)
00000011:Spindle, standby 1 to standby 3 Pot No. expansion

00000100:Spindle, standby 1 to standby 4 0: Do not set arbitrarily
1: Set arbitrarily
Others: Do not display
Number of tools per magazine
0: Do not set arbitrarily
1: Set arbitrarily
499
(2) Pot No. expansion

This function allows pot head No. for each magazine to be set arbitrarily.
(a) Do not set arbitrarily
The head No. for each magazine is 1 or 0, depending on the setting of ATC control parameter
"magazine No. start value (R10600 bit1)".
(Example 1) 1 start magazine

Set the following R registers.
R10600 : 0x0000
→ Number of digits for tool No. to be displayed : T4-digit
→ Magazine No. start value: 1 start magazine
→ Pot No. expansion : No arbitrary setting
→ Number of tools per magazine : No arbitrary setting
R10610 : 0x000C
→ Number of tools for magazine 1 : 12
(Example 2) 0 start magazine

R10600 : 0x0002
→ Pot No. expansion : No arbitrary setting
R10610 : 0x000C
500
(b) To set arbitrarily

Set pot head No. for each magazine in the "each magazine pot head No. designation" register.
1st magazine pot head No. (R10695)
2nd magazine pot head No. (R10696)
3rd magazine pot head No. (R10697)
4th magazine pot head No. (R10698)
5th magazine pot head No. (R10699)
(Note 1) The head No. for each magazine is the value set in the register for "pot head No. for each
magazine(R10695 to R10699)" regardless of the ATC control parameter "magazine No. start
value (R10600 bit1)"
(Note 2) Numerical value 0 to 8999 can be set in the register for "pot head No. for each magazine
(R10695 to R10699)". When a value outside the range is set, pot head No. is displayed from
1 or 0, depending on the setting of "magazine No. start value (R10600 bit1)".
(Example 1) Pot head No. for each magazine: 10; number of magazines: 12
R10600 : 0x0004
→ Number of digits for tool No. to be displayed: T4-digit
→ Pot No. expansion : Arbitrary setting
R10610 : 0x000C
R10695 : 0x000A
→ Pot head No. for magazine 1: 10
If the pot head No. for each magazine is outside the range of 0 to 8999, follow the setting for
"magazine No. start value".
(Example 2) Pot head No. for each magazine: 9000; number of magazines: 12; magazine No. start
value: 0
R10600 : 0x0006
→ Magazine No. start value : 0 start magazine
→ Pot No. expansion : Arbitrary setting
R10610 : 0x000C
R10695 : 0x2328
→ Pot head No. for magazine 1: 9000
501
(3) Number of tools per magazine

This function allows the number of tools per magazine to be set arbitrarily.
(a) Do not set arbitrarily
There is a maximum of three rows of magazine, and the total number of tools that can be
registered per magazine is 120.
Magazine tool data assignment is fixed.
(b) To set arbitrarily

There is a maximum of five rows of magazine, and the total number of tools that can be registered
for all the magazines is 360.
Set the number of tools per magazine in the "number of magazine designation" register.
(If there are any magazines not being used, set the designation register to 0.)
"Number of magazine designation" register
No.1 magazine ... R10610
The magazine tool data is assigned for the number of tools set in order from No.1 magazine.
502
(4) ATC file register

The file registers used with ATC are as shown below.
Corresponding file (R) register Remarks
Magazine No.1 magazine No.2 magazine No.3 magazine No.4 magazine No.5 magazine (Data type)
T4-digit/T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit T4-digit T8-digit
specifications
ATC control R10600 ← ← ← ← ← ← ← ← ←
parameter
AUX data R10604 ← ← ← ← ← ← ← ← ← Binary
(0 to 99)
Number of R10610 ← R10611 ← R10612 ← R10613 ← R10614 ← Binary
magazines
designation
Pointer R10615 ← R10616 ← R10617 ← R10618 ← R10619 ← Binary
designation
Spindle tool R10620 R10620 R10630 R10630 R10640 R10640 R10650 R10650 R10660 R10660 BCD
R10621 R10631 R10641 R10651 R10661
Standby 1 tool R10621 R10622 R10631 R10632 R10641 R10642 R10651 R10652 R10661 R10662 BCD
R10623 R10633 R10643 R10653 R10663
R10625 R10635 R10645 R10655 R10665
R10627 R10637 R10647 R10657 R10667
R10629 R10639 R10649 R10659 R10669
Spindle tool D R10670 ← R10675 ← R10680 ← R10685 ← R10690 ← Binary
Standby 1 tool D R10671 ← R10676 ← R10681 ← R10686 ← R10691 ← Binary
Pot head No. for R10695 ← R10696 ← R10697 ← R10698 ← R10699 ← Binary
each magazine
Magazine Pot 1 • Do not set arbitrarily
tool data (MG1) There is a maximum of three magazines, and the maximum number of tools per magazine is
: 120. Magazine tool data assignment is fixed.
Refer to "(4)-(a) Example of tool data assignment when not setting arbitrarily" for details.
Magazine Pot 1
• To set arbitrarily
tool data :
There is a maximum of five magazines, and the total number of tools for all the magazines is
(Aux. D)
360. The tool data assignment varies between R10700 and R11779.
Refer to "(4)-(b) Example of tool data assignment when setting arbitrarily" for details on
assignment method.
503
(a) Example of tool data assignment when not setting arbitrarily

There is a maximum of three magazines, and the maximum number of tools per magazine is 120.
The tool data assignment is fixed between R10700 and R11779 as shown below.
specifications
Magazine Pot 1 R10700 R10700 R11060 R11060 R11420 R11420 − − − − BCD
tool data (MG1) R10701 R11061 R11421
Pot 2 R10701 R10702 R11061 R11062 R11421 R11422 − − − − BCD
(MG2) R10703 R11063 R11423
Pot 3 R10702 R10704 R11062 R11064 R11422 R11424 − − − − BCD
(MG3) R10705 R11065 R11425
Pot 119 R10818 R10936 R11178 R11296 R11538 R11656 − − − − BCD

(MG119) R10937 R11297 R11657
Pot 120 R10819 R10938 R11179 R11298 R11539 R11658 − − − − BCD
(MG120) R10939 R11299 R11659
Magazine Pot 1 R10940 ← R11300 ← R11660 ← − − − − Binary
tool data Pot 2 R10941 ← R11301 ← R11661 ← − − − − Binary
(Aux. D) Pot 3 R10942 ← R11302 ← R11662 ← − − − − Binary
Pot 119 R11058 ← R11418 ← R11778 ← − − − − Binary

Pot 120 R11059 ← R11419 ← R11779 ← − − − − Binary
504
(b) Example of tool data assignment when setting arbitrarily

There is a maximum of five magazines, and the total number of tools for all the magazines is 360.
The tool data assignment varies between R10700 and R11779.
The magazine tool data is assigned for the number of tools set in order from No.1 magazine.
(Example) Number of magazines: 5 magazines
Number of tools: No.1 magazine [100 tools], No.2 to No.5 magazines [50 tools each]
specifications
Magazine Pot 1 R10700 R10700 R11000 R11000 R11150 R11150 R11300 R11300 R11450 R11450 BCD
tool data (MG1) R10701 R11001 R11151 R11301 R11451
Pot 2 R10701 R10702 R11001 R11002 R11151 R11152 R11301 R11302 R11451 R11452 BCD
(MG2) R10703 R11003 R11153 R11303 R11453
(MG3) R10705 R11005 R11155 R11305 R11455
(MG49) R10797 R11097 R11247 R11397 R11547
(MG50) R10799 R11099 R11249 R11399 R11549
Pot 99 R10798 R10896 − − − − − − − − BCD

(MG99) R10897
Pot 100 R10799 R10898 − − − − − − − − BCD
(MG100) R10899
Magazine Pot 1 R10900 ← R11100 ← R11250 ← R11400 ← R11550 ← Binary
tool data Pot 2 R10901 ← R11101 ← R11251 ← R11401 ← R11551 ← Binary
(Aux. D) Pot 3 R10902 ← R11102 ← R11252 ← R11402 ← R11552 ← Binary
Pot 49 R10948 ← R11148 ← R11298 ← R11448 ← R11598 ← Binary

Pot 50 R10949 ← R11149 ← R11299 ← R11449 ← R11599 ← Binary
Pot 99 R10998 ← − − − − − − − − Binary

Pot 100 R10999 ← − − − − − − − − Binary
[Related signals]
Display tool selection parameter (R10603)
505
B Signal
DISPLAY TOOL SELECTION
- R10603
PARAMETER
[Function]
Whether or not to display spindle standby is designated.
[Operation]
R10603 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Spare Selection of display tool

000000: Spindle, standby 1
Others: Do not display
Selection of display 1: Display tool

0: Do not display tool
[Related signals]
ATC control parameter (R10600)
506
6.5 Explanation of Special Relays (SM**)
6.5 Explanation of Special Relays (SM**)
B Signal
- TEMPERATURE RISE SM16
If the alarm is displayed when an overheat alarm is detected in the control unit or communication terminal‚
the overheat signal will be output simultaneously. If the machine is in automatic operation‚ the operation
will be continued‚ but restarting will not be possible after resetting or stopping with M02/M30. (Starting will
be possible after block stop or feed hold.)
For details on the operation, etc., refer to "Temperature warning cause".
CAUTION
If the temperature rise detection function is invalidated with the parameters, the control could be
disabled when the temperature is excessive. This could result in machine damage or personal injuries
due to runaway axis, and could damage the device. Enable the detection function for normal use.
[Related signals]
(1) Temperature warning cause (R57)
(2) Control unit temperature (R60)
507
6.6 Explanations for Each Application
6.6.1 IO Link
This function makes it possible to send and receive various data between multiple NCs with packet
communication using the HDLC function.
This function uses a communication channel separate from that for the conventional communication
between the NC and operation board.
Data can be exchanged between one master NC and up to four slave NC stations.
The master and slaves are set with the rotary switch (NCN0) on the expansion card
(HR531/HR532/HR534/HR535).
Rotary switch settings

Setting position Function explanation
0 Master station for normal use or IO link
1 Slave station 1 for IO link
Operation
The R registers are used for the input/output data.

The same R registers are used as shown below of the master and slaves.
Input data Output data

Master side Slave side Master side Slave side
R10100 to Input 0 R10140 to Output 0 Output
Not used
R10107 (common for all slaves) R10147 (common for all slaves) (each slave station)
R10108 to Input 1 Input R10148 to Output 1
Not used
R10115 (slave 1 station) (each slave station) R10155 (slave 1 station)
R10116 to Input 2 R10156 to Output 2
Not used Not used
R10123 (slave 2 station) R10163 (slave 2 station)
Not used Not used
Not used Not used
508
Master side Slave side
Send buffer Receive buffer
Address, etc. Address, etc.

output register No .0 No .0 input register
R10140 to R10147 Common Common R10100 to R10107

Slave 1
R10148 to R10155 No .1 No .1 R10108 to R10115
R10156 to R10163 Slave 1 Slave 1

R10110 to R10107
R10164 to R10171 No .2 No .2 Slave 2
R10108 to R10115
R10172 to R10179 Slave 2 Slave 2
No .3 No .3 R10100 to R10107
Slave 3
Slave 3 Slave 3 R10108 to R10115
No .4 No .4
R10100 to R10107
Slave 4 Slave 4 Slave 4
R10108 to R10115
FCS FCS
Flow of input/output data (master to slave)
Send buffer Receive buffer
Address, etc. Address, etc.

output register No .1 No .1 input register
R10140 to R10147 Slave 1 Slave 1 R10100 to R10107 Slave 1
R10172 to R10179 FCS FCS
R10164 to R10171 Address, etc.

Address, etc. R10100 to R10107 Slave 2
R10156 to R10163 No .2
No .2
R10148 to R10155 Slave 2

Slave 2
FCS R10100 to R10107 Slave 3
FCS
Address, etc.
Address, etc.
No .3
No .3 R10100 to R10107 Slave 4
Slave 3
Slave 3
FCS
FCS
Address, etc.
Address, etc.
No .4
No .4
Slave 4
Slave 4
FCS
FCS
Flow of input/output data (slave to master)
509
Communication status
The communication status can be confirmed with either the master or slave by using the file register.
The input/output data is not updated when communication is cutoff.
Current value: The bit for the current communication client is set.
History value: The bit for the client with which communication was established in the past is turned ON.
(Only the master or slave is set at the ladder cycle.)
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Slave 4
Slave 3
Slave 2
Slave 1
Slave 4
Slave 3
Slave 2
Slave 1
Master
Master
History value Current value
Precautions
(1) Communication starts when the power for the master and slave is turned ON.
(2) For this communication, there must always be one master station. Data cannot be exchanged between
slave stations.
(3) An alarm will not occur even if the communication is cut off.
510
6.6.2 MELSEC Bus Connection
An external PLC (Mitsubishi MELSEC-A/QnA Series) can be connected with a bus.
Assigning the input/output I/F
The NC's internal buffer memory is configured of 112 words (bit data: 256 points, word data: 96 words) and
144 output words (bit data: 256 points, word data: 128 words). The input data sent from the MELSEC is
stored in 000 to 06F, and is set in the NC input (X1E00 to X1EFF, R10200 to R10295) in that image.
The data set in NC output (Y1E00 to X1EFF, R10400 to R10527) by the built-in PLC is stored in the buffer
memory 070 to FF in that image, and is sent to the MELSEC.
Hexadecimal Buffer memory

000 X1E0F • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • X1E00
PC :
Bit data
16 words
:
X1EFF • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • X1EF0
NC
010
R10200
:
TO 96 words
command :
Word data
PC R10295
NC
070
X1E0F • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • X1E00
NC :
16 words
Bit data
:
X1EFF • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • X1EF0
PC
080
R10400
:
128 words :
R10527
FROM NC
Word data
command
PC
0FF
R register
If the FROM/TO command is not executed within 500ms (when R10190 value is 48 or more), emergency
stop will be applied.
The time that there is no interrupt request from MELSEC is counted and stored in the R register.
R10190: Current timeout counter
R10191: Maximum timeout counter after power ON
R10192: Maximum timeout counter after system is started up (this is backed up)
511
6.6.3 MR-J2-CT Link
The MR-J2-CT link function connects the NC and MR-J2-CT (auxiliary axis), and controls up to six
MR-J2-CT axes using command signals from the NC.
The number of connected MR-J2-CT axes is set with the parameters.
# Item Details Setting range
1044 auxno MR-J2-CT Specify the number of MR-J2-CTs connected. 0 to 6
(PR) Connections
(Note) The MR-J2-CT will not start up if the set number of axes is not greater than the number of actual
axes.
List of signals
(a) NC → MR-J2-CT (R9950 to R9985, R9998)
J2CT
Abbrev. Signal name
R9954 R9960 R9966 R9972 R9978 R9984 CTCML J2CT control command position (L)
R9955 R9961 R9967 R9973 R9979 R9985 CTCMH J2CT control command position (H)
J2CT control command 4 (R9950: CTCM4) J2CT control command 3 (R9951: CTCM3)
bit Abbrev. Name bit Abbrev. Name
bit0 OV1 Override 1 bit0 ST1 Station selection 1
bit7 OV Override valid bit7 ST128 Station selection 128
bit8 Spare bit8 ST256 Station selection 256
bit9 Spare bit9 Spare
bitA Spare bitA Spare
bitB Spare bitB Spare
bitC Spare bitC Spare
bitD Spare bitD Spare
bitE Spare bitE Spare
bitF Spare bitF Spare
512
J2CT control command 2 (R9952: CTCM2) J2CT control command 1 (R9953: CTCM1)
bit0 ST Operation start bit0 *SVR Servo OFF
bit1 DIR Rotation direction bit1 QEMG PLC emergency stop
Arbitrary point feed
bit2 STS bit2 *PRT1 Data protect 1
command valid
Stopper positioning
bit3 PUS bit3 MRST MC reset
command valid
Incremental feed
bit4 MP1 bit4 *IT+ Interlock +
magnification 1
Incremental feed
bit5 MP2 bit5 *IT- Interlock -
magnification 2
Operation parameter
bit6 PR1 bit6 RDF Ready OFF
selection 1
Operation parameter
bit7 PR2 bit7 H Handle mode
selection 2
bit8 Spare bit8 AUT Automatic operation mode
bit9 Spare bit9 MAN Manual operation mode
bitA Spare bitA J Jog mode
bitB Spare bitB ZRN Reference position mode
bitC Spare bitC
bitD Spare bitD AZS Zero point initialization mode
bitE Spare bitE ZST Reference pint setting
bitF Spare bitF S Incremental mode
J2CT control command position (L) J2CT control command position (H)
(R9954: CTCML) (R9955: CTCMH)
Arbitrary coordinate Arbitrary coordinate
bit0 to bit0 to
(low-order) (high-order)
bit15 bit15
1/1000mm (°) unit 1/1000mm (°) unit
J2CT operation adjustment mode valid (R9998)

bit Abbrev. Name
bit0 - J2CT operation adjustment mode valid (common for all axes)
513
(b) MR-J2-CT → NC (R9900 to R9935, R9948)

J2CT
Abbrev. Signal name
R9904 R9910 R9916 R9922 R9928 R9934 J2CT control machine position (L)
R9905 R9911 R9917 R9923 R9929 R9935 J2CT control machine position (H)
J2CT status 4 (R9900: CTST4) J2CT status 3 (R9901: CTST3)

bit0 PSW1 Position switch 1 bit0 ST01 Station position 1
bit8 PMV In positioning operation bit8 ST0256 Station position 256
bit9 PFN Positioning completed bit9 Spare
bitA PSI In stopper bitA Spare
514
J2CT status 2 (R9902: CTST2) J2CT status 1 (R9903: CTST1)

bit0 AUTO bit0 RDY Servo ready
mode
bit1 MANO In manual operation mode bit1 INP In-position
bit2 JO In jog mode bit2 SMZ Smoothing zero
bit3 ARNN In reference position return bit3 AX1 Axis selection output
In reference position return
bit4 ZRNO bit4 MVP In axis plus motion
mode
bit5 bit5 MVM In axis minus motion
In zero point initialization
bit6 AZSO bit6 TLQ In torque limit
mode
bit7 SO In incremental mode bit7 ADJ Adjusting machine
bit8 AL1 MC alarm 1 bit8 ZP Reference position reached
bit9 AL2 MC alarm 2 bit9 RST In reset
bitA AL4 MC alarm 4 bitA HO In handle mode
bitB BAL Battery drop bitB MA Controller ready completion
Absolute position power
bitC ABS bitC SA Servo ready completion
shutoff movement over
bitD ZSN Absolute position loss bitD JSTA Automatic set position reached
Initialization setting
bitE ZSF bitE JST Set position reached
completed
Initialization setting error
bitF ZSE bitF NEAR Near set position
completed
J2CT in operation adjustment mode (R9948)

bit AV Name bit AV Name
bit0 - J2CT in operation adjustment mode 1st axis bit4 - J2CT in operation adjustment mode 5th axis
bit1 - J2CT in operation adjustment mode 2nd axis bit5 - J2CT in operation adjustment mode 6th axis
bit2 - J2CT in operation adjustment mode 3rd axis
bit3 - J2CT in operation adjustment mode 4th axis
515
6.6.4 Tool Life Management Interface (M system)
The tool life is managed based on the spindle tool No. and standby tool No.
The spindle tool No. is used for the screen display data and for the tool for which the tool life is to be
managed. The life management data for the tool to be managed is set in the spindle tool data.
The standby tool data is used as screen data.
Details
Standby tool: Tool No.

(R11802-R11803)
Set tool No. of standby tool in R12200 and R12201
when changing a tool (User PLC).
Spindle tool No. Tool data file

NC (NC internal data)
(R12200-R12201)
Standby tool No.

When the spindle No. is changed, NC regards that
(R12202-R12203)
the spindle tool has been changed and searches
for new tool data in the tool data file.
Spindle tool data Life management and tool compensation are
(R11824-R11847) conducted based on this data.
The tool data is output to R11824 to R11847 for
each user PLC’s main cycle.
516
NC→PLC interface signal
B Signal
IN TOOL LIFE
- TLFO XC2B XD6B XEAB XFEB
MANAGEMENT
[Function]
This signal is output during the tool life management.
[Operation]
In tool life management signal turns ON when the tool life management (#1103 T_Life) on the parameter is
ON.
B Signal
- TOOL LIFE OVER TLOV XC2E XD6E XEAE XFEE
[Function]
This signal notifies that a tool has reached to its lifetime (usage data ≥ life data).
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when the usage data of tool is same as or has exceeded the life data. Note that this
signal is only output and does not stop automatic operation or other operations of the controller.

(1) The last tool in the group currently selected has reached to its lifetime (Usage data ≥ life data). (Same
timing as count up of usage data)
(2) "Tool skip" signal has been input in respect to the last tool in the group currently selected.
(3) All tools in the group have reached to their lifetimes at the time of group selection. (Same timing as tool
function strobe 1 signal)

(1) The group selection has been completed.
(At T command. Note that if the next selected group is a life group, the signal remains ON.)
(2) The usage data for the group currently selected is cleared.
(In case of "tool change reset signal" (TRST) is input, etc.)
517
B Signal
- TOOL GROUP LIFE OVER XC2F XD6F XEAF XFEF
[Function]
This signal notifies that all tools in the tool group have reached to their lifetimes.
This signal is valid only for tool life management II.
[Operation]
The signal turns ON when all tools in the group mounted on the spindle have reached to their lifetimes or
malfunction. Note that this signal is only output and does not stop automatic operation or other operations
of the controller.

(1) The last tool in the group mounted to the spindle has reached to its lifetime (Usage data ≥ life data).
(Same timing as count up of usage data)
(2) Tool error signal has been input in respect to the last tool in the group mounted on the spindle.
(3) All tools in the group have reached to their lifetimes at time of mounting tools on the spindle.

(1) Another group of tools is mounted on the spindle.
(Note that if all tools of the group mounted have reached to their lifetimes, the signal remains ON.)
(2) The usage data for the group mounted on the spindle is cleared.
(3) The tool life management has been invalidated.
[Caution]
When this signal is used in the tool life management II, refer to the next ladder cycle after the spindle tool is
changed. (This signal will not change in the same cycle in which the spindle tool was changed.)
B Signal
M FUNCTION STROBE XC60 XDA0 XEE0 X1020
- MF1 to 4 to 3 to 3 to 3 to 3
1 to 4
NC sends these signals to PLC when M function (M code) is executed.
Refer to the section on "M function strobe 1 to 4 (MF1 to 4)" for details.
B Signal
T FUNCTION STROBE XC68 XDA8 XEE8 X1028
- TF1 to 4 to B to B to B to B
1 to 4
NC sends these signals to PLC when output of tool data for spare tools is completed.
Refer to the section on "T function strobe 1 to 4" (TF1 to 4) for details.
518
B Signal
R504 R704 R904 R1104
- M CODE DATA 1 to 4 to 11 to 11 to 11 to 11
These signals indicate No. designated with M code.
Refer to the section on "M code data 1 to 4" for details.
B Signal
R536 R736 R936 R1136
- T CODE DATA 1 to 4 to 43 to 43 to 43 to 43
These signals indicate No. designated with T code.
Refer to the section on "T code data 1 to 4" for details.
B Signal
GROUP IN TOOL LIFE
- R567 R767 R967 R1167
MANAGEMENT
This signal outputs group No. currently in life management with the tool life management II.
B Signal
- TOOL LIFE USAGE DATA R628,9 R828,9 R1028,9 R1228,9
This signal outputs usage data of tools currently in use with the tool life management II. (When multiple
compensation Nos. are used, the total usage data per compensation No. is output.)
B Signal
NUMBER OF REGISTERED
- TOOL LIFE CONTROL R630 R830 R1030 R1230
TOOLS
This signal indicates number of tools currently in life management.
519
Standby tool data

$1 $2 $3 $4 Name Details
R11800 R11850 R11900 R11950 T life mgmt Group No. for standby tool
R11801 R11851 R11901 R11951 Standby tool: Group No.
R11802 R11852 R11902 R11952 Standby tool: Tool No. Tool No. for standby tool
R11803 R11853 R11903 R11953
R11804 R11854 R11904 R11954 Standby tool: Tool data Flag/Status for standby tool
flag/Status
R11805 R11855 R11905 R11955 Standby tool: Auxiliary Auxiliary data for standby tool
data
R11806 R11856 R11906 R11956 Standby tool: Cumulative Cumulative usage data for standby tool
R11807 R11857 R11907 R11957 usage time
R11808 R11858 R11908 R11958 Standby tool: Service Service lifetime for standby tool
R11809 R11859 R11909 R11959 lifetime
R11810 R11860 R11910 R11960 Standby tool: Cumulative Cumulative usage count for standby
usage count tool
R11811 R11861 R11911 R11961 Standby tool: Service life Service life count for standby tool
count
R11812 R11862 R11912 R11962 Standby tool: Cumulative Cumulative usage wear amount for
R11813 R11863 R11913 R11963 usage wear amount standby tool
R11814 R11864 R11914 R11964 Standby tool: Service life Service life wear amount for standby
R11815 R11865 R11915 R11965 wear amount tool
R11816 R11866 R11916 R11966 Standby tool: Length Length compensation amount for
R11817 R11867 R11917 R11967 compensation amount standby tool
R11818 R11868 R11918 R11968 Standby tool: Radius Radius compensation amount for
R11819 R11869 R11919 R11969 compensation amount standby tool
R11820 R11870 R11920 R11970 Standby tool: Length wear Length wear amount for standby tool
R11821 R11871 R11921 R11971 amount
R11822 R11872 R11922 R11972 Standby tool: Radius wear Radius wear amount for standby tool
R11823 R11873 R11923 R11973 amount
520
Active tool data

$1 $2 $3 $4 Name Details
R11824 R11874 R11924 R11974 T life mgmt Group No. for active tool
R11825 R11875 R11925 R11975 Active tool: Group No.
R11826 R11876 R11926 R11976 Active tool: Tool No. Tool No. for active tool
R11827 R11877 R11927 R11977
R11828 R11878 R11928 R11978 Active tool: Tool data Flag/status for active tool
flag/Status
R11829 R11879 R11929 R11979 Active tool: Auxiliary data Auxiliary data for active tool
R11830 R11880 R11930 R11980 Active tool: Cumulative Cumulative usage time for active tool
R11831 R11881 R11931 R11981 usage time
R11832 R11882 R11932 R11982 Active tool: Service Service lifetime for active tool
R11833 R11883 R11933 R11983 lifetime
R11834 R11884 R11934 R11984 Active tool: Cumulative Cumulative usage count for active tool
usage count
R11835 R11885 R11935 R11985 Active tool: Service life Service life count for active tool
count
R11836 R11886 R11936 R11986 Active tool: Cumulative Cumulative usage wear amount for
R11837 R11887 R11937 R11987 usage wear amount active tool
R11838 R11888 R11938 R11988 Active tool: Service life Service life wear amount for active tool
R11839 R11889 R11939 R11989 wear amount
R11840 R11890 R11940 R11990 Active tool: Length Length compensation amount for
R11841 R11891 R11941 R11991 compensation amount active tool
R11842 R11892 R11942 R11992 Active tool: Radius Radius compensation amount for
R11843 R11893 R11943 R11993 compensation amount active tool
R11844 R11894 R11944 R11994 Active tool: Length wear Length wear amount for active tool
R11845 R11895 R11945 R11995 amount
R11846 R11896 R11946 R11996 Active tool: Radius wear Radius wear amount for active tool
R11847 R11897 R11947 R11997 amount
521
PLC→NC interface signal
B Signal
AUTOMATIC MACHINE AMLK1 to
- Y8A0 to 7 Y8A8 to F Y8B0 to 7 Y8B8 to F
LOCK n-TH AXIS 8
While this signal is being received, the tool life management is not performed.
Refer to the section on "Automatic machine lock n-th axis" (AMLK1 to8) for details.
B Signal
- SINGLE BLOCK SBK YC12 YD52 YE92 YFD2
Refer to the section on "Single block" (SBK) for details.
B Signal
- DRY RUN DRN YC15 YD55 YE95 YFD5
Refer to the section on "Dry run" (DRN) for details.
B Signal
- M FUNCTION FINISH 1,2 FIN1,2 YC1E,F YD5E,F YE9E,F YFDE,F
Execution of the machining program will be held until this signal is received.
Refer to the section on "M function finish 1,2" (FIN1,2) for details.
B Signal
MISCELLANEOUS
- AFL YC5A YD9A YEDA Y101A
FUNCTION LOCK
Refer to the section on "Miscellaneous function lock" (AFL) for details.
522
B Signal
- TOOL ALARM 1 TAL1 YC88 YDC8 YF08 Y1048
[Function]
This signal sets the tool data status during tool life management to status 3 (Tool alarm 1).
[Operation]
By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, status of tool data can be changed to "3".
This signal is validated when tool life management input signal (YC8B) is ON.
B Signal
- TOOL ALARM 2 TAL2 YC89 YDC9 YF09 Y1049
[Function]
This signal sets the tool data status during tool life management to status 4 (Tool alarm 2).
[Operation]
By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, status of tool data can be changed to "4".
B Signal
- USAGE DATA COUNT VALID TCEF YC8A YDCA YF0A Y104A
[Function]
This signal validates tool life count during the tool life management.
[Operation]
The tool life count (usage time or usage count corresponding to tool) is validated in the tool life
management specification.
B Signal
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT
- TLF1 YC8B YDCB YF0B Y104B
INPUT
[Function]
This signal validates the tool life management.
[Operation]
By turning ON the signal in the tool life management specification, the tool life management process is
executed.
523
B Signal
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT
- R2588 R2788 R2988 R3188
DATA SORT
This signal is a flag for tool life data sort necessary/unnecessary.
B Signal
TOOL GROUP NO.
- R2590,1 R2790,1 R2990,1 R3190,1
DESIGNATION
[Function]
The group No. is designated when clearing usage data of a group in which the tool life has been exceeded
with the tool life management II or when forcibly changing the tool currently in use.
[Operation]
The group designation range is as follows.
For group designation: 1 to 9999 of group No.
For all groups: 65535(all 1)
B Signal
- SPINDLE TOOL NO. R12200,1 R12210,1 R12220,1 R12230,1
This signal indicates spindle No. in use.
B Signal
- STANDBY TOOL NO. R12202,3 R12212,3 R12222,3 R12232,3
This signal indicates standby tool No.
524
6.6.5 Tool Life Management Interface (L system)
The tool life is managed based on usage time and usage count of tools.
B Signal
IN TOOL LIFE
- TLFO XC2B XD6B XEAB XFEB
MANAGEMENT
[Function]
This signal is output during the tool life management.
[Operation]
In tool life management signal turns ON when the tool life management (#1103 T_Life) on the parameter is
ON.
B Signal
- TOOL LIFE OVER TLOV XC2E XD6E XEAE XFEE
[Function]
<For tool life management I>
This signal notifies that a tool has reached to its lifetime (Usage data ≥ Life data).
<For tool life management II>
This signal notifies that all tools in the tool group have reached to their lifetimes.
[Operation]
<For tool life management I>
The signal turns ON when usage data of tool is same as or has exceeded the life data. Note that this
signal is only output and does not stop automatic operation or other operations of the controller.
<For tool life management II>
This signal turns ON when usage data of tools in a same group is same as or has exceeded the life data.
Note that this signal is only output and does not stop automatic operation or other operations of the
controller.

(1) The last tool in the group currently selected has reached to its lifetime (Usage data ≥ life data). (Same
(2) "Tool skip" signal has been input in respect to the last tool in the group currently selected.
(3) All tools in the group have reached to their lifetimes at the time of group selection. (Same timing as tool
function strobe 1 signal)

(1) The group selection has been completed.
(At T command. Note that if the next selected group is a life group, the signal remains ON.)
(In case of "tool change reset signal" (TRST) is input, etc.)
525
B Signal
- NEW TOOL CHANGE TCRQ XC94 XDD4 XF14 X1054
[Function]
This signal notifies that a new tool (unused tool) in the group is selected in the tool life management II.
[Operation]
(1) The tool selected by T command tool selection is unused (status 0).

(1) When T command is completed due to the M function finish signal (FIN1, FIN2).
B Signal
- LIFE PREDICTION XC96 XDD6 XF16 X1056
[Function]
This signal notifies when remaining data, which is calculated by subtracting usage data from service life
data, has reached its remaining life set value.
[Operation]
The life prediction is valid when the basic specification parameter "#1277 ext13 bit1" is 1. The signal will
not be output when the remaining life data is 0 or larger than the life data.
Signal output judgment condition varies depending on the following parameter setting.
#1277 ext13 bit2 Switching the timing of the life prediction signal output
0: "Life data – usage data = remaining life data"
1: "Life data – usage data ≤ remaining life data"
#1277 ext13 bit3 Tool for which the life prediction signal is output
0: The signal is output for each tool.
1: The signal is output for the last tool of a group.

(1) Remaining life (life data – usage data) of the tool has reached to its remaining life setting value. (Same
(2) Remaining life (life data – usage data of the tool has reached to its remaining life setting value at the
time of tool selection. (Same timing as TF output)

(1) Group selection has completed.
(At T command. Note that if the next selected group has a condition of turning ON the signal, the signal
remains ON.)
(2) Tool has reached to its lifetime.
(Same timing as count up of usage data)
(In case that "tool change reset signal" (TRST) is input, etc.)
526
B Signal
GROUP IN TOOL LIFE
- R567 R767 R967 R1167
MANAGEMENT
This signal outputs group No. currently in life management with the tool life management II.
B Signal
- TOOL LIFE USAGE DATA R628,9 R828,9 R1028,9 R1228,9
This signal output usage data of tools currently being used with the tool life management II. (When multiple
compensation Nos. are used, the total usage data per compensation No. is output.)
B Signal
- TOOL-SKIP TAL1 YC88 YDC8 YF08 Y1048
[Function]
Set the tool data status during tool life management to status 3 (tool-skip).
[Operation]
By turning ON the signal while tool life management specification is valid, status of tool data can be
changed to "3".
B Signal
- USAGE DATA COUNT VALID TCEF YC8A YDCA YF0A Y104A
[Function]
This signal validates tool life count during the tool life management.
[Operation]
The tool life count (usage time or usage count corresponding to tool) is validated with the tool life
management specification.
527
B Signal
- TOOL CHANGE RESET TRST YC8C YDCC YF0C Y104C
[Function]
This signal is used to clear all tool usage data in a group with the tool life management II.
[Operation]
Select with the tool group No. designation (file register R2590, 2591) whether all groups that have
exceeded their lifetimes or specific group to be cleared.
After this signal is input, the first tool of the group will be selected at the next group selection.
(Note) When the tool change reset or the tool skip is performed on the group currently selected, usage
data count will be carried out on the tool used at the time of signal input until the next tool selection.
Therefore, if a tool selected needs to be changed along with the signal input, select a group again.
However, a tool may not be selected due to a preceding process if there is no movement command
up to the next group selection after the signal input. In this case, contents of the preceding process
can be invalidated by turning ON the "recalculation request" (CRQ) signal before selecting the
group.
[Related signal]
(1) Recalculation request (CRQ: YC2B)
B Signal
TOOL GROUP NO.
- R2590,1 R2790,1 R2990,1 R3190,1
DESIGNATION
[Function]
The group No. is designated when clearing usage data of a group that has exceeded lifetime with the tool
life management II or when forcibly changing tools currently in use.
[Operation]
The group designation range is as follows.
For group designation: 1 to 9999 of group No.
For all groups: 65535(all 1)
528
6.6.6 PLC Constants
The parameters #18001 to #18150 can be used as PLC constants.

The setting range is ±8 digits (-99999999 to 99999999)
When the data is set while the parameters #18001 to #18150 are displayed, the set data is set in the file
register and backed up.
If the data is set at R register from the PLC side, the screen display will not change. To change the display,
move to another screen and then select the PLC constants screen.
Corresponding file register

#
HIGH side LOW side
18001 R7501 R7500
18002 R7503 R7502
18003 R7605 R7604
: : :
: : :
: : :
18049 R7797 R7796
18050 R7799 R7798
(1) Parameter input/output

The PLC constant data can be input and output with the parameters.
PLC constants are output with N1 to N150.
529
6.6.7 External Search
External search is a function that searches the machining program according to the machining program
storage device, program No., sequence No., block No. designated from the user PLC.
Details
Flow of process for the external search (the 1st part system) is shown below.
NC User PLC
(4)
Set search result R500 External search status Check with error check, etc
R2525 Device No. Set the device No.

R2526 (1)
Program No. Set the program No.
R2527
R2528
Sequence No. Set the sequence No.
R2529
R2530
Block No. Set the block No.
R2531
(3) Search process External search (2)

execution strobe signal ON
(5) External search External search (6)

finished signal ON strobe signal OFF
(7) External search

finished signal OFF
[Operation]
(1) The user PLC sets the device, program No., sequence No., and block No.
(2) The user PLC sets the external search strobe signal ON.
(3) The NC searches for the target machining program from the designated device, program No.,
sequence No., and block No.
(4) The NC sets the search results as the external search status.
(5) The NC turns the external search finished signal ON.
(6) The user PLC turns the external search strobe signal OFF.
(7) The NC turns the external search finished signal OFF.
530
NC→PLC Interface signals
Signal name Part system No.

$1 $2 $3 $4
EXTERNAL SEARCH FINISHED XC1D XD5D XE9D XFDD
EXTERNAL SEARCH STATUS R500 R700 R900 R1100
(1) External search finished (XC1D)

This turns ON when the external search is finished. This also turns ON when an error occurs.
This signal turns OFF when the "external search strobe" signal is turned OFF from the user PLC.
(2) External search status (R500)

The status at the end of the external search is output.
Refer to "External search status" for the details on status value.
PLC→NC Interface signals
Signal name Part system No.

$1 $2 $3 $4
EXTERNAL SEARCH DEVICE NO. R2525 R2725 R2925 R3125
EXTERNAL SEARCH PROGRAM NO. R2526 R2726 R2926 R3126
R2527 R2727 R2927 R3127
EXTERNAL SEARCH SEQUENCE NO. R2528 R2728 R2928 R3128
R2529 R2729 R2929 R3129
EXTERNAL SEARCH BLOCK NO. R2530 R2730 R2930 R3130
R2531 R2731 R2931 R3131
EXTERNAL SEARCH STROBE YC1D YD5D YE9D YFDD
(1) External search device No. (R2525)

The device storing the machining program to be searched is designated with a No.
Device number Device
0 Memory
1 HD (D drive)
2 IC card (E drive)
3 Floppy disk (A drive)
4 High-speed program server
5 Tape (RS232C)
(2) External search program No. (R2526, R2527)

Designate the program No. of the machining program to be searched as a binary.
The setting range is 1 to 99999999 (8 digits).
(3) External search sequence No. (R2528, R2529)
Designate the sequence No. of the machining program to be searched as a binary.
531
(4) External search block No. (R2530, R2531)

Designate the block No. as a binary.
(5) External search strobe (YC1D)
The NC starts the external search at the rising edge of this signal.
The combinations of designation conditions and correspondence of the search blocks are shown below.
Under each condition, the search block + block with designated block No. are searched.
Condition Search block

Program No. Sequence No.
Designated Designated Designated sequence No. for designated program
Designated Not designated (=0) Head of designated program
Not designated (=0) Designated Designated sequence No. in currently selected program
Not designated (=0) Not designated (=0) Error: 4 (Refer to "External search status")
Timing chart
The timing chart for the external search is shown below.
External search strobe

(PLC→NC）
Processing external search

(NC internal status)
External search finished signal

(NC→PLC)
External search status

(NC→PLC)
532
External search status
The correspondence of the external search status values and details output from the NC based on the
external search is shown below.
External
search status Details Remedy
value
0 Normally finished -------------
1 Operation search is being carried out Wait for other function’s operation search to
finish before searching.
2 Search was attempted during the program Stop the program before searching
operation
3 A non-existed or disabled device was Confirm the presence of the device, and that
designated the device is within the specifications
4 The program file is not designated Designate the program No. or sequence No.
5 The block with the designated program No., -------------
sequence No. or block No. was not found
6 No external search specifications Check the specifications
Precautions
(1) Even if the external search strobe has been already OFF when the NC finishes the external search, the
external search finished signal will turn ON for one cycle of the user PLC.
(2) When the multi-part system program management is valid, the external search is executed for the
machining programs of all part systems in batch with the "External search program No." set to $1.
Note that the "External search sequence No." and the "External search block No." for other part systems
are separately set from $1.
The external search strobe is executed to all part systems in batch with the signal for $1.
The "External search strobe" signal is output for each part system, while the "External search finished"
signal of 1st part system is output as common signal for all part systems.
533
Usage example
An example of the external search ladder for the 1st part system is shown below.
External search start signal

M8000
PLS M8001 External search start pulse
External search start pulse

M8001
MOV D101 R2525 Set external search device No.
DMOV D102 R2526 Set external search program No.
DMOV D104 R2528 Set external search

sequence No.
DMOV D106 R2530 Set external search block No.
SET YC1D Turn external search strobe

External search finished signal signal ON
XC1D
MOV R500 D108 Retrieve external search status
RST YC1D Turn external search strobe

signal OFF
534
6.6.8 PLC Window
PLC Window is a function that uses the "read window" or "write window" arbitrary assigned to the R
register’s user area to read and write the CNC operation status, axis information, parameters and tool data,
etc.
Details
The PLC window has "read window" for read and "write window" for write. The "read window" and "write
window" designate arbitrary position of the R register with parameters (window start R register). Up to three
window areas can be specified simultaneously for both "read window" area and "write window" area. This
enables read/write window area to be split and used even when a part of the user area is fixed.
(R register’s user area: 1500 points for the R8300 to 9799 backup area and 100 points for the R9800 to
9899 non-backup area. Note that window start R register must be an even number.)
16 R registers are used for one read window or write window.
The read window is further divided into the "read control window" and "read data window". The write
window is also divided into the "write control window" and "write data window". Up to four data items can be
successively read or written from the data designated in one read window or write window.
<Reading> R register (user area) (1) PLC turns control signal

ON.
Read window (2) NC receives control
Operation (2) signal, and reads
status Read control (1) designated data in control
(2) window window.
NC (3) PLC
Axis (3) Results of NC read are set
information in read control window
(3) Read data window and read data window.
Parameters
Tool data
Designate arbitrary position

with parameter (R register)
<Writing> R register (user area) (1) PLC turns control signal

ON.
Write window (2) NC receives control
Operation (2) signal, and writes contents
status (1) of write data window
Write control
(2) window corresponding to
NC (3) PLC
Axis designated data in control
information window.
(2) Write data window (3) Results of NC write are
Parameters set in write control
window.
Tool data
Outline drawing for PLC window
535
After reading, whether reading succeeded or failed and the number of data read will be displayed on the
"read control window", and details on the "read data window".
After writing, whether writing succeeded or failed and number of data written will be displayed on the
"writing control window"
When reading/writing is finished, bit0 (Refer to the section on "read window interface", "write window
interface".) turns ON regardless of reading/writing successfulness. Number of data read/written is defined
by the number of data actually read or written. When all reading /writing failed, it shows 0.
When two or more data are read/written, it finishes as soon as reading/writing is failed. For example, when
the second reading/writing is illegal, it finishes on the right spot, even if the third data may be read/written
normally. Consequently, the first data is the only one read/written successfully, resulting the number of data
read/written to 1.
For the PLC window interface, specify the start R register and the number of windows of read window
1,2,3, and write window 1,2,3 in the parameter (R424 to R435). Error status is set in (R37) when an
error is found in the set parameter.
16 R registers are used for one read window or write window.
Signal name Common for part system
PLC window parameter status R37
(1) PLC window parameter error status (R37)

It is set when an error is found in the values set for R424 to R435.
When value is already set, it does not read or write.
Values of
Error details
R37
0x8001 One of the values set for R424 to R427 exceed the setting range.
0x8002 Area of read window exceeds the R resister’s user area 1.
0x8003 Area of write window exceeds the R resister’s user area 1.
0x8004 Write window is found on the read window.
0x8005 Read window is found on the write window.
0x8006 Read window is found on the read window.
0x8007 Write window is found on the write window.
0x8008 Odd number is set for Reading/Writing start R register 1.
0x8102 Area of read window 2 exceeds the R resister’s user area.
0x8103 Area of write window 2 exceeds the R resister’s user area.
0x8202 Area of read window 3 exceeds the R resister’s user area.
0x8203 Area of write window 3 exceeds the R resister’s user area.
The area is exceeded.
(Note) If an error occurs in one of the windows to be used, read/write is not possible in all the windows.
Set from R424 to R435 without letting the window area overlap.
536
PLC→NC interface signals
Common for part systems

Signal name
n=1 n=2 n=3
PLC window Reading start R register n R424 R428 R432
PLC window Number of read windows n R425 R429 R433
PLC window Writing start R register n R426 R430 R434
PLC window Number of write windows n R427 R431 R435
(1) PLC window Reading start R register 1 to 3 (R424, R428, R432)

It sets the PLC window Reading start R register 1 to 3.
The setting range is 8300 to 9884. (Even number only)
R register Details
R424 The value is not checked when the value of R425 is 0.
(2) PLC window Number of read windows 1 to 3 (R425, R429, R433)

It designates the number of read windows 1 to 3.
The setting range is 0 to 100. When it is 0, it does not read.
R register Details
The read windows 1 will be the consecutive area for the number of windows
R425
designated. The read windows start from the R register designated with R424.
R429
R433
(3) PLC window Writing start R register 1 to 3 (R426, R430, R434)
It sets PLC window Writing start R register 1 to 3.
The setting range is 8300 to 9884. (Even number only)
R register Details
(4) PLC window Number of write windows 1 to 3 (R427, R431, R435)

It designates number of write windows 1 to 3.
The setting range is 0 to 100. When it is 0, it does not write.
R register Details
The write windows 1 will be the consecutive area for the number of windows
R427
designated. The write windows start from the R register designated with R426.
R431
R435
537
Read window interface
(1) Read control window (Area where both PLC and NC set data)
R register Item Details
RA Read control Control signal Data will be read by turning bit0 ON. NC and PLC
window read asynchronously. When the reading is
finished, the bit0 under "Status" of the reading
results turns ON. When the bit0 under "Status"
turns ON, turn OFF the bit0 of the control signal.
In case of reading in constant, leave the bit0 ON.
RA+1 Section No. Designate data type
RA+2 Section sub-ID NO. Designate part system No. (1 to 4)
RA+3 Sub-section No. Designate data
RA+4 Read control Data No. Designate axis No. used in the part system and
window variable No., etc.
(The axis No. is 1 to 8)
RA+5 Writing method 0: Read up to 4 consecutive data from the
designated data No.
1: Read up to 4 consecutive data from the
designated sub-section No.
2: Read up to 4 consecutive data from the
designated section sub-ID No.
RA+6 Number to be read Designate number to be read.
Maximum number of data to be read is 4. If 5 or
more is designated, the number of data is
regarded as 4.
RA+7 Reading results <Status>
bit0 to bit7: Status bit0: Read finished (It turns ON when reading is
bit8 to bitF: Results finished regardless of reading
successfulness)
bit1: blank
bit2 to 7: Read error
0x01: Normally finished
0x41: Address illegal
0x45: Section No. illegal
0x49: Sub-section No. illegal
0x59: Not fit in the buffer
0x5D: Data type illegal
0x75: Unable to read
0x7D: Read write-only data
0x81: Axis designation illegal
<Results>: Number of data read
538
(2) Read data window (Area where NC sets data)

R register Item Detail
RB+8 to 9 Read data window Read data 1
RB+10 to 11 Read data 2
(Note) From the control signal to the number of data to be read are set by PLC. Reading result is the
area where NC sets the data. Turn ON the control signal after setting RA+1 to RA+6.
539
Write window interface
(1) Writing control window (Area where both PLC and NC set data)
RB Writing Control signal Data will be written by turning bit0 ON. NC and
control PLC write asynchronously. When the writing is
window finished, The bit0 under "Status" of the writing
result turns ON. When the bit0 under "Status"
turns ON, turn OFF the bit0 of the control signal.
RB+1 Section No. Designate data type
RB+2 Section sub-ID No. Designate part system No. (1 to 4)
RB+3 Sub-section No. Designate data
RB+4 Data No. Designate axis No. used in the part system and
variable No., etc.
(The axis No. is 1 to 8)
RB+5 Writing method 0: Write up to 4 consecutive data from the
designated data No.
1: Write up to 4 consecutive data from the
designated sub-section No.
2: Write up to 4 consecutive data from the
designated section sub-ID No.
RB+6 Number to be Designate number of data to be written.
written Maximum number of data to be written is 4. If 5 or
more is designated, the number of data is
regarded as 4.
RB+7 Writing results <Status>
bit0 to bit7: Status bit0: Write finished (It turns ON when the writing
bit8 to bitF: Results is finished regardless of writing
successfulness)
bit1: Blank
bit2 to 7: Write error
0x01: Normally finished
0x41: Address illegal
0x45: Section No. illegal
0x49: Sub-section No. illegal
0x59: Not fit in the buffer
0x5D: Data type illegal
0x6D: Written in read-only data
0x79: Unable to write data
0x81: Axis designation illegal
<Results>: Number of data written
540
(2) Write data window (Area where PLC sets data) (R427)
RB+8 to 9 Write data window Write data 1
RB+10 to 11 Write data 2
(Note) From the control signal to the number to be written in the write control window are set by PLC.
NC sets the writing results in the write control window.
Turn ON the control signal after setting RB+1 to RB+6 and RB+8 to RB+15 on write data
window.
Precautions
(1) Set the read window start R register (R424, R428, R432) and the write window start R register (R426,
R430, R434), securing enough space for the number of windows in between. When mistakenly set in the
area, it does not read or write correctly. Up to 16 R registers are needed for one read window or write
window.
(Example)
In case the reading starts at R8300 and the number of read windows is set to 10, it uses 160 registers in
total. Therefore, the writing start R register must be set in later than R8460.
(2) Area of read/write window must be within the user area.
When reading/writing is attempted exceeding the user area, reading/writing finishes on the right spot.
(3) With this function, up to 100 windows can be read or written. Scan time in ladder may be extended,
depending on the number of read/write windows.
(4) When 4 consecutive data are first read and then 3 consecutive data are read using the same window, the
forth data will not be cleared to 0, leaving the first data read.
(5) When read control signal and write control signal are ON at the PLC stop, reading and writing are
conducted because this function operates even while PLC is stopped.
(6) Read/write window area 1, 2, or 3 can be specified in an arbitrary order, as long as they are specified
within R register user area,
541
Usage example
An example of ladder for reading out the current position within 1st to 3rd axis machine coordinate system
on the PLC window is shown below.
ACT
> R9807 K0 M100 When value is set in the reading result
M100
MOV K0 R9800 Control signal OFF
ACT
MOV K9800 R424 Reading start R register No.: 9800
MOV K1 R425 Number of read windows: 1
MOV K37 R9801 Section No.: 37
MOV K1 R9802 Sub-ID: 1 part system
MOV K3 R9803 Sub-section No.: 3
MOV K1 R9804 Data No.: 1st axis
MOV K0 R9805 Method: 0 (Data No. order)
MOV K3 R9806 Number: 3 (1st, 2nd, 3rd axis)
MOV K1 R9800 Control signal ON
542
6.6.9 Pallet Program Registration
The pallet program registration function allows machining programs to be registered to each pallet of the
automatic pallet changer (hereinafter APC) and supports setups of the machining.
Operation search for the registered program is executed by the PLC ladder using the external function.
This function is applicable to the machining center.
Also, an NC option "Pallet Program Registration" is required.
Operations
Machining programs are registered to each pallet in the "pallet program registration" screen under the
group of setup screen.
Registered programs are output to the PLC devices.
As required, PLC ladder executes an external search by referring to the program No. registered in each
pallet.
The number of pallets that can be registered differs depending on to which screen the pallets are
registered.
• Standard pallet registration screen: Max. 2 pallets
• Pallet 4 page registration screen: Max. 12 pallets
PLC device
Pallet pro. reg. I/F
HMI system
Pallet program Pallet 1
registration screen
Mach. pro. No.
Pallet 2
Mach. pro. No.
:
PLC ladder
Pallet 12
Mach. pro. No.
Ext. search I/F

Device No.
Program No.
:
NC main system
Pallet registration function data flow
543
Signal name
Device
Standard pallet registration screen Pallet 4 page registration screen
X758 Spare Pallet program registration
Ext. workpiece coordinate transfer completion
B Signal
PALLET PROGRAM
REGISTRATION EXT.
- X758
TRANSFER COMPLETION
Completion of transfer from extension workpiece coordinate to external workpiece coordinate offset (EXT)
during pallet 4 page registration is displayed.
This signal turns ON at the completion of transfer processing.
This signal turns OFF when external workpiece coordinate transfer ready is turned OFF.
The transferred external workpiece coordinate offset (EXT) will be effective as soon as when this signal is
turned ON.
[Timing chart]

ready (Y72F)
Ext. workpiece coordinate

transfer completion (X758)
Extension workpiece →
Transfer processing
External workpiece
[Related signal]
(1) Pallet program registration Ext. workpiece coordinate transfer ready (Y72F)
544
Screen data is output to the following PLC devices.

Signal name
Device
R2100 Pallet program search valid/invalid state Pallet program search valid/invalid state
0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid
R2101 Continuous start valid/invalid state Continuous start valid/invalid state
R2102 Spare Pallet registration specification
0: Standard pallet registration screen
1: Pallet 4 page registration screen
R2103 Spare Number of valid pallets
(Setting range: 2 to 12)
R2110 Pallet 1 Machining program device No. Pallet 1 0° Machining program device No.
0: Memory 1: HD 2: DS 0: Memory 1: HD 2: DS
3: FD 4: Memory card 3: FD 4: Memory card
R2111 Pallet 1 Machining valid/invalid state Pallet 1 0° Machining valid/invalid state
R2112,R2113 Pallet 1 Machining program No. Pallet 1 0° Machining program No.
R2114 Pallet 1 Auxiliary data Pallet 1 0° Auxiliary data
R2115 Spare Spare
R2116 Pallet 2 Machining program device No. Pallet 1 90° Machining program device No.
0: Memory 1: HD 2: DS 0: Memory 1: HD 2: DS
3: FD 4: Memory card 3: FD 4: Memory card
R2117 Pallet 2 Machining valid/invalid state Pallet 1 90° Machining valid/invalid state
R2118,R2119 Pallet 2 Machining program No. Pallet 1 90° Machining program No.
R2120 Pallet 2 Auxiliary data Pallet 1 90° Auxiliary data
R2121 Spare Spare
R2122 Spare Pallet 1 180° Machining program device No.
0: Memory 1: HD 2: DS
3: FD 4: Memory card
R2123 Spare Pallet 1 180° Machining valid/invalid state
0: Invalid 1: Valid
R2124,R2125 Spare Pallet 1 180° Machining program No.
R2126 Spare Pallet 1 180° Auxiliary data
R2127 Spare Spare
0: Invalid 1: Valid
545
Signal name
Device
R2133 Spare Spare
0: Invalid 1: Valid
R2136,R2137 Spare Pallet 2 0° machining program No.
R2139 Spare Spare
0: Invalid 1: Valid
R2145 Spare Spare
0: Invalid 1: Valid
R2151 Spare Spare
0: Invalid 1: Valid
R2157 Spare Spare
R2158 to Spare Data for pallet 3 to 12 can be registered in the
R2397 same manner.
546
Signal name
Device
Y72E Pallet program registration In APC execution Pallet program registration In APC execution
0: In place 1: In execution 0: In place 1: In execution
Y72F Spare Pallet program registration
Ext. workpiece coordinate transfer ready
0: Transfer not ready 1: Transfer ready
After the signals relating to pallet information in
the machine and index plane of the pallet in the
machine are set, PLC sets this signal.
When this signal is turned to "1", NC system
transfers the extension workpiece coordinate
offset data to external workpiece coordinate
offset (EXT).
B Signal
PALLET PROGRAM
REGISTRATION
- EXT. WORKPIECE Y72F
COORDINATE TRANSFER
READY
When transferring external workpiece coordinate offset (EXT) in the pallet 4 page registration, turn this
signal ON. NC starts transfer processing at the rising edge of this signal.
When the external workpiece coordinate transfer completion signal is turned ON, turn this signal OFF.
It takes approx. 8ms from the start to the end of transfer processing. If the transfer completion signal is not
turned ON even after 8ms has passed since the transfer ready signal was turned ON, reconsider the value
of R register 4100 and 4102.
NC turns the external workpiece coordinate transfer completion signal OFF at the falling edge of this
signal.
When turning the transfer ready signal ON from the machining program, recalculation request and M
function finish (FIN1 or FIN2) must be turned ON after the external workpiece coordinate transfer
completion signal is turned ON.
When recalculation is not requested, operation of the pre-read machining program will be carried out using
the external workpiece coordinate offset prior to the change.
When M function has been completed before transfer is completed, the external workpiece coordinate
offset data to be used in the machining program will not be changed from the one prior to the change until
the transfer completion signal is turned ON.
This signal must be turned ON while the external workpiece coordinate transfer completion signal is OFF.
547
[Timing chart]

ready (Y72F)
Ext. workpiece coordinate

transfer completion (X758)
Extension workpiece →
Transfer processing
External workpiece
[Related signal]
(1) Pallet program registration Ext. workpiece coordinate transfer completion (X758)
548
Signal name
Device
R4100 Pallet information in the machine Pallet information in the machine
bit0 :ON - Pallet 1 in the machine bit0 :ON - Pallet 1 in the machine
bit1 :ON - Pallet 2 in the machine bit1 :ON - Pallet 2 in the machine
: :
bit11:ON – Pallet 12 in the machine bit11:ON - Pallet 12 in the machine
R4101 Auxiliary function Auxiliary function
0: Not available, 1: Available 0: Not available, 1: Available
R4102 Spare Index plane of the pallet in the machine
0:0°, 1:90°, 2:180°, 3:270°
R4103 Spare Machining valid/invalid setting disabled
(For pallet details)
0: Invalid (Machining setting enabled)
1: Valid (Machining setting disabled)
R2111 Spare (PLC→NC setting not possible on the Pallet 1 0° Machining valid/invalid state
standard pallet registration screen) 0: Invalid 1: Valid
R2117 Spare (PLC→NC setting not possible on the Pallet 1 90° Machining valid/invalid state
standard pallet registration screen) 0: Invalid 1: Valid
0: Invalid 1: Valid
0: Invalid 1: Valid
0: Invalid 1: Valid
0: Invalid 1: Valid
0: Invalid 1: Valid
0: Invalid 1: Valid
Machining data for pallet 3 to 12 can be
registered in the same manner.
549
Precautions
(1) Only the program with a file name using decimal number (1 to 99999999) can be registered.
Program in HD, DS, FD and memory card can be registered besides one in NC memory; however, the
program is limited to the one in root directory.
(2) Number of pallets to be registered:
• Standard pallet registration screen: Max. 2 pallets
• Pallet 4 page registration screen: Max. 12 pallets
(3) Error message appears according to the PLC device value regardless of the operation status.
(4) The setting range for auxiliary function data is –32768 to 32767.
(5) The parameter "#11001 APC type (APC screen display type selection)" and "#11002 Valid pallet num
(Number of pallets designation)" are set to R register 912/913 only at the power ON.
(6) When external workpiece coordinate transfer ready (Y78F) is turned ON/OFF without a break, transfer
is carried out, but the transfer completion signal (X758) will not be output.
(7) This function is available only in the 1st part system, no matter which part system it is operated in.
Usage example
An example of ladder when external workpiece coordinate offset (EXT) is transferred in the pallet 4 page
registration is given below.
Condition X758
Y72F
Y72F
550
6.6.10 Chopping
With this function, the chopping axis constantly moves back and forth independently of the program
operation during executing the machining program.
B Signal
- IN CHOPPING START CHOP XC80 XDC0 XF00 X1040
This signal turns ON in the state of chopping start.
B Signal
BASIC POSITION ->
- UPPER DEAD POINT PATH CHP1 XC81 XDC1 XF01 X1041
FLAG
This signal turns ON while moving from the basic position to the upper dead center point.
B Signal
UPPER DEAD POINT ->
- BOTTOM DEAD POINT CHP2 XC82 XDC2 XF02 X1042
PATH FLAG
This signal turns ON while moving from the upper dead center point to the bottom dead center point.
B Signal
BOTTOM DEAD POINT ->
- UPPER DEAD POINT PATH CHP3 XC83 XDC3 XF03 X1043
FLAG
This signal turns ON while moving from the bottom dead center point to the upper dead center point.
B Signal
UPPER DEAD POINT ->
- BASIC POSITION PATH CHP4 XC84 XDC4 XF04 X1044
FLAG
This signal turns ON while moving from the upper dead center point to the basic position.
551
B Signal
- IN CHOPPING MODE CHPMD XC85 XDC5 XF05 X1045
This signal turns ON in the state of chopping mode.
B Signal
STROKE COMPENSATION
- XC86 XDC6 XF06 X1046
COMPLETION
This signal turns ON when the difference between the commanded stroke and the actual stroke has
reached the tolerance specified with the parameter (#2080 chwid) as a result of compensation of the
commanded position.
When speed fluctuates, such as when movement is stopped or chopping control data is changed, this
signal is turned OFF.
B Signal
- CHOPPING ERROR NO. R554 R754 R954 R1154
[Function]
This signal notifies the user PLC the alarm details when an alarm occurs during chopping operation.
[Operation]
Chopping error No. and the details are as shown below.
Error No. Details Classification
0 No error -
1 Number of cycles for chopping is zero. A
(Operates when the number of cycles is 1)
2 (Chopping axis feedrate) > (Cutting feed clamp speed) A
(The feedrate is clamped at the cutting feed clamp speed.)
3 (Acceleration of chopping axis) > (Cutting feed clamp speed)/(Cutting feed A
time constant)
(The acceleration is clamped at (Cutting feed clamp speed)/(Cutting feed
time constant))
4 (Number of cycles for chopping) > (1056/min) A
(The number of cycles for chopping is clamped at 1056/min.)
5 Chopping axis zero point return is not completed. B
6 Chopping override is zero. B
7 Commanded axis is the chopping axis. B
8 The bottom dead center point position is zero. B
9 The chopping axis is a manual feed axis. B
10 Interlock B
11 Stored stroke limit or stroke end B
552
Error No. Details Classification
20 There is no specification for chopping. -

21 Chopping control data area exceeds the R register area designated for the C
chopping control data.
Chopping control data area and compensation amount record area are
overlapped.
Compensation amount record area exceeds R register's backup area (R8300
to R9799). ((Rm+14 x N sets+4) > 9799)
22 Multiple chopping axes are specified by the PLC interface. C
23 Chopping axis is not specified by either PLC interface or parameter. C
24 Compensation method is set to other than 0/1. C
25 The mode for the compensation value fixed method is set to other than C
0(playback mode) or 1(record mode).
26 Data No. for the control data is a negative value. C
27 Chopping axis's "#2081 chclsp" (Chopping clamp speed) and "#2002 clamp" C
(Cutting clamp speed) are both set to "0".
28 Chopping axis was changed during chopping operation. C
(Chopping axis cannot be changed during chopping.)
29 Rotary axis was specified as chopping axis. C
30 Rapid traverse override valid/invalid is set to other than 0(invalid) or 1(valid). A
Classification A: The error is retained during chopping operation.

The error is cleared at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal after the
chopping control data is corrected, or when the NC is reset.
Classification B: The error is cleared after the alarm factor is removed, or when the NC is reset.
Classification C: The error is cleared at the falling edge of the chopping parameter valid signal, or when
the NC is reset.
[Related signals]
(1) Chopping signal (CHPS: YC30)
PLC→NC interface signals
B Signal
- CHOPPING CHPS YC30 YD70 YEB0 YFF0
[Function]
This signal validates the chopping function.
[Operation]
The chopping mode is entered at the rising edge of this signal.
553
B Signal
CHOPPING PARAMETER
- YC34 YD74 YEB4 YFF4
VALID
[Function]
This signal validates the chopping control data assigned to R register.
[Operation]
(1) The chopping control data is validated at the rising edge of this signal.
(2) This signal must be turned OFF after confirming the chopping start ready completion signal is turned
ON. Chopping start ready completion signal is included in the control status within the chopping control
data.
B Signal
- CHOPPING OVERRIDE CHPOV R2503 R2703 R2903 R3103
[Function]
The chopping override can be set in the range between 0 and 100% (1% increment).
The value is set directly in the R register for chopping override. (The code method setting is not available.)
The data is set in R2503.
[Operation]
(1) Only the chopping override is valid for the chopping operation.
When rapid traverse override valid is commanded from the PLC window, the rapid traverse override
can be validated for the rapid traverse between the basic position and upper dead center point.
The rapid traverse override can be set with either the code method (1, 25, 50, 100%) or the file register
(value setting) method (0 to 100%, 1% increment).
(2) The chopping override is set between 0 and 100% in a 1% increment.
If a value outside the range from 0 to 100% is set, the override will be clamped at 100%.
(3) Set the data with one command.
(4) If the "Chopping override" signal is set to "0", "M01 OPERATION ERROR 0150" will occur.
B Signal
CHOPPING CONTROL
- R2587 R2787 R2987 R3187
DATA ADDRESS
This signal designates the chopping control data head No. (R register No.) assigned to R register.
R register area that can be used for assigning the chopping control data is as shown below.
R8300 to R9768 (Backup area)
R9800 to R9886 (Non back up area)
[Caution]
(1) Setting error occurs if an odd number is set.
(2) When the backup area is used, set the area ahead of the compensation amount record area (#1324
chop_R).
(3) Error occurs if the chopping control data overlaps with the other part system or the compensation
amount record area.
554
Chopping operation start
The chopping mode is entered at the rising edge of the "Chopping" signal (CHPS), and the chopping
operation is started based on the position determined with the program, etc.
The chopping control sequence is the following.
• When the chopping axis is not moving, chopping is started immediately.
• When the chopping axis is moving, chopping is valid from the next block in the automatic mode, and
an operation alarm will occur in the manual mode.
Start Stop
Motion of chopping axis Basic position
(1) Rapid traverse Rapid traverse
Upper dead center
point
(2) (3)
Bottom dead center
point
(1) In automatic mode

(a) When the chopping axis is not moving:
Chopping parameter valid
Chopping start ready completion
Chopping (CHPS)
In chopping mode (CHPMD)
In chopping start (CHOP)
(2)
Chopping axis
(1) (3)
Other axis
(Not effected by chopping signal.)
(b) When the chopping axis is moving:
Chopping (CHPS)
(2)
Chopping axis
(1) (3)
Other axis
(Not effected by chopping signal.)
The "In chopping start" is entered after the chopping axis movement has been completed.
555
(2) In manual mode

In the jog and step mode, when the chopping axis is not moving, the chopping operation is started at the
rising edge of the "Chopping" signal.
If the "Chopping" signal is turned ON when the chopping axis is moving, the OPERATION ALARM 0154
will occur, and the chopping will not be started.
(Rising edge of the "Chopping" signal is ignored.)
(a) When the chopping axis is not moving:
Chopping (CHPS)
(2)
Chopping axis
(1) (3)
(b) When the chopping axis is moving:
Chopping (CHPS)
Operation alarm 0154

Chopping axis
In the handle mode, when the chopping axis is not selected for the handle axis, the chopping operation is
started at the rising edge of the "Chopping" signal.
If the "Chopping" signal is turned ON when the chopping axis is selected for the handle axis, the
OPERATION ALARM 0154 will occur, and the chopping will not be started.
556
Chopping operation stop
The chopping operation is stopped at the falling edge of the "Chopping" signal from the PLC.
The chopping axis moves to the basic position with the rapid traverse after executing the chopping
operation to the upper dead center point.
The chopping axis once moves to the bottom dead center point even in the middle of moving from the upper
dead center point to the bottom dead center point.
Stopping motion of chopping axis
Stop
Basic position
Rapid traverse (3)

Upper dead
Moves to the bottom dead center point
center point at the chopping
control OFF. (1) (2)
Bottom dead
center point
(1) (3)
Chopping axis
(2)
In chopping strat (CHOP)
Upper dead center point ->

bottom dead center point (CHP2)
Bottom dead center point ->

upper dead center point (CHP3)
Upper dead center point ->

basic position (CHP4)
Chopping (CHPS)
The "In chopping start" and the "In chopping mode" signals are turned OFF after returning to the basic
position completes.
557
Chopping compensation method
Because this function involves high-speed repetitive motions, the positioning method allowing
compensation based on the calculation from the machinery operation (feedback position of the motor end)
is adopted, rather than the method using in-position check. Compensation amount used for positioning is
calculated every 4 cycles from the start of chopping operation, based on the difference between the
commanded position and feedback position. Then the compensation amount is added to the positioning
command for the next cycle so that the difference between the commanded position and feedback position
will disappear. (Compensation value sequential update method)
Upper dead center point
Bottom dead center point
Positioning command Motion of the motor end

Compensation starts from
the 5th cycle.
However, with this method, if the grindstone contacts with the workpiece, the chopping width before and
after compensation may be differed, and which may affect the machining surface. In this case, the
compensation value fixed method is appropriate.
With the compensation amount fixed method, compensation amount based on a dry run operation is
recorded in advance so that, in the real operation, compensation is carried out from the first positioning to
the bottom dead center point using the compensation amount recorded earlier.
Upper dead centerpoint

Motion of the motor end
Compensation in the 5th cycle or
Positioning command: later is carried out with the same
Select the compensation value fixed method and set the compensation compensation amount as as in the
amount so that compensation is carried out from the first bottom dead 1st cycle.
center point position since the operation has started.
The stroke compensation completion signal is output when the difference between the commanded stroke
and the actual stroke has reached the tolerance specified with the parameter (#2080 chwid).
558
(1) Compensation value sequential update method

Every chopping command starts with "0" compensation amount. Compensation amount is calculated
every 4-cycle chopping operation, and then the compensation is carried out.
(2) Compensation value fixed method
Compensation amount fixed method includes the record mode and the playback mode.
<Record mode>
• Override, command axis, upper/bottom dead center point position, number of cycles, and
compensation amount are recorded as the chopping control data.
• Compensation amount record area is specified with R register.
• Compensation amount record area is determined by the number of R registers to be secured.
14 consecutive R registers are required for 1 set of record.
• Compensation amount is always updated in the record mode.
<Playback mode>
• Chopping operation is started using the data (override, command axis, upper/bottom dead center
point position, number of cycles, compensation amount) recorded in the record mode.
Compensation amount is not calculated during playback mode.
559
Chopping start
Record mode?
No (Playback mode)
Yes
Set the initial Set the compensation data

compensation amount to in the record area as the
"0". initial compensation
amount.
Perform chopping Perform chopping

operation using the initial operation using the initial
compensation amount. compensation amount.
Record the compensation

amount in the record area.
END
Compensation amount record area (R register: For N sets)
Error status Completion status Command - Feedback
0 Override | Axis | Up dead pt. | Bottom dead pt. | No. of cycles | Compen. amnt (Width) | Compen. amnt (Ctr) | (Open to user)
1 Override | Axis | Up dead pt. | Bottom dead pt. | No. of cycles | Compen. amnt (Width) | Compen. amnt (Ctr) | (Open to user)
N-2 Override | Axis | Up dead pt. | Bottom dead pt. | No. of cycles | Compen. amnt (Width) | Compen. amnt (Ctr) | (Open to user)
N-1 Override | Axis | Up dead pt. | Bottom dead pt. | No. of cycles | Compen. amnt (Width) | Compen. amnt (Ctr) | (Open to user)
14 R registers are required per one set.

For N sets, the number of R registers required is 14*N+4.
560
Chopping control data
Rn is specified with the PLC device (chopping control data address).

Data to be used differs depending on whether the compensation value sequential update method is applied
or compensation amount fixed method is applied.
Update : Specify with the compensation value sequential update method
Fixed : Specify with the compensation value fixed method
561
a a: Control status (Rn) Update Method

Rn
bit3 : Chopping start ready completion
Rn+1 b This turns OFF at the falling edge of the chopping parameter valid signal.
bitF : Error occurred
Rn+2 c This turns ON if an alarm occurrs when the chopping parameter valid signal is turned
ON. The details of error is notified with bit9 to C. (Note)
bit9 : Chopping error
bitA : Chopping specifications is not available
Rn+4 d bitB : Compensation method is set to other than 0/1
bitC : Multiple chopping axes are specified
Rn+5 e b: Not used (Rn+1) Update Fixed
c: Compensation method (Rn+2[low], Rn+3[high]) Update Fixed
Rn+6 f
0000(HEX) : Compensation value sequential update method
0001(HEX) : Compensation value fixed method
d: Rapid traverse override (Rn+4) Update
valid/invalid
Rn+8 g
This sets the rapid traverse override valid/invalid in respect to the movement speed
between the basic position and the upper dead center point.
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
Rn+10 h
e: Chopping axis designation (Rn+5) Update
bit0 : 1st axis
Select any one of the existing axes using bit.
bit1 : 2nd axis When no axis is specified, the axis whose base specification
Rn+12 i
: : parameter "chop_ax" is "1" (the smallest No. of axis) within the
j same part system is selected.
Rn+13 bit7 : 8th axis
bit8 to F : Not used (Set to "0".)
f: Upper dead center point (Rn+6[low], Rn+7[high]) Update
This sets the movement amount of basic position -> upper dead center point with the code.
Use the setting and display unit (#1003 iunit) for setting.
g: Bottom dead center point (Rn+8[low], Rn+9[high]) Update
This sets the distance of upper dead center point -> bottom dead center point with the
code.
Use the setting and display unit for setting.
h: Number of cycles (Rn+10[low], Rn+11[high]) Update
This sets the number of cycles for chopping cycle. (Unit: Number of cycles/min)
i: Operation mode with the (Rn+12) Fixed
compensation value fixed
method
0000(HEX) : Playback mode
0001(HEX) : Record mode
j: Data No. (Rn+13) Fixed
This specifies what number data (n-th data) from the head of the record area (specified by
the parameter) to be used. (Both the record mode and playback mode must be specified.
1st data area is specified with 0.)
562
(Note) If an alarm occurs when the chopping parameter valid signal is turned ON, Rn bit is turned ON. Alarm
details is output to the chopping error No. (R554), as well.
Rn bit Error Cause
BITA Option error There is no specification for chopping.
BITF
BITB Compensation Compensation method is set to other than 0(Compensation value
BITF method error sequential update type) or 1(Compensation value fixed type).
BITC Illegal number of Multiple chopping axes are specified by the PLC interface.
BITF axes error
BIT9 Chopping error Part system commanded by PLC interface is not valid.
BITF Chopping axis is not specified by either PLC interface or parameter.
Rotary axis is specified as the chopping axis.
Rapid traverse override valid/invalid is set to other than 0(invalid) or
1(valid).
Data No. of the control data is a negative value.
Compensation amount record area exceeds R register backup area
(R8300 to R9799).
((Rm+14xN sets+4) > 9799.)
The mode for the compensation value fixed method is set to other
than 0(playback mode) or 1(record mode).
Number of cycles is 0 or less, or over 1056.
(If 0 or less, 1 is applied. If exceeds 1056, 1056 is applied.)
Acceleration determined by the parameter exceeds clamp/chtL.
(The number of cycles is reduced.)
When the chopping axis is changed during chopping operation.
(Chopping axis is not changed during chopping.)
F(feedrate) exceeds the clamp speed.
(The speed is clamped to the clamp speed (#2081 chclsp).)
Chopping axis's #2081 chclsp (chopping clamp speed) and #2002
clamp (cutting clamp speed) are both set to "0".
The error bit shown above is not turned ON in the following cases. However, chopping error No. is output.
• Control data area exceeds the R register area designated for the control data.
• Control data area and compensatioin amount record area are overlapped.
563
Chopping control data: Compensation amount record area (Dedicated for compensation value fixed method)
Rm is specified with the parameter (#1324 chop_R).
Rm a a: Error status (in playback mode) (Rm)

bit0 : This is turned ON when the difference between the motor end feedback amplitude
Rm+1 b width and the commanded width has exceeded the tolerance set with the
parameter (#2080 chwid).
b: Chopping compensation amount record (Rm+1)
Rm+2 c completion status
(in record mode)
bit0 : "1" at completion of recording
Rm+4 d bit1 : "1" when recording is not completed
c: Command - Feedback (Rm+2[low], Rm+3[high])
Rm+5 e [In playback mode]
Difference between the motor end feedback amplitude width and the commanded width is
Rm+6 f stored when the difference has exceeded the tolerance set with the parameter (#2080
chwid).
[In record mode]
Difference between command and feedback is stored every time the compensation
Rm+8 g amount is calculated.
d: Rapid traverse override valid/invalid (Rm+4)
Set the rapid traverse override valid/invalid in respect to the movement speed between
the basic position and upper dead center point.
Rm+10 h
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
e: Chopping axis designation (Rm+5)
Rm+12 i bit0 : 1st axis
Select any one of the existing axes using bit.
bit1 : 2nd axis When no axis is specified, the axis whose base specification
: : parameter "chop_ax" is "1" (the smallest No. of axis) within the
same part system is selected.
Rm+14 j bit7 : 8th axis
bit8 to F : Not used (Set to "0".)
f: Upper dead center point (Rm+6[low], Rm+7[high])
Rm+16 k Set the movement amount of basic position -> upper dead center point with the code.
Use the setting and display unit (#1003 iunit) for setting.
g: Bottom dead center point (Rm+8[low], Rm+9[high])
Set the distance of upper dead center point -> bottom dead center point with the code.
Rm+18 Repeat the Use the setting and display unit for setting.
same
Rm+19 h: Number of cycles (Rm+10[low], Rm+11[high])
setting as
in Rm+4 to Set the number of cycles for chopping cycle. (Unit: Number of cycles/min)
Rm+20 Rm+17
hereafter. i: Compensation amount (Width) (Rm+12[low], Rm+13[high])
Compensation amount to be added to the chopping upper/bottom dead center point
command.
Rm+22 In the playback mode, this is used for amplitude compensation.
: When started with the record mode, this is automatically stored.
: j: Compensation amount (Center) (Rm+14[low], Rm+15[high])
Compensation amount to be added to the chopping upper/bottom dead center point
command.
In the playback mode, this is used for compensating the center of amplitude.
When started with the record mode, this is automatically stored.
k: Data to be opened (Rm+16[low], Rm+17[high])
Use this for managing the compensation amount record area, etc. by using ladder of the
user.
564
Procedures for setting the chopping control data
(1) Set the chopping control data to R register.

(2) Turn the chopping parameter valid signal ON.
Chopping control data is written into the current parameter area inside the NC at the rising edge of the
chopping parameter valid signal and is reflected to the chopping operation.
Turn the chopping parameter valid signal OFF after confirming that the chopping start ready completion
signal in the control status (Rn) within the chopping control data is turned ON.
Setting the chopping control data during chopping
Chopping control data can be set during chopping.

When the chopping parameter valid signal is turned ON, the chopping axis decelerates to stop once at the
upper or bottom dead center point to be changed. As soon as decelerating to stop, chopping operation is
carried out with the changed chopping control data.
The upper and bottom dead center points are switched while moving from the upper dead center point to
the bottom dead center point.
New upper dead center point Upper dead center point before change
Control data change Decelerates to stop

Upper dead center point before change
Control data change Bottom dead center point before change
New upper dead center point

Bottom dead center point before change
New bottom dead center point

Decelerates to stop
The upper and bottom dead center points are switched while moving from the bottom dead center point to
the upper dead center point.
New upper dead center point Decelerates to stop

Control data change
Control data change

New upper dead center point
Decelerates to stop
Chopping control data can be changed at any time in the chopping start state. Checking the NC side status
or considering the timing is not necessary.
Chopping axis cannot be changed during chopping operation.
(Note) When the chopping parameter valid signal is turned ON, the chopping axis decelerates to stop once
even if the chopping control data has not been changed, and which may result in longer cycle time.
565
Chopping feedrate
The chopping axis feedrate is clamped at the chopping axis clamp speed (#2081 chclsp). When "0" is set to
the chopping clamp speed, the chopping axis feedrate is clamped at the G1 clamp speed (#2002 clamp).
The acceleration/deceleration time constant is set with chopping axis acceleration/deceleration time
constant (#2141 chtL). When "0" is set to the chopping axis acceleration/deceleration time constant, the
chopping axis linear acceleration/deceleration time constant (#2007 G1tL) is used.
Speed [mm/min]
chclsp chclsp
Acceleration α = chtL(or G1tL)
cht1 Time [ms]
chtL
When the upper dead center point, bottom dead center point and number of cycles are set with chopping
control data, the speed pattern in which acceleration α is "clamp speed/time constant" will be commanded
to the servo drive unit.
F chclsp
t = chtL(or G1tL)
F
1/number of cycles (s)
When the specified chopping control data is illegal, the alarm is returned to the buffer (Rn). In the following
cases, the number of cycles or feedrate is converted into the value controllable with NC (clamp value) upon
occurrence of the alarm.
(1) When the number of cycles is 0:
Number of cycles is 1/min.
(2) When F exceeds chclsp:
The following indicates that F exceeds chclsp when the speed pattern is calculated based on the
acceleration of chclsp/chtL. (The number of cycles becomes smaller than that of specified.)
F Pattern by the parameter
chclsp
Actual pattern (clamp value)
chtL
(or G1tL)
1/2 number of cycles (s)
(3) When the number of cycles is 1056/min or more:

The number of cycles is clamped at 1056/min.
566
Setting example for the compensation value sequential update method
The following data is set using R8300 to R8311 as buffer area.
Data Decimal HEX Setting details

Rapid traverse override valid/invalid 1 0001 Valid
Chopping axis designation 4 0004 1st part system Z axis (3rd axis)
Upper dead center point (increment -10000 FFFFD8F0 -10000 (setting and display unit)
amount from the basic position)
Bottom dead center point -20000 FFFFB1E0 -20000 (setting and display unit)
(increment amount from the upper
dead center point)
Number of cycles 50 00000032 50/min
Chopping axis operation

R8300 0000 Control status
R8301 0000 Not used Start

Basic position
R8302 0000 Compensation method
-10mm
0000 (Compensation value sequential
Upper dead center point
update method)
-20mm
R8304 0001 Rapid traverse override valid
R8305 0004 Chopping axis designation
R8306 D8F0 Upper dead center point

FFFF
R8308 B1E0 Bottom dead center point

FFFF
R8310 0032 Number of cycles

0000
567
Setting example for the compensation value fixed method
The following data is set using R8600 to R8613 as buffer area.

R8700(#1324 chop_R = 8700) is used for the compensation amount record area.
Data Decimal HEX Setting details

Rapid traverse override valid/invalid 1 0001 Valid
Chopping axis designation 4 0004 1st part system Z axis (3rd axis)
Upper dead center point (increment -10000 FFFFD8F0 -10000 (setting and display unit)
amount from the basic position)
Bottom dead center point -20000 FFFFB1E0 -20000 (setting and display unit)
(increment amount from the upper
dead center point)
Number of cycles 50 00000032 50/min
Compensation amount record area
R8600 0000 Control status R8700 0000
R8601 0000 Not used R8701 0000

Compensation
R8602 0001 method R8702 0000
(Compensation
0000 value fixed 0000
method)
R8604 0000 R8704 0001 Rapid traverse override valid
R8605 0000 R8705 0004 Chopping axis designation
R8606 0000 R8706 D8F0 Upper dead center point

0000 FFFF
R8608 0000 R8708 B1E0 Bottom dead center point

0000 FFFF
R8610 0000 R8710 0032 Number of cycles

0000 0000
R8612 0001 Operation mode R8712 0000 Compensation amount (Width)

(Record mode) 0000
0000
Data No.
(1st data is R8714 0000 Compensation amount (Center)
specified from 0000
R8704)
R8716 0000 Data to be opened

0000
R8718
R8719
568
6.6.11 Circular Feed in Manual Mode
By specifying a hypothetical coordinate on the machine coordinate from the user PLC, oblique linear
interpolation or circular interpolation is executed with jog/handle feed, manual rapid traverse or incremental
feed of either X-axis or Y-axis.
This function is valid only in the jog mode, handle mode, manual rapid traverse mode or incremental mode.
This function cannot be used in the other manual modes and automatic operation modes.
This function works for the X axis and Y axis. This function cannot be used for the other NC axes and PLC
axis. When this function is valid, all the axes other than X axis and Y axis move as usual.
(1) Oblique linear interpolation

Y
a: Gradient angle
x,y,: Basic point coordinate
±x': X' travel range
±y': Y' travel range
These are set in the R registers.
+x' +y' X'

Y'
B
-x' C
-y'
Basic point
When the circular feed in manual mode (oblique linear interpolation) is valid:
• Jog/handle feed of X-axis moves in parallel with X'-axis (see above).
• Jog/handle feed of Y-axis moves in parallel with Y'-axis (see above).
569
(2) Circular interpolation

By specifying a hypothetical coordinate on the machine coordinate as shown in the figure below,
jog/handle feed can be executed on the hypothetical coordinate.
Y
X1,y1: Basic point coordinate
X2,y2: Arc center coordinate
±x': X' travel range
±y': Y' travel range
These are set in the R registers.
-Y' Basic point
A B
-y'
y1 +X' +y' +X'

-X'
Arc center
y2
+Y'
x1 x2
When the circular feed in manual mode (circular interpolation) is valid:

• Jog/handle feed of X-axis moves on the arc having the distance from the arc center to the
current position as its radius.
• Jog/handle feed of Y-axis moves on the line connecting the current position and the arc center.
Operation
The following shows how to validate the circular feed in manual mode.
(1) Select either JOG mode or handle mode.
(2) Set the following data to the specified R registers.
In the oblique linear interpolation: basic point coordinate (x, y), gradient angle (a), travel range (±x’, ±y’),
and operation mode (linear).
In the circular interpolation: basic point coordinate (x1, y1), arc center coordinate (x2, y2), travel range
(±x’, ±y’), and operation mode (arc).
(3) Turn ON the "Circular feed in manual mode valid" signal.
When these above are commanded during the axis movement by JOG or handle feed, both X and Y
axes automatically stop before these commands turn valid.
570
Precautions
(1) This function is available in the JOG or handle mode, manual rapid traverse and incremental feed.
(2) This function can be used for X and Y axes. Cannot be used for the other axes including PLC axis.
When this function is used, the axes other than X and Y axes operate in usual way.
(3) When the manual interlock is applied to either X or Y axis, the both axes stop.
(4) The following cases do not allow the circular feed in manual mode. In these cases, all axes cannot be
moved until the "Circular feed in manual mode valid" signal is turned OFF.
(a) Either X or Y axis is in the machine lock. (The machine lock is canceled then.)
(b) The reference position return is not completed for either X or Y axis.
(c) Either X or Y axis is in the servo OFF.
(d) NC applies the "In auto operation "start"" (OP), the emergency stop or reset.
(e) The current position is out of the designated travel range.
(f) An illegal value has been set to the R register.
(5) Executing the automatic operation turns this function invalid. In this case, all axes cannot be moved until
the "Circular feed in manual mode valid" signal is turned OFF.
(6) When this function is used, the feedrate is clamped so that the combined speed of the X and Y axes will
not exceed the slower rapid traverse feedrate of the two axes.
(7) When this function is ON and the either axis is moving beyond the travel range, both axes stop.
(8) When this function is ON, if a change of the travel range makes the current position out of the range,
both X and Y axes cannot be moved until the range is amended to include the current position.
(9) When the status of the "Circular feed in manual mode valid" signal is changed, the axis being moved in
the manual mode temporarily stops for safety.
(10) If the current position overlaps with the arc center in the linear-circular mode, Y axis can be moved
within the minimum travel range of X axis.
B Signal
IN CIRCULAR FEED IN
- XC4F XD8F XECF X100F
MANUAL MODE
[Function]
This signal indicates that the circular feed in manual mode is valid.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the "Circular feed in manual mode valid" signal turns ON.
[Caution]
This signal does not turn ON in the cases of (4) in "Precautions" column written before.
[Related signal]
(1) Circular feed in manual mode valid (YC7E)
571
B Signal
CIRCULAR FEED IN
- MANUAL MODE CURRENT R636,7 R836,7 R1036,7 R1236,7
POSITION X
CIRCULAR FEED IN
- MANUAL MODE CURRENT R640,1 R840,1 R1040,1 R1240,1
POSITION Y
[Function]
The current positions of X’ and Y’ axes on the hypothetical coordinate are set when the circular feed in
manual mode is valid.
[Operation]
The current positions of X’ and Y’ axes on the hypothetical coordinate are set while the "Circular feed in
manual mode valid" signal is ON.
In the "circular-linear" mode, the current position of X’ on the hypothetical coordinate is set by the angle
(0.000° to 360.000°) from the basic point.
The hypothetical coordinate value to be set is in the following state.
"Linear-linear" Y’ axis: mirror image is not valid
hypothetical coordinate
"Circular-linear" X’ axis: "+" indicates the inverse (CW) direction
hypothetical coordinate Y’ axis: mirror image is not valid
[Caution]
(1) This data is valid only when the "Circular feed in manual mode being valid" signal is ON. If the signal is
OFF, the current position data is uncertain (the value is not ensured).
(2) The current positions are output with "0.5∗PLC setting unit".
(3) When "1" is set to the parameter "#1040 M_inch", this data is output by inch.
[Related signal]
(1) In circular feed in manual mode (XC4F)
B Signal
CIRCULAR FEED IN
- YC7E YDBE YEFE Y103E
MANUAL MODE VALID
[Function]
This signal is used to execute JOG or handle feed for the X and Y axes on the specified coordinate
("linear-linear" or "circular-linear").
[Operation]
After this signal turns ON in the JOG or handle mode, the X and Y axes move on the specified hypothetical
coordinate. (The coordinate and so on are specified with the R registers explained below.)
[Caution]
(1) This signal does not effect on the operation of the axes other than X and Y axes, nor the PLC axis.
(2) This signal does not turn ON in the cases of (4) in "Precautions" column written before.
[Related signal]
(1) In circular feed in manual mode (XC4F)
572
B Signal
CIRCULAR FEED IN
- MANUAL MODE R2636,7 R2836,7 R3036,7 R3236,7
OPERATION MODE DATA
[Function]
The operation mode for the circular feed in manual mode is designated.
[Operation]
R2636
R2836 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
R3036
R3236
Y' mirror image
Operation mode
R2637
R2837 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R3037
R3237
• Operation mode: Designate the coordinate setting.

Setting value Description
1 Linear-linear coordinate is selected.
2 Circular-linear coordinate is selected.
("+" indicates the CW direction of X’.)
3 Circular-linear coordinate is selected.
("+" indicates the CCW direction of X’.)
The setting value other than above is invalid.
• Y’ mirror image: Reverse the "+" direction of Y’.

Setting value Description
1 Y’ mirror image is not valid
2 Y’ mirror image is valid
[Caution]
(1) This data is valid when the "Circular feed in manual mode valid" signal is ON.
(2) The data, when changed while the "Circular feed in manual mode valid" signal is ON, is not valid.
[Related signal]
573
B Signal
CIRCULAR FEED IN
- MANUAL MODE BASIC R2644,5 R2844,5 R3044,5 R3244,5
POINT X DATA
CIRCULAR FEED IN
- MANUAL MODE BASIC R2648,9 R2848,9 R3048,9 R3248,9
POINT Y DATA
[Function]
Designate a basic point on the hypothetical coordinate.
[Operation]
Designate a basic point on the hypothetical coordinate using the machine coordinate system.
The setting range differs in each PLC setting unit.
PLC setting unit
mm inch
(B) ±99999.999mm ±3937.0078inch
(C) ±9999.9999mm ±393.70078inch
[Caution]
(3) The basic point coordinate is designated with "0.5∗PLC setting unit”
(4) When "1" is set to the parameter "#1040 M_inch", set the data by inch.
[Related signal]
574
B Signal
CIRCULAR FEED IN
- MANUAL MODE TRAVEL R2652,3 R2852,3 R3052,3 R3252,3
RANGE X+ DATA
CIRCULAR FEED IN
RANGE X- DATA
CIRCULAR FEED IN
RANGE Y+ DATA
CIRCULAR FEED IN
RANGE Y- DATA
[Function]
Designate the travel range on the hypothetical coordinate.
[Operation]
Designate the travel ranges with the value in the "+" or "-" direction on the hypothetical coordinate. Set the
hypothetical coordinate value in the following state.
"Linear-linear" Y’ axis: mirror image is not valid
hypothetical coordinate
"Circular-linear" X’ axis: "+" indicates the inverse (CW) direction
hypothetical coordinate Y’ axis: mirror image is not valid
In the "circular-linear" mode, set the travel range of X’ by the angle from the basic point on the hypothetical
coordinate.

PLC setting unit
mm inch angle
(B) ±99999.999mm ±3937.0078inch ±360.000°
(C) ±9999.9999mm ±393.70078inch ±360.0000°
[Caution]
(2) The basic point is treated as zero point on the hypothetical coordinate.
(3) The basic point coordinate is designated with "0.5∗PLC setting unit"
[Related signal]
575
B Signal
CIRCULAR FEED IN
MANUAL MODE
- R2668,9 R2868,9 R3068,9 R3268,9
GRADIENT/ARC CENTER X
DATA
CIRCULAR FEED IN
MANUAL MODE
- R2672,3 R2872,3 R3072,3 R3272,3
GRADIENT/ARC CENTER Y
DATA
[Function]
Designate the gradient on the "linear-linear" hypothetical coordinate, or the arc center on the
"circular-linear" hypothetical coordinate.
[Operation]
How to designate differs in each operation mode.
Operation mode is "1" Use the X-Y ratio to designate the gradients of X axis on the machine
coordinate and X’ axis on the hypothetical coordinate.
Signs are available. "+" indicates the CCW direction from the X axis.
If the gradient is 45°, X and Y should have the same value.
Operation mode is 2 or 3 Designate an arc center on the hypothetical coordinate using the machine
coordinate system.

PLC setting unit
mm inch
(B) ±99999.999mm ±3937.0078inch
(C) ±9999.9999mm ±393.70078inch
[Caution]
(3) The basic point coordinate is designated with "0.5∗PLC setting unit"
[Related signal]
576
Timing chart
The timing chart for the circular feed in manual mode is shown below.
Circular feed in
manual mode valid
Coordinate settings Any change of the data is not valid
Circular feed in Data is not

manual mode Current position is updated
ensured
Current position
Feed axis select
Axis movement
A B C D
A: Moves in the normal mode.

B: Stops for the coordinate change.
C: Moves on the hypothetical coordinate that has been set.
D: Stops for the coordinate change.
(Note) Not only X and Y axes but also the other axes stop during the coordinate change.
577
6.6.12 Manual Speed Command
In the memory or MDI mode, validate the manual speed command and select either handle feed or jog
(manual) feed so that the automatic operation is carried out at the feedrate.
With a command in the (-) direction, the program path can be reversed.
Note that, however, program path can be reversed only within the currently executing block and not beyond
the block.
Whether or not to execute reverse run with a command in the (-) direction is set with the PLC interface.
Operation example
<Machining program>
N400
N100 G91 G0 X10. Y10.
N200 G1 X10. F1000 Y
N300 G3 Y20. J10. F200
N400 G1 X-10. F1000
N500 G1 Y-20. N300
N600 M30 N500
N200
Automatic operation
N100 pause
(1) Search a machining program and execute the automatic operation start in memory mode.
(2) Command the automatic operation pause during the N200 block execution.
(3) Turn ON the "Manual speed command valid" and "Manual speed command reverse run valid" signals, as
well as the handle mode. (Keep the memory mode ON.)
(4) When 1st handle is rotated in the (+) direction, the axis moves in the blocks with the handle feedrate.
(5) When the handle is rotated in the (-) direction, the movement is reversed against the program. The
reversed movement ends at the block start point. (Cannot return to the previous block.)
(6) The handle, which keeps rotating in the (+) direction after the block has ended, continues the blocks
N300 to N500 with the handle feedrate.
(7) Command M30 at N600 block to end the program by NC reset or completion.
578
Timing chart
Machining program N100 N200 N300 N400 N500 N600

Memory mode
(PLC→NC)

command (PLC→NC)
"run" (NC→PLC)
"start"(NC→PLC)
"pause" (NC→PLC)
Manual speed command
valid (PLC→NC)
Manual speed command
reverse run valid
(PLC→NC) (+)
Handle pulse
(-)
Block seam
Axis movement speed
Reverse run ends at the start point
(Note) When the reverse run is not valid, the movement follows the machining program, not the handle feed
direction.
Precautions
(1) When the manual feed speed is valid, MST or dwell commands are executed the same as in the normal
automatic operation. Therefore, if MST is commanded to the same block as the movement block, the
program does not move to the next block before the MST command is completed.
(2) The axis moves at the speed of the handle or JOG feed, even when the movement command applies the
rapid traverse (G0).
(3) The manual speed is clamped when the entered speed exceeds the clamp speed.
(4) In the creep control of the dog type reference position return, the "reference position return creep speed"
is applied regardless of the entered manual speed.
(5) To stop the movement by handle and changed to the automatic operation, turn OFF the "Manual feed
command valid" signal and the handle mode, and then execute the automatic operation start with the
memory mode ON.
(6) The execution of the manual speed command ignores the automatic operation start.
(7) If the cutting override is "0", the operation modes other than JOG apply the commanded manual speed.
No movement is made in the JOG mode.
(8) In the synchronous tapping or thread cutting, the manual speed command is kept valid until the end of
these processes: turning OFF the "Manual speed command valid" signal does not effect on these
processes.
579
(9) In the synchronous tapping, cuttings follow the commands in the program. The manual speed command
does not effect on the operation. Neither stopping the handle move nor turning OFF the JOG mode stops
the operation.
(10) If the asynchronous tapping is executed while the manual speed command is valid, the pitch will not be
the same as commanded.
(11) If a forward run has been executed at rapid traverse (G0) with non-interpolation, the reverse run may not
have the same path.
G0 end point
Y
Reverse run start point

Reverse-run path
Forward-run path
G0 start point
(12) During the creep distance movement in the unidirectional positioning (G60), a reverse run ends at the
creep distance movement start point.
Positioning position
Final advance direction
Start point End point
Creep distance movement G60 Creep distance

start point (Range of the reverse run
during the creep distance movement)
(13) In the corner chamfering/corner R, a reverse run ends at the start point of the corner chamfering/corner
R.
(14) If the 3-dimensional circular interpolation has been carried out beyond the intermediate point, a reverse
run ends at the intermediate point.
(15) In the tool compensation, a reverse run is executed within the block of the compensation.
(16) In the fixed cycles, a reverse run is executed for each one block of fixed cycle.
(17) Neither mode of high accuracy control, high-speed high-accuracy control nor high speed machining is
available when the manual speed command is valid.
580
(18) Both manual and automatic interlocks are available when the manual speed command is valid.
Direction designated in the machining program
Example) 100/-100 is set for the X direction of the 1st axis
Program X100 Program X-100
(Forward run) (Forward run)
Automatic interlock+: Available Automatic interlock+: Not available
Automatic interlock-: Not available Automatic interlock-: Available
Manual interlock+: Available Manual interlock+: Available
Manual interlock-: Not available Manual interlock-: Not available
(Reverse run) (Reverse run)
Automatic interlock+: Available Automatic interlock+: Not available
Automatic interlock-: Not available Automatic interlock-: Available
Manual interlock+: Not available Manual interlock+: Available
Manual interlock-: Available Manual interlock-: Not available
B Signal
MANUAL SPEED
- YC9D YDDD YF1D Y105D
COMMAND VALID
[Function]
This signal is used to run the machining program with handle feedrate or JOG feedrate (manual feedrate).
[Operation]
After this signal is ON, manual speed (handle or manual feedrate) is applied to the axis feedrate in the
whole automatic operation: the speed commanded in the program is not used.
If the program has not started, the automatic operation start is executed with handle or manual feedrate.
The manual operation mode decides whether the manual feedrate or handle feedrate is used.
• In handle mode
The program under operation is executed at the feedrate of the 1st handle, 1st axis.
During the reset, block stop or pause in the automatic operation mode, the automatic operation starts
at the time when the handle feedrate has been commanded.
When the reverse run is valid, a command in the (+) direction makes the movement as in the program,
while a command in (-) direction reverses the movement against the program. The reversed movement,
however, is available only within the current block.
• In JOG mode
The program under operation is executed at the manual feedrate as long as the JOG mode signal is
ON for the 1st axis.
During the reset, block stop or pause in the automatic operation mode, the automatic operation starts
at the time when the JOG mode has been turned ON.
When the reverse run is valid, a command in the (+) direction makes the movement as in the program,
while a command in (-) direction reverses the movement against the program. The reversed movement,
however, is available only within the current block.
When the "Rapid traverse" signal is ON, the axis moves at the rapid traverse feedrate.
581
[Caution]
(1) Turning ON this signal in the automatic operation leads the automatic operation pause.
(2) While this signal is ON, the "Automatic operation "start" command" signal is not valid.
(3) When the automatic operation is carried out with the manual speed command, the "In automatic
operation "pause"" signal is output regardless of the axis movement.
(4) The manual speed command makes the movement follow the command on the 1st axis, even though
the other axis is commanded in the program. Any commands to the other axes lead "M01
OPERATION ERROR 0005" (Internal interlock axis exists).
(5) The following G commands or modal make the movement different from that in the normal automatic
operation.
G00: The manual feedrate is applied, not the rapid traverse feedrate.
G28: The manual feedrate is applied, not the reference position return feedrate.
G31: The manual feedrate is applied, not the skip feedrate.
The movement when the skip signal is input, however, is the same as in the normal operation.
G33: The thread cutting and the variable lead thread cutting operate the same as the dry run. The
manual feedrate is applied.
G95: The feed per rotation operates the same as the dry run.
F1-digit feed: The manual feedrate is applied, not the F1-digit feedrate.
The “F1-digit commanded” signal is not output, either.
(6) Only the 1st handle is used. The other handles are ignored.
(7) When this signal is valid, the feedrate is not changed by the Inch/Metric changeover command
(G20/G21), nor by the rotary axis command speed tenfold.
(8) The manual interruption and the thread cutting cycle retract are available when this signal is ON. The
automatic handle interruption, as well as the manual operation in the manual/auto simultaneous mode,
cannot be used on the 1st axis because the axis applies the manual input upon this signal.
[Related signals]
(1) Manual speed command sign reversed (YC9E)
(2) Manual speed command reverse run valid (YC9F)
B Signal
MANUAL SPEED
- COMMAND SIGN YC9E YDDE YF1E Y105E
REVERSED
[Function]
When the manual speed is commanded, this signal reverses the direction that has been commanded with
the handle feed or JOG feed.
[Operation]
When this signal is ON, a speed command in the (+) direction reverses the movement against the program.
(Note that this operation is not available unless the reverse run is valid.) A command in the (-) direction
makes the movement as commanded in the program.
Manual speed command Manual speed command Movement direction
Reverse run valid Sign reversed by (+) operation by (-) operation
OFF (Invalid) + +
ON OFF + -
ON ON - +
In the modals that do not allow the reverse run The operation is
+
(thread cutting and synchronous tapping) ignored
582
[Caution]
This signal is not valid when the “Manual speed command Reverse run valid” signal is OFF.
[Related signals]
(1) Manual speed command valid (YC9D)
(2) Manual speed command reverse run valid (YC9F)
B Signal
MANUAL SPEED
- COMMAND REVERSE RUN YC9F YDDF YF1F Y105F
VALID
[Function]
This signal allows the manual speed command in the (-) direction to reverse the movement against the
program.
[Operation]
When this signal turns ON during the manual speed is commanded, a speed command in the (-) direction
in handle or JOG mode reverses the movement against the program.
When this signal is OFF, a command in the (-) direction makes the same movement as commanded in the
(+) direction: the movement follows the program.
[Caution]
(1) The reverse run is available within the block in execution. The reversed axis movement stops at the
start point of the block in execution.
(2) Unless all the axes stop, this signal cannot be changed ON/OFF. The ON/OFF change of this signal
during the axis movement is realized after all the axes have stopped.
(3) The reverse run is not allowed in the following operations. The axis stays stopped if a speed command
is given in the (-) direction.
(a) In the reference position return (G28, G29). When G28 is commanded, however, the reverse run is
available from the start point and to the intermediate point. When G29 is commanded, the reverse
run is available from the intermediate point to the end point.
(b) In cutting cycle in the synchronous or asynchronous tap.
(c) In shift amount operation in a fixed cycle.
(d) In tool center point control.
(e) In normal line control.
(f) In milling interpolation, pole coordinate rotation or cylindrical interpolation.
(g) When the thread cutting command (G33) is given.
(h) In exponential interpolation.
(i) In spline interpolation.
(j) In NURBS interpolation.
(k) In tool change position return or 2nd/3rd/4th reference position return (from the intermediate point to
the block end).
[Related signals]
(1) Manual speed command valid (YC9D)
(2) Manual speed command sign reversed (YC9E)
583
6.6.13 Arbitrary Reverse Run
This function allows a program to run the executed blocks backward (hereinafter called "reverse run") after
the block stop in the automatic operation.
The following steps are available:
• Execute the reverse run to the point to go back,
• Run the reversed blocks again following the program (hereinafter called "forward run") and
• Continue the remaining blocks from the point of the interruption.
Maximum 200 blocks can be executed in the reverse run.
Only the 1st to 3rd axes of each part system can be used for this function.
This function is an option.
Term definition
The following terms are used in this section.

Term Definition
Reverse run information Data of the program blocks that have been executed under the conditions
written later in "(1) Saving the reverse run data" in the "Reverse run
information" column.
Reverse run Running the executed blocks backward based on the reverse run information.
A reverse run starts at the specified point in a block, ends at the specified
point in one previous block.
Forward run Running the program again from the reverse run end point to the start point
based on the reverse run data.
Reverse run control Execution of the reverse/forward run.
Reverse run information
(1) Saving the reverse run data

When all the following conditions are met, NC saves the data of the executed program blocks as
reverse run information.
The conditions differ according to the setting value of the parameter "#1338 rev data save trg".
#1338
Conditions
rev data save trg
• "Reverse run control mode" (RVMD) signal is ON
0 • The program is under the memory or MDI mode
• During the valid G code modal written later in the "Valid G codes" column
• Under the macro interrupt (M96) command
1
• The program is under the memory or MDI mode
• During the valid G code modal written later in the "Valid G codes" column
NC saves the data of the latest 200 blocks as reverse run information. If a block has moved before
200th, the reverse run information of the block is deleted accordingly.
Movements in the reverse/forward run are not saved as reverse run information.
The reverse run information is not saved in the program check or restart search.
584
(2) Clearing the reverse run information

NC initializes the reverse run information if one of the following is executed.
• "Reverse run control mode" (RVMD) signal is turned OFF and ON
• "NC reset 1" (NRST1) signal is turned ON
• "NC reset 2" (NRST2) signal is turned ON
• "Reset & rewind" (RRW) signal is turned ON
Valid G code
Only the specified G codes allow the reverse run. Valid G codes are shown below.
The G codes out of the list are invalid. Do not execute the reverse run to the invalid G codes.
G code group Valid/Invalid Valid G code (default G code if invalid)
00 { G04, G52*, G53*, G60, G65, G92*, G92.1*, M96(ION), M97(I0F),
M98(G22) (Note 2), M99* (G23*)
01 { GO0, G01, G02, G03
02 { G17
03 { G90, G91
04 × G23(G23.1)
05 × G94, G95 (Note 3) (According to the modal when the reverse run
information is started to be stored.)
06 { G20, G21
07 × G40
08 × G49
09 × G80
10 × G98
11 { G50, G51
12 { G54, G55, G56, G57, G58, G59, G54.1
13 × G64
14 { G66, G66.1, G67
15 × G40.1(G15)
16 × G69(G69.1)
17 × G97
18 × G15
19 { G50.1, G51.1, (G62)
21 × G07.1 OFF, G13.1(G11)
(Note 1) Insert G04; before the G code with "*".

(Note 2) The figure rotation cannot be executed with M98(G22).
(Note 3) In G95 modal, the reverse/forward run is executed with "the last commanded speed * spindle
speed (mm/rev)"
(Note 4) The G codes in "( )" are used for M2 format.
585
Reverse run
(1) When the "Automatic operation "start" command" (ST) signal is turned ON and OFF under all the
following conditions, NC starts the reverse run based on the reverse run information. The same
conditions are required to start the reverse run during the forward run.
• In the automatic operation stop: "In automatic operation "run"" (OP) is ON, "In automatic operation
"start"" (STL) is OFF, "In automatic operation "pause"" (SPL) is OFF
or in the automatic operation pause: "In automatic operation "run"" (OP) is ON, "In automatic
operation "start"" (STL) is OFF, "In automatic operation "pause"" (SPL) is ON
• The “Reverse run” (VRV) signal is ON
(2) If the "Automatic operation "start" command" signal is turned ON and OFF during the automatic
operation stop, the reverse run starts from the block stop point.
N01 G90 G54 X0 Y0 ;

N02 G91 G01 X-50. F500 ;
N03 Y-20. ;
N04 X20. ;
N05 G02 Y-50. R25. ;
N06 G03 Y-50. R25. ;
Reverse run N07 G01 X30. ;
M02 ;
Block stop
operation pause, the reverse run starts after the execution for the remaining distance of the command.
Therefore, the reverse run usually must be started during the automatic operation stop.
N01 G90 G54 X0 Y0 ;

N02 G91 G01 X-50. F500 ;
N03 Y-20. ;
N04 X20. ;
N05 G02 Y-50. R25. ;
N06 G03 Y-50. R25. ;
(2)Reverse run N07 G01 X30. ;
M02 ;
(1) Moves to the block end
Block pause
586
(4) The following shows the movement when the "Reverser run" (VRV) signal is turned ON/OFF in
different operation states.
Operation Movement
The "Reverse run" signal is turned The setting value of the parameter "#1338 rev data save trg"
ON/OFF during the automatic decides as follows.
operation 0: The movement stops immediately. A block stop is executed.
The next cycle start executes the reverse/forward run
according to the "Reverse run" signal.
1: The movement does not stop immediately. A block stop or
block pause is required to execute the reverse run. The next
cycle start after the block stop executes the reverse/forward
run according to the "Reverse run" signal. The next cycle
after the block pause runs the remaining distance before
executing the reverse/forward run following the "Reverse
run" signal.
The "Reverse run" signal is turned The next cycle runs the remaining distance before executing the
ON during the block pause reverse/forward run following the “Reverse run” signal.
The "Reverse run" signal is turned The next cycle executes the reverse/forward run following the
ON during the block stop “Reverse run” signal.
(5) In the following case, NC outputs "M01 OPERATION ALARM (0119)", decelerates and stops the
movement.
• All the saved reverse run information have been consumed in the reverse run
• In the normal operation (not in the reverse/forward run) while the "Reverse run control mode" signal is
ON, 8 consecutive blocks with no movement have been detected.
(6) The "Automatic operation "pause"" (*SP) signal and the "Single block" (SBK) signal are available in the
reverse run.
(7) If the following signals are turned ON during the reverse run, NC resets the whole automatic operation.
• "NC reset 1" (NRST1)
• "Reset & rewind" (RRW)
587
Forward run
(1) When the "Automatic operation “start" command" (ST) signal is turned ON and OFF under all the
following conditions, NC starts the forward run based on the reverse run information.
• In the automatic operation stop: "In automatic operation "run"" (OP) is ON, "In automatic operation
"start"" (STL) is OFF, "In automatic operation "pause"" (SPL) is OFF
or in the automatic operation pause: "In automatic operation "run"" (OP) is ON, "In automatic
operation "start"" (STL) is OFF, "In automatic operation "pause"" (SPL) is ON
• The "Reverse run" (VRV) signal is OFF
(2) If the "Automatic operation "start"" signal is turned ON and OFF during the automatic operation stop,
the forward run starts from the block stop point.
Block stop N01 G90 G54 X0 Y0 ;

N02 G91 G01 X-50. F500 ;
N03 Y-20. ;
Forward run N04 X20. ;
N05 G02 Y-50. R25. ;
N06 G03 Y-50. R25. ;
N07 G01 X30. ;
M02 ;
Reverse run
operation pause, the forward run starts after the execution for the remaining distance of the command.
Therefore, the forward run usually must be started during the automatic operation stop.
(1) Moves to the block end N01 G90 G54 X0 Y0 ;

N02 G91 G01 X-50. F500 ;
N03 Y-20. ;
(2) Forward run N04 X20. ;
Block pause N05 G02 Y-50. R25. ;
N06 G03 Y-50. R25. ;
N07 G01 X30. ;
M02 ;
Reverse run
588
(4) After the forward run has completed to the block where the reverse run had started, the movement
continues to execute the remaining machining programs that had been automatically stopped. If the
"Single block" signal is ON, the movement stops at each block end.
(5) The "Automatic operation "pause" command” (*SP) signal and the "Single block" (SBK) signal are
available in the forward run.
(6) If the following signals are turned ON during the forward run, NC resets the whole automatic operation.
• "Reset & rewind" (RRW)
Feedrate (F) in the reverse/forward run
The reverse/forward run applies the feedrate specified with F command in the normal operation. Cutting
feed override, rapid traverse override and dry run can be used on the F command.
Program
Reverse Forward
：
G01 X** Y** F100； F100 F100
： F100
G01 X** Y** F500； F500 F500
： F500
G00 X** Y**； Rapid Rapid Rapid
traverse traverse traverse
：
G01 X** Y**； F500 F500
F500
：
G01 X** Y** F100； F100 F100
F100
：
M command in the reverse/forward run
If any M command is given at the reverse run start and later on, NC does not output the "M code data"
signal (R504 to R511) or the "M function strobe" (MFn) signal.
In the forward run, M code data is output according to the program. Then the "M function strobe" signal is
turned ON. Note that only the last one M command is output when the several M commands are given to a
block. Note also that no M command is output from the M command block where the forward run has
started.
Program
Reverse Forward
：
M3; M3
：
M50; M50
：
M4; M4 M4
：
No M code output during the reverse run
589
S, T and 2nd miscellaneous function command in the reverse/forward run
In the reverse run, NC outputs an S command only upon a change of the modal value: the S command with
the changed modal value is output to "S code data" (R512 to R519) and then the "S function strobe" (SFn)
signal is turned ON.
In the forward run, NC outputs S commands to "S code data" according to the program, and then turns ON
the "S function strobe" signal.
T command and 2nd miscellaneous command are also output only upon changes of the value: each code
data is output and each strobe signal is turned ON.
Program
Reverse run Forward run

：
S100; S100
： S100
S200; S200 S200
： S200
S300; S300 S300
：
Outputs upon modal changes
Timing chart
Reverse/forward run with the "Reverse control mode" and "Reverse run" signals
Reverse run
control mode (RVMD)
Reverse run (VRV)
"start" (STL)
Automatic operation
Program execution N Stop R Stop R Stop F Stop F Stop R Stop F N N
N: Normal operation
R: Reverse run Reached to the reverse run start point
F: Forward run
How the "Reverse run" signal works with the signals for the operation start
Reverse run (VRV)
Automatic operation
"start” (STL)
Do not turn OFF the signal STL when the reverse run has started.
590
Restrictions
(1) A buffer correction to the block for the reverse/forward run is not allowed in the reverse run control
(reverse/forward run). The buffer correction is available to the blocks after the block where the reverse
run starts.
(2) If a verification stop has been executed in the normal operation, a reverse run control (reverse/forward
run) stops at the verification point in the block. On the other hand, if no verification stop has been
executed in the block in the normal operation, the verification stop cannot be executed at the verification
point specified during the reverse run control.
(3) Execute a scaling (G51) command before turning ON the "Reverse run control mode" signal. If the
command is executed during the reverse run, the movement stops and stays at the reverse run start
point in the block before the scaling command.
Stays stopped N01 G90 X-10. ;

N02 Y-10. ;
N03 G51 X-10. Y-10. P2. ;
N04 X-20. ;
Reverse run Scaling ON
N05 Y-20. ;
N06 G50 ;
N06 X-30. ;
Scaling canceled N07 Y-30. ;
N06 X-40. ;
N07 Y-40. ;
M02 ;
(4) Corner R/C, linear angle command and geometric command are not successfully executed during the
reverse run. Corner R/C stays stopped before the corner.
Stays stopped
before the corner N01 G91 X-100. ;
N02 Y-100. ;
N03 X-100. ,C10. ;
N04 Y-100. ;
Reverse run M02 ;
Corner C
(5) The consecutive number of "blocks with no movement" must be 7 or less in the program to be executed in
the reverse run control mode. When containing 8 or more blocks, insert G04;(dwell) before the 8th block.
When the number of "blocks with no movement" reaches 8 in a row in the reverse run control mode, the
alarm "M01 Reverse run impossible 0119" occurs.
(6) Be sure to insert a G04;(dwell) block before G92, G52 and G53 commands.
(7) When using a sub program in the program executed in the reverse run control mode, insert a G04;(dwell)
block before each block of sub program call (M98) and sub program return (M99).
(8) This function cannot be used with the reference position retract. Turning ON the "Reference position
retract" (RTN) signal in the reverse run control mode clears the reverse run information.
(9) "M code independent output" (M00, M01, M02 and M30) signals are not output in the reverse run.
(10) Only the linear-type rotary axis can be under the reverse run control.
591
(11) Do not turn ON/OFF the "Optional block skip" (BDTn) signal under the reverse run control (in the
reverse/forward run). The path after the change is the same as in the normal operation.
(12) The axis movement, which has been executed in other modes than memory and MDI modes (in MDI
interrupt, manual operation or macro interrupt for example) under the reverse run control, must be
returned before the reverse run starts. Unless the movement is returned, the reverse run of the program
starts with the current position regarded as end point of the last block that has been executed in the
memory or MDI mode.
(13) Tool life is not changed by the reverse run control (reverse/forward run).
(14) The reverse run control cannot be used with the PLC interrupt. Do not use the "PLC interrupt" (PIT)
signal under the reverse run control.
Using macro interrupt
(1) Outline
The macro interrupt function helps starting the reverse run in the middle of the block.
Using the macro interrupt, which employs a user macro function, will be useful when a tool has broken:
this helps moving the tool from where it has broken to the point where the tool is changed, and then
returning it to the program path after the tool change.
An interrupt program has to instruct to move the tool to the tool change position, as well as to return it to
the program path.
Use the parameter "#1113 INT_2"(Interrupt type 2 validity) to decide where to interrupt. Set "0" to the
parameter to execute the macro interrupt in the middle of the block.
592
(2) Operation example

<To return the tool to the interruption point and start a cycle again>
Keep the "Reverse run from block start" (RVSP) signal OFF when starting a reverse run.
To execute a reverse run after returning from the macro program, carry out a block stop when returning,
turn ON the "Reverse run" (VRV) signal and then start the cycle. When the reverse run is not executed,
the block stop is not required.
N01 G90 G54 X0 Y0 ;

N02 M96 P1001 ;
N03 G91 G01 X-50. F500 ;
N04 Y-20.
N05 X20.
N06 G02 Y-50. R25. ;
N07 G03 Y-50. R25. ;
N08 G01 X30. ;
Reverse run
N07 M97 ;
N103 M02 ;
N101
O1001 ;
#101=#5001 #102=#5002;
Where a tool has Where a tool is
N101 G90 X70. ;
broken or the like changed or the like
N102 M0 ;
N103 G90 G53 X#101 Y#102;
N104 M0 ;
G04 ;
M99 ;
Single block (SBK)
Reverse run control

mode (RVMD)
Macro interrupt (UIT)
Reverse run (VRV)
Reverse run from

block start (RVSP)
In macro interrupt
M function finish
(FINn)
Automatic operation
"start" (STL)
Program execution N06 N07 N101 N102 N103 N104 Stop (N07) (N06)
Reverse run in "( )"

Forward run in "[ ]"
593
<To return to the start point in the block under the interruption and start a reverse run>
Turn ON the "Reverse run from block start" (RVSP) signal when starting the reverse run.
N01 G90 G54 X0 Y0 ;

N02 M96 P1002 ;
N03 G91 G01 X-50. F500 ;
N04 Y-20.
Reverse run
N05 X20.
N06 G02 Y-50. R25. ;
N07 G03 Y-50. R25. ;
Start point of a block
N08 G01 X30. ;
where a tool has
N07 M97 ;
N103 broken or the like
M02 ;
N101
O1002 ;
#101=#5121 #102=#5122;
Where a tool has Where a tool is
N101 G90 X70. ;
broken or the like changed or the like
N102 M0 ;
N103 G90 G53 X#101 Y#102;
N104 M0 ;
G04 ;
M99 ;
Single block (SBK)
Reverse run control

mode (RVMD)
Reverse run (VRV)
Reverse run from

block start (RVSP)
In macro interrupt
M function finish
(FINn)
Automatic operation
"start" (STL)
Program execution N06 N07 N101 N102 N103 N104 Stop (N06) (N05)

594
(3) Precautions
(a) Make sure to start a reverse run on the point (or the block start point) where the interruption occurs.
If a reverse run starts with a block stop in a macro interrupt program, the movement seems to start at
the point (or the block start point) where the interruption occurs.
N01 G90 G54 X0 Y0 ;

N02 M96 P1001 ;
N03 G91 G01 X-50. F500 ;
(N08) Reverse run
N04 Y-20.
N08 N05 X20.
N06 Y-15.
N101
N07 X25.
N08 Y-20.
N09 X-25.
N10 Y-15.
O1001 ; N12 Y-15.
#101=#5001 #102=#5002; N13 X-25.
N101 G90 X70. ; N14 Y-20.
N102 M0 ; N15 X25.
N103 G90 G53 X#101 Y#102; N16 Y-15.
N104 M0 ; N17 X30.
G04 ; M97 ;
M99 ; M02 ;
Single block (SBK)
Reverse run control

mode (RVMD)
Reverse run (VRV) Reverse run turns ON here

Reverse run from
block start (RVSP)
In macro interrupt
M function finish
(FINn)
Automatic operation
"start" (STL)
Program execution N08 Stop N101 Stop N102 Stop (N08) Stop
N08 is executed Reverse run in "( )"

in the reverse run Forward run in "[ ]"
595
(b) In a macro interrupt program, start a reverse run at the point (or the block start point) where the
interruption occurs and which a M99 (complete sub program) block follows.
If a reverse run has started with a block stop in the macro interrupt program, the movement returns to
the interruption start point in the forward run, and then jumps to the next block of the reverse run start
block in the macro interrupt program.
N01 G90 G54 X0 Y0 ;

N02 M96 P1002 ;
N03 G91 G01 X-50. F500 ;
N04 Y-20.
N05 X20.
N06 G02 Y-50. R25. ;
N07 G03 Y-50. R25. ;
N08 G01 X30. ;
M02 ;
N07
N103
O1002 ;
#101=#5001 #102=#5002;
N101
N105 N101 G90 X70. ;
N102 M0 ;
N103 G90 G53 X#101 Y#102;
N104 M0 ;
N105 G01 Y-20. ;
G04 ;
M99 ;
Single block (SBK)
Reverse run control

mode (RVMD)
Reverse run (VRV)

Reverse run turns ON Reverse run turns OFF
Reverse run from
block start (RVSP)
In macro interrupt
M function finish
(FINn)
Automatic operation
"start" (STL)
Program execution N07 Stop N101 Stop N102 Stop N103 Stop N104 Stop (N7) Stop [N7] Stop N105

N105 is executed
(c) While the reverse run is executed, the "Macro interrupt" signal is ignored.
596
System variable
The following shows the system variables used in the reverse run control.
(1) Position information
Position
End point coordinate Start point coordinate End point coordinate
information
of block of block of block
immediately before with a macro interrupt with a macro interrupt
Axis No.
1 #5001 #5121 #5141
2 #5002 #5122 #5142
3 #5003 #5123 #5143
: : : :
n #5000 + n #5120 + n #5140 + n
Reading during
Yes Yes Yes
movement
(2) Reverse run information

Variable Usage Description Range
number
#31100 Number of available +1 added number of the blocks that retained the 0 to 201
blocks for reverse run reverse run information while the “Reverse run
control mode” signal was ON
#31101 Counter of available Number of available blocks for reverse run 0 to 201
blocks for reverse run (value of #31100) when the “Reverse run” signal
turned ON to start.
Turns “0” when the forward run has been
executed for all the blocks.
Shows “0” in the normal operation.
597
B Signal
- REVERSE RUN VRV YC27 YACA YAD2 YADA
[Function]
This signal is used to select reverse/forward run in the arbitrary reverse run.
[Operation]
Forward run is executed when this signal is OFF.
Reverse run is executed when this signal is ON.
This signal is available only in the reverse run control mode.
[Related signals]
(1) Reverse run from block start (RVSP: YD08)
(2) Macro interrupt priority (RVIT: YD09)
(3) Reverse run control mode (RVMD: YD0A)
B Signal
REVERSE RUN FROM
- RVSP YD08 YE48 YF88 Y10C8
BLOCK START
[Function]
This signal is used to designate where a reverse run starts in the arbitrary reverse run.
[Operation]
When this signal is OFF, a reverse run starts from the block stop point.
When this signal is ON, a reverse run starts from the start point of the block where the movement stopped.
Return to the start point for the reverse run from block start, turn this signal ON, and then start an
automatic operation.
Keep this signal ON until the "In auto operation "start"" signal (STL) turns ON.
[Related signals]
(3) Reverse run (VRV: YC27)
598
B Signal
MACRO INTERRUPT
- RVIT YD09 YE49 YF89 Y10C9
PRIORITY
[Function]
In the arbitrary reverse run, turning ON the "Macro interrupt" (UIT) signal executes a block stop during the
reverse run. Then this signal is used to select the operation when an automatic operation is started while
the "Reverse run" (VRV) signal is OFF.
[Operation]
When this signal is OFF, a forward run is executed with the fall of the "Automatic operation "start"
command" signal.
When this signal is ON, a macro interrupt program is executed with the fall of the "Automatic operation
"start" command" signal.
[Related signals]
B Signal
REVERSE RUN CONTROL

- RVMD YD0A YE4A YF8A Y10CA
MODE
[Function]
This signal is used to save the reverse run information used for the reverse run control in the arbitrary
reverse run.
[Operation]
When this signal is ON, the reverse run information is saved.
Turn this signal ON at the start of the block where the reverse run control is executed. Turn it OFF when
resetting.
Turn ON the "Recalculation request" signal (CRQ) when turning ON this signal.
Unless the recalculation is requested, the reverse run information does not include the block that has been
created by pre-reading.
[Related signals]
(4) Recalculation request (CRQ: YC2B)
599
6.6.14 PLC Axis Indexing
6.6.14.1 Outline
This function is used to move the PLC axis to the position (station) registered on the table.
The destination (station) can be determined by equally dividing the valid axis stroke or by using an arbitrary
coordinate that has been stored in advance. The PLC program can also be used to specify arbitrary values
of the coordinate.
(1) Command methods
Station method (for rotary axis) : One rotation (360°) of the rotary axis is equally divided to
determine the stations (positioning destinations).
The maximum number of divisions is 360.
Station
1
8
2
7
3
6
4
5
Figure 1. Setting 8 stations (8 divisions)
Station method (for linear axis) : A valid stroke is equally divided to determine the stations
(positioning destinations).
The maximum number of divisions is 359.
Zero point
原点 Valid stroke length
有効ストローク長ステーション
Station
1 2 3 4 5
ステーション番号
Station No.
Figure 2. Setting 5 stations
• The zero point is station 1, and the final end of the valid stroke is
station 5.
• When using a linear axis, the No. of equal divisions is "number
of stations - 1".
600
(2) Feed functions
Feed rate selection : Four different feed rates are set to be selected with the PLC
program.
Acceleration/deceleration pattern : Four different acceleration/deceleration patterns are set to be

selected with the PLC program.
The patterns are all constant inclination
acceleration/deceleration, which have options of linear or soft
acceleration/deceleration.
Short-cut control : A least movement distance is automatically judged when a rotary

axis is rotated.
(3) Operation functions
The following operation modes are available.

Send a command from PLC to change the operation mode.
Automatic mode : The axis is positioned at the station No. designated by the start
signal. When the start signal has turned OFF before the
positioning is completed, the axis is positioned at the nearest
station position.
The arbitrary position command operation is also available: the
positioning can be carried out to any position other than a station
by directly commanding the positioning coordinates from the
PLC.
Manual mode : While the start signal is ON, the axis is rotated at a constant
speed in the designated direction. When the start signal has
turned OFF, the axis is positioned at the nearest station position.
JOG mode : While the start signal is ON, the axis is rotated at a constant
speed in the designated direction.
Manual handle mode : The axis is moved by the manual PLG.
(4) Operation support function
Position switch : A signal is output to the PLC interface when the machine has
reached within the specified range.
601
6.6.14.2 PLC Axis Indexing Interface
List of signals
(a) PLC → NC (R8050 to R8085, R8098)
PLC indexing axis
Abbrev. Signal name
PLC axis indexing control command 4 PLC axis indexing control command 3
(R8050: AUXCM4) (R8051: AUXCM3)
bit0 OV1 Speed override 1 bit0 ST1 Station selection 1
bit7 OVR Speed override valid bit7 ST128 Station selection 128
bit8 Spare bit8 ST256 Station selection 256
bit9 Spare bit9 Spare
bitA Spare bitA Spare
602
PLC axis indexing control command 2 PLC axis indexing control command 1
(R8052: AUXCM2) (R8053: AUXCM1)
bit0 ST Operation start bit0 ∗SVF Servo OFF
bit1 DIR Rotation direction bit1
Arbitrary point feed
bit2 STS bit2
command valid
bit3 bit3 MRST Master reset
Incremental feed
bit4 MP1 bit4 *IT+ Interlock+
magnification 1
Incremental feed
bit5 MP2 bit5 *IT- Interlock-
magnification 2
Operation parameter
bit6 PR1 bit6 RDF Ready OFF
selection 1
Operation parameter Handle feed operation
bit7 PR2 bit7 H
selection 2 mode
bit8 Spare bit8 AUT Automatic operation mode
bit9 Spare bit9 MAN Manual operation mode
bitA Spare bitA J JOG operation mode
bitB Spare bitB
bitC Spare bitC
bitD bitD Reference point
Spare AZS
initialization setting mode
bitE Spare bitE ZST Reference point setting
bitF Spare bitF
PLC axis indexing operation adjustment mode valid (R8098)

bit Abbrev. Name
bit0 - PLC indexing axis operation adjustment mode valid (common for all axes)
603
(b) NC->PLC (R8000 to R8035, R8048)

PLC indexing axis
Abbrev. Signal name
PLC axis indexing control status 4 PLC axis indexing control status 3
(R8000: AUXST4) (R8001: AUXST3)
bit0 PSW1 Position switch 1 bit0 STO1 Station position 1
bit8 Spare bit8 STO256 Station position 256
bit9 Spare bit9 PSW9 Position switch 9
bitA Spare bitA PSW10 Position switch 10
bitB NST Start not possible bitB PSW11 Position switch 11
bitC Spare bitC PSW12 Position switch 12
bitD Spare bitD PSW13 Position switch 13
bitE Spare bitE PSW14 Position switch 14
bitF Spare bitF PSW15 Position switch 15
604
PLC axis indexing control status 2 PLC axis indexing control status 1
(R8002: AUXST2) (R8003: AUXST1)
bit0 AUTO bit0 RDY Servo ready
mode
bit1 MANO In manual operation mode bit1 INP In-position
bit2 JO In JOG operation mode bit2 SMZ Smoothing zero
bit3 bit3 AX1 Axis selection output
bit4 bit4 MVP In axis plus motion
bit5 DOG Near-point dog bit5 MVM In axis minus motion
In reference point
bit6 AZSO bit6 TLQ In torque limit
bit7 bit7
bit8 AL1 Alarm 1 bit8
bit9 AL2 Alarm 2 bit9 RST In reset
In handle feed operation
bitA AL4 Alarm 4 bitA HO
mode
bitB BAL Battery drop bitB MA Controller ready completion
bitC ABS bitC SA Servo ready completion
Absolute position data Automatic set position
bitD ZSN bitD JSTA
loss reached
bitE ZSF bitE JST Set position reached
completed
bitF ZSE bitF NEAR Near set position
completed
PLC axis indexing In operation adjustment mode (R8048)

bit AV Name bit AV Name
PLC indexing axis PLC indexing axis
bit0 - bit4 -
in operation adjustment mode 1st axis in operation adjustment mode 5th axis
PLC indexing axis PLC indexing axis
bit1 - bit5 -
in operation adjustment mode 2nd axis in operation adjustment mode 6th axis
PLC indexing axis
bit2 -
in operation adjustment mode 3rd axis
PLC indexing axis
bit3 -
in operation adjustment mode 4th axis
605
Details of operation command signals (PLC -> NC)
Signal name Signal 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th

abbreviation axis axis axis axis axis axis
PLC AXIS INDEXING
AUXCM1 R8053 R8059 R8065 R8071 R8077 R8083
CONTROL COMMAND 1
B Signal
contact Signal name abbreviation bit
* Servo OFF *SVF AUXCM1/bit0
When the Servo OFF signal is set to "0" (B contact), the control axis enters the servo OFF status. No matter
which operation mode the servo is in and turned OFF, the axis movement will stop, and the servo will turn
OFF. The axis movement restarts when the servo is turned ON again.
If the axis moves for any reason while the servo is OFF, it can be selected whether to compensate that
movement amount when the servo turns ON the next time. Select with parameter "#1064 svof".
(1) When carrying out movement amount compensation (#1064 svof = 1)
When the servo is OFF, the coordinates are always updated by the amount the axis has moved. When the
servo is OFF, the coordinates show the machine position.
(2) When not carrying out movement amount compensation (#1064 svof = 0)
When the servo is OFF, the coordinates are not updated even when the axis moves. When the servo is
OFF, the coordinates show the machine position when the servo is OFF.
When the servo is turned ON, the axis is moved to the position where the servo was turned OFF.
When the servo is OFF and the axis movement exceeds the excessive error width (designated with
parameter "#2226 SV026"), a servo alarm occurs.
[Caution]
(1) The actual servo OFF operation is validated after In-position (INP) is completed. When using a
mechanical clamp, carry out the clamp operation after confirming the in-position status.
(2) When the power is turned ON, the Servo OFF signal turns OFF ("0") and the servo OFF function becomes
valid. It is necessary before operation to turn the Servo OFF signal ON ("1") in the PLC program to release
the servo OFF.
B Signal
- Master reset MRST AUXCM1/bit3
[Function]
This signal resets the PLC indexing axis.
[Operation]
When this signal is ON, the following reset operations are carried out.
(1) The axis movement decelerates to a stop.
(2) Alarms that can be released by the reset are released.
(3) The In reset (RST) signal is output.
(4) The operation alarm is released while resetting.
[Related signals]
(1) In reset (RST: AUXST1/bit9)
606
B Signal
- Interlock+ *IT+ AUXCM1/bit4
When the control axis is moving in the (+) direction, this signal decelerates and stops the axis movement
immediately.
When this signal is OFF from before movement, the motion is stopped in the same manner as without starting.
In any case the movement is started or restarted by turning this signal ON.
B Signal
- Interlock- *IT- AUXCM1/bit5
This is the same as the Interlock + (IT+) signal, the only difference being the direction.
B Signal
- Ready OFF RDF AUXCM1/bit6
[Function]
This is a signal to turn OFF the READY status.
[Operation]
When put into a READY OFF status, the power supply to the servomotor is shut off, and the contactor control
output is simultaneously turned OFF. If the motor is in operation, it will stop by a dynamic brake stop or a
deceleration control stop. Servo ready completion (SA) and Servo ready (RDY) are also turned OFF, but an
alarm does not occur. When this signal is turned OFF, the machine immediately returns to the original state.
[Related signals]
(1) Servo ready completion (SA: AUXST1/bitC)
(2) Servo ready (RDY: AUXST1/bit0)
B Signal
- Handle feed operation mode H AUXCM1/bit7
[Function]
This signal selects the handle feed operation mode.
[Operation]
The axis will move for the amount determined by input pulse multiplied by feed magnification after this signal
is turned ON, each signal [Operation parameter selection (PR1, PR2) and Incremental feed magnification
(MP1, MP2)] is determined, and the handle pulse is input.
[Caution]
(1) Turning this signal ON when other operation modes are ON will result in the operation alarm "M01 0101
Aux ax no operation mode".
(2) The handle mode acceleration/deceleration time is the acceleration/deceleration time constant 2 linear
acceleration/deceleration of the selected operation parameter group.
[Related signals]
(1) Operation parameter selection 1, 2 (PR1, PR2: AUXCM2/bit6,7)
(2) Incremental feed magnification 1, 2 (MP1, MP2: AUXCM2/bit4,5)
607
B Signal
- Automatic operation mode AUT AUXCM1/bit8
[Function]
This signal selects the automatic operation mode.
[Operation]
Turn this signal ON, set Station selection 1 to 256 (ST1 to ST256) and then turn Operation start (ST) ON to
move the axis to the designated station. The shortcut control or the rotation direction can be selected with
parameters.
[Caution]
Turning this signal ON when other operation modes are ON will result in the operation alarm "M01 0101 Aux
ax no operation mode".
[Related signals]
(1) Rotation direction (DIR: AUXCM2/bit1)
(3) Station selection 1 to 256 (ST1 to ST256: AUXCM3/bit0 to 8)
B Signal
- Manual operation mode MAN AUXCM1/bit9
[Function]
This signal selects the manual operation mode.
[Operation]
When the rotation direction is designated and Operation start (ST) is turned ON, the axis will begin moving,
and the rotation will continue in the designated direction until Operation start is turned OFF. When Operation
start turns OFF, the axis will be positioned to the nearest station.
[Caution]
[Related signals]
608
B Signal
- JOG operation mode J AUXCM1/bitA
[Function]
This signal selects the JOG operation mode.
[Operation]
When the rotation direction is designated and Operation start (ST) is turned ON, the axis will begin moving,
and the rotation will continue in the designated direction until Operation start is turned OFF. Unlike the
manual operation mode, when Operation start is turned OFF, the axis immediately decelerate to a stop.
[Caution]
[Related signals]
B Signal
Reference point initialization
- AZS AUXCM1/bitD
setting mode
[Function]
This signal selects the mode that initializes the reference point for the absolute position detection system.
[Operation]
When this signal is turned ON, the reference point initialization setting mode is held until the NC power is
turned OFF. (Cannot be canceled)
When the stopper method is selected by setting "1" to "#2049 type", the torque limit value and the excessive
error detection width in the operation parameter group 4 are automatically selected.
B Signal
- Reference point setting ZST AUXCM1/bitE
[Function]
This signal turns ON when designating the reference point position with the reference point initialization for
the absolute position detection system.
[Operation]
When this signal is turned ON in the reference point initialization setting mode, the position is set as the
absolute position reference point.
609

PLC AXIS INDEXING
AUXCM2 R8052 R8058 R8064 R8070 R8076 R8082
CONTROL COMMAND 2
B Signal
- Operation start ST AUXCM2/bit0
When this signal is turned ON in an operation mode, the operation will start. The Operation start signal is
handled as a status, so the ON status must be maintained until the operation is finished.
Operation movement in each operation mode

(1) Automatic operation mode
Station selection
Operation start
Automatic set position reached
Set position reached
Near set position

Output 0 (zero)
Station position
Axis movement
Station selection (ST1 to ST256) and Operation parameter selection (PR1, PR2) are established before
inputting the Operation start signal. These two signals are read in by the startup of the Operation start
signal, so they are held even if they are changed after the startup.
When the Operation start signal is input, the output signals related to the set position all turn OFF. Station
position will be output as "0". When the positioning is completed, Automatic set position reached (JSTA)
and Set position reached (JST) is output. Then turn the Operation start signal OFF.
When the Operation start signal is turned OFF during axis movement, the axis will stop at the nearest
station. Note that for a linear axis, if there is not a nearest point in the movement direction, the
commanded station becomes the nearest point.
(Note) When the shortcut function is OFF for the rotating axis, the positioning direction can be
designated with Rotation direction (DIR).
610
(2) Manual operation mode
Rotation direction
Operation start
Near set position
Station position Output 0 (zero)
Axis movement
Rotation direction (DIR) and Operation parameter selection (PR1, PR2) are established before inputting
the Operation start signal. These two signals are read in by the startup of the Operation start signal, so
they are held even if they are changed after the startup.
position will be output as "0".
While the Operation start signal is ON, the rotation continues in the designated direction. When the
Operation start signal is turned OFF, a positioning is carried out to the nearest station where the axis can
stop in the rotation direction. Note that for a linear axis, if there is no nearest point in the movement
direction, the axis will immediately decelerate to a stop.
When the positioning is completed, Set position reached (JST) is output.
(Note) Automatic set position reached (JSTA) will not be output.
(3) JOG operation mode

Rotation direction
Operation start
Near set position
Station position Output 0 (zero)
Axis movement
Rotation direction (DIR) and Operation parameter selection (PR1, PR2) are established before inputting
the Operation start signal. These two signals are read in by the startup of the Operation start signal, so
they are held even if they are changed after the startup.
position will be output as "0". While the Operation start signal is ON, the rotation continues in the
designated direction. When the Operation start signal is turned OFF, the axis decelerates to a stop. Set
position reached (JST) and Near set position (NEAR) are output if the axis is stopped within each
tolerable width from the station position.
611
B Signal
- Rotation direction DIR AUXCM2/bit1
[Function]
This signal designates the rotation direction of the operation in each operation mode.
[Operation]
Turn this signal ON to designate the rotation direction before inputting the Operation start (ST) signal.
This signal is invalid in the automatic operation mode when the shortcut control is set and selected by the
parameter. When the shortcut control is not selected, a positioning is carried out in the direction designated
by this signal.
This signal is read in at the startup of Operation start (ST). The signal changes are ignored after the startup.
DIR Axis rotation direction Station movement direction
0 Forward run Direction of increasing station No.
1 Reverse run Direction of decreasing station No.
The actual motor rotation direction is reversed by changing the setting of parameter "#1018 ccw".
[Related signals]
(1) Operation start (ST: AUXCM2/bit0)
B Signal
Arbitrary point
- STS AUXCM2/bit2
feed command valid
This signal selects the mode that executes the positioning, with the command unit specified by "#1005
plcunit", to the arbitrary position (coordinate) transferred from the NC. Automatic operation mode (AUT) must
be turned ON simultaneously with Arbitrary point feed command valid.
[Related signals]
(1) Automatic operation mode (AUT: AUXCM1/bit8)
B Signal
Incremental feed MP1,
- AUXCM2/bit4,5
magnification 1, 2 MP2
This signal selects the incremental feed amount and the handle feed magnification. In the handle feed, the
movement amount per handle pulse is selected.
MP2 MP1 Feed amount
0 0 0.001°
0 1 0.01°
1 0 0.1°
1 1 1°
612
B Signal
Operation parameter PR1,
- AUXCM2/bit6.7
selection 1, 2 PR2
This signal selects one parameter group to be actually used from four parameter groups that designate the
axis feed operation. The parameter group cannot be changed while Operation start (ST) is ON. (The group is
held in NC.)
If Smoothing zero is confirmed for the target axis, the operation parameter group can be changed with the
Operation start. Changing the parameter setting values of the time constant, torque limit value and excessive
error detection width, however, is not possible unless Smoothing zero is confirmed for all the NC axes. The
parameter values, if changed during the NC axis movement, are valid after the smoothing zero is confirmed.
Operation parameter group 4

Operation parameter group 3
Operation parameter
Operation parameter group 2 • Automatic feedrate
Operation parameter group 1 • Manual feedrate
• Automatic feedrate Select • Acceleration/deceleration time constant 1
• Manual feedrate • Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2
• Acceleration/deceleration time constant 1 • Torque limit value
• Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2 • Excessive error detection width
• Torque limit value • Set position detection width
• Excessive error detection width • Near set position detection width
• Set position detection width
• Near set position detection width
PR2 PR1 Selected operation parameter group

0 0 1
0 1 2
1 0 3
1 1 4
613

PLC AXIS INDEXING
AUXCM3 R8051 R8057 R8063 R8069 R8075 R8081
CONTROL COMMAND 3
B Signal
ST1 to
- Station selection 1 to 256 AUXCM3/bit0 to 8
ST256
[Function]
This signal designates an index station No. in the automatic operation mode.
[Operation]
Set an index station No. before inputting Operation start (ST) in the automatic operation mode.
Input a 9-digit binary number. An input "000000001" corresponds to station No.1.
This signal is read in at the startup of Operation start (ST). The signal changes are ignored after the startup.
When this signal is set to "000000000" and the automatic operation is started, a one station rotation special
command will result. (Note that this cannot be used when the station positions are determined in non-uniform
assignments.)

PLC AXIS INDEXING
AUXCM4 R8050 R8056 R8062 R8068 R8074 R8080
CONTROL COMMAND 4
B Signal
OV1 to
- Speed override 1 to 64 AUXCM4/bit0 to 6
OV64
This signal designates the override value added to the selected feedrate. Set a binary value for the override.
Values over 100% are regarded as 100%.
Selected speed ∗ Speed override
Effective feedrate =
100
B Signal
- Speed override valid OVR AUXCM4/bit7
This is a signal to validate the speed override. When this signal is turned OFF, the set feedrate becomes the
operation speed without calculating the override.
614
Details of operation status signals (NC -> PLC)

PLC AXIS INDEXING
AUXST1 R8003 R8009 R8015 R8021 R8027 R8033
CONTROL STATUS 1
B Signal
- Servo ready RDY AUXST1/bit0
[Function]
This signal indicates that the servo system is in an operable status.
[Operation]
(1) The servo system diagnosis is normally completed after turning the power ON.
(2) The servo alarm, which had occurred, has been released by Master reset (MRST).
(3) The emergency stop has been released.
(4) Ready OFF (RDF) or Servo OFF (SVF) has been released.

(1) Servo ready completion (SA) is turned OFF.
(2) The Servo OFF signal is input and the drive unit is in a servo OFF state.
[Related signals]
(1) Master reset (MRST: AUXCM1/bit3)
(2) Ready OFF (RDF: AUXCM1/bit6)
(3) Servo OFF (SVF: AUXCM1/bit0)
(4) Servo ready completion (SA: AUXST1/bitC)
615
B Signal
- In-position INP AUXST1/bit1
[Function]
This signal notifies that the control axis is in-position.
[Operation]
(1) Smoothing zero (SMZ) is turned ON and the droop is within the range set in the parameters.

(1) Smoothing zero (SMZ) is turned OFF. (When there is a movement command.)
(2) The droop exceeds the range set in the parameters.
[Caution]
(1) In-position (INP) may turn ON, even during movement, when the axis is moving at extremely low speeds.
(2) The in-position detection range is set in the parameter "#2224 SV024 In-position detection width".
(3) In the servo ready OFF state, Smoothing zero (SMZ) turns OFF when the travel amount of servomotor is
detected. Therefore, In-position (INP) also turns OFF. In axis plus motion (MVP) or In axis minus motion
(MVN) turns ON depending on the detected movement direction. Note that Smoothing zero (SMZ), In axis
plus motion (MVP) and In axis minus motion (MVN) will not change in the servo OFF state without error
correction, because detected servomotor travel amount becomes a droop amount.
Acceleration/
deceleration Position loop process
delay process
Acceleration/deceleration delay Servo droop

[Related signals]
(1) Smoothing zero (SMZ: AUXST1/bit2)
B Signal
- Smoothing zero SMZ AUXST1/bit2
This signal indicates that the acceleration/deceleration process in the built-in controller is finished, and that no
command to the control section remains.
616
B Signal
- Axis selection output AX1 AUXST1/bit3
[Function]
This signal indicates that the control axis has received the movement command.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON in the following cases, and turns OFF after Smoothing zero (SMZ) is detected.
(1) In automatic operation mode

This signal turns ON while Operation start (ST) is ON and the axis is moving.
(2) In manual operation mode

(3) In JOG operation mode

(4) In reference point return mode

This signal turns ON while Operation start (ST) is ON and the axis is moving. Note that after Near-point
dog (DOG) is detected and the axis slows to creep speed, the Axis selection output signal remains ON
until the reference point is reached, even if the Operation start signal is turned OFF.
When an interlock is applied, this signal remains ON even when the servo is OFF. This signal turns OFF at
the emergency stop.
Operation start (ST)
Axis movement
Axis selection output (AX1)
[Related signals]
(1) Operation start (ST: AUXCM2/bit0)
617
B Signal
- In axis plus motion MVP AUXST1/bit4
[Function]
This signal indicates that the axis is moving in the (+) direction.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the axis starts moving in the (+) direction, turns OFF after Smoothing zero (SMZ)
is detected or the axis starts moving in the (-) direction.
[Related signals]
B Signal
- In axis minus motion MVM AUXST1/bit5
[Function]
This signal indicates that the axis is moving in the (-) direction.
[Operation]
This signal turns ON when the axis starts moving in the (-) direction, turns OFF after Smoothing zero (SMZ) is
detected or the axis starts moving in the (+) direction.
[Related signals]
B Signal
- In torque limit TLQ AUXST1/bit6
This signal indicates that the control axis is at the current limit value. This signal turns ON when the motor
output torque (motor current) is limited at the torque limit value of the selected operation parameter group.
B Signal
- In reset RST AUXST1/bit9
[Function]
This signal indicates that the built-in controller is being reset.
[Operation]
(1) Master reset (MRST) is turned ON.
(2) Master reset (MRST) is turned ON and the built-in controller is being reset.
(3) In an emergency stop status.
[Related signals]
618
B Signal
In handle feed operation
- HO AUXST1/bitA
mode
This signal indicates that handle feed operation mode is selected.
B Signal
- Controller ready completion MA AUXST1/bitB
[Function]
This signal indicates that the controller is in a status to carry out normal operation.
[Operation]
(1) Normal operation has begun after the power ON.

(1) The power is turned OFF.
(2) An error with the controller, such as CPU error or memory error, has been detected.
(3) A servo error, which cannot be released unless the controller is first turned OFF, has occurred.
B Signal
- Servo ready completion SA AUXST1/bitC
[Function]
This signal indicates that the servo system is ready for normal operation. In other words, the servo system
(position control) is not working when the signal is OFF.
[Operation]
(1) The servo system diagnosis is normally completed after the power ON.
(2) The servo alarm, which had occurred, has been released by Master reset (MRST).
(3) The emergency stop has been released.
(4) Ready OFF (RDF) is turned OFF.

(1) Controller ready completion (MA) is turned OFF.
(2) A servo alarm has occurred.
(3) Emergency stop is issued.
(4) Ready OFF (RDF) is turned OFF.
[Caution]
(1) With Servo OFF (SVF), Servo ready completion (SA) will not turn OFF as long as there are no separate
conditions for turning the SA OFF.
(2) In an emergency stop status, all I/O output points will turn OFF.
[Related signals]
(2) Ready OFF (RDF: AUXCM1/bit6)
(3) Controller ready completion (MA: AUXST1/bitB)
619
B Signal
Automatic set position
- JSTA AUXST1/bitD
reached
[Function]
In the automatic operation, this signal notifies that the positioning to the commanded station No. is completed.
The tolerable ON width is as same as that of Set position reached (JST).
[Operation]
(1) The positioning to the designated station No. is completed in the automatic operation mode. The signal
actually turns ON before the positioning is completed, when the tolerable width is entered.

(1) When the Operation start signal is input in any of the operation modes.
(2) When the axis deviates outside the tolerable width.
[Caution]
(1) In automatic operation, this signal does not turn ON when positioning to the nearest station is carried out
by the Operation start signal OFF.
(2) When this signal is ON, it does not turn OFF if the same station No. index is started.
(3) When the positioning to the station is completed in manual mode and the same station No. index is started,
this signal turns ON. However, there is no movement.
(4) Once turned OFF, this signal does not turn ON again even if the axis returns within the tolerable width.
(5) During the emergency stop or the servo OFF, the axis movement, once deviated outside the output width
of Set position reached, returns within the tolerable width, turns this signal ON again if "#12802
aux_Cont1/bit4" is OFF; does not turn it ON if "#12802 aux_Cont1/bit4" is ON.
620
B Signal
- Set position reached JST AUXST1/bitE
[Function]
This signal notifies that the positioning to the station position has been completed. It is ON when the machine
position is at any of the station positions. The tolerable ON width is set with a parameter.
[Operation]
(1) The positioning to the station is completed in automatic or manual operation. The signal actually turns ON
before the positioning is completed, when the tolerable width is entered.
(2) The stop position after JOG operation is the station position or within the tolerable width.
(3) The reference point return position corresponds to those of the stop position in (2).
Other than the above conditions, this signal normally monitors the machine position, and carries out
comparisons between stations. Therefore, this signal is output even when the machine moves to a station
position outside the operation.

(1) The Operation start signal is input in any of the operation modes. When the operation is started by the
Operation start signal, this signal will not turn ON, even when a station position is passed during operation.
(2) The axis deviates outside the tolerable width.
B Signal
- Near set position NEAR AUXST1/bitF
[Function]
This signal notifies that the machine position is near the station.
[Operation]
It operates in the same manner as the Set position reached (JST), but the tolerable width is set with a
different parameter. The tolerable width is generally set larger than that of Set position reached. This signal is
generally used at the mechanical clamp or the like just before the completion of the positioning.
621

PLC AXIS INDEXING
AUXST2 R8002 R8008 R8014 R8020 R8026 R8032
CONTROL STATUS 2
B Signal
- In automatic operation mode AUTO AUXST2/bit0
This signal indicates that the automatic operation mode has been selected.
B Signal
- In manual operation mode MANO AUXST2/bit1
This signal indicates that the manual operation mode has been selected.
B Signal
- In JOG operation mode JO AUXST2/bit2
This signal indicates that the JOG operation mode has been selected.
B Signal
In reference point
- AZSO AUXST2/bit6
This signal indicates that the reference point initialization mode has been selected.
B Signal
- Alarm 1 AL1 AUXST2/bit8
This signal indicates that an alarm has occurred requiring the power to be turned ON again after the cause is
removed.
B Signal
- Alarm 2 AL2 AUXST2/bit9
This signal indicates that an alarm has occurred which can be released by the Master reset (MRST) signal
after the cause is removed.
622
B Signal
- Alarm 4 AL4 AUXST2/bitA
This signal indicates that an operation alarm or absolute position alarm has occurred.
B Signal
- ABS AUXST2/bitC
This signal indicates that the axis moved beyond the tolerable amount while the control power was OFF in the
absolute position system.
B Signal
- Absolute position data loss ZSN AUXST2/bitD
This signal indicates that the absolute position data has been lost in the absolute position system.
B Signal
- ZSF AUXST2/bitE
completed
This signal indicates that in the absolute position system the reference point initialization setting has
completed normally, and that the absolute position coordinates have been established.
B Signal
- ZSE AUXST2/bitF
completed
This signal indicates that the reference point initialization setting has not finished normally in the absolute
position system.
623

PLC AXIS INDEXING
AUXST3 R8001 R8007 R8013 R8019 R8025 R8031
CONTROL STATUS 3
B Signal
STO1 to
- Station position 1 to 256 AUXST3/bit0 to 8
STO256
This signal shows a 9-digit binary No. of the present station.
This signal outputs the station position when Set position reached (JST) is ON, "0" when Set position reached
is OFF.

PLC AXIS INDEXING
AUXST4 R8000 R8006 R8012 R8018 R8024 R8030
CONTROL STATUS 4
B Signal
PSW1 to AUXST4/bit0 to 7
- Position switch 1 to 15
PSW15 AUXST3/bit9 to F
This signal turns ON when the axis is within the setting range of the respective position switches.
B Signal
- Start not possible NST AUXST4/bitB
This signal turns ON when the Operation start signal is turned ON for non PLC indexing axis.
624
Differences from MR-J2-CT interface
PLC interface for PLC axis indexing has the following differences from MR-J2-CT interface.
Please keep these differences in mind when using the existing user PLC.
Signal name MR-J2-CT PLC axis indexing

Control command 1 PLC emergency stop Provided Not provided
/bit1
No emergency stop can be executed for
each drive unit.
Use the NC signal, PLC emergency stop
(QEMG:YC2C), if needed. Note that the
emergency stop of the controller means the
stop of all axes, which turns OFF the other
signals such as Servo ready completion
(SA).
Status 1 Adjusting machine Provided Not provided
/bit7
This signal indicates that the machine is
being adjusted with a setup software. The
software, however, is not available with this
function.
Status 3 Position switch Not provided Provided
/bit9 to F 9 to 15
8 points were originally provided for position
switch. 15 points are provided for this
function.
Status 4 Start not possible Not provided Provided
/bitB
This signal turns ON when the Operation
start signal is turned ON for non PLC
indexing axis.
625
6.6.14.3 Changing to NC/Auxiliary axis
"NC axis control selection n-th axis" (YAC0 to YAC7) changes the axis to NC/auxiliary axis. Turning this
signal ON changes the axis to NC axis; turning the signal OFF changes to auxiliary axis. The current axis
status, NC axis or auxiliary axis, is output to "In NC axis control n-th axis" (XA20 to XA27).
Changing the signals during the axis movement leads an operation error "M01 0166 Aux axis changeover
error". The axis decelerates and stops then. "In NC axis control n-th axis" is changed after the axis has
stopped.
B Signal
NC AXIS CONTROL
- - YAC0 to 7 YAC8 to F YAD0 to 7 YAD8 to F
SELECTION n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal is used to select the control method over the "auxiliary axis control available" NC axis.
0: Auxiliary axis control
1: NC axis control
[Operation]
Turning this signal ON allows the axis to be controlled as NC axis.
Turning this signal OFF allows the axis to be controlled as auxiliary axis. The auxiliary axis interface of PLC
can be used.
The following shows the correspondence of axis Nos. and device Nos.
YAC0 NC axis control selection 1st axis
YAC1 NC axis control selection 2nd axis
YAC2 NC axis control selection 3rd axis
YAC3 NC axis control selection 4th axis
[Caution]
(1) The "auxiliary axis control available" NC axis is the NC axis to which an auxiliary axis No. has been set
with the parameter "#12800 chgauxno".
(2) This signal is cannot be used to the "auxiliary axis control unavailable" axis.
(3) Turn ON/OFF this signal after confirming that the axis is not moving.
Turning this signal ON/OFF during the axis movement leads an operation error. The axis decelerates and
stops then.
(Usage example) When the parameters are set as follows

Axis No. 1 2 3 4 5
#1013 axname X Y Z A C
#12800 chgauxno 0 0 0 1 2
A-axis and C-axis are "auxiliary axis control available" axes. To control the A-axis as NC axis, turn the
signal YAC3 ON. The signals YAC0 to YAC2 and YAC5 to YAC7 are not available.
626
[Timing chart]
In axis plus motion
In axis minus motion (OFF)
NC axis control selection
In NC axis control
[Related signals]
(1) In NC axis control n-th axis (XA20 to XA27)
B Signal
IN NC AXIS CONTROL
- - XA20 to 7 XA28 to F XA30 to 7 XA38 to F
n-TH AXIS
[Function]
This signal indicates that the "auxiliary axis control available" NC axis is in the NC axis control.
[Operation]
The following shows the correspondence of axis Nos. and device Nos.
XA20 In NC axis control 1st axis
XA21 In NC axis control 2nd axis
XA22 In NC axis control 3rd axis
XA23 In NC axis control 4th axis

(1) The NC axis control selection signal is turned ON for the "auxiliary axis control available" NC axis.

(1) The NC axis control selection signal is turned OFF for the "auxiliary axis control available" NC axis.
[Caution]
(1) The "auxiliary axis control available" NC axis is the NC axis to which an auxiliary axis No. has been set
with the parameter "#12800 chgauxno".
(2) If the axis is moving, turning ON/OFF the "NC axis control selection n-th axis" leads an operation error.
The signal is changed to ON/OFF after the axis has decelerated and stopped.
[Related signals]
(1) NC axis control selection n-th axis (YAC0 to YAC7)
627
Precautions
(1) While the axis is controlled as auxiliary axis, commanding from a program leads the program error "P32
Illegal address". The program is stopped by the error. The program is started again by changing the axis
to NC axis, inputting the reset signal, and turning ON the cycle start.
(2) The axis, controlled as NC axis, is not moved by turning ON the Operation start (ST) signal from PLC. The
status signal, Start not possible (AUXST4/bitB), is turned ON instead.
(3) If "NC axis control selection n-th axis" is turned OFF while the NC axis is moving, the operation error "M01
0166 Aux axis changeover error" occurs. The program is stopped by the error. The axis can be operated
after having stopped and then changed to auxiliary axis.
628
7. SPINDLE CONTROL
7.1 Related Parameters
7. SPINDLE CONTROL
Spindle speed can be directly controlled by an 8-digit S code command.

When the S command function specifications are valid, the controller selects an appropriate spindle gear
stage corresponding to the 8-digit command following the S code and outputs (spindle gear shift
command) it to the machine side (PLC). The controller also outputs S command data (analog voltage or
serial connection data) corresponding to the gear input (spindle gear select input) and spindle speed
specified by the machine side (PLC).
7.1 Related Parameters
The PLC can have up to four gear stages.

The table below lists the four gear stages and the corresponding parameters.
Parameters
Parameter
name Spindle Maximum Spindle Tap cycle
Oriented Minimum
Output signal Input signal
limit spindle shift maximum
speed speed GR2 GR1 GI1 GI2
Gear stage speed speed speed speed
Slimt1 Smax1 Ssift1 Stap1
1 0 0 0 0
#3001 #3005 #3009 #3013
2 0 1 0 1
#3002 #3006 #3010 #3014 Sori Smin
Slimt3 Smax3 Ssift3 Stap3 #3021 #3023
3 1 0 1 0
#3003 #3007 #3011 #3015
4 1 1 1 1
#3004 #3007 #3012 #3016
(Note 1) The upper line shows the parameter name, and the bottom line shows the parameter No.
(Note 2) Set the parameter for the gear stage not being used to 0.
629
7. SPINDLE CONTROL
7.2 Connection Method
7.2 Connection Method
To serially connect the controller and spindle controller
Control unit
Operation
panel I/O unit Axis drive unit Spindle drive unit
[Spindle forward run,

reverse run,
orientation command, etc.]
[Zero speed, CN1A CN1B

spindle up-to-speed,
OPT
orientation completion signal, etc.]
High-speed serial connection
To analog connect the controller and spindle controller
Control unit Remote I/O unit

Operation Inverter, etc.
DX11* DX12*
panel I/O unit
[Zero speed, spindle up-to-speed,
orientation completion signal, etc.]
[Spindle forward run,

reverse run, Relay box
orientation command, etc.]
Analog output
RIO1
630
7. SPINDLE CONTROL
7.3 Flow of Spindle (S) Data
7.3 Flow of Spindle (S) Data

Part system 1
Operation program SF1(XDA4)

SF1(XC64)
R712,R713
R512,R513
S100 ;
+
• R6500
• R6501 Spindle parameter (SOUT)
•
• (For monitoring of Spindle drive unit
command data) 0: No output /inverter, etc.
S150 ;
R7000 1: Serial output
• R7001 +
• 2: Analog output 1
• R200
• 3: Analog output 2
[Spindle override R201
4: Analog output 3
S200 ; Spindle stop 5: Analog output 4 R202
• Spindle gear shift
• Spindle orientation, etc.] R203
•
• Remote I/O
R6502 unit DX12*
Part system 2 R6503
Spindle end command
FIN1 (YC1E), FIN2 (YC1F) (for monitoring)
or GFIN (Y1885)
S command completion process with
sequence program (ladder)
Outline explanation
(1) The spindle command start signal (SF1) is output when the spindle (S) command is issued.
(2) After the designated processes is executed by SF1 with the sequence program, the M function finish
or gear shift completion signal is returned to the controller.
(3) Data corresponding to the S command is output to file registers R6500 and R6501 or R7000 or
R7001 with the completion signal. The speed is output to R6500, R6501 and R7000, R7001.
(4) The R7000 and R7001 data is transferred to the spindle drive unit with serial communication
according to the spindle parameter SOUT value or is transferred to the inverter, etc., as analog
voltage via the remote I/O unit.
(Note) If the spindle command is issued from multiple part systems, the command issued later will be
applied.
631
8. HANDLING OF M, S, T, B FUNCTIONS
8.1 Command Format
The following abbreviations are used in the subsequent explanations.

_________
(1) Miscellaneous function (command) M function (command)
______________
(2) Spindle function (command) S function (command)
________________
(3) Tool function (command) T function (command)
_____
(4) 2nd miscellaneous function (command) B function (command)
________
(5) Miscellaneous function strobe 1 to 4 MF (MF1, 2, 3, 4)
_____________
(6) Spindle function strobe 1 to 4 SF (SF1, 2, 3, 4)
________________
(7) Tool function strobe 1 to 4 TF (TF1, 2, 3, 4)
____
(8) 2nd miscellaneous function strobe 1 to 4 BF (BF1, 2, 3, 4)
__________
(9) Miscellaneous function finish 1, 2 FIN1, FIN2
8.1 Command Format
(1) The maximum number of commands that can be issued in one block are shown below.
Maximum number of commands

Function
(when released to user)
M function 4 commands
S function 2 or 4 commands (Form : Sn = xxxx)
T function 1 command
B function 1 command
(2) The command can have up to eight digits.

(3) The number of S functions depends on the model.
(4) A program error will not occur even if more commands than the maximum number are issued. The
latter commands will be valid.
(EX.) When five T commands are issued though only one T command can be used.
T 01 T 02 T03 T 04 T 05 ;
The last four T commands are valid.
632
8.2 Miscellaneous Function Finish
After the PLC (machine) finished the specified operations for the M, S, T, B commands output with
automatic operation (memory, MDI, or tape) or manual numerical commands from the CNC, the finish
signal will be returned to the CNC. However, there are two types of finish signals as shown below. Use
these accordingly in one sequence.
(1) FIN1 ... CNC proceeds to next block at falling edge of finish signal (FIN1).
(2) FIN2 ... CNC proceeds to next block at rising edge of finish signal (FIN2).
The details for FIN1 and FIN2 are also described in the section "6. Explanation of Interface Signals".
Examples of the M function are given in the following section.
633
8.2.1 Operation Sequence 1 (Using FIN1 with M Command)
[Example of machining program]

N001 G0X10000 Maa Mbb Mcc Mdd;
N002 G0Z-2000;
N003 Mee Mff Mgg Mhh;
Machining program N001 G0X10000…… N002 …… N003 Mee Mff Mgg Mhh ;
Axis
movement
M code 1 Maa Mee
M code 2 Mbb Mff
M code 3 Mcc Mgg
M code 4 Mdd Mhh
MF1
MF2
MF3
MF4
Next block
FIN1 (c)
t1 t2
(b)
(a) (d) (e) t1: User sequence process time
t2: 15 to 30 ms
[Explanation of operation]
(a) The CNC outputs the M code data n (BCD) and MFn to the PLC (machine).
Refer to the section "8.5 Precautions Related to M, S, T, B Functions" for details on the M code
data and MF output timing.
(b) The PLC (machine) confirms that the MF signal has turned ON, reads the M code data, and
executes the specified operation. Then, it turns FIN1 ON.
(c) The CNC confirms that FIN1 has turned ON, and then turns MF OFF.
(d) The PLC (machine) confirms that MF has turned OFF, and then turns FIN1 OFF.
(e) The CNC confirms that FIN1 has turned OFF, and then proceeds to the next block.
634
8.2.2 Operation Sequence 2 (Using FIN2 with M Command)
[Example of machining program]

N001 G0X10000 Maa Mbb Mcc Mdd;
N002 G0Z–20000;
N003 Mee Mff Mgg Mhh;
Machining program N001 G0X…… N002 Z-20000; N003 Mee Mff…… Next block
Axis
movement
M code 1 Maa Mee
M code 2 Mbb Mff
M code 3 Mcc Mgg
M code 4 Mdd Mhh
MF1
MF2
MF3
MF4
FIN2
t2
(b)
(c)
t1 t1: User sequence process time
(a)
(d) t2: 15 to 30 ms
(a) The CNC outputs the M code data n (BCD) and MFn to the PLC (machine).
(b) The PLC (machine) confirms that the MF signal has turned ON, reads the M code data, and
executes the specified operation. Then, it turns FIN2 ON.
(c) The CNC confirms that FIN2 has turned ON, and proceeds to the next block simultaneously with
the turning OFF of MF.
(d) The PLC (machine) confirms that MF has turned OFF, and then turns FIN2 OFF.
635
8.2.3 When M Commands Continue (Using FIN2 with M Command)
Machining program Maa Mbb Mcc
M code n Maa Mbb Mcc
MFn
FIN2
(a) (a)
The general operation is the same as "8.2.2 Operation sequence 2" on the previous page.
(a) The CNC confirms that FIN2 has turned OFF, and then output the next code signal and MF.
636
8.3 M Code Independent Output
The following four types of M codes output "M code independent output" signal (decode signals)
separately from their code signals and MF.
The M code independent output is generally used with the following details, but the CNC outputs only the
decode signal, and the operation and finish signal processes, etc., are carried out by the user PLC
(machine).
M00 Program stop

<Example of process> The block stop state is entered when M00 is commanded.
M01 Optional stop
<Example of process> The block stop state is entered when M01 is commanded
and the optional stop selection switch is selected.
M02, M30 Program end
<Example of process> When M02 or M30 is commanded, "Reset" or "Reset &
rewind" is returned to the CNC, and the reset state is
entered.
8.3.1 Operation Sequence
The "M code independent output" signal turns ON when M00, M01, M02 or M30 is commanded during
automatic operation (memory, MDI or tape) or by the manual numerical command, and turns OFF with
the "FIN1", "FIN2", "Reset 1", "Reset 2" or "Reset & rewind" signal.
Example of M01 process (stopping the block with the M01 command)
In automatic start Block stop state
M code M01
M code independent M01

output
MF
FIN1
Optional switch * Turns OFF after

confirming that "In
Single block automatic start" is OFF.
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)
637
(a) The CNC outputs the M code data and MF to the PLC (machine).
Refer to the section "8.5 Precautions Related to M, S, T, B Functions" for details on
the M code data and MF output timing.
(b) (c) The PLC (machine) confirms that the MF signal has turned ON, and then carries out
the specified operation. It then confirms that the "Optional switch" is ON, and then
turns "Single block" and "FIN1" ON.
(d) (e) The CNC confirms that FIN1 has turned ON, and then turns the MF and "M code
independent output" signal OFF. The PLC (machine) confirms that MF has turned
OFF, and then turns FIN1 OFF.
(f) The CNC confirms that FIN1 has turned OFF, and then turns "In automatic start"
signal OFF.
(g) The PLC (machine) confirms that "In automatic start" signal has turned OFF, and then
turns the "Single block" OFF at the next automatic start.
Example of M02 process (carrying out "Reset & rewind" with M02 command)
In automatic start Reset state
M code M02
M code independent M02

output
MF
FIN1 * FIN does not turn ON.
* Turns OFF after confirming "In reset" or

Reset & rewind "In rewind" signal.
In reset
(In rewind)
(a) (b) (c) (d)
(a) The CNC outputs the M code data and MF to the PLC (machine).
(b) The PLC (machine) confirms that the MF signal has turned ON, and then carries out the specified
operation. It then turns "Reset & rewind" ON.
(c) The CNC confirms that "Reset & rewind" has turned ON, then turns MF, "M code independent
output" and "In automatic start" OFF, and then starts the rewinding operation.
(d) The PLC (machine) confirms the "In reset" or "In rewind" signals, and then turns the "Reset &
rewind" signal OFF.
638
8.4 Axis Movement and M Commands
8.4 Axis Movement and M Commands
If an M command is issued in the same block as a movement command, whether to process the M
command simultaneously with the movement command or to process it after the movement is finished,
depends on the "Movement command finish (DEN)" signal output from the CNC.
Axis movement and general M command

(To execute M command after movement command is finished)
Machining program G01X F Maa; G01X……
Axis movement G01X G01X……
M code Maa
MF
Movement
command finish
FIN1
M command
execution
M command execution timing when not using "Movement command finish" signal
Axis movement and M code independent output command
(a) When the M code independent output command is issued in the same block as a movement
command, the M code independent output will be output after the movement command is finished.
(b) Even when the M code independent output command is issued without movement command, it
will be output after the axis movement in the previous command block is finished.
For (a) For (b)
Machining program G01X……M00; G01X…… M00;
Axis movement G01X……
M code M00
MF
M code independent
M00 M00
output
Movement
command finish
(Note 1) Refer to the section "8.3 M Code Independent Output" for details on the PLC (machine)
process for the M code independent output.
639
8.5 Precautions
8.5 Precautions
(1) M code data and MF output timing (Also applies to S, T, B signal)

When the built-in PLC is used, the M code data n and MFn are output simultaneously to the user PLC.
When outputting the M code data and MF to the machine with the user PLC of built-in PLC, insert an
appropriate time timer on the MF side.
(2) The finish signals (FIN1, FIN2) are commonly used for the M, S, T, B functions, so turn them ON
under the conditions where all function operations have been finished.
(3) When the "M function lock" signal (AFL) is turned ON, the M, S, T, B functions (including M
commands in fixed cycle) issued during automatic operation (memory, MDI or tape) and manual
numerical command, will not be executed. In other words, the code signal, MF, SF, TF and BF signals
will not be output (updated). However, when the M code independent output (M00, M01, M02, M30) is
commanded, the "M code independent output", "M code data" and MF will be output as usual.
(4) The 2nd miscellaneous (B) function can be selected from address A, B or C using the setup
parameters. The "B function" refers to when address "B" is selected.
640
Appendix 1. List of PLC Window Data
1.1 Section No. List
Section Axis System

Details Write Remarks
No. designation designation
1 System information Not possible Invalid Valid
(Per part system)
2 System information Not possible Invalid Invalid
(Common for part systems)
3 File System information Not possible Invalid Valid
4 Common variable Possible Invalid Valid
(Per part system #100-)
5 Common variable Possible Invalid Invalid
(Common for part systems #400-)
6 Local variables Not possible Invalid Valid
8 Workpiece coordinate system offset Possible Valid Valid
(Workpiece coordinate)
(Extension workpiece coordinate)
(Local coordinate)
(Other coordinate system)
12 Tool offset per part-system (Type1) Possible Invalid Valid
18 Life management data Possible Invalid Valid
M system only, no group No. (partially not
In the order of registration possible)
19 Life management information Not possible Invalid Valid
20 Tool registration Possible Invalid Valid
(partially not (partially
possible) invalid)
21 Spindle • standby Not possible Invalid Magazine
(partially No. (partially
possible) invalid)
22 Tool measurement Not possible Invalid Valid
(partially
valid)
25 File information Not possible Invalid Invalid
33 Speed information Not possible Invalid Valid
34 Spindle information Not possible Valid Invalid

35 Operation status Not possible Invalid Valid
(partially
invalid)
36 Axis status Not possible Valid Valid
(partially
invalid)
37 Counter Not possible Valid Valid
(partially
invalid)
641
Section Axis System

38 MSTB execution status Possible Invalid Invalid
possible) valid)
40 Cumulative time Possible Invalid Invalid
(partially not (partially (partially
possible) valid) valid)
41 G modal Not possible Invalid Valid
(partially
valid)
42 F modal Not possible Invalid Valid
43 MSTB modal Not possible Invalid Invalid
45 Program execution status Not possible Invalid Valid
46 Program tree Not possible Invalid Valid
47 Program tree for graphic check Not possible Invalid Valid
53 PLC device (bit) Possible Invalid Invalid
54 PLC device (char) Possible Invalid Invalid
55 PLC device (word) Possible Invalid Invalid
56 PLC device (long） Possible Invalid Invalid
59 Servo monitor Not possible Valid Invalid
(partially
possible)
62 Synchronous error monitor Not possible Invalid Invalid
63 Spindle monitor Not possible Valid Invalid
(partially
possible)
64 Power supply monitor Not possible Valid Invalid
(partially
possible)
65 Auxiliary axis drive unit monitor Not possible Valid Invalid
66 Hardware configuration Not possible Invalid Invalid
67 Software configuration Not possible Invalid Invalid
72 Auxiliary axis control Possible Valid Invalid
possible) invalid)
74 Sampling parameters Possible Invalid Invalid
(partially not
possible)
95 Reference position return parameters Possible Valid Invalid
96 Servo parameters Possible Valid Invalid
97 Spindle specification parameters Possible Valid Invalid
98 Spindle parameters Possible Valid Invalid
100 Auxiliary axis • axis parameters Possible Valid Invalid
101 Absolute position parameters Possible Valid Invalid
102 Machine error compensation Possible Invalid Invalid
parameters
104 Position switch Possible Invalid Valid
(partially
invalid)
106 Macro list Possible Invalid Invalid
107 PLC constants Possible Invalid Invalid
108 PLC timer Possible Invalid Invalid
(partially not
possible)
642
Section Axis System

109 PLC counter Possible Invalid Invalid
(partially not
possible)
110 PLC bit selection Possible Invalid Invalid
118 Anshin-net 1 Possible Invalid Invalid
119 Anshin-net 2 Possible Invalid Invalid
120 PLC switch Possible Invalid Invalid
(partially not
possible)
121 Operation parameters Possible Invalid Invalid
122 Input/Output parameters Possible Invalid Invalid
123 Computer link parameters Possible Invalid Invalid
124 Ethernet parameters Possible Invalid Invalid
125 Barrier Possible Invalid Invalid
(partially
valid)
126 Base parameters Possible Invalid Valid
possible) invalid)
127 Axis parameters Possible Valid Valid
128 Rotary axis configuration parameters Possible Invalid Valid
140 Ladder I/F (common) Not possible Invalid Valid
(partially
invalid)
643
1.2 Sub-section No. List
Section No. : 1 System information (Separate for part systems)
Significance Sub-section
Sub-ID Details described Sub-section No. Data type R/W
of data No. No.
System Not used 1 Number of axes in part system (Cross configuration)
No. 2 Number of axes in part system (Base configuration) Integer R
100 Number of common variable (#100-) sets
Section No. : 2 System information (Common variables)
of data No. No.
Not Not used 1 Number of part systems
used 2 Total number of NC axes (NC)
3 Total number of control axes (NC+PLC+SP)
4 Number of spindles
5 Number of PLC axes
6 Number of auxiliary axes
7 File system Integer R
8 Number of common variable (#500-) sets
9 Information on maximum number of registered
machining programs
10 Number of power supply axes (SV+SP)
100 NC type
101 PLC device assignment type (M6/M7)
Section No. : 3 File system information
of data No. No.
System Not used 1 Tool offset type Character R
No. string
2 Number of tool offset sets Integer
3 Number of workpiece offset sets
644
Section No. : 4 Common variable (Separate for part systems #100-)
of data No. No.
System Not used 700 + n 100 to 199 (n=100 to 199) Integer RW
No.
Section No. : 5 Common variable (Common variables #400-)
of data No. No.
Not Not used 900 + n Common variable Integer RW
used Variable (Common for part systems #400 to #999)
(n=400 to 999)
2000 + n Common variable Character
Comment (Common for part systems #500 to #519) string
(n=500 to 519)
10000 + n Common variable Integer
Variable (Common for part systems #100100 to
#100199) (n=100 to 199)
11000 + n Common variable
#200199) (n=100 to 199)
#300199) (n=100 to 199)
#400199) (n=100 to 199)
#500199) (n=100 to 199)
#600199) (n=100 to 199)
#700199) (n=100 to 199)
#800199) (n=100 to 199)
Section No. : 6 Local variables
of data No. No.
System Not used 1000 + n Local variables (level 0)(n=1 to 33) Integer R
No. 1100 + n Local variables (level 1)(n=1 to 33)
1200 + n Local variables (level 2)(n=1 to 33)
2000 Local variables Blank variable
645
Section No. : 8 Workpiece coordinate system offset (Workpiece coordinate)
of data No. No.
System Axis No. in n Gn (n=54 to 59) PLC setup RW
No. part system Workpiece coordinate system offset unit
Section No. : 9 Workpiece coordinate system offset (The expansion workpiece coordinate)
of data No. No.
System Axis No. in n G54.1Pn (n=1 to 96) PLC setup RW
No. part system unit
Section No. : 10 Workpiece coordinate system offset (A local coordinate)
of data No. No.
System Axis No. in 1 Local coordinate system offset (G54) PLC setup RW
No. part system 2 Local coordinate system offset (G55) unit
3 Local coordinate system offset (G56)
Section No. : 11 Workpiece coordinate system offset (Other coordinate system)
of data No. No.
System Axis No. in 1 External workpiece offset (EXT) PLC setup RW
No. part system unit
Section No. : 12 Tool separate for part systems offset (Type1)
of data No. No.
System Not used n Compensation data (n=1 to 999) PLC setup RW
No. unit
of data No. No.
System Not used n Length dimension (n=1 to 999) PLC setup RW
No. 1000 + n Radius dimension (n=1 to 999) unit
2000 + n Length wear (n=1 to 999)
3000 + n Radius wear (n=1 to 999)
646
of data No. No.
System Not used n Nose point P (n=1 to 999) Integer RW
No. 1000 + n Tool length X (n=1 to 999) PLC setup
2000 + n Tool length Y (n=1 to 999) unit
3000 + n Tool length Z (n=1 to 999)
4000 + n Nose point R (n=1 to 999) Integer
5000 + n Wear X (n=1 to 999) PLC setup
6000 + n Wear Y (n=1 to 999) unit
7000 + n Wear Z (n=1 to 999)
8000 + n Wear R (n=1 to 999)
Section No. : 18 Life management data M system only, no group No. In the order of registration.
of data No. No.
System Not used 1000 + n Tool No. (n=1 to 800) Integer RW
No. 2000 + n Status (n=1 to 800)
3000 + n Method (n=1 to 800)
4000 + n Length compensation (n=1 to 800) PLC setup
5000 + n Radius compensation (n=1 to 800) unit
6000 + n Usage (time, times, wear amount) (n=1 to 800) Integer
7000 + n Life (time, times, wear amount) (n=1 to 800)
8000 + n Miscellaneous (n=1 to 800)
9000 + n Group No. (n=1 to 800)
10003 Group ID of the designated group No.
11000 + n Group No. of the designated group ID (n=1 to 800) R
12000 + n Head record ID of the designated group ID
(n=1 to 800)
13000 + n Number of tools registered in the designated group
ID (n=1 to 800)
16000 + n Tool information of the designated record
(n=1 to 800)
Section No. : 19 Life management information
of data No. No.
System Not used 1 Life management number of registered tool Integer R
No. 2 Life management number of registration groups
3 Life management data renewal flag
4 Life management maximum number of registered
tools
Section No. : 20 Tool registration
of data No. No.
Not Not used n Tool registration data (pot No.) (n=1 to 80) Integer R
used
System 1000 + n Tool registration data (tool No.) (n=1 to 80) RW
No. 2000 + n Tool registration data (miscellaneous: D) (n=1 to 80)
647
Section No. : 21 Spindle Alarms・Wait
of data No. No.
Magaz- Not used n Spindle standby (tool No.) (n=0 to 4) Integer RW
ine No. 10 + n Spindle standby (miscellaneous D) (n=0 to 4)
Not 200 Number of spindle standby displays R
used
Magaz- 1000 Tool life management data for spindle tool PLC setup
ine No. 1001 Tool life management data for standby tool unit
Section No. : 22 Tool measurement mode
of data No. No.
System Not used 1 TLM switch Integer R
No. Axis No. 2 Final movement direction
Not used 3 Final movement axis
4 Second skip contact
Section No. : 25 File information
of data No. No.
Not Not used 1 Machining program number of registrations Integer R
used 2 Machining program number of remains
3 Machining program number of memory characters
4 Machining program number of remaining characters
10 melCopyFile transferred data size
Section No. : 33 Speed information
of data No. No.
System Not used 1 FC (composite speed) PLC setup R
No. 2 FA: F command feedrate unit/min.
101 Federate display FC (composite speed)
Section No. : 34 Spindle information
of data No. No.
Not Axis No. 1 Spindle rotation speed (rev/min) Integer R
used
648
Section No. : 35 Running conditions
of data No. No.
System Not used 1 Macro execution level Integer R
No. 2 In verification stop
10 Operation status 1 (operation status) Character
11 Operation status 2 (operation mode) string
20 Automatic operation is starting Integer
21 In automatic operation
22 In automatic operation stop
100 Data protect key 1
200 External input signal 1
201 JOG mode (special) signal
202 NC status output signal 1
203 Alarm status signal
204 Operation (automatic) mode related signal
205 Operation (manual) mode related signal
206 Restart search status
207 Restart search type 1 valid
208 Extended operation search status
209 Current search line No. during search mode
210 In checking mode
Not 220 Parameter flag to prompt a reboot
used 221 PLC Run/Stop status
System 222 MDI setting status
No.
Section No. : 36 Axis status
of data No. No.
System Axis No. 1 Axis status (axis removal) R
No. 2 Axis status (servo OFF)
3 Axis status (1st ref)
4 Axis status (2nd ref)
5 Axis status (3rd ref)
6 Axis status (4th ref)
7 Axis status (mirror image)
8 Axis status (restart search RP)
Not used 100 Axis status (servo OFF) all axes
101 Axis status (1st ref) all axes
102 Axis status (2nd ref) all axes
103 Axis status (3rd ref) all axes
104 Axis status (4th ref) all axes
105 Axis status (mirror image) all axes
106 Axis status (restart search RP) all axes
200 Program mirror axis (all axes)
Axis No. 201 Information during axis removal
649
Section No. : 37 Counter
of data No. No.
System Axis No. 1 Workpiece coordinate position counter PLC setup R
No. 2 Machine position counter unit
3 Current position counter
4 Absolute position counter
5 Program position counter
6 Remain command
7 Skip coordinate counter (workpiece coordinate)
8 Manual interrupt amount 1 (ABS Off)
9 Manual interrupt amount 2 (ABS On)
10 Next command
11 Restart position counter (workpiece coordinate)
12 Restart remaining distance counter
13 Restart position counter (machine coordinate)
14 Program position counter 2
15 TLM position counter
16 TLM skip position counter (mxtlms)
17 TLM position counter (mxtlm)
18 Skip coordinate counter (machine coordinate)
19 Skip remaining distance counter
Not used 20 Interpolation composite vector length (lm) Interpolat-
ion unit
Axis No. 21 Current position B counter PLC setup
22 Skip machine value (manual skip position) unit
23 Skip coordinate position (skip coordinate counter)
24 Measurement position
Section No. : 38 MSTB execute conditions
of data No. No.
Not Not used 1 M Command / Manual numerical value command (M1) Integer RW
used 2 M Command / Manual numerical value command (M2)
3 M Command / Manual numerical value command (M3)
4 M Command / Manual numerical value command (M4)
101 M Command / Manual numerical value command (S1)
201 M Command / Manual numerical value command (T1)
301 M Command / Manual numerical value command (B1)
System 401 Restart search T command history Character R
No. string
Not 411 Restart search S1 command history
used 412 Restart search S2 command history
System 421 Restart search B command history
No. 431 Restart search M command history
650
Section No. : 40 Cumulative time
of data No. No.
Not Not used 1 Power ON time Character RW
used 2 Automatic operation time string
3 Automatic start time
4 External cumulative time 1
5 External cumulative time 2
6 Date
7 Time
System 8 Cycle time R
No.
Section No. : 41 G modal
of data No. No.
System Not used n G code (n=group 1 to 21) Integer R
No. 51 Tool compensation No. for shape (radius)
compensation modal
52 Compensation amount for shape (radius) PLC setup
compensation modal unit
53 Wear amount for shape (radius) compensation
modal
54 Tool wear No. for radius compensation modal Integer
101 Tool compensation No. for length compensation
modal
Axis No. 102 Axis name of length compensation modal Character
string
Not used 103 Compensation amount of length compensation PLC setup
modal unit
104 Wear amount for length compensation modal
105 Axis information during length compensation Integer
(all axes)
Axis No. 106 Tool compensation No. of length compensation
modal
Not used 201 Scaling factor (G50P_)[Grp11] Character
202 Coordinate rotation angle (G68R_)[Grp16] string
203 High-speed machining mode (G5P_)
204 gmov cutting/non-cutting command Integer
205 Extended workpiece coordinate selection (G54.1P_) Character
string
206 Information during cutting Integer
207 Scaling factor (G50P_)[Grp11] (Magic compatible) Character
208 Coordinate rotation angle (G68R_)[Grp16] string
(Magic compatible)
209 3-dimensional coordinate conversion status
(to display workpiece coordinate selection G68)
651
Section No. : 42 F modal
of data No. No.
System Not used 1 Program command F modal (FA) Integer R
No. 2 Manual feedrate (FM) PLC setup
3 Synchronous feedrate (FS) unit/min.
4 Thread cutting lead (FE) Integer
5 Dwell remaining time
10 + n Constant surface speed control (surface speed S)
(n=1 to 4)
Section No. : 43 MSTB modal
of data No. No.
Not Not used n S modal (S1 to S4) (n=1 to 4) Integer R
used 100 + n T modal (T1 to T2) (n=1 to 2)
200 + n M modal (M1 to M4) (n=1 to 4)
300 + n B modal (B1 to B4) (n=1 to 4)
Section No. : 45 Program execution status
of data No. No.
System Not used 1 Nest level of the sub-program currently operating Integer R
No. 2 Invalid status: Single block • MST finish
3 Invalid status: Feed hold • override • exact
100 Program path during execution Character
string
101 Main program during execution O No. Integer
102 Main program during execution N No.
103 Main program during execution B No.
201 Sub program during execution O No.
202 Sub program during execution N No.
203 Sub program during execution B No.
300 Last operated program path Character
string
301 Last operated main program O No. Integer
302 Last operated main program N No.
303 Last operated main program B No.
401 Last operated sub program O No.
402 Last operated sub program N No.
403 Last operated sub program B No.
652
Section No. : 46 Program tree
of data No. No.
System Not used 1 Main program during execution Device name Character R
No. string
2 Main program during execution O No. Integer
3 Main program during execution N No.
4 Main program during execution B No.
100 + n Sub 1 to 10 device name (n=1 to 10) during Character
execution string
200 + n Sub program 1 to 10 during execution O No.
(n=1 to 10)
300 + n Sub program 1 to 10 during execution N No.
(n=1 to 10)
400 + n Sub program 1 to 10 during execution B No.
(n=1 to 10)
500 + n Sub program 1 to 10 during execution Integer
Number of repetitions (n=1 to 10)
1000 Program tree information (ONB, Path) during
execution
Section No. : 47 Program tree for graphic check
of data No. No.
System Not used 1 Execution main O No. for checking Integer R
No. 2 Execution main N No. for checking
3 Execution main B No. for checking
Section No. : 53 PLC device (bit)
of data No. No.
Not Not used 1+n Device X (n=0 to 2815/ [M7] n=0 to 8191) Integer RW
used 10000 + n Device Y (n=0 to 3583/ [M7] n=0 to 8191)
20000 + n Device M (n=0 to 8191/ [M7] n=0 to 10239)
40000 + n Device F (n=0 to 255/ [M7] n=0 to 1024)
50000 + n Device L (n=0 to 255/ [M7] n=0 to 511)
60000 + n Device SM (n=0 to 127)(GPPW)
70000 + n Device T (n=0 to 1255/ [M7] n=0 to 1703)
80000 + n Device C(n=0 to 1127 / [M7] n=0 to 1255)
90000 + n Device E (n=0 to 127)(PLC4B)
100000 + n Device U (n=0 to 383)(PLC4B)
110000 + n Device W (n=0 to 511)(PLC4B)
120000 + n Device B (n=0 to 1103 / [M7] n=0 to 8191)
(PLC4B/NET10)
130000 + n Device G (n=0 to 3071)(PLC4B)
140000 + n Device I (n=0 to 1023)(PLC4B)
150000 + n Device J (n=0 to 1599)(PLC4B)
160000 + n Device Q (n=0 to 1151)(PLC4B)
170000 + n Device S (n=0 to 319)(PLC4B)
180000 + n Device SB (n=0 to 511)(NET10)
190000 + n Device V (n=0 to 255)(NET10)
200000 + n Device ST (n=0 to 1063)(M7 GPPW)
653
Section No. : 54 PLC device (char)
of data No. No.
80000 + n Device C(n=0 to 1127/ [M7] n=0 to 1255)
110000 + n Device W (n=0 to 511)(PLC4B)
120000 + n Device B (n=0 to 1103 / [M7] n=0 to 8191)
(PLC4B/NET10)
190000 + n Device V (n=0 to 255)(NET10)
Section No. : 55 PLC device (word)
of data No. No.
80000 + n Device C (n=0 to 4127/ [M7] n=0 to 4255)
90000 + n Device D (n=0 to 1023/ [M7] n=0 to 2047)
100000 + n Device R (n=0 to 8191/ [M7] n=0 to 13311)
140000 + n Device W (n=0 to 511/[M7] n=0 to 8191)
(PLC4B/NET10)
150000 + n Device B (n=0 to 4103/[M7] n=0 to 8191)
(PLC4B/NET10)
220000 + n Device V (n=0 to 255)(NET10)
230000 + n Device SW (n=0 to 511)(NET10)
240000 + n Device SD (n=0 to 127)(NET10)
654
Section No. : 56 PLC device (long)
of data No. No.
80000 + n Device C (n=0 to 4127/ [M7] n=0 to 4255)
90000 + n Device D (n=0 to 1023/ [M7] n=0 to 2047)
100000 + n Device R (n=0 to 8191/ [M7] n=0 to 13311)
120000 + n Device E (n=0 to 127)
140000 + n Device W (n=0 to 511/[M7] n=0 to 8191)
(PLC4B/NET10)
150000 + n Device B (n=0 to 4103/[M7] n=0 to 8191)
(PLC4B/NET10)
210000 + n Device SB (n=0 to 511) (NET10)
220000 + n Device V (n=0 to 255) (NET10)
230000 + n Device SW (n=0 to 511) (NET10)
240000 + n Device SD (n=0 to 127) (NET10)
Section No. : 59 Servo monitor
of data No. No.
Not Axis No. 1 Gain Integer R
used 2 Droop
3 Rotation speed PLC setup
unit/min.
4 Load current (%) Integer
5 MAX current 1
6 MAX current 2
7 Overload
8 Regenerative load
9 Drive unit display Character
10 Alarm 1 string
11 Alarm 2
12 Alarm 3
13 Alarm 4
14 Cycle counter Integer
15 Grid spacing
16 Grid amount
655
of data No. No.
Not Axis No. 17 Machine position PLC setup R
used 18 Motor end FB unit
19 Machine end FB
20 FB error
21 DFB compensation amount
22 Remain command
23 Current value (2)
24 Manual interrupt amount
25 Detection system Character
string
26 Power ON position PLC setup
27 Power OFF position unit
28 Current position
29 R0 (multi-rotation counter at basic point setting) Integer
30 P0 (position within 1 rotation at basic point setting)
31 E0 (absolute position error at basic point setting)
32 Rn (multi-rotation counter)
33 Pn (position within 1 rotation)
34 En (absolute position error at power OFF)
35 ABS0 (absolute position basic counter)
36 ABSn (absolute position counter)
37 MPOS (initial offset amount)
38 Drive unit type Character
39 Drive unit serial No. string
40 S/W version
41 Control method
42 Motor end detector
43 Machine end detector
44 Motor type
45 Work time RW
46 Alarm history 1(time) R
47 Alarm history 2(time)
54 Alarm history 1(alarm No.) Integer
55 Alarm history 2(alarm No.)
62 Maintenance history (MNT1)
66 /SYS
210 Machine end FB (for rotary axis) PLC setup
unit
656
Section No. : 62 Synchronous error monitor
of data No. No.
Not Not used 1 Command error (1st set) PLC setup R
used 2 Command error (2nd set) unit
3 FB error (1st set)
4 FB error (2nd set)
5 Machine position (1st set)
6 Machine position (2nd set)
Section No. : 63 Spindle monitor
of data No. No.
Not Axis No. 1 Gain Integer R
used 2 Droop
3 Rotation speed PLC setup
unit/min.
4 Load Integer
5 Drive unit display Character
6 Alarm 1 string
7 Alarm 2
8 Alarm 3
9 Alarm 4
10 Cycle counter Integer
11 Control input 1L Character
12 Control input 1H string
13 Control input 2L
14 Control input 2H
15 Control input 3L
16 Control input 3H
17 Control input 4L
18 Control input 4H
19 Control output 1L
20 Control output 1H
27 Drive unit type
28 Drive unit serial No.
29 S/W version
30 Work time RW
657
of data No. No.
Not Axis No. 31 Alarm history 1(time) Character R
used 32 Alarm history 2(time) string
51 /SYS
52 Control input 1
53 Control input 2
54 Control input 3
55 Control input 4
56 Control output 1
57 Control output 2
58 Control output 3
59 Control output 4
60 Spindle angle Integer
Section No. : 64 Power supply monitor
of data No. No.
Not Axis No. 1 Unit type Character R
used 2 Unit No. string
3 S/W version
4 Work time
658
of data No. No.
Not Axis No. 21 Maintenance history (MNT1) Character R
used 22 Maintenance history (MNT2) string
25 /SYS
26 Connection drive W
Section No. : 65 Auxiliary axis amplifier monitor
of data No. No.
Not Axis No. 1 Droop Integer R
used 2 Rotation speed PLC setup
unit/min.
3 Load current Integer
4 MAX current 1
5 MAX current 2
6 Overload
7 Regenerative load
8 Current station No.
9 Current position PLC
Setup unit
10 Target station No. Integer
11 Command position PLC setup
unit
12 Auxiliary axis name Character
string
13 Position control gain 1 Integer
14 Speed control gain 1
15 Position control gain 2
16 Speed control gain 2
17 Speed integral compensation
18 Load inertia ratio
19 Unit type Character
20 S/W version string
21 Motor type
22 Alarm 1
23 Alarm 2
24 Alarm 3
25 Alarm 4
26 Unit serial No.
30 + n Alarm history 1 to 6 (alarm No.) (n=1 to 6)
50 + n Alarm history 1 to 6
(Detailed information of alarm) (n=1 to 6)
70 + n Alarm history 1 to 6 (n=1 to 6)
659
Section No. : 66 Hardware Configuration
of data No. No.
Not Not used n RIO unit 1 to 8 Character R
used 100 + n Terminal RIO unit 1 to 4 string
200 Control unit (NC card)
201 Extension unit
300 Terminal display unit (for M7)
301 Option card extension bus (OPTION CARD) (for M7)
302 CPUCARD external I/F (for M7)
400 Number of RIO units (for M7) Integer
400 + n RIO unit (for M7) (n=1 to 32) Character
string
Section No. : 67 Software Configuration
of data No. No.
Not Not used 1 NC system version Character R
used 2 PLC version string
3 PLCe version (extension external alarm message)
4 3rd language version
5 4th language version
6 Servo drive unit version
7 Spindle drive unit version
8 OS version
9 APLC version
20 NC system version (4-digit display)
Section No. : 72 Auxiliary Axis control
of data No. No.
Not Axis No. 1 Operation adjustment mode Integer RW
used 2 Absolute position set
3 Position set method R
4 Position set status
5 Operation mode RW
6 Operation parameter group
7 Scale
8 Operation status
9 Auxiliary axis basic point set
Not used 1000 Auxiliary axis parameter SRAM backup W
660
Section No. : 74 Sampling parameters
of data No. No.
Not Not used 1 Sampling trigger Integer RW
used 2 Sampling cycle
3 Number of sampling data
4 Sampling data storing address Character
string
5 Sampling data storing size Integer
6 Sampling address #1 Character
(M625 conventional compatibility) string
7 Sampling address #2
(M625 conventional compatibility)
41 Sampling address for AT #1 W
42 Sampling address for AT #2
50 Buffer designation Integer RW
(0: built-in memory, 1: cassette memory)
51 Buffer capacity (1024 x (setting value +1) byte)
52 Starting condition
53 Processing format
(0: 1shot, 1: repeat, 2: ring buffer)
54 Ending condition
55 Variables No.
(0: #1299, other than 0: common variables)
56 PLC device
57 Condition address Character
string
58 Condition data Integer
59 Condition data mask
661
of data No. No.
Not Not used 70 Sampling status (for automatic tuning) Integer R
used 71 Sampling delay time (for automatic tuning) RW
72 Cycle start request (for automatic tuning) W
73 Cycle start restriction (for automatic tuning) RW
74 Number of samplings (for automatic tuning) R
75 OP check information (for automatic tuning) RW
100 Number of sampling data R
Section No. : 95 Reference point return parameters
of data No. No.
Not Axis No. 2025, 2026 Refer to the 700/70 Series Setup Manual for PLC setup RW
used reference position return parameters. unit/min.
2027, 2028 PLC
Setup unit
2029 to Integer
2033
2037 to PLC
2040 Setup unit
Section No. : 96 Servo parameters
of data No. No.
Not Axis No. 1 to 16 SVn (n= Sub-section No.) Integer RW
used 17 Refer to the 700/70 Series Setup Manual for servo
18 to 44 parameters. Integer
45, 46 (Not used)
47 to 50 Integer
51, 52 (Not used)
53 Integer
54, 55 (Not used)
56 to 58 Integer
59, 60 (Not used)
61 to 65, Integer
73 to 76,
81 to 256
Section No. : 97 Spindle specification parameters
of data No. No.
Not Axis No. 1 to 23 Refer to the 700/70 Series Setup Manual for spindle Integer RW
used 24 basic specification parameters.
25 to 31, 35 RW
37 to 70
662
Section No. : 98 Spindle parameters
Significance of Sub-section
data No. No.
Not used Axis No. 1001 to SPn (n=Sub-section No.-1000) Integer RW
1003 Refer to the section on "Spindle
1004 parameter" in the "700/70 Series Setup (Not used)
1005 to Manual" for details. Integer
1010
1011 to (Not used)
1013
1014 to Integer
1029
1030 (Not used)
1031 to Integer
1050
1051,1052 (Not used)
1053 Integer
1054 (Not used)
1055 to Integer
1057
1058 to (Not used)
1060
1061 Integer
1062 to (Not used)
1064
1065 to Integer
1084
1085,1086 (Not used)
1087,1088 Integer
1089 to (Not used)
1112
1113 to Integer
1117
1118 to (Not used)
1120
1121 to Integer
1192
1193 to (Not used)
1224
1125 to Integer
1233
1234 to (Not used)
1236
1237 to Integer
1239
1240 (Not used)
663
Section No. : 100 Auxiliary axis・axis parameters
of data No. No.
Not Axis No. 1 Refer to the 700/70 Series Setup Manual for Character RW
used auxiliary axis parameters. string
2 to 8 Integer
9
10 Integer
11, 12
13, 14 Integer
15
16 Integer
17, 18
19 to 24 Integer
25
30 Character
string
31 to 45
50 Character
string
51 Integer
52
53, 54 Integer
55, 56
100 to 103 Integer
104 PLC
Setup unit
105 Character
string
110, 111 PLC setup
unit /min.
112 to 118 PLC setup
unit
120 Character
string
123 Integer
130 PLC setup
unit
150, 151 PLC setup
unit /min.
664
of data No. No.
Not Axis No. 152 to 181 Refer to the 700/70 Series Setup Manual for Integer RW
used 190 to 197 auxiliary axis parameters. PLC setup
unit
200 to 216, Integer
220 to 223
Section No. : 101 Absolute position parameters
of data No. No.
Not Axis No. 1, 2 Refer to the 700/70 Series Setup Manual for Integer RW
used 3 absolute position parameters. PLC setup
unit
6 Integer
7 PLC setup
unit/min.
8 to 10 PLC setup
unit
11 Integer
12, 13 PLC setup
unit
14 Integer
Section No. : 102 Machine error compensation parameters
of data No. No.
Not Not used 1 Compensation machine error Integer RW
used compensation amount increment method
1+n 1st to 28th axis basic axis (n=1 to 28) Character
29 + n 1st to 28th axis compensation axis (n=1 to 28) string
57 + n 1st to 28th axis division point No. at reference Integer
position (n=1 to 28)
85 + n 1st to 28th axis division point No. at the most
negative side (n=1 to 28)
113 + n 1st to 28th axis division point No. at the most
positive side (n=1 to 28)
141 + n 1st to 28th axis compensation scale factor
(n=1 to 28)
169 + n 1st to 28th axis division interval (n=1 to 28) PLC setup
unit
198 + n Pitch error compensation amount (n=0 to 1023) Integer
665
Section No. : 104 Position switch
of data No. No.
Not Not used 1 PSW selection Integer RW
used
System 2 1st position switch axis name Character
No. string
3 1st position switch imaginary dog position 1 PLC setup
4 1st position switch imaginary dog position 2 unit
5 1st position switch PSW check method changeover Integer
6 2nd position switch axis name Character
string
7 2nd position switch imaginary dog position 1 PLC setup
8 2nd position switch imaginary dog position 2 unit
9 2nd position switch PSW check method changeover Integer
10 3rd position switch axis name Character
string
11 3rd position switch imaginary dog position 1 PLC setup
12 3rd position switch imaginary dog position 2 unit
13 3rd position switch PSW check method changeover Integer
14 4th position switch axis name Character
string
15 4th position switch imaginary dog position 1 PLC setup
16 4th position switch imaginary dog position 2 unit
17 4th position switch PSW check method changeover Integer
string
string
string
string
100 + n 9th to 24th position switch axis name (n=9 ~) Character
string
200 + n 9th to 24th position switch imaginary dog position 1 PLC setup
(x=9 ~) unit
300 + n 9th to 24th position switch imaginary dog position 2
(n=9 ~)
400 + n 9th to 24th position switch PSW check method Integer
changeover (n=9 ~)
666
Section No. : 106 Macro List
of data No. No.
Not Not used 1 to 66 Refer to the 700/70 Series Setup Manual for macro Integer RW
used list.
System 100 + n ASCII[ ]ASCII code macro valid (n=1 to 2)
No. 200 + n ASCII[ ]ASCII code (n=1 to 2) Character
string
300 + n ASCII[ ] call type Integer
(0:M98, 1:G65, 2:G66, 3:G66.1) (n=1 to 2)
400 + n ASCII[ ] program No. (n=1 to 2)
500 + n ASCII[ ] common variable No. (100 to 149) (n=1 to 2)
Section No. : 107 PLC constants
of data No. No.
Not Not used 1+n PLC constants (n=0 to 95) Integer RW
used Refer to the 700/70 Series Setup Manual for PLC
constants.
Section No. : 108 PLC timer
of data No. No.
Not Not used 1+n 10ms timer <10ms> Integer RW
used (n=0 to 15 / [M7] n=0 to 703)
1000 + n 100ms timer <100ms>
(n=0 to 79 / [M7] n=0 to 703)
2000 + n 100ms integral timer <100msINC>
(n=0 to 7 / [M7] n=0 to 63)
3000 + n 10ms addition extension timer <10ms>
(n=0 to 399 / no [M7])
10000 Number of PLC timers (variable) (M7 only) R
10001 Number of PLC integral timers (variable) (M7 only)
Section No. : 109 PLC counter
of data No. No.
Not Not used 1+n Counter (n=0 to 23 / [M7] n=0 to 255) Integer RW
used 10000 Number of PLC counters (variable) (M7 only) R
Section No. : 110 Selecting the PLC Bit
of data No. No.
Not Not used 1+n PLC bit selection (n=0 to 95) Integer RW
used
667
Section No. : 118 Anshin-net 1
of data No. No.
Not Not used 400 Notifying party's telephone No. 1 Character RW
used 401 Comment 1 string
402 Notifying party's telephone No. 2
403 Comment 2
404 Notifying party's telephone No. 3
405 Comment 3
406 Anshin-net/Machine tool builder network system Integer
valid
Section No. : 119 Anshin-net 2
of data No. No.
Not Not used 600 Modem telephone No. Character RW
used 601 No. to reach call center string
602 No. to reach machine tool builder
603 Incoming No. at call center 1
607 + n Incoming No. at machine tool builder (n=1 to 5)
613 Number of retries Integer
614 Anshin-net screen auto selection
615 Condition 1(type/registers)
616 Condition 1(No./status value)
635 Command time out time
636 Re-dialing interval (s)
637 Number of re-dialings
638 Modem connection port
639 Dialing method
640 Call waiting time
641 Machine serial No. Character
string
668
Section No. : 120 PLC Switch
of data No. No.
Not Not used 0+n PLC switch X(IN) (n=1 to 32) Integer RW
used 100 + n PLC switch Y(OUT) (n=1 to 32) R
200 PLC switch X(IN)1 to 16 RW
201 PLC switch X(IN)17 to 32
210 PLC switch Y(OUT)1 to 16
211 PLC switch Y(OUT)17 to 32 R
Section No. : 121 Operation parameters
of data No. No.
Not Not used 8900 + n Counter type 1 to 5 (n=1 to 5) Integer RW
used 8910 Edit undo valid
8920 Solid drawing tool compensation selection
Section No. : 122 Input/Output parameters
of data No. No.
Not Not used 1 to 32 Refer to the 700/70 Series Setup Manual for Integer RW
used 33 to 40 input/output parameters. Character
string
41 to 58 Integer
59 to 66 Character
string
67 to 84 Integer
85 to 92 Character
string
93 to 110 Integer
111 to 118 Character
string
119 to 136 Integer
string
Section No. : 123 Computer link parameters
of data No. No.
Not Not used 1 to 24 Refer to the 700/70 Series Setup Manual for Integer RW
used computer link parameters.
669
Section No. : 124 Ethernet parameters
of data No. No.
Not Not used 1 Refer to the 700/70 Series Setup Manual for Integer RW
used 2 to 4 Ethernet parameters. Character
string
5 Integer
6 Character
string
7, 50 Integer
51 to 53 Character
string
54, 55 Integer
100 + n User name (Host A to D)(n=0 to 3) Character
200 + n Password (Host A to D)(n=0 to 3) string
300 + n Directry (Host A to D)(n=0 to 3)
400 + n Host address (Host A to D)(n=0 to 3)
500 + n Host type (Host 1 to 4)(n=0 to 3) Integer
600 + n Host word position:
File (Host 1 to 4)(n=0 to 3)
Size (Host 1 to 4)(n=0 to 3)
<DIR>(Host 1 to 4)(n=0 to 3)
Comment (Host 1 to 4)(n=0 to 3)
1000 + n Host number of words:
Comment (Host 1 to 4)(n=0 to 3)
1100 + n Host number of memory characters
(Host 1 to 4)(n=0 to 3)
Section No. : 125 Barrier
of data No. No.
Not Not used 1 to 13 Refer to the 700/70 Series Setup Manual for barrier PLC setup RW
used data. unit
System 20 Integer
No. 21 to 26 PLC setup
unit
27, 28 Integer
29 Character
string
30, 31 Integer
670
Section No. : 126 Base parameters
of data No. No.
System Not used 1 Refer to the 700/70 Series Setup Manual for base Integer RW
No. specifications parameters.
Not 2
used
System 3
No.
Not 4
used
System 5
No.
Not 6
used
System 7
No.
Not 8
used
System 10
No. 11 to 16 Character
string
20 Integer
Not 21 to 28,
used 43 to 45, 50
System 73 to 76
No.
Not 77 to 82, 84
used
System 85, 86
No.
Not 87 to 108
used
System 109 to 111
No.
Not 112 to 150
used
System 151, 152
No.
Not 153 to 161
used
System 162 to 166
No. 167 PLC setup
unit/min.
168 Integer
169 PLC setup
unit/min.
170 Integer
171 PLC setup
unit/min.
172 Integer
671
of data No. No.
System Not used 173 Refer to the 700/70 Series Setup Manual for base PLC setup RW
No. specifications parameters. unit/min.
174 Integer
175 PLC setup
unit/min.
176 Integer
177 PLC setup
unit/min.
178, 179 Integer
unit/min.
185 to 196 Integer
197 PLC setup
unit
198 to 200 Integer
201 PLC setup
unit/min.
202, 203 Integer
204 PLC setup
unit/min.
205 to 207 Integer
unit
211 PLC setup
unit/min.
Not 300 to 311, Integer
used 350 to 361,
400 to 435,
500 to 503,
506,
509 to 514,
524, 527,
528
System 600
No.
Not 601
used
System 602
No.
Not 603
used
672
of data No. No.
System Not used 1501 to 1503, Refer to the 700/70 Series Setup Manual for base Integer RW
No. 1505 specifications parameters.
1506 PLC setup
unit/min.
1507, Integer
1510 to 1513
1514, 1515 Character
string
1516 to 1522 Integer
1523 PLC setup
unit/min.
1524 Integer
1533 Character
string
1534 Integer
1535 PLC setup
unit
string
1564 PLC setup
unit/min.
1568 to 1574, Integer
1801 to 1803,
1811 to 1817,
1821 to 1827
Not 1901 to 1911
used
System 8001 to 8003 Refer to the 700/70 Series Setup Manual for user
No. 8004 parameters. PLC setup
unit/min.
8005, 8006 PLC setup
unit
8007, 8008 Integer
unit
8014, 8015 Integer
unit
8025, 8026
673
of data No. No.
System Not used 8027 to 8030 Refer to the 700/70 Series Setup Manual for user PLC setup RW
No. parameters. unit
8037, PLC setup
8041 to 8043 unit
Not 8044 Integer
used
System 8051 to 8054 PLC setup
No. unit
8055 Integer
unit
8058 Integer
8059 PLC setup
unit
8071, 8072 Integer
8075 PLC setup
unit
Not 8078 Integer
used
System 8083
No. 8084 PLC setup
unit
unit/min.
8090 Integer
8091 PLC setup
unit
8092 Integer
8093 PLC setup
unit
8094 Integer
Not 8101 to
used 8103,
8105 to
8114,
8116
string
unit
8627 Integer
System 8701 to 8705 PLC setup
No. unit
8706 PLC setup
unit/min.
unit
674
of data No. No.
Not Not used 8709, 8710 Refer to the 700/70 Series Setup Manual for user Integer RW
used parameters.
System 8711, 8712
No.
Not 10001 to
used 10003
10004
System 10005, RW
No. 10006
Not 10007 to
used 10013,
10035
System 10100, R
No. 10101
Section No. : 127 Axis parameters
of data No. No.
System Axis No. 1 to 3 Refer to the 700/70 Series Setup Manual for axis Character RW
No. specifications parameters. string
4 to 10 Integer
12, 13 Character
string
101 to 105 Integer
106, 107 Character
string
108 to 112, Integer
1010
unit/min.
2011, 2012 Interpolat-
ion unit
unit
2020 PLC setup
unit
2021 PLC setup
unit/min.
2022 Integer
2023 PLC setup
unit/min.
2024, 2061, PLC setup
2062 unit
2063, Integer
2068 to 2071
675
of data No. No.
System Axis No. 2072 Refer to the 700/70 Series Setup Manual for axis PLC setup
No. specifications parameters. unit
2081 PLC setup
unit/min.
2082, 2084, Integer
2087
string
unit/min.
2096 PLC setup
unit/min.
2097, 2098 PLC
Setup unit
2102, 2103, Integer
2106
unit/min.
2111 to Integer
2115,
2121 to
2129
2130 to PLC setup
2133 unit
2134 to Integer
2137
2138 PLC setup
unit
8201 to Integer
8203
8204 to PLC setup
8206 unit
8207, 8208 Integer
8209 PLC setup
unit
8210, 8211 Integer
10000 Character
string
10001, PLC setup
10002 unit
10003, Integer
10004
676
Section No. : 128 Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters
of data No. No.
System Not used 7900 to 7902 Refer to the 700/70 Series Setup Manual for rotary Character RW
No. axis configuration parameters. string
7920
7922 Character
string
unit
7930 Integer
7932 Character
string
7933 Integer
unit
7940 Integer
7942 Character
string
7943 Integer
unit
7950 Integer
7952 Character
string
7953 Integer
unit
Section No. : 140 Ladder I/F(common)
of data No. No.
System Not used n Load meter name (n=1,2) R
No. n + 10 Load meter scale comment 1st line (n=1,2)
n + 20 Load meter unit comment (n=1,2)
n + 30 Load meter scale comment 2nd line (n=1,2)
Not Not used n + 100 Spindle standby tool comment (n=0 to 4)
used n + 200 PLC switch message (n=1 to 32)
677
INDEX
INDEX
Numbers C
1ST CUTTING FEEDRATE OVERRIDE...........................................464 C AXIS SELECTION ........................................................................ 476
1ST HANDLE AXIS SELECTION CODE m......................................372 CHAMFERING ................................................................................. 353
1ST HANDLE VALID ........................................................................373 CHOPPING ...................................................................................... 553
1ST HANDLE/INCREMENTAL FEED MAGNIFICATION .................468 CHOPPING CONTROL DATA ADDRESS ....................................... 554
1ST REFERENCE POSITION REACHED n-TH AXIS......................160 CHOPPING ERROR NO. ................................................................. 552
24 HOURS CONTINUOUS OPERATION.........................................156 CHOPPING OVERRIDE .................................................................. 554
2ND CUTTING FEEDRATE OVERRIDE ..........................................465 CHOPPING PARAMETER VALID.................................................... 554
2ND CUTTING FEEDRATE OVERRIDE VALID...............................383 CHUCK CLOSE ............................................................................... 441
2ND HANDLE AXIS SELECTION CODE m .....................................374 CHUCK CLOSE CONFIRMATION ................................................... 240
2ND HANDLE FEED MAGNIFICATION ...........................................469 CIRCULAR FEED IN MANUAL MODE BASIC POINT X DATA ....... 574
2ND HANDLE VALID .......................................................................375 CIRCULAR FEED IN MANUAL MODE BASIC POINT Y DATA ....... 574
2ND M FUNCTION DATA 1 to 4 ......................................................260 CIRCULAR FEED IN MANUAL MODE CURRENT POSITION X ..... 572
2ND M FUNCTION STROBE 1 to 4 .................................................204 CIRCULAR FEED IN MANUAL MODE CURRENT POSITION Y ..... 572
2ND REFERENCE POSITION REACHED n-TH AXIS .....................161 CIRCULAR FEED IN MANUAL MODE
2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN INTERLOCK ....................405 GRADIENT/ARC CENTER X DATA................................... 576
3RD HANDLE AXIS SELECTION CODE m .....................................376 CIRCULAR FEED IN MANUAL MODE
3RD HANDLE FEED MAGNIFICATION ...........................................469 GRADIENT/ARC CENTER Y DATA................................... 576
3RD HANDLE VALID .......................................................................377 CIRCULAR FEED IN MANUAL MODE OPERATION MODE DATA. 573
3RD REFERENCE POSITION REACHED n-TH AXIS .....................161 CIRCULAR FEED IN MANUAL MODE TRAVEL RANGE X- DATA . 575
4TH REFERENCE POSITION REACHED n-TH AXIS .....................161 CIRCULAR FEED IN MANUAL MODE TRAVEL RANGE X+ DATA 575
CIRCULAR FEED IN MANUAL MODE TRAVEL RANGE Y- DATA . 575
A CIRCULAR FEED IN MANUAL MODE TRAVEL RANGE Y+ DATA 575
CIRCULAR FEED IN MANUAL MODE VALID ................................. 572
ABSOLUTE POSITION WARNING ..................................................213 CLOCK DATA DATE/HOUR ............................................................ 244
ADAPTIVE CONTROL BASIC AXIS SELECTION ...........................479 CLOCK DATA MINUTE/SECOND.................................................... 244
ADAPTIVE CONTROL EXECUTION................................................405 CLOCK DATA YEAR/MONTH.......................................................... 244
ADAPTIVE CONTROL IN EXECUTION ...........................................211 CNC COMPLETION STANDBY STATUS ........................................ 265
ADAPTIVE CONTROL OVERRIDE..................................................265 CNC SOFTWARE VERSION CODE ................................................ 245
ALARM MESSAGE I/F 1 to 4 ...........................................................474 COLLECTING DIAGNOSIS DATA ................................................... 153
ALL AXES IN-POSITION..................................................................184 COLLECTING DIAGNOSIS DATA STOP ........................................ 299
ALL AXES SMOOTHING ZERO.......................................................185 CONNECTION STATUS OF EACH CHANNEL RIO1,2 ................... 289
ANALOG OUTPUT m.......................................................................443 CONNECTION STATUS OF EACH CHANNEL RIO3 ...................... 290
APLC VERSION...............................................................................449 CONTACTOR SHUTOFF TEST....................................................... 303
ATC CONTROL PARAMETER.........................................................499 CONTROL AXIS DETACH 2 n-TH AXIS .......................................... 333
AUTOMATIC ERROR DETECTION .................................................413 CONTROL AXIS DETACH n-TH AXIS ............................................. 316
AUTOMATIC INITIALIZATION MODE..............................................342 CONTROL UNIT TEMPERATURE................................................... 248
AUTOMATIC INTERLOCK- n-TH AXIS............................................320 CONTROLLER READY COMPLETION ........................................... 177
AUTOMATIC INTERLOCK+ n-TH AXIS ...........................................320 CRT CHANGEOVER COMPLETION ............................................... 298
AUTOMATIC MACHINE LOCK n-TH AXIS .............................. 322, 522 CURRENT DETECTION .................................................................. 225
AUTOMATIC OPERATION "PAUSE" COMMAND (Feed hold) ........346 CURRENT LIMIT CHANGEOVER ................................................... 485
AUTOMATIC OPERATION "START" COMMAND (Cycle start) .......345 CURRENT LIMIT CHANGEOVER n-TH AXIS ................................. 330
AUTOMATIC POWER OFF REQUEST............................................304 CURRENT LIMIT MODE 1 ............................................................... 402
AUTOMATIC RESTART...................................................................354 CURRENT LIMIT MODE 2 ............................................................... 402
AXIS SELECTED n-TH AXIS ...........................................................158 CURRENT LIMIT REACHED n-TH AXIS ......................................... 165
CUTTING BLOCK START INTERLOCK .......................................... 348
B CUTTING FEEDRATE OVERRIDE CODE m................................... 382
CUTTING FEEDRATE OVERRIDE METHOD SELECTION ............ 383
BALL SCREW THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION
COMPENSATION AMOUNT n-TH AXIS............................253 D
BALL SCREW THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION
MAX. COMPENSATION AMOUNT n-TH AXIS ..................460 DATA PROTECT KEY 1 .................................................................. 291
BALL SCREW THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION DATA PROTECT KEY 2 .................................................................. 292
OFFSET AMOUNT n-TH AXIS...........................................460 DATA PROTECT KEY 3 .................................................................. 292
BALL SCREW THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION DIO CARD INFORMATION.............................................................. 252
PART-SYSTEM, AXIS NO. n-TH AXIS ..............................460 DIRECT SCREEN SELECTION....................................................... 458
BARRIER CHECK INVALID .............................................................412 DISPLAY CHANGEOVER $1 to 4.................................................... 300
BARRIER VALID (LEFT) ..................................................................409 DISPLAY LOCK ............................................................................... 363
BARRIER VALID (RIGHT)................................................................409 DISPLAY TOOL SELECTION PARAMETER ................................... 506
BASIC POSITION -> UPPER DEAD POINT PATH FLAG................551 DISPLAYED SCREEN NO. .............................................................. 444
BATTERY ALARM............................................................................153 DOOR INTERLOCK SPINDLE SPEED CLAMP............................... 411
BATTERY DROP CAUSE ................................................................246 DOOR OPEN ENABLE .................................................................... 220
BATTERY WARNING.......................................................................152 DOOR OPEN I ................................................................................. 308
BLOCK START INTERLOCK ...........................................................347 DOOR OPEN II ................................................................................ 410
BOTTOM DEAD POINT -> UPPER DEAD POINT PATH FLAG.......551 DOOR OPEN SIGNAL INPUT (spindle speed monitor) ................... 410
X-1
INDEX
DROOP RELEASE REQUEST n-TH AXIS.......................................330 IN 3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION ....................... 216
DRY RUN ................................................................................. 348, 522 IN AUTOMATIC INITIAL SET MODE ............................................... 174
DRY RUN INVALID ..........................................................................412 IN AUTOMATIC OPERATION "PAUSE" .......................................... 180
IN AUTOMATIC OPERATION "RUN" .............................................. 178
E IN AUTOMATIC OPERATION "START" .......................................... 179
IN AXIS MINUS MOTION n-TH AXIS............................................... 159
EACH AXIS MANUAL FEEDRATE B n-TH AXIS .............................491 IN AXIS PLUS MOTION n-TH AXIS................................................. 159
EACH AXIS MANUAL FEEDRATE B VALID ....................................388 IN BARRIER VALID (LEFT) ............................................................. 219
EACH AXIS REFERENCE POSITION SELECTION ........................480 IN BARRIER VALID (RIGHT) ........................................................... 219
EMERGENCY STOP CAUSE ..........................................................251 IN CHOPPING MODE...................................................................... 552
ENCODER 1 ARBITRARY PULSE 1................................................463 IN CHOPPING START..................................................................... 551
ENCODER 1 ARBITRARY PULSE 2................................................463 IN CIRCULAR FEED IN MANUAL MODE ........................................ 571
ENCODER 1 ARBITRARY PULSE SELECTION..............................306 IN CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED .................................................. 190
ENCODER 1 ARBITRARY PULSE VALID .......................................307 IN CURRENT LIMIT n-TH AXIS ....................................................... 165
ENCODER 2 ARBITRARY PULSE 1................................................463 IN CUTTING FEED .......................................................................... 188
ENCODER 2 ARBITRARY PULSE 2................................................463 IN DISPLAY LOCK........................................................................... 192
ENCODER 2 ARBITRARY PULSE SELECTION..............................306 IN HANDLE MODE .......................................................................... 172
ENCODER 2 ARBITRARY PULSE VALID .......................................307 IN HIGH-SPEED RETRACT FUNCTION OPERATION ................... 218
ENCODER SELECTION ..................................................................476 IN INCH UNIT SELECTION ............................................................. 191
ERROR DETECTION.......................................................................349 IN INCREMENTAL MODE ............................................................... 173
ERROR TEMPORARY CANCEL......................................................439 IN INITIALIZATION .......................................................................... 266
EXT. MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM OFFSET DATA ILLEGAL IN JOG MODE ................................................................................. 172
n-TH AXIS ........171 IN L COIL SELECTION .................................................................... 229
EXT. MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM OFFSET DATA IN M COIL SELECTION ................................................................... 234
n-TH AXIS ........491 IN MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED ...................................................... 181
EXTERNAL DECELERATION- n-TH AXIS.......................................319 IN MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED MODE .......................................... 173
EXTERNAL DECELERATION+ n-TH AXIS......................................319 IN MDI MODE .................................................................................. 176
EXTERNAL SEARCH BLOCK NO. ..................................................531 IN MEMORY MODE......................................................................... 175
EXTERNAL SEARCH DEVICE NO. .................................................531 IN MIRROR IMAGE n-TH AXIS........................................................ 169
EXTERNAL SEARCH FINISHED .....................................................531 IN MIXED SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL n-TH AXIS.................. 168
EXTERNAL SEARCH PROGRAM NO. ............................................531 IN PLC INTERRUPT ........................................................................ 193
EXTERNAL SEARCH SEQUENCE NO. ..........................................531 IN RAPID TRAVERSE ..................................................................... 187
EXTERNAL SEARCH STATUS........................................................531 IN REFERENCE POSITION RETURN............................................. 191
EXTERNAL SEARCH STROBE .......................................................531 IN REFERENCE POSITION RETURN MODE ................................. 174
IN REMOTE PROGRAM INPUT ...................................................... 154
F IN REWIND...................................................................................... 182
IN SKIP ............................................................................................ 191
F1-DIGIT COMMANDED..................................................................192 IN SPINDLE ALARM ........................................................................ 226
F1-DIGIT NO. CODE (1, 2, 4, 8).......................................................193 IN SPINDLE FORWARD RUN ......................................................... 232
F1-DIGIT SPEED CHANGE VALID ..................................................363 IN SPINDLE HOLDING FORCE UP................................................. 242
FEED AXIS SELECTION- n-TH AXIS ..............................................324 IN SPINDLE REVERSE RUN........................................................... 232
FEED AXIS SELECTION+ n-TH AXIS .............................................323 IN SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION .................................................. 236
FEEDBACK MACHINE POSITION n-TH AXIS.................................273 IN SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION 2 ............................................... 239
FEEDRATE LEAST INCREMENT CODE 1,2...................................386 IN SPINDLE TORQUE LIMIT ........................................................... 233
IN SPINDLE-NC AXIS POLYGON MODE........................................ 214
G IN SPINDLE-SPINDLE POLYGON MODE....................................... 215
IN SYNCHRONIZED TAPPING SELECTION (M COMMAND) ........ 217
GEAR SHIFT COMPLETION ...........................................................414 IN SYNCHRONOUS FEED .............................................................. 190
GROUP IN TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT .................................. 519, 527 IN SYNCHRONOUS/SUPERIMPOSITION CONTROL n-TH AXIS .. 168
IN TAPE MODE ............................................................................... 175
H IN TAPPING..................................................................................... 189
IN THREAD CUTTING ..................................................................... 189
HANDLE MODE ...............................................................................337 IN TOOL ESCAPE AND RETURN MODE........................................ 197
HANDLE PULSE ENCODER COMMUNICATION CONNECTOR PRIORITY IN TOOL ID COMMUNICATION ...................................................... 154
.........................................................................................................293 IN TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT................................................ 517, 525
HANDLE/INCREMENTAL FEED MAGNIFICATION CODE m..........390 IN TOOL SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION II .................................... 241
HANDLE/INCREMENTAL FEED INCLINED AXIS CONTROL NO Z AXIS COMPENSATION............. 370
MAGNIFICATION METHOD SELECTION .........................392 INCLINED AXIS CONTROL VALID.................................................. 370
HANDY TERMINAL CAUSE OF COMMUNICATION ERROR .........454 INCREMENTAL MODE.................................................................... 338
HANDY TERMINAL DATA AREA TOP ADDRESS ..........................452 INDEX POSITIONING COMPLETION ............................................. 235
HANDY TERMINAL DATA VALID NUMBER OF REGISTERS ........453 INITIALIZATION INCOMPLETION................................................... 266
HANDY TERMINAL KEY 1 TO 45 ....................................................242 INTEGRATION TIME INPUT 1......................................................... 291
HIGH-SPEED RETRACT FUNCTION VALID...................................406 INTEGRATION TIME INPUT 2......................................................... 291
HIGH-SPEED RETRACT FUNCTION VALID STATE ......................218 INTERFERENCE CHECK VALID..................................................... 301
HOB AXIS DELAY EXCESS ............................................................241
J
I
JOG MODE ...................................................................................... 337
ILLEGAL AXIS SELECTED..............................................................193 JOG·HANDLE SYNCHRONOUS ..................................................... 387
IN "RESET" ......................................................................................181
X-2
INDEX
K MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED STOP................................................ 400

MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED STROBE ........................................... 401
KEY IN 1 ..........................................................................................244 MANUAL FEEDRATE ...................................................................... 467
KEY OUT 1.......................................................................................445 MANUAL FEEDRATE B ................................................................... 468
MANUAL FEEDRATE B OVERRIDE ............................................... 472
L MANUAL FEEDRATE B SURFACE SPEED CONTROL VALID ...... 389
MANUAL FEEDRATE B VALID n-TH AXIS...................................... 327
L COIL SELECTION.........................................................................428 MANUAL FEEDRATE CODE m ....................................................... 385
LARGE DIAMETER TOOL INFORMATION .....................................455 MANUAL FEEDRATE METHOD SELECTION................................. 386
LIFE PREDICTION...........................................................................526 MANUAL INTERLOCK- n-TH AXIS.................................................. 321
LOAD METER DISPLAY INTERFACE 1,2 .......................................472 MANUAL INTERLOCK+ n-TH AXIS................................................. 321
LOAD MONITOR ALARM AXIS .......................................................263 MANUAL MACHINE LOCK n-TH AXIS ............................................ 322
LOAD MONITOR ALARM RESET....................................................404 MANUAL MEASUREMENT STATUS............................................... 261
LOAD MONITOR DATA ALARM INFORMATION ............................264 MANUAL NUMERICAL COMMAND................................................. 196
LOAD MONITOR EXECUTION ........................................................403 MANUAL OVERRIDE METHOD SELECTION ................................. 378
LOAD MONITOR IN EXECUTION ...................................................210 MANUAL SPEED COMMAND REVERSE RUN VALID.................... 583
LOAD MONITOR LOAD CHANGE RATE DETECTION AXIS ..........478 MANUAL SPEED COMMAND SIGN REVERSED ........................... 582
LOAD MONITOR MONITOR MODE ................................................404 MANUAL SPEED COMMAND VALID .............................................. 581
LOAD MONITOR MONITOR MODE VALID .....................................211 MANUAL/AUTOMATIC SIMULTANEOUS VALID n-TH AXIS .......... 325
LOAD MONITOR STATUS (1) to (10) ..............................................271 MDI MODE....................................................................................... 344
LOAD MONITOR TEACHING AXIS SELECTION ............................477 MECHANICAL AXIS SPECIFICATIONS
LOAD MONITOR TEACHING DATA SUB-NO. ................................478 1ST ROTARY AXIS ANGLE .............................................. 490
LOAD MONITOR TEACHING MODE...............................................403 MECHANICAL AXIS SPECIFICATIONS
LOAD MONITOR TEACHING MODE VALID....................................210 2ND ROTARY AXIS ANGLE.............................................. 490
LOAD MONITOR WARNING AXIS ..................................................262 MEMORY MODE ............................................................................. 343
LOAD MONITOR WARNING RESET...............................................405 MIRROR IMAGE n-TH AXIS ............................................................ 318
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION LOCK..................................... 379, 522
M MIXED SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL REQUEST n-TH AXIS .... 334
MOTION COMMAND COMPLETION............................................... 183
M CODE DATA 1 .............................................................................256 MOTOR LOAD CURRENT n-TH AXIS............................................. 275
M CODE DATA 1 to 4.......................................................................519 MOTOR ROTATION SPEED n-TH AXIS ......................................... 274
M CODE DATA 2 .............................................................................256 MULTI-POINT ORIENTATION POSITION DATA............................. 497
M CODE DATA 3 .............................................................................257
M CODE DATA 4 .............................................................................257 N
M CODE INDEPENDENT OUTPUT M00 .........................................194
M CODE INDEPENDENT OUTPUT M01 .........................................195 NC ALARM 1.................................................................................... 208
M CODE INDEPENDENT OUTPUT M02 .........................................195 NC ALARM 2 (Servo alarm) ............................................................. 208
M CODE INDEPENDENT OUTPUT M30 .........................................195 NC ALARM 3 (Program error) .......................................................... 209
M COIL SELECTION........................................................................430 NC ALARM 4 (Operation error) ........................................................ 209
M FUNCTION FINISH 1 ...................................................................355 NC ALARM 5.................................................................................... 214
M FUNCTION FINISH 1,2 ................................................................522 NC AXIS CONTROL SELECTION n-TH AXIS ................................. 626
M FUNCTION FINISH 2 ...................................................................356 NC AXIS UP-TO-SPEED n-TH AXIS ............................................... 166
M FUNCTION STROBE 1 ................................................................198 NC DATA SAMPLING TRIGGER..................................................... 300
M FUNCTION STROBE 1 to 4 .........................................................518 NC RESET 1 .................................................................................... 350
M FUNCTION STROBE 2 ................................................................200 NC RESET 2 .................................................................................... 351
M FUNCTION STROBE 3 ................................................................200 NEAR REFERENCE POSITION (PER REFERENCE POSITION) ... 268
M FUNCTION STROBE 4 ................................................................201 NEAR REFERENCE POSITION n-TH AXIS .................................... 162
MACHINE MANUFACTURER MACRO PASSWORD NO. ...............457 NEAR-POINT DOG IGNORED ........................................................ 450
MACHINE POSITION n-TH AXIS.....................................................272 NEW TOOL CHANGE...................................................................... 526
MACRO INTERRUPT.......................................................................360 NO. OF WORK MACHINING (current value) ................................... 272
MACRO INTERRUPT PRIORITY .....................................................599 NO. OF WORK MACHINING OVER ................................................ 213
MAGNIFICATION VALID FOR EACH HANDLE ...............................391 NO. OF WORKS MACHINING (maximum value) ............................. 272
MANUAL ABSOLUTE ......................................................................362 NUMBER OF REGISTERED TOOL LIFE CONTROL TOOLS ......... 519
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 1ST AXIS SELECTION CODE m......395
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 1ST AXIS TRAVEL AMOUNT ...........473 O
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 1ST AXIS VALID...............................396
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 2ND AXIS SELECTION CODE m .....396 OPERATION BOARD RESET KEY INPUT ...................................... 151
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 2ND AXIS TRAVEL AMOUNT ..........474 OPERATOR MESSAGE I/F ............................................................. 475
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 2ND AXIS VALID ..............................396 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP m............................................................. 371
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 3RD AXIS SELECTION CODE m .....396 OT IGNORED .................................................................................. 449
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 3RD AXIS TRAVEL AMOUNT ..........474 OVERRIDE CANCEL ....................................................................... 378
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED 3RD AXIS VALID ..............................396
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED ABS/INC ...........................................399 P
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED AXIS INDEPENDENT .......................397
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED COMPLETION ..................................186 PALLET PROGRAM REGISTRATION EXT. WORKPIECE
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED EX. F/MODAL. F ...............................398 COORDINATE TRANSFER COMPLETION....................... 544
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED G0/G1 ...............................................398 PALLET PROGRAM REGISTRATION EXT. WORKPIECE
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED MC/WK .............................................399 COORDINATE TRANSFER READY.................................. 547
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED MODE ...............................................339 PHASE OFFSET REQUEST............................................................ 438
MANUAL ARBITRARY FEED SMOOTHING OFF............................397 PHASE SHIFT CALCULATION REQUEST...................................... 437
X-3
INDEX
PLAYBACK ......................................................................................359
PLC AXIS CONTROL BUFFERING MODE S CODE DATA 1 to 4 ....................................................................... 258
INFORMATION ADDRESS ................................................462 S COMMAND GEAR NO. ILLEGAL ................................................. 222
PLC AXIS CONTROL BUFFERING MODE VALID ..........................295 S COMMAND MAX./MIN. COMMAND VALUE OVER ..................... 222
PLC AXIS CONTROL INFORMATION ADDRESS n-TH AXIS .........462 S COMMAND NO GEAR SELECTED.............................................. 222
PLC AXIS CONTROL VALID n-TH AXIS..........................................315 S COMMAND OVERRIDE ............................................................... 496
PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL COMMAND 1 ..............................606 S FUNCTION STROBE 1 to 4.......................................................... 202
PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL COMMAND 2 ..............................610 SAFETY OBSERVATION I/O SIGNAL STATUS.............................. 255
PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL COMMAND 3 ..............................614 SCREEN DISPLAY REQUEST ........................................................ 298
PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL COMMAND 4 ..............................614 SEARCH & START .......................................................................... 369
PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL STATUS 1...................................615 SEARCH & START ERROR ............................................................ 206
PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL STATUS 2...................................622 SEARCH & START PROGRAM NO................................................. 475
PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL STATUS 3...................................624 SEARCH & START SEARCH .......................................................... 206
PLC AXIS INDEXING CONTROL STATUS 4...................................624 SELECTION TOOL COMPENSATION NO. (Sub) ........................... 487
PLC AXIS NEAR POINT DETECTION n-TH AXIS ...........................293 SELECTION TOOL WEAR NO. (Sub) ............................................. 487
PLC AXIS n-TH HANDLE VALID......................................................294 SERVO DEFLECTION AMOUNT n-TH AXIS................................... 273
PLC COIL CHANGEOVER...............................................................433 SERVO OFF n-TH AXIS .................................................................. 317
PLC EMERGENCY STOP................................................................365 SERVO READY COMPLETION....................................................... 177
PLC INTERRUPT .............................................................................367 SERVO READY COMPLETION OUTPUT DESIGNATION .............. 489
PLC INTERRUPT PROGRAM NO. ..................................................470 SERVO READY n-TH AXIS ............................................................. 156
PLC MAIN SCAN TIME ....................................................................250 SINGLE BLOCK....................................................................... 347, 522
PLC SKIP 1 to 8 ...............................................................................303 SKIP COORDINATE POSITION n-TH AXIS .................................... 275
PLC window Number of read windows n ..........................................537 SPEED DETECTION ....................................................................... 225
PLC window Number of write windows n ..........................................537 SPEED DETECTION 2 .................................................................... 234
PLC window parameter status..........................................................536 SPEED MONITOR DOOR OPEN POSSIBLE .................................. 254
PLC window Reading start R register n ............................................537 SPEED MONITOR MODE................................................................ 451
PLC window Writing start R register n ..............................................537 SPINDLE 2ND IN-POSITION ........................................................... 224
POSITION LOOP IN-POSITION.......................................................233 SPINDLE ACTUAL SPEED.............................................................. 280
POSITION SWITCH 1 to 24 .............................................................243 SPINDLE COMMAND FINAL DATA (rotation speed)....................... 280
POSITION SWITCH n INTERLOCK .................................................442 SPINDLE COMMAND ROTATION SPEED INPUT .......................... 279
POWER OFF INDICATION Y DEVICE NO. .....................................446 SPINDLE COMMAND ROTATION SPEED OUTPUT ...................... 494
POWER OFF PROCESSING ...........................................................151 SPINDLE COMMAND SELECTION ................................................. 495
POWER OFF REQUIRED AFTER PARAMETER CHANGE ............155 SPINDLE ENABLE........................................................................... 236
PRESETTER CONTACT..................................................................269 SPINDLE FORWARD RUN INDEX .................................................. 424
PRESETTER INTERLOCK...............................................................270 SPINDLE FORWARD RUN START ................................................. 421
PROGRAM DISPLAY DURING OPERATION ..................................293 SPINDLE GEAR SELECTION CODE 1,2 ........................................ 417
PROGRAM RESTART .....................................................................359 SPINDLE GEAR SHIFT ................................................................... 419
SPINDLE GEAR SHIFT 1,2 ............................................................. 223
Q SPINDLE HOLDING FORCE UP ..................................................... 418
SPINDLE IN-POSITION ................................................................... 228
R SPINDLE OFF MODE ...................................................................... 408
SPINDLE ORIENTATION ................................................................ 420
RAPID TRAVERSE ..........................................................................361 SPINDLE ORIENTATION COMMAND............................................. 427
RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE.......................................................466 SPINDLE OVERRIDE METHOD SELECTION................................. 416
RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE CODE 1,2......................................384 SPINDLE PHASE SYNCHRONIZATION.......................................... 435
RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE METHOD SELECTION .................384 SPINDLE PHASE SYNCHRONIZATION COMPLETION ................. 238
RECALCULATION REQUEST .........................................................364 SPINDLE POSITION CONTROL (C AXIS) CUTTING GAIN L,H...... 429
REFERENCE POSITION ADJUSTMENT COMPLETION ................484 SPINDLE READY-ON ...................................................................... 230
REFERENCE POSITION ADJUSTMENT VALUE SPINDLE REVERSE RUN INDEX ................................................... 426
PARAMETER SETTING COMPLETED .............................267 SPINDLE REVERSE RUN START................................................... 422
REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT n-TH AXIS.................169 SPINDLE ROTATION SPEED
REFERENCE POSITION RETRACT................................................366 SYNCHRONIZATION COMPLETION ................................ 237
REFERENCE POSITION RETURN DIRECTION n-TH AXIS ...........170 SPINDLE SELECTION..................................................................... 431
REFERENCE POSITION RETURN MODE ......................................341 SPINDLE SERVO-ON...................................................................... 231
REFERENCE POSITION SELECTION CODE 1,2 ...........................393 SPINDLE SPEED LOWER LIMIT OVER.......................................... 221
REFERENCE POSITION SELECTION METHOD ............................394 SPINDLE SPEED OVERRIDE CODE m .......................................... 416
REMOTE PROGRAM INPUT COMPLETION...................................154 SPINDLE SPEED UPPER LIMIT OVER .......................................... 221
REMOTE PROGRAM INPUT ERROR .............................................154 SPINDLE STOP ............................................................................... 418
REMOTE PROGRAM INPUT ERROR INFORMATION....................246 SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION....................................................... 434
REMOTE PROGRAM INPUT NO.....................................................456 SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION BASIC SPINDLE SELECTION...... 498
REMOTE PROGRAM INPUT START ..............................................309 SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION MAXIMUM PHASE ERROR
RESET & REWIND ..........................................................................352 /MAXIMUM HOB AXIS DELAY ANGLE ............................. 281
REVERSE RUN ...............................................................................598 SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE ERROR 1......................... 284
REVERSE RUN CONTROL MODE..................................................599 SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE ERROR 2......................... 285
REVERSE RUN FROM BLOCK START...........................................598 SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE ERROR MONITOR .......... 282
RIOn NO. OF ERROR OCCURRENCES n-TH CH ..........................288 SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION
PHASE ERROR MONITOR (lower limit) ............................ 283
SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION
PHASE ERROR MONITOR (upper limit) ........................... 283
S SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE ERROR
X-4
INDEX
/HOB AXIS DELAY ANGLE ...............................................281

SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE OFFSET DATA ................282 UNCLAMP COMMAND n-TH AXIS .................................................. 167
SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION PHASE SHIFT AMOUNT ..............498 UNCLAMP COMPLETION n-TH AXIS ............................................. 333
SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION UNSET TOOL INFORMATION ........................................................ 456
SYNCHRONOUS SPINDLE SELECTION..........................498 UPPER DEAD POINT -> BASIC POSITION PATH FLAG................ 551
SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION/SUPERIMPOSITION CANCEL .....440 UPPER DEAD POINT -> BOTTOM DEAD POINT PATH FLAG ...... 551
SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS ROTATION DIRECTION .....................436 USAGE DATA COUNT VALID ................................................. 523, 527
SPINDLE TOOL NO. ........................................................................524 USER MACRO INPUT #1032 (PLC -> Controller)............................ 492
SPINDLE TORQUE LIMIT 1.............................................................423 USER MACRO INPUT #1033 (PLC -> Controller)............................ 493
SPINDLE TORQUE LIMIT 2.............................................................423 USER MACRO INPUT #1034 (PLC -> Controller)............................ 493
SPINDLE UP-TO-SPEED.................................................................227 USER MACRO INPUT #1035 (PLC -> Controller)............................ 493
SPINDLE-SPINDLE POLYGON CANCEL........................................407 USER MACRO OUTPUT #1132 (Controller -> PLC)........................ 277
SPINDLE-SPINDLE POLYGON USER MACRO OUTPUT #1133 (Controller -> PLC)........................ 278
SYNCHRONIZATION COMPLETION ................................216 USER MACRO OUTPUT #1134 (Controller -> PLC)........................ 278
STANDBY TOOL NO. ......................................................................524 USER MACRO OUTPUT #1135 (Controller -> PLC)........................ 278
STROKE COMPENSATION COMPLETION ....................................552 USER SEQUENCE PROGRAM VERSION CODE........................... 447
SUPERIMPOSITION CONTROL REQUEST n-TH AXIS..................336 USER SEQUENCE PROGRAM VERSION CODE 2........................ 448
SYNCHRONIZATION CORRECTION MODE...................................358
SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL OPERATION METHOD.....................481 V
SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL REQUEST n-TH AXIS.......................335
SYNCHRONOUS ERROR AMOUNT n-TH AXIS .............................276 W
SYNCHRONOUS TAPPING COMMAND POLARITY REVERSAL...408
SYNCHRONOUS TAPPING CURRENT ERROR ANGLE................287 WAITING BETWEEN PART SYSTEMS........................................... 193
SYNCHRONOUS TAPPING CURRENT ERROR WIDTH ................286 WAITING IGNORE........................................................................... 406
SYNCHRONOUS TAPPING MAXIMUM ERROR ANGLE................287 WEAR COMPENSATION NO. (Tool presetter) ................................ 486
SYNCHRONOUS TAPPING MAXIMUM ERROR WIDTH ................286 WORKPIECE COORDINATE MEASUREMENT 2ND AXIS ............. 331
WORKPIECE COORDINATE OFFSET
T MEASUREMENT TOOL COMPENSATION NO.
/SELECTED COMPENSATION TOOL NO. ................................ 486
T CODE DATA 1 to 4 ............................................................... 259, 519 WORKPIECE COORDINATE OFFSET
T FUNCTION STROBE 1 to 4 .................................................. 203, 518 MEASUREMENT TOOL NO./SELECTED TOOL NO.................. 487
TAP RETRACT ................................................................................380
TAP RETRACT POSSIBLE ..............................................................212 X
TAPE MODE ....................................................................................343
TEMPERATURE RISE .....................................................................507 Y
TEMPERATURE WARNING CAUSE ...............................................247
TOOL ALARM 1 ...............................................................................523 Z
TOOL ALARM 2 ...............................................................................523
TOOL CHANGE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION .....................207 ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION SET COMPLETED n-TH AXIS ....... 163
TOOL CHANGE RESET ..................................................................528 ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION SET
TOOL ESCAPE AND RETURN TRANSIT POINT DESIGNATION...392 ERROR COMPLETED n-TH AXIS..................................... 164
TOOL ESCAPE AND RETURN TRANSIT POINT ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION SET MODE n-TH AXIS................... 328
RECOGNITION COMPLETED...........................................205 ZERO POINT INITIALIZATION SET START n-TH AXIS.................. 329
TOOL GROUP LIFE OVER ..............................................................518 ZERO SPEED .................................................................................. 226
TOOL GROUP NO. DESIGNATION......................................... 524, 528
TOOL HANDLE FEED MODE ..........................................................381
TOOL I/D R/W POT NO. DESIGNATION .........................................455
TOOL IC EXCHANGE READ ...........................................................302
TOOL IC NEW READ.......................................................................302
TOOL ID COMMUNICATION ERROR INFORMATION....................248
TOOL ID DATA ERASE ...................................................................314
TOOL ID DATA READ......................................................................314
TOOL ID DATA WRITE ....................................................................314
TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION ALONG THE TOOL AXIS
COMPENSATION AMOUNT CHANGE MODE ..................394
TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT 1.................................................357
TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT 2.................................................357
TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT 2 TOOL NO................................488
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA SORT .......................................524
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT INPUT .................................................523
TOOL LIFE OVER.................................................................... 517, 525
TOOL LIFE USAGE DATA ....................................................... 519, 527
TOOL MOUNTING INFORMATION m .............................................488
TOOL PRESETTER SUB-SIDE VALID ............................................409
TOOL WEIGHT (Spindle tool) ..........................................................455
TOOL WEIGHT (Standby tool) .........................................................456
TOOL-SKIP ......................................................................................527
X-5
Revision History
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details
Jul. 2004 IB(NA)1500001-B First edition created.
Mar. 2005 IB(NA)1500001-C Unnecessary explanation was deleted.
The following sections were added and explanation for the related signals was
compiled.
・6.6.4 Tool life management interface (M system)
・6.6.5 Tool life management interface (L system)
・6.6.7 External search
・6.6.8 PLC window
Items related to interface signal were added/deleted/revised.
Nov. 2005 IB(NA)1500001-D Contents were revised to correspond to Mitsubishi CNC 700 Series
software version B5.
The following sections were added.

・2.6 Outline of I/O assignment with PROFIBUS-DP
・6.6.9 Pallet program registration
・6.6.10 Chopping
・Index
Addition/deletion/revision was made according to the specifications.
Nov. 2006 IB(NA)1500001-E Mistakes were corrected.
Aug. 2007 IB(NA)1500001-F Contents were revised to correspond to Mitsubishi CNC 700/70 Series
software version E2.
The following sections were added.

・6.6.11 Circular feed in manual mode
・6.6.12 Manual speed command
・6.6.13 Arbitrary reverse run
・6.6.14 PLC axis indexing
Addition/deletion/revision was made according to the specifications.
Mar. 2010 IB(NA)1500001-G Mistakes were corrected.

Global Service Network
AMERICA EUROPE
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION INC. ( AMERICA FA CENTER) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. (EUROPE FA CENTER)
Central Region Service Center GOTHAER STRASSE 10, 40880 RATINGEN, GERMANY
500 CORPORATE WOODS PARKWAY, VERNON HILLS, IL., 60061, U.S.A. TEL: +49-2102-486-0 / FAX: +49-2102-486-5910
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650
Germany Service Center
Western Michigan Service Satellite KURZE STRASSE. 40, 70794 FILDERSTADT-BONLANDEN, GERMANY
ALLEGAN, MICHIGAN., 49010, U.S.A. TEL: + 49-711-3270-010 / FAX: +49-711-3270-0141
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-269-673-4092
France Service Center
Ohio Service Satellite 25, BOULEVARD DES BOUVETS, 92741 NANTERRE CEDEX FRANCE
LIMA, OHIO, 45801, U.S.A. TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650
France (Lyon) Service Satellite
Minnesota Service Satellite 120, ALLEE JACQUES MONOD 69800 SAINT PRIEST
RICHFIELD, MINNESOTA, 55423, U.S.A. TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650
Italy Service Center
Western Region Service Center VIALE COLLEONI 7-PALAZZO SIRIO CENTRO DIREZIONALE COLLEONI,
5665 PLAZA DRIVE, CYPRESS, CALIFORNIA, 90630, U.S.A. 20041 AGRATE BRIANZA MILANO ITALY
TEL: +1-714-220-4796 / FAX: +1-714-229-3818 TEL: +39-039-60531-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206
Eastern Region Service Center Italy (Padova) Service Sattelite

200 COTTONTAIL LANE SOMERSET, NEW JERSEY, 08873, U.S.A. VIA SAVELLI 24 - 35129 PADOVA ITALY
TEL: +1-732-560-4500 / FAX: +1-732-560-4531 TEL: +39-039-60531-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206
Western Pennsylvania Service Satellite U.K. Service Center

ERIE, PENNSYLVANIA, 16510, U.S.A. TRAVELLERS LANE, HATFIELD, HERTFORDSHIRE, AL10 8XB, U.K.
TEL: +1-814-897-7820 / FAX: +1-814-987-7820 TEL: +44-1707-27-6100 / FAX: +44-1707-27-8992
Southern Region Service Center Spain Service Center

2810 PREMIERE PARKWAY SUITE 400, DULUTH, GEORGIA, 30097, U.S.A. CTRA. DE RUBI, 76-80-APDO. 420
TEL: +1-678-258-4500 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519 08190 SAINT CUGAT DEL VALLES, BARCELONA SPAIN
TEL: +34-935-65-2236 / FAX: +34-935-89-1579
Northern Texas Service Satellite
1000, NOLEN DRIVE SUITE 200, GRAPEVINE, TEXAS, 76051, U.S.A. Poland Service Center
TEL: +1-817-251-7468 / FAX: +1-817-416-5000 UL.KRAKOWSKA 50, 32-083 BALICE, POLAND
TEL: +48-12-630-4700 / FAX: +48-12-630-4727
Southern Texas Service Satellite
FRIENDSWOOD, TEXAS, 77546, U.S.A Poland (Wroclaw) Service Center
TEL: +1-832-573-0787 / FAX: +1-678-573-8290 UL KOBIERZYCKA 23,52-315 WROCLAW,POLAND
TEL: +48-71-333-77-53 / FAX: +48-71-333-77-53
Central Florida Service Satellite
SATELITE BEACH, FLORIDA, 32937, U.S.A. Turkey Service Center
TEL : +1-321-610-4436 / FAX : +1-321-610-4437 BAYRAKTAR BULVARI, NUTUK SOKAK NO:5, YUKARI DUDULLU
ISTANBUL, TURKEY
Canadian Region Service Center TEL: +90-216-526-3990 / FAX: +90-216-526-3995
4299 14TH AVENUE MARKHAM, ONTARIO, L3R OJ2, CANADA
TEL: +1-905-475-7728 / FAX: +1-905-475-7935 Czech Republic Service Center
TECHNOLOGICKA 374/6,708 00 OSTRAVA-PUSTKOVEC, CZECH REPUBLIC
Mexico City Service Center TEL: +420-59-5691-185 / FAX: +420-59-5691-199
MARIANO ESCOBEDO 69 TLALNEPANTLA, 54030 EDO. DE MEXICO
TEL: +52-55-9171-7662 / FAX: +52-55-9171-7649 Russia Service Center
213, B.NOVODMITROVSKAYA STR., 14/2, 127015 MOSCOW, RUSSIA
Monterrey Service Satellite TEL: +7-495-748-0191 / FAX: +7-495-748-0192
ARGENTINA 3900, FRACC. LAS TORRES, MONTERREY, N.L., 64720, MEXICO
TEL: +52-81-8365-4171 / FAX: +52-81-8365-4171 Sweden Service Center
STRANDKULLEN, 718 91 FROVI, SWEDEN
Brazilian Service Center TEL: +46-581-700-20 / FAX: +46-581-700-75
ACESSO JOSE SARTORELLI, KM 2.1 CEP 18550-000, BOITUVA-SP, BRAZIL
TEL: +55-15-3363-9900 / FAX: +55-15-3363-9911 Bulgaria Service Center
4 A. LYAPCHEV BOUL., 1756 - SOFIA, BULGARIA
Brazilian's Sites Service Center TEL: +359-2-8176000 / FAX: +359-2-9744061
CITIES OF PORTO ALEGRE AND CAXIAS DO SUL BRAZIL
CITIES OF SANTA CATARINA AND PARANA STATES Ukraine (Kharkov) Service Center
TEL: +55-15-3363-9927 APTEKARSKIY PEREULOK 9-A, OFFICE 3, 61001 KHARKOV, UKRAINE
TEL: +38-57-732-7744 / FAX: +38-57-731-8721
Ukraine (Kiev) Service Center

4-B, M. RASKOVOYI STR., 02660 KIEV, UKRAINE
TEL: +38-044-494-3355 / FAX: +38-044-494-3366
Belarus Service Center

703, OKTYABRSKAYA STR., 16/5, 220030 MINSK, BELARUS
TEL: +375-17-210-4626 / FAX: +375-17-227-5830
South Africa Service Center

P.O. BOX 9234, EDLEEN, KEMPTON PARK GAUTENG, 1625 SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: + +27-11-394-8512 / FAX: +27-11-394-8513
ASEAN CHINA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE. LTD. (ASEAN FA CENTER) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (SHANGHAI) LTD. (CHINA FA CENTER)
Singapore Service Center China (Shanghai) Service Center
307 ALEXANDRA ROAD #05-01/02 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BUILDING SINGAPORE 159943 4/F ZHI FU PLAZA, NO. 80 XIN CHANG ROAD,
TEL: +65-6473-2308 / FAX: +65-6476-7439 SHANGHAI 200003,CHINA
TEL: +86-21-2322-3030 / FAX: +86-21-2322-2800
Indonesia Service Center 　　　China (Ningbo) Service Dealer
WISMA NUSANTARA 14TH FLOOR JL. M.H. THAMRIN 59, JAKARTA 10350 INDONESIA 　　　China (Wuxi) Service Dealer
TEL: +62-21-3917-144 / FAX: +62-21-3917-164 　　　China (Jinan) Service Dealer
Malaysia (KL) Service Center China (Beijing) Service Center

60, JALAN USJ 10 /1B 47620 UEP SUBANG JAYA SELANGOR DARUL EHSAN, MALAYSIA 9/F, OFFICE TOWER 1, HENDERSON CENTRE, 18 JIANGUOMENNEI AVENUE
TEL: +60-3-5631-7605 / FAX: +60-3-5631-7636 DONGCHENG DISTRICT, BEIJING, CHINA 100005
TEL: +86-10-6518-8830 / FAX: +86-10-6518-8030
Malaysia (Johor Baru) Service Center 　　　China (Beijing) Service Dealer
No. 16, JALAN SHAH BANDAR 1, TAMAN UNGKU TUN AMINAH, 81300 SKUDAI, JOHOR MALAYSIA
TEL: +60-7-557-8218 / FAX: +60-7-557-3404 China (Tianjin) Service Center
B-2-801-802, YOUYI BUILDING. 50 YOUYI ROAD, HEXI DISTRICT
Vietnam Service Center-1 TIANJIN, CHINA 300061
47-49 HOANG SA ST. DAKAO WARD, DIST. 1, HO CHI MINH CITY, VIETNAM TEL: +86-22-2813-1015 / FAX: +86-22-2813-1017
TEL: +84-8-910-4763 / FAX: +84-8-910-2593 China (Shenyang) Service Satellite
Vietnam Service Center-2 China (Chengdu) Service Center

THUAN KIEN PLAZA 190 HONG BANG ROAD.TOWER C. SUITE 3002. DIST.5, BLOCK B-1, 23F, CHUAN XIN MANSION, 18 SECTION 2
HO CHI MINH CITY,VIETNAM RENMIN ROAD (SOUTH), CHENGDU, SICHUAN, CHINA 610016
TEL: +84-8-240-3587 / FAX: +84-8-726-7968 TEL: +86-28-8619-9730 / FAX: +86-28-8619-9805
Vietnam (Hanoi) Service Center China (Changchun) Service Satellite

5TH FL., 93B KIM LIEN ST., PHUONG LIEN WARD, DONG DA DIST. BING 3RD ROAD., INDUSTRIAL&ECONOMICAL DEVELOPMENT ZONE, CHAOYANG DISTRICT
HN, VIETNAM TEL : +86-0431-5021-546 / FAX : +86-0431-5021-690
TEL: +84-8-573-7646 / FAX: +84-4-573-7650
China (Shenzhen) Service Center
Philippines Service Center ROOM 2512-2516, GREAT CHINA INTERNATIOANL EXCHANGE SQUARE, JINTIAN RD.S.,
UNIT No.411, ALABAMG CORPORATE CENTER KM 25. WEST SERVICE ROAD FUTIAN DISTRICT, SHENZHEN, CHINA 518034
SOUTH SUPERHIGHWAY, ALABAMG MUNTINLUPA METRO MANILA, PHILIPPINES 1771 TEL: +86-755-2399-8272 / FAX: +86-755-8218-4776
TEL: +63-2-807-2416 / FAX: +63-2-807-2417
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (THAILAND) CO., LTD. (THAILAND FA CENTER) KOREA

BANG-CHAN INDUSTRIAL ESTATE No.111 SOI SERITHAI 54
T.KANNAYAO, A.KANNAYAO, BANGKOK 10230, THAILAND MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION KOREA CO., LTD. (KOREA FA CENTER)
TEL: +66-2906-8255 / FAX: +66-2906-3239 Korea Service Center
1480-6, GAYANG-DONG, GANGSEO-GU SEOUL 157-200 ,KOREA
Thailand Service Center TEL: +82-2-3660-9602 / FAX: +82-2-3664-8668
898/19,20,21,22 S.V. CITY BUILDING OFFICE TOWER 1 FLOOR 7
RAMA III RD BANGPONGPANG,YANNAWA,BANGKOK 10120. THAILAND Korea Taegu Service Satellite
TEL: +66-2-682-6522 / FAX: +66-2-682-9750 603 CRYSTAL BUILDING 1666, SANBYEOK-DONG, BUK-KU, DAEGU, 702-010, KOREA
TEL: +82-53-604-6047 / FAX: +82-53-604-6049
INDIA
TAIWAN
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PVT LTD
FIRST & SECOND FLOOR, AVR BASE, MUNICIPAL No.BC-308, MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TAIWAN CO., LTD(TAIWAN FA CENTER)
HENNURE BANASWADI ROAD, HRBR RING ROAD, BANGALORE-560 043,INDIA TAIWAN (Taichung) Service Center
TEL: +91-80-4020-1600 / FAX: +91-80-4020-1699 No.8-1, GONG YEH 16TH RD., TAICHUNG INDUSTRIAL PARK TAICHUNG CITY, TAIWAN R.O.C
TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 / FAX: +886-4-2359-0689
India (Pune) Service Center
EL-3, J BLOCK, M.I.D.C., BHOSARI PUNE 411026, INDIA TAIWAN (Taipei) Service Center
TEL: +91-20-2710-2000 / FAX: +91-20-2710-2185 3TH. FLOOR, No.122 WUKUNG 2ND RD., WU-KU HSIANG, TAIPEI HSIEN, TAIWAN R.O.C
TEL: +886-2-2299-2205 / FAX: +886-2-2298-1909
India (Bangalore) Service Center
S 615, 6TH FLOOR, MANIPAL CENTER, BANGALORE 560001, INDIA TAIWAN (Tainan) Service Center
TEL: +91-80-509-2119 / FAX: +91-80-532-0480 2F(C),1-1, CHUNGHWA-RD, YONGKANG CITY, TAINAN HSIEN, TAIWAN R.O.C
TEL: +886-6-313-9600 / FAX: +886-6-313-7713
India (Delhi) Service Center
1197, SECTOR 15 PART-2, OFF DELHI-JAIPUR HIGHWAY BEHIND 32nd MILESTONE
GURGAON 122001, INDIA
TEL: +91-98-1024-8895
OCEANIA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUSTRALIA LTD.

Oceania Service Center
348 VICTORIA ROAD, RYDALMERE, N.S.W. 2116 AUSTRALIA
Notice
Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the
contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some
unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible.
Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments
regarding the use of this product.
Duplication Prohibited
This manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written
permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
© 2004-2010 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

700/70 Series PLC Interface Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

700/70 Series PLC Interface Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MELDAS is registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

Details described in this manual

When there is a great risk that the user could be subject to

When the user could be subject to fatalities or serious injuries if

When the user could be subject to injuries or when physical

Expansion DIO card

Manual pulse RIO1

Sensor Remote I/O unit

2.1 Relation of RIO Unit and Devices

Front Front Outline drawing

Left input Right input

(2) Rotary switch (2) Rotary switch Rotary switch (5)

(4) Left output (4)

DX10* DX11* /DX12*

(8) Analog input/

2.1.1 DIO Specification Setting Switch

DIO specification setting switch

2.1.2 Rotary Switch for Channel No. Setting

Rotary switch for channel No. setting (2) (5)

Set between 0 and 7.

No. of points occupied by each unit

No. of Unit name

2.1.3 Relation of Connector Pins and Device

(1) Input (DI) signal

Set rotary switch to 0 Set rotary switch to 1

B01 pin A01 pin 5 X0F X1F 5 X2F X3F

Connection for contact common=GND (sink type)

Connection for contact common=DC+24V (source type)

(2) Output (DO) signal

Set rotary switch to 0 Set rotary switch to 1

Connection for contact common=GND (sink type)

Connection for contact common=DC+24V (source type)

2.2 Outline of Digital Signal Input Circuit

Input circuit (Machine side) (3)/(6)

(Machine side) (3)/(6)

Constantly closed contact

Source type <Contact common +24V>

2.3 Outline of Digital Signal Output Circuit

Sink type (DX1*0)

Source type (DX1*0)

Insulation method Non-insulating

2.4 Outline of Analog Signal Input Circuit

Input circuit (8) FCUA-DX14*

2.5 Outline of Analog Signal Output Circuit

Output voltage 0V to ±10V (±5%)

2.6 Outline of I/O Assignment with PROFIBUS-DP

HN571 unit for

Windows PC for parameter settings

Master + slave: 128 units

Fieldbus connection outline

Machine input/output signal allocation

2.7 Fixed Signals

Signal name Device Signal name Device

2.7.1 Ignoring Fixed Signals

2.7.2 Changing the Addresses of Fixed Signals

2.8 Flow of Signals

Machine/machine operation board

Transfer at head of high-speed

2.9 List of Devices Used

The devices used by the PLC are shown below.

2.10 File Register General Map

3. INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS WITH MACHINE

How to Read Input/Output Signal Table

The method of reading the input/output signal table is shown below.